Understanding ASTM 335 P11 Applications & Weldabilityt Rev1

Understanding ASTM 335 P11
Applications & Weldability

Muhd. Ramli Ahmad Bahri
API570, API510 Authorized Inspector, SCWI/ SCWIP 3.2
Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong

Process Piping

Process Piping

Process Piping

ASTMA335P11Pipe Bundles

ASTM A335 Chrome Moly Pipe
Seamless Ferritic Alloy Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Service
Chromium-Molybdenum low alloy steels are resistant to erosion and corrosion. ASTM A335 low
alloy steel is widely used in many industries such as petrochemicals, electric power plants, and
nuclear power plants 1).Cr-Mo low-alloy steels can be employed at high service temperatures
with good creep strength.
ASTM A335 Pipe (ASME S/A335, Chrome-Moly) is a seamless ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for high
temperature service. Pipe ordered to this specification shall be suitable for bending, flanging, and
similar forming operations, and for fusion welding. Sometimes referred to as “P Grade”, chome
moly pipe is popular in P-Grades P5, P9, P11, P22, and P91.
ASTM A335-P11, the P11 is not P-Number11in ASME Section IX. This is 1.25%Cr - 0.5%Mo
Steel, which is Group P-Number 3.
The most common use of grades:

Power Ping B31.1: P11, P22, and P91
Petro-chemical B31.3: P5 and P9.
A335 is often called chrome moly pipe because of the chemical makeup of Molybdenum (Mo)
and Chromium (Cr).

ASTM A335-P11, the P11 is not
P-Number11 in ASME Section IX.
This is 1.25%Cr - 0.5%Mo Steel,
which is Group P-Number 3.
Molybdenum increases the strength of steel as well as the elastic limit, resistance to wear,
impact qualities, and improve hardenability. Moly increases the resistance to softening, restrains
grain growth and makes chromium moly steel less susceptible to embrittlement. Moly is the most
effective single additive that increases high temperature creep strength. It also enhances the
corrosion resistance of steel, and inhibits pitting. Increase temperature strength and improve
weldability in certain situations

Chromium (or chrome) is the essential constituent of stainless steel. Any steel with 12% or
more Chrome is considered stainless. Chrome is virtually irreplaceable in resisting oxidation at
elevated temperatures. Chrome raises the tensile, yield, and hardness at room temperatures.
The composition chrome moly alloy steel pipe make it ideal for use in power plants, refineries,
petro chemical plants, and oil field services where fluids and gases are transported at extremely
high temperatures and pressures.

The Cr content improves its
anti-oxidization and anti-corrosion
ability, and Mo enhances its strength in
high temperature condition

Commonly used Grades:
Grades: P-5, P-9, P-11, P-22, and P-91
Other Grades:
Chemical Composition:
http://www.klsteel.com/sdp/229183/4/pd-1029274/2044892-2443082/ASTM_A335_ASME_SA335_P5_P9_P11_P12_P22_P91_CHROME.html

 *The UNS designation is established in accordance with Practice E527, and SAE J 1086 –
Practice for numbering metals and alloys.
 *All values are the maximum unless a range is furnished.
 *A – 4 times of Carbon≤Titanium≤0.70% or Columbium:8 times of Carbon~10 times of Carbon.
 *B – V:0.20-0.30, Cb:0.02-0.08, B: 0.0010-0.006, N:≤0.0015, Al:≤0.030, W:1.45-1.75, Ni:≤0.40,

Ti: 0.005-0.060, Ti/N:≥3.5.
 *C – Ni:1.00-1.30, Cu:0.50-0.80, Cb:0.015-0.045, V:≤0.02, N:≤0.02, Al:≤0.050.
 *D – V:0.18-0.25, N:0.030-0.070, Ni:≤0.40, Al:≤0.02, Cb:0.06-0.10, Ti:≤0.01, Zr:≤0.01.
 *E – V:0.15-0.25, N:0.03-0.07, Ni:≤0.40, Al:≤0.02, Cb:0.04-0.09, W:1.5-2.0, B:0.001-0.006,

Ti:≤0.01, Zr:≤0.01.
 *F – V:0.15-0.30, W:1.30-2.50, Cu:0.30-1.70, Cb:0.04-0.10, B:0.0005-0.005, N:0.040-0.1,

Ni:≤0.5, Al:≤0.02, (Ti&Zr):≤0.01.
 *G – V:0.18-0.25, Ni:≤0.40, Cb:0.060-0.10, B:0.0003-0.006, N:0.04-0.09, Al:≤0.02, W:0.90-1.10,

Ti:≤0.01, Zr:≤0.01.

Mechanical Properties
Grade P11, P22, P5, P9 Grade P91
Tensile strength, min, psi, (MPa) 60,000 (415) 85,000 (585)

Yield strength, min, (MPa) 30.000 (205) 60,000 (415)
Elongation % (L/T) 30*/20* 20*
Muhd. Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.fedsteel.com/products/alloy-pipe-and-tube/astm-a335-chrome-moly-pipe.html

Mechanical Properties
Grade P11, P22, P5, P9 Grade P91
Tensile strength, min, psi, (MPa) 60,000 (415) 85,000 (585)

Yield strength, min, (MPa) 30.000 (205) 60,000 (415)
Reasoning on Grade P91
Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.fedsteel.com/products/alloy-pipe-and-tube/astm-a335-chrome-moly-pipe.html

Mechanical Properties: Tensile, Yield, Elongation & Hardness

Material & Manufacture
Pipe may be either hot finished or cold drawn with the finishing heat treatment noted
below.
Heat Treatment
A / N+T
N+T / Q+T
N+T
Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://fsapexsteel.com/ASTM-A335-P11-alloy-steel-pipe.html

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.amerpipe.com/products/chrome-moly-pipe/a335-spec-sheet/
Heat Treatment and Delivery Conditions
ASTM A335 pipes may be either hot finished or cold drawn with finishing treatment
listed below:
 Pipes of all grades of ASTM A335 except P5c, P23, P91, P92, P122, and P911
shall be reheated, and furnished in the full-annealed, isothermal annealed, or
normalized and tempered condition.
The minimum tempering temperature for grades:

P5, P5b, P9, P21, and P22 shall be 1250°F (675°C),
P1, P2, P11, P12, and P15 shall be 1200°F (650°C).
It is recommended that the temperature for tempering should be at least 100°F (50°C)
above the intended service temperature; consequently, the purchaser should advise
the manufacturer if the service temperature is to be over 1100°F (600°C)..
Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.metalspiping.com/astm-a335-seamless-ferritic-alloy-steel-pipe.html

 Grades P1, P2, and P12, either hot finished or cold drawn, may be given a final
heat treatment at 1200°F (650°C) to 1300°F (705°C) instead of heat treatments
above-mentioned.
 Grades P5c shall be given a final heat treatment in the range from 1325°F (715°C)
to 1375°F (745°C).
 Grades P92 & P911 shall be normalized at 1900°F (1040°C) minimum and
tempered at 1350°F (730°C) minimum as a final heat treatment.
 Grade P122 shall be normalized at 1900°F (1040°C) minimum, and tempered at
1350°F (730°C) minimum as a final heat treatment.
 Grade P23 shall be normalized at 1900°F (1040°C) minimum with air cooling or
accelerated cooling and tempered at 1350°F (730°C) minimum as a final heat
treatment.
 Grades P91 shall be normalized at 1900°F (1040°C) minimum, and tempered at
1350°F (730°C) minimum as a final heat treatment. Alternatively, liquid
quenching and tempering is allowed for thicknesses above 3 inch when mutually
agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser. In this case the pipe
shall be quenched from 1900°F (1040°C) minimum and tempered at 1350°F
(730°C) minimum as final heat treatment.
Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.metalspiping.com/astm-a335-seamless-ferritic-alloy-steel-pipe.html

Mechanical Tests Specified
Transverse or Longitudinal Tension Test and
Flattening Test,
Hardness Test, or
Bend Test
For material heat treated in a batch-type furnace, tests shall be made on 5% of the
pipe from each treated lot. For small lots, at least one pipe shall be tested.
For material heat treated by the continuous process, tests shall be made on a
sufficient number of pipe to constitute 5% of the lot, but in no case less than 2 pipe.
Notes for Hardness Test:

P11 shall not have a hardness not exceeding 250 HB/265 HV [25HRC].
Additional Testing :
NACE MR0175, NACE TM0177, NACE TM0284, HIC TEST, SSC TEST, H2
SERVICE, IBR, etc

Notes for Bend Test:
For pipe whose diameter exceeds NPS 25 and whose diameter to wall thickness ratio
is 7.0 or less shall be subjected to the bend test instead of the flattening test.
Other pipe whose diameter equals or exceeds NPS 10 may be given the bend test in
place of the flattening test subject to the approval of the purchaser.
The bend test specimens shall be bent at room temperature through 180 without
cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
Diameter to wall
t thickness ratio (D/t)

Inspection and Test:
Chemical Composition Inspection, Mechanical Properties Test (Tensile Strength, Yield
Strength, Elongation, Flaring, Flattening, Bending, Hardness, Impact Test), Surface
and Dimension Test, No-destructive Test, Hydrostatic Test.

ASTM A335 P11

ASTM A335 P11
The material P11 is particularly suitable as pipe material for superheater tubes, steam
line and headers. Can be used in continuous operation to about 560 °C wall
temperature.
Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.s-k-h.com/media/de/Service/Werkstoffblaetter_englisch/Kesselrohre_ASTM/P11_T11_engl.pdf

ASTM A335 P11
The material P11 is particularly suitable as pipe material for superheater tubes, steam
line and headers. Can be used in continuous operation to about 560 °C wall
temperature.

ASTM A335 P11
The material P11 is particularly
suitable as pipe material for
superheater tubes, steam line
and headers. Can be used in
continuous operation to about
560°C wall temperature.

Forming & Heat Treatment
Hot Forming 1100-950°C/ Air Cool
Heat Treatment:
Austenization: 920-980°C
Annealing: 680-760°C
Microstructure: Bainitic/Ferritic
Processing / Welding
Preheat 200°C
Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.energy-tech.com/ram/article_37ae8786-2088-5536-b5f9-13f3d95dbdec.html

Welding of ASTM A335 P11

Fig. 1. Optical micrographs of A335 low alloy steel.
Source: http://research.iaun.ac.ir/pd/kasiri/pdfs/PaperM_9532.pdf

Welding of ASTM A335 P11
ASTM A335 P11 (1¼ Cr ½ Mo Creep Resistance Steel for elevated services) is a
ferritic low alloy steel grade for high temperature service with deliberate addition of
chromium and molybdenum. It has good creep strength at 450°C-550°C. However,
there are some major challenges during its welding process including the hardening of
heat-affected zone, cold cracks, PWHT, as well as hot cracks in service.
Applications
These consumables are designed for prolonged elevated temperature service up to
550°C. Main areas of application are associated with steam generating power plant,
e.g. piping, turbine castings, steam chests, valve bodies and boiler superheaters.
Some will also find service in refineries where they are used for corrosion resistance to
Sulphur bearing crude oil at 250-450°C, also find applications in the chemical and
petro-chemical industries where they are used for resistance to hydrogen attack in the
fabrication of hydrocrackers, coal liquefaction plant and NH3 pressure vessels
operating at up to 450°C.
In the as welded condition the consumables also provide a useful source of 300HV
hardness weld deposit for build-up or hard surfacing to resist metal-to-metal wear and
heavy impact.
Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.metalspiping.com/the-welding-process-of-astm-a335-p11-pipes-01.html

Typical Material Compositions
 Its mechanical properties has been measured by test: yield strength-347 MPa,
tensile strength -482MPa, Elongation-22%.
 The carbon equivalent shall be calculated as per CE =
C+Mn/6+(Cr+Mo+V)/5+(Si+Ni+Cu)/15 the result of which is 0.586%.
 The cold cracking susceptibility index Pcm =
C+Si/30+(Mn+Cu+Cr)/20+Ni/60+Mo/15+V/10+5B is 0.24%.
Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.metalspiping.com/the-welding-process-of-astm-a335-p11-pipes-01.html

Filler Metal Selection for ASTM A335 P11 Pipes
In light of “filler metal matching base metal” principle, welding wire ER80S-B2 and
welding electrode E8018-B2 are selected. See the chemical composition and
mechanical properties of the two filler metals listed below:

Typical Bevel

The ASTM A335 P11 seamless pipes shall be preheated before welding by
electromagnetic coils. Its preheating area and positioning are illustrated below. The
preheating temperature shall be controlled between 200°C and 250°C and hold for at
least 30 minutes before welding.
Welding guidelines
Preheat and interpass
temperature 200°C
minimum, up
to 300°C for thick
sections. Maintain
throughout
welding cycle and some
time after completion of
welding.

Welding Process and Welding Parameters
Gas Tungsten Arc Welding(GTAW) is employed to produce the the preliminary welding
seam between two ASTM A335 P11 pipes and manual arc welding(SMAW) should be
conducted to fully cover the welding area. The flow rate of argon gas during welding is
10 L per minute. The interpass temperature shall be controlled between 200°C and
250°C. When the welding seam is higher than 15 mm or the welding is finished, a 300-
350°C post-heating (hydrogen bake out) shall be implemented holding for at least 30
minutes. After welding area cools off, a post-welding heat treatment(PWHT) is
conducted to relieve the stress by heating to 600-675°C and holding for 2.5 hours.
PWHT
Apart from some special applications, PWHT will always be required. PWHT
temperature is typically 690°C with time being dependent on section thickness.
http://www.oxide.co.il/pdf/A-12_1Cr-Mo_rev_12.pdf
The the preheating of PWHT shall be conducted in accordance with the following
points: heating temperature[600~675°C], heating rate[95 °C/h], preservation time[2.5
hours], cooling rate[110 °C/h], heating-width[L≥600 mm]. After post-weld heat
treatment, the hardness of welding seam and heat-affected zones shall be no greater
than 225 HB.

Typical Welding Processes
ASME IX Qualification QW432 F-No 4, QW442 A-No 3
MMA AWS E8018-B2

TIG/MIG AWS ER80S-B2
SAW AWS EB2
FCAW AWS E81T1-B2

Figure 2: Microstructure - After PWHT, the microstructure consists of tempered
bainite.
The microstructure of the welding seam of ASTM A335 P11 pipes which consists of tempered bainite.

The welding of ASTM A335 P11 seamless pipes: preheating.

Table U and Table Y-1 of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D.

Piping materials of ASTM A335 P11 can be used in both process piping and power
piping services. The correlation between its allowable stress and temperature must be
considered. Usually, the basic allowable stress descends as the working temperature
ascends. This relationship is dictated ans specified by ASME B31.1 and ASME B31.3
respectively both of which are ASME code for pressure piping. ASME B31.1 is the
standard specification for power piping while ASME B31.3 is the standard specification
for process piping. Generally, ASME B31.1 imposes more rigorous constraints on the
limits of allowable stresses and temperatures of A335 P11 materials than ASME
B31.3.

or piping typically
Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.metalspiping.com/astm-a335-p11-allowable-stress-temperature-ratings.html

ASTM A335 P11 Seamless Pipe
The seamless pipe of ASTM A335 P11 is a typical Cr-Mo alloy steel pipe for high-
temperature service. Also known as 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, the UNS designation of ASTM
A335 P11 is K11597. Its ASTM equivalent includes ASTM A369 FP11 as well as ASTM
A213 T11. Usually, the pipe shall be furnished with either butt welding(BW) or plain
ends(PE).
1. Chemical Composition Requirements

2. Mechanical Properties of ASTM A335 P11
The tensile strength shall be no less than 60 ksi (415MPa) while its yield strength shall
be no less than 30 ksi (205MPa). The longitudinal and transverse elongation values
measured in 2 inch or 50 mm (or 4D) shall be no less than 30% and 20% respectively.
3. Heat Treatment, Inspection & Test
Pipes of ASTM A335 P11 may be either cold drawn or hot rolled. Each pipe shall be
reheated for heat treatment – full or isothermal annealing, normalizing and tempering
at a temperature no less than 1200°F(650°C).
Hydrostatic test shall be performed on each pipe length of ASTM A335 P11 along with
dimensional inspection and visual examination. Longitudinal or transverse tension test,
flattening test, or bend test shall be performed for each heat number of furnace. When
specified by the purchaser, one of the alternative nondestructive tests can be
performed: ultrasonic test, eddy current test, or flux leakage examination. Hardness
test is not necessary.

Which ASTM A335?
Let’s start with the basics.
ASME SA335 / ASTM A335 , Chrome-Moly pipe is a seamless ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe
produced in nominal or minimum wall thickness for high temperature service. Pipe
ordered to this specification shall be suitable for bending, flanging, similar forming
operations and for fusion welding.
Chrome Moly products are named so due to the presence of the two elements
Molybdenum (Mo) and Chromium (Cr).
Cr raises the properties of tensile, yield and hardness (at room ambient temperatures)
making it ideal for combatting oxidation in high temperature services.
Mo is known, amongst other attributes, to improve the hardenability, reduce
brittleness, strengthen the elastic limit, increase temperature strength and improve
weldability in certain situations.
Sometimes referred to as “P Grade” materials, chrome moly pipe comes in more than
17 grades with the most widely used P-Grades being P5, P9, P11, P22 and P91.
Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.tiogapipe.com/assets/files/Issue2-Why-Tioga.pdf

It is commonly known that SA335/A335 material is extensively used in a variety of
plants & processes across the globe including refineries, power plants, petro-chemical
plants, hydrocrackers, cokers, high and super high temperature lines, reheat lines,
distillation, oil field services, etc. In general, the most commonly used P grades in
refineries are P5 & P9. The most commonly used P grades in the power generation
industry and petro-chemical plants are P11, P22 & P91. A quick perusal, however, of
what appears to be similarly designed facilities will result in findings that they do not
necessarily use the same piping specifications. For example, there are many different
designs and piping systems in what be generically called a “natural gas processing
plant”.
The ASME Code has issued guidelines on boiler and power piping design,
manufacturing and fabrication, but there is no hard and fast rule for which grade
applies when and where.

Within the ASTM standards, let’s compare the titles of both the A106B and A335
specifications. The A106 specification is entitled “Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for
High-Temperature Service” and the A335 specification is entitled “Seamless Ferritic
Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service”. So let’s explore why ever one would
select or prefer chrome moly over carbon (or vice-versa) and if it is chrome moly,
which grades are then decided upon?
Modern power boilers can operate at over 5,000psi and at temperatures greater than
1,000 degrees Fahrenheit. ASME Section II contains tables of all the approved grades
(like SA106) and what is the allowable design stress at elevated temperatures for
various applications. SA106 Gr. B tops out at 1,000 degrees Fahrenheit and at those
high temperatures it has little strength. So what is a designer to do when high
temperature or high pressure needs are designed in but heavier walls are out of the
question? The possibility of using SA335/A335 - chrome moly pipe.

As the Cr (chrome) and molybdenum (moly) content are increased in the steel, the
allowable stress at higher temperature is increased dramatically. The more Cr and Mo
added (to a point), the stronger the steel will be. So a designer can decide, for
example, do I want to use a stronger material like P91 (9% Cr, 1% Mo and additional
alloying elements)1 with a thinner wall - or do I use a thicker wall pipe of lower
strength like P22 (2.3% Cr & 1% Mo) or even P11 (1.25% Cr & .55% Mo)?
According to the A335 standard, the selection “will depend upon design, service
conditions, mechanical properties and high-temperature characteristics". While
generally speaking the benefits of alloy steel pipe include its tensile strength, yield
strength, fatigue resistance, toughness and wear resistance, it is as discussed earlier
intended for high-temperature service and be suitable for various processes.
It is also worth noting that the SA335/A335 specification contains about 10 pages of
information reflecting the differing requirements between the chrome moly grades.
It takes a critical reading and understanding of the nuances of a specification to truly
understand it.

Each grade recognized under the specification can have differing requirements
making for a large variety of choices as the operating environment and fluids running
through the line may cover a gambit of erosion/corrosion, pressure, corrosion and
temperature variances. Furthermore, chemical compositional differences between
different grades that affect their physical properties (e.g., strength) are another factor
to comprehend. Physical properties of strength and the upper temperature limits are a
result of the increased chromium and molybdenum components mentioned above.
Ok, so that’s a lot of information, but where do we stand in answering the question?
Basically there are a throng of variables to consider and the answer resides entirely
with the designer or design engineer to make the selection of the material and grade
based on their design calculation outputs.

Many of the top questions design engineers need to consider to help them determine
which P grade to select are:
a) Physical properties of strength
b) Upper temperature limits
c) Allowable stress
d) Thermal fatigue and number of operating cycles
e) Number of and configuration of loops and bends
f) Resistance to creep
g) Compatibility resistance to creep
h) The selection of parts to be welded, welding procedures, welding quality assurance
and welding filler materials.
i) Hardness measurements
j) Pre heat temperatures and post weld heat treatment temperatures

k. Other significant variables include temperature of water or steam, pH, oxygen
content of fluid, quality of steam, flow velocity, quality of oxide layer on inner
surface of the pipe and chemical composition.
l. Fabrication time & costs
m. Weight considerations including pipe supports
n. Variety in the bill of materials- as steam proceeds through the turbine and piping
systems, the temperature and pressure decrease. This allows the designer to use
thinner walls - or lower grades - of pipe in different areas of the plant.
o. Availability & cost differentials between different grades; it generally makes more
sense to select an upgraded material when the upper margins of a range come into
play.
The decision of which P grade is not a simple one and rests solely on the shoulders of
the design engineers; hats off to them because as one can clearly see their jobs are
complicated and critical to the success of multi-million dollar decision-making.

Control of Tempered Embrittlement of Chrome Moly
Steel- The “X” Factor
What Does Low X-Factor Mean?
The Bruscato X-factor is a way to measure temper embrittlement resistance in applications where
the weld metal deposit may be exposed to high temperatures over a long period of time. Certain
residual elements (Phosphorus, Tin, Antimony, and Arsenic) migrate to grain boundaries over
time in these high temperature conditions, causing a loss of toughness. This is known as temper
embrittlement. The X-factor is a numerical value that is calculated based on levels of residual
elements in the weld deposit – lower x-factors represent lower levels of these tramp elements and
higher resistance to temper embrittlement. Many customer specifications in the pressure vessel
and petrochemical industry call for E8018-B2 or E9018-B3 electrodes with an X-factor of less
than 15.
Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.hobartbrothers.com/index.php?mact=News,cntnt01,print,0&cntnt01articleid=55&cntnt01showtemplate=false&cntnt01returnid=523

Bruscato factor (X-Factor)
Determining the X-factor also called the Bruscato factor of a weldment can
help prevent defects on several types of materials, but it is especially
important to consider when welding chrome-moly steel. This type of steel is
commonly used in high temperature applications due to its ability to maintain
its strength under such conditions. Additionally, the X-factor directly impacts
the filler metals that you should use for such applications. And while it may
seem intimidating to learn about at first, understanding and determining the X-
factor can help you avoid costly rework and downtime in the long term.

What is the X-factor?
The X-factor is a calculation or formula that measures a weldment's
resistance to temper embrittlement-a brittleness or loss of toughness that
occurs when the weldment is held (or slowly cooled) through a temperature
range of approximately 450 to 600°C. It is also an efficient and accurate
alternative to more expensive testing for this resistance, such as a creep
rupture test or a step-cooling test.
It is especially important to know the X-factor when welding certain chrome-

moly steels, such as those used for boilers, process piping, steam tubes, heat
exchangers, pressure vessels and similar applications that are subject to high
service temperatures for extended periods of time.
Typical grades of chrome-moly steel to which the X-factor is most relevant

include: ASTM A387 Grades, for example, 11, 21, 22 and 91.

The X-factor measures four elements:
 phosphorous (P),
 antimony (Sb),
 tin (Sn) and
 arsenic (As).
Each of these elements is commonly found (to a certain degree) in the steel
portion of filler metals, such as the outer strip of a tubular wire. Together the
elements have the greatest impact on a weldment's susceptibility to temper
embrittlement. At elevated temperatures over a period of time, these elements
tend to migrate to and accumulate in the grain boundaries of the weldment,
weakening its structure. This occurrence results in a loss of ductility and
toughness-and eventually causes temper embrittlement. Elements such as
silicon can also contribute this problem, but to a much lesser degree.

Making the Measurement
You can measure the X-factor through a simple formula that multiplies and adds each
of the four aforementioned elements in ppm, or parts per million. As long as you know
the chemistry of the filler metal that you are using, you will have access to the figures
needed to complete this calculation.
The formula to determine the X-factor is as follows:

X = (10P + 5Sb + 4Sn + As)/100
In this equation, ‘X' refers to X-factor; 10P refers to the amount of phosphorous in ppm
multiplied by 10; 5Sb refers to the amount of antimony in ppm multiplied by 5; 4Sn
refers to the amount of tin in ppm multiplied by 4; and As refers to the amount of
arsenic in ppm. Once all of these items are multiplied and added together, dividing that
amount by 100 provides you with the X-factor for your weldment.

Consider this example for a filler metal with the following amounts of phosphorous,
antimony, tin and arsenic measured in weight percent:
P = .007%
Sb = .004%
Sn = .001%
As = .0016%
To determine the X-factor, first, change each percentage to a decimal figure (for
example, .007/100 = .00007) and then multiply that figure by 1,000,000 to obtain the
ppm. For the phosphorous in this example, the conversion of .0007% results in 70
ppm.
The complete equation in this example would look like this:
X = [(10x70) + (5x40) + (4x10) + 16]/100
The X-factor for this weldment then would be 9.56 ppm

Typically, the goal when welding chrome-moly steel is to keep the X-factor at or below
15. Doing so ensures that you are controlling the amount of phosphorous, antimony,
tin and arsenic in the weldment and at the same time ensuring its toughness-or, even
more specifically, its resistance to temper embrittlement.
In recent years, there has even been a trend toward maintaining X-factor
specifications lower than 15. This trend is due in part to the use of chrome-moly steels
for increasingly higher service temperature applications; at higher temperatures, the
trace elements tend to migrate easier and can more readily lead to temper
embrittlement. High-temperature service applications in colder regions can also benefit
from having a lower X-factor, as it ensures better toughness and more resistance to
rupture, especially when the chrome-moly steel heats up to temperature.

Taking Control
Low alloy filler metals with a B“x” product class are specified for welding the grades of
chrome-moly steel most prone to temper embrittlement.
These product classes include B2, B3, B6, B8 and B9, each of which meets the
distinct chemical and mechanical properties for a given grade of chrome-moly steel
ranging from those with 1¼ percent chrome and ½ percent molybdenum all the way
up to 10½ percent chrome and 1 percent molybdenum. Each is also able to create
weldments that can withstand high temperature service conditions without rupturing.
To ensure their filler metals offer a relatively low X-factor and are able to resist temper
embrittlement, filler metal manufacturers must precisely monitor and control all of the
ingredients, and therefore, chemistries in their products. That includes paying close
attention to the steel that is used through solid wires, for the strip surrounding tubular
wires (flux-cored or metal-cored wires) and for the core wire within stick electrodes.
Having as pure of steel as possible for use in filler metals is especially important, as
phosphorous, antimony, tin and arsenic are all trace elements from raw steel.

Removing them completely from the steel making process is very expensive and
would make the end product-your filler metal-cost prohibitive.
Nonetheless, never assume that the filler metal you are using for your chrome-moly
applications can automatically control the X-factor in your weldment. Not all low alloy
filler metals for welding chrome-moly steel have an X-factor below 15, nor are they
required to meet this specification. If, however, your application requires temper
embrittlement control, remember to complete the X-factor calculation. And, if after
calculating the X-factor for your given filler metal, it is above 15, contact your welding
distributor or filler metal manufacturer for an alternative product.
Moving Forward
As with any aspect of the welding process, the more knowledge you have, the more
readily you'll be able to control your weld quality and overall welding performance.
Knowing what the X-factor is and how to calculate it is no exception. In fact, when
welding specific chrome-moly steel applications, you should consider the X-factor to
be a rule. Remember, while filler metals have the bulk of the impact on the X-factor of
your weldment, never assume that just because you purchase a product for welding
chrome-moly steel that it will have an X-factor below 15. Instead, do the math. It will
save you time, money and the frustration of unnecessary rework in the long run.

What is temper embrittlement, and how can it be
controlled?
Temper embrittlement refers to the decrease in notch toughness of alloy steels when
heated in, or cooled slowly through, a temperature range of 400°C to 600°C. Temper
embrittlement can also occur as a result of isothermal exposure to this temperature
range. The occurrence of temper embrittlement can be determined by measurement of
the change in the ductile to brittle transition temperature with a notched bar impact
test, before and after heat treatment. In most cases, the hardness and tensile
properties of the material will not show any change as a result of embrittlement, but
the transition temperature can be raised by as much as 100°C for embrittling heat
treatments.
Temper embrittlement is caused by the presence of specific impurities in the steel,

which segregate to prior austenite grain boundaries during heat treatment. The main
embrittling elements (in order of importance) are antimony, phosphorous, tin and
arsenic. The fracture surface of a material embrittled by these elements has an
intergranular appearance.
http://www.twi-global.com/technical-knowledge/faqs/material-faqs/faq-what-is-temper-embrittlement-and-
Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong how-can-it-be-controlled/
Plain carbon steels with less than 0.5% Mn are not susceptible to temper
embrittlement. However, additions of Ni, Cr and Mn will cause greater susceptibility to
temper embrittlement. Small additions of W and Mo can inhibit temper embrittlement,
but this inhibition is reduced with greater additions.
Key points:
 Plain carbon steels with less than 0.5% Mn are not susceptible
 Additions of Ni, Cr and Mn will cause greater susceptibility
 Small additions of W and Mo can inhibit temper embrittlement
 The main embrittling elements (in order of importance) are antimony, phosphorous,
tin and arsenic.
The original toughness of a steel which has suffered temper embrittlement can be
restored by heating to above 600°C, and then cooling rapidly to below 300°C.
However, the best method of avoidance is to reduce the embrittling impurities through
control of raw materials and steel production.
In order to assess susceptibility to temper embrittlement in Cr-Mo steels, two

compositional parameters are commonly employed, the Watanabe J factor and the
Bruscato X factor.
 J=(Mn + Si)(P + Sn) x104 (in wt%), has been applied to parent steels and weld
metals.
 X=(10P + 5Sb + 4Sn + As)/100 (in ppm), is applied to weld metals.
If J is less than or equal to 180, or if X is less than 20, the risk of temper embrittlement
is considered to be low. A limit in this form can be specified for procurement, where
concerns over temper embrittlement exist.
A more general expression for embrittlement in weld metals was given by Sugiyama et
al:
 PE = C + Mn + Mo + Cr/3 + Si/4 + 3.5 (10P + 5Sb + 4Sn + As)
The maximum value for this expression to avoid serious embrittlement depends on the
welding process, but is given as 2.8-3.0 where coarse grained weld metal exists.
A more general expression for embrittlement in weld metals was given by
Sugiyama et al:
 PE = C + Mn + Mo + Cr/3 + Si/4 + 3.5 (10P + 5Sb + 4Sn + As)
The maximum value for this expression to avoid serious embrittlement

depends on the welding process, but is given as 2.8-3.0 where coarse
grained weld metal exists.
Criteria:
Watanabe J factor ≤ 180
Bruscato X factor < 20
Sugiyama PE The maximum value depends on the welding process
Other Method of Assessment of Tempered Embrittlement:
Step cooling can reveal the susceptibility of a steel to temper embrittlement. The
Charpy impact energy and transition temperature for steel after an embrittling heat
treatment involving step cooling have been related to give a mathematical expression
that when fulfilled ensures that the material will not suffer an unacceptable degree of
temper embrittlement in service (4).
AF + 2.5(SC - AF) < 38°C
where
AF=As formed Charpy 54J temperature
SC=Step cooled Charpy 54J temperature
This expression is used in the construction of pressure vessels that may operate in the
embrittling temperature range, or that may pass slowly through that temperature range
upon startup or shutdown.
One step cooling method with hold times and temperatures is given in ASTM A387,
supplementary requirements[5] although this gives a more stringent requirement for the
acceptable degree of temper embrittlement.
Temper embrittlement has been also related to reheat cracking and low-ductility creep
fractures, and a number of types and mechanisms have been proposed, considering
carbide precipitation as well as grain boundary embrittling elements.
Step cooling can reveal the susceptibility of a steel to temper embrittlement. The
Charpy impact energy and transition temperature for steel after an embrittling heat
treatment involving step cooling have been related to give a mathematical expression
that when fulfilled ensures that the material will not suffer an unacceptable degree of
temper embrittlement in service (4).
AF + 2.5(SC - AF) < 38°C
where
AF=As formed Charpy 54J temperature
SC=Step cooled Charpy 54J temperature
This expression is used in the construction of pressure vessels that may operate in the
embrittling temperature range, or that may pass slowly through that temperature range
upon startup or shutdown.
One step cooling method with hold times and temperatures is given in ASTM A387,
supplementary requirements[5] although this gives a more stringent requirement for the
acceptable degree of temper embrittlement.
Temper embrittlement has been also related to reheat cracking and low-ductility creep
fractures, and a number of types and mechanisms have been proposed, considering
carbide precipitation as well as grain boundary embrittling elements.
API510-Exam
4.2.3 Temper Embrittlement

回火脆化
API510-Exam
o o
650 F~ 1070 F
API510-Exam
Graphitization 800°F~1100°F for C Steel Plain carbon steel / 0.5Mo

石墨化 875°F for C ½ Mo Steel Steel
Spheroidization碳 850°F ~ 1400°F 0.5Mo Steel, Low alloy steel

化物球化 up to 9 % Cr
Tempered 650°F~ 1070°F 2 ¼ Cr-1Mo low alloy steel,
Embrittlement 3Cr-1Mo (lesser extent), &
回火脆化 HSLA Cr-Mo-V rotor steels
API510-Exam
4.2.3 Temper Embrittlement 回火脆化

4.2.3.1 Description of Damage
Temper embrittlement is the reduction in toughness due to a metallurgical
change that can occur in some low alloy steels as a result of long term
exposure in the temperature range of about 650°F to 1100°F (343°C to
593°C) . This change causes an upward shift in the ductile-to-brittle transition
temperature as measured by Charpy impact testing. Although the loss of
toughness is not evident at operating temperature, equipment that is temper
embrittled may be susceptible to brittle fracture during start-up and shutdown.
2¼ Cr-1Mo ~ 3Cr-1Mo量低合金钢在650°F to 1100°F工作下,导致受影响材质,
韧脆转变温度向上移位. 工作状态下,设备不会受到此损伤机理任何影响,但在
关机,重启时的低温下,材料会因回火脆性的损伤机理导致产生设备受压母材脆
裂.
API510-Exam
Temper embrittlement is the reduction in toughness due to a metallurgical

change that can occur in some low alloy steels as a result of long term
exposure in the temperature range of about 650°F to 1100°F (343°C to
593°C) . 2¼ Cr-1Mo~ 3Cr-1Mo钢材在650°F to 1100°F 工作下,导致受影响材质,
韧脆转变温度向上移位.
API510-Exam
4.2.3.2 Affected Materials

a) Primarily 2 ¼ Cr-1Mo (P5A) low alloy steel, 3Cr-1Mo (P5A) (to a lesser
extent), and the high-strength low alloy Cr-Mo-V (P5C) rotor steels.
b) Older generation 2 ¼ Cr-1Mo materials manufactured prior to 1972 may be
particularly susceptible. Some high strength low alloy steels are also
susceptible.
c) The C- ½ Mo (P3) and 1 ¼ Cr- ½ Mo (P4) alloy steels are not significantly
affected by temper embrittlement. However, other high temperature
damage mechanisms promote metallurgical changes that can alter the
toughness or high temperature ductility of these materials.
主要是对 2¼ Cr-1Mo~ 3Cr-1Mo低合金钢, Cr-Mo-V轴钢受影响.

API510-Exam
Temper
Primarily 2.25Cr-1Mo low
Embrittlement
alloy steel. and the high-
回火脆性易感性
strength low alloy Cr-Mo-V
rotor steels.
3Cr-1Mo
(to a lesser extent) The C-0.5Mo, 1Cr-
0.5Mo and 1.25Cr-
0.5Mo alloy steels are
not significantly
affected.
API510-Exam
[Embrittlement temperature 650°F~1070°F]

API510-Exam

API510-Exam

API510-Exam
韧脆转变温度
API510-Exam
韧脆转变温度向上移位
API510-Exam
脆性转变温度向上移位.另
个特征是回火脆化,不会对
脆性转变点上搁架冲击功有
任何影响.
API510-Exam
SEM fractographs of
tempered embrittled
material show
primarily intergranular
cracking due to
impurity segregation at
grain boundaries
材料的回火脆化,主要
是由于晶界杂质偏聚
导致是沿晶开裂
API510-Exam
http://www.twi.co.uk/news-events/bulletin/archive/1999/january-
february/welding-and-fabrication-of-high-temperature-components-for-
advanced-power-plant-part-1/
API510-Exam
4.2.3.3 Critical Factors 关键因素

a) Alloy steel composition, thermal history, metal temperature and exposure
time are critical factors. 受热历史,金属温度和受感时间是关键因素
b) Susceptibility to temper embrittlement is largely determined by the
presence of the alloying elements manganese and silicon, and the tramp
elements phosphorus, tin, antimony, and arsenic. The strength level and
heat treatment/fabrication history should also be considered. 回火脆化敏感
性很大程度上决定于锰/硅与杂元素(磷/锡/锑和砷)含量.
c) Temper embrittlement of 2.25Cr-1Mo steels develops more quickly at
900°F (482°C) than in the 800°F to 850°F (427°C to 440°C) range, but the
damage is more severe after long-term exposure at 850°F (440°C). 高温下
易感性较大,但在低温下伤害较为严重.
API510-Exam
d) Some embrittlement can occur during fabrication heat treatments, but most
of the damage occurs over many years of service in the embrittling
temperature range. 有的损伤是因建造热处理引发,但一般上大多数受感于长
期在敏感温度下操作引发的.
e) This form of damage will significantly reduce the structural integrity of a

component containing a crack-like flaw. An evaluation of the materials
toughness may be required depending on the flaw type, the severity of the
environment, and the operating conditions, particularly in hydrogen service.
含裂纹状缺陷的部件会减弱结构完整性. 特别是氢服务设备,应在考虑缺陷的
类型, 处理工艺的严峻性与操作条件,进行材料的韧性评估.
API510-Exam
4.2.3.4 Affected Units or Equipment

a) Temper embrittlement occurs in a variety of process units after long term
exposure to temperatures above 650°F (343°C). It should be noted that
there have been very few industry failures related directly to temper
embrittlement.
b) Equipment susceptible to temper embrittlement is most often found in
hydroprocessing units, particularly reactors, hot feed/effluent exchanger
components, and hot HP separators. Other units with the potential for
temper embrittlement include catalytic reforming units (reactors and
exchangers), FCC reactors, coker and visbreaking units.
c) Welds in these alloys are often more susceptible than the base metal and
should be evaluated.
受影响的设备主要是用于高温处理单元,例如加氢装置,催化重整装置,催化裂
化反应器,炼焦器,减粘裂化单元,等. 焊接部位受感性比母材强,这位应当作为
评估考虑部位.
API510-Exam
http://www.twi-global.com/technical-knowledge/job-knowledge/defects-
imperfections-in-welds-reheat-cracking-048/
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Welding_defect
API510-Exam
API510-Exam
4.2.3.5 Appearance or Morphology of Damage

a) Temper embrittlement is a metallurgical change that is not readily apparent
and can be confirmed through impact testing. Damage due to temper
embrittlement may result in catastrophic brittle fracture.
外观变化不明显,需要通过冲击试验证实.
b) Temper embrittlement can be identified by an upward shift in the ductile-to-
brittle transition temperature measured in a Charpy V-notch impact test, as
compared to the non-embrittled or de-embrittled material (Figure 4-5).
Another important characteristic of temper embrittlement is that there is no
effect on the upper shelf energy.夏比V型缺口冲击试验证实韧性- 脆性转变
温度向上移位.另个特征是回火脆化,不会对脆性转变点上搁架冲击功有任何
影响.
c) SEM fractographs of severely temper embrittled material show primarily
intergranular cracking due to impurity segregation at grain boundaries.
主要为晶间开裂
API510-Exam
API510-Exam
Intergranular Cracking
API510-Exam
Intergranular
Cracking
Metal surface
Cr5C2/ Cr3C2
precipitated
Low Cr grain
boundary
Crack initiation & Progressive crack

growth
API510-Exam
Embrittlement Mechanism
Tensile stress
Grain
Boundary
Cr depleted grain
boundary
PPT as Grain boundary
Cr5C2/Cr3C2 decohesion-
Crack initiation pt.
API510-Exam
4.2.3.6 Prevention / Mitigation

a) Existing Materials
1. Temper embrittlement cannot be prevented if the material contains critical
levels of the embrittling impurity elements and is exposed in the embrittling
temperature range.
2. To minimize the possibility of brittle fracture during startup and shutdown,
many refiners use a pressurization sequence to limit system pressure to
about 25 percent of the maximum design pressure for temperatures below a
Minimum Pressurization Temperature (MPT). Note that MPT is not a single
point but rather a pressure temperature envelope which defines safe
operating conditions to minimize the likelihood of brittle fracture.
API510-Exam
3. MPT’s generally range from 350°F (171°C) for the earliest, most highly
temper embrittled steels, down to 125°F (52°C) or lower for newer, temper
embrittlement resistant steels (as required to also minimize effects of
hydrogen embrittlement).
4. If weld repairs are required, the effects of temper embrittlement can be
temporarily reversed (de-embrittled) by heating at 1150°F (620°C)
[compared: embrittlement temperature 650°F~1070°F] for two hours per inch
of thickness, and rapidly cooling to room temperature. It is important to note
that re-embrittlement will occur over time if the material is re-exposed to the
embrittling temperature range.
API510-Exam
Existing Material: De-embrittlement treatment.
Heating at 1150°F (620°C)

[compared: embrittlement
temperature 650°F~1070°F
(343°C to 593°C) ] for two
hours per inch of thickness,
and rapidly cooling to room
temperature.
API510-Exam
b) New Materials
The best way to minimize the likelihood and extent of temper embrittlement is to
limit the acceptance levels of manganese, silicon, phosphorus, tin, antimony,
and arsenic in the base metal and welding consumables. In addition,
strength levels and PWHT procedures should be specified and carefully
controlled. 最好的缓解方法是控制母材/焊材的锰,硅,磷,锡,锑,砷的成分.
Acceptance Level of Mn, Si, P, Sn, Sb, As.

API510-Exam
Susceptibility to temper embrittlement

A common way to minimize temper embrittlement is to limit the "J*" Factor for
base metal and the "X" Factor for weld metal, based on material composition as
follows:
J* = (Si + Mn) x (P + Sn) x 104 {elements in wt%}

X = (10P + 5Sb + 4Sn + As)/100 {elements in ppm}
API510-Exam
Typical J* and X factors used for 2.25 Cr steel are a maximum of 100 and 15,
respectively. Studies have also shown that limiting the (P + Sn) to less than 0.01% is
sufficient to minimize temper embrittlement because (Si + Mn) control the rate of
embrittlement.
J* : 100 Max. (Base metal)

X : 15 Max. (Weld metal)
API510-Exam
4.2.3.7 Inspection and Monitoring

a) a) A common method of monitoring is to install blocks of original heats of
the alloy steel material inside the reactor. Samples are periodically removed
from these blocks for impact testing to monitor/establish the ductile-brittle
transition temperature. The test blocks should be strategically located near
the top and bottom of the reactor to make sure that the test material is
exposed to both inlet and outlet conditions.
b) Process conditions should be monitored to ensure that a proper
pressurization sequence is followed to help prevent brittle fracture due to
temper embrittlement.
4.2.3.8 Related Mechanisms

Not applicable.
API510-Exam
Figure 4-5 – Plot of

CVN toughness as a
function of
temperature showing a
shift in the 40-ft-lb
transition temperature.
API510-Exam
API510-Exam
Temper embrittlement is inherent in many steels and can be characterized

by reduced impact toughness. The state of temper embrittlement has practically no
effect on other mechanical properties at room temperature. Figure 1 shows
schematically the effect of temperature on impact toughness of alloy steel which is
strongly liable to temper embrittlement. Many alloy steels have two temperature
intervals of temper embrittlement. For instance, irreversible temper brittleness may
appear within the interval of 250-400°C and reversible temper brittleness, within
450°C-650°C.
http://www.keytometals.com/Articles/Art102.htm
API510-Exam
irreversible temper
brittleness may appear
within the interval of
250-400°C
reversible temper brittleness,

within 450°C-650°C.
API510-Exam
Metallurgy of Mo in alloy steel & iron

Temper embrittlement may occur when steels are slowly cooled after tempering
through the temperature range between 450 and 550°C. This is due to the
segregation of impurities such as phosphorus, arsenic, antimony and tin on the
grain boundaries. The molybdenum atom is very large relative to other alloying
elements and impurities. It effectively impedes the migration of those elements
and thereby provides resistance to temper embrittlement.
http://www.imoa.info/molybdenum_uses/moly_grade_alloy_steels_irons/tempering.php
Other/ 其他阅读
Other reference: http://www.twi.co.uk/technical-knowledge/faqs/material-faqs/faq-what-is-temper-
embrittlement-and-how-can-it-be-controlled/
回火脆化学习重点:
1. 高温现象: 650°F to 1100°F,
2. 原理: 材料的回火脆化,主要是由于晶界杂质偏聚导致是沿晶开裂
3. 受影响材质:, 2.25Cr1Mo ~ 3Cr1Mo低合金钢与轴钢,不涵盖普通碳钢,
4. 最好的缓解方法是控制母材/焊材的锰,硅,磷,锡,锑,砷的成分,
5. 其他缓解方法: 控制材料强度(?)与热处理受感温度,
6. 这种脆化现象不能在高于受感温度热处理逆转恢复.
7. 除了低温冲击功,不影响其他高低温机械性能.
Question& Answer
Can we use E-7018B2 instead of E-8018B2 for welding of A-335 Gr. P11
material. If yes then what care shall be exercised during welding?
Would the resulting weldment be of adequate strength?
you can use E-7018B2L (not E-7018B2). the “L-Grades” are limited to a maximum of
0.05% carbon. While the lower percent carbon in the weld metal will improve ductility
and lower hardness,it will also reduce the high-temperature strength and
creep resistance of the weld metal.
Generally it is not a problem with P11, but in case of P22 if the operating temp is > 450
°C, one must not use low carbon grades

Q: Which GTAW filler metal is used to weld A335 P22 and P11 pipe to A387 Gr11
plate?
A: The A335 P22 is a 2 ¼ Cr – 1 Mo material and A335 P11 is 1 ¼ Cr – ½ Mo material
being joined to the plate material that is also 1 ¼ Cr – ½ Mo material. With these
alloys the rule of thumb is to match the lower alloy material as would be the case with
the A335 P22 material to the A387 Gr 11 plate material. In both cases, you could use a
“B2” filler metal. The next issue in filler metal selection is the use of post weld stress
relief which is not mentioned. If the weld is going to be subjected to a post weld stress
relief then use an ER80S-B2 and if there will be no post weld stress relief you should
consider ER70S-B2L.
Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://weldingdesign.com/archive/correct-electrode-selection-key-welding-out-position

More Reading

More Reading
Evaluation of the Melted Zone Microstructure in the Interface of the Dissimilar Weld
between A335 Low Alloy Steel and ER309L Filler Metal by Gas Tungsten Arc Welding
http://research.iaun.ac.ir/pd/kasiri/pdfs/PaperM_9532.pdf
Microstructural Degradation
https://www.nationalboard.org/PrintPage.aspx?pageID=164&ID=198

Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) Sheet 1 of 3
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code , Section IX
Company Name: www.WPSAmerica.com

Company Address: info@WPSAmerica.com, 1 (877) WPS-WELD
Welding Procedure Specification WPS No.: DEMO-WPS Revision No.: (0) Date: 12,12, 2005
Supporting PQR No. (s): DEMO-PQR Date: 11,12, 2005
BASE METALS (QW-403)

P-No.: 4 Group No.: 1 Material Specification: SA-335 Type or Grade: P11
Welded to
P-No.: 4 Group No.: 1 Material Specification: SA-234 Type or Grade: WP11, Class 1
OR
Chem. Analysis and Mech. Prop. N/A
Welded to Chem. Analysis and Mech. Prop. N/A
Qualified Thickness Range mm (in) Groove: 5 mm (3/16 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.) Fillet: Unlimited
Qualified Diameter Range mm (in) Groove: All Sizes Fillet: Unlimited
Other information: This is a DEMO WPS from www.WPSAmerica.com
FIRST PROCESS SECOND PROCESS

Welding Process (es): Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW) Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW)
Type (s): Manual Manual
FILLER METALS (QW-404)

AWS Classification
ER80S-G (see sheet 3) E8016-B2 (see sheet 3)
Electrode-Flux Class (SAW)
SFA Specification SFA 5.28 SFA 5.5
Filler Metal F-No. 6 4
Weld Metal Analysis A-No. _ 3
Size of Filler Metals mm (in) 2.0 mm (see sheet 3) 3.25 mm (see sheet 3)
Filler Metal Product Form Solid copper coated wire Iron powder low hydrogen
Max. Weld Pass Thickness mm (in) 1/8 in. 3/16 in.
Qualified Weld Metal Range: Groove mm (in) 10 mm (3/8 in.) 60 mm (2.36 in.)
Qualified Weld Metal Range: Fillet mm (in) Unlimited Unlimited
Weld Deposit Chemistry _ _
Flux Trade Name and Flux Type (SAW) N/A N/A
Consumable Insert, Class and Size _ _
Other information: This is a DEMO WPS from www.WPSAmerica.com
POSITIONS (QW-405)
Position (s) of Groove ALL Position ALL Position
Welding Progression Up Up
Position (s) of Fillet ALL Position ALL Position
PREHEAT (QW-406)
Preheat Temp. °C (°F) 150 °C 150 °C
Interpass Temp. Max. °C (°F) 280 °C 280 °C
Preheat Maintenance °C (°F) New Joint New Joint
GAS (QW-408)
Shielding Gas Type (Mixture) 100% Ar N/A
Flow Rate lt/min. (CFH) 7 to 9 lt/min. _
Trailing Gas Type (Mixture) N/A N/A
Flow Rate lt/min. (CFH) _ _
Gas Backing (Mixture) N/A N/A
Flow Rate lt/min. (CFH) _ _
POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT (QW-407)

Holding Temperature Range °C (°F): 680 °C + or - 10 °C Holding Time Range: 1 hr/ in. (15 minutes Min.)
Heating Rate °C/hr (°F/hr): 120 °C/hr Method: Furnace
Cooling Rate °C/hr (°F/hr): 120 °C/hr Method: Open Air
WPS No. DEMO-WPS Rev. (0) Sheet 2 of 3
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (QW-409)
Following data may also shown on Table below in this sheet FIRST PROCESS SECOND PROCESS
Current/ Polarity DCEN DCEP
Amps (Range) 90 to120 100 to 130
Volts (Range) 18 to 25 20 to 28
Wire Feed Speed (Range) mm/min (in/min) _ _
Travel Speed (Range) mm/min (in/min) Manual control Manual control
Mode of Metal Transfer for GMAW (FCAW) N/A N/A
Tungsten Electrode Size mm (in) 2.5 mm _
Tungsten Type SFA 5.12 EWTh-2
TECHNIQUE (QW-410)
String or Weave Bead String Bead String and Weave Bead
Multiple or Single Electrodes Single Single
Multiple or Single Pass (per side) Multiple Multiple
Orifice or Gas Cup Size 5/8 in. Nozzle Size _
Contact Tube to Work Distance mm (in) _ _
Initial and Interpass Cleaning Brushing Brushing and Grinding
Method of Back Gouging n/a n/a
Oscillation _ _
Peening Not Required Not Required
Other information: Clean each layer before start welding new passes/layers
JOINTS (QW-402)
Joint Design: Groove Design Used Backing Type: Metal Backing Material (Refer to both backing and retainers.): Same as base metals
Joint Details/ Sketch: Groove Details (or as per production drawing): Root Opening G: _ Root Face RF: _ Groove Angle: _ Radius (J-U): _
Table for recorded welding parameters; Refer to QW-409

Filler Wire Feed Travel Max. Heat Input
Current Current
Weld Pass Filler Metal Size Speed Range Volts Speed Range kJ/mm (kJ/in)
Process Amps Type &
Layer(s) No. (s) Classification Diameter mm/min Range mm/min Or
Range Polarity
mm (in) (in/min) (in/min) Remarks
1 1 GTAW ER80S-G 2.0 mm 90-120 DCEN N/A 18-25 _ Root Pass
2 2 to 3 GTAW ER80S-G 2.0 mm 90-120 DCEN N/A 18-25 _
3 to n 4 to n SMAW E8016-B2 3.25 mm 100-130 DCEP N/A 20-28 _ Fill and Cap Passes
Additional Notes: This is a DEMO-WPS prepared by online welding software of www.WPSAmerica.com
Manufacturer or Contractor’s Welding Engineer: Authorized by:

Name: Jim Clark Name: John Smith
Signature: J.C. Signature: J.S.
Title: Welding Engineer Title: QA Manager
Date: 12, 12, 2005 Date: 12,12, 2005
WPS No. DEMO-WPS Rev. (0) Sheet 3 of 3
Heat Treatment (ASME Code’s Guideline):
PREHEAT TABLE:
ASME Section I: Preheating from Appendix A (A-100)
(a) 250 °F (120 °C) for material which has either a specified minimum tensile strength in
excess of 60,000 psi (410 MPa) or a thickness at the joint in excess of 1/2 in. (13 mm):
(b) 50 °F (10 °C) for all other materials of P-No. 4 group.
POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT TABLE:

ASME Section I: Mandatory Requirements for PWHT of Table PW-39
Min. Holding Temperature: 1,200 °F (650 °C)
Min. Holding Time for Weld Thickness (Nominal):
Up to 2 in. (50 mm): 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm), 15 min Min.
Over 2 in. (50 mm) to 5 in. (125 mm): 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm)
Over 5 in. (125 mm): 5 hr plus 15 min for each additional inch over 5 in. (125 mm)
Heating rate: The weldment shall be heated slowly to the holding temperature, Min. 100 °F (55 °C)/hr
Cooling rate: Cool slowly in a still atmosphere to a temperature not exceeding 800 °F (425 °C)
For Non-Mandatory conditions of PWHT, See Notes (1), (2) of Table PW-39
WPS Qualified Range (ASME IX Guideline):

Qualified Positions (Groove, Fillet): All Positions for Plate or Pipe. Unless specifically required otherwise by the welding variables (QW-250), a
qualification in any position qualifies the procedure for all positions. The welding process and electrodes must be suitable for all positions
permitted by the WPS (ASME Section IX, QW-203). (For impact test application, there are some restrictions for welding in vertical-uphill
progression position; See ASME Section IX, QW-405.2)
Qualified Thicknesses (Groove, Fillet): 3/16 in. (5 mm) Min., 2T Max. (Plate or Pipe)
[For GMAW-Short Circuit Arc, when T is less than 1/2 in. (13 mm): 1.1T Max. ASME IX, QW-403.10]
[For impact test application, except ESW process: Min. Qualified Thickness is either T or 5/8 in. (16 mm), whichever is less; This variable does
not apply when a WPS is qualified with a PWHT above the upper transformation temperature or when an austenitic material is solution annealed
after welding. ASME IX, QW-403.6]
[For ferrous base metals other than P-No. 7, 8 and 45 (when test coupon receives a PWHT above the upper transformation temperature): 1.1T
Max. ASME IX, QW-407.4]
[For any weld pass greater than 1/2 in. (13 mm) thick: 1.1T Max. (Except GTAW process). ASME IX, QW-403.9]
T: Thickness of Test Plate or Pipe Wall in PQR (ASME Section IX, Table QW-451.1)
Qualified Diameters (Groove, Fillet): All Nominal Pipe (Tube) Sizes, within Qualified Thicknesses in PQR
WPS Base Metal P-Numbers Allowed by PQR: Any metals of the same P-No. 4, plus combination between any metal from P-No. 4 to any metal
from P-No. 3 or P-No. 1 (ASME Section IX, QW-424)
Qualified WPS Filler Metal Allowed by PQR: Only Filler Metal categories with the same F-number and same A-number tested in PQR. Any
electrode diameter sizes can be used in WPS, as it is not an essential variable for the most process and conditions. For Non-impacted test
applications only, filler metal classification within an SFA specification, with the same F-number and the same A-number and the same minimum
tensile strength and the same nominal chemical composition can be used in WPS. (ASME Section IX, QW-250)
YOUR CHOICE FOR CREEP RESISTANT FILLER METALS
Cr-Mo Welding
Electrodes
for the Power Generating Industry
ESAB Welding &
Cutting Products
WELDING l CUTTING l FILLER

Table of contents
Power generation
Description Page
Process Description....................................................................................................................... 1
Cr-Mo Selection Guide................................................................................................................... 2
Product Offering
.5% Mo....................................................................................................................................3-5
1.25% Cr, .5% Mo...................................................................................................................6-9
2.25% Cr, 1% Mo................................................................................................................10-13
5% Cr, .5% Mo....................................................................................................................14-16
9% Cr - 1% Mo....................................................................................................................17-18
Modified 9% Cr-Mo-V..........................................................................................................19-25
FOR MORE INFORMATION - Certified Material Test Report (CMTR)
Atom Arc 9015-B9.................................................................................................................... 26
Contact: Atom Arc 9018-B9.................................................................................................................... 27
Dual Shield B9......................................................................................................................... 28
ESAB Welding & Cutting Products Tigrod ER90S-B9..................................................................................................................... 29
Customer Service Center Creep Data Chart
P. O. Box 517 Atom Arc 9015-B9.................................................................................................................... 30
801 Wilson Avenue Atom Arc 9018-B9.................................................................................................................... 30
Hanover, PA 17331 Dual Shield B9......................................................................................................................... 30
Tigrod ER90S-B9..................................................................................................................... 30
TELEPHONE: 717/637-8911 (General Office) ASME Certificates
. 800/933-7070 (Customer Service - TOLL FREE) Ashtabula, OH facility............................................................................................................... 31
FACSIMILE: 800/444-8911 (Customer Service - TOLL FREE) Hanover, PA facility.................................................................................................................. 32
Safety Data Sheets....................................................................................................................... 33
The information contained herein is based on data and information
developed in the laboratories of ESAB Welding & Cutting Products (“Seller”),
but is presented without guarantee or warranty and the Seller makes no
recommendation for and disclaims any liability incurred from any use
thereof, including without limitation, any use in a commercial process not
controlled by the Seller, and any use in violation of any existing patent,
foreign or domestic, or of applicable laws and regulations.
THE SELLER MAKES NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY STATED IN SELLER’S CONTRACT OR SALES
ACKNOWLEDGMENT FORM.
Power Generation technology
Power Generation Technology Because of the wide variety of creep resistant steel types,
Creep resistant steels were originally developed to the selection of filler materials is also varied. Historically
provide improved strength at elevated temperatures. products such as 1.25% Cr, .5% Mo or 2.25% Cr, 1%
disappear.
These creep resistant steels were metallurgically Mo would have been used. Today however, due to the
designed with additions of chromium, molybdenum and increased demand for energy, utilities are operating their
making darkness other similar alloys to produce the needed strength and
creep resistance required in most steam generating
facilities. Applications include heat exchangers,
facilities under peak load conditions causing them to
choose another grade such as P91 over one of the other
creep resistant steels.
header systems, and associated piping within a power The designation most often associated for the applicable
generation facility. Some of the most common grades filler metals for welding P91 grade steels is a “B9”. ESAB
of creep resistant steels include P11, P22, P5 and P91. offers a complete line of “B9” filler metals for the SMAW,
When you use ESAB products, Each of these grades has a varying amount of Cr-Mo and GTAW, FCAW and SAW processes. Each of these
amazing things happen. other assorted alloys added. products is tested in accordance to the respective AWS
In the harsh environments of the power Creep resistant steels require the use of comparable filler specification and can be certified to the respective ASME
metals that perform at the same level as that of the steel. specification, if need be. Each lot of material is lot tested
generation world, even everyday jobs and certified prior to the sale. If additional testing is
It is essential that the choice of filler metals complement
aren’t simple. Fortunately, your choice the steels while optimizing the creep resistance. In required, ESAB can accommodate such testing.
of a welding and cutting manufacturer addition, the mechanical properties of the filler materials Throughout the years, the Atom Arc®, Arcaloy® and Dual
should adequately produce the toughness needed during Shield® brand names have been synonymous with
is. As the global authority on welding
the start-up phase of the plant equipment. both fossil fuel facilities and nuclear power plants. The
and cutting, ESAB offers the broadest engineering design built into these products has provided
W el d in g + cuttin g + A utomation = P ower Generation S olutions selection of world-class products fabricators with the highest level of reliability possible.
that meet the tough demands of the The technical information contained within this catalog
industry. From turbine plants to nuclear provides the supporting data to substantiate our vast
knowledge and experience in the development of
containment vessels, choose ESAB for products to support the power generation industry. Since
powerful solutions. all such product is produced in accordance with the
ASME Quality Assurance System, customers can take
comfort in the fact that these products meet or exceed
their most stringent specifications. Feel free to contact us
for further information or to discuss a specific application.
esabna.com + 1.800.ESAB.123
1
Cr-Mo Alloy
atom arc® 7018-Mo
selection Guide
ESAB Product Reference Chart Stress Relieved 8 hr. @ 1150oF (620oC)

ASME ksi MPa
Section Yield Strength 76 524
Type of Steel Grade IX SMAW GMAW/GTAW SAW/Flux FCAW MCAW
Tensile Strength 88 607
OK Flux 10.62/
1/2 % Mo 2 P#3 Atom Arc 7018-Mo Spoolarc 83 Dual Shield 7000-A1 Coreweld 80-D2 Elongation % in 2" 28%
Spoolarc 40B
OK Flux 10.62/
Atom Arc 8018-CM Spoolarc U515 Dual Shield 8000-B2
1/2%Cr-1/2% Mo 11 P#3 Tigrod ER80S-B2 Coreweld 80-B2 Stress Relieved 20 hr. @ 1150oF (620oC)
Atom Arc 7018-B2L OK Flux 10.63/ Dual Shield 8000-B2L
Spoolarc U515 ksi MPa
OK Flux 10.62/ Yield Strength 73 504
Atom Arc 8018-CM Spoolarc U515 Dual Shield 8000-B2 Tensile Strength 85 587
1-1/4% Cr-1/2% Mo 11 P#4 Tigrod ER80S-B2 Coreweld 80-B2
Atom Arc 7018-B2L OK Flux 10.63/ Dual Shield 8000-B2L
Spoolarc U515 Elongation % in 2" 29%
OK Flux 10.62/
Atom Arc 9018-CM OK Autrod 13.20SC Dual Shield 9000-B3 Atom Arc 7018-Mo electrodes contain 0.5% Mo as alloy
2-1/4% Cr-1% Mo 22 P#5A
Atom Arc 8018-B3L
Tigrod ER90S-B3
OK Flux 10.63/
Coreweld 90-B3
addition. They are recommended for welding low-alloy, high Typical Charpy V-Notch
OK Autrod 13.20SC tensile steels of 50 ksi (345 MPa) minimum yield strength and Impact Properties
0.5% molybdenum steels and pipes. They are widely employed
Atom Arc 8018-B6 in the fabrication and erection of boilers, pressure piping and Testing
3% Cr-1% Mo 21 P#5A Tigrod ER80S-B6 Dual Shield B6
Atom Arc 8018-B6L Temperature Condition Ft.-lbs J
tubing, and other pressure vessel applications.
Atom Arc 8018-B6 Stress Relieved
5% Cr-1/2% Mo 5 P#5B Tigrod ER80S-B6 Dual Shield B6 -20ºF (-30ºC) 69 94
Atom Arc 8018-B6L Classification and Approvals 8 hr. @ 1150oF (620oC)
9% Cr-1% Mo 9 P#5B Atom Arc 8018-B8 Tigrod ER80S-B8 MIL-E-0022200/7 MIL-7018-A1 Stress Relieved
30ºF (0ºC) 108 146
A.B.S.- AWS A5.5: E7018-A1 8 hr. @ 1150oF (620oC)
Atom Arc 9015-B9
9% Cr-1% Mo-V-Nb-N 91 P#5B Tigrod ER90S-B9 Dual Shield B9 AWS/ASME SFA 5.5: E7018-A1H4R Stress Relieved
Atom Arc 9018-B9 10ºF (-10ºC) 135 183
13 hr. @ 1150oF (620oC)
NOTES
Complimentary Products 60ºF (15ºC)
Stress Relieved
150 203
20 hr. @ 1150oF (620oC)
GTAW (Spoolarc 83)
+ These creep resistant alloys are used in high temperature service used in hydrocarbon power generation facilites
FCAW (Dual Shield 7000-A1)
+ Customer applications may require additional mechanical testing in accordance to ASME or a one-of-a-kind customer specification SAW (Spoolarc 40B) Typical Undiluted Weld Metal Analysis
+ X-Factor values (< 15) are provided on most of the products listed above
C Mn Si P S Mo
+ Both ESAB Hanover and Ashtabula are currently ASME facilities Preheat Information 0.04% 0.8% 0.4% 0.012% 0.01% 0.55%
+ Some diameters and packages may be special order items. Consult Order Entry Department for product availability Preheat should be used on hardenable steels to prevent the
formation of a hard heat-affected zone. Preheat may also be
required in welding heavy sections. Storage and Reconditioning
Store open electrodes at 225oF (107oC) to 300oF (150oC)
Electrode Imprint Marking Recondition electrodes at 700oF (370oC) for 1 hour
7018-A1H4R
Ordering Information
Typical Mechanical Properties AA 7018-Mo 1/4X18X50#HS...................................... 255021412
AA 7018-Mo 1/8X14X50#HS...................................... 255021818
As Welded AA 7018-Mo 3/16X14X50#HS.....................................255023111
ksi MPa AA 7018-Mo 3/32X14X50#HS.................................... 255023319
AA 7018-Mo 5/32X14X50#HS.................................... 255025314
Yield Strength 77 531 AA 7018-Mo 7/32X18X50#HS.................................... 255027310
Tensile Strength 87 600 AA 7018-Mo 1/8X14X10#HS...................................... 255021826
AA 7018-Mo 3/16X14X10#HS.................................... 255023129
Elongation % in 2" 27%
AA 7018-Mo 3/32X14X10#HS.................................... 255023327
AA 7018-Mo 5/32X14X10#HS.................................... 255025322
Stress Relieved 1 hr. @ 1150oF (620oC)
ksi MPa
Yield Strength 75 518
Product Data Sheet.................................... SSP-1018

2 3
dual shield® 7000-A1 spoolarc® 40B
Typical Charpy V-Notch Typical Wire Chemistry

Impact Properties C Mn Si S P Mo
0.13% 1.2% .03% .019% .009% .54%
Testing
Temperature Condition Ft.-lbs J
Typical Undiluted Weld Metal Analysis
72ºF (22ºC) As Welded, CO2 43 58
OK Flux 10.62
0ºF (-18ºC) As Welded, CO2 20 27 C Mn Si P S Mo
0.10% 1.1% 0.2% 0.017% 0.010% 0.50%
Typical Undiluted Weld Metal Analysis, CO2

C Mn Si P S Mo
40B 3/32x65#CL............................................................. 1184F30
0.05% 0.09% 0.6% 0.01% 0.008% 0.55% 40B 1/8x150#CL............................................................. 1185F12
40B 1/8x65#CL............................................................... 1184F32
40B 1/8x800#DR............................................................. 1186F12
Dual Shield 7000-A1 is an all-position flux cored electrode Storage and Reconditioning* 40B 5/32x150#CL........................................................... 1185F14
recommended for 0.5% Mo steels. It is used in the Store open electrodes at 300oF (150oC) Spoolarc 40B is a single or multipass welding wire for carbon 40B 5/32x65#CL............................................................. 1184F34
fabrication and erection of boilers, pressure piping and Recondition electrodes at 300oF (150oC) for 6 to 8 hours and low alloy steels. Product produces good as welded and 40B 5/32x800#DR........................................................... 1186F14
tubing, and other pressure vessel applications. Shielding stress relieved impact toughness. Weld metal tensile strength 40B 3/16x65#CL............................................................. 1184F35
gas of 100% CO2 and 75% Ar, remainder CO2 may be used. *Note: If packaged on a plastic spool, remove spool from plastic is in excess of 70 ksi (483 MPa). 40B 3/16x800#DR........................................................... 1186F15
A 75% Ar/25% CO2 shielding gas mixture is recommended bag before placing in oven. Store at 125ºF (52ºC). 40B 1/4x800#DR............................................................118EFLW
to improve arc characteristics, increase wetting action, Applications include pressure vessel fabrication and other
decrease penetration, and provide easier arc control for out- Ordering Information similar welds which require postweld heat treatment.
of-position welding. The weld metal analysis is similar to an DS 7000-A1 045X33#AWS......................................... 245012521
E7018-A1 low hydrogen electrode. Classification and Approvals
AWS/ASME SFA 5.23: EA2
Classification and Approvals
AWS/ASME SFA 5.29: E81T1-A1C/A1M
Complimentary Products
GTAW (Spoolarc 83)
Shielding Gas SMAW (Atom Arc 7018-Mo)
100% CO2 and Argon - CO2 mixtures up to 75% Argon
FCAW (Dual Shield 7000-A1)
GTAW (Spoolarc 83)
Typical Mechanical Properties
SMAW (Atom Arc 7018-Mo) w/ ESAB OK Flux 10.62
SAW (Spoolarc 40B) Stress relieved 1hr. @ 1150°F (620°C)
ksi MPa
Typical Mechanical Properties Yield Strength 80 552
As Welded, CO2 Tensile Strength 91 628
ksi MPa Elongation % in 2" 28%

Typical Charpy V-Notch
Impact Properties
Testing
Stress Relieved 1 hr. @ 1150oF (620oC), CO2 Stress relieved
-50ºF (-46ºC) 40 54
ksi MPa 1hr. @ 1150°F (620°C)
Product Data Sheet....................................COR-1061 Product Data Sheet....................................COR-1072

4 5
atom arc® 8018-CM DUAL SHIELD® 8000-B2
Stress Relieved 1 hr. @ 1300oF (704oC) Typical Mechanical Properties

ksi MPa As welded
ksi MPa
ksi MPa
Stress Relieved 8hr. @ 1275°F (690°C)
ksi MPa
Atom Arc 8018-CM electrodes contain 1.25% Cr and Mo ksi MPa Dual Shield 8000-B2 is an all-position flux cored electrode
as alloy addition. They are used for the welding of such Yield Strength 82 566
which contains 1.25% Cr - 0.5% Mo. The weld metal
steels as 0.5% Cr - 0.5% Mo, 1% Cr - 0.5% Mo, and analysis is similar to an E8018-B2 low hydrogen electrode. Typical Undiluted Weld Metal Analysis, CO2
1.25% Cr - 0.5% Mo, which are used principally in power Tensile Strength 96 662 Dual Shield 8000-B2 wire is used for the welding of such C Mn Si P S Cr Mo X-Factor
piping and boiler work for the fabrication of plates, pipes, Elongation % in 2" 26% steel as 0.5% Cr - 0.5% Mo, 1% Cr - 0.5% Mo, and 1.25%
0.06% 0.7% 0.6% 0.009% 0.008% 1.3% 0.5% <15
tubes, castings, and forgings. Cr - 0.5% Mo. This wire is designed for single or multiple
pass welding. Shielding gases of 100% CO2 and 75% Ar -
Classification and Approvals remainder CO2 may be used. Storage and Reconditioning*
MILITARY-MIL-E-22200/8: MIL-8018-B2 Impact Properties Store open electrodes at 300oF (150oC)
A.B.S.- AWS A5.5: E8018-B2 Classification and Approvals Recondition electrodes at 300oF (150oC) for 6 to 8 hours.
AWS/ASME SFA 5.5: E8018-B2H4R Testing AWS/ASME SFA 5.29: E81T1-B2C/B2M
Temperature Condition Ft.-lbs J *Note: If packaged on a plastic spool, remove spool from plastic
bag before placing in oven. Store at 125oF (52oC).
Application 30ºF (0ºC)
Stress Relieved
80 108 Shielding Gas
8 hr. @ 1125oF (607oC)
This electrode is designed to meet the most stringent standards 100% CO2 and Argon - CO2 mixtures up to 75% Argon
for welding 1.25% Cr - 0.5% Mo steels while producing an 30ºF (0ºC)
Stress Relieved
83 113 Ordering Information
X-Factor <15 MAX. 8 hr. @ 1150oF (620oC) DS 8000-B2 035X33#AWS......................................... 245005590
Stress Relieved Complimentary Products DS 8000-B2 045X33#AWS......................................... 245005533
30ºF (0ºC) 98 133 DS 8000-B2 045X60#CL............................................ 245005582
8 hr. @ 1250oF (677oC) GTAW (Tigrod ER80S-B2)
Preheat Information SMAW (Atom Arc 8018-CM) DS 8000-B2 1/16X33#AWS........................................ 245020532
Preheat should be used on hardenable steels to prevent the DS 8000-B2 1/16X60#CL........................................... 245005517
SAW (Spoolarc U515 w/ OK Flux 10.62)
formation of a hard heat-affected zone. Preheat may also be Typical Undiluted Weld Metal Analysis
required in welding heavy sections.
C Mn Si P S Cr Mo X-Factor
0.06% 0.8% 0.5% 0.011% 0.008% 1.3% 0.57% <15
Electrode Imprint Marking
8018-B2H4R
Storage and Reconditioning
Complimentary Products Store open electrodes at 225oF (107oC) to 300oF (150oC)
GTAW (Tigrod ER80S-B2) Recondition electrodes at 700oF (370oC) for 1 hour
FCAW (Dual Shield 8000-B2)
SAW (Spoolarc U515 w/ OK Flux 10.62) Ordering Information
AA 8018-CM 1/8X14X50#HS..................................... 255051815
AA 8018-CM 3/16X14X50#HS................................... 255053118
Typical Mechanical Properties AA 8018-CM 3/32X14X50#HS................................... 255053316
Stress Relieved 1 hr. @ 1275oF (690oC) AA 8018-CM 5/32X14X50#HS................................... 255055311
AA 8018-CM 7/32X18X50#HS................................... 255057317
ksi MPa AA 8018-CM 1/8X14X10#HS..................................... 255051823
AA 8018-CM 3/32X14X10#HS................................... 255053324
Product Data Sheet.................................... SSP-1019 Product Data Sheet....................................COR-1062

6 7
tigrod® er80s-b2 spoolarc® u515
Typical Mechanical Properties Typical Charpy V-Notch

Stress Relieved 1hr. @ 1150°F (620°C) Impact Properties
ksi MPa OK Flux 10.62
Yield Strength 81 559 Testing
Tensile Strength 95 655 Temperature Condition Ft.-lbs J
Elongation % in 2" 29% Stress Relieved

-20ºF (-29ºC) 120 163
1 hr. @ 1275oF (690oC)
Stress Relieved 1hr. @ 1350°F (732°C) OK Flux 10.63

ksi MPa Testing
Stress Relieved
Tensile Strength 95 655 -20ºF (-29ºC) 180 294
1 hr. @ 1275oF (690oC)
Spoolarc U515 is a submerged arc wire that is used for Typical Wire Chemistry
TIGROD ER80S-B2 is a chrome-moly Tigrod used for Stress Relieved 1hr. @ 1375°F (746°C)
joining creep resistant steels of the 0.5% Cr - 0.5% Mo, welding Cr-Mo steels up to 1.25% Cr and .5% Mo. Typical C Mn Si P S Cr Mo
1% Cr - 0.5% Mo, and 1.25% Cr - 0.5% Mo grades. These ksi MPa applications include process piping, heat exchangers, and
0.1% 0.7% 0.2% 0.01% 0.01% 1.5% 0.5%
copper-coated rods are primarily used to fabricate and repair pressure vessel fabrication.
power piping and boilers in the power generation industry. Tensile Strength 93 642
Classification and Approvals Typical Undiluted Weld Metal Analysis
TIGROD ER80S-B2 is embossed on both ends with the Elongation % in 2" 26% AWS/ASME SFA 5.23: EB2R OK Flux 10.62
alloy identification.
C Mn Si P S Cr Mo Cu
Typical Undiluted Weld Metal Analysis Fluxes 0.05% 0.71% 0.19% 0.011% 0.007% 1.6% 0.52% 0.52%
Classification and Approvals OK Flux 10.62 is a high basicity flux with excellent mechanical
AWS/SFA 5.28: ER80S-B2 C Mn Si P S Cr Mo X-Factor OK Flux 10.63
properties.
0.08% 0.5% 0.4% 0.007% 0.01% 5.8% 0.5% <15 OK Flux 10.63 is a low residual, highly basic flux for welding C Mn Si P S Cr Mo Cu X-Factor
creep resistant steels.
Shielding Gas 0.05% 0.70% 0.19% 0.011% 0.004% 1.6% 0.52% 0.52% <15
100% Argon Storage and Reconditioning
Store open electrodes in a dry place Complimentary Products
GTAW (Tigrod ER80S-B2)
Complimentary Products SMAW (Atom Arc 8018-CM)
SMAW (Atom Arc 8018-CM) Ordering Information FCAW (Dual Shield 8000-B2)
FCAW (Dual Shield 8000-B2) TIG80SB2 1/16X36X10#T/30#CT E2............................ 250JF48 Store unopened bags at 68oF +/- 18oF (20oC +/- 10oC)
Recondition electrodes at 570oF +/- 45oF (300oC +/- 25oC) for 2- 4
SAW (Spoolarc U515 w/ OK Flux 10.62) TIG80SB2 3/32X36X10#T/30#CT E2............................ 250JF50 Typical Mechanical Properties hrs
TIG80SB2 1/8X36X10#T/30#CT E2.............................. 250JF52
TIG80SB2 5/32X36X10#T/30#CT E2............................ 250JF54 Stress Relieved 1 hr. @ 1275oF (690oC)
with OK Flux 10.62 Ordering Information
ksi MPa U515 CU 3/32X65#CL....................................................2184F30
Yield Strength 76 520 U515 CU 1/8X65#CL......................................................2184F32
U515 CU 5/32X65#CL....................................................2184F34
Tensile Strength 88 610 U515 CU 3/16X65#CL....................................................2184F35
Elongation % in 2" 26% U515 CU 3/32X800#DR.................................................2186F10
U515 CU 1/8X800#DR...................................................2186F12
U515 CU 5/32X800#DR.................................................2186F14
Stress Relieved 8 hr. @ 1275oF (690oC) U515 CU 1/8 700#DR.....................................................2186F52
with OK Flux 10.62 U515 CU 1/4X600#DR.................................................. 218EFLS
ksi MPa U515 CU 1/8X800#DR...................................................2186F12
U515 CU 1/16X900#OMP 2/PLT................................... 218UF48
OK Flux 10.62 55# BAG.........................................106200000A
Tensile Strength 87 600 ok flux 10.63 55# bag.........................................106300000A

8 9
atom arc® 9018-cm dual shield® 9000-B3
Stress Relieved 20 hr. @ 1275oF (690oC) Typical Mechanical Properties

ksi MPa
Yield Strength 85 587 Shielding Gas: CO2 ksi MPa
Tensile Strength 100 690 Yield Strength 84 580
Elongation % in 2" 22% Tensile Strength 97 669
C Mn Si P S Cr Mo X-Factor Typical Undiluted Weld Metal Analysis, CO2
0.07% 0.7% 0.4% 0.011% 0.008% 2.2% 1.1% <15 C Mn Si P S Cr Mo X-Factor
0.06% 0.6% 0.6% 0.01% 0.008% 2.2% 1% <15

Store open electrodes at 225oF (105oC) Storage and Reconditioning*
Recondition electrodes at 700oF (370oC) for 1 hour Store open electrodes at 300oF (150oC)
Atom Arc 9018-CM is an all-position low hydrogen electrode Dual Shield 9000-B3 is an all-position flux cored electrode Recondition electrodes at 300oF (150oC) for 6-8 hours
designed for welding 2.5% Cr - 1% Mo steels commonly which deposits a 2.25% Cr - 1% Mo weld metal. The weld
Ordering Information metal analysis is similar to an E9018-B3 low hydrogen
used in pressure vessels, heat exchangers and related *Note: If packaged on a plastic spool, remove spool from plastic
AA 9018-CM 1/8X14X50#HS..................................... 255071813 electrode. Dual Shield 9000-B3 is recommended for welding bag before placing in oven. Store at 125oF (52oC).
components. AA 9018-CM 3/16X14X50#HS................................... 255073116 2.25% Cr - 1% Mo steels. This wire is designed for single or
AA 9018-CM 3/32X14X50#HS................................... 255073314 multiple pass welding. Shielding gas of 100% CO2 and
Classification and Approvals AA 9018-CM 5/32X14X50#HS................................... 255075319
75% Ar - remainder CO2 may be used. Ordering Information
MILITARY-MIL-E-0022200/8: MIL-9018-B3 AA 9018-CM 7/32X18X50#HS................................... 255077315 DS 9000-B3 045X33#PSP VP.................................... 245006424
A.B.S.- AWS A5.5: E9018-B3 AA 9018-CM 1/8X14X10#HS..................................... 255071821 DS 9000-B3 045X33#AWS......................................... 245006523
AWS/ASME SFA 5.5: E9018-B3H4R AA 9018-CM 3/32X14X10#HS................................... 255073322 Classification and Approvals DS 9000-B3 1/16X33#AWS........................................ 245006416
AA 9018-CM 5/32X14X10#HS................................... 255075327 AWS/ASME SFA 5.29: E91T1-B3C/B3M DS 9000-B3 1/16X60#CL........................................... 245006515
Application
This electrode is designed to meet the most stringent
standards for welding 1.25% Cr - 0.5% Mo steels while SMAW (Atom Arc 9018-CM)
producing an X-Factor <15 MAX. GTAW (Tigrod ER90S-B3)
SAW (Autrod 13.20SC w/ OK Flux 10.62 or 10.63)
GTAW (Tigrod ER90S-B3) Shielding Gas
FCAW (Dual Shield 9000-B3) 100% CO2 or Argon - CO2 mixtures up to 75% Argon
SAW (Autrod 13.20SC w/ OK Flux 10.62 or OK Flux 10.63)

9018-B3H4R
Typical Mechanical Properties

ksi MPa

ksi MPa

10 11
tigrod® er90s-b3 ok autrod® 13.20sc
Typical Mechanical Properties Typical Charpy V-Notch

Stress Relieved 1 hr. @ 1275oF (690oC) Impact Properties
ksi MPa Testing
Yield Strength 79 545 Temperature Condition Ft.-lbs J
Tensile Strength 94 649 With OK Flux 10.62

-20ºF (-29ºC) Stress Relieved 59 80
1 hr. @ 1275oF (690oC)
With OK Flux 10.63
-80ºF (-62ºC) Stress Relieved 37 50
ksi MPa 1 hr. @ 1275oF (690oC)
Typical Wire Chemistry
C Mn Si P S Cr Mo
ESAB’s OK Autrod 13.20SC is a copper-coated low alloy
submerged arc wire designed for the welding of creep resistant 0.12% 0.63% 0.16% 0.006% 0.004% 2.3% 1%
TIGROD ER90S-B3 is a chrome-moly Tigrod used for steel of the 2.5% Cr - 1% Mo type. When combined with OK
joining 2.5% Cr - 1% Mo creep resistant steels. These Typical Undiluted Weld Metal Analysis Flux 10.63, OK Autrod 13.20SC produces a metalurgically
copper-coated rods are primarily used to fabricate and repair clean weld which is capable of meeting X-factor of less than Typical Undiluted Weld Metal Analysis
power piping, pressure vessels, heat exchangers and boilers C Mn Si P S Cr Mo X-Factor 15.This combination fulfills the stringent requirements for
toughness after step cooling treatment of the weld metal. OK OK Flux 10.62
in the power generation industry. 0.08% 0.6% 0.5% 0.009% 0.009% 2.4% 0.9% <15
Autrod 13.20SC can also be combined with OK Flux 10.62 for C Mn Si P S Cr Mo
applications not requiring step cooling treatment. OK Autrod
TIGROD ER90S-B3 is embossed on both ends with alloy 13.20SC is used for welding process piping, heat exchangers, 0.025% 0.015%
identification. Storage and Reconditioning and pressure vessel fabrication. 0.08% 0.6% 0.2%
max max
2.0% 0.85%
Store open electrodes in a dry place.
Classification and Approvals Classification and Approvals OK Flux 10.63
AWS/SFA 5.28: ER90S-B3 Ordering Information AWS/ASME SFA 5.23: EB3R C Mn Si P S Cr Mo X-Factor
TIG90SB3 1/16X36X10#T/30#CT E2............................ 251JF48 0.010% 0.010%
0.07% 0.6% 0.2% 2.1% 1% <15
Shielding Gas TIG90SB3 3/32X36X10#T/30#CT E2............................ 251JF50 Fluxes max max
TIG90SB3 1/8X36X10#T/30#CT E2.............................. 251JF52
100% Argon OK Flux 10.62 is a high basicity flux with excellent mechanical
TIG90SB3 5/32X36X10#T/30#CT E2............................ 251JF54
properties.
OK Flux 10.63 is a highly basic, low residual flux for welding
Complimentary Products creep resistant steels. Storage and Reconditioning (Flux ONLY)
SMAW (Atom Arc 9018-CM) Store un-opened bag at 68oF +/- 18oF (20oC +/- 10oC), relative
FCAW (Dual Shield 9000-B3) humidity as low as possible, not exceeding 60%. Redry flux at
Complimentary Products 570oF +/- 45oF (300oC +/- 25oC) for 2 - 4 hours.
SAW (Autrod 13.20SC w/ OK Flux 10.62 or 10.63)
SMAW (Atom Arc 9018-CM)
FCAW (Dual Shield 9000-B3) Ordering Information
GTAW (Tigrod ER90S-B3) OK AUTROD 13.20SC 3/32X65#CL..............................2554F30
OK AUTROD 13.20SC 1/8X65#CL................................2554F32
Typical Mechanical Properties OK AUTROD 13.20SC 5/32X65#CL..............................2554F34
OK Flux 10.62 55# BAG.........................................106200000A
Stress Relieved 1 hr. @ 1275oF (690oC) ok flux 10.63 55# bag.........................................106300000A
with OK Flux 10.62
ksi MPa

with OK Flux 10.63
ksi MPa

12 13
atom arc® 8018-b6 dual SHIELD® b6
Typical Mechanical Properties Typical Undiluted Weld Metal Analysis

Stress Relieved 1 hr. @ 1375 F (746 C) o o
75%Ar - 25%CO2
ksi MPa C Mn Si P S Cr Mo X-Factor
Yield Strength 86 593 0.05% 0.5% 0.5% 0.006% 0.007% 5.4% 0.5% <15
Tensile Strength 101 695 CO2

0.08% 0.6% 0.7% 0.01% 0.006% 4.7% 0.5% <15
Typical Undiluted Weld Metal Analysis Storage and Reconditioning*

C Mn Si P S Cr Mo X-Factor Store open electrodes at 300oF (150oC)
0.07% 0.7% 0.5% 0.013% 0.009% 5.3% 0.6% <15 Recondition electrodes at 300oF (150oC) for 6 to 8 hours
*Note: If packaged on a plastic spool, remove spool from plastic

Atom Arc 8018-B6 is designed to weld 5% Cr - 0.5% Storage and Reconditioning Dual Shield B6 is an all-position flux cored electrode
bag before placing in oven. Store at 125oF (52oC).
Mo creep resistant steels such as ASTM A387 Grade 5, Store open electrodes at 225oF (105oC) designed for use with 75% Ar / 25% CO2 or 100% CO2
A213-T5 and A335-P5. These steels are normally used in Recondition electrodes at 700oF (370oC) for 1 hour shielding gas. Dual Shield B6 is intended for use on pipe Ordering Information**
pressure vessels and piping for high temperature service. and plate steels having a nominal 5% Chromium - 0.5% DS B6 045X33#PSP VP............................................. 258079045
Ordering Information Molybdenum composition. These steels are typically used
Classification and Approvals in process piping in the oil, gas, petrochemical, and marine ** Note: 8"-15" spools are available as a special order item.
AA 8018-B6 3/32X14X10#HS..................................... 255197808
AWS/ASME SFA 5.5: E8018-B6H4R AA 8018-B6 1/8X14X10#HS....................................... 255197816 industries.
AA 8018-B6 5/32X14X10#HS..................................... 255197824
AA 8018-B6 3/16X14X10#HS..................................... 255197832 Classification and Approvals
Application AWS/ASME SFA 5.29: E81T1-B6C/B6M
This electrode is designed to meet the most stringent standards
for welding 5% Cr - 0.5% Mo steels while producing an X-Factor
<15 MAX. Shielding Gas
100% CO2 or Argon - CO2 mixtures up to 75% Argon
Preheat Information
The recommended preheat temperature for 5CrMo steels is Complimentary Products
400-500ºF depending on thickness. Post weld heat treatment is SMAW (Atom Arc 8018-B6)
generally required. GTAW (Tigrod ER80S-B6)
Complimentary Products Typical Mechanical Properties

FCAW (Dual Shield B6) Stress Relieved 2 hr. @ 1375oF (746oC)
Shielded Gas: 75% Ar / 25% CO2 ksi MPa
Electrode Imprint Marking Yield Strength 84 580
8018-B6H4R Tensile Strength 98 676

Shielded Gas: CO2 ksi MPa

14 15
TIGROD® ER80S-B6 atom arc® 8018-b8
Typical Mechanical Properties Typical Mechanical Properties

Stress Relieved 1 hr. @ 1350oF (732oC) Stress Relieved 1 hr. @ 1375oF (746oC)
ksi MPa
ksi MPa

Shielded Gas: 100% Ar ksi MPa
0.07% 0.8% 0.3% 0.01% 0.01% 8.6% 1% <15
Store open electrodes at 225oF (105oC)
TIGROD ER80S-B6 is a Chrome-Moly Tigrod for joining Typical Undiluted Weld Metal Analysis Atom Arc 8018-B8 is designed to weld 9% Cr - 1% Mo Recondition electrodes at 700oF (370oC) for 1 hour
5% Cr - 0.5% Mo steels such as ASTM A200-T5, A335-P5 creep resistant steels such as ASTM A213-T9 and A335-P9.
and A387-Gr5. These copper coated rods are primarily These steels are used in pressure vessels and piping for high
used to fabricate and repair power piping, pressure vessels, 0.08% 0.5% 0.4% 0.007% 0.01% 5.8% 0.5% <15 temperature service. Ordering Information
heat exchangers and boilers used in the power generation AA 8018-B8 3/32X14X10#HS..................................... 255187908
industry. Classification and Approvals AA 8018-B8 1/8X14X10#HS....................................... 255187916
Storage and Reconditioning AA 8018-B8 5/32X14X10#HS..................................... 255187924
AWS/ASME SFA 5.5: E8018-B8H4R
TIGROD ER80S-B6 is embossed on both ends with the Store open electrodes in a dry place. AA 8018-B8 3/16x14x10#HS...................................... 258181932
alloy identification.
Application
Ordering Information This electrode is designed to meet the most stringent standards
Classification and Approvals TIG80SB6 1/16X36X10#T/30#CT E2............................ 252JF48 for welding 9% Cr - 1% Mo steels while producing an X-Factor
AWS A5.28: ER80S-B6 TIG80SB6 3/32X36X10#T/30#CT E2............................ 252JF50 <15 MAX.
TIG80SB6 1/8X36X10#T/30#CT E2.............................. 252JF52
TIG80SB6 5/32X36X10#T/30#CT E2............................ 252JF54
Shielding Gas Preheat Information
100% Argon Preheat should be used on hardenable steels to prevent the
formation of a hard heat-affected zone. Preheat may also be
Complimentary Products required in welding heavy sections.
SMAW (Atom Arc 8018-B6)
FCAW (Dual Shield B6) Complimentary Products
FCAW (Dual Shield B8)

8018-B8H4R
Product Data Sheet....................................COR-1065 Product Data Sheet.................................... SSP-1021

16 17
TIGROD® ER80S-B8 atom arc® 9015-b9
Typical Mechanical Properties Typical Mechanical Properties

Stress Relieved 1 hr. @ 1375oF (746oC) Stress Relieved 1 hr. @ 1350oF (732oC)
Shielded Gas: 100% Ar ksi MPa
ksi MPa
Typical Undiluted Weld Metal Analysis Stress Relieved 1 hr. @ 1375oF (746oC)
ksi MPa
0.07% 0.50% 0.40% 0.005% 0.003% 9% 1% <15
Storage and Reconditioning Elongation % in 2" 19%
Store open electrodes in a dry place.
TIGROD ER80S-B8 is a solid wire for TIG welding requiring
Atom Arc 9015-B9 is designed to weld the modified 9% Stress Relieved 2 hr. @ 1400°F (760°C)
creep strength. This 9% Cr - 1% Mo Tigrod is used to weld Ordering Information Cr - 1% Mo steels known by the designations T91, P91 or
9% chromium - 1% Molybdenum steels (ASTM Section IX, Grade 91. These steels are designed to provide improved
TIG80SB8 1/16X36X10#T/30#CT E2........................ 259971281 ksi MPa
P No 5B, Group 1) such as ASTM A335 Grade P9 or ASTM TIG80SB8 3/32X36X10#T/30#CT E2........................ 259971299 creep strength, toughness fatigue and oxidation, and
A213 Grade T9. TIG80SB8 1/8X36X10#T/30#CT E2.......................... 259971307 corrosion resistance at elevated temperatures. Yield Strength 86 593
TIG80SB8 5/32X36X10#T/30#CT E2........................ 259971315 Tensile Strength 106 731
TIGROD ER80S-B8 is embossed on both ends with the This product is specially formulated with a combined Mn + Ni Elongation % in 2" 23%
alloy identification. < 1.20% to meet numerous customers’ specifications while
producing an X-Factor <15.
Classification and Approvals Typical Undiluted Weld Metal Analysis
AWS A5.28: ER80S-B8 Classification and Approvals C Mn Si P S Cr Mo X-Factor
AWS/ASME SFA 5.5: E9015-B9H4R
0.1% 0.85% 0.19% 0.009% 0.009% 8.6% 1% <15
Shielding Gas
100% Argon Application
This electrode is used to weld high temperature steam pipe, Storage and Reconditioning
heat exchangers and boiler units. Store open electrodes at 225oF (105oC) to 300oF (150oC)
Complimentary Products Recondition electrodes at 700oF (371oC) for 1 hour
SMAW (Atom Arc 8018-B8)
FCAW (Dual Shield B8) Preheat Information
The recommended preheat temperature for 9CrMo steels is
400-500°F depending on thickness. Post weld heat treatment AA 9015-B9 3/32X14X10#HS..................................... 255061335
is generally required. AA 9015-B9 1/8X14X10#HS....................................... 255061343
AA 9015-B9 5/32X14X10#HS..................................... 255061350
AA 9015-B9 3/16X14X10#HS..................................... 255061368

9015-B9H4R
Product Data Sheet....................................COR-1069 Product Data Sheet.................................... SSP-1017

18 19
atom arc® 9015-b9 atom arc® 9018-b9
Historical data
Actual Chemical Analysis* Typical Mechanical Properties

Chemical
Min Median Max ksi MPa
Analysis
C 0.080 0.099 0.124 Yield Strength 103 711
Mn 0.59 0.85 0.99 Tensile Strength 119 821
Si 0.12 0.19 0.30 Elongation % in 2" 19%
P 0.004 0.009 0.011
S 0.007 0.009 0.010 Stress Relieved 2 hr. @ 1400oF (760oC)
Cr 8.04 8.60 9.60 ksi MPa
Ni 0.15 0.25 0.45
Mo 0.90 0.99 1.11
Nb 0.02 0.04 0.09
Al <0.001 0.001 0.002
Co 0.002 0.008 0.010
Atom Arc 9018-B9 is designed to weld the modified 9% Cr - Typical Undiluted Weld Metal Analysis
Cu 0.01 0.05 0.12 1% Mo steels known by the designations T91, P91 or Grade 91.
V 0.16 0.21 0.29 These steels are designed to provide improved creep strength, C Mn Si P S Cr Mo X-Factor
toughness, fatigue and oxidation, and corrosion resistance at 0.1% 0.8% 0.17% 0.008% 0.009% 8.5% 1% <15
N 0.032 0.040 0.052
elevated temperatures.
As <0.0002 0.0010 0.0030
Sb <0.0004 0.0010 0.0021 This electrode is specially formulated with a combined Mn + Ni Storage and Reconditioning
< 1.20% max. and meets numerous customers’ specifications
Sn 0.0002 0.002 0.0093 Store open electrodes @ 225°F (107°C) to 300°F (150°C)
while producing an X-Factor <15 MAX.
Recondition electrodes @ 700°F (370°C) for 1 hour
Fe Rem Rem Rem
Classification and Approvals
* This data is compiled from 21 different lots
AWS/ASME SFA 5.5: E9018-B9H4R Ordering Information
within the time period of January 2007 to AA 9018-B9 3/32x14x10# HS..................................... 255067845
May 2008. AA 9018-B9 1/8x14x10# HS....................................... 255067852
Application AA 9018-B9 5/32x14x10# HS..................................... 255067860
This electrode is used to weld high temperature pipe, AA 9018-B9 3/16x14x10# HS..................................... 255067878
Actual Mechanical Analysis** heat exchangers and boiler units.
Min Median Max

Preheat Information
1400oF (760oC) 1375oF (765oC) 1400oF (760oC) 1375oF (765oC) 1400oF (760oC) 1375oF (765oC)
The recommended preheat temperature for 9CrMo steels is
Mechanical Analysis @ 2 hrs. @ 1 hr. @ 2 hrs. @ 1 hr. @ 2 hrs. @ 1 hr.
400-500°F depending on thickness. Post weld heat treatment is
Yield (ksi) 83.5 88.4 86.5 96.6 89.3 121.9 generally required.
Tensile (ksi) 105.2 107.4 107.5 115.1 109.1 137.9
% Elongation 22 17 22 21 24 23 Complimentary Products
X-Factor 11 8 12 12 14 14 GTAW (Tigrod ER90S-B9)
Diffusible H2 (ml/100gr) 1.2 0.6 2.1 1.75 3.2 3.2
Charpy V-notch @ 68°F (Ft.-lbs) 49.8 n/a 58.4 n/a 67 n/a
9018-B9H4R
** The data above was derived in the PWHT condition through March 2008 at 1 hour at 1375°F +/- 25°F. As of April 2008, the
specification has changed to 1400°F +/- 25°F at 2 hours. This data is compiled from 21 different tests within the time period of
January 2007 to May 2008.
Product Data Sheet.................................... SSP-1017 Product Data Sheet.................................... SSP-1023

20 21
atom arc® 9018-b9 dual SHIELD® b9
Historical data
Actual Chemical Analysis* Typical Mechanical Properties

Chemical
Analysis Min Median Max Shielded Gas: 75% Ar / 25% CO2 ksi MPa
C 0.080 0.098 0.124 Yield Strength 87 600
Mn 0.69 0.84 1.11 Tensile Strength 107 738
Si 0.12 0.17 0.25 Elongation % in 2" 21%
P 0.004 0.008 0.013
S 0.007 0.009 0.014
Cr 8.04 8.55 9.51
Impact Properties
Ni 0.19 0.27 0.51
Testing
Mo 0.85 1.00 1.18 Temperature Condition Ft.-lbs J
Nb 0.02 0.04 0.10 Stress Relieved
70ºF (20ºC) 30 40
Al 0.001 0.003 0.010 2 hr. @ 1400oF (760oC)
Co <0.001 0.007 0.020
Cu 0.010 0.04 0.14 Dual Shield B9 is an all-position flux cored electrode designed Typical Undiluted Weld Metal Analysis,
for the welding of modified 9% chromium creep resistant
V 0.16 0.19 0.22
steels, such as ASTM A335 Grade P91 or ASTM A213 T91.
75% Ar/25% CO2
N 0.032 0.039 0.051 This product is specially formulated with a combined Mn + Ni C Mn Si P S Cr Mo X-Factor
As <0.0002 <0.0002 0.0028 < 1.20% to meet a variety of customer specifications.
0.1% 0.96% 0.18% 0.009% 0.008% 8.9% 1% <15

Sb <0.0004 0.0010 0.0017 Dual Shield B9 product is packaged on wire spool basket to Immediately from the vacuum-sealed bag the diffusible
Sn 0.0002 0.0020 0.0077 allow for the product to be placed in a heated storage oven. In Hydrogen is 4ml/100 g weld metal.
addition, the wire is packaged in a vacuum-sealed foil bag to X-Factor: < 15
Fe Rem Rem Rem Mn + Ni ration is < 1.20%
prevent moisture pick up until the sealed bag has been opened.
* This data is compiled from 8 different lots within the time period Classification and Approvals
of March 2007 to February 2008.
Storage and Reconditioning*
AWS/ASME A5.29: E91T1-B9M-H8 Store open electrodes at 300oF (150oC)
Recondition electrodes at 300oF (150oC) for 1 hour
Application *Note: If packaged on a plastic spool, remove spool from plastic
Dual Shield B9 has been formulated for use with 75% Argon/ bag before placing in oven. Store at 125oF (52oC).
Actual Mechanical Analysis** 25% CO2 shielding gas. This product operates well out-of-
position, especially in the 6 o’clock position on pipe producing a
Min Median Max
flat to slightly convex weld bead. Ordering Information
Mechanical Analysis 1400 F (760 C) @ 2 hrs.
o o DS B9 045x15#PSP VP...............................................242250041
DS B9 045x33#BAWS VP...........................................242250033
Yield (ksi) 93 96 124 Shielding Gas DS B9 1/16x33#BAWS VP .........................................242250017
Tensile (ksi) 112 115 141 75% Ar/25% CO2
% Elongation 18 20 23
X-Factor 8 12 14
SMAW (Atom Arc 9015-B9 and/or 9018-B9)
Diffusible H2 (ml/100gr) 0.3 1.7 1.9 GTAW (Tigrod ER90S-B9)
Charpy V-notch (Ft.-lbs) 39 60 80
** The data above was derived in the PWHT condition at 1 hour at 1375°F +/- 25°F.
This data is compiled from 8 different tests within the time period of March 2007 to February 2008.

22 23
dual SHIELD® b9 tigrod® er90s-b9
Actual Chemical Analysis Historic Data* Typical Mechanical Properties

Chemical Stress Relieved 1 hr. @ 1275oF (690oC)
Min Median Max
Analysis
ksi MPa
C 0.090 0.095 0.110
Mn 0.80 0.96 1.15
Si 0.13 0.18 0.22
P 0.003 0.009 0.012
S 0.006 0.008 0.010
Cr 8.13 8.93 9.61
Ni 0.04 0.19 0.25 ksi MPa
Mo 0.92 0.99 1.11 Yield Strength 76 524
Nb 0.02 0.03 0.00 Tensile Strength 93 642
Al 0.001 0.002 0.003 Elongation % in 2" 25%

Co <0.001 0.001 0.003 TIGROD ER90S-B9 is a solid bare rod for TIG welding of
Cu 0.010 0.033 0.040 modified 9% chromium-moly creep resistant steels, such as Typical Undiluted Weld Metal Analysis
ASTM A335 Grade P91 or ASTM A213 T91.
V 0.170 0.220 0.250 C Mn Si P S Cr Mo X-Factor
N 0.028 0.031 0.034 TIGROD ER90S-B9 is embossed on both ends with the 0.1% 0.6% 0.5% 0.01% 0.01% 2.4% 0.9% <15
As <0.0002 0.0005 0.0005 alloy identification.
Sb <0.0004 0.0005 0.0027 Storage and Reconditioning
Sn 0.0018 0.0050 0.0081
Classification and Approvals Store open electrodes in a dry place.
AWS A5.28: ER90S-B9
Fe Rem Rem Rem
Shielding Gas TIGROD ER90SB9 1/16X36X10#T30# CT E2.......... 259967289
* This data is compiled from 8 different lots within the time period 100% Argon
of February 2007 to May 2008. TIGROD ER90SB9 3/32X36X10#T30# CT E2.......... 259967198
TIGROD ER90SB9 1/8X36X10#T30# CT E2............ 259967206
TIGROD ER90SB9 5/32X36X10#T30# CT E2.......... 259967141
Actual Mechanical Analysis Historic Data** SMAW (Atom Arc 9018-B9 and/or 9015-B9)
Min Median Max
Mechanical Analysis 1400 F (760 C) @ 2 hrs.
o o
Yield (ksi) 82 88 90
Tensile (ksi) 104 107 109
% Elongation 20 22 22
X-Factor 5 9.5 10
Diffusible H2 (ml/100gr) 2.2 4.9 6.5
Charpy V-notch @ 70°F(Ft.-lbs) 22 29.6 34.6
** The data above was derived in the PWHT condition at 1400°F +/- 25°F at 2 hours.
This data is compiled from 8 different tests within the time period of February 2007 to May 2008.

24 25
Atom arc 9015-b9 ATOM ARC® 9018-b9
Certified Material Test Report Certified Material Test Report
Certificate of Analysis Certificate of Analysis

Certified Materials Test Report Certified Materials Test Report
Tradename Diffusible Hydrogen to AWS A4.3 Tradename Diffusible Hydrogen to AWS A4.3
Atom Arc 9015-B9 GC Atom Arc 9018-B9 GC
Average Value Average Value
2.6 2.2
Classification ml/100 gr Classification ml/100 gr
E9015-B9H4R E9018-B9H4R
Class Actual Mechanical Properties Class Actual Mechanical Properties

AWS A5.5: 2006, ASME SFA 5.5, SEC. II, PART C, AWS A5.5: 2006, ASME SFA 5.5, SEC. II, PART C,
Stress Relieved 2 hr. @ 1400 F (760 C) o o
2007 EDITION, 2008a ADDENDA 2007 EDITION, 2008a ADDENDA
ksi MPa ksi MPa
Diameter Yield Strength 81.5 562 Diameter Yield Strength 84.8 586
1/8" Tensile Strength 103.1 711 1/8" Tensile Strength 105.7 730
Length/Pkg Type Reduction in Area 60% Length/Pkg. Type Reduction in Area 62%
14" Elongation % in 2" 25% 14" Elongation % in 2" 24%
Heat/PKG Code No. Heat/PKG Code No.

090072 10347
Actual Charpy V-Notch Actual Charpy V-Notch
Lot No. Lot No.
4F924K01 Impact Properties 2C926K03 Impact Properties
Testing Testing
Temperature Condition Ft.-lbs J Temperature Condition Ft.-lbs J
Radiography Stress Relieved Radiography Stress Relieved
70ºF (21ºC) 77 104 70ºF (21ºC) 52 71
Satisfactory 2 hr @ 1400oF (760oC) Satisfactory 2 hr @ 1400oF (760oC)
Moisture by RC-412 Method Moisture by RC-412 Method
Out of the Can 0.08 Out of the Can 0.06

Exposed 0.19 Exposed 0.17
Concentricity 2% Concentricity 2%
Chemical Analysis Chemical Analysis

C Mn Si P S Cr Mo V Ni C Mn Si P S Cr Mo V Ni
0.09% 0.74% 0.19% 0.009% 0.008% 8.56% 0.96% 0.20% 0.21% 0.093% 0.80% 0.18% 0.012% 0.010% 9.51% 0.96% 0.21% 0.24%
Cu Al N Nb As Sb Sn X-Factor Cu Al N Nb As Sb Sn X-Factor
0.04% <0.01% 0.039% 0.04% 0.0017% 0.0005% 0.0023% 10 0.12% <0.01% 0.044% 0.03% 0.002% 0.001% 0.0047% 14
These properties represent a single test performed on a given lot/heat of material. The properties may change on another lot/heat test. These properties represent a single test performed on a given lot/heat of material. The properties may change on another lot/ heat test.
26 27
DUAL SHIELD® b9 Tigrod® ER90S-B9
Certified Material Test Report Certified Material Test Report
Certificate of Analysis Certificate of Analysis

Certified Materials Test Report Certified Materials Test Report
Tradename Actual Mechanical Properties Tradename

Dual Shield B9 Stress Relieved 2 hr. @ 1400 F (760 C) o o
TIGROD ER90S-B9
ksi MPa
Classification Yield Strength 85.5 590 Classification
E91T1-B9M Tensile Strength 105.9 731 ER-90S-B9
Reduction in Area 60%
Class Elongation % in 2" 22%
Class
AWS A5.29:2005 AWS A5.28-96, ASME SFA 5.28
Diameter Diameter
0.045" 1/8"
Actual Charpy V-Notch
Length/Pkg. Type Impact Properties Length
33# Spool 14"
Testing
Heat/PKG Code No. Heat/PKG Code No.
N/A Stress Relieved 12/2032-3-2
70ºF (21ºC) 38 52
2 hr @ 1400oF (760oC)
Lot No. Lot No.
87006 3-2
Radiography Radiography
Satisfactory Satisfactory
Actual Mechanical Properties

Diffusible Hydrogen to AWS A4.3 As Welded
GC ksi MPa
Average Value Yield Strength 59.4 410
5.3
ml/100 gr Tensile Strength 89.9 620
This material does meet “H8” Requirements. Elongation % in 2" 16%
Chemical Analysis Chemical Analysis

C Mn Si P S Cr Mo V Ni C Mn Si P S Cr Mo V Ni
0.09% 0.83% 0.14% 0.010% 0.008% 9.14% 1.03% 0.22% 0.21% 0.08% 0.51% 0.41% 0.008% 0.009% 8.64% 1.01% 0.20% 0.21%
Cu Al N Nb As Sb Sn X-Factor Cu Al N Ti X-Factor
0.04% <0.01% 0.035% 0.03% 0.0005% 0.0005% 0.0037% 12 0.14% 0.015% 0.020% 0.01% 10
These properties represent a single test performed on a given lot/heat of material. The properties may change on another lot/ heat test.
These properties represent a single test performed on a given lot/heat of material. The properties may change on another lot/heat test.
28 29
ESAB Cr-Mo p-91 ESAB ASME CERTIFICATE
filler metal creep data
30 31
ESAB ASME CERTIFICATE sAFETY dATA sHEETS
Safety Data Sheets (SDS) are provided for all filler metal products regardless of their respective
manufacturing location. A specfic SDS file can be downloaded from www.esabna.com (website)
or by contacting ESAB directly.
SDS files are organized by their respective product family, ie. Atom Arc Low Hydrogen Welding
Electrodes contain all EXX15 and EXX18 grade of product. Note: below are the various file names
and products included.
SDS File No. Product Grouping Product Included

7018-A1 7018-B2L
8018-B2 8018-B3L
Atom Arc Low Hydrogen
7970-S 9018-B3 8018-B6L
Welding Electrodes
8018-B6 8018-B8
9015-B9 9018-B9
8000-B2 8000-B2L
Dual Shield Low Alloy
7971-2-T 9000-B3 9000-B3L
Flux Cored Welding Electrode
B-6 B-9
U-515 (EB2) 13.20 SC (EB3)
ESAB Spoolarc and TIGROD ER80S-B2
8000-F
Welding Electrodes and Rods ER80S-B6 ER90S-B3
ER80S-B8 ER90S-B9
32
33
NOTES NOTES
34 35
World leader in welding and
cutting technology and systems
ESAB operates at the forefront of welding and cutting technology. Over one hundred years of continuous
improvement in products and processes enables us to meet the challenges of technological advances in every
sector in which ESAB operates.
Quality and environment standards

Quality and the environment are two key areas of focus. ESAB is one of few international companies to
have achieved the new ISO 14001 standard in Environmental Management Systems across all our global
manufacturing facilities.
At ESAB, quality is an ongoing process that is at the heart of all our production processes and facilities worldwide.
Multinational manufacturing, local representation and an international network of independent distributors bring
the benefits of ESAB quality and unrivaled expertise in materials and processes within reach of all our customers,
wherever they are located.
Be Safe When Welding or Cutting

Please read and understand the safety labels, instruction manuals and/or safety data sheet for your welding or cutting
product before you weld or cut. Always follow safe practices and use adequate ventilation when welding or cutting. More
information on welding health and safety can be found at www.esabna.com.
Call 1-800-ESAB-123 or 1-800-933-7070 (Filler Metal Headquarters)
ESAB Welding & Cutting Products www.esabna.com

U.S.A: 411 South Ebenezer Road | Florence, SC 29501-0504
Canada: 6010 Tomken Road | Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1X9
Mexico: Ave. Diego Diaz de Berlanga No. 130 | Col. Nogalar | San Nicolas de los Garza, N.L. 66480 | Monterrey, Mexico
Filler Metal Manufacturing: 801 Wilson Avenue | PO Box 517 | Hanover, PA 17331
COR-1078 5m 3/10

WELDING CONSUMABLES
FOR THERMAL POWER STATIONS
Editorial
BÖHLER WELDING provides welding solutions for thermal manufacturers. The latest developments can always be related
power stations since 1927. An assortment of world class filler to state-of-the-art base material like the steel grades T/P23 and
metals is available for the fabrication of boilers, nuclear reactors, T/P24, T/P91 and T/P92.
casings for steam and gas turbines and other components.
Whenever high temperature- and creep resistance are essential, High demanding industries call for advanced product standards,
BÖHLER WELDING is the competent partner and supplier. consistent product quality and best operating characteristics to
guarantee safe operating conditions and extend the life of
In addition, BÖHLER WELDING offers a comprehensive range today's modern plant operations. That´s why BÖHLER
of corrosion resistant alloys, such as stainless steel and nickel WELDING´s high temperature and creep resisting welding
base welding consumables for the construction of flue gas consumables have achieved a leading market position.
desulphurisation units and other applications. A comprehensive worldwide sales network of well-stocked
partners ensures rapid and punctual delivery in more than
Increased environmental requirements and the need for higher 80 countries, on every contintent.
thermal efficiencies are driving the development of new mate-
rials for power stations. BÖHLER WELDING develops the Your nearest sales partner can be found on the Internet at
matching filler metals in close cooperation with leading steel www.boehler-welding.com
BÖHLER WELDING consumables are available in moisture

resistant and hermetically sealed packs.
© Brodosplit
Selection guide
Welding processes
Base metals
AISI/UNS/ASTM SMAW FCAW GTAW GMAW SAW Page
Mild steels
Re ≤ 380 MPa SA106A+B FOX EV 50 Ti 52-FD EMK 6 EMK 6 EMS 2+BB 24 5
High strength steels

Re ≤ 500 MPa SA508 Cl.2 FOX EV 65 NiMo 1-IG 3 NiMo 1-UP+BB 24 6
High Temperature and

creep resistant steels
0,5Mo P/T1 FOX DMO Ti, Kb (DMO) DMO-IG DMO-IG EMS 2Mo+BB 24 7
1Cr 0,5Mo P/T11 FOX DCMS Ti, Kb (DCMS) DCMS-IG DCMS-IG EMS 2 CrMo+BB 24 7, 8
1.25Cr 1Mo+V – FOX DCMV 8
0,5Cr 1Mo +V – FOX DMV 83Kb DMV 83-IG DMV 83-IG 9
2.25Cr 1Mo P/T22 FOX CM 2Kb CM 2-IG CM 2-IG CM 2-UP+BB 24 9
2.25Cr 1Mo (mod.) P/T23 FOX P 23 P 23-IG P 23-UP+BB 430 10
P/T24 FOX P 24 P 24-IG P 24-UP+BB 430 10
5Cr 0,5Mo P/T5 FOX CM 5Kb CM 5-IG CM 5-IG CM 5-UP+BB 24 11
9Cr 1Mo P/T9 FOX CM 9Kb C M 9-IG 11
9Cr 1Mo +V(W) P/T91 FOX C 9 MV C 9 MV-IG C 9 MV-IG C 9 MV-UP+BB 910 11, 12
C 9 MV-MC 12
– FOX C 9 MVW C 9 MVW-IG 12, 13
P/T92 FOX P 92 P 92-IG P 92-UP+BB 910 13
12Cr 1Mo +VW – FOX 20 MVW 20 MVW-IG CN 18/11-IG 20 MVW-UP+BB 24 14, 15
18Cr 11Ni 304H FOX CN 18/11 CN 18/11-IG CN 18/11-UP+BB 202 14, 15
FOX E 308 H E 308 H-FD ER 308 H-IG 15
E 308 H PW-FD 15
18Cr 10Ni +Nb 347H FOX E 347 H 15
Special applications
18Cr 8Ni Mn dissimilar joints, FOX A 7 A 7-FD A 7 CN-IG A 7-IG A 7 CN-UP+BB 203 16
repair and FOX A 7-A A 7 PW-FD A 7-MC 16
maintenance
Heat resistant
25Cr 4Ni 327 FOX FA FA-IG FA-IG 17
22Cr 12Ni 309 FOX FF FF-IG FF-IG 17
FOX FF-A 17
25Cr 20Ni 310 FOX FFB FFB-IG FFB-IG 17
FOX FFB-A 17
21Cr 33Ni Mn N08810/800H FOX CN 21/33 Mn CN 21/33 Mn-IG CN 21/33 Mn-IG 18
Nickel base alloys

Alloy 800 N06600 FOX NIBAS 70/15 19
Alloy 600 N06600 FOX NIBAS 70/20 NIBAS 70/20-FD NIBAS 70/20-IG NIBAS 70/20-IG NIBAS 70/20-UP+BB 444 19
Alloy 625 N06625 FOX NIBAS 625 NIBAS 625-FD NIBAS 625-IG NIBAS 625-IG NIBAS 625-UP+BB 444 20
Alloy 617 N06617 FOX NIBAS 617 NIBAS 617-IG NIBAS 617-IG NIBAS 617-UP+BB 444 20
4
Mild steels
BÖHLER Welding Typical Typical Sizes Approvals Characteristics and applications Base metals
process analysis mechanical
Standard properties
EN
AWS % mm
FOX EV 50 SMAW C 0.07 Re 490 N/mm2 2.0 TÜV-D, Basic coated electrode engineered for high-quality Steels up to a yield strength
Si 0.5 Rm 560 N/mm2 2.5 DB, UZ, welds. Excellent strength and toughness properties of 420 N/mm2 (60 KSI).
E 42 5 B 42 H5 Mn 1.1 A5 27% 3.2 ÖBB, down to -50 °C. Metal recovery approx. 110 %.
Av 190 J 4.0 TÜV-A, Good weldability in all position except for vertical- e.g. P235G1TH,
E7018-1H4R 100 J…-50 °C 5.0 ABS, BV, down. Very low hydrogen content (acc. AWS P265GH – P295GH
6.0 CL, DNV, condition HD < 4 ml/100 g). P310GH, P355T1, P355NH
FI, GL,
ISPESL, Suitable for welding steels with low purity and high ASTM e.g.
LR, RMR, carbon content. Welding in steel construction, SA106A + B
RINA, boiler and tank manufacture, vehicle construction, SA515 Gr.60-70
UDT, shipbuilding, and machine construction as well as SA516 Gr.55-70
LTSS, for buffer layers on build ups on high carbon steels.
VUZ, Especially suitable for off-shore construction,
SEPROZ, CODT tested at -10 °C. It can be used in sour gas
ITI, PDO, applications (HIC-Test acc. NACE TM-02-84).
CRS Test values for SSC-test are available too.
EMK 6 GMAW C 0.1 Re 440 N/mm2 0.8 TÜV-D, GMAW wire and GTAW rod for joints in boiler
Si 0.9 Rm 530 N/mm2 1.0 DB, UZ, and vessel fabrication as well as in structural steel
G3Si1(GMAW) Mn 1.4 A5 30% 1.2 ÖBB, FI, engineering.
W3Si1(GTAW) Av 160 J 1.6 TÜV-A, GL,
80 J…-40 °C ABS, CWB, Thanks to the good mechanical properties this filler
ER70S-6 Ar +15-25 % CO2 LR, UDT, wire is optimally suited for welding thick-walled
LTSS, components.
SEPROZ
The non copper coated version of the solid wire
GTAW C 0.1 Re 430 N/mm2 1.6 TÜV-D, BÖHLER EMK 6 TOP is designed for low spatter
Si 0.9 Rm 540 N/mm2 2.0 TÜV-A, formation and excellent feeding properties for
Mn 1.4 A5 27% 2.4 UDT, extremely high wire feed rates. These types are
Av 160 J LTSS, especially suited for robotic welding.
>47 J…-50 °C SEPROZ
Ti 52-FD FCAW C 0.06 Re 490 N/mm2 1.2 TÜV-D, All–position rutile flux-cored wire with fast freezing Steels up to a yield strength
Si 0.5 Rm 580 N/mm2 1.6 TÜV-A, slag system. User friendly welding characteristics in of 460 N/mm2 (60 KSI).
T 46 2 P M 1 H10 Mn 1.2 A5 26% ABS, BV, all positions with one wire diameter 1.2 mm and
T 42 2 P C 1 H5 Ti + Av 180 J DNV, GL, same parameter setting. Excellent mechanical e.g. P235G1TH,
90 J…-40 °C LR, UDT, properties, easy slag removal, low spatter loss, P265GH – P295GH,
E71T-1H4 CRS smooth, finely rippled bead surface, high X-ray P310GH, P355T1, P355NH
E71T-1MH8 safety.
ASTM e.g.
The product performs to the highest productivity SA106 A+B
with significant savings in time and economical SA515 Gr.60-70
aspects when used for positional welding. SA516 Gr.55-70
Wire: EMS 2 SAW C 0.07 Re 440 N/mm2 2.0 TÜV-D Universally applicable for constructional steels and Steels up to a yield strength
Si 0.25 Rm 520 N/mm2 2.5 UDT fine grained steels, e.g. in shipbuilding, structural of 400 N/mm2 (60 KSI).
S2 Mn 1.05 A5 33% 3.0 steel work, and pressure vessel fabrication. The
Av 185 J 3.2 Wire: flux reacts metallurgically Mn-neutral. e.g. P235G1TH,
EM12K 140 J…-60 °C 4.0 TÜV-D, P265GH – P295GH,
TÜV-A, The sub-arc wire/flux combination produces very P310GH, P355T1, P355NH
Flux: BB 24 UZ, DB, good low temperature impact properties down to
ÖBB, -60 °C. Excellent slag detachability, smooth beads, ASTM e.g.
SA FB 1 65 DC H5 KTA 1408.1 good wetting and low hydrogen contents SA106 A+B
SEPROZ ( ≤ 5 ml/100 g) are further important features. SA515 Gr.60, 65
The combination is ideally suited for multi-pass SA516 Gr.55-65
welding of thick plates.
BÖHLER WELDING Consumables for thermal power stations 5

High strength steels
Standard properties
EN
AWS % mm
FOX EV 65 SMAW C 0.06 Re 600 N/mm2 2.5 TÜV-D, Basic coated electrode with high ductility and crack Constructional steels, pipe-
Si 0.3 Rm 650 N/mm2 3.2 UDT, resistance, for high-strength fine-grained steels. and vessel steels, cryogenic
E 55 6 1 NiMo B 42 H5 Mn 1.2 A5 25% 4.0 SEPROZ Ductile down to -60 °C. Resistant to ageing. fine-grained steels and
Ni 0.8 Av 180 J special grades.
E8018-GH4R Mo 0.35 80 J…-60 °C Easy to handle in all positions except vertical-down.
Preheating and interpass temperature, as well as E295-E360,
post weld heat treatment as required by the base P355NL1-P460NL1.
metal. P355 NL2-P460NL2,
S380N-S500N, S355NH-
Very low hydrogen content S460NH, S380NL-S500NL,
(acc. AWS condition HD < 4 ml/100 g). S380NL1-S500NL1,
15NiCuMoNb5S (WB 36),
20MnMoNi5-5, 17MnMoV6-4
(WB 35), 22NiMoCr4-7
ASTM:
A302 Gr.A-D
A225 Gr.C
A508 Cl.2
A572 Gr.65
NiMo 1-IG GMAW C 0.08 Re 620 N/mm2 1.0 DB, UZ, GMAW wire for high strength, quenched and Pipe steels and fine grained steels,
Si 0.6 Rm 700 N/mm2 1.2 ÖBB, tempered fine-grained constructional steels. quenched and tempered fine-
G 55 6 M Mn3Ni1Mo Mn 1.8 A5 23% GL, UDT, grained steels.
G 55 4 C Mn3Ni1Mo Ni 0.9 Av 140 J SEPROZ The wire is suited for joint welding in boiler,
Mo 0.3 >47 J…-60 °C pressure vessel, pipeline, and crane construction S380N-S500N, S380NL-S500NL,
ER90S-G (80 % Ar/20 % CO2) as well as in structural steel engineering. S500NC-S550NC, N-A-XTRA
56-70, BHV 70, PAS 600, HSM
Re 590 N/mm2 Due to the precise addition of micro alloying 600, 20MnMoNi5-5
Rm 680 N/mm2 elements NiMo 1-IG wire features excellent
A5 25% ductility and crack resistance in spite of its high ASTM:
Av 120 J strength. Good cryogenic impact energy down A517 Gr.A,B,C,E,F,H,J,K,M,P
>47 J…-40 °C to -60 °C, low hydrogen contents in the deposit, A225 Gr.C
(100 % CO2) best feedability and low copper contents are other A633 Gr.E
advantages of this wire. Preheating and interpass A572 Gr.65
temperature as required by the base metal.
Wire: 3 NiMo 1-UP SAW C 0.08 Re 580 N/mm2 4.0 TÜV-D, SAW wire/flux combination for joint welding of
Si 0.45 Rm 650 N/mm2 UDT high strength and low temperature steels.
SZ3Ni1Mo Mn 1.55 A5 21%
Ni 0.95 Av 180 J Wire: The flux reacts metallurgically Mn-neutral.
EF3 (mod.) Mo 0.55 60 J…-40 °C TÜV-D
The sub-arc wire/flux combination produces very
Flux: BB 24 good low temperature impact properties down
to -40 °C. Excellent slag detachability, smooth
SA FB 1 65 DC H5 beads, good wetting and low hydrogen contents
( ≤ 5 ml/100 g) are further important features.
The combination is ideally suited for multi-pass

6
High temperature and creep resistant steels
Standard properties
EN
AWS % mm
FOX DMO Ti SMAW C 0.06 Re 500 N/mm2 2.0 TÜV-D, Rutile coated electrode for 0.5 % Mo alloyed S355J2G3, E295, P255G1TH,
Si 0.3 Rm 570 N/mm2 2.5 UZ, boiler and tube steels up to +550 °C service L320-L415NB,
E Mo R 12 Mn 0.6 A5 23% 3.2 TÜV-A, temperature. It offers excellent striking and L320MB-L415MB,
Mo 0.5 Av 90 J 4.0 CL, DNV, restriking characteristics, easy slag removal, S255N, P235GH-P310GH,
– BV, DB, smooth beads, AC/DC weldability and produces P255-P355N,
UDT, first class X-ray quality welds in all positions. P255NH-P355NH
Statoil, 1.5415 16Mo3
RMR,
ÖBB, VUZ ASTM:
A335, Gr.P1
A161-94 Gr.T1
A182M, Gr.F1
A250M, Gr.T1
FOX DMO Kb SMAW C 0.08 Re 550 N/mm2 2.5 TÜV-D, UZ, Basic coated low hydrogen electrode for 0.5 % Mo S355J2G3
Si 0.4 Rm 600 N/mm2 3.2 TÜV-A, FI, alloyed boiler and tube steels up to +550 °C L320-L415NB
E Mo B 42 H5 Mn 0.8 A5 25% 4.0 ÖBB, DB, service temperature. For high quality welds of long L320MB-L415MB, P255G1TH,
Mo 0.5 Av 200 J 5.0 ABS, DNV, term stressed components with reliable mechanical P235GH-P310GH,
E7018-A1H4R ≥32 J…-50 °C GL, RMR, properties under high and low service temperature P255NH,
Statoil, conditions. HD ≤ 4 ml/100 g acc. AWS condition. 1.5415 16Mo3, 1.5429 22Mo4
CL, LTSS, Low temperature toughness proven down 1.5403 17MnMoV6-4,
UDT, to -50 °C. 1.6755 22NiMoCr4-7,
KTA 1408.1 1.6310 20MnMoNi5-5,
ITI, VUZ, 1.6368 15NiCuMoNb5,
SEPROZ 1.6311 20MnMoNi4-5,
GE240-GE300,
S255N-S460N,
DMO-IG GTAW C 0.1 Re 520 N/mm2 1.6 TÜV-D, UZ, GTAW rod and GMAW wire for 0.5 % Mo P255NH-P460NH,
Si 0.6 Rm 630 N/mm2 2.0 TÜV-A, FI, alloyed boiler and tube steels as well as in ageing resistant and resistant
W Mo Si (GTAW) Mn 1.2 A5 27% 2.4 DB, BV, pressure vessel and structural steel engineering. to caustic cracking.
G Mo Si (GMAW) Mo 0.5 Av 200 J 3.0 CL, UDT,
≥47 J…-30 °C 3.2 DNV, Recommended for service in the temperature ASTM:
ER70S-A1 KTA 1408.1 range -30 °C (GTAW) or -40 °C (GMAW) up A335 Gr.P1
ÖBB, LRS to 550 °C. A217 Gr.WC1
A182M Gr.F1
GMAW C 0.1 Re 500 N/mm2 0.8 TÜV-D, UZ, The GMAW wire shows excellent welding, A250M Gr.T1
Si 0.6 Rm 620 N/mm2 1.0 TÜV-A, wetting and feeding characteristics.
Mn 1.2 A5 25% 1.2 CL, FI,
Mo 0.5 Av 150 J UDT,
≥47 J…-40 °C SEPROZ,
DB, ÖBB
Wire: EMS 2 Mo SAW C 0.08 Re ≥470 N/mm2 2.0 TÜV-D, SAW wire/flux combination. Mainly for high 1.5415 16Mo3
Si 0.25 Rm ≥550 N/mm2 2.5 UDT temperature 0.5 % Mo alloyed steels up to service P275T1-P355T1, WB25,
S2 Mo Mn 1.15 A5 ≥24% 3.0 temperatures of +550 °C but also for low P315NH-P420NH,
Mo 0.45 Av ≥140 J 4.0 Wire: temperature conditions due to good toughness P310 GH
EA2 ≥47 J…-40 °C TÜV-D, behaviour of the weld metal.
TÜV-A, Ü, BÖHLER BB 24 is metallurgically Mn-neutral and ASTM:
Flux: BB 24 DB, ÖBB, produces very good low temperature impact A335 Gr.P1
KTA 1408.1 properties. API X52-X65
SA FB 1 65 DC H5 SEPROZ
Low hydrogen contents (HD < 5 ml/100 g). The
combination is ideally suited for multi-pass welding
of thick plates.
DMO OAW C 0.12 Re 330 N/mm2 2.0 TÜV-D, Ü, Mo alloyed gas welding rod recommended for High temperature steels,
Si 0.15 Rm 470 N/mm2 2.5 ÖBB, DB, mild steels and 0.5 % Mo alloyed steels. same alloyed.
O IV Mn 1.0 A5 24% 3.2 SEPROZ, High viscous weld puddle. Easy to operate. 16Mo3, P285NH, P295NH,
Mo 0.5 Av 60 J 4.0 UDT Approved in long-term condition up to +500 °C P255G1TH, P295GH
R60-G service temperature.
ASTM:
Preheating and post weld heat treatment as A335 Gr.P1
required by the base metal. A36 Gr.all
A283 Gr.B,C,D
A285 Gr.B;
A414 Gr.C
A442 Gr.60
A515 Gr.60
A516 Gr.55,60
A570 Gr.33,36,40
FOX DCMS Ti SMAW C 0.06 PWHT a 680 °C/2h 2.5 TÜV-D, Rutile coated electrode for 1 % Cr 0.5 % Mo 1.7335 13CrMo4-5
Si 0.4 Re 510 N/mm2 3.2 UZ, alloyed boiler plate and tube steels up to +570 °C 1.7262 15CrMo5
ECrMo1 R 12 Mn 0.6 Rm 610 N/mm2 4.0 TÜV-A, service temperature. Easy to operate. Fully alloyed 1.7728 16CrMoV4
Cr 1.1 A5 21% ÖBB, DB, core wire. Specifically prefered for thin walled
E8013-G Mo 0.5 Av 100 J DNV, GL, welds and root pass welding in all positions and ASTM:
ABS, CL, first class X-ray quality. A335 Gr.P11
SEPROZ, A335 Gr.P12
UDT A193 Gr.B7

Standard properties
EN
AWS % mm
FOX DCMS Kb SMAW C 0.07 PWHT a 680 °C/2h 2.5 TÜV-D, Basic coated low hydrogen electrode for 1.7335 13CrMo4-5
Si 0.4 Re 530 N/mm2 3.2 TÜV-A, 1 % Cr 0.5 % Mo alloyed boiler and tube steels up 1.7262 15CrMo5
E CrMo1 B 42 H5 Mn 0.8 Rm 630 N/mm2 4.0 Ü, FI, to +570 °C service temerature. For high quality 1.7728 16CrMoV4
Cr 1.1 A5 23% 5.0 ÖBB, DB, welds, suitable for Step-Cooling treatments, fully 1.7357 G17CrMo5-5
E8018-B2H4R Mo 0.5 Av 160 J DNV, GL, alloyed core wire which will provide reliable creep 1.7354 G22CrMo5-4
P ≤0.010 CL, LTSS, rupture properties for the whole service life of a
As ≤0.005 UDT, ABS, boiler plant. HD ≤ 4 ml/100 g acc. AWS condition. Furthermore: Steels
Sb ≤0.005 VUZ, resistant to caustic
Sn ≤0.005 SEPROZ cracking, quenched and
tempered steels up to
780 N/mm2 tensile strength,
case hardening and
DCMS-IG GTAW C 0.11 PWHT a 680 °C/2h 1.6 TÜV-D, GTAW rod and GMAW wire for 1 % Cr 0.5 % Mo nitriding steels.
Si 0.6 Re 490 N/mm2 2.0 TÜV-A, FI, alloyed boiler and tube steels up to +570 °C
W CrMo1 Si (GTAW) Mn 1.0 Rm 590 N/mm2 2.4 UDT, service temperature. Suitable for Step-Cooling ASTM:
G CrMo1 Si (GMAW) Cr 1.2 A5 25% 3.0 SEPROZ treatments (GTAW). The weld metal meets all A335 Gr.P11
Mo 0.5 Av 250 J prerequisites for reliable long term creep proper- A335 Gr.P12
ER80S-G P ≤0.012 ties without embrittlement due to very low A193 Gr.B7
GMAW As ≤0.010 Re 460 N/mm2 0.8 TÜV-D, UZ, content of trace elements. A217 Gr.WC6
Sb ≤0.005 Rm 570 N/mm2 1.0 TÜV-A,
Sn ≤0.006 A5 23% 1.2 DB, CL, FI,
Av 150 J 1.6 ÖBB, UDT,
SEPROZ
Wire: EMS 2 CrMo SAW C 0.08 PWHT a 680 °C/2h 2.5 TÜV-D, SAW wire/flux combination for 1 % Cr 0.5 % Mo
Si 0.25 Re ≥460 N/mm2 3.0 UDT alloyed boiler and tube steels up to +570 °C
S CrMo1 Mn 1.0 Rm ≥550 N/mm2 4.0 service temperature. Suitable for Step-Cooling
Cr 1.0 A5 ≥22% Wire: treatments. The weld metal meets all pre-requisites
EB2 Mo 0.45 Av ≥47 J TÜV-D, for reliable long term creep properties without
P ≤0.012 TÜV-A, embrittlement due to very low content of trace
Flux: BB 24 As ≤0.005 SEPROZ elements.
Sb ≤0.005
SA FB 1 65 DC H5 Sn ≤0.005 BÖHLER BB 24 is metallurgically Mn-neutral and
produces very good lowtemperature impact pro-
perties. Low hydrogen contents (HD < 5 ml/100 g).
The combination is ideally suited for multi pass
DCMS OAW C 0.12 PWHT a 680 °C/2h 2.5 TÜV-D, CrMo-alloyed gas welding rod for high temperature
Si 0.15 Re ≥315 N/mm2 3.0 UDT, boiler and tube steels equivalent to 13CrMo4-5
0V Mn 0.9 Rm ≥490 N/mm2 SEPROZ (1.25 % Cr 0.5 % Mo). Approved in long-term con-
Cr 1.0 A5 ≥18% dition up to +500 °C service temperature.
R65-G Mo 0.5 Av ≥47 J
High viscous weld puddle.
Wall thicknesses over 6 mm should be preheated
to 100-200 °C and tempered at 660-700 °C for at
least 30 minutes followed by cooling in still air.
FOX DCMV SMAW C 0.12 PWHT a 680 °C/8h 4.0 TÜV-D, Basic coated electrode for highly stressed joint and Similar alloyed high tempera-
Si 0.35 Re 680 N/mm2 5.0 LTSS, production welds on G17CrMoV5-10 type high ture steels and cast steels
E ZCrMoV1 B 42 H5 Mn 0.9 Rm 770 N/mm2 UDT, temperature cast steel used in the construction of
Cr 1.35 A5 19% SEPROZ steam turbines and valve casings. Approved in long- 1.7706 G17CrMoV5-10
E 9018-G Mo 1.0 Av 90 J term condition up to +600 °C service temperature.
V 0.22
High creep rupture strength thanks to the C, Cr,
Mo and V-content. High fracture toughness, low
hydrogen content, good welding characteristics.
The deposit is heat treatable. Metal recovery
approx. 115 %.
Preheat and interpass temperatures 300-350 °C,

stress relieving >20 °C below the tempering tem-
perature of the cast steel, but not less than 680 °C.
8
Standard properties
EN
AWS % mm
FOX DMV 83 Kb SMAW C 0.05 PWHT a 720°C/2h 2.5 TÜV-D, Basic coated core wire alloyed stick electrode with High temperature steels and
Si 0.4 Re 510 N/mm2 3.2 TÜV-A, special suitability for 0.5 Cr 1 Mo-steels. Approved similar alloyed cast steels.
E MoV B 42 H5 Mn 1.1 Rm 660 N/mm2 4.0 UDT, in long-term condition up to 580 °C service tem-
Cr 0.4 A5 22% SEPROZ perature. Crack resistant and ductile deposit, low 1.7715 14MoV6-3
E9018-G Mo 0.9 Av 200 J hydrogen content. Good weldability in all positions 1.7733 24CrMoV5-5
V 0.5 except vertical down. Metal recovery approx. 115%. 1.7709 21CrMoV5-7
Preheating and interpass temperature 200-300 °C. 1.8070 21CrMoV5-11
PWHT at 700-720 °C min. 2 hrs, cooling in furnace 1.7706 G17CrMoV5-10
down to 300 °C and still air.
ASTM:
A389 Gr.C23/C24
DMV 83-IG GTAW C 0.08 PWHT a 700 °C/2h 2.4 TÜV-D, GTAW rod and GMAW wire for boiler, plate A405 Gr.P24
Si 0.6 Re 520 N/mm2 TÜV-A, and tube steels. Designed specially for 14MoV6-3
W MoV Si (GTAW) Mn 0.9 Rm 670 N/mm2 UDT, LTSS, (0.5 Cr 0.5 Mo 0.25 V). Approved in long-term UNS:
G MoV Si (GMAW) Cr 0.45 A5 24% SEPROZ condition up to +560 °C service temperature. I21610
Mo 0.85 Av 220 J Tough, cracking resistant deposit with good creep
ER80S-G V 0.35 rupture strength. The wire shows very good fee-
ding characteristics, resulting in smooth welding
GMAW C 0.08 Re 610 N/mm2 1.2 TÜV-D, and wetting behaviour.
Si 0.6 Rm 710 N/mm2 TÜV-A,
Mn 0.9 A5 20% UDT, Preheating and interpass temperatures 200-300 °C.
Cr 0.45 Av 80 J SEPROZ PWHT at 700-720 °C for at least 2 hrs followed by
Mo 0.85 cooling in furnace down to 300 °C and still air.
V 0.35
FOX CM 2 Kb SMAW C 0.07 PWHT a 720 °C/2h 2.5 TÜV-D, Basic coated electrode for 2,25 % Cr 1 % Mo alloy- 1.7380 10CrMo9-10
Si 0.3 Re 510 N/mm2 3.2 UZ, ed boiler and tube steels up to +600 °C service 1.8075 10CrSiMoV7
E CrMo2 B 42 H5 Mn 0.8 Rm 640 N/mm2 4.0 TÜV-A, FI, temperature. For high quality welds suitable for 1.7379 G17CrMo9-10
Cr 2.3 A5 22% 5.0 DB, DNV, Step-Cooling treatments, alloyed core wire which
E9018-B3H4R Mo 1.0 Av 180 J CL, UDT, will provide reliable creep rupture properties for High temperature steels and
P ≤0.010 ABS, GL, the whole service life of a boiler plant. similar alloyed cast steels,
As ≤0.005 ÖBB, HD ≤ 4 ml/100 g acc. AWS condition. similar alloyed case
Sb ≤0.005 SEPROZ, Preheating and interpass temperature 200-350 °C. hardening steels,
Sn ≤ 0.005 VUZ PWHT at 700-750° C min. 2 hrs, cooling in furnace nitriding steels.
down to 300 °C and still air.
ASTM:
CM 2-IG GTAW C 0.06 PWHT a 720 °C/2h 1.6 TÜV-D, GTAW rod and GMAW wire for 2,25 % Cr 1 % Mo A335 Gr.P22
Si 0.7 Re 470 N/mm2 2.0 TÜV-A, alloyed boiler and tube steels up to +600 °C A217 Gr.WC9
W CrMo2 Si (GTAW) Mn 1.1 Rm 600 N/mm2 2.4 CL, UDT, service temperature. BÖHLER CM 2-IG (GTAW)
G CrMo2 Si (GMAW) Cr 2.6 A5 23% 3.0 SEPROZ, meets the requirements for Step-Cooling. The
Mo 1.0 Av 190 J FI weld metal meets all prerequisites for reliable long
ER90S-G P ≤0.010 term creep properties without embrittlement due
As ≤0.010 to very low content of trace elements.
GMAW Sb ≤0.005 Re 440 N/mm2 0.8 TÜV-D,
Sn ≤0.006 Rm 580 N/mm2 1.0 TÜV-A, Preheating and interpass temperatures 200-350 °C.
A5 23% 1.2 FI, UDT, PWHT at 700-750 °C for at least 2 hrs followed by
Av 170 J SEPROZ cooling in furnace down to 300 °C and still air.
Wire: CM 2-UP SAW C 0.07 PWHT a 720 °C/2h 2.5 TÜV-D, SAW wire/flux combination for 2.25 % Cr 1 % Mo 1.7380 10CrMo9-10
Si 0.25 Re ≥460 N/mm2 3.0 UDT alloyed boiler and tube steels up to +600 °C
S CrMo2 Mn 0.80 Rm ≥530 N/mm2 4.0 service temperature. Particularly for cracking plants ASTM:
Cr 2.30 A5 ≥22% Wire: in the crude oil industry. Suitable for Step-Cooling A335 Gr.P22
EB3 Mo 0.95 Av ≥47 J TÜV-D, treatments, Bruscato ≤ 15 ppm. The weld metal
P ≤0.012 TÜV-A, meets all pre-requisites for reliable long term creep
Flux: BB 24 As ≤0.015 KTA 1408.1 properties without embrittlement due to very
Sb ≤0.005 SEPROZ low content of trace elements. BÖHLER BB 24 is
SA FB 1 65 DC H5 Sn ≤0.01 metallurgically Mn-neutral.
Preheat, interpass and PWHT temperature are
determined by the base material.

Standard properties
EN
AWS % mm
FOX P 23 SMAW C 0.06 PWHT a 740°C/2h 2.5 TÜV Basic coated core wire alloyed stick electrode HCM2S, P/T23
Si 0.2 Re 520 N/mm2 3.2 for welding bainitic steels such as P23/T23 (ASTM A213 code
E ZCrWV2 1.5 B 42 H5 Mn 0.5 Rm 620 N/mm2 4.0 (ASTM A213, code case 2199), pipe material. case 2199)
Cr 2.3 A5 19%
E9018-G W 1.5 Av 130 J For high quality welds, which will provide reliable
V 0.22 creep rupture properties for the whole service
Nb 0.04 life of a boiler plant. Preheat and interpass tempe-
rature depends on wall thickness.
PWHT at 740 °C for 2 hrs.
P 23-IG GTAW C 0.07 PWHT a 740°C/2h 1.0 TÜV For manual or automatic GTAW-welding of creep
Si 0.3 Re 450 N/mm2 1.2 resistant steels such as HCM2S (P23/T23 acc. to
W ZCrWV2 Mn 0.5 Rm 585 N/mm2 1.6 ASTM A 213 code case 2199), pipe or tube
Cr 2.2 A5 17% 2.0 material.
ER90S-G W 1.7 Av 120 J 2.4
V 0.22 3.2 Preheat and interpass temperature depends on
Nb 0.05 wall thickness. PWHT at 740 °C for 2 hrs.
N 0.01
B 0.002
Wire: P 23-UP SAW C 0.05 PWHT a 740 °C/2h 2.0 TÜV Böhler P 23-UP is a matching filler metal for
Si 0.27 Re ≥450 N/mm2 2.5 welding high temperature and creep resistant steels
S ZCrWV2 Mn 0.9 Rm ≥600 N/mm2 3.0 such as HCM2S (P23/T23 acc. to ASTM A213
Cr 2.05 A5 ≥15% code case 2199), pipe or tube material.
Flux: BB 430 W 1.6 Av ≥100 J Preheat and interpass temperature: 200-300 °C.
V 0.20 Heat input ≤ 2,0 kJ/mm. BB 430 is an agglomerated
SA FB 1 55 AC Nb 0.04 welding flux of the fluoride-basic type with high
N 0.01 basicity (2.9).
FOX P 24 SMAW C 0.08 PWHT a 740°C/2h 2.5 TÜV Basic coated core wire alloyed stick electrode 7CrMoVTiB10-10, P/T24 acc.
Si 0.4 Re 560 N/mm2 3.2 for welding bainitic steels like 7CrMoVTiB10-10 to ASTM A213 Draft.
E Z CrMoVNbB21 B 42 H5 Mn 0.5 Rm 660 N/mm2 4.0 (P24/T24 acc. to ASTM A 213 Draft).
Cr 2.4 A5 18% For high quality welds, which will provide reliable
E9018-G Mo 1.0 Av 100 J creep rupture properties for the whole service life
V 0.22 of a boiler plant.
Nb 0.03
B 0.003 Preheat and interpass temperature depends on
wall thickness. PWHT at 740 °C for 2 hrs.
P 24-IG GTAW C 0.05 PWHT a 740°C/2h 1.0 TÜV For manual or automatic GTAW-welding of creep
Si 0.3 Re 540 N/mm2 1.2 resistant steels such as 7CrMoVTiB10-10 (P24/T24
W ZCrMoV2 Mn 0.5 Rm 620 N/mm2 1.6 acc. to ASTM A 213 Draft), pipe or tube material.
Cr 2.2 A5 15% 2.0
Mo 1.0 Av 120 J 2.4 Preheat and interpass temperature depends on
V 0.22 3.2 wall thickness. PWHT at 740 °C for 2 hrs.
Ti 0.05
B 0.003
Wire: P 24-UP SAW C 0.06 PWHT a 740 °C/2h 2.0 TÜV Böhler P 24-UP is a matching filler metal for
Si 0.2 Re 500 N/mm2 2.5 welding high temperature and creep resistant steels
S ZCrWV2 Mn 0.7 Rm 620 N/mm2 3.0 such as 7CrMoVTiB10-10 (P24/T24 acc. to ASTM
Cr 2.2 A5 15% A213 Draft). Böhler B 430 is an agglomerated wel-
Flux: BB 430 Mo 1.0 Av 100 J ding flux of
V 0.22 the fluoride-basic type with high basicity (2.9).
SA FB 1 55 AC Ti 0.027 Grain size: EN 760: 3-16 (0.3 – 1.6 mm).
B 0.003 Preheating and interpass temperature: 200-300 °C.
Heat input ≤ 2.0 kJ/mm.
10
Standard properties
EN
AWS % mm
FOX CM 5 Kb SMAW C 0.07 PWHT a 730°C/2h 2.5 TÜV-D, Basic coated core wire alloyed stick electrode, pre- High temperature steels and
Si 0.4 Re 520 N/mm2 3.2 TÜV-A, ferably used for X12CrMo5 (5 Cr 0.5 Mo) steels. similar alloyed cast steels.
E CrMo5 B 42 H5 Mn 0.8 Rm 620 N/mm2 4.0 CLL, UDT, Approved in long-term condition up to +650 °C
Cr 5.0 A5 21% LTSS, VUZ, service temperature. High crack resistance, very 1.7362 X12CrMo5
E8018-B6H4R Mo 0.5 Av 90 J SEPROZ low hydrogen content (acc. AWS condition 1.7363 GX12CrMo5
HD < 4 ml/100 g). Good weldability in all positions
except vertical down. The deposit is heat treatable. ASTM:
Metal recovery approx. 115 %. Preheat and A213, Gr.T5
interpass temperatures 300-350 °C. PWHT at A217, Gr.C5
730-760 °C for at least 1 hour followed by cooling A335, Gr.P5
in furnace down to 300 °C and still air.
CM 5-IG GTAW C 0.08 PWHT a 730 °C/2h 1.6 TÜV-D, GTAW rod and GMAW wire for 5 % Cr 0.5 % Mo
Si 0.4 Re 510 N/mm2 2.0 TÜV-A, steels and steels for hot hydrogen service, particu-
W CrMo5 Si (GTAW) Mn 0.5 Rm 620 N/mm2 2.4 UDT, larly for application in oil refineries and the base
G CrMo5 Si (GMAW) Cr 5.8 A5 20% 3.0 SEPROZ metals X12CrMo5 / P5. Approved in long-term
Mo 0.6 Av 200 J condition up to +600 °C (GTAW 650 °C) service
ER80S-B6 temperature.
GMAW C 0.08 Re 520 N/mm2 1.2 – The GMAW wire shows very good feeding
Si 0.4 Rm 620 N/mm2 characteristics, resulting in smooth welding and
Mn 0.5 A5 20% flow behaviour. Uniform copper bonding with low
Cr 5.8 Av 200 J total copper content.
Mo 0.6 Preheating and interpass temperatures 300-350 °C.
Tempering at 730-760 °C at least 1 hr followed by
cooling in furnace down to 300 °C and still air.
Wire: CM 5-UP SAW C 0.05 PWHT a 740 °C/4h 4.0 UDT SAW wire/flux combination suited for
Si 0.5 Re ≥450 N/mm2 5 % Cr 0.5 % Mo alloyed steels, particularly for
S CrMo5 Mn 0.75 Rm ≥590 N/mm2 hot hydrogen service. High temperature strength
Cr 5.5 A5 ≥18% Wire: at service temperatures up to +600 °C. The weld
EB6 Mo 0.55 Av ≥47 J TÜV-D, deposit exhibits good mechanical properties.
TÜV-A, Easy slag detachability and smooth bead surface are
Flux: BB 24 SEPROZ additional quality features. Preheating, interpass
temperature and PWHT are determined by the
SA FB 1 65 DC H5 base metal.
FOX CM 9 Kb SMAW C 0.07 PWHT a 760°C/1h 2.5 TÜV-D, Basic coated alloyed core wire electrode for high Similar alloyed creep
Si 0.4 Re 610 N/mm2 3.2 TÜV-A, temperature steels and steels for hot hydrogen resistant steels.
E CrMo9 B 42 H5 Mn 0.7 Rm 730 N/mm2 4.0 UDT, service, particularly in the petrochemical industry.
Cr 9.0 A5 20% VUZ, Preferably used for 9 % Cr 1 % Mo steels (e.g. 1.7386 X12CrMo9-1
E8018-B8 Mo 1.0 Av 70 J SEPROZ X12CrMo9-1 Approved in long-term condition 1.7388 X7CrMo9-1
up to +650 °C service temperature. 1.7389 GX12CrMo10-1
The weld metal is heat treatable. Metal recovery ASTM:
approx. 115 %. A217 Gr.C12
A234 Gr.WP9
Preheating and interpass temperatures 250-350 °C. A335 Gr.P9
PWHT at 710-760 °C for at least 1 hr followed by
cooling in furnace down to 300 °C and still air.
CM 9-IG GTAW C 0.07 PWHT a 760°C/2h 1.6 TÜV-D, GTAW rod for 9 % Cr 1 % Mo high temperature
Si 0.5 Re 530 N/mm2 2.0 TÜV-A, steels and steels for hot hydrogen service, particu-
W CrMo9 Si Mn 0.5 Rm 670 N/mm2 2.4 SEPROZ larly for application in oil refineries and the base
Cr 9.0 A5 24% metals X12CrMo9-1 (P9). Approved in long-term
ER80S-B8 Mo 1.0 Av 250 J condition up to +600 °C service temperature.
Preheating and interpass temperature 250-350 °C.
Tempering at 710-760 °C for at least 1 hr followed
by cooling in furnace down to 300 °C/air.
FOX C 9 MV SMAW C 0.09 PWHT a 760 °C/2h 2.5 TÜV-D, Basic coated core wire alloyed, for creep resisting, 1.4903 X10CrMoVNb9-1
Si 0.3 Re 500 N/mm2 3.2 CL, UDT, heat treatable 9 Cr steels (P/T91) in turbine and
E CrMo91 B 42 H5 Mn 0.5 Rm 720 N/mm2 4.0 SEPROZ boiler construction as well as in the chemical indu- ASTM:
Cr 9.0 A5 19% 5.0 stry. Service temperatures up to +650 °C. A335 Gr.P91
E9015-B9 Mo 0.9 Av 60 J High creep rupture strength and very good tough- A213 Gr.T91
Ni 0.9 ness under long term stress. Low hydrogen content A199 Gr.T91
V 0.2 (< 4 ml/100 g acc. AWS condition).
Nb 0.05
Preheating and interpass temperatures 200-300 °C.
After welding the joint should be cooled down
below 80 °C to finish martensite formation.
PWHT at 760 °C for at least 2 hrs, max. 10 hrs.
Heating and cooling rates up tp 550 °C
max. 150 °C/h, above 550 °C max. 80 °C.
For optimised toughness values a welding tech-

nology should be applied which produces thin
welding layers (approx. 2 mm).

Standard properties
EN
AWS % mm
C 9 MV-IG GTAW C 0.12 PWHT a 760 °C/2h 2.0 TÜV-D, GTAW rod and GMAW wire for high temperatu- 1.4903 X10CrMoVNb9-1
Si 0.3 Re 660 N/mm2 2.4 CL, re, creep resistant martensitic 9-12 % chromium
W CrMo91 Mn 0.5 Rm 760 N/mm2 3.0 UDT steels. Especially designed for the ASTM steels ASTM:
G CrMo91 Cr 9.0 A5 17% P/T91. Approved in long-term condition up to A335 Gr.P91
Mo 0.9 Av 55 J +650 °C service temperature. Preheating and A213 Gr.T91
ER90S-B9 GMAW Ni 0.7 1.0 – interpass temperature 200-300 °C. After welding, A199 Gr.T91
V 0.2 1.2 the weld joint should cool down below 80 °C to
Nb 0.05 finish the martensite transformation. In case of
greater wall thickness or complex components the
possibility of residual stresses must be considered.
The following post weld heat treatment is recom-
mended: annealing 760 °C/min. 2 hrs, max. 10 hrs,
heating and cooling rates below 550 °C
max. 150 °C/hr, above 550 °C max. 80 °C/hr.
For optimised toughness values a welding
technology should be applied which produces
thin welding layers (approx. 2 mm).
C 9 MV-MC GMAW C 0.10 PWHT a 760 °C/3h 1.2 – Metal cored wire for high temperature, creep
Si >0.3 Re 690 N/mm2 resistant martensitic 9-12 % chromium steels.
T CrMo91 Mn 0.6 Rm 760 N/mm2 Especially designed for the ASTM steels P/T91.
Cr 9.0 A5 18% For optimised toughness values a welding technolo-
EC90S-B9 Mo 1.0 Av 60 J gy should be applied which produces thin welding
Ni 0.7 layers (approx. 2 mm), also a decisive influence on
V 0.2 Shielding gas: toughness values is given by the used shielding gas.
Nb 0.055 Ar +2.5 % CO2 Our recommendation is Ar +2.5 % CO2.
N 0.04 Preheating and interpass temperature 200-300 °C.
After welding, the weld joint should cool down
below 80 °C to finish the martensite transforma-
tion. In case of greater wall thickness or complex
components the possibility of residual stresses
must be considered.
The following post weld heat treatment is recom-
mended: annealing 760 °C/min. 2 hrs, max. 10 hrs,
heating and cooling rates below 550 °C
max. 150 °C/hr, above 550 °C max. 80 °C/hr.
Wire: C 9 MV-UP SAW C 0.11 PWHT a 760 °C/2h 2.5 TÜV-D, Sub-arc wire/flux combination suited for creep
Si 0.3 Re 610 N/mm2 3.0 UDT, CL, resistant 9 % Cr steels, especially for T91/P91 acc.
S CrMo91 Mn 0.6 Rm 740 N/mm2 SEPROZ ASTM A335. Approved in long-term condition up
Cr 9.0 A5 20% to +650 °C service temperature. The wire and flux
EB9 Mo 0.8 Av 40 J are precisely balanced to consistently meet the
Ni 0.7 highest technical requirements.
Flux: BB 910 V 0.2 Preheating and interpass temperature 200-300 °C.
Nb 0.05 After welding the joint should cool down below
SA FB 2 55 DC H5 80 °C in order to finish the martensitic transforma-
tion. Pipe welds with wall thickness up to 45 mm
can be cooled down to room temperature For
heavier wall thicknesses or stressed components,
unfavourable possible stress condition must be
considered. The recommended post weld heat
treatment is annealing after welding at 760 °C/min.
2 hrs, max. 10 hrs, heating/cooling-rates below
550 °C max. 150 °C/hr, above 550 °C max 80 °C/hr.
For optimised toughness properties a technology
which ensures thin welding layers is recommended.
FOX C 9 MVW SMAW C 0.1 PWHT a 760 °C/2h 3.2 TÜV-D, Basic coated core wire alloyed Cr-Mo-Ni-V-W-Nb- Similar alloyed creep
Si 0.25 Re 560 N/mm2 4.0 UDT, electrode for the welding of high temperature resistant steels.
E ZCrMoWV911 B 42 H5 Mn 0.7 Rm 720 N/mm2 5.0 SEPROZ martensitic steels like e.g. X11CrMoWVNb9-1-1
Cr 8.5 A5 15% (P/T911). Approved in long-term condition up 1.4905 X11CrMoWVNb9-1-1
E9015-B9(mod.) Mo 1.0 Av 40 J to +650 °C service temperature. Good welding
Ni 0.7 properties in all positions except vertical down. ASTM:
W 1.0 Preheating and interpass temperature 200-300 °C. A335 Gr.P911
V 0.2 After welding the joint should be cooled down A213 Gr.T911
N 0.05 below 80 °C to finish the martensite transforma-
Nb 0.05 tion. In case of greater wall thickness or complex
components the possibility of residual stresses
must be considered. The following post weld heat
treatment is recommended: annealing 760 °C/min.
2 hrs, max. 10 hrs, heating and cooling rates up to
550 °C max. 150 °C/h, above 550 °C max. 80 °C/h.
For optimised toughness values a welding techno-
logy should be applied which produces thin welding
layers (approx. 2 mm).
12
Standard properties
EN
AWS % mm
C 9 MVW-IG GTAW C 0.11 PWHT a 760 °C/2h 2.0 TÜV-D, GTAW-rod for high temperature, creep resistant Similar alloyed creep
Si 0.35 Re 660 N/mm2 2.4 UDT martensitic 9 % chromium steels, especially desi- resistant steels.
W ZCrMoWVNb911 Mn 0.45 Rm 790 N/mm2 gned for the steel P/T911 according to ASTM A335.
Cr 9.0 A5 16% Approved in long-term condition up to +650 °C 1.4905 X11CrMoWVNb9-1-1
ER90S-B9(mod.) Ni 0.75 Av 50 J service temperature.
Mo 0.98 Preheating and interpass temperature 200-300 °C. ASTM:
V 0.2 After welding the joint should be cooled down be- A335 Gr.P911
Nb 0.06 low 80 °C to finish the martensite transformation. A213 Gr.T911
W 1.05 In case of greater wall thickness or complex com-
N 0.07 ponents the possibility of residual stresses must
be considered. The following post weld heat treat-
ment is recommended: annealing 760 °C/min.
2 hrs, max. 10 hrs, heating and cooling rates below
550 °C max. 150 °C/h, above 550 °C max. 80 °C/hr.
For optimised toughness values a welding techno-
logy should be applied which produces thin welding
layers (approx. 2 mm).
FOX P 92 SMAW C 0.10 PWHT a 760 °C/2h 3.2 TÜV-D, Basic coated Cr-Mo-Ni-V-W-Nb alloyed electrode Similar alloyed creep
Si 0.3 Re 690 N/mm2 4.0 UDT, suited for welding of high temperature steel resistant steels.
E ZCrMoWVNb9 Mn 0.7 Rm 810 N/mm2 SEPROZ 9 % Cr-1.5 % W-Mo-Nb-N (P92, NF616). Approved
0.5 2 B 42 H5 Cr 9.1 A5 19% in long-term condition up to +650°C service tem- NF 616
Mo 0.55 Av 55 J perature. The stick electrode features a stable arc,
E9015-B9(mod.) Ni 0.7 good striking and re-striking properties, low spat- ASTM:
W 1.7 ter loss and an easy removable slag. Preheating and A335 Gr.P92 (T92)
V 0.2 interpass temperature 200-300 °C. After welding A213/213M Gr.T92
N 0.045 the joint should cool down below 80 °C, to finish
Nb 0.05 the martensite transformation. The following post-
weld heat treatment is recommended: Annealing
760 °C/min. 2 hours, max. 10 hours, heating/cooling
rate up to 550 °C max. 150 °C/h, above 550 °C
max. 80 °C/h. In case of heat treatments less than
2 hours the requirements have to be proved by
a procedure test. For optimised toughness values
a welding technology should be applied which
produces thin welding layers (approx. 2 mm).
P 92-IG GTAW C 0.10 PWHT a 760 °C/2h 2.0 TÜV-D, GTAW rod especially designed for the welding of
G Si 0.4 Re 710 N/mm2 2.4 UDT a 9 % Cr 1.5 % W Mo-Nb-N / P92, NF616-steels.
W ZCrMoWVNb9 0.5 2 Mn 0.4 Rm 820 N/mm2 Approved in long-term condition up to +650 °C
Cr 8.6 A5 19% service temperature. Preheating and interpass
ER90S-B9(mod.) Ni 0.6 Av 77 J temperature 200-300 °C. After welding the joint
Mo 0.4 should cool down below 80 °C to finish the
V 0.2 martensite transformation. In case of greater wall
Nb 0.05 PWHT a 760 °C/6h thickness or complex components the possibility of
W 1.5 Re 650 N/mm2 residual stresses must be considered. The following
N 0.05 Rm 770 N/mm2 postweld heat treatment is recommended:
A5 20% annealing 760 °C/min. 2 hours, max. 10 hours,
Av 70 J heating/cooling rate below 550 °C max. 150 °C/h,
above 550 °C max. 80 °C/h. In case of heat treat-
ments less than 2 hours the requirements have
to be proved by a procedure test. For optimised
toughness values a welding technology should be
applied which produces thin welding layers
(approx. 2 mm).
Wire: P 92-UP SAW C 0.09 PWHT: 760°C/2h 3.0 TÜV-D, SAW wire/flux combination designed for 9 % Cr
Si 0.45 Re 660 N/mm2 UDT creep resistant steel, especially for P92/NF616.
S ZCrMoWVNb9 0.5 1.5 Mn 0.4 Rm 780 N/mm2 Approved in long-term condition up to +650 °C
Cr 8.6 A5 20% service temperature. Preheating and interpass
EB9 (mod.) Ni 0.6 Av 60 J temperature 200-300 °C. After welding the joint
Mo 0.35 should cool down below 80 °C in order to finish
Flux: BB 910 W 1.5 the martensite transformation. Pipe welds with wall
V 0.2 thickness up to 45 mm can be cooled down to
SA FB 2 55 DC H5 Nb 0.04 room temperature. For heavier wall thicknesses or
stressed components, unfavourable possible stress
condition must be considered. The recommended
post weld heat treatment is annealing at
760 °C/min. 2 hrs, max. 10 hrs., heating/cooling
rates below 550 °C max. 150 °C/hr, above 550 °C
max 80 °C/h. For optimised toughness properties
a technology which ensures thin welding layers is
recommended.

Standard properties
EN
AWS % mm
FOX 20 MVW SMAW C 0.18 PWHT a 760 °C/4h 2.5 TÜV-D, Basic coated, core wire alloyed electrode for high 1.4922 X20CrMoV12-1
Si 0.3 Re 610 N/mm2 3.2 UZ, temperature, heat treatable 12 % chromium steels 1.4935 X20Cr MoWV12-1
E CrMoWV12 B 42 H5 Mn 0.6 Rm 800 N/mm2 4.0 TÜV-A, CL, in turbine and boiler construction as well as in the 1.4923 X22CrMoV12-1
Cr 11.0 A5 18% 5.0 DB, LTSS, chemical industry. Preferably used for X20CrMoV12-1. 1.4913 X19CrMoVNb11-1
– Mo 1.0 Av 45 J UDT, Approved in long-term condition up to +650 °C 1.4931 GX22CrMoV12-1
V 0.3 KTA 1408.1 service temperature.
W 0.5 SEPROZ,
Ni 0.6 ÖBB High creep rupture strength and excellent tough-
ness under long-term stresses. Optimum chemical
composition ensures a high quality weld metal.
Low hydrogen content (HD < 5 ml/100 g). Good
weldability in all positions except vertical down.
The weld metal deposit is heat treatable. Metal
recovery approx. 115 %.
Preheating and interpass temperatures 400-450 °C

(austenitic welding) or 250-300 °C (martensitic
welding). Root passes should principally be welded
in the martensitic range. Lower preheat and
interpass temperatures are possible, yet must be
approved by practical welding tests and process
qualification tests.
After welding cooling down to 90±10 °C, followed

by tempering at 720-760 °C for three minutes/mm
wall thickness (at least for 2 hours). Tempering, if
specified, at 1050 °C for 0.5 hour/oil and annealing
at 760 °C for 2 hours.
20 MVW-IG GTAW C 0.21 PWHT a 760 °C/2h 2.0 TÜV-D, Ü, GTAW rod for creep resistant, quenched and tem-
Si 0.4 Re 610 N/mm2 2.4 TÜV-A, DB pered 12 % Cr steels in turbine and boiler fabrication
W CrMoWV12Si Mn 0.6 Rm 780 N/mm2 CL, UDT, and in the chemical industry. Preferably used for the
Cr 11.3 A5 18% KTA 1408.1 base metal X20CrMoV12-1. Approved in long-term
– Mo 1.0 Av 60 J SEPROZ, condition up to +650 °C service temperature. The
V 0.3 ÖBB deposit exhibits high creep rupture strength and
W 0.45 good toughness properties under long term stresses.
Preheating and interpass temperatures 400-450 °C
(austenitic welding) or 250-300 °C (martensitic
welding). Root passes should principally be welded in
the martensitic range. Lower preheat and interpass
temperatures are possible, yet must be approved by
practical welding tests and process qualification tests.
After welding cooling down to 90±10 °C, followed
by tempering at 720-760 °C for three minutes/mm
wall thickness (at least for 2 hours). Tempering, if
at 760 °C for 2 hours.
Wire: 20 MVW-UP SAW C 0.16 PWHT a 760 °C/4h 3.0 TÜV-D, SAW wire/flux combination suited for analogous
Si 0.3 Re ≥550 N/mm2 KTA 1408.1, and similar creep resistant steels in turbine and
CrMoWV12 Mn 0.8 Rm ≥660 N/mm2 TÜV-A, steam boiler construction as well as in the chemical
Cr 10.3 A5 ≥15% SEPROZ industry. Approved in long-term condition up to
Flux: BB24 Mo 0.85 Av ≥47 J +650 °C service temperature. Preheating and inter-
Ni 0.4 pass temperature 400-450 °C (austenitic welding)
SA FB 2 65 DC H5 W 0.45 or 250-300 °C (martensitic welding). Root passes
V 0.25 should principally be welded in the martensitic
range. Lower preheat and interpass temperatures
are possible, yet must be approved by practical
welding tests and process qualification tests.
After welding cooling to 90±10 °C, followed by
tempering at 760 °C for three minutes/mm wall
thickness at least for 2 hours. Tempering, if
at 760 °C for 2 hours. Further details on the
welding technology available on request.
FOX CN 18/11 SMAW C 0.05 Re 420 N/mm2 2.5 TÜV-D, Basic coated, core wire alloyed electrode with 1.4948 X6CrNi18-11
Si 0.3 Rm 580 N/mm2 3.2 TÜV-A, controlled delta ferrite content (3-8 FN) for 1.4949 X3CrNiN18-11
E 19 9 B 42 H5 Mn 1.3 A5 40% 4.0 KTA 1408.1 austenitic CrNi steels with increased carbon
Cr 19.0 Av 85 J UDT, contents (e.g. 1.4948 / 304H), in the boiler, reactor AISI:
E308-15 Ni 10.3 LTSS, CL, and turbine fabrication. Approved in long-term 304H
SEPROZ condition up to +700 °C service temperature (321H)
(300 °C in the case of wet corrosion). (347H)
Resistant to hot cracking, scaling and corrosion.
Excellent weldability in all positions except vertical
down. Preheating is not required, only in case of
wall thickness above 25 mm preheat up to 150 °C.
Interpass temperature should not exceed 200 °C.
Also suitable for German material no. 1.4550 and
1.4551, which are approved for temperatures up to
550 °C.
14
Standard properties
EN
AWS % mm
CN 18/11-IG GTAW C 0.05 Re 420 N/mm2 2.0 TÜV-D, GTAW rod and GMAW wire with controlled
Si 0.6 Rm 620 N/mm2 2.4 TÜV-A, ferrite content (3-8 FN).
W 19 9 H (GTAW) Mn 1.4 A5 40% 3.0 KTA 1408.1, For austenitic CrNi steels with increased carbon
Cr 18.8 Av 150 J CL, UDT contents (e.g. 1.4948 / 304H), in the boiler, reactor
G 19 9 H (GMAW) Ni 9.8 ≥32 J…-10 °C and turbine fabrication. Approved in long-term
condition up to +700 °C service temperature
ER19-10H GMAW C 0.05 Re 400 N/mm2 1.2 TÜV-D, (300 °C in the case of wet corrosion). Preheating
Si 0.6 Rm 580 N/mm2 CL, UDT, is not required, only in case of wall thickness above
Mn 1.4 A5 38% SEPROZ 25 mm preheat up to 150 °C. Interpass temperature
Cr 18.8 Av 120 J should not exceed 200 °C.
Ni 9.8 ≥32 J…-10 °C Steels to German material no. 1.4550 and 1.4551
which are approved for the high temperature range
up to 550 °C, can also be welded.
Wire: CN 18/11-UP SAW C 0.05 Re ≥320 N/mm2 3.0 UDT SAW wire/flux combination for high quality joint
Si 0.55 Rm ≥550 N/mm2 weld on high temperature austenitic CrNi-steels
S 19 9 H Mn 1.2 A5 ≥35% at service temperature up to 700 °C (300 °C in
Cr 18.4 Av ≥80 J the case of wet corrosion). The controlled ferrite
ER19-10H Ni 9.3 content (3-8 FN) ensures hot cracking resistance.
The deposit is insusceptible to sigma phase
Flux: BB 202 embrittlement.
Preheating is not required, only in case of wall
SA FB 2 DC thickness above 25 mm preheat up to 150 °C. The
interpass temperature should not exceed 200 °C.
Steels to German material no. 1.4550 and 1.4551
which are approved for the high temperature range
up to 550 °C, can also be welded.
FOX E 308 H SMAW C 0.05 Re 420 N/mm2 2.5 UDT, Rutile-basic coated, core wire alloyed electrode for Similar alloyed creep
Si 0.6 Rm 580 N/mm2 3.2 SEPROZ the use of high temperature CrNi austenitic steel resistant steels.
E 19 9 H R 42 H5 Mn 0.7 A5 40% 4.0 for service temperatures up to 700 °C. Specially
Cr 19.4 Av 75 J designed for the base metal AISI 304H (W. no. 1.4948 X6CrNi18-11
E308H-16 Ni 10.4 1.4948). Controlled ferrite content of 3-8 FN. The 1.4878 X12CrNiTi18-9
deposit is less susceptible to embrittlement and is
scaling resistant. Excellent weldability in all position AISI:
except vertical down. Preheating is not required, 304
only in case of wall thickness above 25 mm preheat 304H
up to 150 °C. Interpass temperature should not (321H)
exceed 200 °C. (347H)
ER 308 H-IG GTAW C 0.06 Re ≥350 N/mm2 1.6 – GTAW rod for high quality joints for the use of
Si 0.4 Rm ≥550 N/mm2 2.0 high temperature CrNi austenitic steel for service
W 19 9 H Mn 1.7 A5 ≥35% 2.4 temperatures up to 700 °C. Specially designed for
Cr 20.0 Av ≥70 J the base metal AISI 304H (W. No. 1.4948).
ER308H Ni 9.5 Controlled ferrite content of 3-8 FN. The deposit
Mo 0.2 is less susceptible to embrittlement and is scaling
resistant.
E 308 H-FD FCAW C 0.06 Re ≥390 N/mm2 1.2 UDT Flux cored wire with rutile slag characteristic for
Si 0.5 Rm ≥585 N/mm2 GMAW of austenitic CrNi steels like 1.4948 / AISI
T Z 19 9 H R M (C) 3 Mn 1.1 A5 ≥42% 304H. This wire is designed mainly for downhand
Cr 19.4 Av ≥80 J and horizontal welding positions. The weld metal
E308HT0-4/-1 Ni 10.1 is suitable for service temperatures up to approx.
700 °C. This product achieves high productivity
and is easy to operate achieving excellent welding
characteristics, almost no spatter formation and
E 308 H PW-FD FCAW C 0.06 Re ≥390 N/mm2 1.2 – temper discoloration, smooth weld finish and safe
Si 0.5 Rm ≥585 N/mm2 penetration. Increased travel speeds as well as little
T Z 19 9 H P M (C) 1 Mn 1.1 A5 ≥42% demand for cleaning and pickling provide consider-
Cr 19.4 Av ≥90 J able savings in time and money. The weld deposit is
E308HT1-4/-1 Ni 10.1 scaling resistant and because of the controlled low
delta ferrite content (3-8 FN) less susceptible to
embrittlement. BÖHLER E 308 H PW-FD is a
rutile flux cored welding wire with fast freezing
slag providing excellent positional welding
characteristics and fast travel speeds.
FOX E 347 H SMAW C 0.05 Re 440 N/mm2 2.5 – Basic coated, core wire alloyed electrode for the use AISI:
Si 0.3 Rm 620 N/mm2 3.2 of high temperature CrNi austenitic steel for service 321H
E 19 9 Nb B Mn 1.3 A5 35% 4.0 temperatures exceeding 400 °C. Specially designed 347H
Cr 19.0 Av 85 J for the base metal AISI 347H. Controlled ferrite
E347-15 Ni 10.0 content of 3-8 FN. The deposit is less susceptible
Nb ≥8xC to embrittlement and is scaling resistant.

Special applications
Standard properties
EN
AWS % mm
FOX A 7 SMAW C 0.1 Re 460 N/mm2 2.5 TÜV-D, Basic resp. rutile basic coated stainless steel For fabrication, -repair and
Si 0.7 Rm 660 N/mm2 3.2 DNV, GL, electrodes. Very popular for numerous applications. maintenance!
E 18 8 Mn B 22 Mn 6.5 A5 38% 4.0 UDT, The weld deposit offers exceptionally high ductility
Cr 18.8 Av 90 J 5.0 LTSS, and elongation together with crack resistance. Dissimilar joints, tough buffer
E307-15(mod.) Ni 8.8 ≥32 J…-110 °C 6.0 PRS, VUZ, There is no fear of embrittlement when operating and intermediate layers prior
SEPROZ between -110 °C and +850 °C and can be PWHT to hardfacing, 14 % manganese
without any problems. The deposit will work steels, 13-17 % Cr heat
harden and offers good resistance against cavitation. resistant steels, armour plates,
FOX A 7-A SMAW C 0.1 Re 520 N/mm2 2.5 TÜV-D, Ductility is good even after high dilution when high carbon and quenched &
Si 1.2 Rm 720 N/mm2 3.2 UDT, welding problem steels or when subjected to tempered steels, surfacing
EZ 18 9 Mn Mo R 32 Mn 4.2 A5 35% 4.0 SEPROZ thermal shock or scaling. An excellent alloy of gears, valves, turbine
Cr 19.5 Av 75 J 5.0 providing cost effective performance. blades etc.
E307-16(mod.) Ni 8.5 ≥32 J…-100 °C
Mo 0.7 BÖHLER FOX A7-A is suitable for both AC and DC.
A 7 CN-IG GTAW C 0.08 Re 460 N/mm2 1.6 TÜV-D, GTAW rod and GMAW wire. Very popular stain-
Si 0.9 Rm 660 N/mm2 2.0 DNV, GL, less steel wires for numerous applications. The
W 18 8 Mn Mn 7.0 A5 38% 2.4 UDT weld deposit offers exceptionally high ductility and
Cr 19.2 Av 120 J 3.0 elongation together with crack resistance. There is
ER307(mod.) Ni 9.0 ≥32 J…-110 °C no fear of embrittlement when operating between
-110 °C and +850 °C and can be PWHT without
any problems. The deposit will work harden and
A 7-IG GMAW C 0.08 Re 430 N/mm2 0.8 TÜV-D, offers good resistance against cavitation. Ductility
Si 0.9 Rm 640 N/mm2 1.0 DB, UDT, is good even after high dilusion when welding
G 18 8 Mn Mn 7.0 A5 36% 1.2 Ü, ÖBB, problem steels or when subjected to thermal
Cr 19.2 Av 110 J 1.6 SEPROZ shock or scaling. An excellent alloy providing cost
ER307(mod.) Ni 9.0 ≥32 J…-110 °C effective performance.
A 7-MC GMAW C 0.10 Re 400 N/mm2 1.2 – Metal cored wire of type T 18 8 Mn/ EC307 for
Si 0.6 Rm 600 N/mm2 numerous applications.
T 18 8 Mn MM1 Mn 6.3 A5 42% The weld metal offers exceptionally high ductility
Cr 18.8 Av 70 J and elongation together with outstanding crack
Ni 9.2 30 J…-110 °C resistance. There is no fear of embrittlement when
EC307(mod.) operating down to service temperatures of -110 °C
Shilding gas: or above +500 °C. The scaling resistance goes up
Ar +2.5 % CO2 to +850 °C. When working at service temperatu-
res above +650 °C please contact the supplier.
The weld metal can be post weld heat treated
without any problems. The deposit will work har-
den and offers good resistance against cavitation.
Ductility is good even after high dilution when wel-
ding problem steels or when subjected to thermal
shock or scaling. An excellent alloy providing cost
effective performance, excellent welding characteri-
stics, smooth almost spatter free weld finish. The
wider arc, in comparison to solid wire, will reduce
the risk of lack of fusion and is less sensitive against
misalignment of edges and different gap widths.
A 7-FD FCAW C 0.1 Re 420 N/mm2 1.2 – Rutile flux cored welding wire. These products
Si 0.8 Rm 630 N/mm2 1.6 achieve high productivity and are easy to operate
T 18 8 MnRM (C) 3 Mn 6.8 A5 39% achieving excellent welding characteristics, self
Cr 19.0 Av 60 J releasing slag, almost no spatter formation and
E307T0-G Ni 9.0 ≥32 J…-100 °C temper discolouration, smooth weld finish and safe
penetration. The weld deposit offers exceptionally
high ductility and elongation together with crack
resistance. There is no fear of embrittlement when
A 7 PW-FD FCAW C 0.1 Re 420 N/mm2 1.2 – operating between -100 °C and +850 °C and can
Si 0.8 Rm 630 N/mm2 be PWHT without any problems.
T 18 8 MnPM (C) 2 Mn 6.8 A5 39% A7 PW-FD is a rutile flux cored welding wire
Cr 19.0 Av 60 J with fast freezing slag providing positional welding
E307T1-G Ni 9.0 ≥32 J…-100 °C characteristics and fast travel speeds.
Wire: A 7 CN-UP SAW C 0.08 Re ≥390 N/mm2 3.0 UDT SAW wire/flux combination for numerous applica-
Si 0.9 Rm ≥620 N/mm2 tions. BÖHLER A 7 CN-UP / BB 203 yields a weld
S 18 8 Mn Mn 6.8 A5 ≥36% Wire: deposit offering exceptionally high ductility and
Cr 18.5 Av ≥95 J TÜV-D elongation together with outstanding crack
ER307(mod.) Ni 8.8 resistance. There is no fear of embrittlement when
≥40 J…-100 °C operating down to service temperatures of -100 °C
Flux: BB 203 or above 500 °C. The scaling resistance goes up
to 850 °C. When working at service temperatures
SA FB 2 DC above 650 °C please contact the supplier. The
weld metal can be post weld heat treated without
any problems. The deposit will work harden and
offers good resistance against cavitation. Ductility
is good even after high dilution when welding
problem steels or when subjected to thermal
shock or scaling. An excellent alloy providing cost
effective performance. Preheating and post weld
heat treatment as required by the base metal.
BÖHLER BB 203 is a fluoride-basic, agglomerated
flux providing good operating characteristics,
smooth beads and a low hydrogen weld metal.
16
Heat resistant
Standard properties
EN
AWS % mm
FOX FA SMAW C 0.1 Re 520 N/mm2 2.5 UDT, Basic coated core wire alloyed electrode for heat Ferritic-Austenitic:
Si 0.5 Rm 680 N/mm2 3.2 SEPROZ resistant steels and service temperatures up to 1.4821 X20CrNiSi25-4
E 25 4 B 22 Mn 1.2 A5 22% 4.0 +1100 °C. An excellent product when increased 1.4823*) GX40CrNiSi27-4
Cr 25.0 Av 45 J resistance against reducing and oxidizing, sulphur
Ni 5.4 containing gases is required. Can also be used for Ferritic-Perlitic:
the capping of joint welds which have been carried 1.4713 X10CrAI7
out with higher nickel alloyed filler metals 1.4724 X10CrAI13
(e.g. FOX FF-A, FOX FFB) where better joint 1.4742 X10CrAI18
toughness is required. Preheating and interpass 1.4762 X10CrAI25
temperatures 200-400 °C, depending on the 1.4710*) X30CrSi6
relevant base metal and material thickness. 1.4740*) GX40CrSi17
*) limited weldability
FA-IG GTAW C 0.08 Re 540 N/mm2 2.4 UDT GTAW rod and GMAW wire for heat resistant AISI:
Si 0.8 Rm 710 N/mm2 steels and service temperatures up to +1100 °C. 327
W 25 4 (GTAW) Mn 1.2 A5 22% An excellent product when increased resistance
G 25 4 (GMAW) Cr 25.7 Av 70 J against reducing and oxidizing, sulphur containing ASTM:
Ni 4.5 gases is required. Also for the capping of joints A297HC
– which have been welded with higher nickel alloyed
GMAW C 0.08 Re 520 N/mm2 1.0 UDT filler metals (e.g. FF-IG, FFB-IG) where better joint
Si 0.8 Rm 690 N/mm2 1.2 toughness is required.
Mn 1.2 A5 20% Preheating and interpass temperatures 200-400 °C,
Cr 25.7 Av 50 J depending on the relevant base metal and material
Ni 4.5 thickness.
FOX FF SMAW C 0.1 Re 440 N/mm2 2.5 TÜV-D, Basic coated resp. rutile coated (FOX FF-A) alloyed- Austenitic:
Si 1.0 Rm 600 N/mm2 3.2 TÜV-A, core wire electrodes for welding analogous, heat 1.4828 X15CrNiSi20-12
E 22 12 B 22 Mn 1.1 A5 35% 4.0 UDT, resistant rolled, forged and cast steels as well as 1.4826 GX40CrNiSi22-9
Cr 22.5 Av 80 J SEPROZ heat resistant ferritic CrSiAl steels, e.g. in annealing 1.4833 X7CrNi23-14
E309-15(mod.) Ni 11.5 plants, hardening plants, steam boiler construction,
the crude oil industry and the ceramics industry. Ferritic-Perlitic:
For weld joints exposed to reducing, sulphurous 1.4713 X10CrAl7
FOX FF-A SMAW C 0.1 Re 460 N/mm2 2.5 TÜV-D, gases, the final layer has to be deposited by means 1.4724 X10CrAl13
Si 0.8 Rm 610 N/mm2 3.2 UDT, ABS, of FOX FA, or FA-IG. Scaling resistant up to 1.4742 X10CrAl18
E 22 12 R 32 Mn 1.0 A5 37% 4.0 SEPROZ +1000 °C. Preheating and interpass temperatures 1.4710*) GX30CrSi6
Cr 22.5 Av 60 J for ferritic steels 200-300 °C. 1.4740*) GX40CrSi17
E309-17 Ni 12.5
*) limited weldability
AISI:
FF-IG GTAW C 0.08 Re 480 N/mm2 1.6 TÜV-A, GTAW rod and GMAW wire for analogous, heat 305
Si 1.1 Rm 620 N/mm2 2.0 UDT, resisting rolled, forged and cast steels as well as for
W 22 12 H (GTAW) Mn 1.6 A5 34% 2.4 SEPROZ heat resisting, ferritic CrSiAl steels, e.g. in annealing ASTM:
G 22 12 H (GMAW) Cr 23.0 Av 110 J shops, hardening shops, steam boiler construction, A297HF
Ni 12.5 the crude oil industry and the ceramics industry.
ER309(mod.) Austenitic deposited with a ferrite content of
GMAW C 0.08 Re 500 N/mm2 1.0 TÜV-A, approx. 8 %. Preferably used for applications
Si 1.1 Rm 630 N/mm2 1.2 UDT, involving the attack of oxidizing gases. The final
Mn 1.6 A5 32% SEPROZ layer of joint welds in CrSiAl steels exposed to
Cr 23.0 Av 115 J sulphurous gases must be deposited by means of
Ni 12.5 FOX FA or FA-IG. Scaling resistance up to
+1000 °C. Preheating and interpass temperatures
for ferritic steels 200-300 °C.
FOX FFB SMAW C 0.11 Re 420 N/mm2 2.5 TÜV-D, Basic coated resp. rutile coated (FOX FFB-A) alloy- Austenitic:
Si 0.6 Rm 600 N/mm2 3.2 UDT, ed-core wire electrode for analogous, heat resisting 1.4841 X15CrNiSi25-20
E 25 20 B 22 Mn 3.5 A5 36% 4.0 Statoil, rolled, forged and cast steels e.g. in annealing plants, 1.4845 X12CrNi25-21
Cr 26.0 Av 100 J 5.0 SEPROZ hardening plants, steam boiler construction, the 1.4828 X15CrNiSi20-12
E310-15 (mod.) Ni 20.5 crude oil industry and the ceramics industry. Joint 1.4840 GX15CrNi25-20
welds in heat resisting CrSiAl steels exposed to sul- 1.4846 GX40CrNi25-21
phurous gases should be given a final layer deposited 1.4826 GX40CrNiSi22-9
430 N/mm2 by means of FOX FA. Scaling resistant up to +1200 °C.
FOX FFB-A SMAW C 0.12 Re 2.0 Statoil,
Cryogenic resistance down to -196 °C. The service Ferritic-Perlitic:
Si 0.5 Rm 620 N/mm2 2.5 UDT, 1.4713 X10CrAl7
Mn 2.2 A5 35% 3.2 SEPROZ, temperature range between + 650 and +900 °C
E 25 20 R 32 should be avoided owing to the risk of embrittle- 1.4724 X10CrAl13
Cr 26.0 Av 75 J 4.0 VUZ 1.4742 X10CrAl18
Ni 20.5 ment. Preheating and interpass temperatures for
E310-16 ferritic steels 200-300 °C. 1.4762 X10CrAl25
1.4710*) X30CrSi6
1.4740*) G-X40CrSi17
FFB-IG GTAW C 0.12 Re 420 N/mm2 1.6 UDT, GTAW rod and GMAW wire for analogous, heat *) limited weldability
Si 0.9 Rm 630 N/mm2 2.0 SEPROZ resisting, rolled, forged and cast steels, e.g. in annea-
G (W) 25 20 Mn Mn 3.2 A5 33% 2.4 ling shops, hardening shops, steam boiler construc- AISI:
Cr 25.0 Av 85 J tion, the crude oil industry and the ceramics 314
ER310(mod.) Ni 20.5 industry. Fully austenitic deposit. Preferably employ- 310
ed for applications involving the attack of oxidizing, 305
GMAW C 0.12 Re 400 N/mm2 0.8 UDT, nitrogen-containing or low-oxygen gases. The final
Si 0.9 Rm 620 N/mm2 1.0 SEPROZ layer of joint welds in heat resisting CrSiAl steels ASTM:
Mn 3.2 A5 38% 1.2 exposed to sulphurous gases must be deposited by A287HJ
Cr 25.0 Av 95 J means of FOX FA or FA-IG. Scaling resistance up A297HF
Ni 20.5 to +1200 °C. Cryogenic toughness down to -196 °C.
Preheating and interpass temperatures for ferritic
steels 200-300 °C. The Mn-content is above the
maximum limit of AWS ER 310 to provide much
better hot cracking resistance of the fully austenitic
weld metal than a similar AWS corresponding type.

Heat resistant
Standard properties
EN
AWS % mm
FOX CN 21/33 Mn SMAW C 0.14 Re >410 N/mm2 2.5 TÜV-D, Basic coated electrode for joining and surfacing of 1.4876 X10NiCrAlTi32-20
Si 0.3 Rm >600 N/mm2 3.2 TÜV-A, heat resistant steels and cast steels of the same or 1.4859 GX10NiCrNb32-20
E Z21 33 B 42 Mn 4.5 A5 >25% 4.0 CL similar chemical composition. Suitable for operating 1.4958 X5NiCrAlTi31-20
Cr 21.0 Av 70 J temperatures up to 1050 °C in carburized low- 1.4959 X8NiCrAlTi31-21
Ni 33.0 sulphur gas. Typicall alloy for welding of pyrolysis
Nb 1.3 furnace tubes. Alloy 800 H
Fe bal. Alloy 800
GTAW rod and GMAW wire are also best suited
to meet all before mentioned characteristics. UNS:
For GMAW shielding gas Ar +2.5 CO2 is recom- N08800
CN 21/33 Mn-IG GTAW C 0.2 Re 430 N/mm2 2.0 TÜV-D mended. N08810
Si 0.2 Rm 620 N/mm2 2.4 N08811
W Z21 33 Nb (GTAW) Mn 2.3 A5 17% 3.2
G Z21 33 Nb (GMAW) Cr 22.0 Av 50 J
Ni 33.0
GMAW Nb 1.7 Re 400 N/mm2 1.0
Fe bal. Rm 600 N/mm2 1.2
A5 25%
Av 50 J
18
Nickel base alloys
Standard properties
EN
AWS % mm
FOX NIBAS 70/15 SMAW C 0.025 Re 400 N/mm2 2.5 TÜV-D, Basic coated core wire alloyed electrode for high NiCr 15 Fe (Inconel 600)
Si 0.4 Rm 670 N/mm2 3.2 UDT quality welding of nickel base alloys, high tempera- UNS N06600, ASTM B168,
E Ni 6182 (NiCr15Fe6Mn) Mn 6.0 A5 40% 4.0 ture and creep resisting steels, heat resisting and as well as Ni-alloys of similar
Cr 16.0 Av 120 J cryogenic materials, dissimilar joints and low alloy or same chemical composi-
ENiCrFe-3 Ni ≥67.0 80 J…-196 °C problem steels. Suitable in pressure vessel fabrication;non alloy and low alloy
Nb 2.2 tion for -196 °C to +650 °C, scaling resistance steels for elevated tempera-
Fe 6.0 temperature of +1200 °C (S-free atmosphere). tures, e.g. P235GH, P265GH,
Co ≤0.08 Electrode and weld metal meet highest quality S255NB, P235GH-P355GH,
Ta ≤0.08 requirements. 16Mo3, high temperature
Ti + steels as well as constructio-
nal steels with comparable
tensile strength; creep
resistant austenitic steels,
e.g. X8CrNiNb16-13,
X8CrNiMoNb16-16,
X8CrNiMoVNb16-13,
Ni-steels containing 1.5 %
up to and including 5 % Ni;
low alloyed constructional
and pressure vessel steels,
also X20CrMoV12-1 and
X20CrMoWV12-1 on
stainless and creep resistant
austenitic steels; also
suitable for Incoloy 800.
FOX NIBAS 70/20 SMAW C 0.025 Re 420 N/mm2 2.5 TÜV-D, Basic coated core wire alloyed electrode corre- 2.4816 Ni Cr 15 Fe
Si 0.4 Rm 680 N/mm2 3.2 UDT, VUZ, sponding to DIN EL-NiCr 19 Nb for high-grade 2.4817 LC-NiCr 15 Fe
E Ni 6082 (NiCr20Mn3Nb) Mn 5.0 A5 40% 4.0 TÜV-A, welding of nickel-base alloys, high-temperature and Inconel 600
Cr 19.0 Av 120 J 5.0 SEPROZ creep resisting steels, heat resisting and cryogenic Inconel 600 L
ENiCrFe-3(mod.) Mo ≤1.2 80 J…-196 °C Statoil, materials, low-alloyed problem steels and dissimilar
Ni ≥67.0 LTSS, joints. Ferritic-austenitic joints for service tempera- UNS:
Nb 2.2 Kotlandzor tures above +300 °C or for applications where a N06600
Fe 3.0 post weld heat treatment is required. Suitable in
Co ≤0.08 pressure vessel fabrication for -196 °C to +650 °C, ASTM:
Ti + otherwise up to the scaling resistance temperature B168
of +1200 °C (S-free atmosphere). Insusceptible to
embrittlement, highly resistant to hot cracking, Nickel and nickel alloys,
furthermore, C-diffusion at high temperature or low-temperature steels up
during heat treatment of dissimilar joints is largely to 5 % Ni steels, unalloyed
reduced. Thermal shock resistant, stainless, fully and alloyed, high-temperature,
austenitic, low coefficient of thermal expansion creep resisting, high-alloy Cr-
between the coefficient values of C-steel and aus- and CrNiMo-steels particular-
tenitic CrNi (Mo)-steel. Excellent welding characte- ly for joint welding of dissi-
ristics in all positions except vertical-down, easy milar steels, and nickel to
slag removal, high resistance to porosity, absence steel combinations; also re-
of undercuts, high degree of purity. Electrode and commended for Incoloy 800.
weld metal meet highest quality requirements.
NIBAS 70/20-IG GTAW C ≤0.03 Re 440 N/mm2 1.6 TÜV-D, GTAW rod and GMAW wire for welding of nickel
Si ≤0.3 Rm 680 N/mm2 2.0 TÜV-A, base alloys, high-temperature and creep resisting
S Ni 6082(NiCr20Mn3Nb) Mn 3.0 A5 42% 2.4 Statoil, steels, heat resisting and cryogenic materials, low-
Cr 20.0 Av 190 J SEPROZ alloyed problem steels and dissimilar joints. Ferritic-
ERNiCr-3 Nb 2.5 100 J…-196 °C austenitic joints for service temperatures above
Fe ≤1.7 TÜV-D, +300 °C or for applications where a post weld heat
GMAW Ni ≥67.0 Re 420 N/mm2 0.8 TÜV-A, treatment is required. Suitable in pressure vessel
Ti + Rm 680 N/mm2 1.0 Statoil, fabrication from -196 °C to +550 °C, otherwise
A5 40% 1.2 UDT, resistant to scaling up to +1200 °C (S-free
Av 160 J SEPROZ atmosphere). Not susceptible to embrittlement,
80 J…-196 °C C-diffusion at elevated temperatures largely in-
hibited. Resistant to thermal shocks, corrosion
resistant, fully austenitic, low coefficient of thermal
expansion. between the coefficient values of C-steel
and austenitic CrNi (Mo)-steel.
NIBAS 70/20-FD FCAW C 0.03 Re 400 N/mm2 1.2 TÜV-D Rutile/basic flux cored welding wire for downhand
Si 0.4 Rm 650 N/mm2 1.6 and horizontal welding positions.
Type Ni 6082 Mn 3.2 A5 39%
(NiCr20Mn3Nb) Cr 20.0 Av 135 J It provides very good operating characteristics,
Nb 2.5 110 J…-196°C good side wall wetting, safe penetration and a
ENiCr-3T0-4 Fe 2.0 smooth weld finish. The shielding gas should be
Ni ≥67.0 Argon +15-25 % CO2.
Wire: SAW C 0.010 Re 350 N/mm2 1.6 TÜV-D SAW wire/flux combination for welding of Ni base
NIBAS 70/20-UP Si 0.15 Rm 600 N/mm2 2.0 alloy metals and special metals if the use of wire
Mn 3.2 A5 35% 2.4 electrodes with high Ni content is requested. The
S Ni 6082 Cr 20.5 Av 80 J weld metals show excellent mechanical properties
(NiCr20Mn3Nb) Ni bal. ≥32 J…-196°C with high hot cracking resistance. It is applicable
Nb 2.6 for chemical apparatus construction on high tempe-
ERNiCr-3 Fe <2.0 rature metals as well as in low temperature sections
down to -196 °C.
Flux: BB 444
BB 444 is an agglomerated fluoride basic welding
SA FB 2 AC flux with high basic slag characteristics.

Nickel base alloys
Standard properties
EN
AWS % mm
FOX NIBAS 625 SMAW C 0.025 Re 530 N/mm2 2.5 TÜV-D, Basic coated electrode suitable for welding of 2.4856 NiCr 22 Mo 9 Nb
Si 0.4 Rm 800 N/mm2 3.2 TÜV-A, 6 % Mo superaustenitic grades S31254, N08926, 2.4858 NiCr 21 Mo
E Ni 6625 Mn 0.7 A5 40% 4.0 Statoil, N08367 and the matching alloy 625. Electrode 2.4816 NiCr 15 Fe
(NiCr22Mo9Nb) Cr 22.0 Av 80 J UDT, and weld metal meet highest quality and corrosion 1.4583 X10CrNiMoNb18-12
Mo 9.0 45 J…-196 °C LTSS, requirements. Extremely resistant to stress corro- 1.4876 X10NiCrAlTi32-20H
ENiCrMo-3 Ni≥60.0 SEPROZ sion cracking and pitting. The pitting resistance 1.4876 X10NiCrAlTi32-20
Nb 3.3 equivalent is >52. Highly resistant to hot cracking. 1.4529 X1NiCrMoCuN25-20-7
Fe 0.5 Due to the weld metal embrittlement between X2CrNiMoCuN20-18-6
Co ≤0.05 600-850 °C, this temperature range should be 2.4641 NiCr 21 Mo 6 Cu
Al ≤0.4 avoided.
PREN >52 Joint welds of listed materials
GTAW rod and GMAW wire and weld metal with non alloy and low alloy.
meet highest quality and corrosion requirements. steels, e.g P265GH, P285NH,
Extremely resistant to stress corrosion cracking P295GH, 16Mo3, S355N,
NIBAS 625-IG GTAW C ≤0.02 Re 540 N/mm2 1.6 TÜV-D, and pitting. The pitting resistance equivalent is X8Ni9
Si ≤0.2 Rm 800 N/mm2 2.0 TÜV-A, >52. Highly resistant to hot cracking. For GTAW
S Ni 6625 Mn ≤0.3 A5 38% 2.4 Statoil, shielding gas 100 % Ar or Ar + He mixtures. ASTM:
(NiCr22Mo9Nb) Cr 21.5 Av 160 J SEPROZ For GMAW shielding gas Argon +40 % He A553 Gr.1
Mo 9.0 130 J…-196 °C or Ar + He + small amounts of active gas. B443
ERNiCrMo-3 Ni ≥60.0 B446
GMAW Nb 3.6 Re 510 N/mm2 1.0 TÜV-D, Rutil FCAW wire of type E NiCrMo-3 suitable
Fe ≤2.0 Rm 780 N/mm2 1.2 TÜV-A, for welding in all positions except vertical down. UNS:
PREN >52 A5 40% Statoil, Extremely resistant to stress corrosion cracking N06625
Av 130 J SEPROZ, and pitting. Shielding gases Ar +15-25 % CO2.
80 J…-196 °C UDT Inconel 600
SAW wire/flux combination, which meet Inconel 625
highest quality and corrosion requirements. Incoloy 800
NIBAS 625-FD FCAW C 0.05 Re 480 N/mm2 1.2 – Extremely resistant to stress corrosion cracking
Si 0.4 Rm 750 N/mm2 and pitting. The pitting resistance equivalent is >52.
NiCr22Mo9Nb Mn 0.4 A5 30%
Cr 22.0 Av 60 J NIBAS 625 alloys are best suited for cladding
ENiCrMo-3T0-4 Mo 8.5 of finned tube walls.
Ni ≥60.0
Nb 3.3
Fe <5.0
Wire: SAW C 0.012 Re 420 N/mm2 2.4 TÜV-D

NIBAS 625-UP Si 0.16 Rm 700 N/mm2
Mn 0.2 A5 40%
S Ni 6625 Cr 21.8 Av 130 J
(NiCr22Mo9Nb) Mo 9.0 80 J…-196 °C
Ni ≥60.0
ERNiCrMo-3 Nb 3.2
Fe 1.5
Flux: BB 444 PREN >52
SA FB 2 AC
FOX NIBAS 617 SMAW C ≤0.06 Re >450 N/mm2 2.5 TÜV-D Basic coated NiCrCoMo electrode suitable for 2.4851 NiCr23Fe
Si 0.7 Rm >700 N/mm2 3.2 joining and surfacing application on high-tempera- 2.4663 NiCr23Co12Mo
E Ni 6617 Mn 0.1 A5 >35% 4.0 ture and similar nickel-base alloys, heat resistant 1.4876 X10NiCrAlTi32-20
(NiCr21Co12Mo) Cr 21.0 Av >100 J austenitic and cast alloys. The weld metal is 1.4859 GX10NiCrNb32-20
Mo 9.0 resistant to hot-cracking and scale-resistance up
ENiCrCoMo-1(mod.) Ni bal. to +1100 °C, high temperature resistant up to UNS:
Co 11.0 1000 °C. High resistance to hot gases in oxidizing N06007
Al 0.7 and carburized atmospheres, e.g. gas turbines,
Ti 0.3 ethylene production plants. ASTM:
Fe 1.0 B582
GTAW rod and GMAW wire of type B622
AWS ERNiCrCoMo-1 are also best suited to
meet all before mentioned characteristics. Alloy 617
NIBAS 617-IG GTAW C 0.05 Re 450 N/mm2 2.0 TÜV-D
Si 0.1 Rm 700 N/mm2 2.4 For GMAW shielding gas 100 % Ar, Ar +28 % He
S Ni 6617 Mn 0.1 A5 30% or Ar +30 % He +0.5 % CO2.
(NiCr22Co12Mo9) Cr 21.5 Av 60 J
Mo 9.0 Nickel base wire/flux combination for welding
ERNiCrCoMo-1 GMAW Ni bal. Re 400 N/mm2 1.0 – of similar Ni base alloys, heat resistant austenitic
Co 11.0 Rm 700 N/mm2 1.2 and cast alloys, e.g. alloys 617, N06007, 2.4663.
Al 1.0 A5 40% High resistance to hot gases in oxidizing resp.
Ti 0.5 Av 100 J carburizing atmospheres.
Fe 1.0
Wire: SAW Wire:

NIBAS 617-UP C 0.07 Re >420 N/mm2 2.0 –
Si 0.2 Rm >700 N/mm2
(UP-NiCr22Co12Mo9) Mn 0.2 A5 >35%
Cr 20.5 Av >80 J
ERNiCrCoMo-1 Mo 8.8
Ni bal.
Flux: BB 444 Co 10.4
Fe <2.0
SA FB 2 AC
20
References
Combuster of a gas turbine

References
Segment of a boiler with circulating fluidized bed combustion.
© ??
Heat exchanger.
© ??
References
Manifold.
© ??
Tube to manifold joint welds of a waste heat recovery boiler.
© ??
Published by BÖHLER WELDING
Böhler Schweißtechnik Austria GmbH

Böhler-Welding-St. 1
8605 Kapfenberg / AUSTRIA
+43 (0) 3862-301-0
+43 (0) 3862-301-95193
postmaster.bsga@bsga.at
www.boehler-welding.com
Member of the BÖHLER-UDDEHOLM Group
Your partner:
BSGA 08/2005 E1000 Cover picture: © STEAG
User Reportage
Braden Manufacturing: met. They have a strong employee commitment to a

Continuous Improvement Program and everyone's
A Proven Leader in ideas are seriously taken into consideration.
Auxiliary Systems for
GT Power Plants Braden has two major manufacturing facilities in the
United States located in Tulsa, Oklahoma and Fort
Braden Manufacturing was incorporated in 1923 and Smith, Arkansas and distributes their product
for the last 30 years has occupied a unique spot throughout the country. They also have fabrication
halfway between the gas turbine OEMs and the power partners in 25 countries and will meet local content
producers. No other company has spent more time requirements and provide cost-effective fabrication
listening, learning and working with both groups. throughout the world.
Kobelco Welding of America has served Braden for

two years through our distributor Plattner Welding
Supply. DW-309L and DW-308L are used for their
stainless applications making them one of the larger
users of 309L flux-cored wires in the United States.
FRONTIARC-711 and DWA-50 are used for their
carbon steel applications.
The applications of Kobelco flux-cored wires

include carbon steel, carbon steel to stainless, and
Braden's international headquarters in Tulsa, Oklahoma
stainless to stainless. The wire's superb welder appeal
and cosmetics along with a low welding fume
As a result Braden has established itself as the most generation rate makes Kobelco highly appraised with
experienced and trusted name in the design of auxiliary the welders, management and the safety department.
systems for GT power plants. Turbine manufacturers
acknowledge that no other company is better equipped
to handle the challenges of GT plants.
Braden's Fort Smith, Arkansas manufacturing facility

Braden's Monterrey, Mexico manufacturing facility
We at Kobelco Welding of America wish to continue

Braden's technical capabilities are extensive. Their to be a good and useful supplier to Braden by
experienced engineering staff uses the most modern maintaining excellent product quality, training and
software to provide specific compliant designs to meet technical services and quick delivery so that they will
specific inlet and exhaust application criteria. Their be more satisfied and continue to use our product for
manufacturing facilities are equipped with the most many years to come.
modern state of the art equipment offered today. With
ISO 9001 certification as the baseline for their quality
Reported By Jerry Whiteley
programs, every manufacturing process is strictly
Regional Sales Manager
monitored to insure their customers' expectations are Kobelco Welding of America
1
Preface
Message from the Editor
Generally speaking, the world economy seems to be in a depression now. The governments
and companies in all countries are trying to recover, although it does not look easy. Nowadays,
the economy of any one nation can deeply be affected by events taking place in other economies
around the world. However, we have experienced overcoming the Asian economic crisis that
started in 1997. Therefore, I believe the world economy will again get well this time sooner or
later. Until then, we just can do our best to survive and grow in this kind of bad economical
circumstance.
The KOBELCO group has been working to supply our products and services to you, our
business partners and customers all over the world, for supporting your success and satisfaction.
I promise you that we will pursue the same policy to keep the same consistency in our
international operations as we always have and further try to improve our activities.
Contents
User Reportage
■ Braden Manufacturing: A Proven Leader in Auxiliary Systems for GT Power Plants ......................... 1
Message from the Editor
■ Do our best to survive in today's hard economy .................................................................................. 2
Technical Report
■ CMA-96/CMA-96MB: A World-Class 1.25Cr-0.5Mo Electrodes of Persistent Quality ..................... 3-4
■ TGS-1CM/TGS-1CML: TIG Filler Rods, Unbeatable in Pipe Welding ....................................... 5-6
The ABC's of Arc Welding
■ Cold Cracks: Causes and Cures ............................................................................................................ 7
Kobelco Group News
■ Seeking a New Style of Business .......................................................................................................... 8
Feature Articles
■ CM-96B9/TGS-90B9: A 9Cr Electrode/Filler Rod for Ultra-Supercritical Boilers .............................. 9
■ My Invaluable Experience in China .................................................................................................... 10
Editorial Postscript .................................................................................................................................... 10
Let me introduce myself. My name is Kimihiko Nakamura, a manager of the IOD.

I cover in my activities the areas of Europe, America, Russia, Oceania, India and
the Middle East.
As you may imagine, my job requires taking a lot of overseas business trips.
Personally, I like this job since I can get acquainted with many people with different
culture backgrounds, although I still do not like flying.
I also like the feeling of sharing the enthusiasm with our partners when we have
obtained new business, which, unfortunately, does not happen enough.
Since I am a soccer fan, I sometimes enjoy watching soccer games. I think that
the way of playing soccer reflects the character of the nationality. It is often said
that the Japan Soccer Team plays in a conservative, gentle way.
We, KOBELCO, are apt to take a conservative way, too, in business, but we are
not gentle. We are rather aggressive to get an advantageous position in each market.
Let's pull together to win the game!
2
Technical Report
CMA-96: A World-Class
1.25Cr-0.5Mo Electrode of
Persistent Quality
Since 1952
Since its inception, CMA-96 (AWS A5.5 E8016-B2)
has persistently earned a good reputation in the
high-temperature high-pressure fields such as boilers
and refineries in which 1.25Cr-0.5Mo steel is used at a
large consumption ratio for steam power generating
equipment and reactor vessels.
Photo 1. Heat-resistant low-alloy steel is a main material for

coal firing power plants (Photo courtesy of TAKUMA Co.,
Ltd.)
In welding Cr-Mo steel, the weld metal should have Fig. 1. Tensile properties of CMA-96 (5Ø) weld metal vs.
the following essential qualities. temper parameter (T: temperature in deg. K; t: soaking time
(1) Low susceptibility to cold cracking in hour) by AC welding in flat position
(2) Low susceptibility to hot cracking
(3) Resistibility to extended postweld heat treatment
for better mechanical properties
(4) Stable microscopic structure for better creep
resistance at elevated temperatures
In order to fulfill these essential requirements,

CMA-96 is ingeniously designed. First, it is of the
extra-low hydrogen type; consequently, the amount of
diffusible hydrogen in the weld metal can be kept
lower than with conventional low hydrogen type
electrodes, thereby reducing the susceptibility to cold
cracking. Second, the phosphorous and sulfur content
of the weld metal is kept low to decrease the
susceptibility to hot cracking. Thirdly, CMA-96 with
its elaborate chemical composition provides a stable
weld metal microstructure, which allows the weld
metal to maintain adequate mechanical properties over
extended postweld heat treatment (PWHT) of high
temper parameter (Figs. 1 and 2) and to increase creep Fig. 2. Charpy impact properties of CMA-96 (5Ø) weld metal
resistance. in the PWHT condition by AC welding in flat position
3
Technical Report
CMA-96MB: The Best
Choice for Moderate-
PWHT Fabrication of
1.25Cr-0.5Mo
Components to Strict
Notch Toughness and
Hardness Requirements
With lower temper parameters (either with lower
PWHT temperature or with shorter PWHT time), weld
hardness is prone to be higher ― hence lower
ductility ― and notch toughness tends to be lower in
general. The temper parameter of PWHT will
necessarily be lower depending on the thickness of the
weldment, the specification or code to follow, and the
base metal used.
In contrast to CMA-96, CMA-96MB (AWS A5.5

E8016-B2) is more suitable for moderate PWHT of
lower temper parameter. With moderate PWHT,
CMA-96MB provides better notch toughness and lower
hardness ― thus higher ductility ― compared with
CMA-96. In addition, CMA-96MB more strictly
control impurity elements such as phosphorous (P), tin
(Sn), antimony (Sb), and arsenic (As) to minimize
temper embrittlement. Fig. 1 shows results of Charpy
impact tests of CMA-96MB weld metal that sustained
low temper parameter PWHT. The weld metal exhibits
adequate notch toughness over the range of temper
parameters.
As shown in Fig. 2, the susceptibility to temper
embrittlement of the weld metal is quite low with
almost no temperature shift at the standard absorbed
energy of 54J.
Fig. 2. Temper embrittlement test results of CMA-96MB (6Ø)

weld metal by AC welding in flat position (Step cooling is a
heat treatment to accelerate temper embrittlement)
Fig. 1. Charpy impact absorbed energy of CMA-96MB (5.0Ø)

weld metal as a function of temper parameter (T: PWHT Photo 1. CMA-96MB shines in the fabrication of pressure
temperature in deg. K; t: soaking time in hour) by AC welding components where PWHT uses lower temper parameters
in flat position and strict control of temper embrittlement is required
4
Technical Report
TGS-1CM: A 1.25Cr-0.5Mo
TIG Filler Rod,
Unbeatable in
Pipe Welding
Unlike conventional 1.25Cr-0.5Mo TIG filler rods deposition rate ―in automatic TIG welding, notch
classified as AWS E5.28 ER80S-B2, TGS-1CM is toughness of the weld metal tends to decrease
classified necessarily as ER80S-G because of its because of coarser crystal grains.
unique chemical composition. TGS-1CM deposited (4) Preheating and interpass temperature should he
metal contains, as shown in Table 1, comparatively low 150-200°C to decrease the cooling speed and
carbon, phosphorous and sulfur along with a higher thereby minimize hardness of the weld and prevent
manganese content. This improves usability (better cold cracking.
fluidity of the molten pool) and the resistance to hot (5) Postweld heat treatment temperature should be
cracking that is likely to occur in root-pass welding of 650-700°C to remove residual stresses, decrease
pipes. hardness of the weld and improve the mechanical
properties.
Table 1. Typical chemical composition (%) of TGS-1CM (6) Heat input should be properly controlled because
deposited metal by TIG welding with pure argon gas shielding excessive heat input may cause hot cracking, and
deteriorates tensile properties and notch toughness
C Si Mn P S Cr Mo of the weld.
7x 5x
0.06 0.50 0.99 1.22 0.54
10-3 10-3
The mechanical properties of TGS-1CM deposited

metal are sufficient for tubular steel base metals such
as ASTM A199 Gr. T11, A213 Gr. T11, A250 Gr. T11,
and A335 Gr. P11 after extended PWHT — Table 2.
Table 2. Mechanical properties of TGS-1CM deposited metal

by TIG welding with pure argon gas shielding
PWHT 0.2%PS TS El IV
(°C x h) (N/mm2) (N/mm2) (%) (J)
650X1 550 620 25 270
690X1 540 630 28 270
700X5 510 590 25 260
ASTM
205 415 22
A335 —
min min min
P11
A335 P11: 1.25Cr-0.5Mo seamless pipe
IV: Charpy impact energy on average at 0°C
Tips for Welding with TGS-1CM
(1) Use direct current with electrode negative polarity.

(2) Pure argon gas is suitable for both torch shielding
and back shielding. The shielding gas flow rate
should be 10-15 liter/min. In apparent ambient
wind over 1 m/sec, use a windscreen to protect the
molten pool from the wind, or the wind may cause
porosity, oxidation, and poor reverse bead Photo 1. 1.25Cr-0.5Mo steel is used for applications operated
formation. at the temperatures from 350-550°C. For such
(3) In the use of an automatic TIG welding process, the high-temperature applications, the materials must
welding procedure should be determined in metallurgically be stable, resisting elevated temperature
oxidation and creep rupture. Kobe Steel has used its
consideration of the quality requirements for the
accumulated technical expertise to pursue quality control of
weld in advance. This is because, with a high TGS-1CM, maintaining its high performance for the piping of
feeding rate of filler wire ―hence a high oil refineries and power boilers.
5
Technical Report
TGS-1CML: A Low-Carbon
1.25Cr-0.5Mo Filler Rod:
The Choice for Cost
Savings in Preheating and
PWHT
Tips for Higher Workmanship
Although the AWS classification (A5.28 ER80S-G)
of TGS-1CML is the same as that of TGS-1CM, its In addition to the aforementioned tips for
I welding performance is quite different. First, as to the TGS-1CM, the following techniques are effective to
chemical composition, the lower carbon content (see prevent weld imperfections in root-pass welding of
Table 1) is effective to prevent hot cracking. Second, tubular work.
the lower tensile strength (or lower hardness) ― (1) The weld crater should be terminated on the groove
hence higher ductility ― is suitable for welds to be face in order to prevent hot cracks in the crater.
left in the as-welded condition or when more
moderate PWHT of lower temper parameter is applied,
as shown in Tables 2 and 3.
Table 1. Typical chemical composition (%) of TGS-1CM

deposited metal by TIG welding with pure argon gas
C Si Mn P S Cr Mo
9x 6x
0.02 0.48 1.10 1.38 0.50
10-3 10-3
(2) Use proper torch placement and oscillation for
making good penetration.
Table 2. Mechanical properties of TGS-1CML deposited

metal by TIG welding with pure argon gas shielding
PWHT 0.2%PS TS EL IV
(°C x h) (N/mm2) (N/mm2) (%) (J)
As-weld 540 620 32 290
620 x 1 490 580 32 290
690 x 1 440 540 37 290
ASTM 205 415
30 —
A213 T11 min min
A213 T11: 1.25Cr-0.5Mo seamless tube
IV: Charpy impact energy on average at 0°C
Table 3. Vickers hardness of TGS-1CML deposited metal by

TIG welding with pure argon gas shielding
PWHT Vickers hardness (Hv)

(°C x h) Cross section Surface
As weld 196 255
620 x 1 187 237
690 x 1 177 206
Hv: Average of five individual measurements
Photo 1. The tube-to-tube sheet joint of a heat exchanger

made of heat resistant steel is TIG welded by using an
orbital welding machine.
6
The ABC's of Arc Welding
Cold Cracks: Causes and
Cures
A cold crack is generally referred to as a
spontaneous crack that occurs at temperatures blow
200°C after solidification is complete in welding. Cold
cracking can develop hours or days after the weld has
been made, which is referred to as "delayed cracking."
Cold cracking is likely to occur in all ferritic and
martensitic steels such as carbon steel, low alloy steel
and high alloy steel unless adequate precautions,
mainly preheating, are employed. (2) Prevent weld discontinuities to avoid stress
concentration.
Cold cracks, as shown in Photos 1 and 2, are caused (3) Use low-hydrogen type welding consumables to
by the combined effects of low ductility of the weld, minimize diffusible hydrogen in the weld.
residual stress and diffusible hydrogen in the weld. A
weld's ductility may decrease with a high carbon
equivalent and a high cooling speed after solidification. On preheating, it is important to determine the
Residual stress in a weld can be larger than expected if temperature appropriate to the base metal and filler
it contains weld discontinuities such as incomplete metal to be used. The appropriate temperature is
fusion, incomplete joint penetration, overlap, undercut, generally determined for individual work by taking
slag inclusions, and porosity. The source of diffusible into account several factors such as chemical
hydrogen in a weld is mainly moisture in the welding composition, restraint level (or plate thickness), the
consumable and atmosphere. welding process, heat input, and the amount of
diffusible hydrogen in the weld metal. Table 1 is a
quick guidance to the proper preheating temperatures
for different types of steels.
Photo 1.
A cold crack initiated at
the root of the weld and Table 1. A general guide to the preheating and interpass
developed into the weld temperatures for various types of steels
metal
Preheating
Type of metal and interpass
temperature (°C)
HT50 20 - 120
HT60 50 - 120
HT80 100 - 180
0.5%Mo steel 100 - 200
1.25%Cr-0.5%Mo steel 150 - 300
2.25%Cr-1%Mo steel 200 - 350
5%Cr-0.5%Mo steel 250 - 350
Photo 2.
9%Cr-1%Mo steel 250 - 350
A cold crack initiated at the
toe of the weld and 17%Cr stainless steel 100 - 250
developed into the 13%Cr stainless steel 100 - 400
heat-affected zone
Note: These temperatures are for general reference only.
In welding heavy-thick pressure vessels, immediate

postheating (e.g. 300°C x 30 min) is often applied on
Cold cracking, therefore, can be prevented by the weldment right after welding finished, while the
controlling the three main factors ― low ductility, weld maintains the preheat and interpass temperature.
residual stress, and diffusible hydrogen. That is, This is to ensure no delayed cracking when the vessel
is cooled to room temperature for nondestructive
(1) Preheat the base metal to reduce the cooling speed
examinations before postweld heat treatment (PWHT).
of the weld. This prevents the embrittlement of the
The combined use of preheating and immediate
weld and removes dissolved hydrogen from the
postheating is effective to prevent cold cracks in the
weld.
weld.
7
KOBELCO Group News
SEEKING A NEW STYLE
OF BUSINESS
Though having almost overcome the currency crisis
in Asia that started in 1997, Singapore is again very
sluggish in overall production because of the sharp
economic slowdown in the USA and the burst of the IT
bubble economy. However, the construction of oil
production facilities (oil drilling rigs for example),
ships and petrochemical equipment has recently been
booming.
Top: Hello, from all staff of BDD
Bottom: Welding demonstration by the BDD personnel for
However, for the fabrication of these installations, technical support for customers
budgets set by owners have been slashed, while the
requirements for quality have become stricter. BDD takes over the functions of technical services
Therefore, Singaporean industries are striving all out to and offering new products from the old AMD. In
reduce costs in order to compete against enterprises in addition, the BDD's biggest function is to find
other ASEAN countries, the Middle East and fast solutions that provide individual customers with "cost
growing China, let alone Korea and Taiwan. Cost reductions with high quality" by visiting them to
reduction only is not enough, however. It is impossible discover, more than ever, their real needs. More
to secure orders unless the quality and delivery concretely, we will realize on-time delivery by
requirements of the customers, which are becoming production and inventory control that reflects the
stricter, are also satisfied. In other words, it is hard to market situation. We will also make proposals to Kobe
survive in this global competition only by reducing the Steel for the development of new products based on the
costs of manpower or by using cheaper raw materials needs of the market. It is also our primary mission to
to the possible detriment of quality. Furthermore, the show customers how to rationalize their welding
acquisition of new technology is indispensable for procedures and to choose the most appropriate welding
winning new fabrication orders against the consumables.
competition.
It is our belief that business must be bi-directional

Since our establishment in 1979, we, Kobe Welding between customer and supplier. For this, we make it a
Singapore, have been manufacturing low hydrogen and rule to visit our customers continually to collect
ilmenite electrodes of high quality for not only the information so that we can offer them the best proposal
domestic and Malaysian markets but also for a wide that will lead to better profits ― our target ― for both
area including Hong Kong, Vietnam, Philippines, the customers and KOBELCO. Our proposals are
Oceania, Middle East and Europe. In addition, we have backed up by superb quality of Kobe Steel's products
been importing welding consumables for and the achievements and experiences accumulated
low-temperature steel, heat-resistant low-alloy steel through international activities.
and stainless steel from Kobe Steel Japan for
petrochemical plants and offshore structures that
require especially high reliability and performance. We, BDD staff, must have met many readers of
Kobelco Welding Today sometime, somewhere. If you
may think, "No I haven't met any of them. What are
The ASEAN Marketing Department (AMD) of our they doing and where?," please contact us any time.
company has assisted customers with technical services We will be with you immediately. Then let us start
and new products. However, in order to respond more business. Oh, yes, we both will get busy, though, for
effectively to the seemingly incompatible demand for BUSINESS is busy + ness.
"cost reduction with high quality" from customers, we
have changed the organization of the AMD,
transforming it to the Business Development Reported by K. Harada, Roy Goh and G. Sivakumar
Department (BDD). Business Development Department
Kobe Welding (Singapore) Pte. Ltd.
Tel: +65-268-2711; Fax: +65-264-1751
E-mail: kobeweld@singnet. com.sg
KOBELCO Group News
8
Feature Article
CM-96B9 and TGS-90B9: CM-96B9 and TGS-90B9 are, corresponding to
AWS A5.5 E9016-B9 and A5.28 ER90S-B9, a suitable
Suitable for High- covered electrode and filler wire respectively for
Temperature High- Modified 9Cr-1Mo steel (9Cr-1Mo-V-Nb-N). Table 1
Pressure Steam shows the typical chemical composition and
mechanical properties of the covered electrode, and
Applications Table 2 shows those of the filler wire. CM-96B9 and
TGS-90B9 offer excellent high-temperature strength,
Advanced 9Cr-1Mo steel grades known as Modified creep resistance and notch toughness due to the
9Cr-1Mo steel (for example, ASTM A199 Gr. T9l, sophisticated chemical composition and the resulting
A2l3 Gr. T91 and A335 Gr. P91 for tube and pipe) are uniform microstructure as shown in Photo 2. In
often used worldwide in ultra-supercritical pressure addition, CM-96B9 is an electrode of the extra-low
boilers ― or power boilers of higher power generation hydrogen type offering a lower amount of diffusible
efficiency superior to conventional boilers. The header, hydrogen (thus lower crack susceptibility) than the
super heater and reheater tubes of the power boilers are conventional low hydrogen type.
typical applications for Modified 9Cr-1Mo steel.
Photo 1.
A Mod. 9Cr-1Mo steel weld
in the 3 o'clock position of
a horizontally-fixed pipe, Photo 2. Microstructure of
using CM-96B9 a TGS-90B9 weld metal
(4.0Ø, DCEP, 120A) after PWHT: 745°C x 1h
Table 1. Typical chemical composition and mechanical properties of CM-96B9

Chemical composition of weld metal (%)
C Si Mn P S Cu Ni Cr Mo V Nb N
0.11 0.23 1.12 0.009 0.002 0.01 0.83 9.13 0.99 0.23 0.037 0.027
Charpy impact Creep rupture properties of
Tensile properties of weld metal
energy (J, av.) weld metal at 600°C
PWHT Temp. 0.2%PS TS RA Stress Rupture El RA
El (%) 0°C 20°C
(°C x h) (°C) (N/mm2) (N/mm2) (%) (N/mm2) time (h) (%) (%)
RT 754 850 20 61
740 x 1 550 499 544 13 64 30 42 — — — —
600 400 436 15 77
RT 637 761 22 64 157 959.4 15 60
740 x 8 550 440 479 15 74 48 81 137 2282.3 17 64
600 347 386 18 79 118 Testing — —
Table 2. Typical chemical composition and mechanical properties of TGS-90B9

Chemical composition of filler wire (%)
C Si Mn P S Cu Ni Cr Mo V Nb N
0.12 0.17 1.04 0.007 0.005 0.10 0.93 9.14 0.91 0.16 0.027 0.050
Charpy impact Creep rupture properties of
Tensile properties of weld metal
energy (J, av.) weld metal at 600°C
PWHT Temp. 0.2%PS TS El RA Stress Rupture El RA
2 0°C 20°C
(N/mm2) 2
(°C x h) (°C) (N/mm ) (%) (%) (N/mm ) time (h) (%) (%)
RT 756 851 23 72
745 x 1 550 455 520 17 83 172 204 — — — —
600 389 425 17 83
RT 603 770 26 71 177 138.5 27 85
745 x 8 550 396 458 17 81 124 175 157 397.6 26 88
600 326 366 18 83 137 1341.1 26 85
9
Feature Article
My Invaluable Experience This time, I was dispatched as a welding expert to the
above-mentioned company for 20 days in June this
in China year.
During my stay in this company, I surveyed the
About 900 km west of Beijing lies Intuan (literary, welding procedures and gave them suggestions for
Silver River), the capital city of the province of productivity-enhancing tips based on my findings in
Ningxia Huizu. It is about two-hour flight from the factory. In addition, I gave a two-day seminar on
Beijing. Not only is it a provincial capital today, but it the subject of welding procedure control for quality
was the metropolis of an ancient monarchy, Xixia assurance in arc welding, which was attended by about
Monarchy (translation: West Summer Monarchy), 160 employees.
which prospered from 1038-1227.
At the entrance to the

Driving north from Intuan City for about one hour, Xixia Imperial
you come to a big provincial city, Shizuishan, which Mausoleum, where an
means Stone Peak Mountain. In this city, there is a ancient tomb resting
machinery producer, who is one of the biggest at the foot of a stone
mountain can be seen
companies (factory area: 470,000 m2; 2600 far behind me
employees), dealing in coal mining machinery, in
China. This company is so eager to control the quality
of their more than 120 types of products that it has On holidays, I had a chance to visit a famous ancient
been awarded quality certificates many times by the relic, the Xixia Imperial Mausoleum. This relic is
national and provincial governments, in addition to located a half-hour drive from Intuan City, at the foot
qualifying for ISO 9001 since 1998. In order to of a 3500-m-high mountain range, Helan Shan. The
upgrade productivity in welding fabrication, they nine successive emperors of the Xixia Monarchy rest in
requested the Japan Overseas Development graves across a vast area that is 4 km from East to West
Corporation (JODC) to dispatch a welding expert and 10 km from North to South. This monarchy was
capable of analyzing welding production processes and destroyed by the Mongolia Monarchy in the 13th
of suggesting efficient welding procedures. century.
JODC is a non-profit organization established in My visit to a provincial city in China gave me a

1970. With assistance of the Japanese Government, chance to get to know a China that was new to me and
they dispatch experts experienced in many technical far different from what I had experienced in visiting
fields for the purpose of improving the management Beijing and Shanghai.
and productivity of companies in developing countries.
(Reported by S. Yamamoto, KWT editorial staff)
Editorial Postscript
The 15th Schweissen & Schneiden (Welding & FABTECH International 2001, North America's largest
Cutting) 2001 international trade fair was held September annual metal forming and fabricating exposition, will be
12-18 at the Messe-Essen fair site in Essen, Germany. held November 11-14 at McCormick Place South,
Kobe Steel and Kobelco Welding of Europe attended the Chicago. The technology areas of the fair include
fair as a cooperate exhibitor and welcomed a large tube/pipe, stamping, and welding, too. Kobelco Welding
number of visitors at the Kobelco booth. Look for details of America, as an exhibitor, will report on the fair in the
the next volume of this magazine. following issue of Kobelco Welding Today.
Publisher: The International Operations Dept., Welding Company, Kobe Steel, Ltd.
Printer: Fukuda Printing Co., Ltd.
Editor: KOBELCO WELDING TODAY Editorial Staff
URL: http://www.kobelco.co.jp
E-MAIL: iod@melts.kobelco.co.jp
10
http://www.amfiller.com
Staineless Steel Wire

Flux Cored Wire
Nickel
QUALITY WELDING ALLOYS
6015 Murphy Street, Houston, TX 77033, USA (T) 1.713.649.8785 (F) 1.713.644.9628
A T
L O
M 6015 Murphy Street Houston, TX 77033 B
(T) 1.800.394.4550 / 1.713.649.8785 (F) 1.713.644.9628
C C
B
T
• Real People • Real Service • Real Fast •
S
B L
R •
Get Your Quality Filler Metal
Z A
American Filler Metals’
manufacturing capabilities
T allow us to provide a wider H
I •
variety of options with regards
T F
to cut lengths, spool sizes and
diameter of wires than many
M of our competitors. C
A •
G I
T N
S E71T-1 E71T-GS •
T Nickel K
STS FCW STS Wires
A
S
E
R
Made In USA Products •
E
O
M
A
Call us today! Material S
S
Safety •
I Toll Free: 1.800.394.4550 M D W
N Data
Telephone: 1.713.649.8785 S
Sheet
I
N Fax: 1.713.644.9628 F
C
F
W
O
2
Go Back to Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Carbon Steel Low Alloys - Electrodes Low Alloys - Wires Hardfacing

Page 7 ~ Page 13 Page 17 ~ Page 31 Page 33 ~ Page 51 Page 53 ~ Page 65
Cast Iron Nickel Alloys STS Electrodes STS Wires

Flux Cored Wires Aluminum Alloys Cobalt Alloys Bronze Alloys

Titanium Alloys Magnesium Alloys Tungsten Alloys Aerospace Alloys

S Material
M D
Safety
Data
S
Reference & Information Sheet
Page 244 ~ Page 261
Maintenance Alloys
Page 226 ~ Page 241
3
A T
L O
M 6015 Murphy Street Houston, TX 77033 B
(T) 1.800.394.4550 / 1.713.649.8785 (F) 1.713.644.9628
C C
B •
T S
B L
R •
Z A
T H
I •
T F
M C
A •
G I
T N
S •
T K
A Important Notice for All Users of This Book

S
E
The information contained herein is intended for general information only and not for specification purposes. •
R American Filler Metals Company presents all the technical information, data and applications to permit you E
O to make your own evaluations and decisions, and is not to be mistaken as expressed or implied warranties for
these or other applications.
M
American Filler Metals Company assumes no liability for results or damages incurred from the use of any
S
A
information contained herein, in whole or in part. •
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
4
A T
L O
M B
Carbon Steel Electrodes
C C
B Coated Electrode •
T AFM Product AWS Classification Page S
AFM E6010 AWS/SFA A5.1 E6010 7
B AFM E6011 AWS/SFA A5.1 E6011 8 L

R AFM E6013 AWS/SFA A5.1 E6013 9 •
Z AFM E7014 AWS/SFA A5.1 E7014 10
A
AFM E7018 AWS/SFA A5.1 E7018 11
T AFM E7018-1 AWS/SFA A5.1 E7018-1 12 H

I AFM E7024 AWS/SFA A5.1 E7024 13 •
T F
M Click to Download
C
A •
G I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
5
A T
L O
M B
Carbon Steel Electrode
C C
B •
Order of Mandatory Classification Designators
T AWS/SFA A5.1 S
B L
R Designates an electrode.
•
Z A
Designates the tensile strength (minimum), in ksi.

T H
I •
T Designates the welding position in which electrodes are usable, F
the type of covering, and the kind of welding current
for which the electrodes are suitable.
M C
A Designates that the electrode also meets •
the optional supplemental requirements for toughness
G and improved elongation of the weld metal.
I
T N
S • Welding Current •
T E 70 18 - 1 DCEP - Direct Current Electrode Positive (DC, Reverse Polarity)
K
DCEN - Direct Current Electrode Negative (DC, Straight Polarity)
A • Welding Position
S
E Type of Welding Welding Position
Designation
BS EN AWS •
R
Flat PA 1G E
O
Horizontal PC 2G
Butt Welding Vertical Downwards PG 3G
M Vertical Upwards PF 3G S
A Overhead PE 4G •
I Flat PA 1F
W
N Horizontal PB 2F
Fillet Welding Vertical Downwards PG 3F
I Vertical Upwards PF 3F
F
N Horizontal Overhead PD 4F
C
F
W
O
6
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E6010 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.1
T High Cellulose Sodium Covering S
Description:
AFM E6010 is a high cellulose coated “fastfreeze” electrode.
B L
It produces a deep penetrating, forceful, spray type arc and readily removable, thin, friable slag which may not
R seem to completely cover the weld bead. It can be used for welding in the flat, vertical-up, vertical-down and •
Z overhead positions with DC reverse polarity. A
Welding Characteristics:
T AFM E6010 will provide good arc stability with light slag while welding dirty, rusty or painted material that H
I cannot thoroughly be cleaned. •
T It will produce high deposition and low spatter loss in addition to a weld puddle that wets and spreads well. F
Its “fast-freeze” characteristic allows it to set up fast enough to make it ideal for vertical up and vertical down
welding and is frequently selected for welding pipe.
M C
Applications:
A AFM E6010 is recommended for welding API grades A25, A, B, and X42 pipe and in shipbuilding, •
G buildings, bridges, storage tanks, piping, and pressure vessel fittings. I
Recommended Current Ranges (DC+):

T N
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
S •
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T K
Flat 60 ~ 85 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 160 150 ~ 200
V&O 50 ~ 70 70 ~ 110 110 ~ 150 130 ~ 170
A
S
E Typical Mechanical Properties:
•
R Tensile Strength psi 70,000
E
O Yield Strength psi 61,000
Elongation in 2” (%) 30
M Reduction in Area (%) 60
S
A Charphy V-Notch @ -20oF 36ft. Lbs
•
I
Standard Packaging: W
N
Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%): 10# Package; 60# Master Carton.
I C Mn Si P S
0.13 0.51 0.20 0.014 0.006 F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
7
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E6011 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.1
T High Cellulose Potassium Covering S
Description:
AFM E6011 is a high-cellulose potassium electrode designed to be used with AC current and to duplicate
B L
the usability characteristics and mechanical properties of AFM E6010.
R Although AFM E6011 is usable with dcep (electrode positive), a decrease in joint penetration will be noted •
Z when compared to AFM E6010. A
T AFM E6011 will have similar arc action, slag, and fillet weld appearance to those of AFM E6010. H
I The use of AC current with AFM E6011 will eliminate arc blow sometimes experienced with AFM E6010 DC •
T current. F
Applications:
AFM E6011 is commonly used for welding mild steels such as ASTM A-36, A-283, A-284, A-285, A-515,
M and A-516. C
A Typical applications are railroad cars, truck frames, storage tanks, bridges, boilers, barges and ships. •
G I
Recommended Current Ranges (AC or DC+):
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
T N
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
S •
Flat 65 ~ 90 80 ~ 120 130 ~ 170 170 ~ 210
T K
V&O 50 ~ 75 70 ~ 110 110 ~ 150 130 ~ 170
A Typical Mechanical Properties: S

E Tensile Strength psi 69,000
•
R Yield Strength psi 68,000
E
O Elongation in 2” (%) 29
Reduction in Area (%) 60
M Charphy V-Notch @ -20oF 36ft. Lbs S
A
•
I
Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%): W
N
C Mn Si P S Standard Packaging:
0.13 0.50 0.19 0.015 0.008 10# Package; 60# Master Carton.
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
8
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E6013 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.1
T High Titania Potassium Covering S
Description:
AFM E6013 is a versatile electrode with a wide variety of applications for light gauge and heavy plate.
B L
Slag removal is easy, often is self cleaning on heavy plate, and has a smooth arc transfer with a fine ripple bead
R appearance. •
Z A
AFM E6013 produce a flat fillet weld face and are suitable for making groove welds because of their concave
T weld face and easily removable slag. H
I Welds with the smaller diameters often meet the Grade 1 radiographic requirements. •
T F
Applications:
AFM E6013 is a high titania general purpose coated electrode.
It is commonly used for auto bodies and fenders, farm implements, metal furniture and any application where
M low spatter and good bead appearance is desirable. C
A •
G I
Recommended Current Ranges (AC or DC-):
Dia. (inch) 1/16” 5/64” 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 1.6 mm 2.0 mm 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T N
Flat 25 ~ 50 35 ~ 60 50 ~ 100 80 ~ 130 140 ~ 180 180 ~ 230
S •
V&O 25 ~ 50 35 ~ 60 50 ~ 90 60 ~ 110 110 ~ 160 120 ~ 160
T K
Typical Mechanical Properties:
A Tensile Strength psi 67,000 S
E Yield Strength psi 62,000 •
R Elongation in 2” (%) 29 E
O Reduction in Area (%) 58
Charphy V-Notch @ 32oF 58ft. Lbs
M
S
A
Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%): •
I
C Mn Si P S W
N
0.08 0.38 0.38 0.014 0.008
I
F
N Standard Packaging: S
C
F 10# Package; 60# Master Carton. M D
W
O S
9
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E7014 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.1
T Iron Powder, Titania Covering S
Description:
AFM E7014 is similar to AFM E6013, but with the addition of iron powder for obtaining higher deposition
B L
efficiency.
R The iron powder also permits the use of higher welding currents. •
Z A
AFM E7014 fillet welds tend to be flat to slightly convex. The slag is easily removed and in most cases re-
T moves itself. H
I The joint penetration obtained allows for welding over a wide root opening due to poor fit. •
T F
Applications:
AFM E7014 is commonly used for welding mild steels ASTM A-36, A-113, A-283, A-284, A-285, A-306,
A-515, and A-516.
M Typical applications include construction equipment, metal fixtures, automotive parts, barges and farm C
A machinery. •
G I
Recommended Current Ranges (AC or DC±):
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
T Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm N
S Flat 50 ~ 100 90 ~ 140 150 ~ 210 200 ~ 240 •
T V&O 40 ~ 65 60 ~ 90 110 ~ 160 120 ~ 160 K
A Typical Mechanical Properties:

S
E Tensile Strength psi 79,800
•
R Yield Strength psi 68,500
E
O Elongation in 2” (%) 30
M Charphy V-Notch @ 32oF 58 ft. Lbs
S
A
•
I Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%): W
N C Mn Si P S
0.08 0.60 0.35 0.015 0.019
I
F
C
W
O S
10
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E7018 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.1
T Low Hydrogen Potassium, Iron Powder Covering S
Description:
AFM E7018 is an all position iron powder, low hydrogen electrode that may be used with AC or DC reverse
B L
polarity.
R •
Z Welding Characteristics: A
AFM E7018 has a smooth, quiet arc, very low spatter, and medium arc penetration that can be used at high
travel speeds.
T The fillet welds in the horizontal and flat welding positions have a slightly convex weld face, with a smooth and H
I finely rippled surface. •
T F
Applications:
AFM E7018 is used for welding carbon and low alloy steels, and are also used for joints involving
high-strength and high carbon.
M As is common with all low hydrogen electrodes, a short arc length should be maintained at all times. C
A •
G I
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T N
Flat 55 ~ 85 90 ~ 140 130 ~ 185 190 ~ 250
S •
V&O 55 ~ 80 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 180 160 ~ 210
T K

O Reduction in Area (%) 75
Charphy V-Notch @ -20oF 65 ft. Lbs
M
S
A
•
I Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%):
W
N C Mn Si P S
0.04 1.06 0.69 0.012 0.011 Standard Packaging:
10# Package; 60# Master Carton.
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
11
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E7018-1 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.1
Description:
AFM E7018-1 is an all position low hydrogen iron powder electrode that is intended for welds requiring
B L
a lower transition temperature than is normally available from E7018 electrodes.
R It is designed to have the same usability and weld metal composition as AFM E7018, except that •
Z the manganese content is set at the high end of the range. A
Applications:
T AFM E7018-1 is used for welding the wide variety of carbon and low alloy steels that require impact H
I toughness at low temperatures. •
T F
AFM E7018-1 displays exceptional impacts at low temperatures and has a smooth metal transfer that keeps
spatter to a minimum with easily removable slag.
M C
A •
G Recommended Current Ranges (AC or DC+): I
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T Flat 55 ~ 85 90 ~ 140 130 ~ 185 190 ~ 250 N
S V&O 55 ~ 80 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 180 160 ~ 210 •
T K
Tensile Strength psi 81,600
A Yield Strength psi 69,000 S
E Elongation in 2” (%) 30 •
R Reduction in Area (%) 72 E
O Charphy V-Notch @ -50oF 104 ft. Lbs
M
Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%): S
A
C Mn Si P S •
I
0.05 1.30 0.50 0.012 0.011 W
N
Standard Packaging:
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
12
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E7024 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.1
T Iron Powder, Titania Covering S
Description:
AFM E7024 is a high speed, heavy-coated, iron powder electrode. The coverings usually amount to about
B L
50% of the weight of the electrode, resulting in higher deposition efficiency.
R •
Z Applications: A
AFM E7024 can be used on mild and some alloy steels used in earth-moving and construction equipment,
truck bodies, ships, barges, and railcars.
T H
I Welding Characteristics: •
T AFM E7024 electrodes are characterized by having a quiet arc, very low spatter, low arc penetration and are F
well suited for making fillet welds in the flat or horizontal position.
The weld face is slightly convex to flat and has a very smooth surface with a very fine ripple.
They can be used with high travel speeds.
M C
A •
G Recommended Current Ranges (AC or DC±): I
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T Flat 100 ~ 145 140 ~ 190 180 ~ 250 230 ~ 305 N
S •
T Typical Mechanical Properties: K
A Yield Strength psi 74,000
Elongation in 2” (%) 25 S
E
Reduction in Area (%) 65 •
R
Charphy V-Notch @ -18oF 25 ft. Lbs E
O
M Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%): S

A C Mn Si P S
•
I 0.06 0.86 0.62 0.011 0.017
W
N
Standard Packaging:
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
13
A T
L O
M B
Low Alloy Steel Electordes
C C
B Coated Electrode •
AFM E7018-A1 AWS/SFA A5.5 E7018-A1 17
B AFM E8018-B2 AWS/SFA A5.5 E8018-B2 18 L

R AFM E9018-B3 AWS/SFA A5.5 E9018-B3 19 •
Z AFM E8018-C1 AWS/SFA A5.5 E8018-C1 20
A
AFM E8018-C2 AWS/SFA A5.5 E8018-C2 21
T AFM E8018-C3 AWS/SFA A5.5 E8018-C3 22 H

I AFM E801X-B6 AWS/SFA A5.5 E801X-B6 23 •
T F
AFM E801X-B8 AWS/SFA A5.5 E801X-B8 24
AFM E9015-B9 AWS/SFA A5.5 E9015-B9 25
M AFM E9018-B9 AWS/SFA A5.5 E9018-B9 26 C
A AFM E11018M AWS/SFA A5.5 E11018M 27
•
G I
AFM E12018M AWS/SFA A5.5 E12018M 29
AFM 4130 29
T AFM 4140 NO AWS/SFA Classification 29 N
S •
AFM 4340 30
T K
Preheat, Interpass & Postweld Heat Treatment Temperatures 31

A
S
E
•
R
E
O
Click to Download
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
14
A T
L O
M B
Low Alloy Steel Electordes & Wires
C C
B Order of Mandatory Classification Designators •
T AWS/SFA A5.5 S
B Designates an electrode.
L
R •
Z A
Designates the tensile strength (minimum), in ksi.

T H
I •
T F
Designates the welding position in which electrodes are usable,
the type of covering, and the kind of welding current for which
the electrodes are suitable.
M C
A •
G Designates that the chemical composition of the weld metal I
deposit.
T N
S •
T • Welding Current K
E 70 18 - A1 DCEP - Direct Current Electrode Positive (DC, Reverse Polarity)
A
S
E • Welding Position
Designation •
R Type of Welding Welding Position
BS EN AWS E
O
Flat PA 1G
Horizontal PC 2G
M Butt Welding Vertical Downwards PG 3G S
A Vertical Upwards PF 3G •
I Overhead PE 4G
W
N Flat PA 1F
Horizontal PB 2F
I Fillet Welding Vertical Downwards PG 3F
F
N Vertical Upwards PF 3F
C
F Horizontal Overhead PD 4F
W
O
15
A T
L O
M B
Low Alloy Steel Electordes & Wires
C Order of Mandatory Classification Designators C

B AWS/SFA A5.18 •
T Designates use as either an electrode or rod (ER), S
or use only as an electrode (E).
Indicates in 1000 psi increments, the minimum tensile strength

B of the weld metal produced by the electrode when tested L
R according to the A5.18 specification. •
- In this case, 70 indicates 70 000 psi.
Z A
Indicates whether the filler metal is solid (S) or composite (C).
T Indicates the chemical composition of a solid electrode or H

the chemical composition of the weld metal produced by
I a composite electrode.
•
T The use of the “GS” suffix designates filler metals intended for F
single pass applications only.
M Optional supplemental diffusible hydrogen designator. C

A •
G ER 70 S - X N HZ I
E 70 C - X Y N HZ
T ER 48 S - X N HZ The letter “N” as a suffix to a classification indicates that N
S E 48 C - X Y N HZ the weld metal is intended for the core belt region of nuclear
reactor vessels, as described in the Annex to the specification.
•
T This suffix changes the limits on the phosphorus and copper K
as follows:
P = 0.012% maximum / Cu = 0.08% maximum
A
S
E
•
R
E
O Indicates the type of shielding gas used for classification of
composite electrodes.
Carbon dioxide (AWS A5.32 Class SG-C) is indicated by “C”
M and 75–80% Argon/balance CO2
(AWS A5.32 Class SG-AC-Y, where Y is 20 to 25) is indicated S
A by “M.” •
I
W
N Indicates in 10 MPa increments, the minimum tensile strength
of the weld metal produced by the electrode when tested
according to the A5.18M specification.
I - In this case, 48 indicates 480 MPa. F
N
C
F
W
O
16
A T
L O
M B
Low Alloy Steel Electrode
C
B
AFM E7018-A1 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.5
Description:
AFM E7018-A1 electrodes are very similar to AFM E7018, except that 1/2% molybdenum has been added.
B This addition increases the strength of the weld metal, especially at elevated temperatures, and provides some
L
R increase in corrosion resistance; however, it may reduce the notch toughness of the weld metal. •
Z A
Applications:
AFM E7018-A1 is commonly used to weld CMo steel base metals such as ASTM A204 plate and A335-P1
T pipe. H
I •
T Welding Characteristics: F
AFM E7018-A1 has a high deposition rate, fine bead appearance, low spatter, easily removable slag, and me-
dium penetration.
M Preheat: C
A See Table “Preheat, Interpass & Postweld Heat Treatment Temperatures” on page 31. •
G I
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
T Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm N
S Flat 70 ~ 100 90 ~ 160 130 ~ 220 200 ~ 300 •
T K
A Yield Strength psi 86,000 S
E Elongation in 2” (%) 28 •
R Reduction in Area (%) 70 E
O Charphy V-Notch @ -20oF 87 ft. Lbs
M
A
C Mn Si P S Mo •
I
0.06 0.72 0.49 0.016 0.013 0.53 W
N
I Standard Packaging: F
N 10# Package; 60# Master Carton. S
C
F M D
W
O S
17
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E8018-B2 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.5
Description:
AFM E8018-B2 is a low hydrogen electrode that may be used with AC or DC reverse polarity.
B L
It is different from “fast freeze” electrodes in that the weld metal freezes quite rapidly even though the slag is
R relatively fluid. •
Z A
Applications:
AFM E8018-B2 is used for the welding of 1/2% Cr-1/2% Mo, 1% Cr-1/2% Mo, and 1 1/4% Cr-1/2% Mo
T steels. H
I It is used to weld A355-P11 Pipe and A387 Fr. 11 Plate. Common applications include boiler steam pipes in •
T power plants, oil refining equipment, ships and chemical plants. F
Preheat:
See Table “Preheat, Interpass & Postweld Heat Treatment Temperatures” on page 31.
M C
A •
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T Flat 60 ~ 100 90 ~ 130 130 ~ 190 190 ~ 250 N
S V&O 60 ~ 90 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 170 N/A •
T K
A Tensile Strength psi 99,000
Yield Strength psi 87,000 S
E
Elongation in 2” (%) 25 •
R
Reduction in Area (%) 70 E
O
Charphy V-Notch @ -32oF 22 ft. Lbs
M
S
A Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%):
•
I C Mn Si Cr Mo P S
W
N 0.06 0.90 0.63 1.32 0.55 0.013 0.007
I
F
C
W
O S
18
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E9018-B3 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.5
Description:
B AFM E9018-B3 is a low hydrogen electrode that may be used with AC or DC reverse polarity. L
R It is different from “fast freeze” electrodes in that the weld freezes quite rapidly even though the slag is rela-
•
tively fluid.
Z A
Applications:
AFM E9018-B3 is used for welding chromemoly steels such as those of the 2 1/4% Cr-1% Mo type. It is used
T to weld A335-P22 Pipe and A387 Gr. 22 Plate. Common applications include cast steels, boiler and heat ex- H
I changer tubes, cast and forged steels. •
T F
Preheat:
M C
A •
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
G I
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
Flat 60 ~ 100 90 ~ 130 130 ~ 190 190 ~ 250
V&O 60 ~ 90 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 170 N/A
T N
S •
T Typical Mechanical Properties: K
Yield Strength psi 87,000
A
Elongation in 2” (%) 22 S
E
Charphy V-Notch @ -40oF 24 ft. Lbs •
R
E
O
Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%):
M C Mn Si Cr Mo P S
S
A 0.06 0.77 0.75 2.25 1.02 0.014 0.010
•
I
W
N
Standard Packaging:
I 10# Package; 60# Master Carton.
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
19
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E8018-C1 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.5
Description:
AFM E8018-C1 is a low hydrogen electrode that contains about 2.50% Ni.
B It produces weld metal with increased strength without being airhardenable or with increased notch L
R toughness at temperatures as low as -75ºF (-59ºC). •
Z A
Applications:
AFM E8018-C1 is used for welding nickelbearing steels in low temperature applications where toughness of
T the weld metal at lower temperatures is important. H
I •
T Preheat: F

M Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” C
A Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
G Flat 45 ~ 75 110 ~ 150 150 ~ 190 200 ~ 240 I
V&O 45 ~ 75 100 ~ 140 120 ~ 170 N/A
T N
S •
T K
A Reduction in Area (%) 60
S
E Charphy V-Notch @ -75oF 94 ft. Lbs
•
R
E
O Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%):
C Mn Si P S Ni
M 0.06 0.98 0.60 0.013 0.007 2.41 S
A
•
I
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
20
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E8018-C2 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.5
Description:
AFM E8018-C2 is a low hydrogen electrode that contains about 3.50% Ni.
B It produces weld metal with increased strength without being airhardenable or with increased notch tough- L
R ness at temperatures as low as -100ºF (-73ºC). •
Z A
Applications:
AFM E8018-C2 is used for welding 2%-4% nickel-bearing steels in low temperature applications where
T toughness of the weld metal at lower temperatures is important. H
I •
T Preheat: F
M Recommended Current Ranges (AC or DC+): C

A Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” •
G Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm I
Flat 65 ~ 95 90 ~ 130 135 ~ 180 190 ~ 240
V&O 60 ~ 90 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 170 N/A
T N
S Typical Mechanical Properties: •
T Tensile Strength psi 94,000
K
A Elongation in 2” (%) 22
S
E Charphy V-Notch @ -100oF 44 ft. Lbs
•
R
E
O Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%):
C Mn Si P S Ni
M 0.07 1.12 0.32 0.015 0.007 3.45 S
A
•
I
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
21
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E8018-C3 C
B AWS/SFA A5.5 •
Description:
B AFM E8018-C3 is low hydrogen electrodes deposit 1% Ni weld metal. L
It is used primarily to weld high-tensile steels in the 70-80 ksi tensile strength range where notch toughness
R at temperatures as low as -40ºF (-40ºC) is required.
•
Z A
Preheat:
T H
I Recommended Current Ranges (AC or DC+): •
T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” F
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
Flat 65 ~ 95 90 ~ 130 135 ~ 180 190 ~ 240
M V&O 60 ~ 90 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 170 N/A C
A •
G I
T Yield Strength psi 77,000 N
S Elongation in 2” (%) 31 •
T Charphy V-Notch @ -40oF 44 ft. Lbs K
A
E
C Mn Si P S Ni •
R
0.07 1.12 0.32 0.015 0.007 0.80 ~ 1.10 E
O
M
S
A Standard Packaging: •
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
22
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E801X-B6 C
B AWS/SFA A5.5 •
T AFM E801X-B6 was formally classified as E502 stainless steel under AWS A5.4-81. S
It is used in welding ASTM A 387 Grade 5 base material.
X-denotes 5,6, & 8
B L
E8015-B6 - Low Hydrogen Sodium Covering
R •
E8016-B6 - Low Hydrogen Potassium Covering
Z E8018-B6 - Low Hydrogen Potassium, Iron Powder Covering A
Description:
T AFM E8015-B6, E8016-B6 & E8018B6 electrodes are used for welding base metal of similar composition H
I (alloy 501 & 502), usually in the form of pipe or tubing. •
The alloy is an air-hardening material; therefore, when welding with AFM E8015-B6, E8016-B6 & E8018-B6
T F
preheat and post weld heat treatment are required.
Preheat:
M See Table “Preheat, Interpass & Postweld Heat Treatment Temperatures” on page 31. C
A •
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T Flat 70 ~ 100 90 ~ 160 130 ~ 220 190 ~ 290 N
S V&O 60 ~ 90 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 170 N/A •
T K
O
M Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%):

C Mn Si Cr P S Ni Mo S
A
0.06 0.60 0.23 4.60 0.01 0.01 0.10 0.46 •
I
W
N
Standard Packaging:
I 10# Package; 60# Master Carton. F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
23
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E801X-B8 C
B AWS/SFA A5.5 •
T AFM E801X-B8 was formally classified as E505 stainless steel under AWS A5.4-81. S
It is used in welding ASTM A 387 Grade 9 base materials.
X-denotes 5,6, & 8
B L
E8015-B8 - Low Hydrogen Sodium Covering
R •
E8016-B8 - Low Hydrogen Potassium Covering
Z E8018-B8 - Low Hydrogen Potassium, Iron Powder Covering A
Description:
T AFM E8015-B8, E8016-B8 & E8018-B8 electrodes are used for welding base metal of similar composition H
I (alloy 501 & 502), usually in the form of pipe or tubing. •
The alloy is an air-hardening material; therefore, when welding with AFM E8015-B8, E8016-B8 & E8018-B8
T F
preheat and post weld heat treatment are required.
Preheat:
A •
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T Flat 70 ~ 100 90 ~ 160 130 ~ 220 190 ~ 290
N
S V&O 60 ~ 90 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 170 N/A
•
T K

A
Tensile Strength psi 100,000 S
E
Yield Strength psi 79,000 •
R
Elongation in 2” (%) 23 E
O
M Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%): S

A C Mn Si Cr P S Ni Mo
•
I 0.05 0.74 0.31 8.97 0.015 0.008 0.09 0.94 W
N
C
F M D
W
O S
24
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E9015-B9 C
B AWS/SFA A5.5 •
T Low Hydrogen Sodium Covering S
Description:
B AFM E9015-B9 is a 9% Cr-1% Mo, low hydrogen electrode modified with niobium (columbium) and L
vanadium designed to provide improved creep strength, toughness, fatigue life, and oxidation and corrosion
R resistance at elevated temperatures.
•
Z Due to the higher elevated temperature properties of AFM E9015-B9, components that are now fabricated A
from stainless and ferritic steels may be fabricated from a single alloy, eliminating the problems associated
with dissimilar welds.
T H
I Applications: •
T AFM E9015-B9 is used for welding A213-T91 Tube, A335-P91 Pipe, and A387 Gr. 91 Plate. F
Preheat:
M C
A •
G Recommended Current Ranges (DC+): I
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T Flat 70 ~ 100 90 ~ 160 130 ~ 220 190 ~ 290 N
S V&O 60 ~ 90 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 170 N/A •
T K
A
E
R
E
O
M C Mn Si P S Cr Ni
0.10 1.0 0.20 0.01 0.01 9.0 0.20 S
A
Mo V Cb Cu Al N •
I
1.0 0.20 0.03 0.10 <0.01 0.04 W
N
C
F M D
W
O S
25
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E9018-B9 C
B AWS/SFA A5.5 •
Description:
AFM E9018-B9 is a 9% Cr-1% Mo, low hydrogen electrode modified with niobium (columbium) and
B vanadium designed to provide improved creep strength, toughness, fatigue life, and oxidation and corrosion L
R resistance at elevated temperatures. •
Z It is similar to AFM E9015-B9, except it contains an addition of iron powder which improves deposition rates. A
Due to the higher elevated temperature properties of AFM E9018-B9, components that are now fabricated
from stainless and ferritic steels may be fabricated from a single alloy, eliminating the problems associated
with dissimilar welds.
T H
I Applications: •
T AFM E9018-B9 is used for welding A213-T91 Tube, A335-P91 Pipe, and A387 Gr. 91 Plate. F
Preheat:
A •
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T Flat 60 ~ 90 110 ~ 150 150 ~ 190 200 ~ 240 N
S V&O 50 ~ 80 100 ~ 140 120 ~ 170 N/A •
T K
A Tensile Strength psi 110,000
E
R
E
O
M C Mn Si P S Cr Ni
S
A 0.10 1.0 0.20 0.01 0.01 9.0 0.20
•
I Mo V Cb Cu Al N
W
N 1.0 0.20 0.03 0.10 <0.01 0.04
C
F M D
W
O S
26
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E11018M C
AWS/SFA A5.5 •
T Iron Powder, Low Hydrogen Covering S
Description:
B AFM E11018M was originally designed for military applications such as welding HY80 and HY100 type L
steels. To achieve desired weldmetal properties and soundness, AFM E11018M has small alloy additions
R (especially some Ni) and require careful control of moisture in the electrode covering and from other sources
•
Z of hydrogen. A
Applications:
T AFM E11018M is used to weld all forms of T-1 steel. H
I It can also be used where high-strength welds with excellent low temperature impact properties are desired. •
T F
Preheat:
M Recommended Current Ranges (AC or DC+): C
A Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” •
G Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm I
Flat 60 ~ 90 110 ~ 150 150 ~ 190 200 ~ 240
V&O 50 ~ 80 100 ~ 140 120 ~ 170 N/A
T N
S Typical Mechanical Properties: •
T Tensile Strength psi 115,000 K
A Elongation in 2” (%) 23
Reduction in Area (%) 62 S
E
Charphy V-Notch @ -60oF 44 ft. Lbs •
R
E
O
M C Mn Si P S Cr Ni Mo S
A 0.05 1.50 0.30 0.018 0.015 0.30 1.75 0.30 •
I
W
N
Standard Packaging:
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
27
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E12018M C
B AWS/SFA A5.5 •
T Iron Powder, Low Hydrogen Covering S
Description:
B AFM E12018M is used to weld low alloy, high tensile steels where welds of 120 ksi minimum tensile L
strength is required.
R •
Z Applications: A
AFM E12018M is commonly used to weld forgings, plate castings, and pressure vessels.
T Preheat: H
I See Table “Preheat, Interpass & Postweld Heat Treatment Temperatures” on page 31. •
T F
Recommended Current Ranges (DC+):
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
M Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm C
A Flat 60 ~ 90 110 ~ 150 150 ~ 190 200 ~ 240 •
G V&O 50 ~ 80 100 ~ 140 120 ~ 170 N/A I

T Tensile Strength psi 133,400 N
S Yield Strength psi 120,500 •
T Elongation in 2” (%) 18 K
A Charphy V-Notch @ -60oF 26 ft. Lbs
S
E
•
R Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%):
E
O C Mn Si P S Cr Ni Mo
0.05 1.65 0.34 0.019 0.016 0.85 2.0 0.45
M
S
A
Standard Packaging: •
I 10# Package; 40# Master Carton. W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
28
A T
L O
M B
C AFM 4130 C
B No AWS Class •
T S
Description:
AFM 4130 is used to weld heat-treatable, low alloy SAE 4130 and 8630 steels and steel castings with
comparable hardening characteristics.
B L
R Preheat: •
Z Between 400 ~ 600ºF (204 ~ 316ºC), with the same temperature held at interpass, in order to prevent A
cracking.
T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” H
I Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
T Flat 60 ~ 90 110 ~ 150 150 ~ 190 200 ~ 240 F
S
V&O 50 ~ 80 100 ~ 140 120 ~ 170 N/A M D
S
M Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%): C

A C Mn Si P S Cr Ni Mo Standard Packaging: •
G 0.20 1.25 0.40 0.013 0.015 0.50 1.30 0.20 10# Package; 40# Master Carton. I
T AFM 4140 N
S No AWS Class •
T Description: K
AFM 4140 is used for welding SAE 4140 and similar heat-treatable steel where the weld metal must match
the heat treating properties of the parent metal.
A
S
E Preheat: •
R Between 400 ~ 600ºF (204 ~ 316ºC), with the same temperature held at interpass, in order to prevent
E
O cracking.
M Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
S
A Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
•
I Flat 60 ~ 90 110 ~ 150 150 ~ 190 200 ~ 240
W
N V&O 50 ~ 80 100 ~ 140 120 ~ 170 N/A S
M D
S
I Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%):
F
N C Mn Si P S Cr Mo Standard Packaging: C
F 0.35 0.80 0.50 0.012 0.014 0.75 0.33 10# Package; 40# Master Carton.
W
O
29
A T
L O
M B
C AFM 4340 C
B No AWS Class •
T S
Description:
AFM 4340 is used for welding heat treatable, high strength steels SAE 4130, 4330, 4340 and steel castings
with similar hardening properties.
B L
R Preheat: •
Z Between 400 ~ 600ºF (204 ~ 316ºC), with the same temperature held at interpass, in order to prevent A
cracking.
T Recommended Current Ranges (AC or DC+): H

I Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” •
T Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm F
Flat 60 ~ 90 110 ~ 150 150 ~ 190 200 ~ 240
V&O 50 ~ 80 100 ~ 140 120 ~ 170 N/A
M C
A Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%): •
G C Mn Si P S Cr Ni Mo I
0.35 0.85 0.50 0.011 0.014 0.80 1.80 0.25
T S
N
Standard Packaging: M D
S S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
30
A T
L O
M B
C C
B Preheat, Interpass & Postweld Heat Treatment Temperatures •
T Preheat & Interpass Post Weld Heat Treatment S
Temperature Temperature
AWS Classification ºF ºC ºF ºC
B E7018-A1 200 ~ 225 93 ~ 107 1,150 ± 25 620 ± 14 L
R E7018-B2L •
Z E8018-B2
300 ~ 375 163 ~ 191 1,275 ± 25 690 ± 14 A
E8018-B3L
E9018-B3
T E8015-B6 H
350 ~ 450 177 ~ 232 1,375 ± 25 740 ± 14
E8016-B6
I •
E8015-B8
T E8016-B8
400 ~ 500 205 ~ 260 1,375 ± 25 740 ± 14 F
E9015-B9
450 ~ 550 232 ~ 288 1,375 ± 25 740 ± 14
E9018-B9
M E8018-C1 C
A 200 ~ 225 93 ~ 107 1,125 ± 25 605 ± 14 •
E8018-C2
G E8018-C3 I
E11018M 200 ~ 250 93 ~ 121 Not Specified
E12018M
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
31
A T
L O
M B
Low Alloy Steel Wires
C C
B Bare Wires •
AFM RG45 AWS/SFA A5.2 R45 33
AFM RG60 AWS/SFA A5.2 R60 33
B L
R •
Z AFM Product AWS Classification Page A
AFM ER70S-2 AWS/SFA A5.18 ER70S-2 34
T H
I •
T F
AFM Product AWS Classification Page
M AFM ER70S-B2L AWS/SFA A5.28 ER70S-B2L 37 C

A AFM ER80S-B2 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER80S-B2 38 •
G AFM ER80S-D2 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER80S-D2 39 I
AFM ER80S-B3L AWS/SFA A5.28 ER80S-B3L 40
AFM ER80S-B6 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER80S-B6 41
T AFM ER80S-B8 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER80S-B8 42 N
S AFM ER80S-Ni1 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER80S-Ni1 43 •
T AFM ER80S-Ni2 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER80S-Ni2 43 K
AFM ER90S-B3 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER90S-B3 44
A AFM ER90S-B9 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER90S-B9 45
S
E AFM ER100S-1 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER100S-1 46
•
R AFM ER110S-1 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER110S-1 46
E
O AFM ER120S-1 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER120S-1 47
M [Table 1] Minimum Tension Test Requirements 48 S

A [Table 2] Preheat, Interpass, and Postweld Heat Treatment Temperatures 49 •
I General Welding Tips for Low Alloy Wires 50 ~ 51 W
N
I
F
N Click to Download
C
F
W
O
32
A T
L O
M B
Low Alloy Steel Wire
C AFM RG45 C
B AWS/SFA A5.2 •
T S
AFM RG45 is a copper coated, low carbon steel welding rod used for the welding of steel where the minimum
tensile strength requirement does not exceed 45 ksi (310 MPa).
B Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: L

R C Mn Si P S •
Z 0.08 0.05 0.10 0.035 0.040 A
Cu Cr Ni Mo Al
0.30 0.20 0.30 0.20 0.02
T All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. H
I •
Standard Packaging & Sizes: S
T M D
F
S
50 Lb Bulk Packages in Diameters:
1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm Tension Test Requirements (as welded):
M 3/32” 2.4 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm Not Specified. C
A 1/8” 3.2 mm 1/4” 6.4 mm
•
G I
T AFM RG60 N
S AWS/SFA A5.2 •
T AFM RG60 is used for the oxyfuel gas welding of carbon steels, where the minimum tensile strength K
requirement does not exceed 60 ksi (415 MPa).
A Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods:

C Mn Si P S S
E
0.15 0.90 ~ 1.40 0.10 ~ 0.35 0.035 0.035 •
R
Cu Cr Ni Mo Al E
O
0.30 0.20 0.30 0.20 0.02
All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted.
M
S
A
Standard Packaging & Sizes: Tension Test Requirements (as welded): •
I
psi 60,000 W
N 50 Lb Bulk Packages in Diameters: Tensile Strength
MPa 400
1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm Elongation in 1” Min. (%) 19 Min.
I
3/32” 2.4 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm F
N
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/4” 6.4 mm S
C
F M D
W
O S
33
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER70S-2 C
B AWS/SFA A5.18 •
T S
AFM ER70S-2 is used primarily for singlepass welding of killed, semi-killed, and rimmed steels, but may also
be used for some multipass applications.
Because of the added deoxidants, AFM ER70S-2 can be used for welding steels that have a rusty or dirty
B surface, with a possible sacrifice of weld quality depending on the condition of the surface. L
R Typical specifications for these steels are ASTM A36, A285-C, A515-55 and A516-70, which have •
Z UNS numbers K02600, K02801, K02001, and K02700, respectively. A
Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods:

T C Mn Si P S Ni Cr H
I 0.07 0.90 ~ 1.40 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.025 0.035 (a) (a) •
T Mo V Cu Ti Zr Al F
(a) (a) 0.50 0.05 ~ 0.15 0.02 ~ 0.12 0.05 ~ 0.15
M a. These residual elements shall not exceed 0.50 in total. C
A •
G I
Typical mechanical properties:
psi 80,000
Tensile Strength
T MPa 552 N
S psi 65,000 •
Yield Strength
T MPa 450 K
Charphy V-Notch @ -20oF 28ft. Lbs
A
S
E
•
R Standard Sizes: E
O 0.030” 0.8 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
0.035’ 0.9 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm
M 0.045” 1.2 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm S
A 1/16” 1.6 mm •
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
34
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER70S-3 C
B AWS/SFA A5.18 •
T S
AFM ER70S-3 is intended for welding singlepass and multi-pass welds.
It provides sufficient deoxidation to allow welding over light mill scale.
Typical base metal specifications are often the same as those for AFM ER70S-2.
B L
R Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: •
Z C Mn Si P S A
0.06 ~ 0.15 0.90 ~ 1.40 0.45 ~ 0.75 0.025 0.035
Ni Cr Mo V Cu
T (a) (a) (a) (a) 0.50 H
I •
T F
a. These residual elements shall not exceed 0.50 in total.
M Typical mechanical properties: C

A psi 78,000 •
Tensile Strength
G MPa 538 I
psi 62,000
Yield Strength
MPa 427
T Elongation in 2” (%) 22 N
S Charphy V-Notch @ -20oF 38ft. Lbs •
T K
Standard Sizes:
A
0.030” 0.8 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm S
E
0.035’ 0.9 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm •
R
0.045” 1.2 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm E
O
1/16” 1.6 mm
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
35
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER70S-6 C
B AWS/SFA A5.18 •
T S
AFM ER70S-6 is intended for both singleand multi-pass welding.
It is especially suited for sheet metal applications, where smooth weld beads are desired, and structural and
plate steels that have moderate amounts of rust or mill scale.
B L
AFM ER70S-6 withstands high currents with CO2 shielding, even when welding rimmed steels.
R Typical base metal specifications are often the same as those for AFM ER70S-2. •
Z A
C Mn Si P S
T 0.06 ~ 0.15 1.40 ~ 1.85 0.80 ~ 1.15 0.025 0.035
H
I Ni Cr Mo V Cu
•
T (a) (a) (a) (a) 0.50
F

M C
A •
G Typical mechanical properties: I
psi 82,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 566
T psi 66,000 N
Yield Strength
S MPa 485 •
T Elongation in 2” (%) 22 K
Charphy V-Notch @ -20oF 34ft. Lbs
A
S
E Standard Sizes:
•
R 0.030” 0.8 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
E
O 0.035’ 0.9 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm
0.045” 1.2 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm
M 1/16” 1.6 mm S
A
•
I 2 Lb. 10 Lb. 30 Lb. 33 Lb. 44 Lb Spools & 550 Lb Drums
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
36
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER70S-B2L C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER70S-B2L is identical to AFM ER80S-B2 except for the low-carbon content (0.05 percent maximum)
and thus the lower strength levels.
It exhibits greater resistance to cracking and is more suitable for welds to be left in the as-welded condition or
B L
when the accuracy of the postweld heat treatment operation is questionable.
R The classification was previously ER80S-B2L. •
Z The strength requirements and classification designator have been changed to reflect the true strength A
capabilities of the chemical composition.
T Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: H

I C Mn Si P S •
T 0.05 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.025 0.025 F
Ni Cr Mo Cu Total Other
0.20 1.20 ~ 1.50 0.40 ~ 0.65 0.35 0.50
M C
A All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. •
G Minimum Tension Test Requirements: I
See [Table 1] on Page 48.
T Standard Sizes: N
S 0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm •
T 0.045’ 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm K
1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
37
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER80S-B2 C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER80S-B2 contains 1/2% molybdenum for increased strength and a high level of deoxidiziers
(Mn and Si) to control porosity when welding with CO2 as the shielding gas.
It will give radiographic quality welds with excellent bead appearance in both ordinary and difficult-to-weld
B L
carbon and low-alloy steels.
R AFM ER80S-D2 exhibits excellent out-of-position welding characteristics with the short circuiting and pulsed •
Z arc processes. A
The combination of weld soundness and strength makes AFM ER80S-D2 suitable for single and multiple-pass
welding of a variety of carbon and low-alloy, higher strength steels in both the as welded and postweld
T heat-treated conditions. H
I •
T Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: F
C Mn Si P S
0.07 ~ 0.12 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.025 0.025
M Ni Cr Mo Cu Total Other C
A 0.20 1.20 ~ 1.50 0.40 ~ 0.65 0.35 0.50 •
G All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. I
Minimum Tension Test Requirements:

T See [Table 1] on Page 48. N
S •
T Standard Sizes: K
0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
A 0.045’ 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm
1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
38
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER80S-D2 C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER80S-D2 contains 1/2% molybdenum for increased strength and a high level of deoxidiziers
(Mn and Si) to control porosity when welding with CO2 as the shielding gas.
It will give radiographic quality welds with excellent bead appearance in both ordinary and difficult-to-weld
B L
carbon and low-alloy steels.
R AFM ER80S-D2 exhibits excellent out-of-position welding characteristics with the short circuiting and pulsed •
Z arc processes. A
The combination of weld soundness and strength makes AFM ER80S-D2 suitable for single and multiple-pass
welding of a variety of carbon and low-alloy, higher strength steels in both the as welded and postweld
T heat-treated conditions. H
I •
T Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: F
C Mn Si P S
0.07 ~ 0.12 1.60 ~ 2.10 0.50 ~ 0.80 0.025 0.025
M Ni Mo Cu Total Other C
A 0.15 0.40 ~ 0.60 0.50 0.50 •
G I
T N
S See [Table 1] on Page 48.
•
T K
Standard Sizes:
A 0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
S
E 0.045’ 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm •
R 1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
39
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER80S-B3L C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER80S-B3L is identical to AFM ER90S-B3 except for the low-carbon content (0.05 percent maximum)
and, therefore, the lower strength levels.
It exhibits greater resistance to cracking and is more suitable for welds to be left in the as-welded condition.
B L
AFM ER80S-B3L was previously ER90S-B3L.
R The strength requirements and classification designator have been changed to reflect the true strength •
Z capabilities of the chemical composition. A
Special care must be used when using it in the as-welded condition due to higher strength levels.

I C Mn Si P S •
T 0.05 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.025 0.025 F
0.20 2.30 ~ 2.70 0.90 ~ 1.20 0.35 0.50
M All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. C
A •
Standard Sizes:
T 0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm N
S 0.045’ 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm •
T 1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
40
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER80S-B6 C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER80S-B6 contains 4.0 to 6.0 percent chromium and about 0.50 percent molybdenum.
It is used for welding material of similar composition, usually in the form of pipe or tubing.
It is air-hardening material and, therefore, when welding with AFM ER80S-B6, preheat and postweld heat
B L
treatment are required.
R AFM ER80S-B6 is similar to that previously classified as ER502 in AWS A5.9-81. •
Z A
C Mn Si P S
T 0.10 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.50 0.025 0.025 H
I Ni Cr Mo Cu Total Other •
T 0.60 4.50 ~ 6.00 0.45 ~ 0.65 0.35 0.50 F
M Minimum Tension Test Requirements: C

A See [Table 1] on Page 48. •
G Standard Sizes: I
0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
0.045’ 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm
T N
1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
41
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER80S-B8 C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER80S-B8 contains 8.0 to 10.5 percent chromium and about 1.0 percent molybdenum.
It is used for welding base metal of similar compositions, usually in the form of pipe or tubing.
It is air-hardening material and, therefore, when welding with AFM ER80S-B8, preheating and postweld heat
B L
treatment are required.
R AFM ER80S-B8 is similar to that previously classified as ER505 in AWS A5.9-81. •
Z A
C Mn Si P S
T 0.10 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.50 0.025 0.025 H
I Ni Cr Mo Cu Total Other •
T 0.50 8.00 ~ 10.50 0.80 ~ 1.20 0.35 0.50 F
M Minimum Tension Test Requirements: C

A See [Table 1] on Page 48. •
G Standard Sizes: I
0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
0.045’ 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm
T N
1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
42
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER80S-Ni1 C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER80S-Ni1 deposits weld metal similar to AFM E8018-C3 electrodes, and is used for welding low-alloy
high-strength steels requiring good toughness at temperatures as low as -50°F (-46°C).
B Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: L
R C Mn Si P S Ni •
Z 0.12 1.25 0.40 ~ 0.80 0.025 0.025 0.80 ~ 1.10 A
Cr Mo V Cu Total Other
0.15 0.35 0.05 0.35 0.50
T H
I •
T Standard Sizes: F
0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
0.045’ 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm See [Table 1] on Page 48.
M 1/16” 1.6 mm S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER80S-Ni2 N
S AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T AFM ER80S-Ni2 deposits weld metal similar to AFM E8018-C1 electrodes. K
Typically, it is used for welding 2-1/2 percent nickel steels and other materials requiring good toughness
at temperatures as low as -80°F (-62°C).
A
Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: S
E
C Mn Si P •
R
0.12 1.25 0.40 ~ 0.80 0.025 E
O
S Ni Cu Total Other
M 0.025 2.00 ~ 2.75 0.35 0.5
S
I
Standard Sizes: W
N
0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
I 0.045’ 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm See [Table 1] on Page 48.
F
N 1/16” 1.6 mm S
C
F M D
W
O S
43
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER90S-B3 C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER90S-B3 is used to weld the 2-1/4Cr-1Mo steels used for high-temperature / high pressure piping and
pressure vessels.
It may also be used for joining combinations of Cr-Mo and carbon steel.
B L
All GMAW modes may be used.
R Careful control of preheat, interpass temperatures, and postweld heat treatment is essential to avoid cracking. •
Z AFM ER90S-B3 is classified after postweld heat treatment. A
Special care must be used when using it in the as-welded condition due to higher strength levels.

I C Mn Si P S •
T 0.07 ~ 0.12 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.025 0.025 F
0.20 2.30 ~ 2.70 0.90 ~ 1.20 0.35 0.50
A •
Standard Sizes:
T 0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm N
S 0.045’ 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm •
T 1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
44
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER90S-B9 C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER90S-B9 is a 9Cr-1Mo solid wire modified with niobium (columbium) and vanadium designed to
provide strength, toughness, fatigue life, oxidation resistance and corrosion resistance at elevated temperatures.
Due to the higher elevated temperature properties of AFM ER90S-B9, components that are now fabricated
B L
from stainless and ferritic steels may be fabricated from a single alloy, eliminating the problems associated with
R dissimilar welds. •
Z A
Applications:
AFM ER90S-B9 is used for welding A213-T91 Tube, A335-P91 Pipe, and A387 Gr. 91 Plate.
T H
I Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: •
T C Mn Si P S Ni Cb (Nb) F
0.07 ~ 0.13 1.25 0.15 ~ 0.30 0.010 0.010 1.00 0.02 ~ 0.10
Mo V Al Cu Cr Total Other
M 0.80 ~ 1.10 0.15 ~ 0.25 0.04 0.20 8.00 ~ 9.50 0.50 C
G I
T Standard Sizes: N
S 0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm •
T 0.045’ 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm K
1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
45
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER100S-1 C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER100S-1 deposits high-strength, very tough weld metal for critical applications.
Originally developed for welding HY80 steels for military applications, it is also used for a variety of structural
applications where tensile strength requirements exceed 100 ksi (690 MPa), and excellent toughness is required
B L
to temperatures as low as -60°F (-51°C).
R •
Z Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: A
C Mn Si P S Ni Cr
0.08 1.25 ~ 1.80 0.20 ~ 0.55 0.010 0.010 1.40 ~ 2.10 0.30
T Mo V Ti Zr Al Cu Total Other H
I 0.25 ~ 0.55 0.05 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.25 0.50 •
T F

M See [Table 1] on Page 48. S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER110S-1 N
S AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T AFM ER110S-1 deposits high-strength, very tough weld metal for critical applications. K
Originally developed for welding HY100 steels for military applications, it is also used for a variety of
structural applications where tensile strength requirements exceed 100 ksi (690 MPa),
A and excellent toughness is required to temperatures as low as -60°F (-51°C). S
E
•
R Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: E
O C Mn Si P S Ni Cr
0.09 1.40 ~ 1.80 0.20 ~ 0.55 0.010 0.010 1.90 ~ 2.60 0.50
M Mo V Ti Zr Al Cu Total Other S
A 0.25 ~ 0.55 0.04 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.25 0.50 •
I
All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. W
N
I Minimum Tension Test Requirements:

See [Table 1] on Page 48. F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
46
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER120S-1 C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER120S-1 deposits high-strength, very tough weld metal for critical applications.
Originally developed for welding HY100 steels for military applications, it is also used for a variety of
structural applications where tensile strength requirements exceed 100 ksi (690 MPa),
B L
and excellent toughness is required to temperatures as low as -60°F (-51°C).
R •
Z Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: A
C Mn Si P S Ni Cr
0.10 1.40 ~ 1.80 0.25 ~ 0.60 0.010 0.010 2.00 ~ 2.80 0.60
T Mo V Ti Zr Al Cu Total Other H
I 0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.25 0.50 •
T F

M See [Table 1] on Page 48. C
A •
G I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
47
A T
L O
M B
Low Alloy Wires
C C
B [Table 1] Minimum Tension Test Requirements •
T Tensile Strength Yield Strength
S
AWS Elongation Testing
Shielding Gas*
Classification psi MPa psi MPa (%) Condition
ER70S-B2L 75,000 515 58,000 400 19
B ER80S-B2 80,000 550 68,000 470 19 L
R ER80S-B3L Argon 80,000 550 68,000 540 17 •
Z + A
ER90S-B3 1~5% O2 90,000 620 78,000 470 17 PWHT**
ER80S-B6
80,000 550 68,000 410 17
ER80S-B8
T ER90S-B9 Argon + 5% O2 90,000 620 60,000 470 16 H
I ER80S-Ni1 Argon 80,000 550 68,000 470 24 As-Welded •
T + F
ER80S-Ni2 1 ~5% O2 80,000 550 68,000 470 24 PWHT**
ER80S-D2 CO2 80,000 550 68,000 470 17 As-Welded
M ER100S-1 Argon 100,000 690 88,000 610 16 C
A ER110S-1 + 110,000 760 95,000 660 15 As-Welded •
G ER120S-1 2% O2 120,000 830 105,000 730 14 I
Notes :
* The use of a particular shielding gas for classification purposes shall not be construed to restrict the use of shielding gas mixtures.
T A filler metal tested with other gas blends, such as Argon/O2 or Argon/CO2 may result in weld metal having different strength N
and elongation.
S Classification with other gas blends shall be agreed upon between the purchaser and supplier. •
T K
** Postweld heat-treated condition in accordance to Table 2.
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
48
A T
L O
M B
Low Alloy Wires
C C
B [Table 2] Preheat, Interpass, and Postweld Heat Treatment Temperatures •
T Preheat and Interpass Temperature* PWHT Temperature*
S
AWS Classification
°F °C °F °C
ER70S-B2L
B 275 ~ 325 135 ~ 165 1,150 ± 25 620 ± 15 L
ER80S-B2
R ER80S-B3L •
Z 375 ~ 425 185 ~ 215 1,275 ± 25 690 ± 15 A
ER90S-B3
ER80S-B6 350 ~ 450 177 ~ 232 1,375 ± 25 745 ± 15
ER80S-B8 400 ~ 500 205 ~ 260 1,375 ± 25 745 ± 15
T ER90S-B9 300 ~ 500 150 ~ 260 1,375 ± 25 745 ± 15 H
I ER80S-Ni2 275 ~ 325 135 ~ 165 1,150 ± 25 620 ± 15 •
T ER80S-Ni1 F
ER80S-D2
ER100S-1 275 ~ 325 135 ~ 165 None** None**
M ER110S-1 C
A ER120S-1 •
G Notes :
I
* These temperatures are specified for testing under this specification and are not to be considered as recommendations
for preheat, interpass, and postweld heat treatment in production welding. The requirements for production welding
must be determined by the user. They may or may not differ from those called here.
T N
S ** These classifications are normally used in the as-welded condition •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
49
A T
L O
M B
Low Alloy Wires
C C
B General Welding Tips for Low Alloy Wires •
T S
I. Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW)
Gas metal arc welding (GMAW) can be divided into four categories based on the mode of metal transfer:
B (1) spray, (2) pulsed spray, (3) globular, and (4) short circuiting transfer. L
R In the spray, pulsed spray, and globular modes, transfer occurs as distinct droplets that are detached from •
Z the electrode, transferring along the arc column into the weld pool. In the short circuiting mode, the metal deposited A
during frequent short circuiting of the electrode in the molten pool.
II. Spray Transfer

T The spray transfer mode, for low-alloy steel, is most commonly obtained with argon shielding gas mixtures with up to H
I 5 percent oxygen or carbon dioxide. •
A characteristic of these shielding gas mixtures is the smooth arc plasma through which hundreds of very fine
T droplets are transferred to the weld pool each second. F
Spray transfer with argon-oxygen or argon-carbon dioxide shielding gas is, primarily, a function of current density,
polarity, and resistance heating of the electrode.
M The high droplet rate (approximately 250 droplets per second) develops suddenly above a critical current level, C
commonly referred to as the transition current (for each size electrode).
A Below this current, the metal is transferred in drops generally larger in diameter than the electrode at a rate of from •
G 10 to 20 per second (globular transfer). I
The transition current is also dependent, to some extent, on the chemical composition of the electrode.
For 1/16 (1.6mm) diameter low-alloy steel electrodes, a transition current of 270 amperes (direct current electrode
positive [DCEP]) is common.
T Alternating current is not recommended for this type of welding because it does not produce a stable arc. N
S •
T III. Pulsed Spray Transfer K
Metal transfer in pulsed spray welding is similar to that of the spray transfer described above, but it occurs at a lower
average current.
A The lower average current is made possible by rapid pulsing of the welding current between a high level, where metal
will transfer rapidly in the spray mode, and a low level, where no transfer will take place. S
E At a typical rate of 60 to 120 pulses per second, a melted drop is formed by the low-current arc, which is then •
R “squeezed off ” by the high-current pulse.
E
O This permits all-position welding.
(continued on next page)

M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
50
A T
L O
M B
Low Alloy Wires
C C
B General Welding Tips for Low Alloy Wires •
T S
IV. Globular Transfer
The mode of transfer that charcterizes 100 percent CO2 as a shielding gas is globular.
B Common practice with globular transfer is to use low arc voltage to minimize spatter. L
R This buries the arc and produces deep penetration. •
Z Electrodes of 0.045 and 1/16 in. (1.2 mm and 1.6 mm) diameter normally are used at welding currents in the range of A
275 – 400 amperes (DCEP), for this type of transfer. The rate at which droplets (globules) are transferred ranges from
20 to 70 per second, depending on the size of the electrode, the amperage, polarity, and arc voltage.
T V. Short Circuiting Transfer H

I This mode of transfer is obtained with small diameter electrodes (0.030 to 0.045 in. [0.8 to 1.2 mm]) using low arc •
voltages and amperages, and a power source designed for short circuiting transfer.
T The electrode short-circuits to the weld metal, usually at a rate of from 50 to 200 times per second.
F
Metal is transferred with each short circuit, but not across the arc.
Short circuiting gas metal arc welding of low-alloy steel is done most commonly with mixtures of argon and CO2
M as the shielding gas, with CO2 alone, and occasionally with mixtures of helium-argon-CO2. C
Penetration of welds made with CO2 shielding gas is greater than with argon-CO2 mixtures, but mixtures containing
A substantial amounts of argon or helium generally result in superior weld metal impact properties.
•
G Shielding gas mixtures of 50 to 90 percent argon-remainder CO2 or 50 to 90 percent helium-remainder CO2 result in I
higher short circuiting rates and lower minimum currents and voltages than does CO2 shielding alone.
This can be an advantage when welding thin plate or in the achievement of superior impact properties.
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
51
A T
L O
M B
Hardfacing Electrodes & Wires
C C
B Hardfacing Coated Electrodes •
AFM 300 - 53
B AFM 700 - 54 L
R AFM 800 - 55 •
Z NO AWS/SFA Classification A
AFM 900 - 56
AFM CHROM-CARB - 57
T AFM Sugar Rod - 58 H

I •
T F
Hardfacing Wires
M AFM Product AWS Classification Page C
A AFM 250 - 59
•
G I
AFM 300 - 60
AFM 350 - 61
NO AWS/SFA Classification
T AFM 450 - 62 N
S •
AFM 600 - 63
T K
AFM 700 - 64
A
S
E
•
R Hardfacing Conversion Chart 65
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N Please contact us
for MSDS
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
52
A T
L O
M B
Hardfacing Electrodes
C
B
AFM 300 C
•
AC/DC+ (Electrode Positive)
T RC 26-31 S
Description:
B AFM 300 is a buildup and overlaying electrode for all ferrous metals subjected to moderate abrasion, L
R severe impact and corrosion. •
Weld deposits of AFM 300 are strong and tough, however with an average hardness of Rc 26-31,
Z A
they do remain machinable.
Applications:
T Typical applications include tractor rollers, sprockets, idlers, concrete mixer blades, bearing journals and H
I other parts which require machinable weld deposits. •
T F
Procedure:
Clean the weld area. Use AC or DC+ polarity.
M Preheating is not required, although heavier sections should be preheated to 200-300°F. C
Maintain a medium arc length and use a weaving technique or stringer beads up to twice the diameter of
A •
the electrode.
G Avoid the buildup of heat at any one location on the base metal. I
Remove slag between passes and allow the base metal to air cool.
If severe abrasion is encountered, a final pass of AFM 800 should be considered.
T N
S Recommended Amperage (AC or DC+): •
T Dia. (inch) 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” 1/4” K
Dia. (mm) 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm 6.4 mm
AMPS 60 ~ 130 120 ~ 180 170 ~ 240 240 ~ 300
A
S
E
Typical Chemical Composition (%): •
R
C Si Mn Cr E
O
0.20 0.60 1.48 0.70
M
S
A
I
All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers. W
N 6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton.
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
53
A T
L O
M B
C AFM 700 C
B AC/DC+ (Electrode Positive) •
T RC 58-62 S
Description:
B AFM 700 is a severe abrasion and considerable impact hardfacing electrode. L
R Weld deposits have a martensitic structure that resists wear even in metal-to-metal mild steel contact. •
When used in the flat and horizontal positions, this electrode will exhibit a stable arc and produce weld
Z A
deposits that are very smooth and finely rippled.
Applications:
T Typical applications for AFM 700 include plowshares, cultivator shoes, bucket teeth and lips, well drilling H
I bits, cement mixer blades, shovel tracks and screw conveyors. •
T F
Procedure:
Use AC or DC+. Preheating is generally not required.
M Using the weaving technique and keeping a short arc length, deposit up to 1/4” maximum. C
If more than two passes will be required, it is suggested that a “padding layer” of AFM 300 be used prior to
A •
depositing AFM 700.
G I
Recommended Amperage (AC or DC+):

T Dia. (inch) 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” 1/4” N
S Dia. (mm) 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm 6.4 mm •
T AMPS 110 ~ 130 140 ~ 170 180 ~ 210 220 ~ 300 K
A
Typical Chemical Composition (%): S
E
C Si Mn Cr •
R
0.48 0.80 1.45 4.40 E
O
M
S
A Standard Packaging:
All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers. •
I
6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton. W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
54
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM 800 C
•
T RC 62-65 S
Description:
B AFM 800 is a hardsurfacing electrode used for severe abrasion, light impact, and corrosion resistance. L
R This electrode produces an extremely hard martensite-structure weld deposit which is not machinable in •
the “as-welded” condition.
Z A
AFM 800 will lay down a smooth, corrosion resistant weld deposit which will remain extremely hard even
at elevated temperatures.
T Applications: H
I Typical applications for AFM 800 include mill hammers, bucket teeth, valve seats, mixers, crusher rolls, •
T tamper rollers, and other mild steel, carbon or alloy steels as well as manganese steels. F
Procedure:
M Use AC or DC+. Preheating is not required except on alloy steels. Using a short gap and a weaving C
technique, deposit two layers.
A •
If more than two passes are required, use AFM 300 to provide a padding layer prior to using AFM 800.
G I

T Dia. (inch) 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” 1/4” N
S Dia. (mm) 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm 6.4 mm •
T AMPS 90 ~ 130 140 ~ 170 190 ~ 240 220 ~ 300 K
A
E
C Si Mn Cr •
R
1.40 0.50 1.23 6.80 E
O
M
Standard Packaging: S
A
I
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
55
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM 900 C
•
T RC 50-55 (After Workhardening) S
Description:
B AFM 900 is a hardsurfacing overlay electrode used for the fabrication and build up of high manganese and
L
alloy steels which are subjected to heavy impact and severe abrasion.
R The weld deposits have an austenitic structure and work harden although remaining extremely ductile. •
Z Weld deposits are machinable and forgeable. A
Applications:
T Typical applications of AFM 900 include repairing railroad switches, frogs and tracks, bucket teeth and lips, H
I rock crushers, mill hammers and bulldozer parts. •
T F
Procedure:
When the base metal of 13% manganese steel is hardened, cut-off the hardened zone before welding.
Welding should be done at the lowest possible temperature. Maintain a short to medium arc length using
M a slight weaving technique to make the deposit smooth and even. C
A Water or air cool the weld metal during welding. •
G Do not preheat manganese steels. Do not overheat the base metal. I
Peening is recommended to relieve stresses.
T Recommended Amperage (AC or DC+): N

S Dia. (inch) 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” 1/4”
•
T Dia. (mm) 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm 6.4 mm
K
AMPS 75 ~ 130 120 ~ 190 175 ~ 240 230 ~ 280
A
S
E
R
C Si Mn E
O
0.70 0.30 12.50
M
S
A
I All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers. W
N 6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton.
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
56
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM Chrom-Carb C
•
T RC 58-62 S
Description:
B AFM Chrom-Carb is a chromium-tungsten flux-coated hardsurfacing electrode designed to produce L
R extremely hard weld metal deposits on parts exposed to severe mineral abrasion with low impact. •
The extreme hardness of AFM Chrom-Carb deposits is achieved through the formation of chromium and
Z A
tungsten carbides within the matrix of the weld deposit.
Applications:
T Typical applications include earth moving and rock crushing equipment, augers, asphalt feed screws, sand H
I pumps, mixer blades and crushing or pulverizing mills.parts which require machinable weld deposits. •
T F
Procedure:
Maintain a short arc length and hold the electrode vertical to the work piece.
M AFM Chrom-Carb can be used on both AC or DC machines. Excellent for hardfacing large surface areas C
using wide weave beads.
A •
AFM Chrom-Carb has good operator appeal and yields a very smooth weld bead with superb adherence.
G Deposition is fast and the weld deposits will last a long time. I
T Recommended Amperage (AC or DC+): N

S Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” •
T Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm K
AMPS 70 ~ 90 110 ~ 130 160 ~ 190 220 ~ 250
A
E
C Cr W •
R
4.00 26.00 4.00 E
O
M
A All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers. •
I 6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton. W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
57
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM Sugar Rod C
•
T RC 57-61 (As Welded) S
Description:
B AFM SUGAR ROD is designed for use on carbon and low alloy steels, manganese steels, and cast iron. De-
L
posits take a high polish, which contributes to high frictional and abrasion wear qualities, especially small
R particle abrasion. •
Z Excellent on applications that need impact as well as abrasion resistance. A
Provides optimum resistance to this combination.
Deposits well out of position.
T H
I Applications: •
T AFM SUGAR ROD is recommended for severe abrasion applications, along with moderate impact. F
This alloy has a good hot hardness up to approximately 1000°F.
Especially designed for crusher applications.
Used heavily in construction, mining, brick and clay industries on parts such as crusher rolls, jaw crushers,
M bucket teeth, edges, hammers, mill hammers, conveyor screws, etc. C
A •
G I
Dia. (inch) 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
T Dia. (mm) 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm N
S AMPS 80 ~ 125 100 ~ 160 125 ~ 190 •
T K
Typical All Weld Metal Chemistry (%):

A C Mn Si S P Ni Cr Mo Cu S
E 3.10 0.01 0.95 0.029 0.021 0.09 31.08 0.02 0.09 •
R
E
O
M Standard Packaging:
All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers. S
A 6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton. •
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
58
A T
L O
M B
Hardfacing Wires
C
B
AFM 250 C
•
Build-Up
T RC 20 ~ 26 S
Description:
AFM 250 is for building-up mild and low alloy steel parts to within 3/16”-3/8” of their original size.
B Weld deposits will be part ferritic-part martensitic in structure. L
R AFM 250 weld deposits have good compressive strength and resistance to plastic deformation. •
Z Weld deposits are easily machined in the “as welded” position. A
An excellent underlayment prior to hardsurfacing.
Very good impact resistance; poor abrasion resistance.
T H
I Applications: •
AFM 250 Underlaying for hardsurfacing, steel mill wobblers and pads, shafting, small rolls, pump parts.
T F
Procedure:
Use DC Reverse Polarity (electrode positive).
M The shielding gas should be 100% CO2 welding grade, however a 75% Argon + 25% CO2 mixture will increase C
A the hardness slightly. •
G Superior properties are achieved if an interpass temperature of 300° ~ 480°F is maintained. I
Electrode
T Wire Diameter
Stick-out
AMPS Volts* N
S 0.045” (1.2 mm) 1/2” ~ 3/4” 150 ~ 250 21 ~ 26
•
T K
1/16” (1.6 mm) 3/4” ~ 1” 250 ~ 350 23 ~ 28
• Ideal procedure is to set the wire feed speed and find the voltage setting that will yield the smoothest performance.
A
S
E Typical Chemical Composition (%): •
R C Si Mn Cr Fe E
O 0.07 0.50 1.59 1.30 Bal.
M
A
0.045’ (1.2 mm) X 25 Lb Spool •
I
1/16” (1.6 mm) X 25 Lb Spool W
N Other sizes and packaging are available.
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
59
A T
L O
M B
Hardfacing Wires
C
B
AFM 300 C
•
Build-Up
T RC 28 ~ 32 S
Description:
AFM 300 is similar to AFM 250 in weld deposit structure and uses.
B AFM 300 offers a slightly harder weld deposit than AFM 250 and subsequently it is often used in applications L
R where a hardsurfacing layer is not applied over the AFM 300 deposit. •
Z Very good impact resistance; poor abrasion resistance. A
Applications:
T Build-up of power shovels and tractor parts, repairing battered rail, hammers. H
I •
T Procedure: F
The shielding gas should be 100% CO2 welding grade, however a 75% Argon + 25% CO2 mixture will increase
the hardness slightly.
M Superior properties are achieved if an inter pass temperature of 300° ~ 480°F is maintained. C
A •
G Electrode
I
Wire Diameter AMPS Volts*
Stick-out
0.045” (1.2 mm) 1/2” ~ 3/4” 150 ~ 250 21 ~ 26
T N
1/16” (1.6 mm) 3/4” ~ 1” 250 ~ 350 23 ~ 28
S •
T • Ideal procedure is to set the wire feed speed and find the voltage setting that will yield the smoothest performance. K
A Typical Chemical Composition (%):

C Si Mn Cr Fe S
E
0.09 0.68 1.54 1.10 Bal. •
R
E
O
Standard Packaging:
M 0.045’ (1.2 mm) X 25 Lb Spool
1/16” (1.6 mm) X 25 Lb Spool S
A
Other sizes and packaging are available. •
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
60
A T
L O
M B
Hardfacing Wires
C
B
AFM 350 C
•
Build-up & Hardsurfacing
T RC 34 ~ 39 S
Description:
B AFM 350 has a low alloy deposit that is martensitic in structure. L
R It is machinable and forgeable. •
A good balance of impact resistance and abrasion resistance as well as hardness make AFM 350 an excellent
Z A
choice where only one wire is desired for build-up and hardsurfacing.
(Not to be used as an underlayment prior to subsequent hardfacing).
Very good impact resistance; fair abrasion resistance.
T H
I Applications: •
T Overlaying carbon steel shafts, gear teeth, sprockets, steel shovel pads. F
Procedure:
M Use DC Reverse Polarity (electrode positive). C
A •
G Superior properties are achieved if an inter pass temperature of 300° ~ 480°F is maintained. I
Wire Electrode
T AMPS Volts* N
Diameter Stick-out
S 0.045” (1.2 mm) 1/2” ~ 3/4” 150 ~ 250 21 ~ 26 •
T K
1/16” (1.6 mm) 3/4” ~ 1” 250 ~ 350 23 ~ 28
A
S
E
R
C Si Mn Cr Mo Fe E
O
0.12 0.45 1.37 1.30 0.20 Bal.
M
S
A
I 0.045’ (1.2 mm) X 25 Lb Spool W
N 1/16” (1.6 mm) X 25 Lb Spool
Other sizes and packaging are available.
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
61
A T
L O
M B
Hardfacing Wires
C
B
AFM 450 C
•
Hardsurfacing
T RC 34 ~ 39 S
Description:
B AFM 450 is designed for metal to metal abrasion involving impact such as rolling or sliding parts in earth L
R moving equipment where lubrication is not possible. •
The weld deposits of AFM 450 are martensitic in structure.
Z A
Very good impact resistance; good abrasion resistance.
Applications:
T Mine car wheels, brake drums, tractor rollers, undercarriage parts, shovel idlers, rollers, and hook rolls. H
I •
T Procedure: F
M the hardness slightly. C
Superior properties are achieved if an inter pass temperature of 300° ~ 480°F is maintained.
A •
G I
Wire Electrode
AMPS Volts*
Diameter Stick-out
T 0.045” (1.2 mm) 1/2” ~ 3/4” 150 ~ 250 21 ~ 26 N
S 1/16” (1.6 mm) 3/4” ~ 1” 250 ~ 350 23 ~ 28 •
T K
A
E
C Si Mn Cr Mo Fe •
R
0.24 0.51 1.20 2.00 0.60 Bal. E
O
M
A
0.045’ (1.2 mm) X 25 Lb Spool •
I
1/16” (1.6 mm) X 25 Lb Spool W
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
62
A T
L O
M B
Hardfacing Wires
C
B
AFM 600 C
•
Hardsurfacing
T RC 53 ~ 56 S
Description:
B AFM 600 offers high abrasion and heavy impact resistance on carbon, low alloy and manganese steel. L
R Weld deposits are martensitic and corrosion resistant. •
AFM 600 is designed for metal to metal and metal to earth abrasion.
Z A
Weld deposits will work harden when put to service.
Excellent impact resistance; excellent abrasion resistance.
T Applications: H
I Extruder screws, bucket lips, tamper feet, tillage tools, dredge parts, ore drag lines, muller tires, and •
T wherever high abrasion and heavy pounding is encountered. F
Procedure:
M Use DC Reverse Polarity (electrode positive). C
A •
G Superior properties are achieved if an inter pass temperature of 300° ~ 480°F is maintained. I
T Electrode N
S Stick-out •
T 0.045” (1.2 mm) 1/2” ~ 3/4” 150 ~ 250 21 ~ 26 K
1/16” (1.6 mm) 3/4” ~ 1” 250 ~ 350 23 ~ 28
A • Ideal procedure is to set the wire feed speed and find the voltage setting that will yield the smoothest performance.
S
E
•
R Typical Chemical Composition (%):
E
O C Si Mn Cr Mo Fe
0.25 2.18 0.36 6.50 0.03 Bal.
M
S
A Standard Packaging: •
I 0.045’ (1.2 mm) X 25 Lb Spool W
N 1/16” (1.6 mm) X 25 Lb Spool
Other sizes and packaging are available.
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
63
A T
L O
M B
Hardfacing Wires
C
B
AFM 700 C
•
Hardsurfacing
T RC 58 ~ 61 S
Description:
B AFM 700 offers a harder weld deposit than AFM 600, but lacks the corrosion resistance.
L
Primarily used for high metal to metal abrasion.
R Weld deposits are martensitic in structure and will work harden when put into service. •
Z Excellent impact resistance; excellent abrasion resistance. A
Applications:
T Rollers, conveyor screws, crusher rolls, and mill hammers. H
I •
T Procedure: F
M Superior properties are achieved if an inter pass temperature of 300° ~ 480°F is maintained. C
A •
G I
Electrode
Stick-out
T 0.045” (1.2 mm) 1/2” ~ 3/4” 150 ~ 250 21 ~ 26 N
S 1/16” (1.6 mm) 3/4” ~ 1” 250 ~ 350 23 ~ 28 •
T K
A
E
C Si Mn Cr W Fe •
R
0.30 2.40 0.50 7.00 0.70 Bal. E
O
M
A
0.045’ (1.2 mm) X 25 Lb Spool •
I 1/16” (1.6 mm) X 25 Lb Spool W
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
64
A T
L O
M B
Hardfacing Conversion Chart
C C
B Build-Up & Hardfacing Gas Shielded Wires
•
T WELDING
S
AFM STOODY POSTLE HOBART McKAY LINCOLN
ALLOYS
AFM 250 BUILD-UP 2891 SPL BU-O BU-O BU B-O / B-S
B L
R AFM 300
SUPER BU, 107 2892 SPL 40-0 242-0 35-S, 40-S T-O / T-S •
AFM 350
Z A
AFM 450 105 - 50-S 252 - R-O / R-S
AFM 600
965 2898 SPL 960 960 55 L-G
T AFM 700 H
I •
T Build-Up & Hardfacing Stick Electrodes F
AFM MESSER(MG) McKAY CERTANIUM EUTECTIC HOBART STOODY
M HARDALLOY TUFANHARD C
AFM 300 740 297 2B BUILD-UP LH
A 32, 42 250, 320 •
G I
6710, 6712,
CHROM CARB 790 55 TIC - - SUPER 20
6715, N112
5005/6006
T AFM 700 770 55 6006 N102,
TUFANHARD
35/HXC N
580
S SUGARTEC A •
T HARDALLOY TUFANHARD K
AFM 800 760 267 N2 21 / 1105
58 550, 600
A
AFM 900 745
CHROM/MAG,
282, 298 OA 690, 40 150 NICROMANG S
E HARDALLOY 119
•
R
AFM SUGAR E
O ROD
765 HARDALLOY 140 284 7000, N102 - 21 / 2134
M The information contained above represents a comparable alternative for the products of American Filler Metals and is not necessarily equal in
chemistry or operating characteristics to the other products shown. S
A Depending upon the application, the final decision on which product to use should be made by the customer. •
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
65
A T
L O
M B
Cast Iron Coated Electrodes & Wires
C C
B Coated Electrodes •
AFM NI-55 AWS/SFA A5.15 ENiFe-CI 68
AFM NI-99 AWS/SFA A5.15 ENi-CI 69
B L
R •
Z Bare Wires A
AFM NI-55 NO AWS/SFA Classification - 70
T H
AFM NI-99 AWS/SFA A5.15 ERNi-CI 71
I •
T F
M Please contact us C
for MSDS
A •
G I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
66
A T
L O
M B
Cast Iron Coated Electrodes & Wires

B AWS/SFA A5.15 •
T S
Designates an electrode.
Designates the chemical composition of the filler metal

B or undiluted metal. L
R •
Designates that these filler metal are intended for
Z cast iron applications.
A
E NiFe-CI
T H
I •
T F
Designates an electrode or rod.
M Designates the chemical composition of the filler metal C

A or undiluted metal. •
G I
Designates that these filler metal are intended
for cast iron applications.
T ERNi-CI N
S •
T K
A
S
E
Designates the chemical composition of the filler metal •
R or undiluted metal. E
O
Designates a tubular electrode.
M
S
A Designates that the electrode is used primarily
without an external shielding gas. •
I
W
N Designates that these filler metal are intended
or cast iron applications.
I
E NiFeT3-CI F
N
C
F
W
O
67
A T
L O
M B
Cast Iron Electrode
C AFM NI-55 C
B AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiFe-CI •
T AC or DC+ (Reverse Polarity) S
Description:
AFM NI-55 is designed for welding cast iron, malleable iron and ductile iron to themselves and other
B wrought alloys, including nickel alloys. L
R A core wire chemistry of approximately 55% nickel and 45% iron produces weld deposits with much lower •
Z weld shrinkage stress which in turn reduces the possibility of weld or heat-affected zone cracking. A
Applications:
T AFM NI-55 is especially suited for welding heavy sections such as motor blocks, housings, machine parts, H
frames, defective castings and building up worn sections.
I Stringer deposits are generally harder to machine due to the dilution of the weld metal, however heavier beads
•
T and multiple layer welds will exhibit good machinability. F

M Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” C
A Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
G Length 12” 14” 14” 14” I
AC 55 ~ 65 70 ~ 85 110 ~ 125 135 ~ 150
DC + 50 ~ 70 70 ~ 95 100 ~ 130 135 ~ 170
T N
S Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): •
T C Mn Si S Fe Ni* Cu** Al Total Other
K
2.00 2.50 4.00 0.03 Bal. 45 ~ 60 1.00 1.00 1.00
A All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. S
E * Nickel plus incidental Cobalt. •
R ** Copper plus incidental Silver.
E
O
Typical Mechanical Properties of Undiluted Weld Metal: AFM NI-55 is also available in
M psi 58,000 ~ 84,000 a bare MIG and TIG wire.
Tensile Strength S
A MPa 400 ~ 579 See page 71.
•
I Elongation (%) 6 ~ 18
W
N
I Standard Packaging:
All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers. F
N
6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton. S
C
F M D
W
O S
68
A T
L O
M B
Cast Iron Electrode
C
B
AFM NI-99 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.11 ENi-CI
T AC or DC+ (Reverse Polarity) S
Description:
B AFM NI-99 is designed for welding thin sections of cast iron to itself or to low alloy and carbon steels. L
This all-position electrode is used where maximum machinability is required.
R The weld deposits are “soft” and can be drilled, tapped, milled or shaped.
•
Z A
Applications:
AFM NI-99 is especially suited for repairing porous or cracked castings and can be used to weld cast iron
T to itself or dissimilar metals. H
I •
T Recommended Amperage (AC or DC+): F
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
M Length 12” 14” 14” 14” C
A AC 60 ~ 90 90 ~ 140 140 ~ 190 150 ~ 200 •
G DC + 50 ~ 80 80 ~ 130 100 ~ 170 120 ~ 190 I
Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%):

T C Mn Si S Fe Ni* Cu** Al Total Other N
S 2.00 2.50 4.00 0.03 8.00 85 Min. 2.50 1.00 1.00 •
T K
* Nickel plus incidental Cobalt.
A ** Copper plus incidental Silver.
S
E
•
R Typical Mechanical Properties of Undiluted Weld Metal:
AFM NI-99 is also available in E
O psi 40,000 ~ 65,000
Tensile Strength a bare MIG and TIG wire.
MPa 276 ~ 488
See page 72.
M Elongation (%) 3~6
S
A
•
I
N All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers.
6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton.
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
69
A T
L O
M B
Cast Iron Wire
C C
B AFM NI-55 •
T Description: S
AFM NI-55 is a bare MIG and TIG alloy for the welding of cast iron.
It has a harder weld than AFM NI-99, but machining can be accomplished by using carbide tipped tools.
B A 350°F minimum preheat and interpass temperature is recommended during welding. L
R •
Z Typical Chemical Analysis (%): A
C Mn Si Fe Ni
0.05 0.25 0.15 43.60 55.90
T For AFM NI-55 stick electrodes see page 69. H
I •
T Typical Mechanical Properties: F
psi 105,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 720
M Elongation (%) 35 C
A •
G Standard Sizes: I
36” TIG Wire 30 Lb ~ 33 Lb Spool
1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm
T 3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm N
S 1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm •
T 5/32” 4.0 mm K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
70
A T
L O
M B
Cast Iron Wire
C
B
AFM NI-99 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.15 ERNi-CI
T S
Description:
AFM NI-99 is a bare MIG and TIG alloy for the welding of cast iron.
It is a machinable alloy that can also be used for buildup and overlay.
B L
A 350°F minimum preheat and interpass temperature is recommended during welding.
R •
Z Typical Chemical Analysis (%): A
C Mn Si Ni
0.05 0.22 0.05 99.60
T H
For AFM NI-99 stick electrodes see page 70.
I •
T F
psi 66,500
Tensile Strength
M MPa 450 C
A Elongation (%) 40 •
G I
Standard Sizes:
T 1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm N
S •
3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm
T K
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm
5/32” 4.0 mm
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
71
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes & Wires
C C
B Nickel Coated Electrodes •
AFM 112 AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCrMo-3 74
AFM 117 AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCrCoMo-1 75
B AFM 122 AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCrMo-10 76 L
R AFM 141 AWS/SFA A5.11 ENi-1 77 •
Z AFM 182 AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCrFe-3 78 A
AFM 187 AWS/SFA A5.6 ECuNi 79
AFM 190 AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCu-7 80
T H
AFM C276 AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCrMo-4 81
I •
AFM A AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCrFe-2 82
T F
M Nickel Wires C
A AFM Product AWS Classification Page •
G AFM 60 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCu-7 83 I
AFM 61 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNi-1 84
AFM 62 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrFe-5 85
T AFM 67 AWS/SFA A5.7 ERCuNi 86 N
S AFM 82 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCr-3 87 •
T AFM 92 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrFe-6 88 K
AFM 601 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrFe-11 89
A AFM 617 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrCoMo-1 90
S
E AFM 622 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrMo-10 91
•
R AFM 625 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrMo-3 92
E
O AFM C276 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrMo-4 93
AFM 718 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiFeCr-2 94
M AFM ALLOY X AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrMo-2 95 S
A AFM ALLOY W AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiMo-3 96 •
I
W
N
I
Click to Download Click to Download F
N Nickel Electrodes Nickel Wires C
F
W
O
72
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes & Wires
C C
B •
T S
AWS/SFA A5.11
B Designates an electrode. L
R •
Z A
Designates the electrodes as nickel-based alloys.
Designates the group of electrodes according to

T their principal alloying elements. H
I •
These numbers are separate one composition from another,
T within a group, and are not repeated within that group.
F
M
E NiCu-7 C
A •
G I
T N
S Order of Mandatory Classification Designators •
AWS/SFA A5.14
T K
Designates an electrode and rod.
A
S
E Designates the electrodes as nickel-based alloys. •
R
E
O Designates the group of electrodes according to
their principal alloying elements.
M
These numbers are separate one composition from another, S
A within a group, and are not repeated within that group.
•
I
W
N ERNiCu-7
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
73
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes
C AFM 112 C
B AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCrMo-3 •
T DC+ (Reverse Polarity) S
Description:
AFM 112 is designed for welding alloy 625 to itself and for joining many dissimilar nickel baring alloys and
B iron-base metals.
L
R AFM 112 is also recommended for welding nickel base alloys 600 and 601 and nickel-iron-chrome alloys 800 •
Z and 801. A
It also can be used for joining nickel based alloys 625, 718, X750 and 706 to 9% nickel steel and for overlaying
carbon steel.
T H
I Recommended Amperage (DC+): •
T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” F
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
M AMPS 40 ~ 65 65 ~ 90 90 ~ 125 125 ~ 160 C
A •
G I
C Mn Fe P S Si Cu
0.10 1.00 7.0 0.03 0.02 0.75 0.50
T N
Ni* Co Cr Nb + Ta Mo Total Other
S •
55.00 Min. (a) 20.00 ~ 23.00 3.15 ~ 4.15 8.00 ~ 10.00 0.50
T K
*Includes incidental Cobalt.
A (a) Cobalt - 0.12 % Maximum, when specified by the purchaser. S
E
•
R
All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: E
O
psi 110,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 760
M
Elongation (%) 30 S
A
•
I
W
N
Standard Packaging:
All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers.
I
6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton. F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
74
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes
C AFM 117 C
B AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCrCoMo-1 •
Description:
AFM 117 is designed for use on nickel chromium-cobalt-molybdenum alloys (alloy 617) to themselves and
B to steel and for surfacing steel with nickel-chromium-cobalt-molybdenum weld metal (alloy 600, 601, & 800). L
R AFM 117 is also used for applications where optimum strength and oxidation resistance is required above •
Z 1500°F up to 2100°F, especially when welding on base metals of nickel-iron-chromium alloys. A
Recommended Amperage (DC+):

T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” H
I Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” F
AMPS 40 ~ 60 75 ~ 100 90 ~ 130 125 ~ 150
M Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): C

A C Mn Fe P S Si Cu •
G 0.05 ~ 0.15 0.30 ~ 2.50 5.0 0.03 0.015 0.75 0.50 I
Ni* Co Cr Nb + Ta Mo Total Other
Bal. 9.00 ~ 15.00 21.00 ~ 26.00 1.00 8.00 ~ 10.00 0.50
T N
S All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. •
T K
All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements:
A psi 90,000
Tensile Strength S
E MPa 620
•
R Elongation (%) 25
E
O
Standard Packaging:
M All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers. S
A 6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton.
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
75
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes
C AFM 122 C
Description:
AFM 122 is used for welding nickel chromium-molybdenum alloys, for the welding of the clad side of joints
B in steel clad with nickel chromium-molybdenum alloy, to steel and to their nickel-base alloys; and for joining L
R nickel chromium-molybdenum alloys. •
Z Typical specifications for the nickel-chromium molybdenum base metals have UNS Number N06022. A

T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” H
I Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” F
AMPS 40 ~ 60 75 ~ 100 90 ~ 130 125 ~ 150
M C
A •
C Mn Fe P S Si Cu
G I
0.02 1.00 2.00 ~ 6.00 0.03 0.015 0.20 0.50
Ni* Co Cr Mo V W Total Other
Bal. 2.50 20.00 ~ 22.50 12.50 ~ 14.50 0.35 2.50 ~ 3.50 0.50
T N
T K
A psi 90,000
Tensile Strength S
E MPa 620
•
R Elongation (%) 25
E
O
Standard Packaging:
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
76
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes
C AFM 141 C
B AWS/SFA A5.11 ENi-1 •
Description:
AFM 141 is used for welding commercially pure nickel to itself, for overlaying nickel on steel, and for joining
B nickel to steel. L
R AFM 141 is commonly used in applications with nickel alloys 200 and 201. •
Z A
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
T Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm H
I Length 12” 14” 14” 14” •
T AMPS 65 ~ 85 90 ~ 125 125 ~ 170 170 ~ 225 F

A C Mn Fe P S Si •
G 0.10 0.75 0.75 0.03 0.02 1.25 I
Cu Ni* Al Ti Total Other
0.25 92.00 Min. 1.00 1.00 ~ 4.00 0.50
T All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. N
S *Includes incidental Cobalt. •
T K
psi 60,000
A Tensile Strength
MPa 410 S
E
Elongation (%) 20 •
R
E
O
Standard Packaging:
M All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers.
S
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
77
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes
C AFM 182 C
B AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCrFe-3 •
Description:
AFM 182 is a coated electrode designed to weld nickel-chromium alloys, the clad side of
B nickel-chromium-iron clad steel and for welding iron and nickel-base alloy dissimilar metal combinations L
R such as nickel 600, 601, and 800. •
Z A
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
I Length 12” 14” 14” 14” •
T AMPS 40 ~ 65 65 ~ 95 95 ~ 125 125 ~ 165 F

M C Mn Fe P S Si Cu C
A 0.10 5.00 ~ 9.50 10.00 0.03 0.015 1.00 0.50 •
G Ni* Co Ti Cr Nb + Ta Total Other I
52.00 Min. (a) 1.00 13.00 ~ 17.00 1.00 ~ 2.50** 0.50
(a) Cobalt - 0.12 Maximum, when specified by the purchaser.
T * Ni - Includes incidental cobalt.
N
S ** Tantalum - 0.30 Maximum, when specified by the purchaser. •
T K
A psi 80,000
Tensile Strength S
E MPa 550 •
R Elongation (%) 30
E
O
A
6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton. •
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
78
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes
C AFM 187 C
B AWS/SFA A5.6 ECuNi •
Description:
AFM 187 is an all position copper-nickel core electrode.
B AFM 187 is excellent for welding wrought or cast 70/30, 80/20, and 90/10 copper-nickel alloys and dissimilar L
R applications of nickel-copper alloys. •
Z A
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
I Length 12” 14” 14” 14” •
T AMPS 60 ~ 85 70 ~ 120 100 ~ 145 130 ~ 190 F

M Mn Fe Si Ni* Cu C
A 1.00 ~ 2.50 0.40 ~ 0.75 0.50 29.0 ~ 33.0 Bal. •
G P Pb Ti Total Other I
0.020 0.02 0.20 0.50
T * Includes cobalt.
N
S •
T K
psi 50,000
A Tensile Strength
MPa 350 S
E Elongation (%) 20 •
R
E
O
Standard Packaging:
S
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
79
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes
C AFM 190 C
B AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCu-7 •
Description:
AFM 190 is an electrode designed to weld nickel-copper to itself, such as alloy 400 and 404.
B It is also used to overlay nickel-copper alloy on steel and to weld dissimilar nickel-copper alloys to steel. L
R •
Z A
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T H
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
I •
AMPS 55 ~ 75 75 ~ 110 110 ~ 150 150 ~ 190
T F

M C Mn Fe P S Si C
A 0.10 4.00 2.50 0.02 0.015 1.50 •
G Cu Ni* Al Ti Total Other I
Bal. 62.00 ~ 69.00 0.75 1.00 0.50
T * Includes incidental cobalt.
N
S •
T K
psi 70,000
A Tensile Strength
MPa 480 S
R
E
O
Standard Packaging:
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
80
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes
C AFM C276 C
Description:
AFM C276 is used for welding low-carbon nickel-chromium-molybdenum alloy, for welding the clad side
B of joints in steel clad with lowcarbon nickel-chromium-molybdenum alloy, and for welding low-carbon L
R nickel-chromium-molybdenum alloy to steel and to other nickel base alloys. •
Z AFM C276 electrodes normally are used only in the flat position. A

T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” H
I Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” F
AMPS 40 ~ 75 70 ~ 110 80 ~ 125 80 ~ 130
M C
A Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): •
G C Mn Fe P S Si Cu I
0.02 1.00 4.00 ~ 7.00 0.04 0.03 0.20 0.50
Ni* Co Cr Mo V W Total Other
T Bal. 2.50 14.50 ~ 16.50 15.00 ~ 17.00 0.35 3.00 ~ 4.50 0.50 N
S All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted.
•
T * Includes incidental cobalt. K
A All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements:

psi 100,000 S
E Tensile Strength
MPa 690 •
R
Elongation (%) 25 E
O
M
A
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
81
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes
C AFM A C
B AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCrFe-2 •
Description:
AFM A is an electrode used for welding nickel-chromium-iron alloys (alloy 800), 9% nickel steel,
B and a variety of dissimilar metal joints (involving carbon steel, stainless steel, nickel, and nickel-base alloys). L
R The base metals can be wrought or cast (welding grade), or both. •
Z The electrodes may be used for applications at temperatures ranging from cryogenic to around 1800°F A
(980°C).
However, for temperatures above 1500°F (820°C), weld metal produced by AFM A does not exhibit optimum
oxidation resistance and strength.
T H
T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
F
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
M C
AMPS 40 ~ 75 70 ~ 110 80 ~ 125 80 ~ 130
A •
G I
C Mn Fe P S Si Cu
0.10 1.00 ~ 3.50 12.00 0.03 0.02 0.75 0.50
T N
Ni* Co Cr Nb + Ta** Mo Total Other
S •
62.00 Min. (a) 13.00 ~ 17.00 0.50 ~ 4.00 0.50 ~ 2.50 0.50
T K
a. Cobalt-0.12 maximum, when specified by the purchaser.
A * Includes incidental cobalt.
S
E ** Tantalum-0.30 maximum, when specified by the purchaser.
•
R
All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: E
O
psi 100,000
Tensile Strength
M MPa 690
Elongation (%) 25 S
A
•
I
W
N
Standard Packaging:
I 6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton. F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
82
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 60 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCu-7
T S
Description:
AFM 60 is a titanium bearing filler metal for gas shielding welding of nickel-copper alloys,
(alloy 400 and 404) and dissimilar welding applications including joining alloy 200 and copper-nickel alloys
B using the GTAW, GMAW, SAW, and PAW processes. L
R AFM 60 contains sufficient titanium to control porosity with these welding processes. •
Z AFM 60 can also be used for a MIG overlay on steel after using AFM 61 for the first layer. A
Corresponding Classification in AWS A5.11 is AFM 190 ENiCu-7.

T Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): H
I C Mn Fe P S Si •
T 0.15 4.00 2.50 0.03 0.015 1.25 F
Cu Ni* Al Ti Total Other
Bal. 62.00 ~ 69.00 1.25 1.50 ~ 3.00 0.50
M C
* Includes incidental cobalt.
G I
Typical As-Welded Tensile Strength (Min.):
psi 70,000
T Tensile Strength N
MPa 480
S •
Elongation (%) 30
T K
Standard Sizes:
A
36” TIG Wire 30 Lb ~ 33 Lb Spool S
E
1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm •
R
3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm E
O
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm
M 5/32” 4.0 mm
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
83
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 61 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNi-1
T S
Description:
AFM 61 is used for welding wrought and cast forms of commercially pure nickel alloy (alloy 200 and 201)
to itself using the GTAW, GMAW, SAW, and PAW processes.
B AFM 61 contains sufficient titanium to control weld-metal porosity with these welding processes. L
R •
Z Corresponding Classification in AWS A5.11 is AFM 141 ENi-1. A

T C Mn Fe P S Si H
I 0.15 1.00 1.00 0.03 0.015 0.75 •
T Cu Ni* Al Ti Total Other F
0.25 93.00 Min. 1.50 2.00 ~ 3.50 0.50
M * Includes incidental cobalt. C
A •
G Typical As-Welded Tensile Strength (Min.): I
psi 60,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 410
T Elongation (%) 20 N
S •
T K
Standard Sizes:
A
1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm S
E
3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm •
R
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm E
O
5/32” 4.0 mm
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
84
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 62 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrFe-5
T S
Description:
AFM 62 is used for welding nickel-chromiumiron alloy (600) to itself using the GTAW, GMAW, SAW, and
PAW processes.
B The higher niobium content of AFM 62 is intended to minimize cracking where high welding stresses are L
R encountered, as in thick-section base metal up to 2”. •
Z A
C Mn Fe P S Si
T H
0.08 1.00 6.00 ~ 10.00 0.03 0.015 0.35
I •
Cu Ni* Co Cr Nb + Ta Total Other
T F
0.50 70.00 Min. (a) 14.00 ~ 17.00 1.50 ~ 3.00 0.50
a. Co is 0.12 maximum when specified by the purchaser.
A •
G I
psi 80,000
Tensile Strength
T MPa 550 N
S Elongation (%) 30 •
T K
Standard Sizes:
A 36” TIG Wire 30 Lb ~ 33 Lb Spool
1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm S
E
•
R 3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm
E
O 1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm
5/32” 4.0 mm
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
85
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 67 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.7 ERCuNi
T S
Description:
With the addition of nickel, AFM 67 strengthens the weld metal and improves the corrosion resistance,
particularly against salt water.
B The weld metal has good hot and cold ductility. L
R AFM 67 is used for welding 70/30, 80/20, and 90/10 copper-nickel alloys. •
Z To MIG overlay on steel, first overlay with a layer of AFM 61. A
It is also used for dissimilar welding of alloy 200 to copper-nickel alloys.
When gas tungsten or gas metal arc welding with AFM 67, preheating is not required.
T Welding is done in all positions. H
The arc should be kept as short as possible to assure adequate shielding gas coverage and thus minimize
I •
porosity.
T F
Corresponding Classification in AWS A5.6 is AFM 187 ECuNi.

A Cu* Mn Fe Si Ni** •
G Bal. 1.00 0.40 ~ 0.75 0.25 29.00 ~ 32.00 I
S P Pb Ti Total Others
0.01 0.02 0.02 0.20 ~ 0.50 0.50
T N
S •
* Including silver
T ** Includes incidental cobalt K

A
psi 50,000 S
E Tensile Strength
MPa 345 •
R
Elongation (%) 20 E
O
M Standard Sizes:
S
A 36” TIG Wire 30 Lb ~ 33 Lb Spool
•
I 1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm
W
N 3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm
I 5/32” 4.0 mm
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
86
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 82 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCr-3
T S
Description:
AFM 82 is designed for welding nickelchromium-iron alloy (600) to itself, for the clad side of joints in steel
with nickel-chromium-iron alloy, for surfacing steel with nickel-chromiumiron weld metal, for dissimilar
B welding of nickelbase alloys (600, 601 & 800), and for joining steel to nickel-base alloys. L
R •
Z Corresponding Classification in AWS A5.11 is AFM 182 ENiCrFe-3. A
C Mn Fe P S Si
T H
0.10 2.50 ~ 3.50 3.00 0.03 0.015 0.50
I •
Ni* Ti Cr Nb + Ta Cu Total Others
T F
67.00 Min. 0.75 18.00 ~ 22.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 0.50 0.50
M * Includes incidental cobalt, Co is 0.12 when specified by the purchaser. C
A •
psi 80,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 550
S •
T Standard Sizes: K
A 1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm
3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm S
E
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm •
R
5/32” 4.0 mm E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
87
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 92 C
•
T S
Description:
AFM 92 is used for cladding steel with nickel-chromiumiron weld metal and for joining steel to nickel-base
alloys using the GTAW, GMAW, SAW, and PAW processes.
B The weld metal will age harden on heat treatment. L
R •
Z Corresponding Classification in AWS A5.11 is AFM A ENiCrFe-2. A

T C Mn Fe P S Si H
I 0.08 2.00 ~ 2.70 8.00 0.03 0.015 0.35 •
T Ni* Ti Cr Cu Total Others F
67.00 Min. 2.50 ~ 3.50 14.00 ~ 17.00 0.50 0.50
M * Includes incidental cobalt C
A •
psi 80,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 550
S •
T K
Standard Sizes:
A 1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm S
E 3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm •
R 1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm E
O 5/32” 4.0 mm
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
88
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 601 C
•
T S
Description:
AFM 601 is used for welding nickelchromium-iron-aluminum alloy (601) to itself and to other high
temperature compositions using the GTAW process.
B It is used for severe applications where the exposure temperature can exceed 2100°F (1150°). L
R •
Z Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): A
C Mn Fe P S Si
0.10 1.00 Bal. 0.03 0.015 0.50
T Cu Ni* Al Cr Total Others
H
I 1.00 58.0 ~ 63.0 1.00 ~ 1.70 21.00 ~ 25.00 0.50
•
T F
M C
A Typical As-Welded Tensile Strength (Min.): •
G psi 94,000 I
Tensile Strength
MPa 650
Elongation (%) 42
T N
S •
T Standard Sizes: K
1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm
A
3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm S
E
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm •
R
5/32” 4.0 mm E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
89
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 617 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrCoMo-1
T S
Description:
AFM 617 is used for welding nickelchromium-cobalt-molybdenum alloy to itself using the GTAW and
GMAW processes.
B AFM 617 can also be used for welding joints of dissimilar steels and for elevated temperature service. L
R •
Z Corresponding Classification in AWS A5.11 is AFM 117 ENiCrCoMo-1. A
T C Mn Fe P S Si Cu H
I 0.05 ~ 0.15 1.00 3.00 0.03 0.015 1.00 0.50 •
T Ni* Co Al Ti Cr Mo Total Others
F
Bal. 10.00 ~ 15.00 0.80 ~ 1.50 0.60 20.00 ~ 24.00 8.00 ~ 10.00 0.50
A •
psi 90,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 620
S •
T Standard Sizes: K
A 1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm
3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm S
E
•
R 1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm
E
O 5/32” 4.0 mm
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
90
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 622 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrMo-10
T S
Description:
AFM 622 is used for welding nickelchromium-molybdenum alloy (622) to itself, to steel, to other nickel-
base alloys (such as 625 & C276), and for cladding steel with nickelchromium- molybdenum weld metal using
B the GTAW, GMAW, and PAW processes. L
R •
Z Corresponding Classification in AWS A5.11 is AFM 122 ENiCrMo-10. A

I 0.015 0.50 2.00 ~ 6.00 0.02 0.010 0.08 0.50 •
T Ni* Co Cr Mo V W Total Others F
Bal. 2.50 20.00 ~ 22.50 12.50 ~ 14.50 0.35 2.50 ~ 3.50 0.50
A •
psi 100,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 690
S •
T Standard Sizes: K
1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm
A
3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm S
E
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm •
R
5/32” 4.0 mm E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
91
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 625 C
•
T S
Description:
AFM 625 is used for welding nickelchromium-molybdenum alloy (625) to itself, to steel, to other nickel-
base alloys (601 & 800), for cladding steel with nickel-chromiummolybdenum weld metal, and for welding
B the clad side of joints in steel with nickel-chromiummolybdenum alloy using the GTAW, GMAW, SAW, and L
R PAW processes. •
Z AFM 625’s outstanding strength and toughness in the temperature range cryogenic to 2000°F (1093°C) are A
derived primarily from the solid solution effects of the refractory metals, columbium and molybdenum,
in a nickel-chromium matrix.
T AFM 625 has excellent fatigue strength and stress-corrosion cracking resistance to chloride ions. H
I •
Corresponding Classification in AWS A5.11 is AFM 112 ENiCrMo-3.
T F
C Mn Fe P S Si Cu
M 0.010 0.50 5.00 0.02 0.015 0.50 0.50 C
A Ni* Al Ti Cr Nb + Ta Mo Total Others •
G 58.00 Min. 0.40 0.40 20.00 ~ 23.00 3.15 ~ 4.15 8.00 ~ 10.00 0.50 I
T N
S Typical As-Welded Tensile Strength (Min.): •
T psi 110,000 K
Tensile Strength
MPa 760
A Elongation (%) 30
S
E
•
R Standard Sizes: E
O 36” TIG Wire 30 Lb ~ 33 Lb Spool
1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm
M 3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm S
A 1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm •
I 5/32” 4.0 mm W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
92
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM C276 C
•
T S
Description:
AFMC 276 is used for welding nickelchromium-molybdenum alloy (C276) to itself, to steel, to other
nickel-base alloys, and for cladding steel with nickel-chromium-molybdenum weld metal using the GTAW
B and GMAW processes. L
R AFM C276 has exceptional corrosion resistance to a wide variety of chemical processing environments •
Z including strong reducing environments, chloride-contaminated media, chlorine, and sea water. A
AFM C276 has excellent resistance to pitting and stress-corrosion cracking.
T Corresponding Classification in AWS A5.11 is AFM C276 ENiCrMo-4. H

I Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): •
T C Mn Fe P S Si Cu
F
0.02 1.00 4.00 ~ 7.00 0.04 0.03 0.08 0.50
Ni* Co Cr Mo V W Total Others
M C
Bal. 2.50 14.50 ~ 16.50 15.00 ~ 17.00 0.35 3.00 ~ 4.50 0.50
A •
T Typical As-Welded Tensile Strength (Min.): N

S psi 100,000 •
Tensile Strength
T MPa 690 K
Elongation (%) 25
A
Standard Sizes: S
E
36” TIG Wire 30 Lb ~ 33 Lb Spool •
R
1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm E
O
3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm
M 1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm
5/32” 4.0 mm S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
93
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 718 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiFeCr-2
T S
Description:
AFM 718 is used for welding nickelchromium-niobium-molybdenum alloy (718) to itself using the GTAW
processes.
B AFM 718 is a precipitation hardenable nickel-base alloy designed to display exceptionally high yield, tensile L
R and creep-rupture properties at temperatures up to 1300°F (704°C). •
Z The sluggish age-hardening response of AFM 718 permits annealing and welding without spontaneous A
hardening during heating and cooling.
AFM 718 has excellent weldability when compared to the nickel-base superalloys hardened by aluminum and
T titanium. H
I Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): •
T C B Mn Fe P S Si F
0.08 0.003 0.35 Bal. 0.015 0.015 0.35
Cu Ni* Al Ti Cr Nb + Ta Mo
M 0.30 50.00 ~ 55.00 0.20 ~ 0.80 0.65 ~ 1.15 17.00 ~ 21.00 4.75 ~ 5.50 2.80 ~ 3.30 C
A Total Others All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted.
•
G 0.50 * Includes incidental cobalt. I
T Typical As-Welded Tensile Strength (Min.): N

S psi 165,000 •
Tensile Strength
T MPa 1140* K
Elongation (%) 25
* Age-hardened condition: Heat treated at 1325°F
A (718°C) for 8 hours, then furnace cooled to 1150°F
(620°C) at 100°F (56°C) per hour, held for 8 hours, S
E
then air cooled. •
R
E
O
Standard Sizes:
M 36” TIG Wire 30 Lb ~ 33 Lb Spool
S
A 1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm
•
I 3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm
W
N 1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm
5/32” 4.0 mm
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
94
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM Alloy X C
•
T S
Description:
AFM ALLOY X is used for welding nickelchromium-molybdenum alloy to itself, to steel, to other nickel-
base alloys, and for cladding steel with nickel-chromium-molybdenum weld metal using the GTAW, GMAW,
B and PAW processes. L
R AFM ALLOY X is a nonmagnetic, heat and corrosion resistant, nickel-base alloy. •
Z It derives its exceptional properties, up to 2200°F (1200°C), from solid solution strengthening. A

I 0.05 ~ 0.15 1.00 17.00 ~ 20.00 0.04 0.03 1.00 0.50 •
T Ni* Co Cr Mo W Total Others F
Bal. 0.50 ~ 2.50 20.50 ~ 23.00 8.00 ~ 10.00 0.20 ~ 1.00 0.50
M * Includes incidental cobalt.
C
A •
psi 95,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 660
T N
S Standard Sizes: •
T 36” TIG Wire 30 Lb ~ 33 Lb Spool
K
1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm
A 3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm
S
E 1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm
•
R 5/32” 4.0 mm
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
95
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM Alloy W C
•
AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiMo-3
T S
Description:
AFM ALLOY W is used for weld repair of various nickel-, cobalt-, and iron-base alloys and for dissimilar
joining applications of nickel-, cobalt-, and iron-base alloys.
B L
R Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): •
Z C Mn Fe P S Si Cu A
0.12 1.00 4.00 ~ 7.00 0.04 0.03 1.00 0.50
Ni* Co Cr Mo V W Total Others
T Bal. 2.50 4.00 ~ 6.00 23.00 ~ 26.00 0.60 1.00 0.50 H
I •
T All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted.
F

M psi 100,000 C
A Tensile Strength •
MPa 690
G I
Standard Sizes:
T 1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm N
S 3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm •
T 1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm
K
5/32” 4.0 mm
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
96
A T
L O
M B
Stainless Steel Electrodes
C C
B Stainless Steel Coated Electrodes •
AFM E308-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E308-16 99
AFM E308H-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E308H-16 100
B AFM E308L-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E308L-16 101 L
R AFM E309-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E309-16 102 •
Z AFM E309L-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E309L-16 103 A
AFM E309Nb-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E309Nb-16 104
AFM E309Mo-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E309Mo-16 105
T H
AFM E309LMo-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E309LMo-16 106
I •
AFM E310-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E310-16 107
T F
AFM E312-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E312-16 108
AFM E316-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E316-16 109
M AFM E316H-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E316H-16 110 C

A AFM E316L-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E316L-16 111 •
G AFM E317L-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E317L-16 112 I
AFM E320-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E320-16 113
AFM E320LR-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E320LR-16 114
T AFM E330-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E330-16 115 N
S AFM E347-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E347-16 116 •
T AFM E385-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E385-16 117 K
AFM E410-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E410-16 118
A AFM E410NiMo-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E410NiMo-16 119
S
E AFM E2209-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E2209-16 120
•
R AFM E2553-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E2553-16 121
E
O AFM E2594-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E2594-16 122
M
S
A
•
I
W
N Click to Download
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
97
A T
L O
M B
C C
B •
T Order of Mandatory Classification Designators S
AWS/SFA A5.4
B L
R •
Z Designates the classification as to its composition. A
Designates the classification as to usability with respect
to position of welding & type of current.
T - Please see below “Usability Designation”. H
I •
T F
E 308-16
• Welding Current
M DCEP - Direct Current Electrode Positive (DC, Reverse Polarity) C
A •
G I
Usability Designation
T Usability Designation -15. N

The electrodes are usable with dcep (electrode positive) only.
S While use with alternating current is sometimes accomplished, they are not intended to qualify for use with this type of current.
•
T Electrode sizes 5/32 in [4.0 mm] and smaller may be used in all positions of welding. K
Usability Designation -16.
A The covering for these electrodes generally contains readily ionizing elements, such as potassium, in order to stabilize the arc for
welding with alternating current. S
E Electrode sizes 5/32 in [4.0 mm] and smaller may be used in all positions of welding.
•
R
Usability Designation -17. E
O The covering of these electrodes is a modification of the -16 covering in that considerable silica replaces some of the titania of
the -16 covering.
M Since both the -16 and the -17 electrode coverings permit ac operation, both covering types were classified as -16 in the past
because there was no classification alternative until the 1992 revision of AWS A5.4. S
A However, the operational differences between the two types have become significant enough to warrant a separate classification. •
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
98
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E308-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E308-16 is used for welding austenitic stainless of 18/8 types such as AISI 201, 202, 204, 301, 302, 304,
B 305, and 308. L
R •
Z Recommended Amperage (DC+): A
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” H
I AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180 •
T F
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
M 0.08 18.00 ~ 21.00 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.75 0.50 ~ 2.50 C
A Si P S Cu •
G 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75 I
T All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: N

S •
psi 80,000
T Tensile Strength
MPa 550
K
Elongation (%) 35
A
S
E Standard Packaging: •
R All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers. E
O 4 containers per 40 Lb Master Carton.
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
99
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E308H-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E30H8-16 is the same as AFM E308-16 except that the allowable carbon content has been restricted
B to the higher portion of the E308 range. L
Carbon content in the range of 0.04 ~ 0.08 provides higher tensile and creep strengths at elevated
R temperatures.
•
Z AFM E308H-16 is used for welding Type 304H base metal. A

T H
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
I •
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T F
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180
M C
G C Cr Ni Mo Mn I
0.04 ~ 0.08 18.00 ~ 21.00 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.75 0.50 ~ 2.50
Si P S Cu
T 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75 N
S •
T K
A psi 80,000
Tensile Strength S
E MPa 550
•
R Elongation (%) 35
E
O
A
4 containers per 40 Lb Master Carton. •
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
100
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E308L-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E308L-16 has the same composition of the weld metal of AFM E308-16, except for the restricted
B carbon content. L
The 0.04 percent maximum carbon content of weld metal deposited by AFM E308L-16 reduces the possibility
R of intergranular carbide precipitation and thereby increases the resistance to intergranular corrosion without
•
Z the use of stabilizers such as columbium (niobium) or titanium. A
A carbon content of 0.04 percent maximum has been shown to be adequate in weld metal, even though it is
recognized that similar base metal specifications require a 0.03 percent limitation. This low carbon alloy,
T however, is not as strong at elevated temperature as the columbium-stabilized alloys or 304H. H
I •
T Recommended Amperage (DC+): F
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
M Length 12” 14” 14” 14” C
A AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180 •
G I

T C Cr Ni Mo Mn N
S 0.04 18.00 ~ 21.00 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.75 0.50 ~ 2.50 •
T Si P S Cu K
1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75
A All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted.

S
E
All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: •
R
psi 75,000 E
O Tensile Strength
MPa 520
M Elongation (%) 35
S
A
•
I
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
101
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E309-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E309-16 is commonly used for welding similar alloys in wrought or cast form.
It is used for welding dissimilar metals, such as joining Type 304 to carbon steel, welding the clad side of
B L
Type 304 clad steels, and applying stainless steel sheet linings to carbon steel shells.
R Occasionally, AFM E309-16 is used to weld Type 304 and similar base metals where severe corrosion •
Z conditions exist requiring higher alloy weld metal. A

T H
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
I •
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T F
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180
M C
G C Cr Ni Mo Mn I
0.15 22.00 ~ 25.00 12.00 ~ 14.00 0.75 0.50 ~ 2.50
Si P S Cu
T 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75 N
T K
A Tensile Strength
psi 80,000
S
E MPa 550
R
E
O
Standard Packaging:
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
102
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E309L-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E309L-16 has the same composition of weld metal deposited by AFM E309-16 electrodes, except for
B the restricted carbon content. L
The 0.04 percent maximum carbon content of these weld deposits reduces the possibility of intergranular
R carbide precipitation and thereby increases the resistance to intergranular corrosion without the use of
•
Z stabilizers such as columbium (niobium) and titanium. A
AFM E309L-16 is not as strong at elevated temperature as the columbiumstabilized alloys or high carbon
content AFM E309-16 deposits.
T H
T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” F
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
M AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180 C
A •
G I
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
0.04 22.00 ~ 25.00 12.00 ~ 14.00 0.75 0.50 ~ 2.50
T N
Si P S Cu
S •
1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75
T K
A All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: S

E psi 75,000
Tensile Strength •
R MPa 520 E
O Elongation (%) 30
M
A
I
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
103
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E309Nb-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E309Nb-16 has the same composition of weld metal deposited by AFM E309-16, except for
B the addition of columbium (niobium) and a reduction in the carbon limit. L
The columbium (niobium) provides resistance to carbide precipitation and thus increases intergranular
R corrosion resistance and also provides higher strength in elevated temperature service.
•
Z AFM E309Nb-16 electrodes are used also for welding Type 347 clad steels or for the overlay of carbon A
steel.
T E309Nb-XX was formerly named E309Cb-XXw. H

I The change was made conform to the worldwide uniform designation of the element nobium. •
T F
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
M Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm C
A Length 12” 14” 14” 14” •
G AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180 I

T C Cr Ni Mo Mn N
S 0.12 22.00 ~ 25.00 12.00 ~ 14.00 0.75 0.50 ~ 2.50 •
T Si P S Cu Nb (Cb) + Ta K
1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75 0.70 ~ 1.00
S
E
All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: •
R
psi 80,000 E
O Tensile Strength
MPa 550
M Elongation (%) 30
S
A
•
W
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
104
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E309Mo-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E309Mo-16 has the same composition of weld metal deposited by AFM E309-16, except for
B the addition of molybdenum and a small reduction in the carbon limit. L
It is used for welding Type 316 clad steels or for the overlay of carbon steels.
R •
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T H
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
I •
AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180
T F
M C Cr Ni Mo Mn C
A 0.12 22.00 ~ 25.00 12.00 ~ 14.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 0.50 ~ 2.50
•
G Si P S Cu
I
1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75
T N
S All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: •
T psi 80,000 K
Tensile Strength
MPa 550
A Elongation (%) 30
S
E
•
R Standard Packaging: E
O All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers.
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
105
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E309LMo-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E309LMo-16 has the same composition of weld metal deposited by AFM E309Mo-16, except for
the restricted carbon content.
B The lower carbon content of the weld metal reduces the possibility of itergranular corrosion. L
R •
Z E309LMo-XX was formerly named E309MoL-XX. A

T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” H
I Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” F
AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180
M C
A •
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
G I
0.12 22.00 ~ 25.00 12.00 ~ 14.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 0.50 ~ 2.50
Si P S Cu
1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75
T N
T K
psi 75,000
A Tensile Strength
MPa 520 S
R
E
O
Standard Packaging:
4 containers per 40 Lb Master Carton. S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
106
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E310-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E310-16 is used for welding type 310 stainless steel. The weld deposit exhibits the same chemical
analysis and oxidation resistance as the base plate metal.
B L
R •
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” H
I AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180 •
T F
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
M 0.08 ~ 0.20 25.00 ~ 28.00 20.00 ~ 22.50 2.00 ~ 3.00 1.00 ~ 2.50 C
A Si P S Cu •
G 0.75 0.03 0.03 0.75 I
T All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: N

S psi 80,000
•
T Tensile Strength
MPa 550
K
Elongation (%) 30
A
S
R All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers.
E
O 4 containers per 40 Lb Master Carton.
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
107
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E312-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E312-16 was originally designed to weld cast alloys of similar composition.
They have been found to be valuable in welding dissimilar metals, high in nickel.
B AFM E312-16 gives a two-phase weld deposit with substantial amounts of ferrite in an austenitic matrix. L
R Even with considerable dilution by austenite-forming elements, such as nickel, the microstructure remains •
Z two-phase and thus highly resistant to weld metal cracks and fissures. A
Applications should be limited to service temperature below 800°F (420°C) to avoid formation of secondary
brittle phases.
T Recommended Amperage (DC+): H
I Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” •
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180
M C
G C Cr Ni Mo Mn I
0.15 28.00 ~ 32.00 8.00 ~ 10.50 0.75 0.50 ~ 2.50
Si P S Cu
T 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75 N
S •
T K
A Tensile Strength
psi 95,000
S
E MPa 660
•
R Elongation (%) 22
E
O
Standard Packaging:
S
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
108
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E316-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E316-16 is used for welding Type 316 and similar alloys.
They have been used successfully in certain applications involving special base metals for high-temperature
B service. L
R The presence of molybdenum provides creep resistance at elevated temperatures. •
Z A
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
I Length 12” 14” 14” 14” •
T AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180 F

M C Cr Ni Mo Mn C
A 0.08 17.00 ~ 20.00 11.00 ~ 14.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 0.50 ~ 2.50 •
G Si P S Cu I
1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75
T N
S •
T K
psi 75,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 520
A Elongation (%) 30
S
E
•
R
Standard Packaging: E
O All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers.
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
109
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E316H-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E316H-16 is used for welding 316H base metal. It is the same as AFM E316-16 except that
the allowable carbon content has been restricted to the higher portion of the E316 range.
B Carbon content in the range of 0.04 to 0.08 provides higher tensile and creep strengths at elevated L
R temperatures. •
Z A
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
I Length 12” 14” 14” 14” •
T AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180 F

M C Cr Ni Mo Mn C
A 0.04 ~ 0.08 17.00 ~ 20.00 11.00 ~ 14.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 0.50 ~ 2.50 •
G Si P S Cu I
1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75
T All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. N

S •
T K
psi 75,000
A Tensile Strength
MPa 520 S
R
E
O Standard Packaging:
M 4 containers per 40 Lb Master Carton. S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
110
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E316L-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E316L-16 has the same composition as AFM E316-16, except for the restricted carbon content.
The 0.04 percent maximum carbon content of weld metal deposited by these electrodes reduces the possibility
B of intergranular carbide precipitation and thereby increases the resistance to intergranular corrosion without L
R the use of stabilizers such as columbium (niobium) or titanium. •
Z AFM E316L-16 is used principally for welding low carbon, molybdenum-bearing austenitic alloys. A
Tests have shown that 0.04 percent carbon limit in the weld metal gives adequate protection against
intergranular corrosion in most cases.
AFM E316L-16, however, is not as strong at elevated temperatures as Type 316H.
T H
I •
T F
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
M C
AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180
A •
G I
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
T 0.04 17.00 ~ 20.00 11.00 ~ 14.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 0.50 ~ 2.50 N
S Si P S Cu •
T 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75 K
A
S
E All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: •
R psi 70,000
Tensile Strength E
O MPa 490
Elongation (%) 30
M
S
A
I
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
111
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E317L-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E317L-16 is usually used for welding alloys of similar composition and are utilized in severely
corrosive environments (such as those containing haolgens) where crevice and pitting corrosion are of
B concern. L
R The 0.04 percent maximum carbon content of weld metal deposited by these electrodes reduces the possibility •
Z of intergranular carbide precipitation and thereby increases the resistance to intergranular corrosion without A
the use of stabilizers such as columbium (niobium) or titanium.
AFM E317L-16, however, is not as strong at elevated temperatures as the columbium (niobium)-stabilized
alloys or the standard Type 317 weld metal with a higher carbon content.
T H
I •
T F
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
M C
AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180
A •
G I
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
T 0.04 18.00 ~ 21.00 12.00 ~ 14.00 3.00 ~ 4.00 0.50 ~ 2.50
N
S Si P S Cu
•
T 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75
K

A
S
R psi 75,000
Tensile Strength E
O MPa 520
Elongation (%) 30
M
S
A
•
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
112
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E320-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E320-16 is primarily used to weld base metals of similar composition, such as alloy 20,
for applications where resistance to severe corrosion is required for a wide range of chemicals including
B sulfuric and sulfurous acids and their salts. L
R They can be used to weld both castings and wrought alloys of similar composition without postweld heat •
Z treatment. A

T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” H
I Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” F
AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180
M C
A •
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
G I
0.07 19.00 ~ 21.00 32.00 ~ 36.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 0.50 ~ 2.50
Si P S Cu Nb (Cb) + Ta
0.60 0.04 0.03 3.00 ~ 4.00 8 x C Min. 1.00 Max.
T N
T K
psi 80,000
A Tensile Strength
MPa 550 S
E
R
E
O
Standard Packaging:
S
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
113
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E320LR-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E320LR-16 weld metal deposits have the same basic composition as that deposited by AFM E320-16;
however, the elements of C, Si, P, and S are specified at lower maximum levels, and Cb (Nb) and Mn are
B controlled within narrower ranges. L
R These changes reduce the weld metal fissuring (while maintaining the corrosion resistance) frequently •
Z encountered in fully austenitic stainless steel weld metals. A
Consequently, welding practices typically used to deposit ferrite-containing austenitic stainless steel weld
metals can be used.
AFM E320LR-16 has a lower minimum tensile strength than AFM E320-16.
T H
I •
T Recommended Amperage (DC+): F
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
M Length 12” 14” 14” 14” C
A AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180 •
G I
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
T 0.03 19.00 ~ 21.00 32.00 ~ 36.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 1.50 ~ 2.50 N
S Si P S Cu Nb (Cb) + Ta •
T 0.30 0.020 0.015 3.00 ~ 4.00 8 x C Min. 0.40 Max. K
A
S
R psi 75,000
Tensile Strength E
O MPa 520
Elongation (%) 30
M
S
A
I
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
114
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E330-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
The nominal composition of the weld metal is 35 Ni, 15.5 Cr. AFM E330-16 is commonly used where
heat-and scale-resisting properties above 1800°F (980°C) are required.
B However, highsulfur environments may adversely effect performance at elevated temperature. L
R Repairs of defects in alloy castings and the welding of castings and wrought alloys of alloy 330 are the most •
Z common applications. A

T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” H
I Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” F
AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180

A C Cr Ni Mo Mn •
G 0.18 ~ 0.25 14.00 ~ 17.00 33.00 ~ 37.00 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50 I
Si P S Cu
1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75
T N
T K
psi 75,000
A Tensile Strength
MPa 520 S
R
E
O
Standard Packaging:
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
115
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E347-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
The nominal composition of this weld metal is 19.5 Cr, 10 Ni with Cb (Nb) or Cb (Nb) plus Ta added as
a stabilizer.
B Either of these additions reduces the possibility of intergranular chromium carbide precipitation and thus L
R increases resistance to intergranular corrosion. •
Z AFM E347-16 is usually used for welding alloys 347 and 321. A
It is commonly used where maximum resistance to corrosion is required.
T Recommended Amperage (DC+): H

I Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” •
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180
M C
A •
G Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): I
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
0.08 18.00 ~ 21.00 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.75 0.50 ~ 2.50
T Si P S Cu N
S 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75 •
T All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. K

A
psi 75,000 S
E Tensile Strength
MPa 520 •
R
Elongation (%) 30 E
O
M Standard Packaging: S
A All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers.
•
I 4 containers per 40 Lb Master Carton.
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
116
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E385-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E385-16 is used primarily for welding Type 904L materials for the handling of sulphuric acid and many
chloride-containing media.
B AFM E385-16 also may be used to join Type 317L material where improved corrosion resistance in specific L
R media is needed. •
Z It can also be used for joining Type 904L base metal to other grades of stainless. The elements C, Si, P and S are A
specified at lower maximum levels to minimize weld metal hot cracking and fissuring (while maintaining
corrosion resistance) frequently encountered in fully austenitic weld metals.
T H
T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” F
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
M AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180 C
A •
G Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): I
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
0.03 19.50 ~ 21.50 24.00 ~ 26.00 4.20 ~ 5.20 1.00 ~ 2.50
T Si P S Cu
N
S 0.90 0.03 0.02 1.20 ~ 2.00
•
T K
A All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: S

E psi 75,000
Tensile Strength •
R MPa 520
E
O Elongation (%) 30
M
A
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
117
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E410-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
This 12 Cr alloy is an air-hardening steel.
Preheat and postheat treatments are required to achieve welds adequate ductility for many engineering
B purposes. L
R AFM E410-16 is most commonly used to weld alloy 410, but also 403, 405, 414, 416 and 420 alloys. •
Z It is also used for surfacing of carbon steels to resist corrosion, erosion, or abrasion. A

T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” H
I Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” F
AMPS 50 ~ 75 80 ~ 115 115 ~ 160 150 ~ 210

A C Cr Ni Mo Mn
•
G 0.12 11.00 ~ 13.50 0.70 0.75 1.00
I
Si P S Cu
0.90 0.04 0.03 0.75
T N
T K
psi 75,000
A Tensile Strength
MPa 450 S
R
E
O Heat Treatment:
Heat to 1350 to 1400°F(730 to 760°C), hold for one hour, furnace cool at a rate of 100°F(60°C) per hour
M to 600°F(315°C) and air cool to ambient.
S
A
•
I
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
118
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E410NiMo-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E410NiMo-16 is used for welding ASTM CA6NM castings or similar materials, as well as light gage
Type 410, 410S, and 405 base metals.
B Weld metal deposited by AFM E410NiMo-16 is modified to contain less chromium and more nickel than weld L
R metal deposits by AFM E410-16. •
Z The objective is to eliminate ferrite in the microstructure, as ferrite has a deleterious effect on mechanical A
properties of this alloy. Final postweld heat treatment should not exceed 1150°F (620°C).
Higher temperatures may result in rehardening due to untempered martensite in the microstructure after
cooling to room temperature.
T H
T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” F
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
M AMPS 50 ~ 75 80 ~ 115 115 ~ 160 150 ~ 210 C
A •
G I
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
T 0.06 11.00 ~ 12.50 4.00 ~ 5.00 0.40 ~ 0.70 1.00 N
S Si P S Cu •
T 0.90 0.04 0.03 0.75 K
A
All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: S
E
•
R psi 110,000
Tensile Strength E
O MPa 760
Elongation (%) 15
M
Heat Treatment: S
A
Heat to 1100 to 1150°F (595 to 620°C), hold for one hour, and air cool to ambient. •
I
W
N
Standard Packaging:
I All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers.
4 containers per 40 Lb Master Carton. F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
119
A T
L O
M B
Stainless Steel Electrode
C AFM E2209-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E2209-16 is used primarily to weld duplex stainless steels which contain approximately 22 percent of
chromium (grade 2205).
B Weld metal deposited by AFM E2209-16 has “duplex” microstructure consisting of an austenite-ferrite matrix. L
R It combines increased tensile strength with improved resistance to pitting corrosive attack and to stress •
Z corrosion cracking. A

T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” H
I Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” F
AMPS 50 ~ 80 80 ~ 120 100 ~ 160 150 ~ 210
M C
G C Cr Ni Mo Mn I
0.04 21.50 ~ 23.50 8.50 ~ 10.50 2.50 ~ 3.50 0.50 ~ 2.00
Si P S N Cu
T 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.08 ~ 0.20 0.75 N
T K
psi 100,000
A Tensile Strength
MPa 690 S
E
R
E
O
Standard Packaging:
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
120
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E2553-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E2553-16 is primarily used to weld duplex stainless steels which contain approximately 25 percent of
chromium.
B Weld metal deposited by AFM E2553-16 has “duplex” microstructure consisting of an austenite-ferrite matrix. L
R It combines increased tensile strength with improved resistance to pitting corrosive attack and to stress •
Z corrosion cracking. A

T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” H
I Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” F
AMPS 50 ~ 75 80 ~ 115 115 ~ 160 150 ~ 210
M C
G C Cr Ni Mo Mn I
0.06 24.00 ~ 27.000 6.50 ~ 8.50 2.90 ~ 3.90 0.50 ~ 1.50
Si P S N Cu
T 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.10 ~ 0.25 1.50 ~ 2.50 N
S •
T K
psi 100,000
A Tensile Strength
MPa 760 S
E
R
E
O
Standard Packaging:
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
121
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E2594-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
Superduplex grade 2594 electrodes provide matching chemistry and mechanical property characteristics
to wrought superduplex alloys such as 2507 and Zeron 100 as well as superduplex casting alloys (ASTM A890).
B The welding wire is overalloyed 2 - 3 percent in Nickel to provide the optimum ferrite/austenite ratio L
R in the finished weld. This structure results in high tensile/yield strength and superior resistance to SCC •
Z and pitting corrosion. A
Typical Chemical Composition (%):
T C Mn Si Fe Cr Ni H
I 0.02 1.00 1.00 Bal. 25.50 9.25 •
T Cu Mo S/P N PREN F
0.50 3.90 0.01 / 0.025 0.250 40 Min.
M C
A Typical Mechanical Properties of Weld Metal: •
G psi 130,000 I
Tensile Strength
MPa 900
psi 101,000
T Yield Strength N
MPa 695
S Elongation 4 D (%) 31 •
T Reduction of Area (%) 50 K
Impact @ 20 o C > 27 J
A Hardness HRC* 28 ~ 30
S
E * Meets NACE MRO 175w
•
R
E
O Standard Packaging:
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
122
A T
L O
M B
Click to Download
Stainless Steel Wires
C C
B •
T S
AFM ER308 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER308 125
AFM ER308H AWS/SFA A5.9 ER308H 125
B AFM ER308L AWS/SFA A5.9 ER308L 126 L

R AFM ER308LSi AWS/SFA A5.9 ER308LSi 126 •
Z AFM ER309 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER309 127 A
AFM ER309L AWS/SFA A5.9 ER309L 127
AFM ER309LSi AWS/SFA A5.9 ER309LSi 128
T AFM ER310 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER310 128 H
I AFM ER312 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER312 129 •
T AFM ER316 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER316 129 F
AFM ER316H AWS/SFA A5.9 ER316H 130
M C
AFM ER316LSi AWS/SFA A5.9 ER316LSi 131
A •
G I
T AFM ER347Si AWS/SFA A5.9 ER347Si 133 N

S AFM ER320 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER320 133 •
T AFM ER320LR AWS/SFA A5.9 ER320LR 134 K
AFM ER385 (904L) AWS/SFA A5.9 ER385 134
AFM ER409Nb AWS/SFA A5.9 ER409Nb 135
A
AFM ER410 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER410 135 S
E
AFM ER410NiMo AWS/SFA A5.9 ER410NiMo 136 •
R
AFM ER420 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER420 136 E
O
M AFM ER630 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER630 137
S
A AFM ER2209 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER2209 138
•
I AFM ER2594 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER2594 139
W
N Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG Wires 140 ~ 141
I Welding Tips for Stainless Steel 142 F

N Welding Tips for Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG Wires 143 C
F
W
O
123
A T
L O
M B
C C
B •
T Order of Mandatory Classification Designators S
AWS/SFA A5.9
Designates solid wires that maybe used as electrodes or rods.

B L
R •
Z Designates the normal chemical composition of the filler metal. A
Denotes carbon content restricted to the upper part of the range

T that is specified for the standard grade of the specific filler H
metal.
I •
T F
ER 308H
M C
A •
G Denotes carbon content restricted to the lower part of the range I
that is specified for the corresponding grade of filler metal.
T ER 308L N
S •
T K
Denotes low residuals.

A
S
E
•
R ER 308LR E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
124
A T
L O
M B
Stainless Steel Wire
C AFM ER308 C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
AFM ER308 is used for welding alloys 18-8, 19-9, and 20-10 such as AISI 201, 202, 204, 301, 302,
& 304 grades.
B It is most often used to weld base metals of similar composition, in particular, Type 304. L
R •
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
0.08 19.50 ~ 22.00 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50
T Si P S N Cu H
I 0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75 •
T All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted.
F
M S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER308H N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
This classification is the same as AFM ER308, except that the allowable carbon content has been restricted to
the higher portion of the 308 range.
A Carbon content in the range of 0.04-0.08 provides higher strength at elevated temperatures
S
E AFM ER308H is used for welding 304H base metal.
•
R
Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): E
O
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
0.04 ~ 0.08 19.50 ~ 22.00 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.50 1.00 ~ 2.50
M
Si P S N Cu S
A
0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75 •
I
W
N All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted.
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
125
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER308L C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
This classification is the same as AFM ER308, except for the carbon content.
Low carbon (0.03 percent max.) in AFM ER308L reduces the possibility of intergranular carbide precipitation.
B This increases the resistance to intergranular corrosion without the use of stabilizers such as columbium L
R (niobium) or titanium. •
Z Strength of AFM ER308L, however, is less than that of the columbium (niobium)-stabilized alloys or A
AFM ER308H at elevated temperatures.
T Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): H

I C Cr Ni Mo Mn •
T 0.03 19.50 ~ 22.00 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50 F
Si P S N Cu
0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
M All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER308LSi N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
This classification is the same as AFM ER308L, except for the higher silicon content.
This improves the usability of the filler metal in the gas metal arc welding process.
A If the dilution by the base metal produces a low ferrite or fully austenitic weld, the crack sensitivity of
S
E the weld is somewhat higher than that of a lower silicon content weld metal.
•
R
O
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
0.03 19.50 ~ 22.00 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50
M
Si P S N Cu S
A
0.65 ~ 1.00 0.03 0.03 - 0.75 •
I
W
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
126
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER309 C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
AFM ER309 is used to weld alloy 309.
Occasionally, it is used to weld Type 304 and similar base metals where severe corrosion conditions exist
B requiring higher alloy weld metal. L
R It is also used in dissimilar metal welds, such as joining Type 304 to carbon steel, welding the clad side of •
Z Type 304 clad steels, and applying stainless steel sheet linings to carbon steel shells. A

T C Cr Ni Mo Mn H
I 0.12 23.00 ~ 25.00 12.00 ~ 14.00 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50 •
T Si P S N Cu F
0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
M S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER309L N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
This classification is the same as AFM ER309, except for the carbon content. Low carbon (0.03 percent max.)
in AFM ER309L reduces the possibility of intergranular carbide precipitation.
A This increases the resistance to intergranular corrosion without the use of stabilizers such as columbium
S
E (niobium) or titanium.
Strength of AFM ER309L, however, may not be as great at elevated temperatures as that of the columbium •
R
(niobium)-stabilized alloys or AFM ER309. E
O
M C Cr Ni Mo Mn S
A 0.03 19.50 ~ 22.00 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50 •
I Si P S N Cu W
N 0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
I All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted.

F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
127
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER309LSi C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
The classification is the same as AFM ER309L, except for higher silicon content.
This improves the usability of the filler metal in the gas metal arc welding processes.
B If the dilution by the base metal produces a low ferrite or fully austenitic weld, the crack sensitivity of L
R the weld is somewhat higher than that of a lower silicon content weld metal. •
Z A
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
0.12 23.00 ~ 25.00 12.00 ~ 14.00 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50
T H
Si P S N Cu
I •
0.65 ~ 1.00 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
T F
M S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER310 N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
AFM ER310 is used for welding 310 stainless.
It is also used for welding 304 clad and stainless overlay on mild and carbon steels.
A It provides high strength and scaling resistance at elevated temperatures.
S
E
Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): •
R
C Cr Ni Mo Mn E
O
0.08 ~ 0.15 25.00 ~ 28.00 20.00 ~ 22.50 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50
M Si P S N Cu
0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75 S
A
•
I All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted.
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
128
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER312 C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
AFM ER312 was originally designed to weld cast alloys of similar composition.
It also has been found to be valuable in welding dissimilar metals such as carbon steel to stainless steel,
B particularly those grades high in nickel. L
R AFM ER312 gives a two-phase weld deposit with substantial percentages of ferrite in an austenite matrix. •
Z Even with considerable dilution by austenite-forming elements such as nickel, the microstructure remains A
two-phase and thus highly resistant to weld metal cracks and fissures.

T C Cr Ni Mo Mn H
I 0.15 28.00 ~ 32.00 8.00 ~ 10.50 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50 •
T Si P S N Cu F
0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75

S
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER316 N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
AFM ER316 is used for welding Type 316 and similar alloys.
It has been used successfully in certain applications involving special base metals for high-temperature service.
A The presence of molybdenum provides creep resistance at elevated temperatures and pitting resistance in
S
E a halide atmosphere.
•
R
O
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
M 0.08 18.00 ~ 20.00 11.00 ~ 14.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 1.00 ~ 2.50
Si P S N Cu S
A
0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75 •
I
W
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
129
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER316H C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
AFM ER316H is the same as AFM ER316, except that the allowable carbon content has been restricted to
the higher portion of the 316 range.
B Carbon content in the range of 0.04 to 0.08 wt.% provides higher strength at elevated temperatures. L
R It is used to weld 316H base metal. •
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
0.04 ~ 0.08 18.00 ~ 20.00 11.00 ~ 14.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 1.00 ~ 2.50
T H
Si P S N Cu
I •
0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
T F
M S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER316L N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
This classification is the same as AFM ER316, except for the carbon content. Low carbon (0.03 percent max.)
in AFM ER316L reduces the possibility of intergranular chromium carbide precipitation and thereby increases
A the resistance to intergranular corrosion without the use of stabilizers such as columbium (niobium) or
S
E titanium.
It is primarily used for welding lowcarbon molybdenum-bearing austenitic alloys. •
R
AFM ER316L, however, is not as strong at elevated temperature as the columbium (niobium)-stabilized alloys E
O
or Type ER316H.
M Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%):
S
A C Cr Ni Mo Mn
•
I 0.03 18.00 ~ 20.00 11.00 ~ 14.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 1.00 ~ 2.50
W
N Si P S N Cu
0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
I All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
130
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER316LSi C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
This classification is the same as AFM ER316L, except for the higher silicon content.
This improves the usability of the fill metal in the gas metal arc welding process.
B If the dilution by the base metal produces a low ferrite or fully austenitic weld, the crack sensitivity is L
R somewhat higher than that of a lower silicon content weld metal. •
Z A
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
T 0.04 ~ 0.08 18.00 ~ 20.00 11.00 ~ 14.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 1.00 ~ 2.50 H
I Si P S N Cu •
T 0.65 ~ 1.00 0.03 0.03 - 0.75 F
M S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER317L N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
AFM ER317L is used to weld 316 and 317 base metals. Low carbon (0.03 percent max.) in AFM ER317L
reduces the possibility of intergranular carbide precipitation.
A This increases the resistance to intergranular corrosion without the use of stabilizers such as columbium
S
E (niobium) or titanium.
AFM ER317L, however, may not be as strong at elevated temperature as the columbium (niobium)-stabilized •
R
alloys or Type 317. E
O

S
A C Cr Ni Mo Mn
•
I 0.03 18.50 ~ 20.50 13.00 ~ 15.00 3.00 ~ 4.00 1.00 ~ 2.50
W
N Si P S N Cu
0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
131
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER330 C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
AFM ER330 is commonly used where heat and scale resisting properties above 1800°F (980°C) are required,
except in high-sulphur environments, as these environments may adversely affect elevated temperature
B performance. L
R Repairs of defects in alloy castings and the welding of castings and wrought alloys of similar composition are •
Z the most common applications. A
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
T 0.18 ~ 0.25 15.00 ~ 17.00 34.00 ~ 37.00 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50 H
I Si P S N Cu •
T 0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75 F
M S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER347 N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
With the addition of Cb (Nb), the possibility of intergranular chromium carbide precipitation is reduced and
thus susceptibility to intergranular corrosion.
A AFM ER347 is usually used for welding alloys 321 and 347.
S
E Although Cb (Nb) is the stabilizing element usually specified in ER347, it should be recognized that tantalum
(Ta) is also present. •
R
Ta and Cb (Nb) are almost equally effective in stabilizing carbon and in providing high-temperature strength. E
O
If dilution by the base metal produces a low ferrite or fully austenitic weld metal, the crack sensitivity of
the weld may increase substantially.
M
Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): S
A
C Cr Ni Mo Mn •
I
0.08 19.00 ~ 21.50 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50 W
N
Si P S Cu Nb + Ta
I 0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 0.75 10 x C Min. / 1.00 Max.
F
N All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. S
C
F M D
W
O S
132
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER347Si C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
AFM ER347Si is the same as AFM ER347, except for the higher silicon content.
This improves the usability of the filler metal in the gas metal arc welding process.
B If the dilution by the base metal produces a low ferrite or fully austenitic weld, the crack sensitivity of L
R the weld is somewhat higher than that of a lower silicon content weld metal. •
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
0.08 19.00 ~ 21.50 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50
T H
Si P S Cu Nb + Ta
I •
0.65 ~ 1.00 0.03 0.03 0.75 10 x C Min. / 1.00 Max.
T F
M S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER320 N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
AFM ER320 is primarily used to weld base metals of similar composition, such as alloy 20, for applications
where resistance to severe corrosion is required for a wide range of chemicals including sulfuric and sulfurous
A acids and their salts.
S
E They can be used to weld both castings and wrought alloys of similar composition without postweld heat
treatment. •
R
E
O Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%):
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
M 0.07 19.00 ~ 21.00 32.00 ~ 36.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 2.50 S
A Si P S Cu Nb + Ta •
I 0.60 0.03 0.03 3.00 ~ 4.00 8 x C Min. / 1.00 Max. W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
133
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER320LR C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: S
AFM ER320LR weld metal deposits have the same basic composition as that deposited by AFM ER320;
however, the elements of C, Si, P, and S are specified at lower maximum levels, and Cb (Nb) and Mn are
B controlled within narrower ranges. L
R These changes reduce the weld metal fissuring (while maintaining the corrosion resistance) frequently •
Z encountered in fully austenitic stainless steel weld metals. A
Consequently, welding practices typically used for austenitic stainless steel weld metals containing ferrite can
be used in bare filler metal welding processes such as gas tungsten arc and gas metal arc.
AFM ER320LR has been used successfully in submerged arc overlay welding, but it may be prone to cracking
T when used for joining base metal by the submerged arc process. H
I AFM ER320LR has a lower minimum tensile strength than AFM ER320. •
T Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): F
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
0.025 19.00 ~ 21.00 32.00 ~ 36.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 1.50 ~ 2.00
M Si P S Cu Nb + Ta S C
A 0.15 0.015 0.02 3.00 ~ 4.00 8 x C Min. / 1.00 Max.
M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER385 (904L) N

S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
AFM ER385 is used primarily for welding of ASTM B625, B673, B674, and B677 (UNSN08904) materials for
the handling of sulfuric acid and many chloride containing media.
A It may also be used to join Type 317L material where improved corrosion resistance in specific media is
S
E needed.
AFM ER385 may be used for joining UNS N08904 base metals to other grades of stainless steel. •
R
The elements C, S, P, and Si are specified at lower maximum levels to minimize weld metal hot cracking, and E
O
fissuring (while maintaining corrosion resistance) frequently encountered in fully austenitic weld metals.
S
A C Cr Ni Mo Mn
•
I 0.025 19.50 ~ 21.50 24.00 ~ 26.00 4.20 ~ 5.20 1.00 ~ 2.50
W
N Si P S N Cu
0.50 0.02 0.03 - 1.20 ~ 2.00
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
134
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER409Nb C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
AFM ER409Nb is the same as ER409 except that niobium (columbium)is used instead of titanium to achieve
similar results.
B Oxidation losses across the arc are generally lower. L
R It is used to weld 409 stainless steel. •
Z The greatest usage is for applications where thin stock is fabricated into exhaust system components. A
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
T 0.08 10.50 ~ 13.50 0.60 0.50 0.80 H
I Si P S Cu Nb + Ta •
T 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75 10 x C Min. / 1.00 Max. F
M S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER410 N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
This 12 Cr alloy (wt.%) is an air-hardening steel.
Preheat and postheat treatments are required to achieve welds of adequate ductility for many engineering
A purposes.
S
E AFM ER410 is used to welding 403, 405, 410, and 416 stainless.
It is also used for deposition of overlays on carbon steels to resist corrosion, erosion, or abrasion. •
R
E
O Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%):
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
M 0.12 11.50 ~ 13.50 0.60 0.75 0.60 S
A Si P S N Cu
•
I 0.50 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
135
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER410NiMo C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
AFM ER410NiMo is primarily designed for welding ASTM CA6NM castings or similar material, as well as
light gage 410, 410S, and 405 base metals.
B AFM ER410NiMo is modified to contain less chromium and more nickel to eliminate ferrite L
R in the microstructure as it has a deleterious effect on mechanical properties. •
Z Final postweld heat treatment should not exceed 1150°F (620°C), as higher temperatures may result in A
rehardening due to untempered martensite in the microstructure after cooling to room temperature.
T C Cr Ni Mo Mn H
I 0.06 11.00 ~ 12.50 4.00 ~ 5.00 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.60 •
T Si P S N Cu F
0.50 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
M S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER420 N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
AFM ER420 is similar to AFM ER410, except for slightly higher chromium and carbon contents.
AFM ER420 is used for many surfacing operations requiring corrosion resistance provided by 12 percent
A chromium along with somewhat higher hardness than weld metal deposited by AFM ER410. S
E This increases wear resistance. •
R
O
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
M 0.25 ~ 0.40 12.00 ~ 14.00 0.60 0.75 0.60
S
A Si P S N Cu
•
I 0.50 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
W
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
136
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER430 C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
This is a 16 Cr (wt.%) alloy. The composition is balanced by providing sufficient chromium to give adequate
corrosion resistance for the usual applications, and yet retain sufficient ductility in the heat-treated condition.
B (Excessive chromium will result in lower ductility.) L
R Welding with AFM ER430 usually requires preheating and postweld heat treatment. •
Z Optimum mechanical properties and corrosion resistance are obtained only when the weldment is heat treated A
following the welding operation.

T H
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
I •
0.10 15.50 ~ 17.00 0.60 0.75 0.60
T F
Si P S N Cu
0.50 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
M All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. S C

A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER630 N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
AFM ER630 is designed primarily for welding ASTM A564 Type 630 (alloy 17-4PH) and some other
precipitation-hardening stainless steels.
A The composition is modified to prevent the formation of ferrite networks in the martensitic microstructure S
E which have a deleterious effect on mechanical properties. •
R Dependent on the application and weld size, the weld metal may be used either as-welded, welded
E
O and precipitation hardened, or welded, solution treated, and precipitation hardened.

S
A C Cr Ni Mo Mn
•
I 0.05 16.00 ~ 16.75 4.50 ~ 5.00 0.75 0.25 ~ 0.75
W
N Si P S Cu Nb + Ta
0.75 0.03 0.03 0.75 0.15 ~ 0.30
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
137
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER2209 C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
AFM ER2209 is used primarily to weld duplex stainless steels which contain approximately 22 percent of
chromium such as UNS S31803 (alloy 2205).
B Deposits have “duplex” microstructures consisting of an austenite-ferrite matrix. L
R AFM ER2209 is characterized by high tensile strength, resistance to stress corrosion cracking, and improved •
Z resistance to pitting. A

T H
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
I •
0.03 21.50 ~ 23.50 7.50 ~ 9.50 2.50 ~ 3.50 0.50 ~ 2.00
T F
Si P S N Cu
0.90 0.03 0.03 0.08 ~ 0.20 0.75

A •
G I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
138
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER2594 C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
Superduplex grade 2594 electrodes provide matching chemistry and mechanical property characteristics
to wrought superduplex alloys such as 2507 and Zeron 100 as well as superduplex casting alloys (ASTM A890).
B The welding wire is overalloyed 2 - 3 percent in Nickel to provide the optimum ferrite/austenite ratio in L
R the finished weld. This structure results in high tensile/yield strength and superior resistance to SCC •
Z and pitting corrosion. A
Typical Chemical Composition (%):

T C Mn Si Fe Cr Ni H
I 0.02 1.00 1.00 Bal. 25.50 9.25 •
T Cu Mo / W S/P N PREN F
0.50 3.9 / 0.04 0.01 / 0.025 0.250 40 Min.
M C
A Typical Mechanical Properties of Weld Metal: •
G psi 123,000 I
Tensile Strength
MPa 850
psi 94,000
T Yield Strength N
MPa 650
S Elongation 4 D (%) 28 •
T Impact @ 20 o C > 27 J K
Hardness HRC* 23 ~ 28
A * Meets NACE MRO175
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
139
A T
L O
M B
Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG Wire
C
B
AFM Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG C
•
T Applications: S
AFM Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG is used for butt welds in piping systems.
GTAW process has been recommended in welding of the first layer (root pass).
B Conventional GTAW requires the use of Argon Gas for the back-bead shielding to prevent oxidation. L
R AFM Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG can be used in place of the conventional GTAW process without •
the use of argon gas.
Z One of the advantages in using AFM Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG is the ability to cut costs by not having
A
to use Argon Gas.
T Characteristics: H
I When AFM Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG is melted and slag is produced, satisfactory back-beads are •
T obtained while the slag protects the bead from being oxidized by the atmosphere. F
The slag can then be easily removed as it would in the SMAW process.
M Typical Chemical Composition (%): C

A Product C Si Mn P S Ni Cr Mo •
G AFM 308LFC 0.018 0.35 1.71 0.022 0.007 10.12 20.9 - I
AFM 309LFC 0.025 0.37 1.76 0.021 0.006 13.14 23.6 -
AFM 316LFC 0.020 0.37 1.73 0.021 0.007 12.31 19.3 2.10
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
140
A T
L O
M B
Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG Wire
C C
B Subject: •
Using Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG Wire for GTAW welding in accordance with
T the ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code.
S
B AFM Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG is not included in the AWS and ASME specilications, however, it can L
R be qualified for Code use. •
Z ASME B & PV Code, Section IX, Welding & Brazing Qualilications, permits the usc of any filler metal as long A
as it is defined by the Code or in the welding procedure specification (WPS).
The user may specify the filler metal by a chemical composition range.
This range tnay be determined by any of the following:
T H
I • from the chemical analysis of the weld deposit taken from the procedure qualification test coupon or, •
T • from the chemical composition as reported by the manufacturer’s or supplier’s certificate of compliance. F
In lieu of an A-number designation, the nominal chetmical composition of the weld deposit shall be indicated
on the WPS and on the procedure qualification record.
M C
Designation on nominal chemical composition may also be accomplished by using the manufacturer’s trade
A designation. •
G This procedure is discussed in ASME Sect ion IX, QW-404.5. I
By satisfying the above mentioned criteria one may use flux coated GTAW filler metal for boilers
T (ASME Section 1), pressure vessels (ASME Section VIII), piping (ANSI/ASME B31.1 ), or a variety of N
weldments fabricated to numerous other national standards.
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
141
A T
L O
M B
Welding Tips for Stainless Steel
C Welding Tips for Stainless Steel C
B •
T I. (GTAW - Gas Tungsten Arc Welding) S
When using stainless steels with the gas tungsten arc process, direct current electrode negative
(dcen) is preferred.
For base metal up to 1/16 in. (1.6mm) thick, argon is the preferred shielding gas because there is
B less tendency to melt through these lighter thicknesses. L
R For greater thickness, or for automatic welding, mixtures of helium and argon are recommended •
Z because of the greater penetration and better surface appearance. A
Argon gas for shielding may also be used and will give satisfactory results in most cases, but a somewhat higher
amperage will be required.
T II. (GMAW - Gas Metal Arc Welding) H

I When using the gas metal arc welding process in which the filler metal is employed as an electrode, direct current •
electrode positive (dcep) is most commonly used.
T The shielding gas for spray transfer is usually argon, with or without minor additions of oxygen. F
For short circuiting transfer, shielding gases composed of helium plus additions of oxygen and carbon dioxide
often are used.
M The minimum thickness that can be welded is approximately 1/8 to 3/16 in. (3.2 to 4.8mm). C
However, thinner sections can be joined if a backing is used.
A The higher silicon levels improve the washing and wetting behavior of the weld metal. •
G For instance, for increases from 0.30 to 0.65 percent silicon, the improvement is pronounced; for increases from 0.65 I
to 1.0 % silicon, further improvement is experienced but is less pronounced.
III. (SAW - Submerged Arc Welding)

T For submerged arc welding, direct current electrode positive (dcep) or alternating current (ac) may be used. N
S Basic or neutral fluxes are generally recommended in order to minimize silicon pickup and the oxidation of chromium •
T and other elements. K
When welding with fluxes that are not basic or neutral, electrodes having a silicon content below the normal 0.30%
minimum may be desired for submerged arc welding.
A Such active fluxes may contribute some silicon to the weld metal.
In this case, the higher silicon does not significantly improve the washing and wetting action of the weld metal.ww S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
142
A T
L O
M B
Flux Coated Stainless Steel Wire
C Welding Tips for Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG Wires C

B •
T If the pieces to be welded with AFM flux coated tig wire are thicker than 12 Ga, they must be beveled. S
The amperage to be used will depend on the thickness of the weldment and diameter of the tungsten.
The gap between the two pieces to be joined must be at least as wide as the diameter of the flux coated tig wire being
B used. L
R The base materials that are being joined must also be tacked at enough places, so that the gap remains open. •
Z If the gap “sucks” closed you will not succeed with AFM Flux Coated TIG Wire. A
The gap is very important in this process.
When the process is started always begin on a tack.

T In using AFM Flux Coated TIG Wire, you will see an orange puddle. and not the clear puddle as you would with bare H
I stainless tig wire. •
We recommend you use a keyhole technique with AFM Flux Coated TIG Wire.
T Do not dip the rod too fast, and you must usc the keyhole or you will not get the coverage on the backside. F
If you dip too fast, the filler metal will lay and freeze on the top only.
The keyhole is also very important in this process.
M Welding in all positions is possible with this wire. To weld out of ’ position with this wire, you will need to vary your C
amperage.
A •
G I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
143
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C C
B For Carbon Steel •
AFM E70C-6M AWS/SFA A5.18 E70C-6M 152
AFM E71T-1 (Unbaked) AWS/SFA A5.20 E71T-1 153
B AFM E71T-1 (Baked) AWS/SFA A5.20 E71T-1 154 L
R AFM E71T-11 AWS/SFA A5.20 E71T-11 155 •
Click to Download
Z AFM E71TGS AWS/SFA A5.20 E71T-GS 156 A
T H
For Heat-Resisting Steel
I •
T F
AFM E81T1-B2 AWS/SFA A5.29 E81T1-B2C 157
AFM E91T1-B3 AWS/SFA A5.29 E91T1-B2C 158
M C
A •
G For Low Alloy Steel I
AFM E81T1-Ni1 AWS/SFA A5.29 E81T1-Ni1M 159
T AFM E81T1-Ni2 AWS/SFA A5.29 E81T1-Ni2C / E81T1-Ni2M 160 N
S •
T K
For Stainless Steel
A AFM Product AWS Classification Page
S
E AFM 308HT1-1 AWS/SFA A5.22 E308HT1-1/-4 161
•
R AFM 308LT1-1 AWS/SFA A5.22 E308LT1-1/-4 162
E
O AFM 309LMoT1-1 AWS/SFA A5.22 E309LMoT1-1/-4 163
AFM 309LT1-1 AWS/SFA A5.22 E309LT1-1/-4 164
M AFM 316LT1-1 AWS/SFA A5.22 E316LT1-1/-4 165 S
A AFM 317LT1-1 AWS/SFA A5.22 E317LT1-1/-4 166 •
I Click to Download
AFM 347T1-1 AWS/SFA A5.22 E347T1-1 167 W
N
Stainless Steel Flux Cored Wires 168 ~ 169
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
144
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires

B AWS/SFA A5.18 •
T Designates use as either an electrode or rod (ER), S
or use only as an electrode (E).
Indicates in 1000 psi increments, the minimum tensile strength

B of the weld metal produced by the electrode when tested L
R according to the A5.18 specification. •
- In this case, 70 indicates 70 000 psi.
Z A
Indicates whether the filler metal is solid (S) or composite (C).
T Indicates the chemical composition of a solid electrode or H

the chemical composition of the weld metal produced by
I a composite electrode.
•
T The use of the “GS” suffix designates filler metals intended for F
single pass applications only.
M Optional supplemental diffusible hydrogen designator. C

A •
G ER 70 S - X N HZ I
E 70 C - X Y N HZ
T ER 48 S - X N HZ The letter “N” as a suffix to a classification indicates that N
S E 48 C - X Y N HZ the weld metal is intended for the core belt region of nuclear
reactor vessels, as described in the Annex to the specification.
•
T This suffix changes the limits on the phosphorus and copper K
as follows:
P = 0.012% maximum / Cu = 0.08% maximum
A
S
E
•
R
E
O Indicates the type of shielding gas used for classification of
composite electrodes.
Carbon dioxide (AWS A5.32 Class SG-C) is indicated by “C”
M and 75–80% Argon/balance CO2
(AWS A5.32 Class SG-AC-Y, where Y is 20 to 25) is indicated S
A by “M.” •
I
W
N Indicates in 10 MPa increments, the minimum tensile strength
of the weld metal produced by the electrode when tested
according to the A5.18M specification.
I - In this case, 48 indicates 480 MPa. F
N
C
F
W
O
145
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires

B AWS/SFA A5.20 •
T Designates an electrode. S
Tensile strength designator.
For A5.20 this designator indicates the minimum tensile strength
(when multiplied by 10,000 psi) of the weld metal when the weld is
B made in the manner prescribed by this specification. L
For A5.20M two digits are used to indicate the minimum tensile
R strength (when multiplied by 10 MPa). •
Z Position designator. This designator is either “0” or “1.” A
“0” is for flat and horizontal positions only.
“1” is for all positions (flat, horizontal, vertical with downward
progression and/or vertical with upward progression and overhead).
T This designator identifies the electrode as a flux cored electrode. H
I Usability designator. •
T This designator is some number from 1 through 14 or the letter “G” F
(or “GS”).
This designator refers to the usability of the electrode with
requirements for polarity and general operating characteristics.
The letter “G” indicates that the polarity and general operating
M characteristics are not specified. C
A An “S” is used after the “G” to indicate that the electrode is suitable
only for single pass welding.
•
G Shielding gas designator.2 I
Indicates the type of shielding gas used for classification.
The letter “C” indicates that the electrode is classified using 100% CO2
shielding gas.
T The letter “M” indicates that the electrode is classified using 75–80% N
Argon/balance CO2 shielding gas.
S When no designator appears in this position, it indicates that •
T the electrode being classified is self-shielded and that no external K
shielding gas was used.
EXXT - XX-JXHX Optional Supplemental Designators3 (J, X, HX)

A Optional supplemental diffusible hydrogen designator. S
E The letter “D” or “Q” when present in this position indicates that •
R the weld metal will meet supplemental mechanical property
requirements with welding done using low heat input, fast cooling rate E
O procedures and using high heat input, slow cooling rate procedures as
prescribed on page 128.
M The letter “J” when present in this position designates that
the electrode meets the requirements for improved toughness and will S
A deposit weld metal with Charpy V-Notch properties of at least 20 ft∙lbf
•
I at –40°F [27J at –40°C] when the welds are made in a manner
prescribed by this specification. W
N Notes:
1. The combination of these designators constitutes the flux cored electrode classification.
2. See AWS A5.32/A5.32M.
I 3. These designators are optional and do not constitute a part of the flux cored electrode classification.
F
N
C
F
W
O
146
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C C
B AWS/SFA A5.22 •
T S
Indicates a welding electrode.
Designates a composition of the weld metal.

B L
R Designates a flux cored welding electrode.
•
Z Designates recommended position of welding: A
0 = flat and horizontal; 1 = all position
Designates the external shielding gas to be employed during

T welding specified for classification. H
I The letter “J” when present in this position designates that
•
T the electrode meets the requirement of toughness and will deposit F
weld metal with Charpy V-Notch properties of at least 0.015 in
[0.38 mm] lateral expansion at -320 ºF [-196 ºC]
E XXX TX - X J
M C
A •
G I
R XXX T1 - 5
Designates the external shielding gas to be employed during welding.
T Type of shielding gas is 1005 Argon SG-A. N
S •
Designates recommended position of welding: 1 = all position.
T K
Designates a flux cored welding rod.
A
Designates composition of the weld metal. S
E
•
R Indicates a welding rod.
E
O
M
S
A This symbol indicates metal cored electrode.
•
I
N EC XXX W
This symbol indicates the alloy content of the deposited weld metal.
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
147
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires

B AWS/SFA A5.29 •
T Designates an electrode. S
Tensile strength designator.
For A5.29 this designator indicates the minimum tensile strength
(when multiplied by 10 ksi) of the weld metal when the weld is made
in the manner prescribed by this specification.
B Two digits arc used for weld metal of 100 ksi minimum tensile strength
L
R and higher. •
For A5.29M two digits are used to indicate the minimum tensile
Z strength (when multiplied by 10 MPa). A
Positionality designator.
This designator is either “0” or “1.”
“0” is for flat and horizontal positions only.
T “1” is for all positions (flat, horizontal, vertical with downward H
I progression and/or vertical with upward progression and overhead).
•
This designator identifies the electrode as a flux cored electrode.
T F
Usability designator.
This designator is the number 1, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or the letter “G”.
The number refers to the usability of the electrode.
The letter ‘’G” indicates that the polarity and general operating
M characteristics arc not specified. C
A Deposit composition designator. •
Two, three or four digits are used to designate the chemical
G composition of the deposited weld metal). I
The letter “G” indicates that the chemical composition is not specified.
Shielding gas designatorb.
Indicates the type of shielding gas used for classification.
T The letter “C” indicates a shielding gas of I 00% CO2. N
S The letter “M” indicates a shielding gas of 75-80% Argon/balance CO2.
When no designator appears in this position, it indicates that
•
T the electrode being classified is self-shielded and that no external K
shielding gas was used.
EXXTX - XX-JHX Optional Supplemental Designatorsc (J, HX)

A
Optional supplemental diffusible hydrogen designator S
E
The letter “J” when present in this position designates that •
R the electrode meets the requirements for improved toughness and will E
O deposit weld metal with Charpy V-Notch properties of at least
20 ft·lbf [27J] at a test temperature of 20°F [10°C] lower than
the temperature shown for that classification in Table I U [Table I M].
M Notes:
S
A a. The combination of these designators constitutes the flux cored electrode classification.
Note that specific chemical compositions are not always identified with specific mechanical properties in the specification.
•
I A supplier is required by the specification to include the mechanical properties appropriate for a particular electrode in the classification of the electrode.
Thus. for example, a complete designation is E80T5-Ni3. EXXT5-Ni3 is not a complete classification. W
N b. See AWS A5.32/A5.32M, Specification for Welding Shielding Gases.
c. These designators arc optional and do not constitute a part of the flux cored electrode classification.
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
148
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C C
B AWS A5.20/A5.20M:2005 •
T S
Diffusible Hydrogen Limits for Weld Metala
Optional Supplemental Average Diffusible Hydrogen,

B Diffusible Hydrogen Maximume, f mL/100g L
Designatorb, c, d Deposited Metal
R •
Z A
H16 16.0
H8 8.0
T H
I •
H4 4.0
T F
Notes:
a. Limits on diffusible hydrogen when tested in accordance with AWS A4.3.
M b. See page 127. C
A c. The lower diffusible hydrogen levels (H8 and H4) may not be available in some classifications. •
d. Electrodes which satisfy the diffusible hydrogen limit for the H4 designator also satisfy the limits for
G I
the H8 and H16 designators.
Electrodes which satisfy the diffusible hydrogen limit for the H8 category also satisfy the limits for
the H16 designator.
T e. These hydrogen limits are based on welding in air containing a maximum of 10 grains of water per pound N
S 1.43 g/kg] of dry air. •
T Testing at any higher atmospheric moisture level is acceptable provided these limits are satisfied. K
f. The maximum average diffusible hydrogen requirement for electrodes identified with the “Q” optional,
supplemental designator shall be either 5.0 mL/100 g deposited metal or 8.0 mL/100 g deposited metal
A when testing according to the provisions of this specification.
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
149
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C AWS A5.20/A5.20M:2005 C
B •
Procedure Requirements for “D” and “Q” Optional Supplemental Designators
T S
Optional Procedure Heat Input Preheat Interpass Heat Input Required Average
Supplemental (Fast or Slow Temperature Temperature Requirement for Heat Input for
Designator Cooling Rate) °F [°C] °F [°C] Any Single Passa All Passesa
B L
R For electrode diameters < 3/32 in [2.4 mm] •
Z 33 kJ/in A
low 30 +2, –5 kJ/in
[1.3 kJ/mm]
(fast cooling rate) 70° ± 25°F 200° ± 25°F [1.2 +0.1, –0.2 kJ/mm]
maximum
[20° ± 15°C] [90° ± 15°C]
T For electrode diameters ≥ 3/32 in [2.4 mm] H
I D
44 kJ/in 40 +2, –5 kJ/in •
T [1.7 kJ/mm] maximum [1.6 +0.1, –0.2 kJ/mm] F
high 300° ± 25°F 500° ± 50°F 75 kJ/in 80 +5, –2 kJ/in
(slow cooling rate) [150° ± 15°C] [260° ± 25°C] [3.0 kJ/mm] minimum [3.1 +0.2, –0.1 kJ/mm]
M low 70° ± 25°F 150°F max. 33 kJ/in 30 +2, –5 kJ/in C
A (fast cooling rate) [20° ± 15°C] [65°C max.] [1.3 kJ/mm] maximum [1.2 +0.1, –0.2 kJ/mm] •
Q
G high 300° ± 25°F 300° ± 25°F 60 kJ/in 70 +5, –2 kJ/in I
(slow cooling rate) [150° ± 15°C] [150° ± 15°C] [2.4 kJ/mm] minimum [2.8 +0.2, –0.1 kJ/mm]
Note:
T a. Does not apply to first layer. The first layer may have one or two passes. N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
150
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C AWS A5.20/A5.20M:2005 C
B Mechanical Property Requirements for “D” and “Q” Optional Supplemental Designators •
T S
Optional Supplemental Designator Tensile Test Requirements Minimum Charpy V-Notch Requirements
58 ksi [400 MPa] min. yield strength

40 ft∙lbf at +70ºF [54J at +20ºC]
B D 70 ksi [490 MPa] min. tensile strength
(see Notes a, b)
L
R 22% min. % elongation in 2 in [50 mm] •
Z 58 to 80 ksi [400–550 MPa] yield strength A
for high heat input, slow cooling rate test
90 ksi [620 MPa] max. yield strength 20 ft∙lbf at –20°F [27J at –30°C]
Q for low heat input, fast cooling rate test (see Note d)
T H
I 22% min. % elongation in 2 in [50 mm] •
(see Note c)
T F
Notes:
a. Five specimens are to be tested. The lowest and highest values obtained from each of five specimens from a single test plate shall
be disregarded.
M Two of the remaining three values shall equal, or exceed, the specified toughness of 40 ft∙lbf [54J] energy level at the testing C
temperature.
A One of the three may be lower, but not lower than 30 ft∙lbf [41J], and the average of the three shall not be less than the required
•
G 40 ft∙lbf [54J] energy level. I
b. The electrode shall also meet a minimum toughness requirement of 20 ft∙lbf at 0°F [27J at –18°C] when tested according to
the standard A5.20[A5.20M] classification test requirements.
c. Tensile specimens shall not be aged when testing for the “Q” designator.
T d. Five specimens shall be tested. One of the five specimens may be lower than the specified 20 ft∙lbf [27 J] energy level, but not N
S lower than 15 ft∙lbf [20 J], and the average of the five shall not be less than the required minimum 20 ft∙lbf [27 J] energy level. •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
151
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E70C-6M C
•
AWS/SFA A5.18
T S
AFM E70C-6M is designed for welding of 490MPa high tensile steel with only Ar + CO2 mixtures.
It is especially suitable for fillet welding and has a high tolerance to primer.
It is a metal type of flux cored wire for flat and horizontal position welding and provides excellent CVN
B toughness at low temperatures. L
R It features good penetration, high resisitance to porosity, good wetting behaviour as well as low hydrogen •
Z contents. A
AFM E70C-6M is intended for semi-automatic, automatic, singleand multiple pass welding.
The shielding gas should be used Ar + 20 ~ 25% CO2 for welding.
T H
I Typical chemical composition of all-weld-metal (%): •
T 75% ~ 85% Ar C Mn Si S P F
+ 0.12 1.75 0.90 0.03 0.03
Shielding Gas Balance CO2 Ni* Cr** Mo** V* Cu
or
M 100 % CO2 0.50 0.20 0.30 0.08 0.50 C
A •
* Use of a shielding gas other than that specified will result in different weld metal composition.
G I
** The sum of Ni, Cr, Mo & V shall not exceed 0.50%
T Typical mechanical properties of all-weld-metal: N

psi 70,000
S Tensile Strength •
MPa 480
T K
psi 58,000
Yield Strength
MPa 400
A Elongation in 2” (%) 22 S
E
•
R
O
0.045” 1.2 mm
M 0.052” 1.4 mm 25 Lb & 44 Lb Spools
1/16’ 1.6 mm S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
152
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E71T-1 (Unbaked) C
•
AWS/SFA A5.20
T S
AFM E71T-1 (Unbaked) is designed for welding of 490 MPa high tensile strength steel with outstanding
mechanical properties.
The wire is a titania type of flux cored wire for all-position welding.
B It provides low fume generation and has good impact strength at low temperatures. L
R AFM E71T-1 (Unbaked Wire) has excellent usability with stable arc, less spatter levels, better bead appearance •
Z as like a solid wire. A
The shielding gas is 100% CO2.
T Applications: H
AFM E71T-1 (Unbaked) is commonly used for machineries, shipbuilding, offshore structures,
I bridges & general fabrications.
•
T F
Typical chemical composition of all-weld-metal (%):
Shielding Gas C Mn Si S P
M C
CO2 100% 0.03 1.35 0.38 0.010 0.015
A •
G I
Typical mechanical properties of all-weld-metal:
psi 75,000
T Tensile Strength N
MPa 520
S •
psi 82,000
T Yield Strength K
MPa 570
A Charphy V-Notch @ 0oF 20ft. Lbs
S
E
•
R
O
0.045” 1.2 mm
25 Lb & 44 Lb Spools
M 0.052” 1.4 mm
60Lb Coils S
A 1/16’ 1.6 mm •
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
153
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E71T-1 (Baked) C
•
AWS/SFA A5.20
T S
AFM E71T-1 (Baked) is designed for welding of 490 MPa high tensile strength steel with slow freezing
slag system.
The wire is a titania type of flux cored wire for all-position welding.
B It produces excellent mechanical properties, easy slag removal, low spatter loss smooth bead surface, L
R high X-ray safety. •
Z AFM E71T-1 (Baked) is a very efficient method of the welding due to the higher deposition rate. A
It can be used with 100% CO2 or 75% Ar + 25% CO2
T Applications: H
AFM E71T-1 (Baked) is commonly used for machineries, shipbuilding, offshore structures, bridges &
I general fabrications.
•
T F
Typical chemical composition of all-weld-metal (%):

M Shielding Gas C Mn Si S P C
A CO2 100% 0.04 1.30 0.45 0.012 0.015 •
G I
psi 75,000
T Tensile Strength
MPa 520
N
S psi 84,000
•
T Yield Strength
MPa 580
K
A Charphy V-Notch @ 0oF 20ft. Lbs
S
E
•
R
O
0.045” 1.2 mm
25 Lb & 44 Lb Spools
0.052” 1.4 mm
M 60Lb Coils
1/16’ 1.6 mm S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
154
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E71T-11 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.20
T S
AFM E71T-11 is a self-shielded flux cored wire for lap and fillet welds of mild and medium tensile steels not
exceeding 510 MPa.
It is suitable for a variety of applications such as prefab. building fabrication, tanks, ornamental iron,
B farm implement, repairs and general fabrication. L
R •
Z Characteristics on Usage: A
• Wire is for all-positional welding of single and multiple pass fabrications.
• The arc characteristics are so smooth and stable, even the most novice welder can produce good welds.
T • It is designed for on site general fabrication and structural work requiring no impact properties. H
I • It can be used DCEN polarity. •
T F
Base Materials:
ASTM A36 Gr. all; A 123; A 179; A 181 Gr. 60, 70; A266 Gr. 1; A283 Gr. A. B, C. D; A284
Gr. C. D: A285 Gr. A, B, C; A500 Gr. all; A501 Gr. all; A556 Gr. A2; A557 Gr. B2. C2:
M A562; A619-622; A 709 Gr. 36. 50. C
A •
G Typical chemical composition of all-weld-metal (%): I
Shielding Gas C Mn Si S P Al
None 010 0.55 0.10 0.006 0.016 1.20
T Typical mechanical properties of all-weld-metal: N
S psi 72,500
•
T Tensile Strength
MPa 500
K
psi 76,800
Yield Strength
A MPa 530
S
E Elongation in 2” (%) 23
•
R
Size available & Recommended currents - DC Wire (-): E
O
Diameter 0.045” 1/16” 5/64”
(mm) (1.2 mm) (1.6 mm) (2.0 mm)
M
Amp. F 80 ~ 200 160 ~ 270 180 ~ 280 S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
155
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E71TGS C
•
AWS/SFA A5.20
T S
AFM E71TGS is a self-shielded flux-cored wire for general purpose use and welding in all positions.
It is especially suited for single-pass fillet and lap welds on thin-gauge mild or galvanized steel.
B L
R Applications: •
Z AFM E71TGS is used for prefab, building fabrication, tanks, ornamental iron, farm implement, repairs A
and general fabrication.
T Characteristics on Usage: H
• Wire is for all-positional welding of single pass automatic and semiautomatic fabrications.
I • It can be applicable for aluminized steel and galvanized steel from 0.045” (1.2 mm) to 3/16” (4.8 mm). •
T • It is designed for on site general fabrication and structural work requiring no impact properties. F
• It can be used DCEN polarity.
M Typical chemical composition of all-weld-metal (%): C

A Shielding Gas C Mn Si S P Al •
G None 016 0.82 0.31 0.006 0.014 1.30 I

T psi 75,400 N
S Tensile Strength •
MPa 520
T Longitudinal Guided Bend Test No Defects K
A Size available & Recommended currents - DC Wire (+), (-):

S
E Diameter 0.045” 1/16” 5/64”
(mm) (1.2 mm) (1.6 mm) (2.0 mm) •
R
Amp. F 80 ~ 200 160 ~ 270 180 ~ 280 E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
156
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E81T1-B2 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.29
T S
AFM E81T1-B2 is an all-position flux cored wire that contains 1-1/4% Cr-1/2% Mo.
The weld metal analysis is very similar to AFM E8018-B2 low hydrogen electrode.
It is used for welding 1/2% Cr-1/2% Mo, 1% Cr-1/2% Mo, and 1-1/4% Cr-1/2% Mo steels,
B such as ASTM A335-P11 pipe and ASTM A387 Gr.11 plate. L
R The wire can be used in either single or multiple pass welding. •
Z AFM E81T1-B2 should be used with 100% CO2 shielding gas. A
Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal:

T C Mn P S Si Ni Cr Mo H
I 0.05 ~ 0.12 1.25 0.030 0.030 0.80 - 1.00-1.50 0.40 ~ 0.65 •
T All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. F
M Tension Test Requirements: C

A psi 80,000 ~ 100,000 •
Tensile Strength
G MPa 550 ~ 690 I
psi 68,000
Yield Strength @ 0.2% Offset, Min.
MPa 470
T Elongation in 2” (%) 19 Min. N
S •
T K
Standard Packaging:
0.045” 1.2 mm
A 33 Lb Spools
1/16’ 1.6 mm S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
157
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E91T1-B3 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.29
T S
AFM E91T1-B3 is an all-position flux cored wire that contains 2-1/4% Cr-1% Mo.
The weld metal analysis is similar to AFM E9018-B3 low hydrogen electrode.
It is recommended for welding 2-1/4% Cr-1% Mo steels, such as ASTM A335-P22 pipe and ASTM A387 r.22
B plate, and can be used for single or multiple pass welding. L
R AFM E91T1-B3 should be used with 100% CO2 shielding gas. •
Z A
C Mn P S Si Ni Cr Mo
T H
0.05 ~ 0.12 1.25 0.030 0.030 0.80 - 2.00-2.50 0.90 ~ 1.20
I •
M Tension Test Requirements: C

psi 90,000 ~ 110,000
MPa 620 ~ 760
G I
psi 78,000
MPa 540
T Elongation in 2” (%) 17 Min. N
S •
T K
Standard Packaging:
0.045” 1.2 mm
33 Lb Spools
A 1/16’ 1.6 mm
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
158
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E81T1-Ni1 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.29
T S
AFM E81T1-Ni1 is an all-position wire which has a smooth, easily controlled arc that produces a spray-like
transfer.
The easily removable slag firmly holds the molten puddle for out-of-position work.
B It exhibits excellent low temperature impact toughness as welded and stress relieved. L
R AFM E81T1-Ni1 is commonly used on petrochemical equipment, offshore oil construction, ship fabrication, •
Z and heavy machinery. A
The weld metal analysis is similar to AFM E8018-C3 low hydrogen electrode and is used with
a 75% Ar +25% CO2 shielding gas.
T H
I Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal: •
T C Mn P S Si Ni Cr Mo V F
0.12 1.50 0.030 0.030 0.80 0.80 ~ 1.10 0.15 0.35 0.05

M C
A •
G Tension Test Requirements: I
psi 80,000 ~ 110,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 550 ~ 690
T N
psi 68,000
S Yield Strength @ 0.2% Offset, Min. •
MPa 470
T K
Elongation in 2” (%) 19 Min.
A
S
R 0.045” 1.2 mm
33 Lb Spools E
O 1/16’ 1.6 mm
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
159
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E81T1-Ni2 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.29
T S
AFM E81T1-Ni2 is an all-position flux cored wire that deposits 2-1/2% Ni deposit with an 80 ksi tensile
strength.
It may be used with CO2 or Argon mixtures, which reduce spatter and further improve weldability.
B It is used commonly used on shipbuilding and heavy machinery construction. L
R The weld metal analysis is similar to AFM E8018-C1 low hydrogen electrode. •
Z A
C Mn P S Si Ni
T H
0.12 1.50 0.030 0.030 0.80 1.75 ~ 2.75
I •
Tension Test Requirements:

M psi 90,000 ~ 110,000 C
MPa 620 ~ 760
G psi 78,000 I
MPa 540
Elongation in 2” (%) 17 Min.
T N
S •
T Standard Packaging: K
0.045” 1.2 mm
33 Lb Spools
1/16’ 1.6 mm
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
160
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E308HT1-1/-4 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.22
T S
AFM E308HT1-1/-4 is formulated for MAG welding of 18% Cr - 8% Ni stainless steel for high temperature
service. (SUS 304H, 307H & 308H).
It is titania type flux cored wire for all position welding.
B L
R AFM E308HT1-1/-4 provides low spatter, easy slag removal & excellent weld soundness for your welding job. •
Z It is also developed for welding steel resistant to austenitic fluency type CrNi / AISI 304H in working A
temperatures up to +600 ºC [+1,112 ºF].
[Recommended Welding Tips]

T • Recommended shielding gas - 100% CO2 Gas or Ar + 20% ~ 25% CO2 gas.
H
I • The optimum gas flow - For CO2 Gas - 20l/min ~ 25l/min [42.40 cfh ~ 53 cfh]. •
T • It is strongly recommended to use the wind shield screen to prevent the possible blowholes. F
- Wind velocity ≥ 2m/sec [≥ 6.56 ft/sec]
• Electrode Extension -15 mm ~ 25 mm [0.56” ~ 0.98”].
M C
Typical Chemical Composition of all-weld-metal (%):
A •
C Si Mn P S Cr Ni Ferrite No.
G I
AWS Classification 0.04 ~ 0.08 ≤ 1.0 0.5 ~ 2.5 ≤ 0.04 ≤ 0.03 18.0 ~ 21.0 9.0 ~ 11.0 -
AFM 308HT1-1/-4 0.06 0.60 1.04 0.02 0.007 19.50 10.00 6.0
T Typical Mechanical Properties of all-weld-metal: N

S Tensile Strength Elongation •
T (N/mm2) - MPa % K
AWS Classification ≥ 550 ≥ 35
A AFM 308HT1-1/-4 580 40
S
E
Available sizes & Recommended Welding Parameters (DC+): •
R
1/16” E
O 0.045” (1.2 mm)
(1.6 mm)
Position / Diameter
Current (A) Voltage (V) Current (A) Voltage (V)
M Flat 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35 S
A Horizontal Fillet 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35 •
I Vertical Up 120 ~ 160 20 ~ 30 160 ~ 220 20 ~ 30 W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
161
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E308LT0-1/-4 & AFM E308LT1-1/-4 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.22
T S
AFM E308LT0-1/-4 & E308LT1-1/-4 are designed for MAG welding of low carbon 18% Cr ~ 8% Ni
stainless steel.
• AFM E308LT0-1/-4 is titania type of flux cored wire for flat & horizontal position welding.
B • AFM E308LT1-1/-4 is titania type of flux cored wire for all position welding. L
R •
Z AFM E308LT series wires provide stable arc, easier slag removal, less spatter & welding fume than solid wires. A
The weld metal with optimum ferrite contents in its austenitic structures provides excellent weldability and
lower crack susceptibility.
T [Recommended Welding Tips]
H
I • Recommended shielding gas - 100% CO2 Gas or 80% Ar + 20% CO2 gas. •
T F
C Si Mn P S Cr Ni Ferrite No.
M AWS Classification ≤ 0.04 ≤ 1.0 0.5 ~ 2.5 ≤ 0.04 ≤ 0.03 18.0 ~ 21.0 9.0 ~ 11.0 - C
A AFM 308LT0-1/-4 0.03 0.65 1.35 0.020 0.010 19.60 9.60 8 •
G AFM 308LT1-1/-4 0.03 0.62 1.38 0.022 0.009 19.80 9.80 10 I
Typical Mechanical Properties of all-weld-metal:

T Charpy V-Notch N
Yield Strength Tensile Strength Elongation
S Impact Value •
T (N/mm2) - MPa (N/mm2) - MPa % -20 ºC [-68 ºF] K
AWS Classification ≥ 520 ≥ 30
AFM 308LT0-1/-4 431 570 39 48 J [35.40 ft/lb]
A
AFM 308LT1-1/-4 422 572 41 46 J [33.93 ft/lb] S
E
•
R
Available sizes & Recommended Welding Parameters (DC+): E
O
1/16”
Product 0.045” (1.2 mm)
Position / Diameter (1.6 mm)
M AFM E308LT0-1/-4 & AFM E308LT1-1/-4 Current (A) Voltage (V) Current (A) Voltage (V) S
A Flat AFM E308LT0-1/-4 & AFM E308LT1-1/-4 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35 •
I Horizontal Fillet AFM E308LT0-1/-4 & AFM E308LT1-1/-4 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35 W
N Vertical Up AFM E308LT1-1/-4 Only 120 ~ 160 20 ~ 30 160 ~ 220 20 ~ 30
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
162
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E309LMoT1-1/-4 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.22
T S
AFM E309LMoT1-1/-4 is a titania type of flux cored wire for all-position welding.
This product is designed for MAG welding of low carbon 22% Cr ~12% Ni-Mo stainless steels.
B • Dissimilar joint welds ; of and between high-strength, mild steels and low-alloyed QT-steels, stainless, ferritic L
R Cr- and austenitic Cr-Ni steels, manganese steels. •
Z • Cladding ; for the first layer of corrosion resistant weld claddings on ferritic-pearlitic steels in boiler and A
pressure vessel parts up to fine-grained steel S500N.
Weld metals contain comparatively much more ferrite in their austenitic, therefore they provide better
T H
weldability together with superior heat resistance, and corrosion resistance for Mo-alloyed claddings
I the product is necessary for the 1st layer. •
T F
• Recommended shielding gas - 100% CO2 Gas only.
M C
A Typical Chemical Composition of all-weld-metal (%): •
G C Mn Si P S Cr Ni Mo Ferrite No.
I
AWS Classification ≤ 0.04 0.5 ~ 2.5 ≤ 1.0 ≤ 0.04 ≤ 0.03 21.0 ~ 25.0 12.0 ~ 16.0 2.0 ~ 3.0 -
AFM 309LMoT1-1/-4 0.035 1.20 0.60 0.017 0.010 22.80 13.30 2.50 20
T N
S Typical Mechanical Properties of all-weld-metal: •
T Charpy V-Notch K
Yield Strength Tensile Strength Elongation
Impact Value
A (N/mm2) - MPa (N/mm2) - MPa % 0 ºC [32 ºF]
AWS Classification ≥ 520 ≥ 25 S
E
AFM 309LMoT1-1/-4 560 680 33 40 J [29.50 ft/lb] •
R
E
O
Available sizes & Recommended Welding Parameters (DC+):
M 1/16”
0.045” (1.2 mm)
(1.6 mm) S
A Position / Diameter
Current (A) Voltage (V) Current (A) Voltage (V) •
I
Flat 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35 W
N
Horizontal Fillet 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35
I Vertical Up 120 ~ 160 20 ~ 30 160 ~ 220 20 ~ 30
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
163
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B AFM E309LT0-1/-4 & AFM E309LT1-1/-4 C
•
T AWS/SFA A5.22
S
AFM E309LT0-1/-4 & E309LT1-1/-4 are designed for MAG welding of 22% Cr ~ 12% Ni steel and heat
resistant & dissimilar joint such as a stainless steel to carbon steel of low alloy steel.
Under layer welding on clad side groove claded stainless steel or carbon steel where stainless steel weld metal
B is overlayed.
L
R • AFM E309LT0-1/-4 is titania type of flux cored wire for flat & horizontal position welding. •
Z • AFM E309LT1-1/-4 is titania type of flux cored wire for all position welding. A
AFM E309LT series wires provide stable arc, easier slag removal, less spatter & welding fume than solid wires.
T The weld metal with optimum ferrite contents in its austenitic structures provides excellent weldability and H
lower crack susceptibility.
I •
T • Recommended shielding gas - 100% CO2 Gas or 80% Ar + 20% CO2 gas. F

M C Si Mn P S Cr Ni Ferrite No. C
A AWS Classification ≤ 0.04 ≤ 1.0 0.5 ~ 2.5 ≤ 0.04 ≤ 0.03 22.0 ~ 25.0 12.0 ~ 14.0 - •
G AFM 309LT0-1/-4 0.035 0.75 1.30 0.022 0.009 22.80 12.30 18 I
AFM 309LT1-1/-4 0.029 0.64 1.33 0.019 0.011 23.30 12.80 20
T N
S •
Charpy V-Notch
T Yield Strength Tensile Strength Elongation
Impact Value K
(N/mm2) - MPa (N/mm2) - MPa % 0 ºC [32 ºF]
A AWS Classification ≥ 520 ≥ 30
S
E AFM 309LT0-1/-4 432 590 37 50 J [36.88 ft/lb]
•
R AFM 309LT1-1/-4 426 593 38 48 J [35.40 ft/lb]
E
O
M 1/16”
Product 0.045” (1.2 mm) S
A Position / Diameter (1.6 mm)
•
I AFM E309LT0-1/-4 & AFM E309LT1-1/-4 Current (A) Voltage (V) Current (A) Voltage (V)
Flat 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35 W
N AFM E309LT0-1/-4 & AFM E309LT1-1/-4
Horizontal Fillet AFM E309LT0-1/-4 & AFM E309LT1-1/-4 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35
I Vertical Up AFM E309LT1-1/-4 Only 120 ~ 160 20 ~ 30 160 ~ 220 20 ~ 30
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
164
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E316LT0-1/-4 & AFM E316LT1-1/-4 C
AWS/SFA A5.22 •
T S
AFM E316LT0-1/-4 & E316LT1-1/-4 are designed for welding of low carbon 18%Cr ~12%Ni ~ 2% Mo
stainless steel.
Under layer welding on clad side groove claded stainless steel or carbon steel where stainless steel weld metal
B is overlayed. L
R • AFM E316LT0-1/-4 is titania type of flux cored wire for flat & horizontal position welding. •
Z • AFM E316LT1-1/-4 is titania type of flux cored wire for all position welding. A
AFM E309LT series wires provide excellent usability with stable arc, less spattering, good bead appearance,
better slag removal, and less quantity of welding fume comparable to solid wire.
T Excellent weldability and increased creep resistance at elevated temperature. H
I •
T [Recommended Welding Tips] F
• Recommended shielding gas - 100% CO2 Gas or 80% Ar + 20% CO2 gas.
M Typical Chemical Composition of all-weld-metal (%): C

A C Si Mn P S Cr Ni Ferrite No. •
G AWS Classification ≤ 0.04 ≤ 1.0 0.5 ~ 2.5 ≤ 0.04 ≤ 0.03 17.0 ~ 20.0 11.0 ~ 14.0 - I
AFM 316LT0-1/-4 0.030 0.62 1.42 0.022 0.011 18.56 12.39 8
AFM 316LT1-1/-4 0.031 0.60 1.33 0.021 0.010 18.61 12.44 7
T N
S Typical Mechanical Properties of all-weld-metal: •
T Yield Strength Tensile Strength Elongation
Charpy V-Notch K
Impact Value
(N/mm2) - MPa (N/mm2) - MPa % 0 ºC [32 ºF]
A AWS Classification ≥ 485 ≥ 30 S
E AFM 316LT0-1/-4 425 575 42 55 J [40.57 ft/lb] •
R AFM 316LT1-1/-4 422 578 42 58 J [42.78 ft/lb] E
O
M
Product 0.045” (1.2 mm)
1/16” S
A Position / Diameter (1.6 mm)
•
I AFM E316LT0-1/-4 & AFM E316LT1-1/-4 Current (A) Voltage (V) Current (A) Voltage (V)
W
N Flat AFM E316LT0-1/-4 & AFM E316LT1-1/-4 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35
Horizontal Fillet AFM E316LT0-1/-4 & AFM E316LT1-1/-4 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35
I Vertical Up AFM E316LT1-1/-4 Only 120 ~ 160 20 ~ 30 160 ~ 220 20 ~ 30
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
165
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E317LT1-1/-4 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.22
T S
AFM E317LT1-1/-4 is formulated for MAG Welding of 19% Cr ~ 13% Ni ~ 3% Mo stainless Steels.
The principal area of application is process and chemical plant, shuipbuilding as well as nuclear plant
B industries (AISI 316L, 316LN, 317L, 317NL & UNS S31726) L
R AFM E317LT1-1/-4 is a titania type of flux cored wire with all-position welding. •
It has low spatter, easy slag removal & good weld soundness.
Z A
It also contains higher levels of Mo for increased corrosion-resistance when compared to AFM E316LT1-1/-4.

T • Recommended shielding gas - 100% CO2 Gas. H
I • The optimum flow of CO2 for shielding is 20l/min. ~ 25l/min [42.40 cfh ~ 53 cfh]. •
T • It is strongly recommended to use the wind shield screen to prevent the possible blowholes. F
- Wind velocity ≥ 2m/sec [≥ 6.56 ft/sec]
• For multi-layer welding, keep preheat & inter-pass temperature below 150 ºC [302 ºF].
M C
A •
G Typical Chemical Composition of all-weld-metal (%): I
C Si Mn P S Cr Ni Mo
AWS Classification ≤ 0.04 ≤ 1.0 0.5 ~ 2.5 ≤ 0.04 ≤ 0.03 18.0 ~ 21.0 12.0 ~ 14.0 3.0 ~ 4.0
T AFM 317LT1-1/-4 0.03 0.65 1.26 0.02 0.07 18.9 13.7 3.5 N
S •
T K
Tensile Strength Elongation
A
(N/mm2) - MPa % S
E
AWS Classification ≥ 520 ≥ 20 •
R
AFM 316LT1-1 610 36 E
O
M
1/16” S
A 0.045” (1.2 mm)
(1.6 mm)
Position / Diameter •
I Current (A) Voltage (V) Current (A) Voltage (V) W
N Flat 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35
Horizontal Fillet 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35
I Vertical Up 120 ~ 160 20 ~ 30 160 ~ 220 20 ~ 30 F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
166
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E347T1-1 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.22
T S
AFM E347T1-1 is formulated for MAG Welding of 18% Cr ~ 8% Ni-Nb stainless Steels.
(AISI 347, 321, ASTM A296; A157 Gr. C9; A320 Gr. B8C or D)
B AFM E347T1-1 is a titania type of flux cored wire with all-position welding. L
R It has low spatter, easy slag removal & good weld soundness. •
Nb componet improves the resistance to intergranular corrosion of the weld metal.
Z A
• Recommended shielding gas - 100% CO2 Gas or 75% ~ 80% Ar + 20% ~ 25% CO2 gas.
T • The optimum flow of CO2 for shielding is 20l/min. ~ 25l/min [42.40 cfh ~ 53 cfh]. H
I • It is strongly recommended to use the wind shield screen to prevent the possible blowholes. •
T - Wind velocity ≥ 2m/sec [≥ 6.56 ft/sec] F
• For multi-layer welding, keep preheat & inter-pass temperature below 150 ºC [302 ºF].
M C
A Typical Chemical Composition of all-weld-metal (%): •
G C Si Mn P S Cr Ni Mo I
AWS Classification ≤ 0.08 ≤ 1.0 0.5 ~ 2.5 ≤ 0.04 ≤ 0.03 18.0 ~ 21.0 9.0 ~ 11.0 8 x C ~ 1.0
AFM 347T1-1 0.03 0.60 1.26 0.02 0.07 19.3 10.1 0.40
T N
S •
T Typical Mechanical Properties of all-weld-metal: K
Tensile Strength Elongation Impact Value (J)
(N/mm2) - MPa % -18 ºC
A
AWS Classification ≥ 520 ≥ 30 S
E
AFM 347T1-1 586 41 60 •
R
E
O
1/16”
M 0.045” (1.2 mm)
(1.6 mm)
Position / Diameter S
A Current (A) Voltage (V) Current (A) Voltage (V) •
I Flat 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35 W
N Horizontal Fillet 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35
Vertical Up 120 ~ 160 20 ~ 30 160 ~ 220 20 ~ 30
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
167
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C C
B •
AWS A5.22 Chemical Composition Requirements for Flux Cored Electrodes for Undiluted Weld Metal
T S
AFM C Cr Ni Mo Nb + Ta Mn Si P S N Cu Other
0.04 ~ 18.00 ~ 9.00 ~ 0.50~
E308HTX-X 0.75 - 1.00 0.04 0.03 - 0.75 -
0.08 21.00 11.00 2.50
B L
18.00 ~ 9.00 ~ 0.50 ~
R E308LTX-X 0.04
21.00 11.00
0.75 -
2.50
1.00 0.04 0.03 - 0.75 - •
Z E309TX-X 0.10
22.00 ~ 12.00 ~
0.75 -
0.50 ~
1.00 0.04 0.03 - 0.75 -
A
25.00 14.00 0.25
22.00 ~ 12.00 ~ 0.50 ~
E309LTX-X 0.04 0.75 - 1.00 0.04 0.03 - 0.75 -
25.00 14.00 2.50
T E309LMoTX-X 0.04
21.00 ~ 12.00 ~ 2.00 ~
-
0.50 ~
1.00 0.04 0.03 - 0.75 -
H
I 25.00 16.00 3.00 2.50
•
25.00 ~ 20.00 ~ 1.00 ~
T E310TX-X 0.20
28.00 22.50
0.75 -
2.50
1.00 0.03 0.03 - 0.75 - F
28.00 ~ 8.00 ~ 0.50 ~
E312TX-X 0.15 0.75 - 1.00 004 0.03 - 0.75 -
32.00 10.50 2.50
17.00 ~ 11.00 ~ 2.00 ~ 0.50 ~
M E316TX-X 0.08
20.00 14.00 3.00
-
2.50
1.00 0.04 0.03 - 0.75 - C
A 17.00 ~ 11.00 ~ 2.00 ~ 0.50 ~ •
E316LTX-X 0.04 - 1.00 0.04 0.03 - 0.75 -
G 20.00 14.00 3.00 2.50 I
18.00 ~ 12.00 ~ 3.00 ~ 0.50 ~
E317LTX-X 0.04 - 1.00 0.04 0.03 - 0.75 -
21.00 14.00 4.00 2.50
18.00 ~ 9.00 ~ 8 x C Min. ~ 0.50 ~
E347TX-X 0.08 0.75 1.00 0.04 0.03 - 0.75 -
T 21.00 11.00 1.00 Max. 2.50 N
S E410TX-X 0.12
11.00 ~
13.50
0.60 0.75 - 1.20 1.00 0.04 0.03 - 0.75 - •
T 21.00 ~ 7.50 ~ 2.50 ~ 0.50 ~ 0.08 ~ K
E2209TX-X 0.04 - 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75 -
24.00 10.00 4.00 2.00 0.20
24.00 ~ 8.50 ~ 2.90 ~ 0.50 ~ 0.10 ~ 1.50 ~
E2253TX-X 0.04 - 0.75 0.04 0.03 -
A 27.00 10.50 3.90 1.50 0.25 2.50
S
E * E904LTX-X - NO AWS Classfication
•
R
E
O WELDING PARAMETERS:
AFM’s flux cored stainless steel wires can be welded over an extensive
range of parameters with excellent results.
M
S
A Typical range (V-I) with 75% Ar + 25% CO₂
(Increase V by 1-2V with 100% CO₂) •
I
W
N In this table,, the “X” following the “T” refers to the position of welding.
(1 - All-Position Operation, 0 - Flat or Horizontal Operation)
Also, the “X” following the dash refers to the shielding medium. (-1 or -4)
I as shown in the AWS Classfication column in Table 2 of
A5.22/A5.22M:2010. F
N
C
F
W
O
168
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C Minimum Mechanical Properties C

B Tensile Strength Postweld •
AWS Classification Elongation (%)
T ksi MPa Heat Treatment S
E308HTX-X 80 550 30 -
E308LTX-X 75 520 30 -
B E309TX-X 80 550 30 - L
R E309LTX-X 75 520 30 - •
Z E309LMoTX-X 75 520 25 - A
E310TX-X 80 550 30 -
E312TX-X 95 660 22 -
T H
E316TX-X 75 520 30 -
I •
E316LTX-X 70 485 30 -
T F
E317LTX-X 75 520 20 -
E347TX-X 75 520 30 -
E410TX-X 75 520 20 (*)
M C
E2209TX-X 100 690 20 -
A •
E2253TX-X 11 760 15 -
G I
* Note: All mechanical properties listed are minimal values which may vary substantially with base plate, parameters and other
variables out of the manufacturer’s control.
T (*) E410TX-X - Postweld Heat Treatment: N

S Heat to 1,350 oF to 1,400 oF [730 oC to 760 oC], •
T hold for one hour (-0, +15 minutes), K
furnace cool at a rate not exceeding 200 oF per hour
to 600 oF [315 oC] and air cool to ambient.
A
S
E
Performance:: •
R
AFM’s flux cored stainless deposition rate is the highest E
O in the industry, commonly 3 times faster than manual
electrodes.
M
S
A Shielding Gases: •
I
W
N Argon + CO2
CO2
75% + 25% or 82% + 18%
100%
} Gas flow rate 25 – 35 Cu. Ft / Hr
I
The use of either mixed gas or CO₂ will ensure sound weld metal. The carbon content of the weld metal increases F
N
marginally with increased CO₂ content. Slag detachment behavior may alter slightly with gas composition and with base C
F metal, particularly when welding stainless to carbon steels. W
O
169
A T
L O
M B
Aluminum Alloys
C C
B AFM Product AWS Classification Page •
T AFM ER1100 AWS/SFA A5.10 ER1100 171 S
B AFM ER5183 AWS/SFA A5.10 ER5183 171 L
R AFM ER5356 AWS/SFA A5.10 ER5356 172 •
Z AFM ER5556 AWS/SFA A5.10 ER5556 172 A
T H
Aluminum Alloys 173 ~ 174
I •
Aluminum Welding Wires Chemical Compositions 175
T F
Standard Diameters and Packages - Aluminum Alloys 175
M C
A •
G Click to Download
I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
170
A T
L O
M B
Aluminum Alloys
C AFM ER1100 C
B AWS/SFA A5.10 •
T AFM ER1100 wires and rods are generally recommended for welding 1100 and 3003 aluminum sheets, S
plates and shapes.
B It can be used on: L

R • Window Frames Food Processing Equipment, • Heat Exchangers Electrical Bus Bars, •
Z • Railroad Tank Cars Liquid Oxygen Containers, • Pressure Vessels Plating Racks
A
• Storage Tanks Food Containers, • Chemical Processing Towers
T AFM ER4043 H
I AWS/SFA A5.10 •
T F
AFM ER4043 wires and rods are generally recommended for welding 2014, 5052, 6061, and 6101 (in various
conditions of heat treatment and 6063 sheets, plates and shapes).
M It is typically used on: C

A • Truck Bodies • Structural Members •
G • Pressure Vessels • Electrical Bus Bars I
• Petroleum Distribution Equipment
T
S
AFM ER4047 N
•
AWS/SFA A5.10
T K
AFM ER4047 12% Silicon Aluminum brazing rod is recommended for torch brazing and dip or furnace
brazing of the following grades of wrought aluminum: 1060, 1100, 3003, 5005, 6061, 6063, and cast alloys A612
A and C612 for lap or tee joints, rather than butt joints when used with the proper aluminum brazing flux.
S
E
•
R
O AFM ER5183 E
AWS/SFA A5.10
M AFM ER5183 is the optimum wire and rod for both strength and ductility, stronger than AFM ER5356 with S
A similar ductility, not quite as strong as AFM ER5556 but has better ductility.
•
I AFM ER5183 is most frequently used on 5083 base plate.
It is also used to weld 6061, 6063, 5086, 7005 and 7039 alloys. W
N
The most common applications are liquid oxygen and liquid nitrogen containers.
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
171
A T
L O
M B
Aluminum Alloys
C C
B AFM ER5356 •
T AWS/SFA A5.10 S
AFM ER5356 wires and rods are generally recommended for welding 5050, 5052, 5083, 5154, 5356, 6061,
and 6063 aluminum alloys.
This wire is to be employed in all types of structural aluminum fabrication where post heat treatment is not
B L
feasible as a method of producing higher strength welded joints.
R The tensile properties of the base materials of the aluminum-magnesium type are not as drastically affected •
Z by the heat of the welding arc as are the heat-treated high strength aluminum alloys. A
Excellent for color match application.
T Examples of applications which utilize ER5356: H

I • Diesel Engine Bases Gun Mount Bases • Truck Frames Ship Superstructures •
• Architectural Structures Cargo Tanks • Armored Vehicles
T F
M
AFM ER5556 C
AWS/SFA A5.10
A •
AFM ER5556 wires and rods are generally recommended for welding 5083, 5086 and 5456 high tensile
G I
aluminum alloys.
This wire is to be employed in all types of structural aluminum fabrication where post heat treatment is not
feasible as a method of producing higher strength welded joints.
T The tensile properties of the base materials of the aluminum-magnesium type are not as drastically affected N
S by the heat of the welding arc as are the heat treated high strength aluminum alloys. •
T K
Examples of applications which utilize ER5556:
• Diesel Engine Bases Gun Mount Bases • Truck Frames Ship Superstructures
A • Bridges Storage Tanks
S
E
•
R
E
O
Other Types of AFM Aluminum
M Available upon Request:
S
A
•
I • 355.0 • 4047 (718)
W
N • 356.0 • 5154
• 4145 (716) • 5554
I • 2319 • 5654
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
172
A T
L O
M B
Aluminum Alloys
C C
356.0,
B A356.0,
511.0, 7004,
6005, 6061, •
201.0, 319.0, 333.0, 512.0, 7005, 6009,
T Base Metal 206.0, 354.0, 355.0,
357.0,
513.0, 7039, 6010,
6063, 6101,
5456 5454 S
A357.0, 6151, 6201,
224.0 C355.0 514.0, 710.0, 6070
413.0, 443.0, 6351, 6951
535.0 712.0
A444.0
B 1060, 1070,
ER4145 ER4145 ER4043a,b ER5356c,d ER5356c,d ER4043a,b ER4043b ER5356d ER4043b,d
L
1080, 1350
R •
1100, 3003,
Z Alc 3003
ER4145 ER4145 ER4043a,b ER5356c,d ER5356c,d ER4043a,b ER4043b ER5356d ER4043b,d A
2014, 2036 ER4145c ER4145c ER4145 - - ER4145 ER4145 - -
2219 ER2319a ER4145c ER4145b,c ER4043 ER4043 ER4043a, ER4043a,b - ER4043b
T 3004,
- ER4043b ER4043b ER5356f ER5356f ER4043b ER4043b,f ER5356d ER5356f H
Alc. 3004
I 5005, 5050 - ER4043b ER4043b ER5356f Er5356f ER4043b ER4043b,f ER5356d ER5356f
•
T 5052, 5652i - ER4043b ER4043f ER5356f ER5356f ER4043b ER5356c,f ER5356f ER5356f F
5083 - - ER5356c,d ER5356d ER5183d - ER5356d ER5183d ER5356d
5086 - - ER5356c,d ER5356d ER5356d - ER5356d ER5356d ER5356d
M 5154, 5254i - - ER4043f ER5356f ER5356f - ER5356f ER5356f ER5356f C
A 5454 - ER4043b ER4043f ER5356f ER5356f ER4043b ER5356c,f ER5356f ER5554c,f •
5456 - - ER5356c,d ER5356d ER5556d - ER5356d ER5556d
G I
6005, 6061,
6063, 6101,
ER4145 ER4145b,c ER4043b,f,g ER5356c,f ER5356c,f ER4043a,b,g ER4043b,f,g
6151. 6201,
6351, 6951
T 6009, 6010,
N
ER4145 ER4145b,c ER4043a,b,g ER4043 ER4043 ER4043a,b,g
S 6070 •
T 7004, 7005, K
7039, 710.0, - ER4043b ER4043b,f ER5356f ER5356d
712.0
511.0, 512.0,
A 513.0, 514.0, - - ER4043f ER5356f
S
E 535.0
•
R 356.0, A356.0,
357.0, A357.0,
ER4145 ER4145b,c ER4043b,h E
O 413.0, 443.0,
444.0
319.0, 333.0,
M 354.0, 355.0, ER4145c ER4145b,c,h
S
A C355.0
•
I 201.0, 206.0,
ER2319a,h
224.0 W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
173
A T
L O
M B
Aluminum Alloys
C C
B 1060, •
1100
T Base Metal
5154,
5086 5083
5052, 5005, 3004,
2219
2014,
3003
1070, S
5254i 5652i 5050 Alc. 3004 2036 1080,
Alc. 3003
1350
B 1060, 1070,
ER5356c,d ER5356d ER5356d ER4043b,d ER1100b,c ER4043b,d ER4145b,c ER4145 ER1100b,c ER1188b,c,h,j
L
1080, 1350
R •
1100, 3003,
Z Alc. 3003
ER5356c,d ER5356d ER5356d ER4043b,d ER1100b,c ER4043b,d ER4145b,c ER4145 ER1100b,c A
2014, 2036 - - - - ER4145 ER4145 ER4145e ER4145e
2219 ER4043 - - ER4043b ER4043a,b ER4043a,b ER2319a
T 3004,
ER5356f ER5356d ER5356d ER5356c,f ER5356c,f ER5356c,f H
Alc. 3004
I 5005, 5050 ER5356f ER5356d ER5356d ER5356c,d ER5356c,f
•
T 5052, 5652i ER5356f ER5356d ER5356d ER5654c,f,i F
5083 ER5356d ER5356d ER5183d
5086 ER5356d ER5356d
M 5154, 5254i ER5654f,i C
A •
Notes:
G 1. Service conditions such as immersion in fresh or salt water, exposure to specific chemicals, or a sustained high temperature I
(over 150ºF (66ºC)) may limit the choice of filler metals. AFM ER5183, ER5356, ER5556, and ER5654 are not recommended
for sustained elevated temperature service.
T 2. Recommendations in this table apply to gas shielded arc welding processes. For oxyfuel gas welding, only AFM ER1188, ER1100, N
S ER4043, ER4047, and ER4145 filler metals are ordinarily used. •
T 3. Where no filler metal is listed, the base metal combination is not recommended for welding. K
a. AFM ER4145 may be used for some applications.
b. AFM ER4047 may be used for some applications.
A c. AFM ER4043 may be used for some applications.
d. AFM ER5183, ER5356, or ER5556 may be used. S
E e. AFM ER2319 may be used for some applications. It can supply high strength when the weldment is postweld solution heat •
R treated and aged.
E
O f. AFM ER5183, ER5356, ER5554, and ER5654 may be used. In some cases, they provide
(1) improved color match after anodizing treatment, (2) highest weld ductility, and (3) higher weld strength.
AFM ER5554 is suitable for sustained elevated temperature service.
M g. AFM ER4643 will provide high strength in 1/2 in. (12mm) and thicker groove welds in 6XXX base alloys when postweld
solution heat treated and aged. S
A
h. Filler metal with the same analysis as the base metal is sometimes used. The following wrought filler metals possess the same •
I chemical composition limits as cast filler alloys: ER4009 and R4009 as RC355.0; ER4010 and R4010 as R-A356.0; and R4011
W
N as R-A357.0.
i. Base metal alloys 5254 and 5652 are used for hydrogen peroxide service. AFM ER5654 filler metal is used for welding both
alloys for service temperatures below 150ºF (66ºC).
I j. AFM ER1100 may be used for some applications.
F
N
C
F
W
O
174
A T
L O
M B
Aluminum Alloys
C C
Aluminum Welding Wires Chemical Compositions
B •
T Alloy Al Mg Fe + Si Fe Si Cu Mn Zn Ti Cr Be S
99.0 0.095
1100 - - - 0.05 ~ 0.20 0.05 0.10 - - -
Min. Max
2319 Rem 0.02 - 0.30 0.20 5.80 ~ 6.80 0.20 ~ 0.40 0.10 0.10 ~ 0.20 - -
B L
4043 Rem 0.05 - 0.80 4.50 ~ 6.00 0.30 0.05 0.10 0.20 - -
R •
4047 Rem 0.10 - 0.80 11.00 ~ 13.00 0.30 0.15 - - - -
Z 5356 Rem 4.50 ~ 5.50 - 0.40 0.25 0.10 0.05 ~ 0.20 0.10 0.06 ~ 0.20 0.05 ~ 0.20 -
A
5183 Rem 4.30 ~ 5.20 - 0.40 0.40 0.10 0.50 ~ 1.00 0.25 0.15 0.05 ~ 0.25 -
5554 Rem 2.4 ~ 3.0 - 0.40 0.25 0.10 0.50 ~ 1.00 0.25 0.05 ~ 0.20 0.05 ~ 0.20 -
T 5556 Rem 4.70 ~ 5.50 - 0.40 0.25 0.10 0.50 ~ 1.00 0.25 0.05 ~ 0.20 0.05 ~ 0.20 - H
I 4145 Rem 0.15 - 0.80 9.0 ~ 10.70 3.30 ~ 4.70 0.15 0.20 - 0.15 - •
T F
Standard Diameters & Packages

M C
0.030” 0.035” 3/64” 1/16” 3/32” 1/8” 5/32”
A Package
(0.8 mm) (0.9 mm) (1.2 mm) (1.6 mm) (2.4 mm) (3.2 mm) (4.0 mm) •
G 1 Lb Spool I
16 Lb Spool
10 Lb Tube (36”)
T N
S 44 Lb Spools, 88 Lb Reels & 15 Lb Coils are also available upon request. •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
175
A T
L O
M B
Cobalt Alloys
C C
AFM 1C ECoCr-C AWS/SFA A5.13 ECoCr-C 177
AFM 6C ECoCr-A AWS/SFA A5.13 ECoCr-A 178
B AFM 12C ECoCr-B AWS/SFA A5.13 ECoCr-B 179 L
R AFM 21C ECoCr-E AWS/SFA A5.13 ECoCr-E 180 •
Z A
Bare Wires
T H
I •
AFM 1B ERCoCr-C AWS/SFA A5.21 ERCoCr-C 177
T F
AFM 1M ERCCoCr-C AWS/SFA A5.21 ERCCoCr-C 177
AFM 6B ERCoCr-A AWS/SFA A5.21 ERCoCr-A 178
M AFM 6M ERCCo-Cr-A AWS/SFA A5.21 ERCCo-Cr-A 178 C

A AFM 12B ERCoCr-B AWS/SFA A5.21 ERCoCr-B 179 •
G AFM 12M ERCCoCr-B AWS/SFA A5.21 ERCCoCr-B 179 I
AFM 21B ERCoCr-E AWS/SFA A5.21 ERCoCr-E 180
AFM 21M ERCCoCr-E AWS/SFA A5.21 ERCCoCr-E 180
T N
S •
T Typical Physical and Mechanical Properties - Cobalt Alloys 181 K
Preheat & Postheat Treatment - Cobalt Alloys 182
A Welding Parameters & Data - Cobalt Alloys 182
S
E
•
R
E
O
Click to Download
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
176
A T
L O
M B
Cobalt Alloys
C AFM 1B ERCoCr-C C
B •
T AFM 1M ERCCoCr-C AFM 1C ECoCr-C S
AWS/SFA A5.21 AWS/SFA A5.13
Description:
B AFM #1 Cobalt is designed for applications that require extreme abrasion resistance at elevated temperatures, L
R but where impact resistance is not a consideration. •
Z It has a higher carbon and tungsten content than other cobalt alloys causing the weld deposit to have a higher A
volume of carbides within its microstructure.
Although the weld deposits of AFM #1 Cobalt are not as “tough” as those of AFM #6 Cobalt, they are much
harder and have excellent resistance to solid particle erosion.
T H
I Typical Applications: •
T Seals, rotors, steam turbine parts, mixer blades, extrusion dies, saw blades, rolling mill guides, pump F
impellers, carbon scrapers, engine crossheads, hydrapulper disc parts.
Chemical Composition Requirements (%):

M C
A AFM 1B ERCoCr-C: •
G C Mn Si Cr Ni I
2.00 ~ 3.00 1.00 2.00 26.00 ~ 33.00 3.00
Mo Fe W Co Total Other
T 1.00 3.00 11.00 ~ 14.00 Bal. 0.50 N
S •
AFM 1M ERCCoCr-C:
T K
C Mn Si Cr Ni
2.00 ~ 3.00 2.00 2.00 25.00 ~ 33.00 3.00
A Mo Fe W Co Total Other S
E 1.00 5.00 11.00 ~ 14.00 Bal. 1.00 •
R
AFM 1C ECoCr-C: E
O
C Mn Si Cr Ni
M 1.70 ~ 3.00 2.00 2.00 25.00 ~ 33.00 3.00
Mo Fe W Co Total Other S
A
1.00 5.00 11.00 ~ 14.00 Bal. 1.00 •
I
W
N Available Sizes:
Bare & Coated Wire
I
3/32” 2.4 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm F
N
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/4” 6.4 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm
S
C
F M D
5/32” 4.0 mm 5/16” 8.0 mm W
O S
177
A T
L O
M B
Cobalt Alloys
C AFM 6B ERCoCr-A C
B •
T AFM 6M ERCCoCr-A AFM 6C ECoCr-A S
Description:
B AFM #6 Cobalt is our most popular and useful cobalt alloy, offering excellent balance between impact, heat, L
R corrosion and metal-tometal abrasion resistance. •
Z It offers outstanding anti-galling properties, superior high temperature hardness and resistance to cavitation A
erosion making it perfect to use as valve trim in steam engines or repairing worn machine parts.
It is ideal for many hardsurfacing applications because of its resistance to mechanical and chemical degrada-
tion at extreme temperatures.
T H
T High pressure-high temperature valves, agitators, chain saw bars, digestors, hot oil pump parts, extruder F
screws, scraper knives, hot trimming dies, hot punches.

M C
A AFM 6B ERCoCr-A: •
G C Mn Si Cr Ni I
0.90 ~ 1.40 1.00 2.00 26.00 ~ 32.00 3.00
T 1.00 3.00 7.00 ~ 9.50 Bal. 0.50 N
S •
AFM 6M ERCCoCr-A:
T K
C Mn Si Cr Ni
0.70 ~ 1.40 2.00 2.00 25.00 ~ 32.00 3.00
E 1.00 5.00 3.00 ~ 6.00 Bal. 1.00 •
R
AFM 6C ECoCr-A: E
O
C Mn Si Cr Ni
M 0.70 ~ 1.40 2.00 2.00 25.00 ~ 32.00 3.00
A
1.00 5.00 3.00 ~ 6.00 Bal. 1.00 •
I
W
N Available Sizes:
Bare & Coated Wire
I 3/32” 2.4 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm F
N
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/4” 6.4 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm S
C
F M D
5/32” 4.0 mm 5/16” 8.0 mm W
O S
178
A T
L O
M B
Cobalt Alloys
C
B
AFM 12B ERCoCr-B C
•
T AFM 12M ERCCoCr-B AFM 12C ECoCr-B S
Description:
B AFM #12 Cobalt is similar to AFM #6 Cobalt, however AFM #12 Cobalt offers greater resistance to hot and L
R cold abrasion at elevated temperatures. •
Z Weld deposits are harder than AFM #6 Cobalt deposits because of a higher carbide volume within A
its microstructure.
It is excellent for abrasion and corrosion resistance, but only moderate impact.
It is commonly used for cutting edges.
T H
T Tipping saw blades, chipping knives, paper slitters, cutter rolls, drawing dies, turbine blades, impeller pumps, F
conveyor screws, valve seats, cold working tools.

M C
A AFM 12B ERCoCr-B: •
G C Mn Si Cr Ni I
1.20 ~ 1.70 1.00 2.00 26.00 ~ 32.00 3.00
T 1.00 3.00 7.00 ~ 9.50 Bal. 0.50 N
S •
AFM 12M ERCCoCr-B:
T K
C Mn Si Cr Ni
1.20 ~ 2.00 2.00 2.00 25.00 ~ 32.00 3.00
E 1.00 5.00 7.00 ~ 10.00 Bal. 1.00 •
R
AFM 12C ECoCr-B: E
O
C Mn Si Cr Ni
M 1.00 ~ 1.70 2.00 2.00 25.00 ~ 32.00 3.00
A
1.00 5.00 7.00 ~ 9.50 Bal. 1.00 •
I
W
N Available Sizes:
Bare & Coated Wire
I 3/32” 2.4 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm F
N
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/4” 6.4 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm S
C
F M D
5/32” 4.0 mm 5/16” 8.0 mm W
O S
179
A T
L O
M B
Cobalt Alloys
C
B
AFM 21B ERCoCr-E C
•
T AFM 21M ERCCoCr-E AFM 21C ECoCr-E S
B Description: L
R AFM #21 Cobalt offers excellent high temperature strength and stability. •
The addition of molybdenum gives it work hardening capability, making AFM #21 Cobalt excellent for hit
Z trimming dies, extrusion dies and hot shears.
A
It has good anti-galling properties and excellent resistance to cavitation erosion and corrosion thereby making
AFM #21 Cobalt an excellent choice for fluid seats.
T H
Hot forming dies, hot working tools, pump shafts, high pressure-high temperature valves, valve seats, mixer
T F
blades, mill cutters, pump mill screws, gas turbines.

M C
A AFM 21B ERCoCr-E: •
G C Mn Si Cr Ni I
0.15 ~ 0.45 1.5 1.5 25.00 ~ 30.00 1.50 ~ 4.00
T 4.50 ~ 7.00 3.00 0.50 Bal. 0.50 N
S •
AFM 12M ERCCoCr-E:
T K
C Mn Si Cr Ni
0.15 ~ 0.40 2.00 1.50 25.00 ~ 30.00 1.50 ~ 4.00
E 4.50 ~ 7.00 5.00 0.50 Bal. 1.00 •
R
AFM 21C ECoCr-E: E
O
C Mn Si Cr Ni
M 0.15 ~ 0.40 1.50 2.00 24.00 ~ 29.00 2.00 ~ 4.00
A
4.50 ~ 6.50 5.00 0.50 Bal. 1.00 •
I
W
N Available Sizes:
Bare & Coated Wire
I 3/32” 2.4 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm F
N
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/4” 6.4 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm S
C
F M D
5/32” 4.0 mm 5/16” 8.0 mm W
O S
180
A T
L O
M B
Cobalt Alloys
C C
B Typical Physical & Mechanical Properties •
T AFM #1 Bare AFM #6 Bare AFM #12 Bare AFM #21 Bare S
Alloy
AFM #1 CTD AFM #6 CTD AFM #12 CTD AFM #21 CTD
52 ~ 55 42 – 45 48 – 51
Oxyfuel N/A
B 1 Layer 1 Layer 1 Layer L
R Hardness
TIG
51 – 54 40 – 43 46 – 49 25 – 27 2 Layers •
Rockwell C 2 Layers 2 Layers 2 Layers 45 Work Hardened
Z A
50 – 53 39 – 42 41 – 44 24 – 26 2 Layers
Metal Arc
2 Layers 2 Layers 2 Layers 45 Work Hardened
Metal to Metal Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent
T Not
H
I Impact Excellent Good Excellent •
Recommended
T Wear Erosion Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent F
Resistance
Corrosion Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent
Cold Abrasion Excellent Good Excellent Good
M Hot Abrasion Excellent Good Excellent Goo C
A Machinability
Use Carbide Use Carbide Use Carbide Use Carbide •
G Tools Tools Tools Tools I
Density Lbs/in³ 0.312 0.303 0.308 0.300
Melting Point 2,300 ºF 2,350 ºF 2,345 ºF 2,460 ºF
T Tensile Strength 111,000 psi 134,000 psi 141,000 psi 117,000 psi N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
181
A T
L O
M B
Cobalt Alloys
C C
B
Preheat & Postheat Treatment* •
T Base Metal Preheat Temp. Postheat Temp. S
Low Carbon Steel (up to 0.40% C) for thin sections only Not Required Air-Cool
Low Carbon Steel (up to 0.40% C) for thick sections only and
B High Carbon Steel (over 0.40% C) for thin sections only and 200 ºF ~ 600 ºF Slow-Cool L
R Low Alloy Steel (up to 10% alloy) for thin sections only •
Z High Carbon Steel (over 0.40% C) for thick sections only and A
300 ºF ~ 600 ºF Slow-Cool
Low Alloy Steel (up to 10% alloy) for thick sections only
Air-Quench Steels 1,100 ºF ~ 1,200 ºF Slow-Cool
High Chromium-Nickel (Austenitic) Stainless Steels
T (304, 309, 316, etc.) thin sections only
Not Required Air-Cool H
I High Chromium-Nickel (Austenitic) Stainless Steels •
200 ºF ~ 500 ºF Slow-Cool
T (304, 309, 316, etc.) thick sections only F
Maintain at 400º ~ 600ºF for
High Chromium (Martensitic) Stainless Steels 4 hrs. per inch thickness,
400 ºF ~ 600 ºF
(410, 416, 420, etc.) thick sections only then reduce heat 90ºF per
M hour till cool
C
A Maintain at 200º ~ 600ºF for
•
G High Chromium (Ferritic) Stainless Steel 4 hrs. per inch thickness, I
200 ºF ~ 600 ºF
(430, 442, 446, etc.) thick sections only then reduce heat 90ºF per
hour till cool
T High Temperature Nickel Alloys N
200 ºF ~ 500 ºF Stress-Relieve
(400, 600, 601, 625, 718, etc.)
S •
T *In many cases, preheating or postheat treatment is not necessary. However, it will reduce the chances of cracking in both the base K
metal and the weld deposit. The preheat or postheat temperatures will depend upon the carbon content of the base metal.
The higher the carbon content – the higher the preheat temperature
A
S
E
Welding Parameters & Data •
R
E
O
Recommended Current Settings (SMA) Approximate Coverage Per Pound of Cobalt Alloy
(Coated)
M Thickness of Pounds Per Square Inch
Diameter
DC+
AC Deposit (in.) Bare Coated S
A (reverse polarity)
•
I 1/8” 85 ~ 100 90 ~ 120
1/8” 26 18
3/16” 17 12 W
N 5/32” 120 ~ 150 135 ~ 160 1/4” 13 9
3/16” 150 ~ 175 160 ~ 180
I 1/4” 200 ~ 250 220 ~ 270
F
N
C
F
W
O
182
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C C
AFM Phosphorous Bronze C AWS/SFA A5.6 ECuSn-C 184
AFM Aluminum Bronze A2 AWS/SFA A5.6 ECuAl-A2 185
B L
R •
Z Bare Wires A
AFM Deoxidized Copper AWS/SFA A5.7 ERCu 186
T H
AFM Silicon Bronze AWS/SFA A5.7 ERCuSi-A 187
I •
AFM Alum-Bronze A1 AWS/SFA A5.7 ERCuA1-A1 188
T F
AFM Alum-Bronze A2 AWS/SFA A5.7 ERCuAl-A2 189
AFM 40 AWS/SFA A5.7 ERCuNiMnAl 190
M AFM 46 AWS/SFA A5.7 ERCuNiA1 191 C

A AFM Phos-Bronze A AWS/SFA A5.7 ERCuSn-A 192 •
G I
Bare Wires
T AFM Product AWS Classification Page N
S AFM Low Fuming Bronze AWS/SFA A5.8 RBCuZn-C 193 •
T AFM Nickel Silver AWS/SFA A5.8 RBCuZn-D 194 K
A
S
E
•
R Click to Download
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
183
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C C
B AFM Phosphorous Bronze C •
T AWS/SFA A5.6 Class ECuSn-C S
Description:
AFM Phosphorous Bronze C electrodes are used to join phosphor bronzes of similar compositions.
B It is also useful for joining brasses and, in some cases, for welding them to cast iron and carbon steel. L
R The higher tin content in AFM Phosphorous Bronze C results in weld metals of higher hardness, tensile •
Z and yield strength than in the Phosphorous Bronze A weld metal. A
The weld metals tend to flow sluggishly, requiring preheat and interpass temperatures of at least 400ºF (205ºC)
on heavy sections.
Postweld heat treatment may not be necessary, but it is desirable for maximum ductility, particularly
T H
if the weld metal is cold worked.
I •
T Chemical Composition Requirements (%): F
Cu* Zn Sn Mn Fe Si
Bal. (a) 7.00 ~ 9.00 (a) 0.25 (a)
M Ni** P Al Pb Total Other C
A (a) 0.05 ~ 0.35 0.01 0.02 0.50 •
G *including Silver (Ag) I
**including cobalt (Co)
a. These elements must be included in Total Other elements.
T N
S •
T Mechanical Property Requirements (Min.): K
psi 40,000
Tensile Strength
A MPa 280
Elongation in. 4 x D S
E 20
gage length, (%) •
R
E
O
Standard Sizes:
M 3/32” 2.4 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm S
A 1/8” 3.2 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm •
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
184
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C C
B AFM Aluminum Bronze A2 •
T AWS/SFA A5.6 Class ECuAl-A2 S
Description:
AFM Aluminum Bronze A2 is used for joining aluminum bronzes of similar composition, high strength
B copper-zinc alloys, silicon bronzes, manganese bronzes, some nickel alloys, many ferrous metals and alloys, L
R and combinations of dissimilar metals. •
Z It is also suitable for surfacing wear- and corrosion-resistant bearing surfaces. A
It is used only in the flat position.
Applications:
T For butt joints, a 90 degree single V-groove is recommended for plate thicknesses up to and including H
I 7/16 in. (11 mm), and a modified U- or double V-groove is recommended for the heavier plate thicknesses. •
T F
Preheat and interpass temperature should be as follows:
For iron-base materials, 200 to 300ºF (95 to 150ºC).

M For bronzes, 300 to 400ºF (150 to 210ºC). C
A For brasses, 500 to 600ºF (260 to 315ºC). •
G I
Cu* Zn Sn Mn Fe
Bal. (a) (a) (a) 0.50 ~ 5.00
T N
Si Ni** Al Pb Total Other
S •
1.50 (a) 6.50 ~ 9.00 0.02 0.50
T *including Silver (Ag) K
**including cobalt (Co)
a. These elements must be included in Total Other elements.
A All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. S
E
•
R Mechanical Property Requirements (Min.): E
O psi 60,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 410
M Elongation in. 4 x D
20 S
A gage length, (%)
•
I
W
N
Standard Sizes:
I 3/32” 2.4 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm
1/8” 3.2 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
185
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C AFM Deoxidized Copper C

B AWS/SFA A5.7 Class ERCu •
T S
Description:
AFM Deoxidized Copper is generally used for the welding of deoxidized and elecrolytic tough pitch copper.
B Reactions with hydrogen in oxygenfree copper, and the segregation of copper oxide in tough pitch copper may L
detract from joint efficiency.
R It can be used to weld these base metals when the highest quality is not required.
•
Z A
Applications:
For thick base metals, gas metal arc welding (GMAW) is preferred.
T Conventional joint designs consistent with good welding practice are generally satisfactory. H
I An external source of preheating generally is not needed when welding base metal 1/4” (6.4mm) and thinner •
T in thickness. F
Preheating in the range of 400 to 1000ºF (205 to 540ºC) is desirable when welding base metal thicker than
1/4” (6.4mm) if high-quality welds are to be obtained.
M Chemical Composition Requirements (%): C

A Cu* Sn Mn Si •
G 98.00 Min. 1.00 1.00 0.50 I
P Al Pb Total Other
0.15 0.01 0.02 0.50
T *including Silver (Ag) N
T K
Hardness & Tensile Strength:
psi 25,000
A Minimum Tensile Strength
MPa 172 S
E
Brinell Hardness, Rockwell F •
R 25
(average value for an as-welded deposit) E
O
M Standard Sizes:
0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm S
A
0.045” 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm •
I
W
N 1/16” 1.6 mm
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
186
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C AFM Silicon Bronze C

B AWS/SFA A5.7 Class ERCuSi-A •
T S
Description:
AFM Silicon Bronze is a copper-base alloy containing approximately 3 percent of silicon, it may also contain
B small percentages of manganese, tin, or zinc. L
It is used for gas tungsten (GTAW) and gas metal arc welding (GMAW) of coppersilicon and copper-zinc base
R metals, to themselves and also to steel.
•
Z A
Applications:
When gas metal arc welding (GMAW) with AFM Silicon Bronze, it is generally best to keep the weld pool
T small and the interpass temperature below 150ºF (65ºC) to minimize hot cracking. H
The use of narrow weld passes reduces contraction stresses and also permits faster cooling through
I •
the hot-short temperature range.
T When gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW), best results are obtained by keeping the weld pool small. F
Preheating is not required.
Welding can be done in all positions, but the flat position is preferred.
M C
A Chemical Composition Requirements (%): •
G Cu* Zn Sn Mn Fe I
Bal. 1.00 1.00 1.50 0.50
Si Al Pb Total Other
T 2.80 ~ 4.00 0.01 0.02 0.50 N
S *including Silver (Ag) •
T K
A psi 50,000
Minimum Tensile Strength S
E MPa 345
•
R Brinell Hardness,
80 ~ 100 E
O (average value for an as-welded deposit)
M Standard Sizes: S
A 0.023” 0.6 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm •
I 0.030” 0.8 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm W
N
0.035” 0.9 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm
I 0.045” 1.2 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
187
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C C
B AFM Alum-Bronze A1 •
T AWS/SFA A5.7 Class ERCuA1-A1 S
Description:
AFM Aluminum Bronze A1is an iron-free aluminum bronze.
B It is recommended for use as a surfacing metal for wear-resistant surfaces having relatively light loads, L
R for resistance to corrosive media such as salt or brackish water, and for resistance to many commonly used •
Z acids in varying concentrations and temperatures. A
It is not recommended for joining.

T H
Cu* Zn Mn Si
I •
Bal. 0.20 0.50 0.10
T F
Al Pb Total Other
6.00 ~ 8.50 0.02 0.50
*including Silver (Ag)
A •
G I
psi 55,000
Minimum Tensile Strength
T MPa 345 N
S Brinell Hardness, •
80 ~ 110
T (average value for an as-welded deposit) K
A Standard Sizes: S
E 0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
•
R 0.045” 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm E
O 1/16” 1.6 mm
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
188
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C C
B AFM Alum-Bronze A2 •
T AWS/SFA A5.7 Class ERCuA1-A2 S
Description:
AFM Aluminum Bronze A2 is an iron-bearing aluminum bronze and is generally used for joining alumi-
B num bronzes of similar composition, manganese, silicon bronzes, some copper-nickel alloys, ferrous metals L
R and dissimilar metals. •
Z The most common dissimilar metal combinations are aluminum bronze to steel and copper to steel. A
It is used to provide wear- and corrosion-resistant surfaces.
T Cu* Zn Fe Si H
I Bal. 0.02 1.50 0.10 •
T Al Pb Total Other F
8.50 ~ 11.00 0.02 0.50
A Hardness & Tensile Strength: •
G psi 60,000 I
MPa 414
Brinell Hardness (GTAW only)
130 ~ 150
T (average value for an as-welded deposit) N
S •
T K
Standard Sizes:
0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
A 0.045” 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm S
E
1/16” 1.6 mm •
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
189
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C C
B AFM 40 •
T AWS /SFA A5.7 ERCuNiMnAl S
Description:
AFM 40 manganese-nickel-aluminum bronze filler metal used for joining and repairing of cast or wrought
B base metals of similar composition. L
R This filler metal may also be used for surfacing applications where high resistance to corrosion, erosion, •
Z or cavitation is required. A

T Cu* Zn Mn Fe Pb H
I Bal. 0.15 11.00 ~ 14.00 2.00 ~ 4.00 0.02 •
T Al Si Ni** Total Other F
7.00 ~ 8.50 0.10 1.50 ~ 3.00 0.50
M **including Cobalt (Co) C
•
G I
psi 75,000
T Minimum Tensile Strength N
MPa 515
S •
T 160 ~ 200 K
(average value for an as-welded deposit)
A
S
E Standard Sizes: •
R 0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
E
O 0.045” 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm
1/16” 1.6 mm
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
190
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C C
B AFM 46 •
T AWS/SFA A5.7 Class ERCuNiA1 S
Description:
AFM 46 nickel-aluminum bronze is used for joining and repairing of cast or wrought nickel-aluminum
B bronze base metals. L
R •
Z Chemical Composition Requirements (%): A
Cu* Zn Mn Fe Si
Bal. 0.10 0.60 ~ 3.50 3.00 ~ 5.00 0.10
T Ni** Al Pb Total Other H
I 4.00 ~ 5.50 8.50 ~ 9.50 0.02 0.50 •
T *including Silver (Ag) F
**including Cobalt (Co)
M C
A •
G Hardness & Tensile Strength: I
psi 72,000
MPa 480
T Brinell Hardness (GTAW only) N
160 ~ 200
S •
T K
Standard Sizes:
A 0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
S
E 0.045” 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm
•
R 1/16” 1.6 mm
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
191
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C C
B AFM Phos-Bronze A •
T AWS/SFA A5.7 Class ERCuSn-A S
Description:
AFM Phosphorous Bronze A contains about 5 % tin and up to 0.35 % phosphorous added as a deoxidizer.
B Tin increases wear resistance of the weld metal and slows the rate of solidification by broadening L
R the temperature differential between the liquidus and solidus. •
Z This slower solidification increases the tendency to hot shortness. A
To minimize this effect, the weld pool should be kept small and welding time as short as possible.
AFM Phosphorous Bronze A can be used to weld bronze and brass. It also can be used to weld copper
if the presence of tin in the weld is not objectionable.
T H
I •
T F
Cu* Sn P
Bal. 4.00 ~ 6.00 0.10 ~ 0.35
Al Pb Total Other
M C
0.01 0.02 0.50
A *including Silver (Ag) •
T Hardness & Tensile Strength: N

S psi 35,000 •
T MPa 240 K
70 ~ 85
A
S
E
•
R Standard Sizes: E
O 0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
0.045” 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm
M
1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
192
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C C
B AFM Low Fuming Bronze •
T AWS/SFA A5.8 RBCuZn-C S
Description:
AFM Low Fuming Bronze is a brazing alloy used on steels, copper, copper alloys, nickel, nickel alloys,
B and stainless steel. It is used with the torch, furnace, and induction brazing processes. L
R Fluxing is required, and a borax-boric acid flux is commonly used. Joint clearances •
Z from 0.002 to 0.005 in. (0.05 to 0.13 mm) are suitable. A

T Cu Zn Sn Fe Mn H
I 56.00 ~ 60.00 Bal. 0.80 ~ 1.10 0.25 ~ 1.20 0.01 ~ 0.50 •
T Pb (a) Al (a) Si Total Other F
0.05 0.01 0.04 ~ 0.15 0.50
a. The total of these elements shall not exceed the value specified in Total Other.
M C
A •
G Nominal Temperature Ranges: I
Solidus Liquidus Brazing Temperature Range
ºF ºC ºF ºC ºF ºC
T 1,590 866 1,630 888 1,670 ~ 1,750 910 ~ 954 N
S •
T K
Standard Sizes:
1/16” 1.6 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm
A
3/32” 2.4 mm 1/4” 6.4 mm S
E
1/8” 3.2 mm 5/16” 8.0 mm •
R
5/32” 4.0 mm 3/8” 9.5 mm E
O
M Also available in Flux Coated Bronze:

Standard Sizes: S
A
3/32” 2.4 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm •
I
1/8” 3.2 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm W
N
10 Lb Tubes / 50 Lb Master Carton
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
193
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C C
B AFM Nickel Silver •
T AWS/SFA A5.8 Class RBCuZn-D S
Description:
AFM Nickel Silver is a brazing filler metal primarily used for brazing tungsten carbide.
B It is also used with steel, nickel, and nickel alloys. L
R It can be used with all brazing processes. •
Z It is unsuitable for furnace brazing in a protective atmosphere. A

T Cu Zn Ni P H
I 46.00 ~ 50.00 Bal. 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.25 •
T Pb (a) Al (a) Si Total Other F
0.05 0.01 0.04 ~ 0.25 0.50
a. The total of these elements shall not exceed the value specified in Total Other.
A •
G Nominal Temperature Ranges: I
Solidus Liquidus Brazing Temperature Range
ºF ºC ºF ºC ºF ºC
T 1,690 921 1,715 935 1,720 ~ 1,800 938 ~ 982 N
S •
T K
Standard Sizes:
1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm
A 3/32” 2.4 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm S
E
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/4” 6.4 mm •
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
194
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C C
T AFM ERTi-1 AWS/SFA A5.16 196 S
AFM ERTi-2 AWS/SFA A5.16 197
AFM ERTi-5 AWS/SFA A5.16 198
B AFM ERTi-7 AWS/SFA A5.16 199 L
R AFM ERT1-23 AWS/SFA A5.16 200 •
Z A
Welding Considerations - Titanium Alloys 201

T H
Specification Cross Index - Titanium Alloys 202 ~ 203
I •
Guide to Choice of Filler for General Titanium Welding 204 ~ 205
T F
Chemical Composition Requirements for Titanium and Titanium Alloy 206 ~ 207
M C
A •
G I
Click to Download
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
195
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C
B
AFM ERTi-1 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.16
T S
Description:
AFM ERTi-1 (Grade 1) is the lowest strength unalloyed (or Commercially Pure-CP) grade.
B L
Applications:
R AFM ERTi-1 (Grade 1) is used in applications where ductility is paramount, such as explosive cladding, •
Z loose linings, expanded metal, and deep drawing applications. A
It is also used in electrolytic applications like coated anode substrates for production of chlorine and sodium
chlorate.
T * ERTi-1 is no longer recommended for Grade 2 in structural applications. H
I •
C O N H Fe
0.03 0.03 ~ 0.10 0.012 0.005 0.08
M Al V Pd Ru Ni C
A - - - - - •
* All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted.
G I
Standard Sizes:
T 0.030” 0.035” 0.045” 1/16” 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” N
S 0.8 mm 0.9 mm 1.2 mm 1.6 mm 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
196
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C
B
AFM ERTi-2 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.16
T S
Description:
AFM ERTi-2 (Grade 2) is the “workhorse” of the industrial corrosion market and most common unalloyed
B (or Commercially Pure-CP) grade. L
It is generally the most readily available in all product forms and has the lowest cost.
R •
Z Applications: A
AFM ERTi-2 (Grade 2) is used for process equipment like pressure vessels, columns, tanks, heat exchangers,
shafts, blowers and fans, condenser tubing, valves. fittings. and pipe.chlorate.
T * ERTi-2 is no longer recommended for Grade 3 in structural applications. H
I •
C O N H Fe
0.03 0.08 ~ 0.16 0.015 0.008 0.12
M Al V Pd Ru Ni C
A - - - - - •
G I
Standard Sizes:
T 0.030” 0.035” 0.045” 1/16” 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” N
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
197
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C
B
AFM ERTi-5 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.16
T S
Description:
AFM ERTi-5 (Grade 5, Ti 6Al-4V), commonly called “6-4,” is the most common and widely used alloy
B grade due to its relatively low cost and good availability. L
It has a UTS of 130,000 psi [895 MPa] minimum, good weldability, and can be heat treated to a higher strength
R •
or toughness.
Z A
Applications:
AFM ERTi-5 (Grade 5) is used in aircraft components such as landing gear, wing spars, and compressor
T blades. H
I Its corrosion resistance is generally comparable to Grade 2 and it is often used in corrosion service where •
higher strength is required, particularly in shafts, high strength bolting, and keys.
T Also its high strength, ability to be heat treated, weldability, excellent fatigue strength, and hardness make
F
this alloy excellent for industrial fans, pressure vessels, aircraft components, compressor blades,
and automotive and jet engine parts.
M C
G C O N H Fe I
0.05 0.12 ~ 0.20 0.03 0.015 0.22
Al V Pd Ru Ni
T 5.5 ~ 6.75 3.5 ~ 4.5 - - - N
S * All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. •
T K
Standard Sizes:
0.030” 0.035” 0.045” 1/16” 3/32” 1/8” 5/32”
A 0.8 mm 0.9 mm 1.2 mm 1.6 mm 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
198
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C
B
AFM ERTi-7 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.16
T S
Description:
AFM ERTi-7 (Grade 7) has the same mechanical properties as ERTi-2 (Grade 2).
B The 0.12 wt % palladium addition improves corrosion performance under mildly reducing conditions or L
where crevice or under-deposit corrosion is a problem.
R •
Z Applications: A
AFM ERTi-7 (Grade 7) can be considered for welding ERTi-2 (Grade 2) or 16 where improved corrosion
performance is desired.
T This alloy extends the use of titanium into mildly reducing media, to much higher chloride levels, or where H
I the environment fluctuates between oxidizing and reducing.
•
C O N H Fe
0.03 0.08 ~ 0.16 0.015 0.008 0.12
M C
Al V Pd Ru Ni
A •
- - 0.12 ~ 0.25 - -
G * All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. I
Standard Sizes:
T 0.030” 0.035” 0.045” 1/16” 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” N
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
199
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C
B
AFM ERTi-23 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.16
T S
Description:
AFM ERTi-23 (Grade 23, Ti 6Al-4V) is comparable in chemical composition to Grade 5, but slightly lower
B aluminum and lower levels of oxygen and other interstitial elements improve fabricability, weldability, and L
toughness.
R •
Z Applications: A
AFM ERTi-23 (Grade 23) is used in many high strength industrial applications such as shafts where very
high strength, but better toughness and fabricability than Grade 5 is desired.
T This grade is often specified for marine and offshore energy production components that are exposed to H
I low temperature seawater due to higher fracture toughness values than Grade 5. •
With special processing, this alloy can develop high fracture toughness.
T Primary uses are in surgical implants, cryogenic vessels, and airframe components.
F
* ERTi-23 (Grade 23) was classified “ERTi-5ELI” formerly.
ELI = Extra Low Interstitial
M C
G C O N H Fe I
0.03 0.03 ~ 0.11 0.012 0.005 0.20
Al V Pd Ru Ni
T 5.5 ~ 6.5 3.5 ~ 4.5 - - - N
S •
T K
Standard Sizes:
0.030” 0.035” 0.045” 1/16” 3/32” 1/8” 5/32”
A
0.8 mm 0.9 mm 1.2 mm 1.6 mm 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
200
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C C
B Welding Considerations •
T S
Titanium and Titanium Alloys can be welded by gas tungsten arc. gas metal arc. plasma arc. and electron beam
welding processes.
Titanium is a reactive metal and is sensitive to emhrittlement by oxygen, nitrogen, and hydrogen, at elevated tempera-
B tures. L
R Consequently, the metal must be protected from atmospheric contamination. •
This can be provided by shielding the metal with welding grade inert gas as specified in A WS A5.32/A5.32M,
Z Specification for Welding Shielding Gases, for classes SG-A or SG-He or by having mixtures of these single shielding gas A
classes surrounding the arc as molten or solidified hot weld metal.
Welding can also be done remotely in a chamber or in a glove hag.
T These chambers can be purged of air and back filled with inert gas, or, if they are rigid gas tight walls, can, be evacuated H
to at least 10-4 torr [0.01 3 Pa] to remove any air contaminants.
I •
T During arc welding, the titanium should be shielded from the ambient air atmosphere until it has cooled below 800°F F
[430°C].
Adequate protection by auxiliary inert gas shielding can be provided when welding is being performed in ambient air
atmosphere.
M Ventilation and exhaust at the arc must be carried out in such a manner that the protective inert gas shielding C
A (arc shielding, trailing shielding, or root shielding) is not impaired. •
G I
The titanium metal should be free of thick oxide and be chemically clean prior to welding, as contamination from oxide,
water, grease, or dirt will also cause embrittlement.
T Titanium welding rods should be chemically dean and free of heavy oxide, absorbed moisture, grease, and dirt. N
S If the hot end of the filler metal is removed from the gas shield prior to cooling and then reused, it contributes to weld •
contamination.
T K
The welding rod should be added by a technique that keeps the hot end within the torch gas blanket.
If the rod tip becomes contaminated, the discolored end should be cut off before reusing.
A Titanium can be successfully fusion welded to zirconium, tantalum, niobium, and vanadium, although the weld metal S
E will be stronger and less ductile than the parent metals.
•
R Titanium should not be fusion welded to other commonly welded metals such as copper, iron, nickel, and aluminum,
as brittle titanium intennetallic alloys are formed which produce extremely brittle welds. E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
201
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C Specification Cross Index - Including Discontinued Titanium Electrodes C

B Base •
Filler Metal
T Metal S
AWS Classfication Aerospace Japan ASTM/
UNS ISO
Materials JIS ASME
Numbers Classficationa
2007 2004 1990 1970 Specification Z3331b Grades
B L
R ERTi-1 ERTi-1 ERTi-1 ERTi-1 R50100 4951 STi-0100 YTx 28 1 •
Z ERTi-2 ERTi-2 ERTi-2 ERTi-2 R50120 - STi-0120 YTx-35 2 A
ERTi-3 ERTi-3 ERTi-3 ERTi-3 R50125 - STi-0125 YTx 49 3
ERTi-4 ERTi-4 ERTi-4 ERTi-4 R50130 - STi-0130 - 4
T ERTi-5 ERTi-5 ERTi-5 ERTi-6Al-4V R56402 4954 STi-6402c YTAx 640 5 H

I ERTi-7 ERTi-7 ERTi-7 ERTi-0.2Pd R52401 - STi-2401 YTx 49Pd 7
•
ERTi-9e ERTi-9ELId ERTi-9ELI ERTi-3Al-2.5V-1 R56321 - STi-6321 - N/A
T F
Ytx 28 Pd,
ERTi-11 ERTi-11 - - R52251 - STi-2251 11
YTx35 PD
ERTi-12 ERTi-12 ERTi-12 - R53401 - STi-3401 - 12
M ERTi-13 ERTi-13 - - R53423 - STi-3423 - 13 C
A ERti-14 ERTi-14 - - R53424 - STi-3424 - 14 •
G ERT--15A ERTi-15A - - R53416 - STi-3416 - 15 I
ERTi-16 ERTi-16 - - R52403 - STi-2403 - 16
ERTi-17 ERTi-17 - - R52253 - STi-2253 - 17
T ERTi-18 ERTi-18 - - R56326 - STi-6326 - 18 N
S ERTi-19 - - - R58641 - STi-8641 c - 19 •
T ERTi-20 - - - R58646 - STi-8646 c - 20 K
ERTi-21 - - - R58211 - c - 21
STi-8211
ERTi-23 ERTi-23 ERTi-5ELI ERTi-6Al-4V-1 R56408 4956 STi-6408 YTAx 640E 23
A ERTi-24 ERTi-24 - - R56415 - STi-6415 - 24 S
E ERTi-25 ERTi-25 - - R56413 - STi-6413 - 25 •
R ERTi-26 ERTi-26 - - R52405 - STi-2405 - 26
E
O ERTi-27 ERTi-27 - - R52255 - STi-2255 - 27
ERTi-28 ERTi-28 - - R56324 - STi-6324 - 28
M ERTi-29 ERTi-29 - - R56414 - STi-6414 - 29
S
A ERTi-30 ERTi-30 - - R53531 - STi-3531 - 30
•
I (Continued)
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
202
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C Specification Cross Index - Including Discontinued Titanium Electrodes C

B Base •
Filler Metal
T Metal S
AWS Classfication Aerospace Japan ASTM/
UNS ISO
Materials JIS ASME
Numbers Classficationa
2007 2004 1990 1970 Specification Z3331b Grades
B L
R ERTi-31 ERTi-31 - - R53533 - STi-3533 - 31 •
Z ERTi-32 ERTi-32 - - R55112 - STi-5112 - 32 A
ERTi-33 ERTi-33 - - R53443 - STi-3443 - 33
ERTi-34 ERTi-34 - - R53444 - STi-3444 - 34
T ERTi-36 - - - R58451 - STi-4841c - 36 H

I •
ERTi-38 - - - R54251 - c - 38
STi-5451
- ERTi-6 ERTi-5Al-2.5Sn R54522 4953 STi-5631 YTAx 525 -
T Discontinued
F
- Discontinued ERTi-6ELI ERTi-5Al-2.5Sn-1 R54523 - STi-5631 - -
- Discontinued ERTi-9 ERTi-3Al-2.5V R56320 - STi-6320 YTAx 325 9
- Discontinued ERTi-15 ERTi-6Al-2Cb-1Ta-1Mo R56210 - STi-5621 - -
M C
- Discontinued ERTi-8Al-1Mo-1V - - - - -
A •
- Discontinued ERTi-13V-11Cr-3Al - - - - -
G I
a
The International system for Ti filler metal specifications has been published as ISO 24034:2005.
Welding Consumables - Solid wires and rods for fusion welding of titanium and titanium alloys - Classification.
The four-digit numbers in most instances are truncatcd from the five-digit UNS R-series numbers.
b
T c
The “x” designates the filler metal form, B = rods, W = wire.
These designation numbers have been proposed for addition to ISO 24034:2005.
N
S d
e
Renamed ERTi-9 in this edition. •
The 2007 ERTi-9 composition ha” been specifically designed for welding Grade 9.
T It replaces the lower interstitial levels of the previous ERTi-9ELI. K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
203
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C Guide to Choice of Filler Metal for General Titanium Welding C

B ASTM Base Metal •
Base Recommended Alternate
T Metal UTS (min.) YS (min.) Normal Filler Filler S
Grade ksi [MPa] ksi [MPa] Compoosition Metal Metals Comments
1 35 [240] 20 [138] Ti (unalloyed) ERTi-1 - -

B ERTi-1 is no longer L
2 50 [345] 40 [275] Ti (unalloyed) ERTi-2 -
R recommended for Grade 2
in structural applications
•
Z 2H 58 [400] 40 [275] Ti (unalloyed) ERTi-2 - Identical to Grade 2 except A
for higher tensile stength
ERTi-2 is no longer
65 [450] 55 [380] Ti (unalloyed) ERTi-3 -
3 recommended for Grade 3
T in structural application H
I 4 80 [550] 70 [483] Ti (unalloyed) ERTi-4 - - •
T F
5 130 [895] 120 [828] Ti 6Al-4V ERTi-5 - -
6 - - - NAa - -
7 50 [345] 40 [275] Ti 0.15Pd ERTi-7 - -
M C
7H 58 [400] 40 [275] Ti 0.15Pd ERTi-7 - Identical to Grade 7 except
A for higher tensile strength •
G - - - - NAa - - I
9 90 [620] 70 [483] Ti 3Al-2.5V ERTi-9 - -
- - - - NAa - -
T 11 35 [240] 20 [138] Ti 0.15Pd ERTi-11 - N
S 12 70 [483] 50 [345] Ti 0.8Ni-0.3Mo ERTi-12 - •
T 13 40 [275] 25 [170] Ti 0.5Ni-0.05Ru ERTi-13 - K
14 60 [410] 40 [275] Ti 0.5Ni-0.05Ru ERTi-14 -
“A” suffix used to distinguish
A 15 70 [483] 55 [380] Ti 0.5Ni-0.05Ru ERTi-15A
from obsolete ERTi-5
S
E composition
ERTi-7 provide comparable •
R 16 50 [345] 40 [275] Ti 0.05Pd ERTi-16 ERTi-7
mechanical properties and E
O equal or better corrosion
resistance
16H 58 [400] 40 [275] Ti 0.05Pd ERTi-16 Identical to Grade 16 except
M for higher tensile strength
S
A 17 35 [240] 20 [138] Ti 0.05Pd ERTi-17 ERTi-11 provides
comparable mechanical •
I properties and equal or better W
N corrosion resistance
18 90 [620] 70 [483] Ti 3Al-2.5V ELI-0.05Pd ERTi-18
I 19 115 [793] 110 [759] Ti 3Al-8V-6Cr-4Zr-4Mo ERTi-19

F
N (Continued)
C
F
W
O
204
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C Guide to Choice of Filler Metal for General Titanium Welding C

B ASTM Base Metal •
Base Recommended Alternate
T Metal UTS (min.) YS (min.) Normal Filler Filler S
Grade ksi [MPa] ksi [MPa] Compoosition Metal Metals Comments
20 115 [793] 110 [759] Ti 3Al-8V-6Cr-4Zr-4Mo-0.05Pd ERTi-20 - -

B 21 115 [793] 110 [759] Ti 3Al-15Mo-2.5Nb-0.2Si ERTi-21 - - L
R - - - - NAa - - •
Z 23 120 [828] 110 [759] Ti 6Al-4V ELI ERTi-23 - - A
24 130 [895] 120 [828] Ti 6Al-4V-0.05Pd ERTi-24 - -
25 130 [895] 120 [828] Ti 6Al-4V-0.5Ni-0.5Pd ERTi-25 - -

T H
I 26 50 [345] 40 [275] Ti 0.10Ru ERTi-26 ERTi-7 ERTi-7 provides comparable
mechanical properties and
•
T equal or better corrosion F
resistance
26H 58 [400] 40 [275] Ti 0.10Ru ERTi-26 ERTi-7 Identical to Grade 26 except

M for higher tensile strength C
A •
G 27 35 [240] 20 [138] Ti 0.10Ru ERTi-27 ERTi-1 ERTi-11 provides
comparable mechanical
I
properties and equal or better
corrosion resistance
T 28 90 [620] 70 [483] Ti 3Al-2.5V ELI-0.10Ru ERTi-28 ERTi-18 ERTi-18 provides

comparable mechanical
N
S properties and comparable •
corrosion resistance
T K
29 120 [828] 110 [759] Ti 6Al-4VELI-0.10Ru ERTi-29 - -
30 50 [345] 40 [275] Ti 0.3Co-0.05Pd ERTi-30 - -
A 31 65 [450] 55 [380] Ti 0.3Co-0.05Pd ERTi-31 - -
S
E 32 100 [689] 85 [586] Ti 5Al-1Sn-1Zr-1V-0.8Mo ERTi-32 - -
•
R 33 50 [345] 40 [275] Ti 0.4Ni-0.015Pd-0.015Ru-0.14Cr ERTi-33 - -
E
O 34 65 [450] 55 [380] Ti 0.4Ni-0.015Pd-0.015Ru-0.14Cr ERTi-34 - -
35 - - - NAa - -
M 36 65 [450] 60 [410] Ti 45Nb ERTi-36 - -
S
A 37 - - - NAa - -
•
I 38 130 [895] 115 [794] Ti 4Al-2.5V-1.5Fe ERTi-38 - -
W
N a
Either there is no current ASTM Grade or no corresponding AWS Filler Metal Grade.
Note: Properties in solution treated condition. Material is normally purchased in this condition and heat treated as required.
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
205
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C Chemical Composition Requirements for Titanium and Titanium-Alloy Electrodes and Rods C
B Weight Percent a,b,c,d
•
T AWS
Classfication
UNS
Numbere C O N H Fe Al V Pd Ru Ni
Other
Elements Amount
S
ERTi-1 R50100 0.03 0.03-0.10 0.012 0.005 0.08 - - - - -
ERTi-2 R50120 0.03 0.08-0.16 0.015 0.008 0.12 - - - - -

B ERTi-3 R50125 0.03 0.13-0.20 0.02 0.008 0.16 - - - - -
L
R ERTi-4 R50130 0.03 0.18-0.32 0.025 0.008 0.25 - - - - -
•
Z ERTi-5 R56402 0.05 0.12-0.20 0.03 0.015 0.22 5.5-6.75 3.5-4.5 - - -
A
ERTi-7 R52401 0.03 0.08-0.16 0.015 0.008 0.12 - - 0.12-0.25 - -
ERTi-9 f
R56321 0.03 0.06-0.12 0.012 0.005 0.20 2.5-3.5 2.0-3.0 - - -
T ERTi-11 R52251 0.03 0.03-0.10 0.012 0.005 0.08 - - 0.12-0.25 - -
H
I ERTi-12 R53401 0.03 0.08-0.16 0.015 0.008 0.15 - - - - 0.6-0.9 Mo 0.2-0.4
•
T ERTi-13 R53423 0.03 0.03-0.10 0.012 0.005 0.08 - - - 0.04-0.06 0.4-0.6
F
ERTi-14 R53424 0.03 0.08-0.16 0.015 0.008 0.12 - - - 0.04-0.06 0.4-0.6
ERTi-15A R53416 0.03 0.13-0.20 0.02 0.008 0.16 - - - 0.04-0.06 0.4-0.6

M ERTi-16 R52403 0.03 0.08-0.16 0.015 0.008 0.12 - - 0.04-0.08 - -
C
A ERTi-17 R52253 0.03 0.03-0.10 0.012 0.005 0.08 - - 0.04-0.08 - -
•
G ERTi-18 R56326 0.03 0.06-0.12 0.012 0.005 0.20 2.5-3.5 2.0-3.0 0.04-0.08 - -
I
ERTi-19 R58641 Mo 3.5-4.5
0.03 0.06-0.10 0.015 0.015 0.20 3.0-4.0 7.5-8.5 - - -
Cr 5.5-6.5
Zr 3.5-4.5
T Mo 3.5-4.5 N
ERTi-20 R58646 0.03 0.06-0.10 0.015 0.015 0.20 3.0-4.0 7.5-8.5 0.04-0.08 - -
S Cr
Zr
5.5-6.5
3.5-4.5
•
T Mo 14.0-16.0 K
ERTi-21 R58211 0.03 0.10-0.15 0.012 0.005 0.20-0.40 2.5-3.5 - - - -
Nb 2.2-3.2
Si 0.15-0.25
A ERTi-23 R56408 0.03 0.03-0.11 0.012 0.005 0.20 5.5-6.5 3.5-4.5 - - -

S
E ERTi-24 R56415 0.05 0.12-0.20 0.03 0.015 0.22 5.5-6.75 3.5-4.5 0.04-0.08 - -
•
R ERTi-25 R56413 0.05 0.12-0.20 0.03 0.015 0.22 5.5-6.75 3.5-4.5 0.04-0.08 - 0.3-0.8
E
O ERTi-26 R52405 0.03 0.08-0.16 0.015 0.008 0.12 - - - 0.08-0.14 -
ERTi-27 R52255 0.03 0.03-0.10 0.012 0.005 0.08 - - - 0.08-0.14 -
M ERTi-28 R56324 0.03 0.06-0.12 0.012 0.005 0.20 2.5-3.5 2.0-3.0 - 0.08-0.14 -
S
A ERTi-29 R56414 0.03 0.03-0.11 0.012 0.005 0.20 5.5-6.5 3.5-4.5 - 0.08-0.14 -
•
I ERTi-30 R53531 0.03 0.08-0.16 0.015 0.008 0.12 - - 0.04-0.08 - - Co 0.20-0.80
W
N ERTi-31 R53533 0.03 0.13-0.20 0.02 0.008 0.16 - - 0.04-0.08 - - Co 0.20-0.80
(Continued)
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
206
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C Chemical Composition Requirements for Titanium and Titanium-Alloy Electrodes and Rods C
B Weight Percent a,b,c,d
•
T AWS
Classfication
UNS
Numbere C O N H Fe Al V Pd Ru Ni
Other
Elements Amount
S
ERTi-32 R55112 0.03 0.05-0.10 0.012 0.008 0.20 4.5-5.5 0.6-1.4 - - - Mo 0.6-1.2
Si 0.06-0.14
Zr 0.6-1.4
B Sn 0.6-1.4 L
R ERTi-33 R53443 0.03 0.08-0.16 0.15 0.008 0.12 - - 0.01-0.02 0.02-0.04 0.35-0.55 Cr 0.1-0.2 •
Z ERTi-34 R53444 0.03 0.13-0.20 0.02 0.008 0.16 - - 0.01-0.02 0.02-0.04 0.35-0.55 Cr 0.1-0.2 A
ERTi-36 R58451 0.03 0.06-0.12 0.02 0.0035 0.03 - - - - - Nb 42.0-47.0
ERTi-38 R54251 0.05 0.20-0.27 0.02 0.010 1.2-1.8 3.5-4.5 2.0-3.0 - - -
T H
I a
Tiumium cunslilulc’ the remainder of 1he composition. •
T b
Single values are maximum. F
c
Analysis of Fe and the interstitial elements C, O, H. and N shall be conducted on samples of filler metal taken after the filler metal has been reduced to its final diameter
and all processing operations have been completed.
Analysis of the other elements may be conducted on these same samples or it may have been conducted on samplestaken from the ingot or the rod stock from which
M the filler metal is made.
In case of dispute, samples from the finished filler metal shall be the refree method.
C
A d
Any element intentionally added (O, Fe, N, and C) must be measured and reported. •
G Residual elements, total, shall not exceed 0.20%, with no single element exceeding 0.05%, except for yttrium, which shall not exceed 0.005%.
Residual elements need not be reported unless specifically required by the purchaser.
I
A residual element is any element present in the metal in small quantities that is inherent in the sponge or scrap additions, but not intentionally added.
In titanium these elements include, among others, aluminum, vanadium, tin, chromium, molybdenum, niobium, zirconium, hafnium, bismuth, ruthenium,
palladium, yttrium, copper, silicon, and cobalt.
T e
SAE HS-1086/ASTM DS-56, Metals & Alloys in the Unified Numbering System. N
f
S ERTi-9 now conforms to the lower interstiltial levels of the previous classfication ERTi-9ELI (AWS A5.16/A5.16M:2004). •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
207
A T
L O
M B
Magnesium Alloys
C C
B Guide to Choice of Filler for General Purpose Welding - Magnesium Alloys 209 ~ 210 •
T Chemical Composition Requirements - Magnesium Alloys 211 S
Welding Considerations - Magnesium Alloy 211
B L
R •
Z A
Please contact us
for MSDS
T H
I •
T F
M C
A •
G I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
208
A T
L O
M B
Magnesium Alloys
C C
B Guide to the Choice of Filler Metal for General Purpose Welding •
T Base AZ31B
S
AM100A AZ10A AZ61A AZ63A AZ80A AZ81A AZ91C AZ92A EK41A EZ33A
Metal AZ31C
AZ101A
AM100A
AZ92A
B AZ61A
L
R AZ10A AZ92A
AZ92A •
Z AZ31B
AZ92A
AZ61A AZ61A A
AZ31C AZ92A AZ92A
AZ61A AZ61A AZ61A
AZ61A AZ92A
AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A
T AZ63A C C C C
AZ61A H
AZ92A
I •
AZ61A AZ61A AZ61A AZ61A
T AZ80A AZ92A
AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A
C
AZ92A F
AZ61A
AZ81A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A C AZ92A
AZ92A
AZ61A
M AZ91C AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A C AZ92A AZ92A
AZ92A C
A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A C AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ101A •
G EK41A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A C AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A EZ33A I
EZ33A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A C AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A EZ33A EZ33A
HK31A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A C AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A EZ33A EZ33A
HM21A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A C AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A EZ33A EZ33A
T N
HM31A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A C AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A EZ33A EZ33A
S HZ32A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A C AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A EZ33A EZ33A
•
T K1A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A C AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A EZ33A EZ33A K
LA141A D D EZ33A C C C C C C D D
M1A AZ61A AZ61A AZ61A AZ61A
A MG1
AZ92A
AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A
C
AZ92A
AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A
S
E QE22A D D EZ33A D C D D D D EZ33A EZ33A
•
R ZE10A AZ92A
AZ61A AZ61A AZ61A
C
AZ61A
AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A
EZ33A EZ33A
AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A E
O ZE41A D D D D C D D D D EZ33A EZ33A
AZ61A AZ61A AZ61A AZ61A
ZK21A AZ92A C AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A
M AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A
S
A (Continued)
•
I
W
N
I Please contact us
for MSDS F
N
C
F
W
O
209
A T
L O
M B
Magnesium Alloys
C C
B Guide to the Choice of Filler Metal for General Purpose Welding (Continued) •
T Base M1A
S
HK31A HM21A HM31A HZ32A K1A LA141A QE22A ZE10A ZE41A ZK21A
Metal MG1
HK31A EZ33A
B HM21A EZ33A EZ33A

L
HM31A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A
R •
HZ32A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A
Z K1A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A
A
LA141A D EZ33A D D D EZ33A
M1A AZ61A
AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A D
T MG1 AZ92A H
QE22A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A C EZ33A
I •
EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A AZ61A EZ33A AZ61A
T ZE10A
AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A
EZ33A
AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A F
ZE41A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A D D EZ33A D EZ33A
AZ61A AZ61A AZ61A
ZK21A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A D AZ92A AZ92A
AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A
M C
A Notes: •
a. When more than one filler metal is given, they are listed in order of preference.
G b. The letter prefix (ER or R), designating usability of the filler metal, has been deleted, to reduce clutter in the table. I
c. Welding not recommended.
d. No data available.
When welding ZH62A, ZK51A, ZK60A, ZK61A; EZ33A is to be used.
T N
S •
T K
A Please contact us
S
E for MSDS
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
210
A T
L O
M B
Magnesium Alloys
C C
B Chemical Composition Requirements •
T AWS Rare Total
S
Mg Al Be Mn Zn Zr Cu Fe Ni Si
Class Earth Other
5.8 ~ 0.0002 ~ 0.15 ~ 0.40 ~
AZ61A REM - - 0.05 0.005 0.005 0.05 0.30
7.2 0.0008 0.5 1.5
B L
8.3 ~ 0.0002 ~ 0.15 ~ 1.7 ~
R AZ92A REM
9.7 0.0008 0.5 2.3
- - 0.05 0.005 0.005 0.05 0.30 •
Z AZ101A REM
9.5 ~ 0.0002 ~ 0.15 ~ 0.75 ~
- - 0.05 0.005 0.005 0.05 0.30
A
10.5 0.0008 0.5 1.25
2.0 ~ 0.45 ~ 2.5 ~
EZ33A REM - 0.0008 - - - - - 0.30
3.1 1.0 4.0
T H
I •
Welding Considerations
T F
Gas tungsten arc and gas metal arc welding are the most commonly used processes for welding magnesium alloys.
Plasma arc welding is also suitable for magnesium alloys.
M Oxyfuel gas welding should be used only for temporary repair work, when suitable arc welding equipment is not C
available.
A •
G Magnesium alloys are welded by the gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW) process using techniques and equipment similar I
to those used for aluminum.
Argon, helium, or mixtures of these gases are used for shielding.
Alternating current is preferred because of a combination of good arc cleaning action and good joint penetration,
T although direct current is also used.
N
S Direct current with the electrode positive provides excellent cleaning action but is limited to thin base metal. •
T Direct current with the electrode negative is sometimes used for mechanized welding with helium shielding gas to K
provide deep joint penetration.
GTAW is generally recommended for the welding of magnesium alloy castings.
A Welding is usually limited to the repair of defects in clean castings.
S
E
The basic principles for gas metal arc welding (GMAW) of magnesium alloys are the same as for other base metals. •
R The higher filler metal deposition rate of this process reduces the welding time, thereby reducing weld distortion and E
O fabrication costs.
Argon is generally used as a shielding gas; occasionally mixtures of argon and helium are used.
Pulsed GMAW and short circuit GMAW are both used for magnesium alloys.
M Higher welding current, to produce spray transfer of the filler metal without pulsing, is also used. S
A Globular transfer is not suitable. •
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
211
A T
L O
M B
Tungsten Alloys
C C
T AFM Pure Tungsten AWS/SFA A5.12 EWP (ISO 6848 - WP) 213 S
AFM 2% Thoriated AWS/SFA A5.12 EWTh-2 (ISO 6848 - WTh 20) 214
AFM 2% Ceriated AWS/SFA A5.12 EWCe-2 (ISO 6848 - WCe 20) 215
B AFM 1.5% Lanthanated AWS/SFA A5.12 EWLA-1.5 (ISO 6848 - WLa 15) 216 L
R •
Z A
Chemical Composition Requirements for Tungsten Electrodes 217
Standard Diameters & Lengths - Tungsten Electrodes 218
T H
Suitability of Current Supply Type - Tungsten Electrodes 219
I •
Approximate Current Ranges depending upon the Electrode Diameter 220
T F
Statement of Commission VII on Health Aspects
221
In The Use of Thoriated Tungsten Electrodes
M C
A •
G I
Click to Download
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
212
A T
L O
M B
Tungsten Alloys
C C
B AFM Pure Tungsten •
T AWS/SFA A5.12 EWP (ISO 6848 -WP) S
Description:
AFM Pure Tungsten electrodes are commercially pure & unalloyed tungsten electrodes.
B (99.5% Tungsten minimum). L
R Their current-carrying capacity is lower than that of other electrodes. •
Z They provide good stability when used with alternating current, either balanced wave or continuously high A
frequency stabilized.
They may be used with direct current and also with either argon or helium, or a combination of both,
as a shielding gas.
T H
They maintain a clean, balled end, which is preferred for aluminum and magnesium welding.
I These electrodes have reasonably good resistance to contamination of the weld metal by the electrode, •
T although the oxide containing electrodes are superior in this respect. F
EWP electrodes are generally used on less critical applications, except for welding aluminum and magnesium.
The lower cost EWP electrodes can be used for less critical applications where some tungsten contamination
M of welds is acceptable. C
A Tip color is Green. •
G I
W Min. 99.5
T Total Other 0.5 N
S •
T Typical Current Ranges: K
Alternating Current Alternating Current
Diameter Unbalance Ware Balanced Ware
A (amps) (amps)
S
E 0.040” (1.0 mm) 20 ~ 60 10 ~ 30
•
R 1/16” (1.6 mm) 50 ~ 100 30 ~ 80
E
O 3/32” (2.4 mm) 100 ~ 160 60 ~ 130
1/8” (3.2 mm) 150 ~ 200 100 ~ 180
M 5/32” (4.0 mm) 200 ~ 275 160 ~ 240
S
A All values are based on the usage of argon gas.
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
213
A T
L O
M B
Tungsten Alloys
C C
B AFM 2% Thoriated •
T AWS/SFA A5.12 EWTh-2 (ISO 6848 -WTh 20) S
Description:
AFM 2% Thoriated Tungsten electrodes have been designed for direct current applications.
B The higher thoria content (1.7–2.2 percent) in the EWTh-2 electrode causes the operating characteristic L
R improvements to be more pronounced than in the lower thoria content EWTh-1. •
Z They have the thoria content dispersed evenly throughout their entire length. A
They maintain a sharpened point well, which is desirable for welding steel.
They can be used on alternating current work, but a satisfactory balled end, which is desirable for the welding
of nonferrous metals, is difficult to maintain.
T H
Should it be desired to use these electrodes for alternating current welding, then balling can be accomplished
I by briefly, and carefully, welding with direct current electrode positive prior to welding with alternating •
T current. F
During alternating current welding, the balled end does not melt and so emission is not as good as from
a liquid ball on a pure tungsten (EWP) electrode.
M Tip color is Red. C
A •
G Chemical Composition Requirements (%): I
W 97.3
ThO2 1.7 ~ 2.2
T Total Other 0.5 N
S •
T Typical Current Ranges: K
DCEN DCEP
Diameter
(DCSP) (amps) (DCRP) (amps)
A
0.040” (1.0 mm) 15 ~ 80 Not Applicable S
E
1/16” (1.6 mm) 70 ~ 150 10 ~ 20 •
R
3/32” (2.4 mm) 150 ~ 250 15 ~ 30 E
O
1/8” (3.2 mm) 250 ~ 400 25 ~ 40
5/32” (4.0 mm) 400 ~ 500 40 ~ 55
M
All values are based on the usage of argon gas. S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
214
A T
L O
M B
Tungsten Alloys
C C
B AFM 2% Ceriated •
T AWS/SFA A5.12 EWCe-2 (ISO 6848 -WCe 20) S
Description:
AFM 2% Ceriated Tungsten electrodes are tungsten electrodes containing about two percent cerium oxide
B (CeO2), referred to as ceria. L
R The EWCe-2 electrodes were first introduced into the United States market in 1987. •
Z Several other grades of this type electrode are commercially practical, including electrodes containing A
one percent CeO, but only one grade, EWCe-2, has been incorporated in this specification as having
commercial significance.
The advantages of tungsten electrodes containing ceria, compared to pure tungsten, include increased ease of
T starting, improved arc stability, and reduced rate of vaporization or burn-off. H
I Unlike thoria, ceria is not a radioactive material. •
T These advantages increase with increased ceria content. F
These electrodes operate successfully with alternating current or direct current, either polarity.
Tip color is Grey.
M Chemical Composition Requirements (%): C
A W 97.3 •
G CeO2 1.8 ~ 2.2 I
Total Other 0.5
T Typical Current Ranges: N

S Alternating Current Alternating Current •
T Diameter Unbalance Ware Balanced Ware K
(amps) (amps)
0.040” (1.0 mm) 15 ~ 80 20 ~ 60
A 1/16” (1.6 mm) 70 ~ 150 60 ~ 120
S
E 3/32” (2.4 mm) 140 ~ 235 100 ~ 180
•
R 1/8” (3.2 mm) 225 ~ 325 160 ~ 250
E
O 5/32” (4.0 mm) 300 ~ 400 200 ~ 320
All values are based on the usage of argon gas.
M
DCEN DCEP S
A Diameter
(DCSP) (amps) (DCRP) (amps) •
I
0.040” (1.0 mm) 15 ~ 80 Not Applicable W
N
1/16” (1.6 mm) 70 ~ 150 10 ~ 20
3/32” (2.4 mm) 150 ~ 250 15 ~ 30
I
1/8” (3.2 mm) 250 ~ 400 25 ~ 40 F
N
5/32” (4.0 mm) 400 ~ 500 40 ~ 55 S
C
F M D
All values are based on the usage of argon gas. W
O S
215
A T
L O
M B
Tungsten Alloys
C C
B AFM 1.5% Lanthanated •
T AWS/SFA A5.12 EWLA-1.5 (ISO 6848 -WLa 15) S
Description:
AFM 1.5% Lanthanated Tungsten electrodes which contain 1.3-1.7 wt.-% of dispersed lanthanum oxide
B (La2O3) for enhanced arc starting and stability, reduced tip erosion rate, and extended operating range. L
R These electrodes can be used as nonradioactive substitutes for 2% thoriated tungsten as the operating •
Z characteristics are very similar. A
Lanthanated tungsten can be used for both dcen and ac applications.
Tip color is Gold.
T Chemical Composition Requirements (%): H

I W 97.8 •
T CeO2 1.3 ~ 1.7 F
Total Other 0.5
M Typical Current Ranges: C

A Alternating Current Alternating Current •
G Diameter Unbalance Ware Balanced Ware I
(amps) (amps)
0.040” (1.0 mm) 15 ~ 80 20 ~ 60
T 1/16” (1.6 mm) 70 ~ 150 60 ~ 120 N
S 3/32” (2.4 mm) 140 ~ 235 100 ~ 180 •
T 1/8” (3.2 mm) 225 ~ 325 160 ~ 250 K
5/32” (4.0 mm) 300 ~ 400 200 ~ 320
All values are based on the usage of argon gas.
A
S
E DCEN DCEP
Diameter •
R (DCSP) (amps) (DCRP) (amps)
E
O 0.040” (1.0 mm) 15 ~ 80 Not Applicable
1/16” (1.6 mm) 70 ~ 150 10 ~ 20
M 3/32” (2.4 mm) 150 ~ 250 15 ~ 30
S
A 1/8” (3.2 mm) 250 ~ 400 25 ~ 40
•
I 5/32” (4.0 mm) 400 ~ 500 40 ~ 55
All values are based on the usage of argon gas. W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
216
A T
L O
M B
Tungsten Alloys
C Chemical Composition Requirements for Tungsten Electrodes C

B •
Classification Chemical Composition Requirement Colour Code,
T Symbol RGB Colour Value
S
(ISO 6848 Impurities, Tungsten,
Principal Oxidie Mass Percent
Classification) Mass Percent Mass Percent & Colour Samplea
Green
B EWP
None N.A. b 0.5 max. 99.5 min. #008000 L
(WP)
R •
Z Grey (formerly orange) A
EWCe-2
CeO2 1.8 to 2.2 0.5 max. Balance #808080
(WCe 20)
T EWLa-1
Black H
La2O3 0.8 to 1.2 0.5 max. Balance #000000
I (WLa 10) •
T F
Gold
EWLa-1.5
La2O3 1.3 to 1.7 0.5 max. Balance #FFD700
(WLa 15)
M Blue C
EWLa-2
A (WLa 20) La2O3 1.8 to 2.2 0.5 max. Balance #0000FF •
G I
Yellow
EWTh-1
ThO2 0.8 to 1.2 0.5 max. Balance #FFFF00
(WTh 10)
T N
Red
S EWTh-2
ThO2 1.7 to 2.2 0.5 max. Balance #FF0000 •
(WTh 20)
T K
Violet
(WTh 30) ThO2 2.8 to 3.2 0.5 max. Balance #EE82EE
A
S
E
Brown •
R EWZr-1
ZrO2 0.15 to 0.50 0.5 max. Balance #A52A2A
(WZr 3) E
O
White
EWZr-8
M (WZr 8) ZrO2 0.7 to 0.8 0.5 max. Balance #FFFFFF
S
A
The manufacturer •
I The manufacturer
must state the The manufacturer may select
EWG must identify all 0.5 max. Balance W
N additions.
nominal quantity any color not already in use.
of each addition.
Note : Intentional additions of “doping oxides” other than indicated for a particular electrode classification is prohibited.
I a
RGB color values and color samples can be found at the following website: F
N http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms531197.aspx
C
F b
N.A. = Not Applicable.
W
O
217
A T
L O
M B
Tungsten Alloys
C C
B Standard Diameters & Lengths •
T Size Length S
Diameter Tolerance Diameter Tolerance Length Tolerance Length Tolerance
mm ±mm in ±in mm ±mm in ±in
B 0.25b 0.02 0.010 0.001 50b ±1.5 L

R 0.30 b 0.02 75 b -1.0, +2.5 3 1/16 •
Z 0.50b 0.05 0.020 0.002 150b -1.0, +4.0 6 1/16
A
b 0.05 0.040 0.002 b -1.0, +6.0 7 1/8
1.00 175
b 0.05 a 0.002 b -1.0, +8.0 12 1/8
1.50 0.060 300
b 0.05 b -1.0, +8.0 18 1/8
T 1.60 450
H
b 0.05 b -1.0, +13.0 24 1/8
2.00 600
I •
2.40b 0.08 0.093 (3/32) 0.003
T b
F
2.50 0.08
b 0.10
3.00
b 0.10 0.125 (1/8) 0.003
3.20
M b
C
4.00 0.10 0.156 (5/32) 0.003
A •
4.80b 0.10 0.187 (3/16) 0.003
G 5.00 b 0.10
I
b 0.10
6.30
b 0.10 0.250 (1/4) 0.003
6.40
T 8.00 b 0.10 N
S •
T 10.00b 0.10 K
a Although the metric size 1.6 mm [0.063 in] is closer to 1/16 in [0.0625 in], it has been common industry practice to refer to
A the U.S. customary size 0.060 in as 1/16 in.
b Standard sizes and lengths in ISO 6848, though tolerances may be tighter in some cases. S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
218
A T
L O
M B
Tungsten Alloys
C C
B Suitability of Current Supply Type •
T Direct Current S
Alternating
Type of Metal or Alloy to be welded Electrode Electrode Current
Negative (-) Positive (+)
Aluminium and its alloys, thickness ≤ 2.5 mm [0.10 in] Acceptable Acceptable Best
B a
L
Aluminium and its alloys, thickness > 2.5 mm [0.10 in] Acceptable N.R. Best
R •
Magnesium and its alloys N.R. Acceptable Best
Z Non-alloy (Carbon) Steels and Low Alloy Steels Best N.R. N.R.
A
Stainless Steels Best N.R. N.R.
Copper Best N.R. N.R.
T Bronze Best N.R. Acceptable
H
I Aluminium Bronze Acceptable N.R. Best •
T Silicon Bronze Best N.R. N.R. F
Nickel and its alloys Best N.R. Acceptable
Titanium and its alloys Best N.R. Acceptable
M a
N.R. = Not Recommended. C
A •
G I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
219
A T
L O
M B
Tungsten Alloys
C Approximate Current Ranges depending upon the Electrode Diametera C

B Direc Current Alternating Current •
Electrode
T Diameter
A A
S
Electrode Negative (-) Electrode Positive (+)
Pure Tungsten with Pure Tungsten with Pure Tungsten with
mm in
Tungsten Oxide Additives Tungsten Oxide Additives Tungsten Oxide Additives
B 0.25 0.010 up to 15 up to 15 Not Applicable Not Applicable up to 15 up to 15 L
R 0.30 up to 15 up to 15 Not Applicable Not Applicable up to 15 up to 15 •
Z 0.50 0.020 2 to 20 2 to 20 Not Applicable Not Applicable 2 to 15 2 to 15 A
1.0 0.040 10 to 75 10 to 75 Not Applicable Not Applicable 15 to 55 15 to 70
1.5 0.060 60 to 150 60 to 150 10 to 20 10 to 20 45 to 90 60 to 125
1.6 60 to 150 60 to 150 10 to 20 10 to 20 45 to 90 60 to 125
T 2.0 75 to 180 100 to 200 15 to 25 15 to 25 65 to 125 85 to 160
H
I 0.093 •
2.4 120 to 220 150 to 250 15 to 30 15 to 30 80 to 140 120 to 210
T (3/32) F
2.5 130 to 230 170 to 250 17 to 30 17 to 30 80 to 140 120 to 210
3.0 150 to 300 210 to 310 20 to 35 20 to 35 140 to 180 140 to 230
0.125
M 3.2
(1/8)
160 to 310 225 to 330 20 to 35 35 to 50 150 to 190 150 to 250 C
A 4.0
0.156
275 to 450 350 to 480 35 to 50 50 to 70 180 to 260 240 to 350
•
(5/32)
G I
0.187
4.8 380 to 600 480 to 650 50 to 70 50 to 70 240 to 350 330 to 450
(3/16)
5.0 400 to 625 500 to 675 50 to 70 50 to 70 240 to 350 330 to 460
T 6.3 550 to 875 650 to 950 65 to 100 35 to 100 300 to 450 430 to 575 N
S 6.4
0.250
575 to 900 750 to 1000 70 to 125 70 to 125 325 to 450 450 to 600 •
(1/4)
T 8.0 650 to 830
K
10.0
A NOTE : If no value is given, no recommendation is available.

a
The current values are based on the use of argon gas, and these values may vary depending on the type of shielding gas, type of equipment, S
E and application.
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
220
A T
L O
M B
Tungsten Alloys
C C
Statement of Commission VIII on Health Aspects
B •
In The Use of Thoriated Tungsten Electrodes
T S
“Thorium oxides are found in Thoriated Tungsten Electrodes {up to 4.2% (ISO 6848-WT 40 Electrode)}6.
Thorium is radioactive and may present hazards by external and internal exposure.
B If alternatives are technically feasible, they should be used. L
R “Several studies carried out on Thoriated Electrodes have shown that due to the type of radiation generated, •
Z external radiation risks—during storage, welding, or disposal of residues—are negligible under normal A
conditions of use.
“On the contrary, during the grinding of electrode tips there is generation of radioactive dust, with the risk of
internal exposure.
T H
Consequently, it is necessary to use local exhaust ventilation to control the dust at the source, complemented
I if necessary by respiratory protective equipment. •
T The risk of internal exposure during welding is considered negligible since the electrode is consumed at a very F
slow rate.
“Precautions must be taken in order to control any risks of exposure during the disposal of dust from grinding
M devices. C
A “The above statement is based on a considered view of the available reports. Commission VIII will continue to •
keep these aspects under review.”
G I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
221
A T
L O
M B
Aerospace Alloys
C C
B AFM Product Page •
T Aluminum Alloy Filler Metals 223 S
Silver Brazing Filler Metals 223
Magnesium Alloy Filler Metals 223
B Nickel Base Brazing Filler Metals 223 L
R Titanium Alloy Filler Metals 223 •
Z Low Alloy Steels 223 A
Corrosion & Heat Resistant Steel and Alloy Filler Metals 224
T H
I •
T F
Please contact us
for MSDS
M C
A •
G I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
222
A T
L O
M B
Aerospace Alloys
C C
B Aluminum Alloy Filler Metals Nickel Base Brazing Filler Metals •
AMS AMS
T Spec.
Alloy Nominal Chemical Composition
Spec.
Alloy Nominal Chemical Composition S
4180 1100 99.0 Al 73.0Ni 4.5Si 14.0Cr 3.1B
4775 BNi-1
4181 4008 (A356) 7.0Si 0.38Mg 0.10Ti 4.5Fe 0 .75C
B 4184 4145 10Si 4.0Cu 4777 BNi-2 82.0Ni 4.5Si 7.0Cr 3.1B 3.0Fe L
R 4185 4047 12Si •
Z 4190 4043 5.2Si Silver Brazing Filler Metals A
6.3Cu 0.30Mn 0.18Zr 0.15Ti AMS
4191 2319 Alloy Nominal Chemical Composition
0.10V Spec.
4.5Cu 0.70Ag 0.30Mn 0.25Mg 4761 BAg-34 38.0Ag 32.0Cu 28.0Zn 2.0Sn
T 4233 201.0
0.25Ti 4763 BAg-7 56.0Ag 22.0Cu 17.0Zn 5.05 Sn H
I 4244 206.0 4.6Cu 0.35Mn 0.25Mg 0.22Ti 4765 BAg-13a 56.0Ag 42.0Cu 2.0Ni •
T 4245 355.0 5.0Si 1.2Cu 0.50Mg 4766 BAg-23 85.0Ag 15.0Mn F
4246 357.0 7.0Si 0.52Mg 4767 BAg-19 92.5Ag 7.2Cu 0.22Li
4768 BAg-2 35.0Ag 26.0Cu 21.0Zn 15.0Cu
M Low Alloy Steels
4769 BAg-1 45.0Ag 24.0Cd 16.0Zn 15.0Cu C
A 4770 BAg-1a 50.0Ag 18.0Cd 16.5Zn 15.5Cu
AMS •
Alloy Nominal Chemical Composition 50.0Ag 16.0Cd 15.5Zn
G Spec. 4771 BAg-3
15.5Cu 3.0Ni
I
6452 4140VM 0.95Cr 0.20Mo (0.38- 0.43C)
4772 BAg-13 54.0Ag 40.0Cu 5.0Zn 1.0Ni
6453 Hy Tuf 0.30Cr 1.8Ni 0.40Mo (0.23-0.28C)
4773 BAg-18 60.0Ag 30.0Cu 10.0Sn
6456 4340VM 0.80Cr 1.8Ni 0.25Mo (0.35-0.40C)
T 4774 BAg-21 63.0Ag 28.5Cu 6.0Sn 2.5Ni N
6457 4140VM 0.95Cr 0.20Mo (0.28-0.33C)
S •
0.65Si 1.25Cr 0.50Mo 0.30V
T 6458 17-22A (S)
(0.28-0.33C) Titanium Alloy Filler Metals K
6461 6130VM 0.95Cr 0.20V (0.28-0.33C) AMS
Alloy Nominal Chemical Composition
6462 6130 0.95Cr 0.20V (0.28-0.33C) Spec.
A
6466 502 5.2Cr 0 .55Mo 4951 CP-Ti
0.08C 0.18O 0.005H S
E 0.05N 0.20Fe Ti Bal
1.0Cr 3.8Co 0.45Mo 0.08V •
R 6468 HP9-4-20
(0.14-0.17C) 4952 6-2-4-2 6.0Al 2.0Sn 4.0Zr 2.0Mo
E
O 4953 5Al 2.5Sn 5.0 Al-2.5 Sn
0.05C 0.12O 0.015H 0.03N
Magnesinum Alloy Filler Metals 4954 6Al-4V
6.75Al 4.50V 0.30Fe Ti Bal
M AMS
Alloy Nominal Chemical Composition 0.08C 0.12O 0.01H 0.05N S
A Spec. 4955 8-1-1
8.0Al 1.0Mo 1.0V Ti Bal
4395 AZ92A 9.0Al 2.0Zn •
I 0.03C 0.08O 0.005H 0.012N
4396 EZ33A 3.3Ce 2.5Zn 0.72Zr W
N 4956 6Al-4V(ELI) 6.75Al 4.5V 0.15Fe 0.10Mn
4418 QE22A 2.5Ag 2.1Di 0.70Zr Ti Bal
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
223
A T
L O
M B
Aerospace Alloys
C C
Corrosion & Heat Resistant Steels and Alloy Corrosion & Heat Resistant Steels and Alloy
B •
Filler Metals Filler Metals
T AMS AMS
S
Alloy Nominal Chemical Composition Alloy Nominal Chemical Composition
Spec. Spec.
5675 Inconel 92 70.0Ni 15.5Cr 7.0Fe 3.0Ti 2.4Mn 15.0Cr 25.5Ni 1.3Mo 2.2Ti
5805 A286VM
B 5679 Inconel 62 73.0Ni 15.5Cr 2.2Cb 8.0Fe 0.004B 0.30V L
42.0Fe 38.0Ni 15.0Co
R 5680 347 Stainless 18.5Cr 11.0Ni 0.40(Cb+Ta) 5806 903
3.0(Cb+Ta) 1.4Ti 0.92Al
•
Z 5689 321 Stainless 18.0Cr 10.5Ni 0.40Ti
5812 15-7Mo VM 15.0Cr 7.1Ni 2.4Mo 1.0Al A
5692 316 Stainless 19.0Cr 12.5Ni 2.5Mo
5813 15-7Mo 15.0Cr 7.1Ni 2.4Mo 1.0Al
5694 310 Stainless 27.0 Cr 21.5Ni
Greek
5774 AM-350 16.5Cr 4.5Ni 2.9Mo 0.10N 5817 13.0Cr 2.0Ni 3.0W
T Ascoloy H
5776 410 Stainless 12.5Cr
I 72.0Ni 15.5Cr 2.4Ti 1(Cb+Ta)
5821 410 Mod 12.0Cr Ferrite Controlled •
5778 Inconel 69 11.8Cr 2.8Ni 1.6Co 1.8Mo
T 0.70Al 7.0Fe 5823 Jethete
0.32 V
F
20.5Cr 9.0Ni 0.50Mo 1.5W
5782 19-9WMo 5824 17-7PH 17.0Cr 7.1Ni 1.0Al
1.2(Cb+Ta) 0.20Ti
5825 17-4PH 16.4Cr 4.8Ni 0.22Cb 3.2Cu
5784 29-9 (312) 29.0 Cr-9.5Ni
M 5826 15-5PH 15.0Cr 5.1Ni 0.30Cb 3.2Cu C
5786 Hastelloy W 62.5Ni 5.0Cr 24.5Mo 5.5Fe
A 57.0Ni 19.5Cr 13.5Co 4.2Mo •
5789 Stellite 31 54.0Co 25.5Cr 10.5Ni 7.5W 5828 Waspaloy
G Multimet 31.0Fe 21.0Cr 20.0Ni 20.0Co
3.1Ti 1.4Al 0.006B I
5794 12.5Cr 42.5Ni 6.0Mo 2.7Ti
(N-155) 3.0Mo 2.5Wi 1(Cb+Ta) 0.15N 5830 901
0.015B 25.0Fe
Haynes 25
5796 52.0Co 20.0Cr 10.0Ni 15.0W 29Fe 22Cr 21Ni 18.5Co 3.2Mo
T (L-605)
5831 556 2.8W 0.78Ta 0.30Al 0.05Zr N
S 47.5Ni 22.0Cr 1.5Co 9.0Mo
5798 Hastelloy X
0.60W 18.5Fe
.05La 0.20N •
T 54.0Ni 19.0Cr 11.0Mo 3.2Ti 5832 718
52.5Ni 19.0Cr 5.1(Cb+Ta) K
5800 Rene 41 0.90Ti 0.50Al 18.0Fe
1.5Al 0.006B
5836 FM-82 72.0Ni 20.0Cr 3.0Mn 2.5Cb
39.0Co 22.0Cr 22.0Ni 14.5W
A 5801 Haynes 188
0.07La
5837 625 62.0Ni 21.5Cr 9.0Mo 3.7(Cb+Ta)
S
E 15.0Cr 25.5Ni 1.3Mo 2.2Ti 5838 Hastelloy S
65.0Ni 16.0Cr 15.0Mo 0.30Al
5804 A286 0.06 La •
R 0.006B 0.30V
5840 PH13-8Mo 13.0Cr 8.0Ni 2.3Mo 1.1Al E
O
Hastelloy®, Stellite®, Haynes® and Multimet® are registered
trademarks of Cabot Corporation.
M
S
A Inconel®, Incoloy® and Monel® are registered trademarks of
Special Metals Corporation. •
I
W
N Rene 41® is a registered trademark of Teledyne-Allvac.
Waspaloy® is a registered trademark of Pratt and Whitney

I Aircraft. F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
224
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C C
B AFM Product Page •
T AFM Patricarc 232 S
AFM AM Steel-LH 233
AFM AM Steel-1 234
B AFM AM Steel-2 235 L
R AFM Chamfer Arc 236 •
Z AFM AM Premium Cast-1 237 A
AFM Cast Weld-1 238
AFM Cast Weld-2 239
T H
AFM Cast Weld-3 240
I •
AFM Impact Arc 241
T F
AFM Abrasarc 242
AFM Bronze Arc 243
M AFM Bronze G 244 C
A AFM Alum Arc 245 •
G AFM Alum Cor 246 I
Cross Reference Guide - Maintenance Alloys 247

T N
S •
T K
Please contact us
A for MSDS
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
225
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Patricarc C
•
T • High deposition rate. S
• Weld deposits are smooth, ductile, porosity-free and take on a shiny appearance.
• Weld deposits are impact, abrasion, heat and corrosion resistant.
B • For uses such as: L
R Dissimilar steels, high carbon, tool and die steels, and aircraft steels. •
Underlayment of hardfacing alloys in mining applications, rebuilding shafts and agitator blades in turbines,
Z A
frames, cast steel parts and gears.
Also perfect to use when the base metal is unknown.
T Technical Data (Typical Value) H

I Tensile Strength Up to 120,000 psi •
T Hardness Yield Strength Up to 90,000 psi F
Elongation % Up to 30
Diameter 3/32 1/8 5/32 3/16
M C
(mm) 2.4 3.2 4.0 5.0
A •
Amperage: AC or DC Reverse Polarity 45 ~ 80 70 ~ 120 70 ~ 140 130 ~ 150
G I
Package Size (Lb) 10
T Procedure: N
Clean the work area.
S •
Thick sections should be beveled.
T A preheat of 400°F is recommended for carbon and cast steels. K
Maintain a short arc, slightly in the direction of movement and use stringer beads.
Peening is recommended.
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
226
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM AM Steel-LH C
•
T • High tensile strength ferritic electrode. S
• High quality, all position, low amperage electrode features rapid deposition.
• Deposits have good ductility, are dense, crack-free, and of x-ray quality.
B • Excellent for steels sensitive to cracking when welded with conventional mild steel electrodes. L
R • For uses such as: •
For “tramp” and “problem” steels high in sulphur, phosphorous, or other elements added to improve
Z A
the machinability of the steel.
For fabrication of “H” and “I” beams, angle and channel iron, pipelines, and all other steel structures.
For circular tubes to plate welds, and other type joints subject to stress and strain.
T H
I Technical Data (Typical Value) •
T Hardness Tensile Strength Up to 80,000 psi F
Diameter 3/32 1/8 5/32 3/16 1/4
(mm) 2.4 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.0
M Amperage: AC or DC Reverse Polarity 60 ~ 100 110 ~ 150 140 ~ 200 220 ~ 280 300 ~ 375
C
A •
G I
Procedure:
Area to be welded should be cleaned thoroughly.
T Surface contamination must be removed and bevel or chamfer where required. N
S Maintain close arc length. •
T Vertical joints should be welded from bottom up, using rapid weave technique. K
Do not whip. Use drag technique to make horizontal fillet welds.
Slag is easily removed.
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
227
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM AM Steel-1 C
•
T • Low amperage capability makes it excellent for poor fit-up applications and use on low, open circuit S
voltage buzz boxes.
• Special coating allows it to weld over extremely dirty, greasy, oil soaked and/or rusty steels.
B • Also can weld over its own slag without causing inclusions or slag interference. L
R • It is not necessary to chip slag between passes. •
• For uses such as:
Z A
Ideal for production, as well as maintenance applications where poor fit-up is encountered.
The ability to maintain a stable arc at low amperages also makes it excellent for applications involving light
gauge steel.
T Amsteel-1 easily welds on steel beams and girders that have many coats of paint without developing porosity H
I or defective welds. •
T Welds are also easily made on equipment or machines that are covered with grease and sand and can’t be F
cleaned before welding.
Designed for pipeline welding, tank fabrication, machine and automotive repair, as well as general construction
and fabrication.
M C
A •
Technical Data (Typical Value)
G I
Tensile Strength Up to 85,000 psi
Hardness Yield Strength Up to 60,000 psi
T Elongation % Approx. 25 N
S Diameter 3/32 1/8 5/32 •
T (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 K
Amperage: AC or DC Either Polarity 20 ~ 100 30 ~ 140 50 ~ 175
A Package Size (Lb) 10
S
E
Procedure: •
R
If possible, clean the weld areas as much as is practical. Set the amperage to the specific requirements. E
O
If an edge build-up is required or it is thin steel, use the lower end of the amperage range.
If heavy penetration is required or the weld area is extremely dirty, use the higher end of the amperage range.
M A close to medium arc gap should be maintained. S
A Slag chipping is recommended, but not necessary on multipass applications.
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
228
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM AM Steel-2 C
•
T • Designed to operate on almost any AC or DC welding machine even when the open circuit voltage is S
very low.
• Special coating protects the weld deposit from adverse conditions normally encountered in maintenance
B repair welding. L
R • Low amperage requirement controls distortion when welding thin sheet metal; •
spatter is kept to a minimum.
Z A
• Ideal for field work and out-of-position welding.
Fabrication thin, medium, heavy and dissimilar gauge mild steel.
T Sheets, plates, angle iron, beams, pipes, and machine parts can be welded in all positions. H
I Also used for filling holes and build-up of over-machined and worn surfaces. •
T Commonly used on applications requiring short, intermittent and spot welds because of the outstanding F
restarting characteristics.

M C
Tensile Strength Up to 80,000 psi
A •
Hardness Yield Strength Up to 68,000 psi
G I
Elongation % Approx. 24
Diameter 1/16 3/32 1/8 5/32 3/16
T (mm) 1.6 2.4 3.2 4.0 5.0 N
S Amperage: AC or DC Either Polarity 20 ~ 25 35 ~ 80 65 ~ 125 90 ~ 160 120 ~ 210 •
T Package Size (Lb) 10 K
Procedure:
A Remove as much foreign material as practical from the weld area. S
E DC reverse polarity (electrode +) produces deep penetration; •
R DC straight polarity (electrode -) will have limited penetration and a flatter bead.
E
O AC prevents arc blow.
A medium arc length should be maintained with either stringer or weave beads.
M Slag is easily removed with a light chipping hammer.
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
229
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Chamfer Arc C
•
T • High speed cutting electrode for use with all standard arc equipment. S
• No special skills, oxygen tanks, or air compressors are required.
• Special coating protects the electrode from overheating.
R Cutting, beveling, and piercing of cast iron, stainless steel, manganese steel, carbon steel, malleable iron, •
aluminum, copper, bronze, nickel and nickel alloys.
Z A
Ideal for cleaning out defects and removing rivets.

T 1/8” to 1” (3.25 mm to 25 mm) 1/8” (3.2 mm) H
I Metal Thickness •
1/4” to 1 ½” (6.0 mm to 38 mm) 5/32” (4.0 mm)
T F
Diameter 1/8 5/32
(mm) 3.2 4.0
M Amperage: AC or DC Straight (-) 140 ~ 350 175 ~ 400 C
A Package Size (Lb) 10 •
G I
Procedure:
The fastest and cleanest cuts use DC straight polarity (electrode -).
When piercing, hold electrode vertical to work, strike arc, and push in and out until hole has been formed.
T N
When cutting sheets or plates, start at the edge, strike arc, and use electrode like a saw;
S push and pull with the electrode at a 45° angle to the work piece. •
T In all cases the arc must be kept as short as possible. K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
230
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM AM Premium Cast-1 C
•
T • High strength alloy for dirty cast iron. S
• Machinable deposits.
• Specially designed for contaminated, oil-soaked cast iron.
B • Alloyed core wire with unique flux coating produces strong, crack-resistant welds. L
Joining cast iron to steel, transmission gear housings, gray, ductile & nodular cast iron, sewer pipes.
Z A
Tensile Strength Up to 60,000 psi (415 N/mm2)
T Hardness HB 210 H
I C Ni Fe & Others •
T Chemistry F
1 55 Balance
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0
Amperage 40 ~ 70 70 ~ 110 90 ~ 130
M Package Size (Lb) 3.5 5.0 5.0
C
A •
G Classifications Similar to: I
AWS/SFA A5.15 ENiFe-Cl
DIN 8573 ENiFe-2-BG11
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
231
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Cast Weld-1 C
•
T • Premium high nickel alloy for cast iron. S
• Maximum machinability of deposit and HAZ.
• Pulsating arc for low temperature welding of cast iron in all positions.
B • Pulsating arc removes impurities resulting in a porosity-free weld deposit. L
Engine blocks, joining cast iron to steel, gear housings, joining cast iron to stainless steels.
Z A
T Hardness HB 160 H
I C Ni Fe & Others •
T Chemistry F
0.70 96 Balance
Amperage 30 ~ 70 55 ~ 110 75 ~ 135
M Package Size (Lb) 2.5 5.0 5.0
C
A •
G Classifications Similar to: I
AWS/SFA A5.15 ENi-Cl
DIN 8573 ENi-BG11
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
232
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Cast Weld-2 C
•
T • Maximum strength alloy for cast iron. S
• Special bi-metal core wire prevents overheating of electrode.
• Soft arc allows for easy machinability of highly crack-resistant weld deposit.
B • Pulsating arc on DC- and AC removes impurities from base material, even on dirty, oily .....surfaces. L
R • Suitable for welding cast iron to steel. •
Z A
Cylinder heads, machine bases, ship engine manifolds, filling holes, cast gear teeth, pump housings.

T Tensile Strength Up to 75,000 psi (520 N/mm2) H
I Hardness HB 200 •
T C Ni Fe & Others F
Chemistry
0.70 54 Balance
M Amperage 35 ~ 80 65 ~ 120 75 ~ 140 C
A Package Size (Lb) 4.0 5.0 5.0 •
G I
Classifications Similar to:
AWS/SFA A5.15 ENiFe-Cl
T DIN 8573 ENiFe-1-BG11 N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
233
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Cast Weld-3 C
•
T • Nickel-free electrode with non-machinable deposit. S
• Formulated for dirty and difficult-to-weld cast iron.
• Suitable for joining problem cast iron to steel.
B • Successfully used when nickel alloys fail to adhere. L
Burned furnace grates, cracked machine bases, build up of abrasion, pump housings worn areas, low quality
Z A
cast iron.

I Yield Strength Up to 120,000 psi (827 N/mm2) •
T Hardness HB 350 F
Color Match Good
C Mn Fe & Others
M Chemistry C
0.40 1.00 Balance
A Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 •
G Amperage 35 ~ 80 75 ~ 110 100 ~ 150 I
Package Size (Lb) 5.0 5.0 5.0
T Classifications Similar to: N

S AWS/SFA A5.15 ESt •
T DIN 8573 EFe-2-BG11 K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
234
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Impact Arc C
•
T • High chromium, high manganese alloy for joining and rebuilding manganese and carbon steel plates. S
• High alloy deposits are very tough and will take extreme impact and abrasion conditions.
• Has excellent weldability with very low spatter.
B • Operates easily in all positions. L
Rebuilding and joining austenitic manganese steels and manganese steels to other steel combinations.
Z A
Especially designed for high impact applications such as rail frogs and switch points, roller crushers, hammers,
shovel tracks.
Also excellent for use as a base for harder overlays.
T H
T Hardness 16 ~ 19 - As Deposited work hardens to: Rc 48 F
Diameter (mm) 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.0
Amperage: AC or DC Reverse Polarity (+) 110 ~ 135 125 ~ 190 150 ~ 250 225 ~ 325
M C
A •
G I
Procedure:
Remove any hardened or fatigued material from the surface with AFM Chamfer Arc.
Deposits may be placed with either the stringer bead or weaving technique.
T This electrode deposits easily in all positions with excellent build-up quality. N
S Avoid overheating on manganese steel bas metals. •
T Deposits work harden rapidly. K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
235
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Abrasarc C
•
T • General purpose surfacing alloy for surfaces subjected to abrasive wear and impact. S
• Crack resistant deposits, but can be forged.
• Heavy build-ups are possible without the need for softer cushion layers.
R Build-up and surfacing of new or worn machine parts of steel, cast steel, and manganese steel, dredger teeth, •
crusher jaws, hammer mill parts, conveyors, pressure rollers, shovel teeth, stampers, caterpillar drives,
Z A
and earth borers.

T Hardness 55 ~ 60 RC H
I •
T F
Amperage: AC or DC Reverse Polarity (+) 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 160 140 ~ 180
M C
A Procedure: •
G Remove all foreign material from weld area. Preheat is not necessary.
I
Maintain a medium arc length making either stringer beads or weave beads.
Allow part to cool slowly.
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
236
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Bronze Arc C
•
T • AC/DC+ Tin/Bronze electrode for joining and surfacing. S
• All position electrode with minimum spatter and easy slag removal.
• Excellent color match to bronze.
B • Offers good resistance to sea water and other chemicals. L
Arc brazing galvanized sheets, impellers, defects in new bronze castings, gear wheels
Z A
T H
Elongation % 30
I •
Hardness HB 80
T F
Cu Sn Fe & Others
Chemistry
94 4.50 Balance
M Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 C
A Amperage 80 ~ 120 100 ~ 150 125 ~ 190 •
G Package Size (Lb) 5.0 5.0 5.0 I
Classifications Similar to:

T AWS/SFA A5.6 ECuSn-C N
S DIN 1733 EL-CuMn7 •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
237
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Bronze G C
•
T • Super strength, general use brazing rod. S
• Excellent for overlaying & build-up at low temperatures (760°-870°C).
• Excellent for close fitting joints, thin-flowing at high temperatures (900°-955°C).
B • Designed to build-up or join carbon steels, alloy steels, cast iron, and many nonferrous materials. L
R • Super active flux promotes ultra-thin flowing of alloy. •
Z A
Gear teeth build-up, attaching carbide cutting tips, build-up of bearing shafts, joining bicycle assemblies,
brazing of rusty surface, heavy equipment repair.
T Technical Data (Typical Value) H

I Tensile Strength Up to 70,000 psi (483 N/mm ) 2
•
T Working Temperature 760°C ~ 955°C (1,400°F ~1,750°F) F
Remelt Temperature 980°C (1,800°F )
Hardness HB 135
M Cu Ni Zn C
A Chemistry •
48 10 42
G Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 I
T Classifications Similar to: N

S AWS/SFA A5.8 RBCuZn-D
•
T DIN 8513 L-CuNi10Zn42 K
• For best results, use a neutral flame.
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
238
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Alum Arc C
•
T • Universal flux-coated aluminum stick electrode for arc welding or gas welding. S
• Ideal for outdoor use when MIG/TIG welding is not suitable.
• Exceptional arc stability at low amperages with minimum spatter.
B • Deposits have excellent corrosion resistance and color match. L
- Build-up of castings - Aluminum castings
Z A
- Repair of machining errors - Tanks & Pipes

I Hardness HB 40 ~55 •
T Color Match Good (will darken if anodized) F
Hardness HB 135
Chemistry Si Al & Others
M (Core Wire) 5.0 Balance C
A •
G I
Amperage 50 ~ 80 80 ~ 130 100 ~ 160
T N
S Classifications Similar to: •
AWS/SFA A5.3 E4043
T K
DIN 1732 EL-ALSi5
• For best results with a torch, use a slightly carburizing flame.
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
239
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Alum Cor C
•
T • Unique flux-cored aluminum brazing rod. S
• Excellent for build-up and repair of all weldable grades of aluminum including cast alloys.
• Designed expecially for dirty applications.
B • Can be applied in all positions using an oxy-fuel torch. L
R • Ideal for joining dissimilar sizes and for poor fit-up applications. •
Z A
- Cast engine blocks - Oily casting repairs
- Aluminum pump housings - Automotive parts
T H
T Tensile Strength Up to 30,000 psi (207 N/mm2) F
Working Temperature 600°C (1,100°F)
Elongation % 20
M Hardness HB 40 ~55 C
A Color Match Good (will darken if anodized) •
G Al Si Fe & Others I
Chemistry
(Core Wire) 95 4 Balance
Diameter (mm) 3.2
T N
Package Size (Lb) 1.0
S •
• For best results, use a slightly carburizing flame.
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
240
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
Cross Reference Guide
C MG
C
B AFM ALL STATE CERTANIUM EUTECTIC
(MESSER)
INWELD UTP WELCO ROCKMONT
•
T PATRIARC 275 707 680 MG 600 955 62
Super
Missileweld
Brutus-A S
ALSTEEL-LH 616 747 66 MG 540 918 613 86 Polaris-A
AMSTEEL 1 Steel Arc Plus 700 Steeltectic MG 506 611 Steelweld Tartan B
B AMSTEEL 2 Steel Arc 701, 702 Beauty Weld MG 500 909 612 83-88 Tartan A L
R CHAMFER ARC
Chamfer Rod,
Cutting Elec- 100
CamferTrode, MG 560, 414, 82, Camferarc,
Electra
•
Cutrod 1 MG 570 450 82-AS Cutrod
Z trode A
4-60, 2-23, MG 210,
PREMIUM CAST-1 889/889SP 84, 85, 86 Jupiter A
4-60 Super 2-25 MG 289
CAST WELD-1 4 IMP 2-24 MG 200 713 8, 88, 888 94 Jupiter B
T CAST WELD-2 4-60 889 2250 MG 210 712 84, 85, 86 65 Jupiter A H
I CASTWELD-3 6 IMP 885 27 MG 220 717 81 28 Jupiter NM
•
NiMatrix, 282, 298, 4, MG 745, 501,
T IMPACT ARC
Super Join M 706/792 40 MG 750 503
63 / 630 240 Apollo A, B F
BUILD UP Roll Matrix 2-B MG 740 620 9B
ABRASARC 267 N6712 MG 760 6700 180 Olympia B000
M CHROMCARB HS-7 297 N6006 MG 770 711B/7100 Omega N

C
24 AC/DC, 421/423, MG 310, 32,
A BRONZE ARC
24 DC 429
2800
MG 320
626
320
23 Venus B •
G BRONZE G 11-13FC 70F / 87F 185XFC MG 130 285 2/6 14, 17, 17FC Olympia C I
ALUM ARC 34 608 2101, 2109 MG 400 606 48 26 Neptune A
ALUM COR SealCor 68C 21FC-E MG 420 230 ALFC Cor-Al Neptune GCF
T Steel: Bronze: N
S Patricarc - High strength for dissimilar steels Bronze Arc - Buildup and joining on copper, Brass and •
T AM Steel-LH - For low and medium carbon steels Bronze K
AM Steel-1 - Deep penetration on mild steels Bromze G - Oxy and Acet build up and joining
AM Steel-2 - Low heat input on mild steels
Chamfer Arc - Gouging, cutting and chamfering all steels
A
Cast Iron: Aluminum: S
E
Premium Cast-1 - Copper clad core for all cast iron Alum Arc - Electrode for weldable aluminum •
R Castweld-1 - Fully machinable all cast iron Alum Cor - Flux cored aluminum for torch E
O Castweld-2 - Cast to cast and cast to steel
Castweld-3 - Non-machinable for all cast iron
M Power: Hardfacing:
S
A AFM 1 - Bond Coat Impactarc - Severe impact on Manganese and steel
AFM 2 - Stainless type final coat Build Up - For buildup on steel •
I AFM 4 - Aluminum Bronze final cut Abrasarc - Impact and abrasion on steel W
N AFM 120SF - Spray and fuse Nickel Base 14RC Chromcarb - High abrasion and light impact on steel
AFM 140SF - Spray and fuse Nickel Base 38RC
AFM 160SF - Spray and fuse Nickel Base 60RC
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
241
A T
L O
M B
Reference & Useful Information
C C
B Contents Page •
T Inch & Millimeter Decimal Equivalents of Fractions of an Inch 243 S
Inch - millimeter Conversion Chart 244
Weights & Measures 244
B Feet Per Pound - Stainless Rounds 245 L
R General Conversion Formulas 246 •
Z A
Contents Page
T H
Recommended Gases for Welding
I •
GTAW Gases 247 ~ 248
T F
GMAW Gases 249 ~ 250
Gas Selection for Gas Metal Arc Welding [Table 2] 251 ~ 259
M C
A •
G AWS Filler Metal Specifications by Material & Welding Process 260 I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
242
A T
L O
M B
C C
B •
T Inch & Millimeter Decimal Equivalents of Fractions of an Inch S
Inch Inch
Millimeter Millimeter
Fraction Decimal Fraction Decimal
B 1/64 .015 625 0.396 875 33/64 .515 625 13.096 875 L
R 1/32 .031 250 0.793 750 17/32 .531 250 13.493 750 •
Z 3/64 .062 500 1.190 625 35/64 .546 250 13.890 625 A
1/16 .078 125 1.587 500 9/16 .562 500 14.287 500
5/64 .093 750 1.984 375 37/64 .578 125 14.684 375
3/32 .109 375 2.381 250 19/32 .593 750 15.081 250
T H
7/64 .125 000 2.778 125 39/64 .609 375 15.478 125
I 1/8 .140 625 3.175 000 5/8 .625 000 15.875 000
•
T 9/64 .156 250 3.571 875 41/64 .640 625 16.271 875 F
5/32 .171 875 3.968 750 21/32 .656 250 16.668 750
11/64 .187 500 4.365 625 43/64 .671 875 17.065 625
M 3/16 .203 125 4.762 500 11/16 .687 500 17.462 500 C
A 13/64 .203 125 5.159 375 45/64 .703 125 17.859 375 •
7/32 .218 750 5.556 250 23/32 .718 750 18.256 250
G I
15/64 .234 375 5.953 125 47/64 .734 375 18.653 125
1/4 .250 000 6.350 000 3/4 .750 000 19.050 000
17/64 .265 625 6.746 875 49/64 .765 625 19.446 875
T 9/32 .281 250 7.143 750 25/32 .781 250 19.843 750 N
S 19/64 .296 875 7.540 625 51/64 .796 875 20.240 625 •
T 5/16 .312 500 7.937 500 13/16 .812 500 20.637 500 K
21/64 .328 125 8.334 375 53/64 .828 125 21.034 375
11/32 .343 750 8.731 250 27/32 .843 750 21.431 250
A 23/64 .359 375 9.128 125 55/64 .859 375 21.828 125
S
E 3/8 .375 000 9.525 000 7/8 .875 000 22.225 000
•
R 25/64 .390 625 9.921 875 57/64 .890 625 22.621 875
13/32 .406 250 10.318 750 29/32 .906 250 23.018 750 E
O
27/64 .421 875 10.715 625 59/64 .921 875 23.415 625
7/16 .437 500 11.112 500 15/16 .937 500 23.812 500
M 29/64 .453 125 11.509 375 61/64 .953 125 24.209 375 S
A 15/32 .468 750 11.906 250 31/32 .968 750 24.606 250
•
I 31/64 .484 375 12.303 125 63/64 .984 375 25.003 125
W
N 1/2 .500 000 12.700 000 1 1.000 000 25.400 000
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
243
A T
L O
M B
C C
B Inch - Millimeter Conversion Chart (1 Inch = 25.4 Millimeters) •
T S
Gauge Inch Decimal Millimeters Gauge Inch Decimal Millimeters
30 .0120 .3048 16 .0598 1.5189
29 .0135 .3429 15 .0673 1.7094
B 28 .0149 .3785 14 .0747 1.8974 L
R 27 .0164 .4166 13 .0897 2.2784 •
Z 26 .0179 .4547 12 .1046 2.6568 A
25 .0209 .5309 11 .1196 3.0378
24 .0239 .6071 10 .1345 3.4163
23 .0269 .6833 9 .1495 3.7973
T H
22 .0299 .7595 8 .1644 4.1758
I 21 .0329 .8357 7 .1793 4.5542
•
T 20 .0359 .9119 6 .1943 4.9352 F
19 .0418 1.0617 5 .2092 5.3137
18 .0478 1.2141 4 .2242 5.6947
M 17 .0538 1.3665 3 .2391 6.0731 C
A •
G Weights & Measures I
1 pound (lb) = 453.6 grams 1 kilometer = 0.62137 mile
100 lb = 45.36 kilograms = 3,280 feet
T N
112 lb = 50.80 kilograms 1 square inch = 6.4516 square centimeters
S 1 short ton (2,000 lb) = 907.2 kilograms = 645.16 millimeters
•
T 1 long ton (2,240 lb) =1,016 kilograms 1 square foot = 0.0929 square meter K
1 kilo grams = 2,2046 lbs 1 square yard = 0.8361 square meter
100 kilograms = 220.46 lbs 1 square millimeter = 0.00155 square inch
A 1 metric ton (1,000 kilograms) = 2,204.6 lbs 1 square centimeter = 0.155 square inch S
E = 0.9842 gross ton 1 square meter = 10.7639 square feet
•
R = 1.1023 net tons = 1.196 square yards
E
O 1 inch = 25.40 millimeters 1 pound per foot = 1.4882 kilograms per meter
1 foot (12 inches) = 30.48 centimeters 1 pound per yard = 0.4961 kilograms per meter
M 1 yard (3 feet) = 91.44 centimeters 1 pound per square inch = 0.0703 kilograms per
1 mile (1,760 yard) = 1,609.35 meters square centimeter S
A
1 millimeter = 0.03937 inches 1 pound per square foot = 4.8825 kilograms per •
I 1 centimeter = 0.3937 inches square meter W
N 1 meter = 39.37 inches 1 kilogram per meter = 0.6720 pounds per feet
= 3.2808 feet 1 kilogram per square millimeter = 1,422.32 pounds per square inch
I 1 kilogram per square centimeter = 14.2232 pounds per square inch
F
N 1 kilogram per square meter = 0.2048 pounds per square foot
C
F = 1.8433 pounds per square yard
W
O
244
A T
L O
M B
C Feet Per Pound - Stainless Rounds C
B Diameter Inches Feet Per Pound Diameter Inches Feet Per Pound Diameter Inches Feet Per Pound •
T .016 1,445 .057 114 .098 38.4 S
.017 1,280 .058 110 .099 37.7
.018 1,141 .059 106 .100 36.9
.019 1,024 .060 103 .105 33.7
B .020 925 .061 99 .109 31.3
L
R .021 839 .062 96 .114 28.5 •
Z .022 764 .063 93 .120 25.8 A
.023 699 .064 90 .125 23.6
.024 642 .065 88 .135 20.6
T .025 592 .066 85 .140 18.8

H
.026 547 .067 82 .148 17.1
I •
.027 507 .068 80 .156 15.1
T .028 472 .069 78 .162 14.3
F
.029 440 .070 75 .171 12.64
.030 411 .071 73 .177 11.97
M .031 385 .072 71 .178 10.57 C
A .032 361 .073 69 .192 10.17 •
G .033 340 .074 68 .203 8.97
I
.034 320 .075 65.7 .207 8.75
.035 302 .076 64 .218 7.78
.036 285 .077 62.3 .225 7.39
T .037 270 .078 60.7 .234 6.75 N
S .038 256 .079 59.2 .243 6.31 •
T .039 243 .080 57.7 .250 5.92 K
.040 231 .081 56.3 .262 5.44
.041 220 .082 54.9 .283 4.68
A .042 210 .083 53.6 .306 3.99
S
E .043 200 .084 52.3 .3125 3.84
•
R .044 191 .085 51.1 .331 3.42
E
O .045 183 .086 49.9 .344 3.17
.046 175 .087 48.8 .3625 2.85
.047 167 .088 47.7 .375 2.67
M .048 160 .089 46.6 .394 2.42 S
A .049 154 .090 45.6 .406 2.27 •
I .050 148 .091 44.6 .430 2.02
W
N .051 142 .092 43.6 .4375 1.96
.052 137 .093 42.7 .462 1.76
I .053 132 .094 41.8 .469 1.71
.054 127 .095 40.9 .490 1.56 F
N
.055 122 .096 40.1 .500 1.50 C
F .056 118 .097 39.2 W
O
245
A T
L O
M B
C C
B •
T General Conversion Formulas S
Covert To Formula Example
ksi (1,000 lb/in )- MPa (N/mm )
2 2
ksi X 6.8948 50.77 ksi =350 MPa
B L
MPa (N/mm ) - ksi (1,000 lb/in )
2 2
MPa X 0.14503774 350 MPa = 50.77 ksi
R •
psi (1 lb/in2)- MPa (N/mm2) psi X 0.0068948 39,160 psi = 270 MPa
Z A
MPa (N/mm ) - psi (1 lb/in )
2 2
MPa X 145.03774 270 MPa = 39,160 psi
T H
I Covert To Formula Example •
T ft/lb - J ft/lb X 1.35582 50 ft/lb = 67.79 J F
J - ft/lb J X 0.737562 67.79 J = 50 ft/lb
ft/lb - kg/m ft/lb X 0.138255 50 ft/lb = 6.91275 kg/m
M kg/m - ft/lb kg/m X 7.23301 6.913 kg/m = 49.999899 ft/lb C
A lb/ft - kg/m lb/ft X 1.48817 5 lb/ft = 7.44085 kg/m •
G kg/m - lb/ft kg/m X 0.67196624 7.44085 kg/m = 5 lb/ft I
T Covert To Formula Example N

S mm - in mm X 0.03937008 10 mm = 0.394 in •
T in - mm in X 25.4 2 in = 50.80 mm K
mm - ft mm X 0.00328084 304.8 mm = 1.00 ft
ft - mm ft X 304.8 3 ft = 914.4 mm
A
S
E
•
R
Covert To Formula Example E
O
kg - lb kilograms X 2.2046 10 kg = 22.046 lb
lb - kg pounds X 0.453597024 10 lb = 4.536 kg
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
246
A T
L O
M B
C GTAW Gases: C
B •
T Shielding Gases (see Table 1) S
Argon (SG-A)
Argon, an inert gas, is the most commonly used shielding gas for the GTAW process.
B It has low thermal conductivity and provides a narrow arc column. L
R Argon affords welders considerable manipulative flexibility. •
Z Its low arc voltage characteristic permits arc length variations with minimal influence on arc energy & weld bead shape. A
Argon provides relatively easy arc initiation due to its low ionization potential.
Argon is preferred over helium for alternating current (AC) welding applications because of enhanced cleaning action,
arc stability, and weld appearance.
T Argon is denser than air, providing adequate shielding at lower flow rates than helium. H
I •
Helium (SG-He)
T F
Helium is a chemically inert shielding gas that has high thermal conductivity and high ionization potential.
Arc voltages are higher with helium than argon for a given current setting and arc length.
These attributes increase the heat input which affects bead width and depth of arc penetration.
M For this reason, helium is often mixed with argon for welding base metals with high melting temperatures or high ther- C
mal conductivity.
A •
When using direct current electrode negative (DCEN) for mechanized GTAW of aluminum, helium shielding provides
G greater depth of fusion and higher travel speeds than argon. I
Mechanical removal of surface oxides is generally required when using GTAW with DCEN and helium shielding gas for
welding aluminum.
Although it offers definite advantages for some applications, helium produces a less stable arc and less desirable arc start-
T ing characteristics than argon.
N
S Helium usually requires higher shielding flow rates than argon. •
T K
Argon+Helium (SG-AHe)
Helium is added to argon to take advantage of the best operating characteristics of each gas.
A The superior arc starting and stable arc characteristics of argon with helium’s higher thermal conductivity produce high-
quality gas tungsten arc welds on aluminum using alternating current. S
E
Increased travel speeds and greater depth of fusion, for both manual and mechanized welding of nonferrous alloys can •
R be produced as helium content is increased. E
O Helium content usually ranges between 25% and 75%.
M Argon+Hydrogen (SG-AH)
Additions of hydrogen increase the heat input, permitting faster travel, increased depth of fusion, better wetting action, S
A and broader weld bead profile. •
I Argon-hydrogen mixtures provide a reducing atmosphere in the arc, removing oxygen from the weld area.
W
N A typical argon-hydrogen mixture is 95% argon and 5% hydrogen.
Mixtures of argon and hydrogen are frequently used to weld austenitic stainless steels. nickel, and nickel based alloys.
Argon-hydrogen mixtures should not be used to weld carbon or low alloy steels because of the potential of hydrogen-
I induced cracking,. F
N
C
F
W
O
247
A T
L O
M B
C Special safety precautions are required when mixing argon and hydrogen. C
B Users should NOT mix argon and hydrogen from separate cylinders without the use of approved •
T mixing equipment. S
Shielding Gas Flow Rates.

Shielding gas flow rates are influenced by the factors listed below.
B For example, the type of gas affects flow rates that may be required to produce a satisfactory weld. L
R Argon can be used for GTAW on all base metals. •
Z Typical flow rates are from 10 scfh to 35 scfh [5 L/min to 16 L/min]. A
Helium is less dense than argon and therefore may require higher flow rates.
(1) Type of base metal

T (2) Type and position of joint H
I (3) Torch position •
(4) Amperage
T F
(5) Type of gas
(6) Gas nozzle type and size
(7) Manual or automatic welding mode
M (8) Outdoor conditions such as wind C
A •
G Recommended Types of Current, Tungsten Electrodes, and Shielding Gases I
for GTAW of Different Metals and Alloys [Table 1]
Type of Tungsten
Metal Thickness Shielding Gases
Current (1), (2) Electrode Type (3)
T All AC Pure or Zirconiated Argon or Argon-Helium
N
S Aluminum Alloys >1/8 in. [3 mm] DCEN Thoriated Argon-Helium or Argon •
T <1/8 in. [3 mm] DCEP Thoriated or Zirconiated Argon K
Copper & All DCEN Thoriated Helium or Argon-Helium
Copper Alloys <1/8 in. [3 mm] AC Pure or Zirconiated Argon
A Nickel &
Nickel Alloys
All DCEN Thoriated Argon S
E
All AC Pure or Zirconiated Argon •
R Magnesium Alloys
<1/8 in. [3 mm] DCEP Zirconiated or Thoriated Argon E
O Plain Carbon & All DCEN Thoriated or Zirconiated Argon or Argon-Helium
Low Alloy Steels <1/8 in. [3 mm] AC Thoriated Argon
M DCEN Thoriated or Zirconiated Argon, Argon-Helium,
Hydrogen (5% Max.) (4) S
A Stainless Steel All
•
I AC Thoriated Argon
W
N Titanium Alloys All DCEN Thoriated Argon, Argon-Helium
Notes;
I (1) Where AC is listed, variable polarity or pulse current could be used.
(2) AC = Alternating current: DCEP = Direct current electrode positive; DCEN = Direct current electrode negative. F
N (3) Where thoriated tungsten electrodes are recommended, ceriated or lanthanated electrodes may also be used.
(4) Austenitic stainless steels only. C
F
W
O
248
A T
L O
M B
C GMAW Gases: C
B •
T Process Description S
Gas metal arc welding (GMAW) is a welding process that uses an arc between a continuous filler metal electrode
(which can be solid or metal cored) and the weld pool.
The arc continuously melts the wire as it is fed to the weld pool, and both are protected from the atmosphere by the flow
B of shielding gas. L
R •
Process Variations and Metal Transfer Modes.
Z A
The GMAW process includes distinctive metal transfer modes: short-circuiting transfer, globular transfer (in argon
and in carbon dioxide), spray transfer, pulsed spray transfer, and high-current-density rotational or non-rotational spray
(high deposition) transfer.
T Factors that determine metal transfer mode are current, electrode alloy type, electrode diameter, arc length, power sup- H
ply characteristics, and shielding gas.
I •
T Short-Circuiting Transfer Mode. F
The short-circuiting transfer mode occurs at low welding current and arc voltage.
The arc characteristics of this transfer mode produces a small fast-solidifying weld pool that is generally suited for
the joining of thin base metals in all positions, and for the filling of wide root openings.
M C
With material that is thicker than 1/8 in. 13 [mm], extreme care must be taken to prevent incomplete fusion.
A Since heat input is usually low, distortion of the work piece is minimized. •
G The electrode feeds at a constant speed and contacts the work piece or molten pool, at which time a short circuit occurs. I
The current from the power supply increases and heats the wire to a point where the end of the wire melts off, creating
an arc between the wire end and the work piece. At that point in the sequence, there is no metal transfer across the arc.
The welding wire short-circuiting sequence repeats itself from 50 to 250 times per second.
T N
S Globular Transfer Mode. •
T Globular transfer takes place when the current and arc voltage are between the short-circuiting and spray transfer K
range.
Regardless of the type of shielding gas, carbon dioxide yields this type of transfer at all usable welding currents above
A the short-circuiting range.
Globular transfer is characterized by an irregular drop size approximately 2 to 4 times the diameter of the electrode. S
E The mechanism producing globular transfer is generated in a specific current and voltage range. •
R With carbon dioxide, the droplet is not propelled across the arc.
E
O The droplet surface tension and the repelling force of the arc acting toward the wire end tends to hold the droplet on
the end of the wire until it transfers by gravity.
M Spray Transfer Mode. S

A In an argon-rich shielding gas, the transfer mode changes from globular to spray as welding current increases for any
•
I given electrode diameter.
The change takes place at a value called the “globular to spray transition current.” W
N Spray transfer in argon has a constricted arc column and pointed electrode tip.
I Molten metal transfers across the arc as small droplets.

The metal transfer is axially directed to the work piece. F
N
Since the metal droplets are small, the transfer rate can be as high as several C
F hundred droplets per second. W
O
249
A T
L O
M B
C Pulsed Spray Transfer Mode. C
B In the pulsed spray transfer mode, the current is cycled between a high and low value at a rate of up to several hundred •
T cycles per second. The low level current is below the spray transition current, while the high current pulse is above the S
spray transition current.
Metal is transferred to the work piece only during the high current pulse.
Ideally, one small droplet is transferred during each pulse. The rate of pulsing can vary depending on the power supply
B design and control circuitry. The background current maintains the arc. L
R The resulting lower average current levels and heat input allow for all-position welding of base metals less than 1/8 in. •
[3 mm] thick with a spray-type metal transfer mode.
Z A
High-Current-Density Spray Transfer Mode.
High-current-density spray transfer is a name given to a GMAW mode having specific arc characteristics created by
T a combination of wire feed speed, electrode extension, and shielding gas. H
Mixtures of argon with oxygen and/or carbon dioxide are most popular for carbon steel and low alloy steel electrodes.
I Filler metal deposition rates range between 18 lb/hr and 30 lb/hr [8 and 14 kg/hr] with an upper limit of 40 lb/hr •
T [18 kg/hr]. F
The arc characteristics of highcurrent-density transfer are further divided into rotational spray transfer and non-rota-
tional spray transfer modes.
M (1) High-Current-Density Rotational Spray Transfer Mode. C
A When using a solid carbon steel wire, a high wire feed speed is combined with a long electrode extension to create •
G an arc known as rotational spray arc transfer. The long contact tube to work piece distance produces resistance heating of I
the wire electrode and causes the electrode end to become molten.
The electro-magnetic forces generated by the current flow in the wire cause the molten wire end to rotate in a helical
path.
T The shielding gas affects the rotational transition current by changing the surface tension at the molten electrode end. N
S Gas mixtures of argon, carbon dioxide, oxygen can produce rotational spray transfer deposition rates of •
181b/hr to 30 lb/hr [8 kg/hr to 14 kg/hr] using contact tip to work piece distance of 7/8 in. to 1-1/2 in.
T K
[22 mm to 38 mm].
(2) High-Current-Density Non-Rotational Spray Transfer Mode.

A Non-rotational highcurrent-density spray transfer is produced when the molten wire end does not rotate. S
E Rotation is suppressed when the thermal conductivity of the shielding gas increases and the surface tension of the mol-
•
R ten electrode end increases. The droplet rate will decrease, and larger droplets will transfer across the arc.
Shielding gases with higher carbon dioxide or helium additions will raise the rotational spray transition current, thereby E
O
suppressing the tendency to rotate.
The arc is elongated and diffused but looks similar to conventional spray transfer.
M The plasma stream is axial and narrower than that produced by rotational spray transfer.
S
A This more concentrated heat source can produce an increased depth of fusion compared with rotational spray transfer at
the same welding current. •
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
250
A T
L O
M B
C Gas Selection for Gas Metal Arc Welding [Table 2] C
AWS
B Metal Type Thickness Transfer Mode
Recommended
Designation per Advantages / Description
•
Shielding Gas
T A5.32 S
Up to 14 gauge Argon + 8% CO2 SG-AC-8 Good depth of fusion and distortion
Or 0.064 in. Short Circuit Argon + 25% CO2 SG-AC-25 control to reduce potential burn-
[1.6 mm] Aegon + 8% CO2 + 2% O2 SG-ACO-8/2 through.
B 14 gauge or
Higher deposition rates without burn- L
Argon + 8% CO2 SG-AC-8 through. Minimum distortion and
R 0.064 in. to
Short Circuit Argon + 25% CO2 SG-AC-25 spatter.
•
1/8 in. [1.6 mm
Z to 3 mm]
Argon + He + CO2 SG-AHeC-G Good weld pool control for out of posi- A
tion welding.
100% CO2 SG-C High welding speed.
Argon + 15% CO2 SG-AC-15 Good depth of fusion and puddle
Short Circuit
T Argon + 18% CO2 SG-AC-18 control. H
Argon + 25% CO2 SG-AC-25 Applicable for out-of position welding.
I Short Circuit Suitable for high current & high speed
•
Argon + 25% CO2 SC-AC-25
T or Globular welding. F
Deep depth of fusion; low spatter: high
Short Circuit Argon + 50% CO2 SC-AC-50 travel speeds. Good out-of position
welding.
M Short Circuit
Deep depth of fusion and fastest travel C
A or Globular 100% CO2 SG-C
speeds but with higher melt-through
potential. High current mechanized
•
(buried arc)
G welding. I
Argon + 1% O2 SG-AO-1 Good arc stability; produces a more
Argon + 2% O2 SG-AO-2 fluid puddle as O, increases: good co-
Spray Transfer
Carbon Steel Argon + 5% O2 SG-AO-5 alescence & bead contour. Good weld
T Over 1/8 in.
Argon + 8% O2 SG-AO-8 appearance & weld pool control. N
S [3 mm] Argon + 5% CO2 SG-AC-5
Fluid weld pool and oxidizing to weld
metal causing higher amounts of slag
•
Argon + 8% CO2 SG-AC-8
T Spray Transfer
and scale, as CO, increases. K
Good arc stability, weld soundness, and
increasing width of fusion.
A Short Circuit Argon + 8% CO2 + 2% O2 SG-ACO-8/2

Applicable to both short-circuiting and
spray transfer modes. S
E Argon + 35% Helium SG-AHeC-35/ 1
Has a wide welding current range and •
R + 1% CO2
good arc performance.
Spray Transfer E
O Helium + 43% Argon SG-HeAC-43/2
Weld pool has good control which
results in improved weld contour.
+ 2% CO2
M Used for high deposition rate weld-

ing where 15 lb/hr to 30 lb/hr [7 kg/ S
A High-Current-
Argon + Helium + CO2 + O SG-AHeCO-G
hr to 14 kg/hr] is typical. Special
Density welding equipment and techniques are •
I Argon + CO2 + O2 SG-ACO-G
sometimes required to achieve these W
N deposition levels.
Used for both light-gauge and heavy
Argon + 2% to 8% O2 SG-AO-2 to 8
Over 14 gauge out-of-position weldments. Achieves
I or 0.064 in. Pulsed Spray
Argon + 5% to 20% CO2 SG-AC-5 to 20
good pulse spray stability over a wide
Argon + 8% CO2 + 2% O2 SG-ACO-8/2 F
N [ 1.6 mm]
Argon +Helium + CO2 ST-AHeC-G
range of arc characteristics and deposi-
tion ranges. C
F (Continued On Next Page)
W
O
251
A T
L O
M B
C Gas Selection for Gas Metal Arc Welding [Table 2] C
AWS
B Metal Type Thickness Transfer Mode
Recommended
Designation per Advantages / Description
•
Shielding Gas
T A5.32 S
Argon + 8% to 20% O2 SG-AC-8 to 20
Good coalescence and bead contour.
Short Circuit Helium + Argon + CO2 SG-HeAC-G
Good mechanical properties.
Argon + 8% CO2 +2% O2 SG-ACO-8/2
B Up to 3/32 in. L
High welding speeds. Good depth of
R [2 mm]
fusion and weld pool control.
•
Z Short Circuit Argon + 20% to 50% CO2 SG-AC-20 to 50 Applicable for out-of position welds. A
Suitable for high current and high-
speed welding.
Low &
High-Alloy Spray Argon + 2% O2 SG-AO-2
Reduces undercutting.
T Steel (Including Argon + 5% CO2 SG-AC-5
Higher deposition rates and improved H
High-Current- Argon + 8% CO2 SG-AC-8
I Density Rota- Argon + 10% CO2 SG-AC-10
head wetting. •
Deep depth of fusion and good me-
T Over 3/32 in.
tional and Non-
Rotational)
Argon + 8% CO2 + 2% O2
Argon + Helium + CO2 + O2
SG-ACO-B/2
SG-AHeCO-G
chanical properties. F
[2 mm]
Argon + 2% O2 Used for both light-gauge and heavy
SG-AO-2
Argon + 5% CO2 out-of-position weldments.
SG-AC-5
Pulsed Spray Argon + 8% CO2 + 2% O2 Achieves good pulse spray stability
M Helium + 43%
SG-ACO-B/2
over a wide range of arc characteristics C
SG-HeAC-43/2
A Argon + 2% CO2 and deposition ranges. •
G Up to 14 gauge Argon + 2% CO2 SG-AC-2
Good control of burn-through and dis-
tortion. Used also for the spray transfer
I
or 0.064 in. Short Circuit
mode. Weld pool fluidity is sometimes
[2 mm] Argon +5% CO2 SG-AC-5
sluggish, depending on the base alloy.
Low CO2 percentages in helium mix
T minimizes carbon pickup, which can N
Helium + 7.5% SG-HcAC-7.5/2.5
S Argon + 2.5% CO2 SG-AC-2 to 5
cause inter-granular corrosion with •
some alloys.
T Short Circuit
Argon + 2% to 5% CO2 SG-AHeC-G
Helium improves bead wetting action K
Argon + Helium + CO2 SG-HeAC-43/2
Over 14 gauge and contour. CO2 percentages over 5%
Helium + 43%
or 0.064 in. should be used with caution on some
Stainless Steel Argon + 2% CO2
A [2 mm] alloys.
Applicable for all position welding. S
E Argon + 1% O2 SG-AO-1 Good arc stability. Produces a fluid but
•
R Spray
Argon + 2% O2 SG-AO-2 controllable weld pool; good coales-
Argon + Helium + CO2 SG-AHeC-G cence and head contour. Minimizes E
O Helium + Argon + CO2 SG-HeAC-G undercutting on heavier thicknesses.
Argon + 1% O2 SG-AO-1 Used for both light- and heavy-gauge
M Over 14 gauge Argon + 2% O2 SG-AO-2 out-of-position weldments.
or 0.064 in. Pulsed Spray Argon + Helium + CO2 SG-AHeC-G Achieves good pulse spray stability S
A [2 mm] Helium + Argon + CO2 SG-HcAC-G over a wide range of arc characteristics
Argon + CO2 + H2 SG-ACH-G and deposition ranges. •
I
(Continued On Next Page) W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
252
A T
L O
M B
C C
Gas Selection for Gas Metal Arc Welding [Table 2]
B AWS
•
T Metal Type Thickness Transfer Mode
Recommended
Shielding Gas
Designation per Advantages / Description S
A5.32
Helium + 10% Argon SG-HeA-10

Up to 1/8 in. Good arc stability, weld pool control
Short Circuit Helium + 25% Argon SG-HeA-25
B [3 mm]
Argon + Helium SG-AHe-G
and wetting. L
R Higher heat input of helium mixtures
•
Z Nickel,
Nickel Alloys, Argon + Helium SG-AHe-G
offset high heat conductivity of heavier A
gauges. Good wetting and bead con-
Copper &
tour. Can be used for out-of-position
Copper Alloys Over 1/8 in. Spray Argon + 50% Helium SG-AHe-50
welding.
[3 mm] Using 100% helium on heavier material
T Argon or Helium SG-A or SG-He
thickness improves bead wetting and
H
I depth of fusion. •
T Pulsed Spray Helium + Argon SG-HeA-G Good out-of-position control. F
Best metal transfer, arc stability and
Up to 1/2 in. Spray or plate cleaning. Little or no spatter.
Argon SG-A
[13 mm] Pulsed Spray Removes oxides when used with DCEP
M Aluminum
(Reverse Polarity).
C
Helium + 25% Argon SG-HeA-25 High-heat input.
A Over 1/2 in. Spray or Argon + 50% Helium SG-AHe-50 Produces fluid puddle, flat bead con- •
G [13 mm] Pulsed Spray Argon 100% SG-A tour and deep depth of fusion. I
Helium 100% SG-He Minimizes porosity.
Excellent cleaning action.
Magnesium, Spray Argon SG-A Provides more stable arc than helium-
T Titanium rich mixtures.
N
& other All Thicknesses Higher heat input and less chance of
S Reactive Argon + 30% Helium SG-AHe-30
porosity. •
Spray Argon + 50% Helium AG-AHe-50
T Metals
Helium + 25% Argon SG-HeA-25
More fluid weld pool and improved K
wetting.
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
253
A T
L O
M B
C Argon (SG-A). C
B Argon is a chemically inert gas that is used alone and in combination with other gases for welding both ferrous and •
T nonferrous metals. S
All GMAW modes can use argon or argon mixes to achieve good weldability, required mechanical properties, stable arc
characteristics, and improved productivity.
The low ionization potential of argon helps create an excellent current path and superior arc stability.
B Argon produces a constricted arc column with high current density, which causes the arc energy to be concentrated over L
R a small surface area. •
The result is a depth of fusion profile with a distinct finger like shape as shown in diagram.
Z Argon is used for nonferrous base metals such as aluminum, nickel, copper, and magnesium alloys, as well as for reactive A
metals such as zirconium and titanium.
Argon and argon mixes provide spray transfer with excellent arc welding stability, penetration and bead profile.
T When welding ferrous base metals, argon is usually mixed with other gases such as oxygen, helium, and carbon dioxide. H
I Carbon Dioxide (SG-C). •
T Carbon dioxide is a chemically active gas. F
In the presence of an intense heat source such as a welding arc, it associates into carbon monoxide and free oxygen and
becomes active.
This is shown by the following equation: CO2→ CO2 +O
M The free oxygen, which is available in considerable amounts, reacts with other elements in the weld pool. C
A Although carbon dioxide is an active gas and produces an oxidizing effect, sound welds can be consistently achieved. •
G Carbon dioxide is often used for welding carbon steel. I
Its popularity is due to common availability, low cost, and weld performance.
The low cost per unit of gas does not automatically translate to lowest cost per foot of deposited weld.
Total weld cost with carbon dioxide shielding gas is influenced by bead contour, electrode spatter, and spatter removal.
T Carbon dioxide, by itself, will not support spray transfer. N
S Metal transfer is restricted to short-circuiting and globular transfer. •
The advantage of carbon dioxide is its increased depth of fusion compared to argon.
T K
The major disadvantage of carbon dioxide is harsh globular transfer with its characteristic spatter at elevated weld cur-
rents.
The weld surface resulting from using a 100% carbon dioxide shielding gas is usually heavily oxidized.
A A welding wire having higher amounts of deoxidizing elements may be needed to compensate for the reactive nature of S
E the gas.
•
R Overall, good mechanical properties can be achieved with carbon dioxide.
E
O
Argon Helium Helium/Argon
M
S
A
•
I
W
N Ar + CO2 CO2 Ar + O2
I
F
N
C
F Figure 1. Typical GMAW Bead & Penetration Profiles with Several Shielding Gases W
O
254
A T
L O
M B
C Helium (SG-He). C
B Helium is a chemically inert gas used for welding applications requiring higher heat inputs. •
T Helium may improve wetting action, width of fusion and travel speeds. S
It does not produce the stable arc provided by argon.
Helium has higher thermal conductivity than argon and a wider arc column.
The higher voltage gradient increases heat input compared with argon, promoting increased weld pool fluidity and better
B wetting action. L
R This is an advantage when welding aluminum, magnesium, and copper alloys. •
Helium is often mixed with argon to obtain the advantages of both gases.
Z Argon provides good arc stability and cleaning action, while helium promotes wetting with a broad width of fusion. A
Two-Component Shielding Gas Mixtures (see previous Table)

T H
Argon + Oxygen (SG-AO).
I The addition of small amounts of oxygen to argon greatly stabilizes the welding arc, increases the filler metal droplet
•
T transfer rate, lowers the spray transition current and influences bead shape when welding steels. F
The weld pool is more fluid and stays molten longer, allowing the metal to flow out toward the toe of the weld.
Argon oxygen mixtures produce a narrow deep penetration pattern that could be susceptible to porosity entrapment
during rapid weld pool cooling.
M Slower travel speeds reduce weld pool cooling rates and minimize porosity entrapment.
C
A Argon-oxygen shielding gas mixtures are available pre-blended in liquid form. •
G I
(1) Argon + 1% Oxygen (SG-AO-1).
This mixture is primarily used for spray transfer on stainless steels.
One percent oxygen is usually sufficient to stabilize the arc, increase the droplet rate and improve bead appearance.
T N
S (2) Argon + 2% Oxygen (SG-AO-2). •
T This mixture is used for spray arc welding on carbon steels, low alloy steels, and stainless steels. K
It provides additional wetting action over the 1% oxygen mixture.
Mechanical properties and corrosion resistance of welds made with 1% and 2% oxygen additions are equivalent.
A
(3) Argon + 5% Oxygen (SG-AO-5). S
E This mixture provides a more fluid, but still controllable, weld pool and permits higher travel speeds. •
R It is the most commonly used argon and oxygen mixture for carbon steel welding.
E
O
M Argon S
A Figure 2.
The Effect of Argon & Helium Shielding Gases •
I on Bead Profile & Penetration when W
N Welding Aluminum with GMAW
I Helium F
N
C
F
W
O
255
A T
L O
M B
C Argon + Carbon Dioxide Mixtures (SGAC). C
B •
T The argon + carbon dioxide mixtures are used mainly on carbon and low alloy steels and have limited application on S
stainless steels.
Carbon dioxide additions to argon allow increased travel speeds with greater depth and width of fusion.
With these mixtures, increasing the amount of carbon dioxide will result in an increase in the level of spatter and a de-
B crease in deposition efficiency. L
R In GMAW with carbon dioxide additions, a slightly higher current level must be provided in order to establish and •
maintain stable spray transfer.
Z Above approximately 20% carbon dioxide, spray transfer becomes unstable and periodic short-circuiting and globular
A
transfer occurs.
T (1) Argon + 2% to 10% Carbon Dioxide (SG-AC-2, SG-AC-5, SG-AC-8, SG-AC-10). H

These mixtures are used for spray, pulse spray and short-circuiting transfer on a variety of material and thickness.
I Argon with 2% carbon dioxide is a common mixture for pulse welding stainless steel.
•
T A 5% carbon dioxide mixture may be used for pulsed GMAW of low alloy steels being welded in other than the flat posi- F
tion.
With 5% to 10% carbon dioxide, the arc column is constricted.
The arc forces that develop give these mixtures more tolerance to mill scale with a controllable weld pool.
M C
A (2) Argon + 15% to 20% Carbon Dioxide (SG-AC-15, SG-AC-18, SG-AC-20). •
G This mixture range has been used for a variety of applications on carbon and low alloy steels. I
Maximum productivity on thin base metals can be achieved within this range.
This is done by minimizing excessive melt-through tendency by increasing deposition rates and travel speeds.
The lower carbon dioxide percentages also improve deposition efficiency by decreasing spatter loss.
T N
S (3) Argon + 21% to 49% Carbon Dioxide (SG-AC-21 to 49). •
T This range is commonly used for GMAW with the short circuit transfer mode on low-carbon steel. K
It was formulated to provide maximum short-circuiting frequency in the short circuit transfer mode with common
welding electrode sizes.
These mixtures operate well in high current applications on thick base metal.
A They promote good arc stability, weld pool control and weld bead appearance S
E
•
R (4) Argon + 50% Carbon Dioxide (SGAC-50).
This mixture is used where high heat inputs and increased fusion depth are needed. E
O
Recommended base metal thickness is above 1/8 in. [3 mm].
Fusion is increased in welding positions other than flat when utilizing the short-circuiting transfer mode.
M Good wetting and bead shape, without excessive fluidity, are the main advantages for pipe welding applications.
S
A Welding on thin-gauge materials with this mixture may produce excessive melt through.
When welding at high current levels, the metal transfer is similar to welding in 100% carbon dioxide. •
I
Some reduction in spatter is realized (in comparison to 100% CO2) due to the argon content. W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
256
A T
L O
M B
C Argon + Helium (SG-AHe). C
B Argon and helium mixtures are used primarily for welding nonferrous and reactive metals, such as aluminum, copper, •
T nickel, magnesium, and their alloys. S
They are also used for welding some carbon steels.
Helium is added to argon to take advantage of the best operating characteristics of each gas.
Generally, the thicker the base metal, the higher the percentage of helium.
B The addition of helium to an argon base gas will increase the heat input. L
R Small percentages of helium, as low as 10%, will affect the arc characteristics. •
As helium percentages increase, the arc voltage, spatter, and weld depth-to-width ratio will increase
Z (see figure 1 & 2), while porosity is minimized. A
The argon content must be at least 45% when mixed with helium to produce and maintain a stable spray transfer mode.
T (1) Argon + 25% to 50% Helium (SGAHe-25, SGAHe-50). H

These mixtures are used for welding nonferrous base metals when an increase in heat input is sought and weld bead ap-
I pearance is of primary importance. •
T F
(2) Helium + 25% to 50% Argon (SGHeA-25, SGHeA-50).
These mixtures further increase heat input in comparison to the mixtures having higher argon content.
They are used for welding of aluminum and magnesium greater than 1/2 in. [13 mm] thick in the flat position.
M They increase heat input and reduce porosity of welds in copper, aluminum, and magnesium C
A •
G (3) Helium + 10% to 25% Argon (SGHeA-10 to 25). I
These mixtures are used for welding copper over 1/2 in. [13 mm] thick and aluminum over 3 in. [75 mm] thick.
Their high-heat input improves weld fusion.
They may be used for short-circuiting transfer with nickel filler metals.
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
257
A T
L O
M B
C Three-Component Shielding Gas Mixtures (see previous Table) C
B •
T Argon + Carbon Dioxide + Oxygen (SGACO). S
Mixtures containing these three components are versatile due to their ability to function with processes using short
circuit, globular, spray, pulsed, and high current-density spray transfer.
Several three component mixtures are available and their application will depend on the desired metal transfer modes.
B The advantage of these mixtures is their ability to shield carbon steel and low alloy steel of all thickness using any type of L
R metal transfer mode. •
These mixtures produce good welding characteristics and mechanical properties on carbon and low alloy steels.
Z On thin base metals, the oxygen constituent improves arc stability at low current levels (30 A to 60 A), permitting the arc
A
to be kept short and controllable.
This helps minimize excessive melt-through and distortion by lowering the total heat input in the weld zone.
T H
Argon + Helium + Carbon Dioxide (SGAHeC).
I Helium and carbon dioxide additions to argon increase the heat input to the weld, increasing bead wetting and fluidity.
•
T The weld bead profile becomes flatter and wider. F
(l) Argon + 10% to 40% Helium + 1% to 15% Carbon Dioxide.

Mixtures in this range have been developed for pulse spray arc welding of carbon. low alloy, and stainless steels.
M These mixtures are most often used on thick sections and in positions other than flat. C
A Good mechanical properties and weld pool control are characteristic of these mixtures. •
G I
(2) Helium + 25 % to 35 % Argon and 1% to 5% Carbon Dioxide.
These mixtures are used for the short-circuiting transfer mode in welding of high strength and stainless steels, espe-
cially for welding positions other than flat.
T The carbon dioxide content is kept low to insure good weld metal toughness. N
S The helium provides the heat necessary for good weld pool fluidity. •
T K
(3) Helium + 7.5% Argon + 2.5% Carbon Dioxide (SG-HeAC-7.5/2.5).
This mixture is widely used for the short circuit transfer mode in welding of stainless steel in all welding positions.
The carbon dioxide content is kept low to minimize carbon absorption and assure good corrosion resistance, especially
A in multipass welds. S
E The argon + carbon dioxide additions provide good arc stability and increased depth of fusion.
•
R The high helium content provides significant heat input to overcome the sluggish nature of the stainless steel weld pool.
E
O
Argon + Helium + Oxygen (SGAHeO).
Just as the addition of helium to argon increases the arc energy when welding nonferrous metals with the GMAW pro-
M cess, oxygen affects the arc characteristics when welding ferrous metals.
S
A Argon-helium-oxygen mixtures have been used occasionally with spray transfer to increase weld pool fluidity, control
bead shape and reduce porosity. •
I
W
N Argon + Nitrogen + Oxygen (SGANO).
Small amounts of nitrogen (1.0% to 3.0%) have been added to argon + 1% oxygen
I to achieve a completely austenitic microstructure in welds made with
Type 347 stainless steel filler metal. F
N
C
F
W
O
258
A T
L O
M B
C Four-Component Shielding Gas Mixtures (see previous Table) C
B •
T Argon + Helium + Carbon Dioxide + Oxygen (SG-AHeCO). S
Commonly known as a “quad mix;” this combination is most popular for high-deposition GMAW using the high-cur-
rent-density metal transfer mode.
This mixture will give good mechanical properties and operability throughout a wide range of deposition rates.
B Its major application is welding low-alloy, high-tensile-strength base materials, but it has also been used on mild steel for L
R high productivity welding. •
Weld economics are an important consideration in using this gas for welding mild steel.
Z A
Flux Cored Arc Welding
T Process Description. H
I Flux cored arc welding (FCAW) is an arc welding process that produces coalescence of metals by heating them with an •
are between a continuous flux-cored metal electrode and the weld pool.
T Shielding is provided by either the decomposition of the flux contained within the electrode or externally supplied gas or
F
both.
M Shielding Gases C
A Carbon Dioxide (SG-C). •
G Welding with carbon dioxide shielding gas is generally characterized by a globular metal transfer mode. I
The oxidizing characteristic of carbon dioxide is well known to the developers and manufacturers of flux cored elec-
trodes.
Deoxidizing materials are added to the core of the electrode to compensate for the oxidizing effect of the carbon dioxide.
T The deoxidizing elements have a great affinity for oxygen and readily combine with it. N
S •
T Gas Mixtures. K
The trend toward using smaller diameter welding electrodes to obtain greater versatility has resulted in the use of more
gas mixtures.
A The most common mixture for FCAW is argon + 25% carbon dioxide.
Because of the poor transfer of deoxidizing elements in FCAW when using carbon dioxide. S
E All electrodes designed for use with carbon dioxide are heavily deoxidized. •
R When these same electrodes are used with gas mixtures utilizing argon based gases, a buildup of manganese, silicon, and
E
O other deoxidizing elements may occur.
Welds produced using these mixtures generally have higher strengths but slightly lower ductility than welds made under
the same conditions with carbon dioxide.
M Many manufacturers provide different FCAW electrodes for use in either 100% carbon dioxide or argon based mixtures. S
A Three component mixtures such as argon + carbon dioxide + oxygen have been used with good results with certain
•
I HSLA materials.
W
N
(The following information was provided by AWS C5.10/C5.10M:2003
Recommended Practices for Shielding Gases for Welding and Cutting)
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
259
A T
L O
M B
AWS Filler Metal Specifications by Material & Welding Process
C C
GTAW
B OFW SMAW GMAW FCAW SAW ESW EGW Brazing
•
T PAW S
A5.8
Carbon Steel A5.2 A5.1 A5.18 A5.20 A5.17 A5.25 A5.26
A5.31
B Low-Alloy Steel A5.2 A5.5 A5.28 A5.29 A5.23 A5.25 A5.26
A5.8 L
R A5.31 •
Z A5.9 A5.8 A
Stainless Steel - A5.4 A5.22 A5.9 A5.9 A5.9
A5.22 A5.31
A5.8
Cast Iron A5.15 A5.15 A5.15 A5.15 - - -
A5.31
T A5.8 H
Nickel Alloys - A5.11 A5.14 - A5.14 - -
I A5.31 •
T Aluminum Alloys - A5.3 A5.10 - - - -
A5.8 F
A5.31
A5.8
Copper Alloys - A5.6 A5.7 - - - -
A5.31
M C
A5.8
A Titanium Alloys - - A5.16 - - - -
A5.31 •
G A5.8 I
Zirconium Alloys - - A5.24 - - - -
A5.31
A5.8
Magnesium Alloys - - A5.19 - - - -
T A5.31 N
S Tungsten Electrodes - - A5.12 - - - - - •
T K
A5.8
Brazing Alloys & Fluxes - - - - - - -
A5.31
A Surfacing Alloys
A5.13 A5.13 A5.13
- - - - -
A5.21 A5.21 A5.21 S
E
•
R Consumable Inserts - - A5.30 - - - - -
E
O
Shielding Gases - - A5.32 A5.32 - - A5.32 -
M
S
A • OFW - Oxyfuel Gas Welding • FCAW - Fluxed Core Arc Welding
•
I
• SMAW - Shielded Metal Arc Welding • SAW - Submerged Arc Welding W
N
• GTWA - Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (TIG) • ESW - Electro Slag Welding
I
F
N • GMAW - Gas Metal Arc Welding (MIG) • EGW - Electro Gas Welding
C
F
• PAW - Plasma Arc Welding W
O
260
A T
L O
M B
C Please Click Here to Clear Input Value C
B •
T Convert ksi to MPa Please type ksi value to convert below. Converted MPa value S
ksi X
B L
Convert MPa to ksi Please type MPa value to convert below. Converted ksi value
R •
MPa X
Z A
Convert psi to MPa Please type psi value to convert below. Converted MPa value
T psi X H
I •
T Convert MPa to psi Please type MPa value to convert below. Converted psi value F
MPa X
M C
A Please Click Here to Clear Input Value •
G I
Convert ft/lb to J Please type ft/lb value to convert below. Converted J value
ft/lb X
T N
S •
Convert J to ft/lb Please type J value to convert below. Converted ft/lb value
T K
JX
A Convert ft/lb to kg/m Converted kg/m value

Please type ft/lb value to convert below. S
E
ft/lb X •
R
E
O
Convert kg/m to ft/lb Please type kg/m value to convert below. Converted ft/lb value
M kg/m X
S
A
•
I Convert lb/ft to kg/m Please type lb/ft value to convert below. Converted kg/m value
W
N lb/ft X
I Convert kg/m to lb/ft Please type kg/m to convert value below. Converted lb/ft value F
N
kg/m X C
F
W
O
261
A T
L O
M B
C Please Click Here to Clear Input Value C
B •
T Convert mm to inch Please type mm value to convert below. Converted inch value S
mm X
B L
Convert inch to mm Please type inch value to convert below. Converted mm value
R •
Z inch X A
Convert mm to ft Please type mm value to convert below. Converted ft value

T mm X H
I •
T F
Convert ft to mm Please type ft value to convert below. Converted mm value
ft X
M C
A •
Please Click Here to Clear Input Value
G I
Convert kg to lb Please type kg value to convert below. Converted lb value

T kg X N
S •
T Convert lb to kg Please type lb value to convert below. Converted kg value
K
lb X
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
262
Filler Metals
Selection Guide
FILLER METAL SELECTOR GUIDE
This report lists recommended Lincoln Electric matching strength Manual Stick (SMAW), MIG (GMAW), Submerged Arc
(SAW), Self-Shielded and Gas-Shielded Flux-Cored (FCAW-S, FCAW-G) for ASTM, API and ABS classified steels. Also
included is general information on each classification such as tensile strength, yield strength and steel chemistry.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Description Page No.
Technical Notes, Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) Specifications . . . . . . . . 4 - 25
American Petroleum Institute (API) Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-27
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .See ASTM A131
Special Consumable Product Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-27
The serviceability of a product or structure utilizing these suggested consumables is and must be the sole responsibility of the builder/user. Many
factors must be taken into consideration when a filler metal is selected for a specific application. These factors include, but are not limited to, the
type of steel, type of weld, loading on the welded joint, applicable codes, level of preheat, level of restraint, position of welding, condition of the
steel, and service conditions. This guide provides matching strength filler metal options -- see discussion about undermatching below. The prima-
ry focus of these suggestions is based upon the yield and tensile strength properties of the weld deposit as compared to the base metal yield and
tensile strength properties. These suggested products may not meet all code or application requirements. Suggested filler metals may not always
meet Charpy V-Notch (CVN) application requirements --reference comments below on CVN's.
Reference is made to ASTM and API specifications and classifications and the requisite properties specified in those documents. These specifica-
tions are subject to change, and the user should consult the latest version of these documents to ensure that these descriptions are up-to-date.
These filler metal suggestions "match" the base metal properties; that is, the yield and tensile strength are expected to meet or exceed the mini-
mum specified properties of the steel. Matching filler metal is typically required for complete joint penetration groove welds in tension. However, fil-
let welds loaded in shear seldom require matching filler metal. Depending on the type of weld joint and loading, lower filler metal strengths may be
acceptable or desirable for specific designs. Also, codes, specifications, or contract documents may require specific mechanical properties that
these recommendations do not meet. In those cases, electrode selection should be limited to those products that meet the specific application
requirements. Suggested electrodes in this Selector Guide include those that have deposit weld metal with different levels of diffusible hydrogen.
High levels of hydrogen can cause weld metal and base metal cracking. The permissible level of hydrogen in a weld deposit is dependent on
many factors, including preheat and interpass temperatures intended to be used. The user of this information must make certain that, for the
suggested electrode that is selected, the preheat and interpass temperatures will be proper for the application. Suggested filler metals in this
Selector Guide do not always consider notch toughness (example Charpy V-Notch properties) requirements. Not all welding products are required
to have minimum specified levels of notch toughness. If code, specifications, or contract documents require notch toughness, electrode selection
should be limited to those products that meet the specific application requirements
Customer Assistance Policy
The business of The Lincoln Electric Company is manufacturing and selling high quality welding equipment, consum-
ables, and cutting equipment. Our challenge is to meet the needs of our customers and to exceed their expectations.
On occasion, purchasers may ask Lincoln Electric for advice or information about their use of our products. We
respond to our customers based on the best information in our possession at that time. Lincoln Electric is not in a
position to warrant or guarantee such advice, and assumes no liability, with respect to such information or advice. We
expressly disclaim any warranty of any kind, including any warranty of fitness for any customer’s particular purpose,
with respect to such information or advice. As a matter of practical consideration, we also cannot assume any
responsibility for updating or correcting any such information or advice once it has been given, nor does the provision
of information or advice create, expand or alter any warranty with respect to the sale of our products.
Lincoln Electric is a responsive manufacturer, but the selection and use of specific products sold by Lincoln Electric is
solely within the control of, and remains the sole responsibility of the customer. Many variables beyond the control of
Lincoln Electric affect the results obtained in applying this type of fabrication methods and service requirements.
Subject to Change - This information is accurate to the best of our knowledge at the time of printing. Please refer to
www.lincolnelectric.com for any updated information.
2
Due to space consideration, these technical supporting notes are listed here. Each is tied to a code used in the body of the tables which comprise the
remainder of this book. The notes and codes are listed below and may be used t reference additional information regarding recommended Lincoln
consumables for each applications. Please be sure to use the notes as an aid in selecting Lincoln consumables.
SMAW (15) When resistance to atmospheric corrosion and matching weathering

(1) Any E70X8 electrode may be used. Excalibur 7018, Jet-LH 78, characteristics are needed (such as on unpainted structures), use
and Excalibur 7018-1, are preferred over Jetweld LH-70 for most 960/LA-75, AXXX10/L-61 or 880, 880M, 882/LAC Ni2. For single
pipe and out-of-position welding. Jetweld LH-3800 can be used pass welds, multipass welds which are not exposed, and
in place of E7018’s for flat and horizontal fillet, lap, and flat butt multipass welds which do not require resistance to atmospheric
welds. corrosion and matching weathering characteristics, other filler
(2) Almost any E60XX or E70XX electrodes can be used. First, metal combinations may be used.
select electrode based on the joint requirements. If code, (26) 880, 880M/LAC B2 may be used in place of the listed
specifications, or contract documents require notch toughness Flux/Wire combinations for most applications.
electrode selection should be limited to those that meet the (31) Filler metals suitable for undermatching stregth applications use
specific application requirements. A709, Grades 70W and HPS 70W and A852 are:
(3) Almost any E70XX electrode can be used. First, select electrode MIL 800-HPNi/LA-75, 860/LA-75 and 960/LA-75.
based on the joint requirements. If code, specifications, or (32) 780 flux is recommended for circumferential applications because
contract documents require notch toughness, electrode of its faster freezing slag.
selection should be limited to those that meet the specific (33) 781 flux is recommended for making high speed, single pass
application requirements. welds on clean plate and sheet steel.
(4) Best Electrodes are Fleetweld 5P, 5P+, 35 or 35LS. (34) 761, 780, 860/L-70. 761 and 780 are recommended for single
(5) Best Electrodes are Fleetweld 35, 180, 7, 37 or 47. pass applications. 860 is recommended for multipass welds.
(6) When resistance to atmospheric corrosion and matching weathering GMAW
characteristics are needed (such as on unpainted structures), use (16) SuperArc L-50, SuperGlide S3, SuperArc L-54, SuperArc L-56,
Excalibur 8018-C3 MR (1% Ni). The second choice for multipass SuperGlide S6, Metalshield MC-6 or MC-710XL.
welds is Excalibur 8018-C1 MR (2-1/4% Ni). For single pass welds, (29) Use LA-75 when resistance to atmospheric corrosion and matching
multipass welds which are not exposed, and multipass welds weathering characteristics are needed. If the steel is to be painted
which do not require resistance to atmospheric corrosion and and atmospheric corosion resistance and matching weathering
matching weathering characteristics, any E7018 electrode may be characteristic are not need, SuperArc L-50, L-54, L-56,
used. SuperGlide S3, S6, Metalshield MC-6 or MC-710XL may be used.
(7) Fillet welds are frequently made with Excalibur 7018, Excalibur (30) LA-75 is certified to meet 80 ksi min. tensile strength with
7018-1, Jetweld LH-70, Jet-LH 78 or Excalibur 8018-C3. 98% Ar/2% O2 shielding gas. LA-75 with 75-90% Ar/balance CO2
(8) Jetweld LH-70 for fillets or Excalibur 8018-C3 are recommended shielding gas meets a 70 ksi min. tensile strength.
for general purpose welding these steels. Jetweld LH-90 can be
FCAW-S
used, particularly if the weldment is to be precipitation hardened
(17) Any Innershield electrode may be used, with the following
or high weld strength is required.
restrictions:
(9) Use Jet-LH-8018-C1 or, Excalibur 7018-1, when high impact
1. Innershield electrodes are not required to have specified levels of
properties (CVN) down to -75° F are required.
notch toughness. If code, specifications, or contract documents
(28) Use of Shield-Arc 90 should be limited to 3/8” maximum wall
require notch toughness, an electrode should be selected to meet
thickness.
the specific requirements.
SAW 2. .068”, 5/64” & 3/32” dia. NR-211-MP are restricted to maximum
(10) For single pass applications, any flux/wire combination meeting an 1/2” thick carbon steel. .035” & .045” dia. NR-211-MP are
AWS F7AX classification per AWS specification A5.17 may be restricted to maximum 5/16” thick carbon steel.
used. Typically, for single pass applications, active fluxes such as 3. NR-1, NR-5, and NR-152 are typically used for high speed
760, 761, 780 and 781 are recommended. 860, 865, 960 and 980 applications on carbon steel up to a maximum of 3/16” thick.
fluxes may also be suitable for single pass applications. The follow- NR-131 is designed for high speed, single pass welding on
ing flux/wire combinatins are classified under A5.17 and are rec- 12 gauge and thicker steels.
ommended: 760/L-50, 760/L-61, 761/L-60, 761/-L61, 780/L-60, (18) Innershield: NR-203MP, NR-203 Ni(1%), NR-232, NR-305,
781/L-50, 781/L-60, 781/L-61, 860/L-50, 860/L-61, 865/L-50, NR-311 Ni. (Exception: NR-311 Ni is not approved for use with
865/L-61, 960/L-50, 960/L-61, 980/L-50, 980/L-61, & 980/LC-72. any A709 grade when AASHTO/AWS D1.5 is appliable.)
Refer to Lincoln Bulletin C5.10 for flux operability information. (19) Innershield: NR-203 Ni(1%).
(11) For multiple pass applications, any flux/wire combination meeting (21) For vertical down applications, NR-207 or NR-207-H are the best
an AWS F7AX classification per AWS specification A5.17 may be choices. For vertical up applications, the NR-203-XX series is the
used. Typically, for multiple pass applications, neutral fluxes such best choice.
as 860, 865, 880M, 882, 8500 and MIL 800-H are recommended. (22) When resistance to atmospheric corrosion and matching weather-
960 and 980 fluxes may also be suitable for multiple pass applica- ing characteristics are needed, use NR-203 Ni(1%). If the steel is
tions. The following flux/wire combinations are classified under to be painted and atmospheric corrosion resistance and matching
A5.17 and are recommended: 8500/L-50, 8500/L-61, 8500/L-S3, weathering characteristic are needed, any E7XT-6, or -8 may be
860/L-50, 860/L-61, 860/L-S3, 865/L-50, 865/L-61, 880M/L-50, used.
880M/L-56, 880M/L-S3, 882/L-50, 882/L-56, 882/L-61, 882/L- FCAW-G
S3, 960/L-50, 960/L-61, 980/L-50, 980/L-61, 980/LC-72, and (23) Outershield 70, 70-H, XLH70, 71, 71M, 71 Elite.
MIL 800-H/L-S3. Refer to Lincoln Bulletin C5.10 for flux operabiity (24) Outershield 81K2-H, 81Ni1-H
information. (25) When resistance to atmopheric corrosion and matching weather-
(12) 880/LAC-M2, 880M/LAC-M2. ing characteristics are needed (such as on unpainted structures),
(13) MIL 800-H/LA-90, MIL 800-H/LA-100, 880M/LA-100, use 81K2-H or 81Ni1-H. For single pass welds, multipass welds
880M/LA-92. which are not exposed, and multipass welds which do not require
(14) 882/LAC-Ni2, 880M/LA-90, 980/LAC-Ni2. resistance to atmospheric corrosion and matching weathering
characteristics, any E7XT-1, -5, or -9 may be used.
3
STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS
ASTM TENSILE YIELD
NO. DESCRIPTION GRADES (ksi) (ksi)
A27 Carbon Steel Castings All 60-70 30-40

A36 Structural-36,000 Min. Yield Strength All, Carbon Steel # 58-80 36 min
A53 Pipe-Black, Hot dipped Type E & S, Grade A 48 min 30 min
Type E & S, Grade B 60 min 35 min
Type F 48 min 30 min
A105 Forgings, for Piping 70 min 36 min
A106 Pipe A&B 48 & 60 min 30 & 35 min
C 70 min 40 min
A131 Structural Steel for Ships (Recommendations are A, B, D, DS, CS, E 58-75 34 min
based on strength req’ts. Impact Test Temp. (Gr A Imp’t Test Temp @ +68°F)
req’ts are as follows: Grades B & AHxx @ +32°F, AH32, DH32 & EH32 64-85 46 min
Grades D & DS @ +14°F, Grades DHxx @ -4°F, AH36, DH36 & EH36 71-90 51 min
& Grades CS, E & EHxx @ -40°F. EH40 and FHxx AH40, DH40 & EH40 74-94 57 min
grades are normalized, thermo-mechanical control FH32 64-85 46 min
processed, or quenched & tempered. FHxx grades FH36 71-90 51 min
impact test temp are -76°F FH40 74-94 57 min
A134 Pipe See A36, A283, A285, or A570
A135 Pipe, Electric-Resistance-Steel (5.563” Max. Dia.) A 48 min 30 min
B 60 min 35 min
A139 Pipe, Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded A 48 min 30 min
B 60 min 35 min
C 60 min 42 min
D 60 min 46 min
E 66 min 52 min
A148 Castings-Structural 80-40 & -50 80 min 40-50 min
90-60 90 min 60 min
105-85 & 115-95 105 & 115 min 85 & 95 min

150-135 150 min 135 min
A161 L Carbon & C-Mo Still Tubes for Refinery Serv. Low Carbon 47 min 26 min
@ Elevated Temperature
(Discontinued in 1999, replaced by A192) T1 (.5% Mo) 55 min 30 min
A178 Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel A (Low Carbon) 47 min 26 min
& C-Mn Boiler Tubes (5” Max Dia.) C (Medium Carbon) 60 min 37 min
D (Carbon-Manganese) 70 min 40 min
A179 Heat Exchanger (1/8’-3” Dia.) 47 min 26 min
A181 Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping Class 60 60 min 30 min
Class 70 70 min 36 min
A182 High Temp. Fittings, Flanges, Valves, etc. F1 (.5% Mo) 70 min 40 min
F2 (.5% Cr, .5% Mo) 70 min 40 min
F11, Class 1&2 (1.25%Cr,.5%Mo) 60 min & 70 min 30 min & 40 min
F11, Class 3 (1.25%Cr,.5%Mo) 75 min 45 min
F12, Class 1 (1% Cr, .5% Mo) 60 min 30 min
F12, Class 2 (1% Cr, .5% Mo) 70 min 40 min
F21 (3% Cr, 1 Mo) 75 min 45 min
F22, Class 1 (2.25 Cr, 1% Mo) 60 min 30 min
F22, Class 3 (2.25 Cr, 1% Mo) 75 min 45 min
A192 Boiler Tube for High Pressure Service 7” Max Dia. 47 min 26 min
A199 Heat Exchanger Tubes (1/8”-3” Dia.) T4 (2.5% Cr, .5% Mo) 60 min 25 min
T11 (1.25% Cr, .5% Mo) 60 min 25 min
T22 (2.25% Cr, 1% Mo) 60 min 25 min
A200 Refinery Still Tubes (2”- 9” Dia.) T4 (2.5% Cr, .5% Mo) 60 min 25 min
(Discontinued in 1999, replaced by A213)
T11 (1.25% Cr, .5% Mo) 60 min 25 min
T22 (2.25% Cr, 1% Mo) 60 min 25 min

A202 Pressure Vessel Cr-Mn-Si A (.5% Cr) 75-95 45 min
B (.5% Cr) 85-110 47 min
A203 Pressure Vessel - Alloy Steel, Ni (Normalized) A & D (2.25% Ni & 3.5% Ni) 65-85 37 min
CVN Test Temp. shall be a matter of agreement B & E (2.25% Ni & 3.5% Ni) 70-90 40 min
between purchaser & supplier, may be as low as F (3.5% Ni) (</= 2”) ( > 2”) (</= 2”) ( > 2”)
-100°F, which may change recommendations. 80-100 75-95 55 min 50 min
4
SMAW SAW GMAW** FCAW-S FCAW-G**
(1) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)

(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2), (4) (10), (11), (32) (16) (21) (23)
(2), (4) (10), (11), (32) (16) (21) (23)
(2), (4) (10), (11), (32) (16) (21) (23)
Excalibur 7018, LH-78 MR (10) , (11), (32) (16) (21) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (21) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (21) (23)
(1), (2) (10) ,(11) (16) (18) (23)
(1), (3) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)

(1), (3) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-8018-C1 MR, Excalibur 8018-C1 MR 880,880M/LAC Ni2 LA75
(2), (4) (16) (21) (23)

(2), (4) (16) (21) (23)
(2), (4) (10), (11), (32) (16) (21) (23)
(2), (4) (10), (11), (32) (16) (21) (23)
(2), (4) (10), (11), (32) (16) (21) (23)
(2), (4) (10), (11), (32) (16) (21) (23)
(2), (4) (10), (11), (32) (16) (21) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR 860,960/LA75, 860/LA85 LA75 (24)
LH-90 MR, Jet-LH 8018-B2 MR, 880M/LA100, 8500/LA-82 LA90, LA100, MC900 91K2-H
Excalibur 9018-M MR
LH-110M MR, LH100M1 MR 880, 880M/LAC-M2, 882/LA-82, LA100, MC-1100
MIL800H/LA-100, MIL800H/LA-82
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (10), (11), (32) (16) (21) (23)
LH-78 MR, (4)
SA-85, Excalibur 7018-A1 (34), (32) LA90 (21) (23)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78 MR, (4) (16) (21) (23)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78 MR, (4) (16) (21) (23)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78 MR (16) (21) (23)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78 MR, (4) (16)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78 MR, (10), (11), (32) (16) (21) (23)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78 MR (10), (11), (32) (16) (21) (23)
SA-85, Excalibur 7018-A1 (34), (32) LA90
LH-90 MR, Jet-LH 8018-B2 MR MIL800-H, 880M, 882/LA92, (26)

Jet-LH 9018-B3 MR MIL800-H, 880M, 882/LA92
(2), (4) (10), (32) (16) (21) (23)
Jet-LH 9018-B3 MR
LH-90 MR, Jet-LH 8018-B2 MR
Jet-LH 9018-B3 MR
Jet-LH 9018-B3 MR MIL800-H, 880M, 882/LA92, (26)

LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR (10), (11) LA75, (16) (24)
(10), (11) LA100, MC1100
LH-8018-C1 MR, Excalibur 8018-C1 MR (10), (11) LA75
LH-8018-C1 MR, Excalibur 8018-C1 MR (10), (11) LA75
(10), (11)
(10), (11)
5
ASTM TENSILE YIELD
A204 Boiler & Pressure Vessel (.5% Mo) A 65-85 37 min

Plates > 1-1/2” Normalized B 70-90 40 min
C 75-95 43 min
A209 C-Mo Boiler Tubes (1/2”- 5” Dia.) T1, T1a, & T1b 55, 53, & 60 min 30, 28, & 32 min
A210 Carbon Steel Boiler Tubes (1/2”- 5” Dia.) A-1 60 min 37 min
C 70 min 40 min
A211 Spiral Welded Pipe (Discontinued in 1993) See A570
A213 Boiler Tubes (1/8” - 5” Dia.) T2 (.75% Cr, .5% Mo) 60 min 30 min
T11 (1.25% Cr, .5% Mo) 60 min 30 min
T12 (1% Cr, .5% Mo) 60 min 30 min
T17 (1% Cr) 60 min 30 min
T21 (3% Cr, 1% Mo) 60 min 30 min
T22 (2.25% Cr, 1% Mo) 60 min 30 min
A214 Heat-Exchanger Tubes (3” Max. Dia.)
A216 Carbon Steel Castings - High Temp. WCA 60-85 30 min

WCB 70-95 36 min
WCC 70-95 40 min
A217 Steel Castings, High Temp. WC1 (.5% Mo) 65-90 35 min
WC4(.75%Cr,.5%Mo, .9%Ni) 70-95 40 min
WC5(.75%Cr,1%Mo, .8% Ni) 70-95 40 min
WC6 (1.25% Cr, .5% Mo) 70-95 40 min
WC9 (2.5% Cr, 1% Mo) 70-95 40 min
WC11 (1.25% Cr, .5% Mo) 80-105 50 min
A225 Pressure Vessel, Mn-V- .5% Ni C (> 2” Normalized) 105-135 70 min
D (Normalized) 80-105 60 min
A226 High-Pressure Service (5” Max. Dia.) 47 min 26 min
(Discontinued in 1997)
A234 Wrought Welding Fittings for Moderate & Elevated WPB 60-85 35 min
Temperatures
WPC 70-95 40 min
WP1 (.5% Mo) 55-80 30 min

WP11, Class 1(1.25% Cr,.5% Mo) 60-85 30 min
WP11, Class 2(1.25%Cr,.5%Mo) 70-95 40 min
WP11, Class 3 (1.25%Cr,.5%Mo) 75-100 45 min
WP12, Class 1 (1%Cr,.5% Mo) 60-85 30 min
WP12, Class 2 (1%Cr,.5% Mo) 70-95 40 min
WP22, Class 1(2.25% Cr,1% Mo) 60-85 30 min
WP22, Class 3 (2.25% Cr,1% Mo) 75-100 45 min
A242 High Strength, Low Alloy Structural-Cu Shapes-Group 1 & 2, (Plates 3/4” & less) 70 min 50 min
(.2% Cu min.) Groups listed are for Structural Shapes-Group 3, (Plates Over 3/4 to 1-1/2”) 67 min 46 min
Shapes. For Plates & Bars, Tensile requirements Shapes-Group 4 & 5, (Plates Over 1-1/2 to 4’) 63 min 42 min
are based on thickness.
A250 C-Mo Tubes (1/2” - 5” Dia.) T1 (.5% Mo) 55 min 30 min
T1a (.5% Mo) 60 min 32 min
T1b (.5% Mo) 53 min 28 min
T2 (.75% Cr, .5% Mo) 60 min 30 min
T11 (1.25% Cr, .5% Mo) 60 min 30 min
T12 (1% Cr, .5% Mo) 60 min 30 min
T22 (2.25% Cr, 1% Mo) 60 min 30 min
A252 Steel Pipe Piles 1 50 min 30 min
2 60 min 35 min
3 66 min 45 min
A266 Pressure Vessel Forgings 1 60-85 30 min

2&4 70-95 36 min
3 75-100 37.5 min
6
(34) LA90
(34) LA90
(34) LA90
SA-85, LH-78 MR, Excalibur 7018-A1 LA90, (16) (21) (23)
(2), (4) (16) (21) (23)
SA-85, LH-78 MR, Excalibur 7018-A1 (16) (21) (23)
LH-90 MR, Jet-LH 8018-B2 MR LA90

Jet-LH 9018-B3 MR
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (16)
LH-78 MR
(1) (10), (11) LA75, LA90 (18) (23)
(1) (10), (11) LA75, LA90 (18) (23)
(1) (10), (11) LA75, LA90 (18) (23)
LH-90 MR, Jet-LH 8018-B2 MR (10), (11) LA90

LH-110M MR (12) MC1100
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR 860, 960/LA75 LA75 (24)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (16) (21) (23)
LH-78 MR, (4)
Excalibur 7018, (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-78 MR, (4)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-78 MR, (4)
SA-85, Excalibur 7018-A1 (34) LA90
Jet-LH 9018-B3 MR MIL800-H, 880M, 882/LA92, (26)
(1), (6) (10), (11), (15) (29) NR-203Ni1% (25)
(1), (6) (10), (11), (15) (29) NR-203Ni1% (25)
(1), (6) (10), (11), (15) (29) NR-203Ni1% (25)
SA-85, Excalibur 7018-A1 LA90 (23)

Jet-LH 9018-B3 MR
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (10), (11), (32) (16) (17) (23)
LH-78 MR, (4)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (10), (11), (32) (16) (17) (23)
LH-78 MR, (4)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (10), (11), (32) (16) (17) (23)
LH-78 MR, (4)
(1) (10). (11) (16) (18) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR (10), (11) (16) (18) (24)
7
ASTM TENSILE YIELD
A283 Structural Plates Storage Tank Construction A 45-60 24 min

B 50-65 27 min
C 55-75 30 min
D 60-80 33 min
A284 C-Si Steel Plates (Discontinued 1994) C&D 60 min 30 & 33 min
A285 Pressure Vessel Plate A 45-60 24 min
B 50-70 27 min
C 55-75 30 min
A299 Pressure Vessel Plate Mn-Si 75-95 42 min
A302 Pressure Vessel Plates > 2” Normalized A (.5% Mo) 75-95 45 min
Mn-Mo (Grade A & B) B (.5% Mo) 80-100 50 min
Mn-Mo-Ni (Grade C & D) C & D (.5% Mo, .6% Ni) & (.5% Mo, .8% Ni) 80-100 50 min
A328 Steel Sheet Piling 70 min 39 min
A333 & Low Temperature Pipe 1 (CVN’s @ -50º F, 13 ft-lb) 55 min 30 min
A334
6 (CVN’s @ -50º F, 13 ft-lb) 60 min 35 min
7 (CVN’s @ -100º F, 13 ft-lb) 65 min 35 min

A335 High Temperature Pipe P1 (.5% Mo) 55 min 30 min
P2 (.75% Cr, .5% Mo) 55 min 30 min
P11 (1.25% Cr, .5% Mo) 60 min 30 min
P12 (1% Cr, .5% Mo) 60 min 32 min
P15 (1.4% Si, .5% Mo) 60 min 30 min
P22 (2.25% Cr, 1% Mo) 60 min 30 min
A336 Pressure Vessel Forgings, F11-C1, C2, & C3 F1 (.5% Mo) 70-95 40 min
(1.25% Cr, .5% Mo), F12 (1% Cr, .5% Mo), F11-C2, F11-C3, F11-C1, F12 70-100 30-45 min
F21-C3 (3% Cr, 1% Mo), F22-C3 (2.25% Cr, 1% Mo) F21-C3, F21-C1, F22-C3, F22-C1 60-100 30-45 min
A350 Low Temp. Forgings, etc., Requiring Notch LF1 (CVN’s @ -20° F, 13 ft-lbs) 60-85 30 min
Toughness Testing for Piping Components
LF2 (CVN’s @ -50° F, 13 ft-lbs) 70-95 36 min
LF5 Class 1 (CVN’s @ -75° F) 60-85 30 min

LF5 Class 2 (CVN’s @ -75° F) 70-95 37.5 min
LF 6 Class 1 (CVN’s @ -60° F) 66-91 52 min
A352 Low Temp. Castings for Pressure Containing LCA (.5% Ni, .5% Cr, .2% Mo) 60-95 30-40 min
Parts, Low Temperature Service, CVN’s for LCA LCB & LCC (.5% Ni, .5% Cr, .2% Mo) 60-95 30-40 min
tested @ -25º F, CVN’s for LCB & LCC tested LC1 (.5% Mo) 65-90 35 min
@ -50º F LC2 (2.5% Ni) 70-95 40 min
A356 Steam Turbine Castings 1 70 min 36 min
2 (.5% Mo) 65 min 35 min
5, 6 (.5% & 1.25% Cr, .5% Mo) 70 min 40 & 45 min
8, 9 (1% Cr, 1% Mo, V) 80 & 85 min 50 & 60 min
10 (2.25% Cr, 1% Mo) 85 min 55 min
A366 Carbon Steel Sheets Type A, B, & C — —
(Discontinued 8/00, replaced with A1008)
A369 High Temperature Forged & Bored Pipe FPA 48 min 30 min
FPB 60 min 35 min
FP1 (.5% Mo) 55 min 30 min
FP2 (.75% Cr, .5% Mo) 55 min 30 min
FP11 (1.25% Cr, .5% Mo) 60 min 30 min
FP12 (1% Cr, .5% Mo) 60 min 30 min
FP21 (3% Cr, 1% Mo) 60 min 30 min
FP22 (2.25% Cr, 1% Mo) 60 min 30 min
A372 Pressure Vessel Forgings, Thin-Walled, Grade A 60-85 35 min
Type IV (.2% Mo), Type V (1% Cr, .2% Mo) Grade B 75-100 45 min
Grade C, Grade E (Class 55) 90-115 & 85-110 55 min
Grade D, Grade E (Class 65) 105-130 65 min
8
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)

(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(34) (16) (18) (23)
(34), 880M/L56 LA75 (24)
MIL 800-H/LA82 LA75, LA100 (24)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78, 882/L50, 880M/L50, 8500/L-S3 LA75 NR-207 (24)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78, 882/L50, L-S3 LA75 NR-207 (24)
SA-85 (34) LA90
LH-90 MR, Jet-LH 8018-B2 MR MIL800-H, 880M,8 82/LA92, (26)
SA-85, Excalibur 7018-A1
(34) LA90 (23)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78, (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
Excalibur 7018-1, LH-8018-C3 MR, 880M/L56, L50, L-S3, 882/L50, LA75 NR-207 (24)
Excalibur 8018-C3 MR L-S3, 8500/L-S3, L50
LH-8018-C1 MR, Excalibur 8018-C1 MR 880M/LA75, L50, 8500/L-S3 LA75 NR-207 81K2-H
LH-8018-C1 MR, Excalibur 8018-C1 MR 880M/LA75, L50, 8500/L-S3 LA75 NR-207 81K2-H
880M/LA75, L50, 8500/L-S3 LA75 NR-207 81K2-H
880M/LA75, L50, 8500/L-S3 LA75 NR-207 91K2-H
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78, (10), (11) LA75 NR-207 91K2-H
(1) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
Excalibur 7018-1 880M/LA75 LA75 NR-207 (24)
860/L70 LA90 (24)
LH-8018-C1 MR, Excalibur 8018-C1 MR 880, 880M/LAC Ni2
(3) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-90 MR, Jet-LH 8018-B2 MR (34) LA90
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(4) (10), (34) (16) (21) (23)

(4) (10), (34) (16) (21) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-110M MR 880M/LA90 LA90 (24)
LH-110M MR (12) MC1100
9
ASTM TENSILE YIELD
A381 High Pressure Pipe for Transmission Systems Y35 60 min 35 min
Y42 60 min 42 min
Y46 63 min 46 min
Y48 62 min 48 min
Y50 64 min 50 min
Y52 66 min 52 min
Y56 71 min 56 min

Y60 75 min 60 min
Y65 77 min 65 min

A387 Pressure Vessel Plate, Cr-Mo 2 (.75% Cr), 11 (1% Cr), & 12 (1.25% Cr) 55-85, 65-90 30 min, 45 min
Grades 2, 11, & 12-.5%Mo (Class 1 Lower Tensile) 22 (2.25% Cr, 1% Mo) 60-85, 75-100 30 min, 45 min
(Class 2 Higher Tensile) 21 (3% Cr, 1% Mo) 60-85, 75-100 30 min, 45 min
A389 High Temp. Cr- Mo Castings C23 (1.25% Cr, .5% Mo) 70 min 40 min
C24 (1% Cr, 1% Mo) 80 min 50 min
A405 High Temperature Pipe P24 (1% Cr, 1% Mo) 80 min 50 min
A414 Pressure Vessel Sheet {Grades A,B,C, & D - A, B, C, & D 45, 50, 55, & 60 min 25, 30, 33, & 35 min
Max. Ten. = Min. Ten + 15 ksi, Grades E,F, & G- E, F, & G 65, 70, & 75 min 38, 42, & 45 min
Max. Ten. = Min. Ten + 20 ksi}
A420 Low Temperature Fittings WPL6 (CVN’s @-50° F, 25 Ft-Lbs) 60-85 35 min
WPL9 (CVN’s @-100° F,25 Ft-Lbs) 63-88 46 min

A423 Low Alloy Tubes (1/2” - 5” Dia.) 1 (.75% Cr, .5% Ni) 60 min 37 min
2 (.75% Ni) 60 min 37 min
A426 High Temp. Cast Pipe CP1 (.5% Mo) 65 min 35 min
CP2 (.75% Cr, .5% Mo) 60 min 30 min
CP11 (1.25% Cr, .5% Mo) 70 min 40 min
CP12 (1% Cr, .5% Mo) 60 min 30 min
CP15 (1.4% Si, .5% Mo) 60 min 30 min
CP21 (3% Cr, 1% Mo) 60 min 30 min
CP22 (2.25% Cr, 1% Mo) 70 min 40 min
A441 Discontinued 1989, Replaced by A572
A442 Plate with Improved Transition Properties 55 55-75 30 min
60 60-80 32 min
A455 Pressure Vessel Plate C-Mn 70-95 35-38 min
A469 Vacuum-Treated Steel Forgings Class 1 75 min 35 min
Class 2 (2.5% Ni, .3% Mo) 80 min 55 min
Class 3 (2.5% Ni, .3% Mo) 90 min 70 min
A470 Alloy Steel Forgings Class 1 75 min 40 min
Class 2 (3.5% Ni, .75% max Cr) 80 min 55 min
Class 3, 9, & 5 90 min & 90-110 70 min
Class 4, & 6, 8 105 min & 105-125 85 min

A486 Highway Bridge Castings (Discontinued 1989)
A487 Castings-Pressure Service 1A,1B,1C,2A,2B,2C,4A,4C,9C,13A 85-115 53-65 min
1’s V, 2’s MnMo, 10A, 4B, 8B, 13B 100-130 70-85 min
4’s NiCrMo, 6’s MnNiCrMo
8’s (2.25% Cr, 1% Mo) & 9’s (1% Cr, .3% Mo) 11A, 12A 70-95 40 min
10’s, 11’s, 12’s NiCrMo 9D,11B,12B 100-130 70-85
13’s & 14’s NiMo, 16A Low C, MnNi
10B,14A 120-145 95-100 min
16A 70-95 40 min
A498 Heat-Exchanger Tubes See A199, A213 & A334
A500 Structural Tubing A 45 min 45 min
B 58 min 42 min
C 62 min 46 min
D (SR 1100 F for 1hr/in,, .5hr min.) 58 min 36 min
10
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, 860/L60, L61 (16) (21) (23)

LH-78 MR, (4)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, 860/L60, L61 (16) (21) (23)
LH-78 MR, (4)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, 860/L60, L61 (16) (21) (23)
LH-78 MR, (4)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, 860/L60, L61 (16) (21) (23)
LH-78 MR, (2)
SAHYP+, Excalibur 7018, 7018-1,, 860/L60, L61 (16) (21) (23)
LH-78 MR
SAHYP+, Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, 860/L60, L61 (16) (21) (23)
LH-78 MR
SA70+, SA80, LH-78 MR 860/L60, L61 (16) (21) (23)
SA70+, SA80, SAHYP+, LH-D80, 860/L60, L61 (16) (21) (24)
LH-D90, Pipeliner 8P+
SA70+, SA80, LH-D80, LH-D90, Pipeliner 8P+ 860/L60, L61 (16) (21) (24)
LH-90 MR MIL800-H, 880M, 882/LA92, (26)

Jet-LH 9018-B3 MR MIL800-H, 880M, 882/LA92, (26) LA90
(2), (5) (10), (11), (33) (16) (17) (23)
(1) (10), (11), (33) (16) (17) (23)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78, 882/L56 LA75 NR-207 81K2-H

LH-8018-C1 MR, Excalibur 8018-C1 MR 880M/LAC-Ni2
LH-90 MR (16)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C1 MR LA75 NR-203Ni1% 81Ni1-H
SA-85, Excalibur 7018-A1
Jet-LH 9018-B3 MR MIL800-H,880M, 882/LA93
Jet-LH 9018-B3 MR MIL800-H,880M, 882/LA93
(1) (10), 860/L61, 880M/L50 (16) (18) (23)

(1) (10), 860/L61, 880M/L50 (16) (18) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, (1), Excalibur 8018-C3 MR (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR (10), (11) L56, SGS-6 (18) (23)
Excalibur 9018-M MR 880M/LA100 LA100 91K2-H
Excalibur 8018-C1, 8018-C3 MR, 9018-M MR (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
882/LAC Ni2 LA100, MC900,
Excalibur 8018-C1, 8018-C3 MR, 9018-M MR MC1100
LH-110M MR (12)
Excalibur 8018-C1, 8018-C3 MR, 9018-M MR 860, 880M/LA100

LH-110M MR (12) LA100,
MC1100
LH-90 MR, Jet-LH 8018-B2 MR (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-110M MR (12) LA100,
MC1100
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR 860, 960/LA75 LA75 NR-203 Ni1% 81Ni1-H
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)

(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78 MR (10), (11) (16) (23)
11
ASTM TENSILE YIELD
A501 Structural Tubing 58 min 36 min

A508 Pressure Vessel Forgings, 1 & 1A 70-95 36 min
Quenched & Tempered 2-C1 & 3 (.75% Ni, .5% Mo) 80-105 50 min
2-C2, 3-C2 (.75% Ni, .5% Mo) 90-115 65 min
4N-C3 (3.25% Ni, 1.75% Cr, .5% Mo) 90-115 70 min
4N-C1 & 5-C1 (3.25% Ni, 1.75% Cr, .5% Mo) 105-130 85 min
4N-C2 & 5-C2 (3.25% Ni, 1.75% Cr, .5% Mo) 115-140 100 min
22-C3 (2.25% Cr, 1% Mo) 85-110 55 min
A514 Quenched & Tempered Plate All Grades > 2 1/2” 100-130 90 min
All Grades 2 1/2” & under 110-130 100 min
A515 High Temperature Pressure Vessel Plate 60 60-80 32 min

65 & 70 65-85 & 70-90 35 min & 38 min
A516 Pressure Vessel Plate 55 & 60 55-75 & 60-80 30 min & 32 min
65 & 70 65-85 & 70-90 35 min & 38 min
A517 Pressure Vessel, Quenched & Tempered All Grades 2 1/2” & under 115-135 100 min
All Grades 2 1/2” - 6” 105-135 90 min
A521 Closed Die Forgings AA,AB,CE,CF & CF1 75 min to 85 min 37 min to 55 min
AC, AD & CG 82 min to 96 min 48 min to 58 min
CA, CC & CC1 60 min to 66 min 30 min to 33 min
AE 95 min to 105 min 75 min to 80 min
A523 High Pressure Pipe (4” -12” Dia.) A 48 min 30 min
B 60 min 35 min
A524 Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe, for Atmospheric I 60-85 35 min

& Lower Temps.
II 55-80 30 min
A529 High Strength C-Mn Steel of Structural Quality 42 60-85 42 min

50 & 55 70-100 50 min & 55 min
A533 Pressure Vessel, Quench. & Temp. Mn-Mo-Ni Class 1, Type A, B, C, & D 80-100 50 min
Type A (.50% Mo)Type B (.50% Mo,.55% Ni) Class 2, Type A, B, C, & D 90-115 70 min
Type C(.50%Mo,.85%Ni)Type D(.50%Mo.30%Ni) Class 3, Type A, B, C, & D 100-125 83 min
A537 Pressure Vessel Plate C-Mn-Si 1 (Normalized) </= 2.5” 70 min 50 min
1 (Normalized) >2.5” - 4” 65 min 45 min
2 & 3 Quen & Temp </= 2.5” 80 min 60 min & 55 min
2 & 3 Quen & Temp >2.5” - 4” 75 min 55 min & 50 min
2 & 3 Quen & Temp >4” - 6” 70 min 46 min & 40 min
A539 Tubing for Gas & Oil Lines 2-3/8” Max. Dia., 1/8” Max. Thickness 45 min 35 min
A541 Pressure Vessel Forgings, Quenched & Tempered 1, 1A 70-95 36 min
Grades 2 & 3 (.5% Mo) 2 Class 1, & 3 Class 1 80-105 50 min
Grade 4N, Class 3 (1.5% Cr, .5% Mo) 11 Class 4 80-105 50 min
Grade 11 Class 4 (1.25% Cr, .5% Mo) 2 Class 2, 3 Class 2 90-115 65 min
Grade 22 Classes 3, 4, & 5 (2.25% Cr, 1% Mo) 22 Class 4 105-130 85 min
22 Class 5 115-140 100 min
4N Class 3 90-115 70 min
22 Class 3 85-110 55 min
A542 Pressure Vessel Plates, Quenched & Tempered Class 1, Type A, B, & C 105-125 85 min
Type A & B (2.25%Cr, 1%Mo) Class 2, Type A, B, & C 115-135 100 min
Type C (3%Cr,1%Mo,+V,Ti,B) Class 3, Type A, B, & C 95-115 75 min
Class 4 & 4a, Type A, B, & C 85-110 55 min & 60 min
A543 Pressure Vessel Plate, Quenched & Tempered Class 1, Type B & C 105-125 85 min
(1.5% Cr, .4%Mo) Class 2, Type B & C 115-135 100 min
Type B 3% Ni, Type C 2.75% Ni Class 3, Type B & C 90-115 70 min
A556 Seamless, Cold-Drawn Feedwater Heater Tubes A2 47 min 26 min
(1-1/4” Max. Dia.)
B2 60 min 37 min
C2 70 min 40 min
12
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)

(1) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
882, 8500, MIL800-H/LA82
LH-110M MR 882, 8500, MIL800-H/LA82
LH-110M MR LA100
LH-110M MR (12)

LH-110M, (7) (12) LA100,
MC1100
LH-110M, (7) (12) LA100,
MC1100
(1) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
(7) (12)
LH-110M MR, (7) (12)
Excalibur 9018-M MR 960, 860/LA75, 860/LA85 LA75 81Ni1-H
Excalibur 9018-M MR (14) LA90 91K2-H
(1) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-110M MR (12) LA100
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, 780/L60, L61 (16) (21) (23)
LH-78 MR, (4)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, 780/L60, L61 (16) (21) (23)
LH-78 MR, (4)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
LH-78 MR, (4)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
LH-78 MR, (4)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
LH-8018-C3, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR 882, 8500, MIL800-H/LA82 LA75 (24)
LH-110M, (4) 882, 8500, MIL800-H/LA82 LA90 91K2-H
LH-110M MR 8500, MIL800-H/LA82 LA100,
MC1100
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR (10), 882, 8500/LA85 LA75 (24)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR MIL800-H/LA-71 (16) (18) (24)
(1), LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR MIL800-H/LA-71 (16) (18) (24)
(2), (4) (16)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-8018-C3, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR (10), 880M/LA90 LA90 (24)
LH-90 MR, Jet-LH 8018-B2 MR (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
882, 8500/LA82 LA100, MC900 91K2-H
LH-110M MR (12) MC1100
MC1100
Excalibur 9018-M MR MIL800-H, 880M, 882/LA93
LH-110M MR (12) MC1100
LH-110M MR MIL800-H, 880M, 882/LA93

MIL800-H, 880M, 882/LA93
LH-110M, (7) (12) LA100, MC1100
LH-110M MR MIL800-H, 880M, 8500/LA100 LA100 91K2-H

Excalibur 7018, (16)
LH-78 MR, (4)
LH-78 MR, (4)
LH-78 MR
13
ASTM TENSILE YIELD
A557 Electric-Resistance Welded Feedwater Heater Tubes A2 47 min 26 min

(1-1/4” Max. Dia.)
B2 60 min 37 min
C2 70 min 40 min
A562 Pressure Vessel Plate, Carbon Steel, Mn-Ti, for 55-75 30 min
Glass or Diffused Metallic Coatings
A569 Hot-Rolled Sheet, 0.15% Max C, Type A, B, & C None Specified None Specified
A570 Structural Sheet & Strip, Hot-Rolled 30, 33, 36, 40, & 45 49,52,53,55,&60 min 30,33,36,40,&45 min
Max. Thickness 0.229” 50 & 55 65 & 70 min 50 &55 min
A572 High Strength Structural Columbium-Vanadium 42 60 min 42 min
50 65 min 50 min
55 70 min 55 min
60 75 min 60 min
65 80 min 65 min
A573 Structural Plate of Improved Toughness 58 58-71 min 32 min
65 65-77 min 35 min
70 70-90 min 42 min
A587 Low Carbon Steel Pipe, Chem. Industry 48 min 30 min
A588 High Strength Structural, with Atmospheric All Structural Shapes & Plates 4” & Under 70 min 50 min
Corrosion Resistance (Recommended consumables Plates over 4” to 5”
are the same regardless of thicknesses) 67 min 46 min
Plates over 5” 63 min 42 min
A589 Seamless & Welded Carbon Steel Water-Well Pipe Butt Welded 48 min 30 min
A 48 min 30 min
B 60 min 35 min
A592 Pressure Vessels, Quenched & Tempered, A (.75% Cr), E (1.75% Cr,.5% Mo), Up to 2.5” Up to 2.5”
Forged Fittings F (.5% Cr, .5% Mo) 115-135 100 min
> 2.5” - 4’ > 2.5” - 4’
105-135 90 min
A595 Structural Tubing A 65 min 55 min
B 70 min 60 min
C (Weather Resistant, Cu,Cr,Ni) 70 min 60 min
A606 Sheet, Hot & Cold Rolled, High-Strength, Hot Rolled [As Rolled & Annealed or 70 & 65 min 50 & 45 min
Low-Alloy, Atmospheric Corrosion Resistant Normalized]
Cold Rolled [Cut Lengths & Coils] 65 min 45 min
A607 Sheet, High Strength, Low Alloy 45 60 min 45 min
Co or V or Both 50, 55, & 60 65 & 70 min 50 & 55 min
Cold Rolled or Hot Rolled 65 80 min 65 min
(Disconinued 8/00, replaced with A1008 & A1011) 70 85 min 70 min
A611 Structural Sheet A&B 42 & 45 min 25 & 30 min
(Discontinued 8/00, replaced with A1008) C Types 1 & 2 48 min 33 min
D Types 1 & 2 52 min 40 min
E (Full Hard Product) 82 min 80 min
A612 Pressure Vessel Plate for Low Temperature 0.5 & Under 83-105 50 min
Service > 0.5 81-101 50 min
A615 Billet Steel Bars, Concrete Reinforcement 40 70 min 40 min

(0.376”-2.257” Dia.) 60 90 min 60 min
75 100 min 75 min
14
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (16)

LH-78 MR, (4)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (16)
LH-78 MR, (4)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (16)
LH-78 MR
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-78 MR
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (16) (17) (23)

(1) (16) (17) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)

(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR 960/LA75, 860/LA85 LA75 (24)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR 960/LA75, 860/LA85 LA75 (24)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
(1) (10), (11) LA75, (16) (18) (23), (24)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (16) (17) (23)
LH-78 MR, (4)
LH-8018-C3 MR, (1), (6), Excalibur 8018-C3 MR, (1), (6) AXXX10/L61, 880,880M/LAC-Ni2 (29) (22) (23), (25)
960,860/LA75 (15)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (16) (17) (23)

LH-78 MR, (4)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1 (16) (17) (23)
LH-78 MR, (4)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (16) (17) (23)
LH-78 MR, (4)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (16) (17) (23)

LH-78 MR
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (16) (17) (23)
LH-78 MR
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LA75 (19) 81Ni1-H
LH-78, LH-8018-C3 MR
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)

(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR (14) LA90 (24)
Excalibur 9018-M MR (14) LA90 (24)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
Excalibur 9018-M MR (14) LA90, MC900 91K2-H
LH-8018-C3 MR, C1 MR, (10) LA75 (24)
Excalibur 8018-C3 MR, C1 MR
LH-8018-C3 MR, C1 MR, (10), 880M/L56 LA75 (24)
Excalibur 8018-C3 MR, C1 MR
(1) (16) (18) (23)
Excalibur 9018-M MR LA90 91K2-H
LH-110M MR LA100, MC1100
15
ASTM TENSILE YIELD
A616 Rail-Steel Bars For Concrete Reinforcement 50 80 min 50 min

(Max 1.410” Dia.) 60 90 min 60 min
A617 Axle-Steel for Concrete Reinforcement 40 70 min 40 min
(Max 1.410” Dia.) 60 90 min 60 min
A618 Low Alloy Structural Tubing Ia,Ib,II, </= 3/4” Wall Thickness 70 min 50 min
Ia,Ib,II, > 3/4” Wall Thickness 67 min 46 min
III 65 min 50 min
A620 Steel Sheet, Drawing Quality, Special Killed 40 min 20 min

A633 Normalized High Strength Low Alloy Structural A 63-83 42 min
C 70-90 & 65-85 50 min & 46 min
D 70-90 & 65-85 50 min & 46 min

E </= 2.5” & >2.5” - 4” 80-100 60 min & 55 min
E > 4” 75-95 55 min
A656 High Strength, Low Alloy Structural 50 60 min 50 min

60 70 min 60 min
70 80 min 70 min
80 90 min 80 min
A660 Cast Pipe, for High Temperature Service WCA 60 min 30 min
WCB 70 min 36 min
WCC 70 min 40 min
A662 Pressure Vessel, Low & Moderate Temp. A (CVN Req - 15 ft-lbs @ -75° F) 58-78 40 min
B (CVN Req - 15 ft-lbs @ -50° F) 65-85 40 min
C (CVN Req - 15 ft-lbs @ -50° F) 70-90 43 min
A668 Carbon & Alloy Steel Forgings A (Untreated) 47 min
Minimum Tensiles & Yields Requirements vary B (Annealed, or normal, or normal & temp.) 60 min 30 min
with size of forging. C (Annealed, or normal, or normal & temp.) 66 min 33 min
D (Normal, annealed, or normal & temp.) 75 min 37 min
E (Normal&temp, or double normal & temp) 83 & 85 min 43 & 44 min
F (Quench&temp,ornormal,quench,&temp.) 82, 85, & 90 min 48, 50, & 55 min

G (Annealed, or normal,or normal & temp.) 80 min 50 min
H (Normal & temp.) 90 min 58 & 60 min
J (Normal&temp, or normal,quech,&temp.) 90 & 95 min 65 & 70 min
K (Normal,quench, & temp.) 100 & 105 min 75 & 80 min
L (Normal,quench, & temp.) 110,115, &125 min 85, 95, 105 min
M (Normal,quench, & temp.) 135,140 &145 min 110,115 &120 min
N (Normal,quench, & temp.) 160,165 &170 min 130, 135 &140 min
A672 Steel Pipe for High-Pressure Service at Moderate Grade designates type of plate used to
Temperatures make pipe. See ASTM Spec. for plate
material information.
A675 Steel Bars 45 45-55 22.5 min
50 50-60 25 min
55 55-65 27.5 min
60 60-72 30 min
65 65-77 32.5 min
70 70-85 35 min
75 75-90 37.5 min
80 80 min 40 min
90 90 min 55 min
16
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR LA75 (24)

(1) (16) (18) (23)

Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)

LH-78 MR
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-78 MR
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-78 MR
(2) (16) (18) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, (1), Excalibur 8018-C3 MR, (1) (10), 860, 882/L61, 880M/L50 (16) (17) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, (1), Excalibur 8018-C3 MR, (1) (10), 860, 882/L61, 880M/L51 LA75, (16) (18) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, (1), Excalibur 8018-C3 MR, (1) (10), 860, 882/L61, 880M/L52 LA75, LA90 (18) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR 880M/L56, AXXX10/L61, 860/LA-71 LA75, LA90 (24)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR 880M/L56, AXXX10/L61, 860/LA-71 LA75, LA90 (24)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)

(1) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR (10), 880M/LA-71 LA75, LA90 (24)
Excalibur 9018-M MR (14), 880M, MIL800-H/LA100 LA90, MC900, 91K2-H
LA100
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-78 MR, (4)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-78 MR
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-78 MR
Excalibur 7018-1 8500/L-S3 LA75 NR-207 (24)
Excalibur 7018-1 8500/L-S3 LA75 (19) (24)
Excalibur 7018-1 8500/L-S3 LA75 (19) (24)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR (10), (11) LA75, (16) (24)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR (14) LA75, LA90, 91K2-H
MC900
(14) LA75, LA90 (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR (14) LA75, LA90 (23)
LH-110M MR (14) LA100, MC1100
(14) LA100, MC1100
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)

(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR (14) LA75, LA90 (24)
17
ASTM TENSILE YIELD
A678 Quenched & Tempered Structural Plate A 70-90 50 min

B 80-100 60 min
C [ < 3/4”, 3/4” - 1-1/2”, 1-1/2” - 2”] 85-105, 90-110, 95-115 65, 70, & 75 min
D 90-110 75 min
A690 H-Piles & Sheet Piling 70 min 50 min
A691 Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe, (> 16” Dia.) Grade designates type of plate used to
make pipe. See ASTM Spec. for plate
material information.
A692 Seamless L.A. Steel Tubes, 1/2% Mo. 64-84 42 min SA-85
(5” Max. Dia.)
A694 Carbon & Alloy Steel Forgings F42 60 min 42 min
F46 60 min 46 min
F48 62 min 48 min
F50 64 min 50 min
F52 66 min 52 min
F56 68 min 56 min
F60 75 min 60 min

F65 77 min 65 min
F70 82 min 70 min
A695 Bars, for Fluid Power 35 Type A, B, C, & D 60 min 35 min
40 Type A, B, C, & D 70 min 40 min
45 Type A, C, & D 80 min 45 min
50 Type A, C, & D 90 min 50 min
A696 Carbon Steel Bars - Pressure Piping Components B 60 min 35 min
C 70 min 40 min
A706 Low Alloy Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 80 min 60 min, 78 max
A707 Carbon & Alloy Steel Flanges for Low Temp. L1, Class 1 & 2 60 & 66 min 42 & 52 min
Service Impact Test Temperatures - L2, Class 1, 2, & 3 60, 66, & 75 min 42, 52, & 60 min
L1 @ -20 F L3, Class 1, 2, & 3 60, 66, & 75 min 42, 52, & 60 min
L2 & L3 @ -50° F L4, Class 1, 2, & 3 60, 66, & 75 min 42, 52, & 60 min
L4, L5, & L6 @ -80° F L5, Class 1, 2, 3, & 4 60,66,75, &90 min 42,52,60, &75 min
L7 & L8 @ -100° F L6, Class 1, 2, 3, & 4 60,66,75, &90 min 42,52,60, &75 min
L7, Class 1, & 2 60 & 66 min 42 & 52 min
L8, Class 1, 2, 3, & 4 60,66,75, &90 min 42,52,60, &75 min
A709 Structural Steel For Bridges. For bridge 36 (Similar to A36) 58 min & 58-80 36 min
fabrication, AASHTO/AWS D1.5 is often 50 (Similar to A572, Grade 50) 65 min 50 min
applicable. The filler metals listed for A709 50S (Similar to A992) 65 min 50-65
include those options thatmeet both the 50W, Type A, B, & C (Similar to A588) 70 min 50 min
strength requirements for theapplication, 70W (Similar to A852) 90-110 70 min
as well as meeting the requirements of HPS 50W 70 min 50 min
D1.5-2002. HPS 70W 90-110 70 min
100, 100W, </= 2-1/2” (Similar to A514) 110-130 100 min
100, 100W, 2-1/2” to 4” (Similar to A514) 100-130 90 min
A710 Low-C Age-Hardening A, Class 1{CVN Req’t 20 ft-lb @ -50° F} 90 min 80 & 85 min
Gr. A (.85% Ni,.75% Cr,+Cu,Mo,Cb), Gr B (1.25% A, Class 2 {CVN Req’t 50 ft-lb @ -50° F} 60, 65, & 72 min 50, 55, 60, & 65 min
Ni + Cu & Cb), Gr. C (.85% Ni, + Mo, Cu, & Cb) A, Class 3 {CVN Req’t 50 ft-lb @ -80° F} 70, 75, & 85 min 60, 65, & 75 min
Class 1- As-rolled & Precipitation Heat Treated, B (As-Rolled & Precipitation Heat Treated) 88 & 90 min 75, 80, 82, 85 min
Class 2- Normalized & Precipitation Heat Treated, C, Class 1 100 min 90 min
Class 3- Quenched & Precipitation Heat Treated, C, Class 3 {CVN Req’t 50 ft-lb @ -80° F} 90 & 95 min 80 & 85 min
A714 Low Alloy Pipe I 70 min 50 min
Type F- Furnace Butt Welded II 70 min 50 min
Type E- Electric-Resistance Welded III 65 min 50 min
Type S- Seamless IV (.2-.5% Ni, 1% Cr) 58 min 36 min
Grades I, II, & III- Class 2 Pipe V, Type F & Type E, S (2% Ni) 55 min & 65 min 40 min & 46 min
(A714 continued on next page)
18
LH-8018-C3 MR, (1) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)

LH-8018-C3 MR (10), (11) LA75, LA90 (24)
LH-110M 8500/LA85 LA100, MC1100 91K2-H
LH-110M 8500/LA85 LA100, MC1100 91K2-H
See A588 See A588 See A588 See A588 See A588
LA90
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78, (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)

LH-8018-C3 MR
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78, (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78, (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78, (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78, (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78, (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR
LH-8018-C3 MR, LH-D80, LH-D90 (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, LH-D80, LH-D90 (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
Excalibur 9018-M MR 880M, 882, 960/LA92, 880M/LA90 LA90 81K2-H
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(3) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR (10), (11) LA75, LA90 (24)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (16) (18) (23)
LH-78 MR
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, (16) (18) (23)
LH-78 MR
LH-8018-C3 MR LA75, LA90 (24)
Excalibur 7018-1 (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
Excalibur 7018-1 960, 860, 880M/LA75 LA75 NR-207 81K2-H
Excalibur 7018-1 960, 860, 880M/LA75 LA75 NR-207 81K2-H
LH-8018-C1 MR, Excalibur 8018-C1 MR 880M/LA75 LA75 NR-207 91K2-H
880M/LAC-Ni2
(1) (10), (11) (18) (23)

(1) (10), (11) (18) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(1), (6) (15) (22) (25)
Excalibur 9018-M MR MIL800HPNi/LA85, (31) 91K2-H
(1), (6) (15) (22) (25)
Excalibur 9018-M MR MIL800HPNi/LA85, (31)
LH-110M MR (12) MC1100
LH-110M MR (12) MC1100
Excalibur 7018-1 880M/LA75 LA75 NR-207
LH-8018-C1 MR, Excalibur 8018-C1 MR 880M/LA100
LH-110M MR (13) LA100, MC1100
(12) LA100
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78 MR (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78 MR (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78 MR (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR 860/LA75 LA75 NR-203 Ni1% 81Ni1-H
LH-8018-C1 MR, Excalibur, 8018-C3 MR 880, 880M/LAC-Ni2
19
ASTM TENSILE YIELD
A714 Grades IV, V, VI, VII, & VIII- VI,Type E&S (.75% Ni,.33% max Cr,.15% Mo) 65 min 46 min
(contd) Class 4 Pipe (Class 4- 4 times Corrosion Resistance VII,TypeE&S (.24 - 1.3% Cr,.68% Ni) 65 min 45 min
of Carbon Steel) VIII, Type E & S (.5% Ni) 70 min 50 min
A715 High Strength, Low-Alloy Sheet & Strip 50 60 min 50 min
(Discontinued 8/00, replaced with A1008 & A1011) 60 70 min 60 min
70 80 min 70 min
80 90 min 80 min
A724 Pressure Vessel Plates Quenched & Tempered A 90-110 70 min
C-Mn-Si Steel B 95-115 75 min
C 90-110 70 min
A727 Notch-Tough Carbon Steel Forgings 60-85 36 min
A732 Castings, for High Strength at Elevated 1A, 2A, 3A 60, 65, 75 min 40, 45, & 48 min
Temperatures 2Q, 5N 85 min 60 & 55 min
4A, 6N (.4%Mo) 90 min 50 & 60 min
3Q, 13Q 100 & 105 min 90 & 85 min
11Q (1.75% Ni), 4Q 120 & 125 min 85 & 90 min
A734 Pressure Vessel Plates, High Strength, Type A (1%Ni, 1%Cr,.35%Mo, for use @-80° F) 77-97 65 min
Low Alloy, Quenched & Tempered Type B (for use @ -20° F) 77-97 65 min
A735 Pressure Vessel Plates Low C-Mn-(.4%) Mo-Cb Class 1 80-100 65 min
for Moderate & Lower Temperature Service Class 2 85-105 70 min
Class 3 90-110 75 min
Class 4 95-115 80 min
A736 Pressure Vessel Plates A, Class 1 90-110 80 min
Low-C Age-Hardening A, Class 2 60-80 to 72-92 50 min to 65 min
Gr A (.85% Ni,.75% Cr, +Cu, Mo, Cb) A, Class 3 70-90 to 85-105 60 min to 75 min
Gr C (.85% Ni,+Cu, Mo, Cb) C, Class 1 100 -120 90 min
C, Class 3 90-110 to 95-115 80 min to 85 min
A737 Pressure Vessel Plates, High-Strength, Low-Alloy B 70-90 50 min
C 80-100 60 min
A738 Pressure Vessel, Heat Treated, C-Mn-Si, A (</= 2.5” Norm or Q & T, > 2.5” Q & T) 75-95 45 min
for Moderate & Low Temperature Service B (All Thicknesses Quenched & Tempered) 85-102 60 min
C (All Thicknesses Quenched & Tempered) 70-90 to 80-100 46, 55, & 60 min
A739 Steel Bars, for Elevated Temperature B 11 (1.25% Cr, .5% Mo) 70-95 45 min
or Pressure Contain Parts B 22 (2.25% Cr, 1% Mo) 75-95 45 min
A757 Steel Castings, for Pressure Containing, A1Q, A2Q (CVN’s @ -50°F) 65 & 70 min 35 & 40 min
for Low Temperature Service B2N, B2Q (2.5% Ni), (CVN’s @ -100°F) 70 min 40 min
Q’s-Quenched & Tempered C1Q (1.75% Ni,.2% Mo), (CVN’s @ -50°F) 75 min 55 min
N’s- Normalized & Tempered, D1N1, D1Q1 (2.5% Cr,1% Mo) 85 & 115 min 55 min
D1N2, D1Q2 (2.5% Cr,1% Mo) 95 & 125 min 75 min
A758 Pipe Fittings with Improved Notch Tough. 60 60-85 35 min
70 70-95 38 min
A765 Pressure Vessel Forgings with Mandatory CVN I 60-85 30 min
Req’ts CVN Test Temperature - II 70-95 36 min
Grades I & IV @ -20° F, Grade II @ -50° F, III (3.5% Ni) 70-95 37.5 min
Grade III @ -150° F IV 80-105 50 min
A769 Carbon & High-Strength Electric Resistance 36 53 min 36 min
Welded Steel Structural Shapes 40 55 min 40 min
W indicates Steel Grades having Atmospheric 45 60 min 45 min
Corrosion Resistrance Approx. 2 times that of 45W 65 min 45 min
Carbon Structural Steel with Copper. 50 65 min 50 min
Class 1 - General Structural use for Static Loads 50W 70 min 50 min
Class 2 - Structural use where Fatigue Loading 60 75 min 60 min
Occurs 80 90 min 80 min
A782 Pressure Vessel Plates, Quenched & Tempered Class 1 (.75% Cr, .4% Mo) 97-119 80 min
Mn-Cr-Mo-Si-Zr Class 2 (.75% Cr, .4% Mo) 107-129 90 min
Class 3 (.75% Cr, .4% Mo) 115-136 100 min
A808 High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Structural 60, 65, & 65 min 42, 46, & 50 min
C-Mn-Cb-V, CVN’s @ -50° F
A812 High-Strength, Low-Alloy Sheet, Pressure Vessels 65 85-110 65 min
Specification was discontinued 1997 80 100-125 80 min
20

(2) (16) (17) (23)
(3) (16) (17) (23)
LH-8018-C3, Excalibur 8018-C3 LA75 (24)
LA90, MC900 91K2-H
LH-110M MR 8500/LA85 LA100, MC1100 91K2-H
LH-110M MR 8500/LA85 LA100, MC1100 91K2-H
LH-110M MR 8500/LA85 LA100, MC1100 91K2-H
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78 MR (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
(13) LA75 (24)
Excalibur 9018-M MR (14) LA90, LA100 91K2-H
LH-110M MR (12) LA100, MC1100
LH-8018-C1 MR, Excalibur 8018-C1 MR 8500, 880M/LA85 LA100 81K2-H

Excalibur 9018-M MR 8500/L-S3 LA75 81K2-H
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR (34) LA75 81K2-H
Excalibur 9018-M MR 880M/LA90 LA90, MC900 91K2-H
LH-110M MR MIL800-H,880M/LA100 LA100, MC900 91K2-H
(14) LA100 91K2-H
Excalibur 7018-1 (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-110M MR (12) LA100, MC1100
LH-110M MR (12) LA100, MC1100
(1) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR (10), (13) L-75, LA90 (24)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR 860, 880M, 882/LA-71 LA75 (24)
(14) LA75, LA100 91K2-H, (24)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR (14) LA75, LA100 91K2-H

Excalibur 7018-1, LH-75 MR 880M/LA75 LA75 (19) 81K2-H
LH-8018-C1 MR, Excalibur 8018-C1 MR 880M/LAC-Ni2
LH-8018-C1 MR, Excalibur 8018-C1 MR 880M/LA75 LA75 81K2-H
LH-110M MR (12) LA100, MC1100
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78 MR (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)

Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78 MR (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
Excalibur 7018-1, 880M/L56 LA75 (19) 81K2-H

(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(3), (6) (10), (11), (15) (16), LA75 (17) (23), (25)
(3) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(3), (6) (10), (11), (15) (16), LA75 (17) (23), (25)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR (14) LA75 (19) (24)
(12) LA100 91K2-H
LH-110M MR (12) MC1100
Excalibur 7018-1 8500/L-S3 LA75 (19) (24)

LH-110M MR LA100, MC1100
21
ASTM TENSILE YIELD
A822 Steel Tubing, Hydraulic Service, 1/8-3 Dia. 45 min 25 min

A832 Pressure Vessel, Cr-Mo-V-Ti-B Grade 21V (3% Cr, 1% Mo, .25% V-Ti-B) 85-110 60 min
Grade 22V (2.25% Cr, 1% Mo, .25% V) 85-110 60 min
A841 Pressure Vessel Plates, TMCP Class 1, up to and including 2.5” & > 2.5” 70-90 & 65-85 50 min & 45 min
Class 2, up to and including 2.5” & > 2.5” 80-100 & 75-95 60 min & 55 min
A847 Low Alloy Tubing with Improved Atmospheric 70 min 50 min
Corrosion
A850 Steel Bars, C-Mn Class 1 70-99 50 min
Class 2 70-99 50 min
A852 Quenched & Tempered Low Alloy Structural Plate 90-110 70 min
A858 Heat Treated Fittings for Low-Temp. & Corrosive CVN Req- 20 ft-lbs @ -50° F 70-95 36 min
Service, Max .60% Ni %, .30% Cr, .35% Cu
A859 Steel Forgings, Age Harden Class 1 65-85 55 min
Ni-Cu-Cr-Mo-Cb Class 2 75-95 65 min
A860 High-Strength Fittings WPHY 42 60-85 42 min
CVN Req’t - 30 ft-lbs @ -50° F WPHY 46 63-88 46 min
Max. Ni 1.0%, Stress Relieved WPHY 52 66-91 52 min
1 hour @ 1150° F WPHY 60 75-100 60 min
WPHY 65 77-102 65 min
WPHY 70 80-105 70 min
A871 High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Structural, 60 75 min 60 min
with Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance 65 80 min 65 min
A873 Steel Sheet Pressure Vessels, 2.25% Cr-1% Mo Class 1 60-85 30 min
for use @ elevated temperatures Class 2 75-100 45 min
(Discontinued in 1997) Class 3 85-110 60 min
Class 4 95-120 75 min
Class 5 130-160 100 min
A907 Sheet & Strip, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality 30, 33, 36, & 40 49,52,53, &55 min 30,33,36, &40 min
A913 High-Strength Low Alloy Shapes of 50 65 min 50 min
Structural Quality, Produced by 60 75 min 60 min
Quenching & Self-Tempering Process 65 80 min 65 min
70 90 min 70 min
A935 Steel, Sheet & Strip, High Strength Low - 45 60 min 45 min
Alloy Colubium or Vanadium or Both 50, 55, & 60 65 & 70 min 50 & 55 min
(Discontinued 6/01, replaced with A1018) 65 80 min 65 min
70 85 min 70 min
A936 High Strength, Low-Alloy 50 60 min 50 min
Sheet & Strip, Heavy Thickness Coils 60 70 min 60 min
(Discontinued 6/01, replaced with A1018) 70 80 min 70 min
80 90 min 80 min
A945 High Strength, Low - Alloy Structual Plate w/Low 50 70-90 50 min
Carbon & Restricted Sulfur for Improved Weldability 65 78-100 65min
A984 Steel Line Pipe, black, Plain-End, 35 60 min 35-70
Electric-Resistance-Welded 45 65 min 45-72
55 70 min 55-80
65 75 min 65-85
80 90 min 80-97
A992 Steel for Structural Shapes for use in Building 65 min 50-65
Framing
A996 Rail-Steel & Axle-Steel for Concrete Reinforcement 40 70 min 40 min
50 80 min 50 min
60 90 min 60 min
22
(2), (4) (16)

(1) (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)

LH-8018-C3, Excalibur 8018-C3 860, 960/LA75 LA75 81Ni1-H
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78, (10), (11) (16) (18) (23)
(1) (10) (16) (18) (23)
(1) (10) (16) (18) (23)
Excalibur 9018-M MR MIL800-HPNi/LA85, (31) MC1100 91K2-H
Excalibur 7018, 7018-1, LH-78, 880M/L56 LA75 NR-207 81K2-H
LH-8018-C1 MR, Excalibur 8018-C1 MR 880M/LA75 LA75
LH-8018-C1 MR, Excalibur 8018-C1 MR 880M/LA75 LA75
Excalibur 7018-1 8500/LS3
8500/LA85
8500/LA85
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR 860, 960/LA75 LA75 81Ni1-H

LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR 860,960/LA75 LA75 81Ni1-H
Jet-LH 9018-B3L MIL800-H, 880M, 882/LA93
Jet-LH 9018-B3L MIL800-H, 880M, 882/LA93
Jet-LH 9018-B3L MIL800-H, 880M, 882/LA93
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR 761/L61, 860, 960/L50 LA75 (18) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR 960/LA75 LA75 (24)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR 960/LA75 LA75 NR-311 Ni (24)
Excalibur 9018-M MR 880M/LA100 (24)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
Excalibur 9018-M MR (14) LA90 (24)
(2) (16) (17) (23)
(3) (16) (17) (23)
LA90, MC900 91K2-H
Excalibur 7018-1 8500/L-S3, LA85 LA75 NR-203MP (24)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR 8500/L-S3, LA85 LA75 81K2-H
(2), (4) 860/L60, L61 (16) (21) (23)
Pipeliner 6P+, Pipeliner 8P+, FW 5P+, SA HYP+, 860/L60, L61 (16) (21) (23)
SA 70+, SA 80
SA 70+, SA 80, SA HYP+, LH-D80, LH-D90, 860/L60, L61 L56 (21) (24)
Pipeliner 8P+
SA 70+, SA 80, LH-D80, LH-D90, Pipeliner 8P+ 860/L60, L61 L56 (21) (24)
SA 90 (28), LH-D90, 880M/LA90 LA90 91K2-H
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(1) (16) (18) (23)

23
ASTM TENSILE YIELD
A1008 Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Structural, High Strength

Low-Alloy. High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
CS,(Types A, B, & C), DS,
(Types A & B), DDS, EDDS } —
20-40, 22-35,
17-29,15-25
Formability. SS, Grades 25, 30, 33, & 40 42,45,48, &52 min 25,30,33, &40 min
SS, Grade 80 82 min 80 min
HSLAS, Grade 45 Class 1 & 2 60 & 55 45 min
HSLAS, Grade 50 Class 1 & 2 65 & 60 50 & 55
HSLAS, Grade 55 Class 1 & 2 70 & 65 min 50 & 55
HSLAS, Grade 70 Class 1 & 2 85 & 80 70 min
HSLAS-F Grade 50 60 min 50 min
A1011 Steel, Sheet, Hot-Rolled, Structural, High Strength 20-40, 22-35,
CS,(Types A, B, & C), DS,types (A & B) —
Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved 17-29,15-25
Formability. SS, Grades 25, 30, 33, & 40 42,45,48, &52 min 25,30,33, &40 min
SS, Grade 80 82 min 80 min
HSLAS, Grade 45 Class 1 & 2 60 & 55 min 45 min
HSLAS, Grade 50 Class 1 & 2 65 & 60 min 50 & 55 min
A1018 Steel, Sheet, Hot-Rolled, Structural, High Strength SS, Grades 25, 30, 33, & 40 42,45,48, &52 min 25,30,33, &40 min
Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved SS, Grade 80 82 min 80 min
Formability. HSLAS, Grade 45 Class 1 & 2 60 & 55 45 min

** For Gas Shielded processes (GMAW & FCAW-G), the type of gas shielding used will affect the electrode operability characteristics and mechanical
properties. All suggestions listed in this guide are based on the resultant mechanical properties when the electrode is used with the shielding gas
required for AWS classification. Changes in shielding gas may make the suggestions inappropriate, or create new options. Selecting the correct
shielding gas is beyond the scope of this document.
24
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)

Excalibur 9018-M MR 880M, 8500/LA90 LA90 91K2-H
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR 8500, 8500-H2/L-S3, LA85 LA75 81K2-H
LH-8018-C3 MR, Excalibur 8018-C3 MR 8500, 8500-H2/L-S3, LA75 81K2-H
LA85
(2) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
(1) (10), (11) (16) (17) (23)
25
AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE
API TENSILE YIELD
SPEC DESCRIPTION GRADES (ksi) (ksi)
2H C-Mn Steel plate for Offshore Platform 42 (CVN Requirement 25 ft-lbs @ -40 F) 62-82 42 min
50,</= 2.5(CVN Requirement 30ft-lbs@-40F) 70-90 50 min
50, > 2.5(CVN Requirement 30 ft-lbs @-40F) 70-90 47 min
2W Steel Plates for Offshore Structures, 42 (CVN Requirement 25 ft-lbs @ -40 F) 62 min 42-67
Produced by Thermo-Mechanical Control
Processing (TMCP)
50 (CVN Requirement 30 ft-lbs @ -40F) 65 min 50-75
50T (CVN Requirement 30 ft-lbs @ -40F) 70 min 50-80
2Y Steel Plates, Quenched & Tempered, for 42 (CVN Requirement 25 ft-lbs @ -40 F) 62 min 42-67
Offshore Structures
50T (CVN Requirement 30 ft-lbs @ -40F) 70 min 50-80
5L Welded Steel Line Pipe Product Specification Level (PSL) 1

A25 45 min 25 min
A 48 min 30 min
(5L continued on next page)
Product Specification Levels (PSL) were added to the specification January 2000. PSL2 has mandatory requirements for carbon equivalent, notch
toughness, maximum yield strength, and maximum tensile strength.
26
SAW***
SMAW Longitudinal & GMAW** FCAW-S FCAW-G**
Double-Ending
Spiral Seam*
Excalibur 7018-1 880M/L50, L-S3, LA85, 880M/L50, L-S3, LA85, LA75 (19) (24)
960/L50, L61, LA85, 960/L50, L61, LA85,
882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3, 882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3,
L61, LA85 L61, LA85
960/L50, L61, LA85, 960/L50, L61, LA85,
882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3, 882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3,
L61, LA85 L61, LA85
960/L50, L61, LA85, 960/L50, L61, LA85,
882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3, 882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3,
L61, LA85 L61, LA85
960/L50, L61, LA85, 960/L50, L61, LA85,
882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3, 882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3,
L61, LA85 L61, LA85
960/L50, L61, LA85, 960/L50, L61, LA85,
882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3, 882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3,
L61, LA85 L61, LA85
960/L50, L61, LA85, 960/L50, L61, LA85,
882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3, 882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3,
L61, LA85 L61, LA85
LH-8018-C3 MR 880M/L50, L-S3, LA85, 880M/L50, L-S3, LA85, LA75 (24)
960/L50, L61, LA85, 960/L50, L61, LA85,
882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3, 882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3,
L61, LA85 L61, LA85
960/L50, L61, LA85, 960/L50, L61, LA85,
882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3, 882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3,
L61, LA85 L61, LA85
960/L50, L61, LA85, 960/L50, L61, LA85,
882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3, 882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3,
L61, LA85 L61, LA85
960/L50, L61, LA85, 960/L50, L61, LA85,
882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3, 882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3,
L61, LA85 L61, LA85
LH-8018-C3 MR 880M/L50, L-S3, LA85, 880M/L50, L-S3, LA85, LA75 (24)
960/L50, L61, LA85, 960/L50, L61, LA85,
882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3, 882, 8500, 860/L50, L-S3,
L61, LA85 L61, LA85
(2), (4) 860/L60, L61 780/L61, 761, P223/L61, L70 L50, L56 NR-207,-H
997/L61, L70, LA81
995N/L70, LA81, LA90
995/L61, L70, LA81, LA90
(2), (4) 860/L60, L61 780/L61, 761, P223/L61, L70 L50, L56 NR-207,-H
997/L61, L70, LA81
995N/L70, LA81, LA90
995/L61, L70, LA81, LA90
27
API TENSILE YIELD
5L Welded Steel Line Pipe B 60 min 35 min

(contd)
X42 60 min 42 min
X46 63 min 46 min
X52 66 min 52 min
X56 71 min 56 min
X60 75 min 60 min
X65 77 min 65 min
X70 82 min 70 min
Product Specification Level (PSL) 2

B 60-110 33-65
X42 60-110 42-72
X46 63-110 46-76
X52 66-110 52-77
X56 71-110 56-79
(5L continued on next page)
28
SAW***
Double-Ending
Spiral Seam*
(2), (4) 860/L60, L61 780/L61, 761,P223/L61,L70 L50, L56 NR-207,-H

997/L61, L70, LA81
995N/L70, LA81, LA90
995/L61, L70, LA81, LA90
(2), (4) 860/L60, L61 780/L61, 761,P223/L61,L70 L50, L56 NR-207,-H

997/L61, L70, LA81
995N/L70, LA81, LA90
995/L61, L70, LA81, LA90
(2), (4) 860/L60, L61 780/L61, 761, P223/L61, L70 L50, L56 NR-207,-H
997/L61, L70, LA81
995N/L70, LA81, LA90
995/L61, L70, LA81, LA90
FW 5, FW 5P+, SA HYP+, SA 70+, 860/L60, L61 780/L61, 761,P223/L61,L70 L50, L56 NR-207,-H
Pipeliner 6P+, Pipeliner 8P+ 997/L61, L70, LA81
995N/L70, LA81, LA90
995/L61, L70, LA81, LA90
FW 5P+,SAHYP+,SA 70+,SA 80, 860/L60, L61 780/L61, 761,P223/L61,L70 L50, L56 NR-207,-H
16P, Pipeliner 6P+, Pipeliner 8P+ 997/L61, L70, LA81
995N/L70, LA81, LA90
995/L61, L70, LA81, LA90
16P,18P, LH-D80, LH-D90, 997/L61, L70, LA81
Pipeliner 6P+, Pipeliner 8P+ 995N/L70, LA81, LA90
995/L61, L70, LA81, LA90
FW 5P+,SAHYP+,SA 70+,SA 80, 860/L50,L61 780/L61, 761,P223/L61,L70 L56 NR-207,-H
16P,18P, LH-D80, LH-D90, 997/L61, L70, LA81
Pipeliner 6P+, Pipeliner 8P+ 995N/L70, LA81, LA90
995/L61, L70, LA81, LA90
SA 70+, SA 80, 18P, LH-D80, 882/LA-71, LA75 780/L61, 761,P223/L61,L70 NR-207,-H
LH-D90, Pipeliner 8P+ 997/L61, L70, LA81
995N/L70, LA81, LA90
995/L61, L70, LA81, LA90
(2), (4) 860/L60, L61 780/L61, 761,P223/L61,L70 L50, L56 NR-207,-H
997/L61, L70, LA81
995N/L70, LA81, LA90
995/L61, L70, LA81, LA90
(2), (4) 860/L60, L61 780/L61, 761,P223/L61,L70 L50, L56 NR-207,-H
997/L61, L70, LA81
995N/L70, LA81, LA90
995/L61, L70, LA81, LA90
(2), (4) 860/L60, L61 780/L61, 761,P223/L61,L70 L50, L56 NR-207,-H
997/L61, L70, LA81
995N/L70, LA81, LA90
995/L61, L70, LA81, LA90
FW 5, FW 5P+, SA HYP+, SA 70+, 860/L60, L61 780/L61, 761,P223/L61,L70 L50, L56 NR-207,-H
Pipeliner 6P+, Pipeliner 8P+ 997/L61, L70, LA81
995N/L70, LA81, LA90
995/L61, L70, LA81, LA90
16P, Pipeliner 6P+, Pipeliner 8P+ 997/L61, L70, LA81
995N/L70, LA81, LA90
995/L61, L70, LA81, LA90
29
API TENSILE YIELD
5L Welded Steel Line Pipe X60 75-110 60-82

(contd)
X65 77-110 65-87
X70 82-110 70-90
X80 90-120 80 min
* Welding on 2H, 2Y, and 2W grades is assumed to be multipass and longitudinal only. Welding on 5L grades is assumed to be single pass.
** For Gas-Shielded processes (GMAW & FCAW-G), the type of gas shielding used will affect the electrode operability characteristics and mechanical
properties. All suggestions listed in this guide are based on the resultant mechanical properties when the electrode is used with the shielding gas
required for AWS classification. Changes in shielding gas may make the suggestions inappropriate, or create new options. Selecting the correct
shielding gas is beyond the scope of this document.
*** SAW recommendations are starting points only. Because of the varying requirements and the high dilution rates involved with pipe welding, all
combinations should be tested on the pipe to be used to assure that all requirements are met.
30
SAW***
Double-Ending
Spiral Seam*
16P,18P, Pipeliner Lincoln LH-D80, 997/L61, L70, LA81
Pipeliner Lincoln LH-D90, Pipeliner 995N/L70, LA81, LA90
6P+, Pipeliner 8P+ 995/L61, L70, LA81, LA90
FW 5P+,SAHYP+,SA 70+,SA 80, 860/L50,L61 780/L61, 761,P223/L61,L70 L56 NR-207,-H
16P, 18P, Pipeliner Lincoln LH-D80, 997/L61, L70, LA81
Pipeliner Lincoln LH-D90, Pipeliner 995N/L70, LA81, LA90
6P+, Pipeliner 8P+ 995/L61, L70, LA81, LA90
SA 70+, SA 80, 18P, LH-D80, 882/LA-71, LA75 780/L61, 761,P223/L61,L70 NR-207,-H
Pipeliner Lincoln LH-D90, 997/L61, L70, LA81
Pipeliner 8P+ 995N/L70, LA81, LA90
995/L61, L70, LA81, LA90
SA70+, SA80 (Both Root Only), MIL800-H, 880M/LA100 780/L61, 761,P223/L61,L70
SA90(28), 18P, LH-D90, 997/L61, L70, LA81
995N/L70, LA81, LA90
995/L61, L70, LA81, LA90
31
THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY
Publication C1.50 | Issue Date 01/05 22801 Saint Clair Avenue • Cleveland, OH • 44117 • U.S.A.
© Lincoln Global Inc. All Rights Reserved Phone: +1 216.481.8100 • www.lincolnelectric.com
Technical
Handbook
Metrode Welding Consumables
WORLDWIDE
WELDING CONSUMABLES
FOR HIGH INTEGRITY APPLICATIONS
- Power Generation
- Nuclear Industry
- Petrochemical Industry
- Offshore Industry
www.metrode.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction to Metrode............................................................................................................................... 2
Data Sheets: Introduction and explanatory notes..................................................................................... 4
A. Low alloy steels.............................................................................................................................................6

• CrMo creep resisting consumables
• MnMo low alloy steels
• High toughness Ni bearing low alloy steels
• High strength low alloy steels
B. Stainless steels............................................................................................................................................93
• Martensitic stainless steels
• Austenitic stainless steels
• 309L and 309Mo stainless steels
• Superaustenitic, lean duplex, duplex and superduplex stainless steels
C. High temperature alloys........................................................................................................................... 223

• High carbon 300 series stainless steels
• High temperature 309 and 310 stainless steels
• High carbon austenitic alloys (including 330, 800, HP40
D. Nickel base alloys...................................................................................................................................... 278

• 182 type alloys
• 625 type alloys
• Alloy C types
• Specialist nickel base alloys
• Nickel based non-ferrous alloys
E. Repair and maintenance............................................................................................................................ 328

• Cast iron
• Dissimilar welding
• Copper alloy consumables
• Hardfacing
• Special mild steel
F. Fluxes for submerged arc welding ............................................................................................................380

• Fluxes for use with low alloy CrMo, stainless steel and nickel base wires
G. Other useful information.......................................................................................................................... 387

Abbreviations, element symbols, welding positions
• Schaeffler and WRC diagrams
• Conversions
• Packaging and storage
• Index 1 Product designations
• Index 2 Consumable specifications
• Index 3 Materials to be welded
www.metrode.com 1
INTRODUCTION TO METRODE
1. The company
Metrode was founded in 1963 as a privately owned company. In the subsequent years it has grown to become the UK's leading
manufacturer and supplier of alloyed welding consumables. It is particularly strong in those industries which require the highest
integrity from their welding consumables, such as power generation, chemical and petrochemical, offshore oil and gas, LNG and
nuclear. In the last decade the export market has been vigorously developed and Metrode has markets globally. It also has an
extensive overseas network of distributors and agents as well as a distribution network covering the whole of the UK. November
2006, Metrode joined the Lincoln Electric Company as a business unit within Lincoln Electric Europe.
2. Scope
This handbook is designed to provide information on the company, its products and services and guidance on the correct choice of
welding consumables.
This 2016 edition of the Technical Handbook (revision 13) contains over 100 data sheets covering about 350 arc welding consumables.
About half of these are flux covered manual metal arc electrodes. These are complemented by a wide range of solid wires, tubular
flux cored and metal cored wires for the other popular arc welding processes. The range has applications for all industrially
significant steels and alloy systems except for titanium, magnesium, aluminium and rarer metals. Particular emphasis is currently
being devoted to developing a strategy with consumables for the power generation industries, offshore oil and gas industries, high
temperature materials in the chemical and petrochemical industries and a diverse range of nickel based alloys. Data sheets for
some fringe products are not included in this handbook, but are available on request.
3. The products
Metrode was founded in 1963 as a privately owned company. In the subsequent years it has grown to become the UK's leading
manufacturer and supplier of alloyed welding consumables. It is particularly strong in those industries which require the highest
integrity from their welding consumables, such as power generation, chemical and petrochemical, offshore oil and gas, LNG and
nuclear. In the last decade the export market has been vigorously developed and Metrode has markets globally. It also has an
extensive overseas network of distributors and agents as well as a distribution network covering the whole of the UK. November
2006, Metrode joined the Lincoln Electric Company as a business unit within Lincoln Electric Europe.
4. Availability and special services

All the standard products listed in this document are available either ex stock or on short lead times in the most commonly used
sizes.
5. Standard product range

All the standard products listed in this document are available either ex stock or on short lead times in the most commonly used
sizes.
6. Special product range

The special product range covers a wider range of the less common products and non-standard sizes. These items may be subject
to minimum order value/quantity requirements and to longer lead times. Further information on the Product Range is available
from our Customer Care Department.
7. Special services
Metrode's unique know-how is always available to meet individual requirements and a number of tailor-made formulations are
developed to suit special or proprietary technical requirements.
8. Development
Metrode maintains a close awareness of future welding consumable needs to support new alloys and changing technical
requirements through its links with: the International Institute of Welding (IIW), the European Welding Association (EWA), The
Welding Institute (TWI), the American Welding Society (AWS) and a number of universities and research organisations both in the
UK and worldwide. The Company has its own development team working together with the sophisticated R&D resources within
the Lincoln Electric Company group to design new products and improve existing ones to meet the needs of the fabrication industry
9. Technical support
2 www.metrode.com
Technical support is available to help with any aspect of consumable choice, applications or procedural guidance.
Field based staff can advise on procedural aspects and factors needed to achieve optimum performance.
Facilities are available at Metrode for demonstration, training and evaluation for all the major welding processes which utilise
Metrode consumables.
10. Specifications and certification

Metrode consumables are manufactured to conform with the current issues of BS EN, BS EN ISO or AWS-ASME standards where
applicable. When incompatible variations exist between different specifications for equivalent types, these are indicated on the
data sheet. Where a product does not strictly conform to a standard the specification is shown in brackets for guidance only.
Every batch is certified at least with chemical analysis to BS EN 10204: 3.1, with a few exceptions amongst some hardfacing/
maintenance types certified to BS EN 10204: 2.2.
Special requirements for batch testing or analysis variants are frequently satisfied with prior agreement.
11. Health and safety

Welding produces fumes and gases which can be dangerous to your health. Arc rays can injure eyes and burn skin. Electric
shock can kill.
It is important to take suitable precautions when welding, and to follow safe working practices. These should be based upon
information available from the Welding Manufacturers' Association leaflet and Metrode's Health and Safety booklet which may
be obtained from Metrode or our distributors. Some details may vary with specific legislation outside the UK.
Welding fume data for hazard assessment (COSHH in the UK) is included on each data sheet.
Metrode is approved to ISO 14001.
12. Quality assurance

Metrode's historic reputation for quality is sustained by the active and continuous implementation of a stringent quality assurance
programme recognised by international authorities.
Approval and surveillance of Metrode's Quality Management Systems for design, development and manufacturing is certified by:
Lloyds Register QA to BS EN ISO 9001:2008 certificate 840131.
TÜV NORD to AD2000-Merkblatt W0/TRD 100, VdTÜV-Merkblatt 1153 & KTA 1408, certificate 07-202-1410-wp-0874/7/001.
13. Quality policy

It is Metrode’s mission to achieve and maintain success in its chosen market of supplying welding consumables to users worldwide
through key customer and supplier partnerships, superior service, technology and product leadership.
This shall be achieved through the highest standards of product quality and customer service by:
• Ensuring that each customer’s needs are clearly defined and understood.
• Ensuring that all employees are appropriately trained in all aspects of their job with the understanding that quality is
everyone’s responsibility.
• Supplying products that satisfy each customer’s quality and reliability requirements, whilst underpinning the profitability
of the company.
• Monitoring customer satisfaction and ensuring that the customer’s wishes remain the prime focus at all time.
• Striving to continuously improve every aspect of our business by identifying processes and setting and reviewing quality
objectives.
To support this policy, Metrode operates a quality management system that complies with ISO 9001 and applicable regulatory
requirements. The system shall serve to communicate expectations, establish controls and promote a culture committed to
excellence in everything we do.
Our Quality Assurance Manager is charged with the responsibility for the implementation and maintenance of the quality system
and acts with our full authority and commitment on all matters related to quality.
www.metrode.com 3
DATA SHEETS : INTRODUCTION AND EXPLANATORY NOTES
It is Metrode’s mission to achieve and maintain success in its chosen market of supplying welding consumables to users worldwide
through key customer and supplier partnerships, superior service, technology and product leadership.
This shall be achieved through the highest standards of product quality and customer service by:
• Ensuring that each customer’s needs are clearly defined and understood.
• Ensuring that all employees are appropriately trained in all aspects of their job with the understanding that quality is
everyone’s responsibility.
• Supplying products that satisfy each customer’s quality and reliability requirements, whilst underpinning the profitability of
the company.
• Monitoring customer satisfaction and ensuring that the customer’s wishes remain the prime focus at all time.
Striving to continuously improve every aspect of our business by identifying processes and setting and reviewing quality objectives.
To support this policy, Metrode operates a quality management system that complies with ISO 9001 and applicable regulatory
requirements. The system shall serve to communicate expectations, establish controls and promote a culture committed to
excellence in everything we do.
Our Quality Assurance Manager is charged with the responsibility for the implementation and maintenance of the quality system
and acts with our full authority and commitment on all matters related to quality.
GENERAL EXPLANATORY NOTES

Each data sheet is headed with a unique number for easy reference. The same number also appears at the bottom right hand
corner of each page of the data sheet.
Data sheet revision status is given at the foot of the page.
The Metrode designation in bold type should be used when ordering. It is printed on each electrode, stamped on many TIG wires
and identifies all package labels.
Each data sheet is sub-divided under self-explanatory headings, some of which are briefly outlined below.
Materials to be welded
Examples are given of typical base materials for which the consumable may be used. It should not be assumed that this is a
guarantee of suitability, and should be used with caution.
Reference is made to proprietary alloy names for many base materials and we acknowledge the use of registered trade names from
Haynes International Inc, Special Metals, VDM and RA Materials Ltd.
Applications
Information is given for general guidance and in good faith, but the user should ascertain that the product is suitable for the specific
and intended purpose.
Welding guidelines
Brief guidelines on preheat, post weld heat treatment (PWHT) and any particular procedural requirements are given for each alloy.
The user is responsible for establishing a satisfactory welding procedure.
Additional information
Useful background information, procedural notes, precautions and published references are given where appropriate. Technical
profiles are also available for a number of products.
Specifications, approvals
See specification notes above. For some products which do not strictly conform to a particular specification, the nearest
specification is shown in brackets for guidance. If a required approval is not shown, contact Metrode
Composition
Composition limits are declared for almost every product in addition to typical values.
Where it is possible to meet BS EN, BS EN ISO and AWS-ASME compositions with one product, this is often reflected in tighter data
sheet limits than the individual specifications. Whilst in rare cases a batch may not satisfy all these constraints, BS EN ISO or AWS-
ASME are normally the default specifications unless agreed otherwise. See also specification notes on previous introductory page.
Note that flux covered MMA electrodes and tubular cored wires are defined by all-weld deposit analysis, solid wires by product
analysis, and fluxes by deposit analysis from appropriate combination with relevant solid wires.
All-weld mechanical properties

Minimum and typical tensile and impact properties are given where applicable to satisfy national specifications or material
requirements. Caution is generally advised in translating these all-weld (longitudinal) values to joint (transverse) test values.
4 www.metrode.com
DATA SHEETS: INTRODUCTION AND EXPLANATORY NOTES
Operating parameters
Current ranges are based on satisfactory fusion and arc stability. Optimum conditions are influenced by variables such as welding
position, base material thickness, and heat input considerations, etc. Most electrodes operate smoothly on DC+ (positive electrode)
and for those suitable for AC a minimum OCV (open circuit voltage) is given.
Welding positions for electrodes are shown pictographically. Where vertical and overhead are indicated this usually applies to
3.2mm and smaller sizes, with 4mm practicable with skilled operators and joints with sufficient room for manipulation. Where
vertical down is indicated, this applies to 2.5mm or 3.2 with skilled operators.
Packaging data
For electrodes, the length, weight per carton (3 tins) and approximate number of pieces per carton are given, but may be subject to
change without notice. For TIG, MIG, SAW and FCW, tube, spool and coil weights are also provided. Contact Metrode for latest
information if required.
Note that Metrode electrodes are supplied in hermetically sealed tins with ring-pull opening. The integrity of this packaging is
regularly assessed according to the ASME SFA5.5 procedure. Tins provide a convenient and economic alternative to smaller units
of vacuum-packed electrodes in 'site packs' which can be supplied to order.
Redrying (rebaking or conditioning), handling and storage recommendations are given. Redrying should ensure that the unpacked
electrodes reach the recommended temperature-time conditions.
The majority of electrodes and TIG wires are marked individually with both the designation or classification number and batch
number.
Fume data
To assist health and safety hazard assessment, welding fume composition is given for each product. Fume itself comprises oxides,
silicates or other complex compounds of the elements listed.
An occupational exposure limit or standard (OES) is calculated in milligrams per cubic metre breathing zone concentration. This
control value is 5mg/m3 maximum, or much lower for many alloyed consumables. For example, a significant proportion of the
chromium in fume generated by stainless covered electrodes and flux cored wire is present in hexavalent form with a limit of
0.05mg/m3, which reduces total fume OES to around 1mg/m3. In fume generated by solid stainless MIG wires, practically all
chromium is trivalent and the total fume OES is higher.
TIG and submerged arc processes generate too little fume for assessment on this basis.
In the UK, COSHH guidance relevant to welding is found in HMSO publications, EH40, EH54 and EH55.
Website
Inevitably a printed Technical Handbook is out of date soon after it has been printed. The Metrode website (www.metrode.com)
overcomes this problem because the data sheets for the most common products are all on the website and are updated as soon as
the data sheet is revised
www.metrode.com 5
LOW ALLOY STEELS
LOW ALLOY STEELS
METRODE PRODUCTS LTD

Section A : Low Alloy Steels HANWORTH LANE, CHERTSEY
SURREY, KT16 9LL, UK
Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
Email: info@metrode.com
Website: www.metrode.com
LOW ALLOY STEELS INCLUDING THE CrMo CREEP RESISTING CONSUMABLES
This section includes consumables suitable for welding general engineering and structural steels, from medium tensile grain-refined
CMn and semi-cryogenic steels (approximately –75°C) to specialised heat and creep-resistant CrMo types reaching the threshold of
stainlessness at 12%Cr.
Flux coverings of all electrodes are of all-positional basic low-hydrogen type and employ binders giving high resistance to moisture
absorption. All flux cored wires are rutile all-positional types also with low hydrogen potential. With increasing weld and base metal
strength and hardenability (or carbon equivalent), a hydrogen potential below 5ml/100g weld metal is often an essential procedural
parameter, coupled with preheat where necessary to moderate HAZ hardening or raise safety margins in thicker sections:
Carbon equivalent (CE) = C + Mn + Cr + Mo + V + Cu + Ni

6 5 15
For guidance, preheat up to 50°C for CE < 0.40, 100°C for < 0.55, 150°C for < 0.70, 200°C for < 0.80, 250°C for 0.90 or above. However,
note that some cases require restricted preheat-interpass and also heat input control to maintain optimum strength and toughness.
High joint restraint may require higher preheats.
A full discussion of this subject is given in the following publication: N. Bailey, F.R. Coe et al: ‘Welding steels without hydrogen
cracking’, Abington Publishing, Cambridge, 1993.
The necessity for Post Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT) varies with base and weld metal type. PWHT is normally essential to temper
the HAZ below 248HV/22HRC required by NACE for H2S service, for which electrodes giving mandatory < 1%Ni with strength and
toughness are available. Most nickel-bearing electrodes also give excellent as-welded properties at low temperatures. PWHT is
essential for creep-resisting Cr-Mo types, although the leaner low carbon variants are sometimes stress-relieved in service when used
for repairs under local preheat.
.
DataSheet Alloy Process Product AWS Classifications EN / EN ISO Classifications
Cr-Mo creep resisting consumables mainly for the power generation industry
MMA Mo.B E7018-A1 E Mo B
A-10 ½Mo
TIG/MIG CMo ER70S-A1 MoSi
Chromet 1 E8018-B2 E CrMo1 B
MMA Chromet 1L E7015-B2L E CrMo1L B
Chromet 1X E8018-B2 E CrMo1 B
A-12 1¼Cr½Mo 1CrMo ER80S-G CrMo1Si
TIG/MIG
ER80S-B2 ER80S-B2 --
SAW SA 1CrMo EB2 CrMo1
FCW Cormet 1 E81T1-B2 T55T1-1C/M-1CM
Chromet 2 E9018-B3 E CrMo2 B
MMA Chromet 2L E8015-B3L E CrMo2L B
Chromet 2X E9018-B3 E CrMo2 B
2CrMo ER90S-G CrMo2Si
A-13 2¼Cr1Mo TIG/MIG
ER90S-B3 ER90S-B3 --
SAW SA 2CrMo EB3 CrMo2
Cormet 2 E91T1-B3 T62T1-1C/M-2CM
FCW
Cormet 2L E91T1-B3L T62T1-1C/M-2CML
Chromet 1V -- ECrMoV1 B
MMA
A-14 CrMoV 13CMV -- (ECrMoV1 B)
FCW Cormet 1V -- --
6 www.metrode.com DS A-01 | Rev. 01-03/16

LOW ALLOY STEELS
LOW ALLOY STEELS

Cr-Mo creep resisting consumables mainly for the power generation industry (continued)
MMA Chromet 5 E8015-B6 E CrMo5 B
A-15 5CrMo TIG/MIG 5CrMo ER80S-B6 CrMo5Si
SAW 5CrMo EB6 S CrMo5
MMA Chromet 9 E8015-B8 E CrMo9 B
A-16 9CrMo TIG/MIG 9CrMo ER80S-B8 CrMo9
SAW SA 9CrMo EB8 S CrMo9
Chromet 9MV-N E9015-B91 E CrMo91 B
Chromet 9MVN+ E9015-B91 E CrMo91 B
MMA
Chromet 9-B9 E9015-B91 E CrMo91 B
Chromet 91VNB E9015-B91 E CrMo91 B
A-17 P91 TIG/MIG 9CrMoV-N ER90S-B9 CrMo91
9CrMoV ER90S-B9 9C1MV
MCW Cormet M91 E90C-B9 T69T15-0M-9C1MV
SAW 9CrMoV-N EB91 (S CrMo91)
FCW Supercore F91 E91T1-B9 T69T1-1C/M-9C1MV
MMA Chromet 10MW E9015-G (E911) --
A-18 E911
FCW Cormet 10MW -- --
MMA Chromet 12MV -- E CrMoWV 12 1 B
A-19 12CrMoV
TIG 12CrMoV -- W CrMoWV12 1
MMA Chromet 92 E9015-B92 --
TIG/MIG 9CrWV ER90S-G (92) --
A-20 P92
SAW 9CrWV EG (92) --
FCW Supercore F92 E91T1-G(92) --
MMA Chromet 23L E9015-G(23) --
A-21 T23
TIG 2CrWV ER90S-G (23) --
MMA 1NiMo.B E9018-G --
A-23 WB36 TIG MnMo ER80S-D2 --
SAW SA 1NiMo EF3 S3Ni1Mo
MMA Chromet WB2 E9015-G --
A-25 W B2 / 921
FCW Supercore WB2 E91T1-G --
High toughness 1-3%Ni consumables for applications from –40°C down to about –75°C
MMA Tufmet 1Ni.B E8018-C3 E 46 6 1Ni B 42
A-40 MnMo TIG/MIG 1Ni ER80S-Ni1 (3Ni1)
FCW Metcore DWA 55E E71T-5 T 42 4 PM1 H5
MMA Tufmet 2Ni.B E8018-C1 E 46 6 2Ni B 42
A-41 NiMo
TIG 2Ni ER80S-Ni2 (2Ni2)
A-42 3Ni MMA Tufmet 3Ni.B E8018-C2 E 46 6 3Ni B 42
Consumables for high strength low alloy steels requiring tensile strengths from 620MPa up to 825MPa
E9018-D1 E9018-D1 BS: MnMo.BH
MMA
A-50 MnMo E10018-D2 E10018-D2 E 624 Mn1NiMo B
TIG/MIG MnMo ER80S-D2 4Mo
Tufmet 1NiMo E9016-G --
MMA E11018-M E11018-M --
A-60 NiMo
Tufmet 3NiMo E12016-G --
TIG/MIG ER110S-G ER110S-G Mn3Ni1CrMo
A-61 NiMo MMA 1NiMo.B E9018-G --
Consumables for copper containing weathering steels eg. Corten
MMA 1NiCu.B E8018-W2 E 55 18-NCC1 A
A-70 Corten
TIG/MIG/SAW ER80S-W ER80S-G (Mn3Ni1Cu)
Electrode for the joining of rail steels using a slag-over-slag technique
A-80 Rail MMA Railrod - -
www.metrode.com DS A-01 | Rev. 01-03/16 7

Data Sheet A-10
LOW ALLOY STEELS
HANWORTH LANE, CHERTSEY

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
0.5%MO CREEP RESISTING STEEL

ALLOY TYPE APPLICATIONS
Ferritic creep resisting 0.5%Mo steels for elevated Nominal 0.5% Mo alloying results in improved
temperature service. elevated temperature performance over that of
CMn steels. Used for the fabrication of vessels and
associated pipework demanding creep rupture
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED strength and ductility at temperatures up to about
PIPE/TUBE 450°C.
ASTM The Mo content also enhances resistance to
A335 grade P1 hydrogen attack in chemical process plant
A209 & A 250 grade T1 operation.
BS Favourable mechanical properties of both as-
3059 grade 243
welded and stress-relieved weld metal are also
3606 grades 243, 245, 261
useful in welding structural and general engineering
steels for ambient or sub-zero temperature service.
FORGED In this respect these consumables are related to
ASTM
the higher strength manganese-molybdenum
A336 grade F1
A204 grades A, B, C alloyed steel consumables.
BS EN
10028-2 grade 16Mo3 (1.5415) MICROSTRUCTURE
DIN In the stress-relieved condition the microstructure
16Mo3 (1.5415) consists of acicular ferrite with some tempered
16Mo5 (1.5423) bainite.
10MnMo 4 5 (1.5424)
11MnMo 4 5 (1.5425) WELDING GUIDELINES
Preheat and interpass temperatures are normally
CAST in the range 100-250°C depending upon thickness
ASTM being welded and restraint.
A217 grade WC1
A352 grade LC1 PWHT
BS EN PWHT to temper the weldment varies according
1504 grade 245 to the code; the extremes range from 550°C up to
3100 grade B1 720°C but the most common range is 630-670°C.
DIN For material up to 20mm thick some codes allow
GS-22Mo 4 (1.5419) the PWHT to be omitted.
RELATED ALLOY GROUPS

For high strength structural welding applications
the MnMo alloys (A-50) are related.
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
Process Product Specification
MMA Mo.B AWS E7018-A1 H4
TIG/MIG CMo AWS ER70S-A1

Mo.B
LOW ALLOY STEELS

MOLYBDENUM ALLOYED MMA ELECTRODE FOR ELEVATED TEMPER ATURE SERVICE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Basic flux, metal powder type coating on high purity mild steel core wire. Moisture resistant coating giving very low weld metal
hydrogen levels.
Recovery is about 120% with respect to core wire, 65% with respect to whole electrode.
SPECIFICATIONS ASME IX QUALIFICATION

AWS A5.5M E7018-A1 H4 QW432 F-No 4
BS EN ISO 3580-A E Mo B 3 2 QW442 A-No 2
BS and AWS Mn ranges overlap, but required specification should be stated on order.
WELDING POSITIONS (ISO/ASME)
PA/1G PB/2F PC/2G PF/3Gu PE/4G
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION (WELD METAL WT %)

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu
min. -- 0.75 -- -- -- -- -- 0.40 --
max. 0.10 1.20 0.60 0.025 0.030 0.20 -- 0.65 --
Typical 0.05 0.8 0.3 0.01 0.015 0.05 0.05 0.55 0.05
* BS2493 Mn:Si ≥2:1, AWS A5.5 Mn 0.90% max.
ALL-WELD MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

PWHT 600-650ºC/h * Min. Typical As Welded Typical
Tensile strength (MPa) 510 550-610 590
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 400 460-525 480
Elongation (%) 4d 22 27-32 27
5d 22 23-29 23
Reduction of area % -- 65-72 68
Impact ISO-V(J) -20°C -- 130 100
-30°C -- 115 --
Hardness (HV) -- 200 200
* BS and DIN: 600ºC/1h; AWS: 620ºC/1h. Satisfactory properties are also obtained in the as-welded condition.
OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC + ve or AC (OCV: 70V Min)

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
kg/carton 12.0 12.9 13.5 16.5
Pieces/carton 552 390 246 153
STORAGE
3 hermetically sealed ring-pull metal tins per carton, with unlimited shelf life. Direct use from tin will give hydrogen < 5ml/100g for
longer than a working shift of 8h. For electrodes that have been exposed:
Redry 250 – 300°C/1-2h to ensure H2 < 10ml/100g, 300 – 350°C/1-2h to ensure H2 < 5ml/100g. Maximum 420°C, 3 cycles, 10h total.
Storage of redried electrodes at 100 – 200°C in holding ovens, or 50-150ºC in heated quivers: no limit, but maximum 6 weeks
recommended.
FUME DATA
Fume composition, wt % typical
Fe Mn Ni Cr Cu Pb F OES (mg/m3)
16 7 <0.1 <0.1 <0.2 <0.1 17 5
www.metrode.com DS A-10-Mo.B | Rev. 01-03/16 9

CMo
LOW ALLOY STEELS
0.5%Mo SOLID TIG AND MIG WIRE FOR CREEP RESISTING STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Copper coated solid wire for TIG and MIG.

AWS A5.28M ER70S-A1 (Previous classification was ER70S-G) QW432 F-No 6
ISO 21952-A W Mo Si (TIG wire) QW442 A-No 2
En ISO 14341-A G 46 3 M 2Mo (MIG wire)
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION (WIRE WT %)

C Mn Si S P Cr Mo Ni Cu V
Min. 0.08 0.90 0.50 -- -- -- 0.45 -- -- --
Max. 0.12 1.30 0.70 0.020 0.020 0.2 0.60 0.20 0.3 0.03
Typical 0.1 1.2 0.6 0.01 0.01 0.03 0.5 0.02 0.05 0.01

Typical TIG MAG Ar + 5% CO2
Properties as-welded (AW) or PWHT: Min.
AW 620ºC/1h AW 620ºC/1h
Tensile strength (MPa) 515 662 640 650 620
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 400 540 520 530 505
Elongation (%) 4d 19 29 25 29 25
5d 22 26 24 25 24
Impact ISO-V(J) -30°C -- 52 170 42 96
Hardness HV -- 210/245 205/230 215/235 200/220
*Minimum values are after PWHT 620ºC/1h (AWS) or 595ºC/0.5h (DIN) and as-welded for BS EN.
MAG welds using more oxidising shielding gas (higher CO2 + O2) will have lower strength than shown.
TYPICAL OPERATING PARAMETERS

Shielding gas Current Diameter (mm) Parameters
TIG Argon DC- 2.4 100A, 12V
MIG Argon + 2-20%CO2 / Argon +1.5%O2 or proprietary DC+ 1.2 260A, 26V
PACKAGING DATA
TIG - 5 kg tube 5 kg tube
MIG 15 kg spool - -
FUME DATA
MIG fume composition (wt %) (TIG fume negligible)
Fe Mn Cr3 Ni Mo Cu OES (mg/m3)
55 5 <0.1 <0.1 <0.5 1.2 5
10 www.metrode.com DS A-10-CMo | Rev. 01-03/16

Data Sheet A-12
LOW ALLOY STEELS

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
1¼CR-½MO CREEP RESISTING STEEL

ALLOY TYPE MICROSTRUCTURE
1¼Cr-½Mo alloyed steel consumables for After PWHT, the microstructure consists of
elevated temperature service tempered bainite.
WELDING GUIDELINES
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED
Preheat and interpass temperature 200°C
ASTM BS EN & DIN minimum, up to 300°C for thick sections.
A387 Gr 11 & 12 13CrMo 4-5 (1.7355) Maintain throughout welding cycle and some
A182 F11 & F12 13CrMo 4-4 (1.7335) time after completion of welding.
A217 WC6 & WC11 16CrMo 4-4 (1.7337)
A234 WP11 & WP12 11CrMo 5-5 (1.7339)
A199 T11 GS-25CrMo 4 (1.7128) PWHT
A200 T11 GS-17CrMo 5-5 (1.7357) Apart from some special applications, PWHT
A213 T11 & T12
A335 P11 & P12 will always be required. PWHT temperature is
typically 690°C with time being dependent on
section thickness.
BS
1501 Gr 620 & 621
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
1502 Gr 620
1503 Gr 620 & 621 There are Technical Profiles available which cover
1504 Gr 621 some of the consumables on this data sheet.
3100 Gr B2 Additional information is available on Chromet 1X
3604 Gr 620/440 & 621 and Cormet 1.
3059 Gr 620/460
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
APPLICATIONS
These consumables are designed for prolonged Process Product Specification
Elevated temperature service up to 550°C. Chromet 1 AWS E8018-B2
Main areas of application are associated with MMA Chromet 1L AWS E7015-B2L
steam generating power plant, eg piping, turbine Chromet 1X * AWS E8018-B2
castings, steam chests, valve bodies and boiler 1CrMo BS EN CrMo1Si
superheaters. Some of the consumables will also TIG/MIG
ER80S-B2 AWS ER80S-B2
find service in refineries where they are used for
corrosion resistance to sulphur bearing crude SA 1CrMo AWS EB2
SAW
oil at 250-450°C. Some of the consumables will LA436 BS EN ISO SA AB 1
also find applications in the chemical and petro- FCW Cormet 1 AWS E81T1-B2
chemical industries where they are used for
* Chromet 1X is the temper embrittlement resistant
resistance to hydrogen attack in the fabrication (TER) version of Chromet 1.
of hydrocrackers, coal liquefaction plant and NH3
pressure vessels operating at up to 450°C. In
the as-welded condition the consumables also
provide a useful source of 300HV hardness weld
deposit for build-up or hardsurfacing to resist
metal-to-metal wear and heavy impact.

CHROMET 1
LOW ALLOY STEELS
1¼CR-½Mo MMA ELECTRODE

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode meeting AWS and BS EN national standards suitable for most power generation applications.
Basic flux, metal powder type coatings on low carbon high purity core wire. Recovery is approximately 115% with respect to the
core wire and 65% with respect to whole electrode. Moisture resistant coating gives very low metal hydrogen levels.
SPECIFICATIONS
ASME IX QUALIFICATION
AWS A5.5M E8018-B2 H4
QW432 F-No 4
BS EN ISO 3580-A E CrMo1 B 3 2 H5
QW442 A-No 3
BS EN ISO 3580-B E 5518-1CM
APPROVALS TÜV

C Mn* Si S P Cr Mo Ni Cu Nb
Min. 0.05 0.50 -- -- -- 1.00 0.45 -- -- --
Max. 0.12 0.90 0.80 0.025 0.030 1.40 0.65 0.3 0.2 0.01
Typical 0.07 0.8 0.5 0.01 0.02 1.25 0.55 0.1 <0.1 0.01
* Mn may exceed AWS 0.90% max.

HT 690°C/1h min typical
Tensile strength (MPa) 550 640
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 460 570
Elongation (%) 4d 19 25
5d 20 24
Reduction of area % -- 70
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C 47 160
Hardness (HV) AW -- 250
PWHT -- 210
TYPICAL OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC + ve or AC (OCV: 70V Min)

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
kg/carton 12.9 12.9 16.8 18.0
STORAGE
Storage of redried electrodes at 50 – 200°C in holding oven or heated quiver: no limit, but maximum 6 weeks recommended.
Recommended ambient storage conditions for opened tins (using plastic lid): < 60% RH, >18°C.
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Cr Ni Cu F OES (mg/m3)
15 5 < 0.5 < 0.1 < 0.2 18 5
12 www.metrode.com DS A-12-CHROMET 1 | Rev. 01-03/16

CHROMET 1L
LOW ALLOY STEELS

LOW CARBON 1¼CR-½Mo MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – 1¼Cr-½Mo deposit with low carbon which produces lower hardness and residual stresses for resistance to
sulphide stress corrosion cracking when operating in wet ‘sour’ environments. Also suitable for thin section joints which are to be
left in the as-welded condition.

AWS A5.5M 7015-B2L H4 QW432 F-No 4
BS EN ISO 3580-A E CrMo1L B 3 2 H5 QW442 A-No 3
BS EN ISO 3580-B E 5216-1CML

C Mn Si S P Cr Mo Cu
Min. 0.03 0.50 -- -- -- 1.00 0.45 --
Max. 0.05 0.90 0.80 0.025 0.025 1.40 0.65 0.15
Typical 0.04 0.80 0.40 0.012 0.015 1.25 0.55 <0.10
PWHT 690°C/1h Min. Typical
5d 20 23
Reduction of area % - 68
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C - 180
-10°C - 120
Hardness (HV) AW - 220
PWHT - 200

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
kg/carton 12.0 15.0 17.7 18.0
STORAGE
FUME DATA
15 5 < 0.5 < 0.1 < 0.2 18 5
www.metrode.com DS A-12-CHROMET 1L | Rev. 01-03/16 13

CHROMET 1X
LOW ALLOY STEELS
1¼CR-½Mo ALLOYED MMA ELECTRODE FOR TEMPER EMBRITTLEMENT RESISTANCE

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – 1¼Cr-½Mo deposit which meets specific requirements for improved temper embrittlement resistance with
prolonged service at 400-600°C. Relevant trace elements (P, Sn, As, Sb) are controlled to ensure low Bruscato (X) and Watanabe
(J) factors.

AWS A5.5M E8018-B2 H4 QW432 F-No 4
BS EN ISO 3580-A E CrMo1 B 3 2 H5 QW442 A-No 3

C Mn* Si* S P Cr Mo Cu Sn As
Min. 0.05 0.50 0.15 -- -- 1.00 0.45 -- -- --
Max. 0.10 0.90 0.30 0.015 0.012 1.40 0.65 0.15 0.005 0.010
Typical 0.06 0.70 0.25 0.012 0.009 1.25 0.55 <0.05 0.002 0.003
* Mn+Si < 1.10%
Bruscato factor (X) : 10P + 5Sb + 4Sn + As (ppm)/100 = 15 Max Watanabe factor (J) : (Mn+Si)x(P + Sn) x 104 = 180 max
PWHT 690°C/1h (1) (SC = step cooled) Min. Typical 690°C/5h typical 690°C/5h + SC typical
Tensile strength (MPa) 550 610 610 595
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 460 525 515 490
Elongation (%) 4d 19 25 29 29
5d 20 21 25 25
Reduction of area % -- 70 70 70
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C 47 (2)
160 200 200
-30°C -- 100 160 140
Hardness (HV) AW -- 300-320 -- --
PWHT -- 200-210 220 190
(1)
BS & AWS PWHT 690°C/1h, DIN 690°C/>30min, BS EN 720°C/1h. (2) DIN & BS EN minimum average.
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
kg/carton 12.6 13.8 16.8 17.4
STORAGE
FUME DATA
15 5 < 0.5 < 0.1 < 0.2 18 5
14 www.metrode.com DS A-12-CHROMET 1X | Rev. 02-08/16

1CrMo
LOW ALLOY STEELS

SOLID WELDING WIRE FOR TIG & MIG.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Copper coated wire for TIG and MIG welding of 1¼Cr-½Mo steels, conforming to European and ISO specifications.

AWS A5.28M ER80S-G QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO21952-A CrMo1Si (W = TIG, G=MIG) QW442 A-No 3
APPROVALS TÜV

C Mn Si S P Cr Mo Ni Cu
Min. 0.08 0.8 0.5 - - 0.9 0.45 - -
Max. 0.14 1.2 0.8 0.02 0.02 1.3 0.65 - 0.4
Typical 0.1 1.0 0.6 0.01 0.015 1.2 0.5 <0.1 0.1

PWHT 690°C/4h (AWS=1h) Min. Typical TIG Typical MIG
Tensile strength (MPa) 550 635 590
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 470 520 480
Elongation (%) 4d 19 28 26
5d 20 23 22
Impact ISO-V(J) -10°C - >200 >115
Hardness HV - 220 195
HB - 215 190

MIG Ar-5%CO2 DC+ 1.2 280A, 26V
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.4 3.2
TIG -- -- 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube
MIG 15kg reel 15kg reel -- -- --
FUME DATA
55 5 0.4 <0.1 <0.5 1.2 5
www.metrode.com DS A-12-1CrMo | Rev. 01-03/16 15

ER80S-B2
LOW ALLOY STEELS

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Copper coated wire for TIG and MIG welding 1¼Cr-½Mo creep resisting steels, conforming to the AWS/ASME specification.

AWS A5.28M ER80S-B2 QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO 21952-B 1CM QW442 A-No 3

C Mn Si S P Cr Mo Ni Cu
Min. 0.07 0.4 0.4 - - 1.2 0.4 - -
Max. 0.12 0.7 0.7 0.020 0.020 1.5 0.65 0.2 0.35
Typical 0.10 0.5 0.5 0.01 0.015 1.3 0.5 <0.1 0.10

PWHT 690°C/4h (AWS=620°C /1h) Min. Typical TIG Typical MIG
5d 17 25 20
Impact ISO-V(J) -10°C - >200 >115
Hardness HV - 220 195
HB - 215 190

MIG Ar-5%CO2 DC+ 1.2 280A, 26V
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG - - - - 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube
MIG 15kg reel 15kg reel 15kg reel 15kg reel - - - -
FUME DATA
55 5 0.4 <0.1 <0.5 1.2 5
16 www.metrode.com DS A-12-ER80S-B2 | Rev. 01-03/16

SA 1CrMo
LOW ALLOY STEELS

SOLID WELDING WIRE FOR SAW.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for Sub Arc Welding of 1¼Cr-½Mo steels

AWS A5.23M EB2 QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO 24598-A SCrMo1 QW442 A-No 3
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION (TYPICAL)

SA1CrMo wire 0.1 0.8 0.15 0.01 0.012 1.3 0.55 0.01
Deposit with LA436. 0.08 1.1 0.4 <0.01 <0.02 1.1 0.5 00.1

5d 20 23
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C 47 >100

Current: DC or AC; DC+ve is preferred.
For 2.4mm: 300-500A, 28-36V, 350-700mm/min travel
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.4 3.2
SAW 25kg spool 25kg spool
FUME DATA
SAW fume negligible
www.metrode.com DS A-12-SA1CrMo | Rev. 01-03/16 17

LA436
LOW ALLOY STEELS
SUB-ARC FLUX
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
LA436 is agglomerated aluminate basic flux (Boniszewski BI ~1.6) with silicon pick-up of ~0.3% and manganese pick-up of ~0.4%.

AWS A5.23M F9 P0-EB3 B3 QW432 F-No --
BS EN ISO 14174 SA AB 1 67 AC H5 QW442 A-No --

C Mn Si S P Cr Mo
SA2CrMo wire 0.10 0.8 0.15 0.010 0.012 1.3 0.55
Deposit with LA436 0.08 1.1 0.4 <0.01 <0.02 1.1 0.5
ALL-WELD MECHANICAL PROPERTIES with SA 1CRMO WIRE

Typical PWHT 690-720°C/1-2h
Tensile strength (MPa) 620
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 535
Elongation (%) 4d 25
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C >100

Current: DC or AC; DC+ve is preferred
PACKAGING DATA
Metrode LA436 flux is supplied in sealed moisture resistant 25kg metal drums. Preferred storage conditions for opened drums:
< 60%RH, > 18°C. If the flux has become damp or has been stored for a long period, it should be redried in the range 300-350°C/1-2h.
18 www.metrode.com DS A-12-LA436 | Rev. 01-03/16

CORMET 1
LOW ALLOY STEELS

ALL-POSITIONAL FLUX CORED WIRE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Cormet 1 is an all-positional flux cored wire suitable for welding fixed pipework. Made using a high purity steel sheath with a
metal recovery of about 90% with respect to the wire.

AWS A5.29M E81T1-B2C/M-H4 QW432 F-No 6
AWS A5.36 E81T1-C1PZ-B2-H4 or E81T1-M21PZ-B2-H4 (dependent on shielding gas) QW442 A-No 3
BS EN ISO 17634-B T55T1-1C/M-1CM

Min. 0.05 -- -- -- -- 1.00 0.40 -
Max. 0.12 1.25 0.80 0.03 0.03 1.50 0.65 0.30
Typical 0.06 1.0 0.3 0.01 0.01 1.3 0.55 0.05

PWHT 690°C/1-2h Min. Typical
5d 17 22
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C -- 150
-20°C -- 80
Hardness (HV) -- 200

Shielding gas: 80%Ar-20%CO2 at 20-25l/min. Proprietary gases may be used but argon should not exceed 80%. The wire is also
suitable for use with 100%CO2. (Note: for 100%CO2 shielding gas, voltage should be 1-2V higher.). Current: DC+ve ranges as below:
Diameter (mm) Amp-Volt Range Typical stickout
1.2 160 – 260A, 24-30V 190A, 25V 15 – 25mm
1.6 220 – 350A, 26-32V 260A, 28V 15 – 25mm
PACKAGING DATA
Spools vacuum-sealed in barrier foil with cardboard carton: 15kg.
The as-packed shelf life is virtually indefinite.
Resistance to moisture absorption is high, but to maintain the high integrity of the wire surface and prevent any possibility of
porosity, it is advised that part-used spools are returned to polythene wrappers.
Where possible, preferred storage conditions are 60% RH max, 18°C min.
FUME DATA
Fume composition (wt%)
Fe Mn Ni Cr3 Cr6 Cu F OES (mg/m3)
20 8 < 0.5 1 <1 <1 8 5
www.metrode.com DS A-12-CORMET 1 | Rev. 01-03/16 19

Data Sheet A-13
LOW ALLOY STEELS

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
2 ¼ CR-1MO CREEP RESISTING STEEL

2¼Cr-1Mo alloyed steel consumables for After PWHT, the microstructure consists of
elevated temperature service. tempered bainite.
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED WELDING GUIDELINES

Preheat and interpass temperature 250°C
ASTM BS EN & DIN minimum, up to 300°C for thick sections.
A387 Gr 21&22 11 CrMo 9-10 (1.7383)
Maintain throughout welding cycle and some
A182 F22 10 CrMo 9-10 (1.7380)
GS-18CrMo 9 10 (1.7379) time after completion of welding.
A217 WC9
A234 WP22 GS-12CrMo 9 10 (1.7380)
A199 T21,T22 6CrMo 9 10 (1.7385)
A200 T21,T22 12CrMo 9 10 (1.7375) PWHT
A335 P22 Apart from some special applications, PWHT
A234 WP22 BS will always be required. PWHT temperature is
1501 Gr 622 typically 690°C with time being dependent on
Also Cr-Mo-V steels 1503 Gr 622 section thickness.
BS 1503 Gr 660 1504 Gr 622
BS 1504 Gr 660 3100 Gr B3
BS 3100 Gr B7 3604 Gr 622 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
BS 3604 Gr 660 3059 Gr 622/640 & 622/490 There are Technical Profiles available which cover
some of the consumables on this data sheet.
APPLICATIONS Additional information is available on Chromet
2X and Cormet 2.
These consumables are designed for prolonged
elevated temperature service up to 600°C. Main
areas of application are associated with steam PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
generating power plant, eg piping, turbine castings,
steam chests, valve bodies and boiler superheaters. Process Product Specification
Some of the consumables will also find service Chromet 2 AWS E9018-B3
in refineries where they are used for corrosion MMA Chromet 2L AWS E8015-B3L
resistance to sulphur bearing crude oil at 250-450°C. Chromet 2X * AWS E9018-B3
Some of the consumables will also find applications
2CrMo BS EN CrMo2Si
in the chemical and petro-chemical industries where TIG/MIG
they are used for resistance to hydrogen attack in ER90S-B3 AWS ER90S-B3
the fabrication of hydrocrackers, coal liquefaction SA 2CrMo AWS EB3
SAW
plant and NH3 pressure vessels operating at up to LA436 BS EN ISO SA AB 1
450°C. In the as-welded condition the consumables Cormet 2 AWS E91T1-B3
also provide a useful source of 300HV hardness FCW
Cormet 2L AWS E91T1-B3L
weld deposit for build-up or hardsurfacing to resist
metal-to-metal wear, heavy impact and the repair * Chromet 2X is the temper embrittlement resistant
(TER) version of Chromet 2.
of P20 mould steel.

CHROMET 2
LOW ALLOY STEELS

2¼CR-1Mo MMA ELECTRODE.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode meeting AWS and BS EN national standards suitable for most power generation applications.
core wire and 65% with respect to whole electrode. Moisture resistant coating gives very low weld metal hydrogen levels.
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.5M E9018-B3 H4
QW432 F-No 4
BS EN ISO 3580-A E CrMo2 B 3 2 H 5
QW442 A-No 4
BS en ISO 3580-B E 6216-2C1M
APPROVALS TÜV

C Mn* Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu Nb
min. 0.05 0.50 -- -- -- 2.00 -- 0.90 -- --
max. 0.10 0.90 0.80 0.025 0.030 2.50 0.3 1.20 0.2 0.01
Typical 0.07 0.8 0.60 0.01 0.02 2.3 0.1 1.0 0.1 0.01

5d 18 20
Hardness (HV) AW -- 300-320
PWHT -- 220-250
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
kg/carton 12.9 12.9 16.8 18.0
STORAGE
longer than a working shift of 8h.
For electrodes that have been exposed:
Recommended ambient storage conditions for opened tins (using plastic lid): < 60% RH, > 18°C.
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Ni Cr Cu F OES (mg/m3)
15 5 <0.1 1 <0.2 18 5
www.metrode.com DS A-13-CHROMET 2 | Rev. 01-03/16 21

CHROMET 2L
LOW ALLOY STEELS
LOW CARBON 2¼CR-1Mo MMA ELECTRODE.

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – 2¼Cr-1Mo deposit with low carbon which produces lower hardness and residual stresses for resistance to sul-
phide stress corrosion cracking when operating in wet ‘sour’ environments. The lower hardness of Chromet 2L can also be benefi-
cial for welds that cannot be subsequently PWHT.

AWS A5.5M E8015-B3L H4 QW432 F-No 4
BS EN ISO 3580-A E CrMo2L B 3 2 H5 QW442 A-No 4
BS EN ISO 3580-B E 5516-2C1ML

C Mn* Si S P Cr Mo Cu
Min. 0.03 0.50 -- -- -- 2.00 0.90 --
Max. 0.05 0.90 0.80 0.015 0.020 2.50 1.20 0.15
Typical 0.04 0.8 0.40 0.012 0.015 2.25 1.05 < 0.10
5d 18 20
-10°C -- 90
Hardness (HV) AW -- 250-260
PWHT -- 210-220

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 350 350 450
kg/carton 12.0 15.0 17.4
Pieces/carton 621 396 228
STORAGE
FUME DATA
15 5 <0.1 1 <0.2 18 5
22 www.metrode.com DS A-13-CHROMET 2L | Rev. 01-03/16

CHROMET 2X
LOW ALLOY STEELS

2¼CR-1Mo MMA ELECTRODE FOR TEMPER EMBRITTLEMENT RESISTANCE.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – 2¼Cr-1Mo deposit which meets specific requirements for improved temper embrittlement resistance after prolonged
service at 400-600°C. Relevant trace elements (P, Sn, As, Sb) are controlled to ensure low Bruscato (X) and Watanabe (J) factors.

AWS A5.5M E9018-B3 H4 QW432 F-No 4
BS EN ISO 3580-A E CrMo2 B 3 2 H5 QW442 A-No 4
BS EN ISO 3580-B E 6216-2C1M

C Mn Si S P Cr Mo Cu Sn As Sb
Min. 0.05 0.50 0.15 -- -- 2.00 0.90 -- -- -- --
Max. 0.10 0.90 0.30 0.015 0.012 2.50 1.20 0.15 0.005 0.010 0.005
Typical 0.06 0.7 0.25 0.012 0.010 2.25 1.05 < 0.05 0.002 0.003 < 0.002
* Mn+Si < 1.10%
Bruscato factor (X) : 10P + 5Sb + 4Sn + As (ppm) = 15 max
100
Watanabe factor (J) : (Mn+Si)x (P + Sn) x 104 = 180 max
PWHT 690°C/1h (1) (SC= step cooled) Min. Typical 690°/5h typical 690°C/5h + SC typical
Elongation (%) 4d 17 22 27 25
5d 18 19 24 20
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C 47 (2) 140 170 170
-30°C -- 80 140 110
Hardness (HV) AW -- 300-320 -- --
PWHT -- 220-250 195 205
(1)
BS & AWS PWHT 690°C/1h, DIN 690°C/>30min, BS EN 720°C/1h. (2)
DIN & BS EN minimum average.
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
kg/carton 13.5 13.8 17.1 17.1
STORAGE
FUME DATA
15 5 <0.1 1 <0.2 18 5
www.metrode.com DS A-13-CHROMET 2X | Rev. 02-08/16 23

2CrMo
LOW ALLOY STEELS

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Copper coated wire for TIG and MIG welding of 2¼Cr-1Mo steels, conforming to European and ISO specifications.

BS EN ISO 21952-A CrMo2Si (W = TIG, G = MIG) QW442 A-No 4
APPROVALS TÜV

Min. 0.06 0.80 0.50 -- -- 2.30 -- 0.90 --
Max. 0.12 1.20 0.80 0.020 0.020 2.70 -- 1.10 0.40
Typical 0.1 1.0 0.6 0.010 0.015 2.4 <0.1 1 0.15

PWHT 690°C/1h (1) Min. Typical TIG Typical MIG
5d 15 21 20
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C -- > 150 > 95
Hardness (HV) HV -- 225 220
HB -- 220 215

MIG Ar-5%CO2 DC+ 1.2 280A, 26V
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG -- -- 5 kg tube To order 5 kg tube 5 kg tube
MIG 15kg reel 15kg reel -- -- -- --
FUME DATA
MIG fume composition (wt%) (TIG fume negligible)
Fe Mn Ni Cr3 Cu Mo OES (mg/m3)
55 5 <0.1 1.3 1.2 < 0.5 5
24 www.metrode.com DS A-13-2CrMo | Rev. 03-08/16

ER90S-B3
LOW ALLOY STEELS

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Copper coated wire for TIG and MIG welding 2¼Cr-1Mo creep resisting steels, conforming to the AWS/ASME specification.

BS EN ISO 21952-B 2C1M QW442 A-No 4

C Mn Si S P Cr Mo Cu Ni
Min. 0.07 0.40 0.40 -- -- 2.30 0.90 -- --
Max. 0.12 0.70 0.70 0.020 0.020 2.70 1.20 0.35 0.20
Typical 0.1 0.5 0.5 0.010 0.015 2.4 1 0.1 < 0.1

PWHT 690°C/1h Min. Typical TIG Typical MIG
5d 15 25 20
Impact ISO-V(J) -10°C -- > 150 > 95
Hardness (HV) HV -- 225 220
HB -- 220 215

Shielding Current Diameter (mm) Parameters
MIG Ar-5%CO2 DC+ 1.2 280A, 26V
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.4
TIG -- -- -- -- 5 kg tube 5 kg tube
MIG 15kg reel 15kg reel 15kg reel 15kg reel -- --
FUME DATA
55 5 <0.1 1.3 1.2 < 0.5 5
www.metrode.com DS A-13-ER90S-B3 | Rev. 01-03/16 25

SA 2CrMo
LOW ALLOY STEELS
SOLID WELDING WIRE FOR SAW.

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for Sub Arc Welding of 2¼Cr-1Mo steels.


SA2CrMo wire 0.10 0.60 0.12 0.010 0.012 2.40 1.00 0.15
Deposit with LA436 0.08 0.80 0.40 < 0.01 < 0.02 2.10 1.00 0.15
ALL-WELD MECHANICAL PROPERTIES (LA436 FLUX)

5d 18 23
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C 47 > 100

PACKAGING DATA
SAW 25kg spool 25kg spool 25kg spool
FUME DATA
55 5 <0.1 1.3 1.2 < 0.5 5
26 www.metrode.com DS A-13-SA2CrMo | Rev. 01-03/16

LA436
LOW ALLOY STEELS

SUB-ARC FLUX
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
LA436 is agglomerated aluminate basic flux (Boniszewski BI ~1.6) with silicon pick-up of ~0.3% and manganese pick-up of ~0.4%.

AWS A5.23M F9 P0-EB3 B3 QW432 F-No --
BS EN ISO 14174 SA AB 1 67 AC H5 QW442 A-No --

SA2CrMo wire 0.10 0.6 0.12 0.010 0.012 2.4 1.0 0.15
Deposit with LA436 0.08 0.8 0.4 <0.01 <0.02 2.1 1.0 0.15

PWHT 690-720°C/1-2h Typical
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C > 100

PACKAGING DATA
Metrode LA436 flux is supplied in sealed moisture resistant 25kg metal drums. Preferred storage conditions for opened drums:
< 60%RH, > 18°C. If the flux has become damp or has been stored for a long period, it should be redried in the range 300-350°C/1-2h.
www.metrode.com DS A-13-LA436 | Rev. 02-08/16 27

CORMET 2 / 2L
LOW ALLOY STEELS
ALL-POSITIONAL FLUX CORED WIRES

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Cormet 2 is an all-positional flux cored wire suitable for welding fixed pipework. Made using a high purity steel sheath with a metal recovery
of about 90% with respect to the wire.
Cormet 2L, which is the low carbon version, is available to order; this wire finds applications for as-welded repairs in power generation plant
and the lower hardness may provide some benefits in some petrochemical applications.

Cormet 2 Cormet 2L QW432 F-No 6
AWS A5.29M E91T1-B3C/M-H4 E91T1-B3LC/M-H4 QW442 A-No 4
AWS A5.36M E91T1-C1PZ-B3-H4 or E91T1-C1PZ-B3L-H4 or
E91T1-M21PZ-B3-H4* E91T1-M21PZ-B3L-H4*
BS EN ISO 17634-B T62T1-1C/M-2C1M T62T1-1C/M-2C1ML
* dependent on shielding gas

C* Mn Si S P Cr Mo Cu
Min. 0.05 -- -- -- -- 2.00 0.90 --
Max. 0.12 1.25 0.80 0.030 0.030 2.50 1.20 0.30
Typical 0.06 1 0.3 0.01 0.01 2.3 1.0 0.05
* Cormet 2L C < 0.05%, typical 0.04%

PWHT 690°C/1h-2h Min. Cormet 2 typical Cormet 2Ltypical (as-welded)
Tensile strength (MPa) 620 680 --
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 540 570 --
Elongation (%) 4d 17 21 --
5d 15 19 --
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C -- 150 40
-20°C -- 60 --
OPERATING PARAMETERS
Shielding gas: 80%Ar-20%CO2 at 20-25l/min. Proprietary gases may be used but argon should not exceed 80%. The wire is also suitable for
use with 100%CO2. (Note: for 100%CO2 shielding gas, voltage should be 1-2V higher.)
Current: DC+ve ranges as below:
Diameter (mm) amp-volt range typical stickout
1.0 120 - 220A, 22 - 30V 150A, 25V 15 - 25mm
1.2 160 - 260A, 24 - 30V 190A, 25V 15 - 25mm
1.6 220 - 350A, 26 - 32V 260A, 28V 15 - 25mm
PACKAGING DATA
15kg spools vacuum-sealed in barrier foil with cardboard carton.
FUME DATA
Fume composition (wt %)
Fe Mn Cr3 Cr6 Ni Cu F OES (mg/m3)
20 8 1 <1 < 0.5 <1 8 5
28 www.metrode.com DS A-13-CORMET 2 / 2L | Rev. 01-03/16

Data Sheet A-14
LOW ALLOY STEELS

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
CrMoV CREEP RESISTING STEEL

1¼Cr-½Mo alloyed steel consumables for elevated After PWHT, the microstructure consists of
temperature service tempered bainite.
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED PRODUCTS AVAILABLE

ASTM Process Product Specification
A389 grade C24 (cast)
Chromet 1V BS EN ECrMoV1B
A356 grade (cast) MMA
13CMV --
DIN FCW Cormet 1V --
21 CrMoV 5 11 (1.8070)
15 CrMoV 5 10 (1.7745)
GS-17CrMo 5 11 (1.7706) (cast)
EN
G17CrMoV5-10 (1.7706)
GE
B50A224
APPLICATIONS
CrMoV base materials provide good creep rupture
propreties up to about 580°C, with a reasonable degree
of corrosopn resistance in superheated steam.
Typical applications for the cast materials include
valve casings ans steam turbines, general use for
boilers, pressure vessels in the power generation and
petrochemical industries
www.metrode.com DS A-14 | Rev. 01 -09/15 29

CHROMET 1V
LOW ALLOY STEELS
BASIC COATED MMA ELECTRODE FOR CrMoV CREEP RESISTING STEELS

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a basic, metal powder type, coating on low carbon high purity mild steel core wire. Moisture resistant
coating provides very low weld metal hydrogen levels.
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.5M E9018-G H4
QW432 F-No --
BS EN ISO 3580-A E CrMoV1 B 3 2
QW442 A-No --

C Mn Si S P Cr Mo V
Min. 0.05 0.70 -- -- -- 1.00 0.90 0.10
Max. 0.15 1.50 0.50 0.025 0.025 1.30 1.30 0.35
Typical 0.08 0.85 0.3 0.012 0.012 1.10 1.10 0.20

PWHT 700°C/1h Room Temperature High Temperature
min typical +350°C +400°C +450°C
Elongation (%) 4d -- 20 -- -- --
5d 15 16 -- -- --
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C 24 60 -- -- --
Hardness (HV) HV -- 275 -- -- --

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
kg/carton 13.8 13.5 16.8 17.4
STORAGE
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Cr Ni Cu Pb F OES (mg/m3)
15 5 < 0.5 < 0.1 < 0.2 < 0.1 18 5
30 www.metrode.com DS A-14-CHROMET 1V | Rev. 01-03/16

13 CMV
LOW ALLOY STEELS

BASIC COATED MMA ELECTRODE FOR CrMoV CREEP RESISTING STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a basic, metal powder type, coating on low carbon high purity mild steel core wire. Moisture resistant
coating provides very low weld metal hydrogen levels.
The 13CMV electrode is manufactured to order and is of a similar composition to the Chromet 1V although the carbon (at ~0.13%)
and vanadium (at ~0.25%) are typically higher. The 13CMV can also be manufactured by prior agreement to the GE specification
B50A273.

BS EN ISO 3580-A (E CrMoV1 B 3 2) QW432 F-No --
GE B50A273 By prior agreement only QW442 A-No --

C Mn Si S P Cr Mo V* Ni
Min. 0.10 0.3 -- -- -- 1.00 0.90 0.20 --
Max. 0.15 1.0 0.50 0.020 0.030 1.50 1.30 0.30 0.4
Typical 0.13 0.6 0.3 0.012 0.012 1.2 1.10 0.25 0.05
* In the GE specification V = 0.40-0.55%

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
kg/carton 13.5 15.0 18.0 16.5
STORAGE
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Cr Ni Cu Pb F OES (mg/m3)
15 5 < 0.5 < 0.1 < 0.2 < 0.1 18 5
www.metrode.com DS A-14-13 CMV | Rev. 01-03/16 31

CORMET 1V
LOW ALLOY STEELS
ALL POSITIONAL RUTILE FLUX CORED WIRE FOR CrMoV CREEP RESISTING STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Cormet 1V (available to order) is an all-positional flux cored wire suitable for welding fixed pipework. Made using high purity
steel sheath with a metal recovery of about 90% with respect to the wire.

AWS A5.36M E91T1-C1PZ-G-H4 or E91T1-M21PZ-G-H4 (dependent on shielding gas) QW432 F-No --
QW442 A-No --

C Mn Si S P Cr Mo Cu V Ni
Min. 0.10 0.50 0.15 -- -- 1.00 0.90 -- 0.20 --
Max. 0.15 1.00 0.50 0.020 0.020 1.50 1.30 0.3 0.30 0.3
Typical 0.13 0.8 0.3 0.01 0.01 1.3 1.1 0.1 0.25 0.1

PWHT 720°C/3h Typical
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C 50
Hardness (HV) HV 230

Shielding gas: 80% Ar-20%CO2 at 20-25min. Proprietary gases may be used but argon should not exceed 80%.
The wire is also suitable for use with 100%CO2.
Current: DC+ve ranges as below (when using 100%CO2 increase voltage by about 2V):
1.2 160-260A, 24-30V 190A, 25V 15-25mm
PACKAGING DATA
Spools vacuum-sealed in barrier foil with cardboard carton: 15kg
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Cr3 Cr6 Ni F Cu OES (mg/m3)
20 8 1 <1 < 0.5 8 <1 5
32 www.metrode.com DS A-14-CORMET 1V | Rev. 01-03/16

Data Sheet A-15
LOW ALLOY STEELS

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
5CrMo FOR ELEVATED TEMPERATURE

5%Cr-½%Mo steel for elevated temperature In the PWHT condition the microstructure consists
service up to 600°C. of tempered bainite.

PLATES Owing to the as-deposited hardness (up to 400HV)
ASTM and the relatively poor fracture resistance of the
A387 grade 5 5CrMo bainitic microstructure, a preheat and
PIPE / TUBE minimum interpass temperature of 200°C should
be applied to ensure freedom from hydrogen
ASTM
induced cold cracking. Properly controlled and
A335 grades P5, P5b
A234 grade WP5 (fittings) handled electrodes will provide weld metal with
A199 grade T5 hydrogen <5ml/100g. For TIG root runs or all-TIG
A213 grades T5, T5b welds, a lower preheat of 150°C may be acceptable,
BS though it should be recognised that faster cooling
3604 grades HFS 625, CFS 625 rates may lead to partially martensitic and harder
DIN deposits.
12CrMo 19 5 (1.7362)
X7CrMo 6 1 (1.7373) Full transformation of 5CrMo during welding
X11CrMo 6 1 (1.7374) will be completed within a 200-350°C working
FORGINGS range, so direct transfer (at >150°C) to PWHT is
ASTM permissible, followed by NDE. If PWHT will be
A182 grade F5, F5a applied after complete cool out and NDE, the
A336 grade F5 preheat temperature should be maintained for
BS EN some time after welding, according to thickness,
1503 grade 625 to promote hydrogen dispersal. The latter
1501 grade 625 (section & bar) precaution is less significant for the TIG and solid
CAST wire MAG processes.
ASTM
A217 grade C5
BS EN PWHT
1504 grade 625 PWHT to temper the weldment would normally be
3100 grade B5 in the range 705-760°C (eg. BS2633 & PD5500 710-
DIN 750°C, ASME B31.3 705-760°C). Minimum holding
GS-12CrMo 19 5 (1.7353, 1.7363) time recommended is two hours. For castings the
minimum suggested PWHT temperature is lower,
APPLICATIONS with temperatures as low as 670°C being specified.
For elevated temperature service up to 600°C, with
corrosion resistance in superheated steam, hot PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
hydrogen gas and high sulphur crude oils. Process Product Specification
Used primarily for boiler superheaters, heat exchangers,
MMA Chromet 5 AWS E8015-B6
piping and pressure vessels in oil refineries.
This weld metal has also been used successfully for TIG/MIG 5CrMo AWS ER80S-B6
subsequent nitriding, for example in the repair of 3Cr-
1Mo-V and 2Cr-Mo-1A1 (BS En40C, En41) steels used for
moulds for injection-moulding of plastics.
www.metrode.com DS A-15 | Rev. 01 -09/15 33

CHROMET 5
LOW ALLOY STEELS
5%CR-0.5%MO MMA ELECTRODE

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Basic metal powder type made on high purity low carbon core wire. Moisture resistant coating gives very low weld metal
hydrogen levels.
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.5M E8015-B6 H4
QW432 F-No 4
QW442 A-No 5

C* Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu
min. 0.05 0.50 -- -- -- 4.0 -- 0.45 --
max. 0.10 1.00 0.80 0.025 0.030 6.0 0.40 0.65 0.3
Typical 0.06 0.8 0.4 0.01 0.015 5 0.2 0.55 0.05
* Carbon 0.05-0.10% for E8015-B6 (<0.05% for E8015-B6L made to order).
745°C/1h ** 740°C/2h 745°C/3h
Typical properties after PWHT *
Min. Typical Typical Typical
Tensile strength (MPa) 550*** 610 610 540
Elongation (%) 4d 19 25 23 28
5d 18 22 20 25
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C -- 150 130 140
-10°C -- 80 50 50
Hardness cap/mid -- 210/205 210/200 205/160
* AWS A5.4 requires a PWHT of 840-870°C/2h, (this PWHT is never applied in practice so is not shown).
** This is the AWS A5.5 PWHT (732-760°C/1h). BS is 725-745°C/2h, BS EN & DIN is 730-760°C/1h.
*** BS EN and DIN minimum is 590MPa. There are no base material grades requiring such a high tensile strength ASTM is 414-552MPa
dependent on grade.
OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC +VE OR AC (OCV: 70V MIN)

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 17.1 16.8
STORAGE
3 hermetically sealed ring-pull metal tins per carton, with unlimited shelf life. Direct use from tin will give hydrogen < 5ml/100g weld
metal during 8h working shift.
Redry 250 – 300°C/1-2h to ensure H2 < 10ml/100g, 300-350ºC/1-2h to ensure H2 < 5ml/100g. Maximum 420°C, 3 cycles, 10h total.
FUME DATA
15 5 <0.1 1.5 <0.2 <0.1 18 5
34 www.metrode.com DS A-15-CHROMET 5 | Rev. 01-03/16

5CrMo
LOW ALLOY STEELS

SOLID WIRE FOR TIG, MIG AND SAW FOR 5%CR-0.5%MO CREEP RESISTING STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid copper coated wire for TIG and MIG, alloyed with 5%Cr-0.5%Mo.

AWS A5.23M EB6 QW442 A-No 5
BS EN ISO 21952-A CrMo5Si*

C Mn Si S P Cr Mo Ni Cu V
Min. 0.03 0.40 0.30 -- -- 5.5 0.50 -- -- --
Max. 0.10 0.70 0.50 0.020 0.020 6.0 0.65 0.30 0.3 0.03
Typical 0.07 0.5 0.4 0.01 0.01 5.7 0.55 0.1 0.2 0.02
* Si is 0.30% min. in. BS EN ISO 21952-A specification

Typical properties after PWHT Min. TIG 745ºC/1h TIG 740ºC/2h SAW 740ºC/1h
Elongation (%) 4d 17 28 25 27
5d 17 25 20 24
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C -- 240 -- 70
Hardness cap/mid -- 195/215 -- --
* Minimum values after PWHT 745ºC (730-760ºC) for 1h according to AWS A5.28 for ER80S-B6 and BS EN 12070.

TIG Argon* DC- 2.4 140A, 14V
MIG Ar + 1-3%O2 or 5-20% CO2 DC+ 1.2 260A, 26V
SAW LA436 DC+ 2.4 400A, 30V, 450mm/min
* Also required as a purge for root runs.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.2 1.6 2.4 3.2
TIG -- 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube
MIG 15 kg spool -- -- --
SAW -- -- 25kg spool --
FUME DATA
50 5 <0.1 <0.1 <0.5 1.2 5
www.metrode.com DS A-15 5CrMo | Rev. 01-03/16 35

Data Sheet A-16
LOW ALLOY STEELS

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
9CrMo FOR ELEVATED TEMPERATURE

9%Cr-1%Mo martensitic alloy for elevated In the PWHT condition the microstructure consists
temperature service. of tempered bainite.
WELDING GUIDELINES
Owing to the as-deposited hardness (up to 450HV)
PLATES
and the relatively poor fracture resistance of the
ASTM
martensitic 9CrMo microstructure, a preheat and
A387 grade 9
minimum interpass temperature of 200°C shall
PIPE / TUBE
be applied to ensure freedom from hydrogen
ASTM induced cracking. Properly controlled and handled
A335 grade 9
electrodes will provide weld metal with hydrogen
A234 grade WP9 (fittings)
A199 grade T9 <5ml/100g. For TIG root runs or all-TIG welds, a
A213 grades T9 lower preheat of 150°C may be acceptable.
BS
3604 grades CFS & HFS 629-470, During welding, full transformation may not be
CFS & HFS 629-590 complete within a working range of 200-350°C, so
DIN partial cooling to around 150°C is advised before
X12CrMo 9 1 (1.7386) direct transfer to PWHT, followed by NDE. If PWHT
X7CrMo 9 1 (1.7388) will be applied after complete cool out and NDE,
the preheat temperature should be maintained
FORGINGS
for some time, according to thickness, to promote
ASTM
hydrogen dispersal. The latter precaution is
A182 grade F9
A336 grade F9 less significant for the TIG and solid wire MAG
processes.
CAST
ASTM PWHT
A217 grade C12
PWHT to temper the weldment would normally
BS EN be in the range 705-780°C (eg. BS2633 710-750°C,
1504 grade 629
PD5500 740-780°C, ASME B31.3 705-760°C).
3100 grade B6
Minimum holding time recommended is two
DIN
hours. For castings the minimum suggested
GS-12CrMo 10 1 (1.7389)
PWHT temperature is lower, with temperatures as
low as 670°C being specified.
APPLICATIONS
For elevated temperature service up to 600°C, PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
with reasonable degree of corrosion resistance in
superheated steam, hot hydrogen gas and high sulphur
crude oils, where higher performance than 5%Cr- MMA Chromet 9 AWS E8015-B8
0.5%Mo steels is required. TIG/MIG /SAW 9CrMo AWS ER80S-B8
SAW SA 9CrMo AWS EB8
Used primarily for boiler superheater tubing, heat LA436 BS EN ISO SA AB 1
exchangers, piping and pressure vessels in oil refineries
and power plants.

CHROMET 9
LOW ALLOY STEELS

9%Cr-1%Mo MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Basic metal powder type made on high purity low carbon core wire. Moisture resistant coating giving very low weld metal
hydrogen levels.
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.5M E8015-B8 H4
QW432 F-No 4
AWS A5.4M E505-15 This classification has now been withdrawn from A5.4
QW442 A-No 5
BS EN ISO 3580-B E 6216-9C1M

min. 0.05 0.50 -- -- -- 8.0 -- 0.90 --
max. 0.10 1.00 0.60 0.025 0.025 10.0 0.40 1.20 0.3
Typical 0.06 0.75 0.35 0.012 0.015 9.0 0.2 1.0 <0.05
* Carbon 0.05-0.10% for E8015-B8 (<0.05% for E8015-B8L, made to order).
Typical PWHT Min. 740°C/2h Typical 746°C/3h Typical
5d 18 20 25
Reduction of area % -- 70 70
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C 34 90 130
0°C -- 50 --
-10°C -- 25 90
AWS PWHT is 732-760°C /1 hour. BS EN PWHT is 740-780°C/2 hours. See front page under PWHT for normal fabrication practice.
* ASTM base material minimum varies in the range 414-586MPa depending on grade.

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
kg/carton 11.7 15.0 17.4 16.5
STORAGE
FUME DATA
Fume composition, wt % typical:
15 5 <0.1 2.5 <0.2 <0.1 18 2

9CrMo
LOW ALLOY STEELS
COPPER COATED TIG AND MIG WIRES FOR 9%Cr-1%Mo

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid copper coated wire for TIG and MIG.

BS EN ISO 21952-A CrMo9 QW442 A-No 5

Min. 0.06 0.40 0.30 -- -- 8.5 -- 0.80 --
Max. 0.10 0.60 0.50 0.020 0.020 10.0 0.50 1.20 0.35
Typical 0.07 0.50 0.40 0.01 0.015 9.0 0.10 0.90 0.10

Typical values after 745°C/1h: Min. TIG
5d 18 23
Hardness cap/mid (HV) -- 225/230

MIG Ar + 1-3%O2 or 5-20% CO2 DC+ 1.2 260A, 26V
PACKAGING DATA
TIG -- 5 kg tube To order
MIG To order -- --
FUME DATA
50 4 6 <0.1 <0.5 1.2 5
38 www.metrode.com DS A-16 9CrMo | Rev. 01-03/16

SA 9CrMo
LOW ALLOY STEELS

SOLID WELDING WIRE FOR SAW
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for Sub Arc Welding of 9Cr-1Mo steels


Min. 0.06 0.40 0.30 -- -- 8.5 -- 0.80 --
Max. 0.10 0.60 0.50 0.020 0.020 10.0 0.5 1.20 0.35
Typical 0.07 0.5 0.4 0.01 0.015 9 0.1 0.9 0.1

Typical values after 745°C/1h: Min.
5d 18
Hardness cap/mid (HV) --
AWS PWHT is 730-760°C /1 hour. EN ISO PWHT is 740-780°C/2 hours. See front page under PWHT for normal fabrication
practice.Solid wire for Sub Arc Welding of 9Cr-1Mo steels

PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.4
SAW 25kg spool
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Cr 3 Ni Mo Cu OES (mg/m3)
50 4 6 <0.1 <0.5 1.2 5
www.metrode.com DS A-16-SA 9CrMo | Rev. 01-03/16 39

Data Sheet A-17
LOW ALLOY STEELS

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
P91 – MODIFIED 9CrMo

ALLOY TYPE PWHT
Modified 9CrMo for high temperature creep Minimum preheat temperature 150°C with
resistance. maximum interpass temperature of 300°C; in
practice a preheat-interpass range of 200–300°C
is normal.
To ensure full martensite transformation, welds
ASTM shall be cooled to ~100°C prior to PWHT.
A 213 T91 (seamless tubes) ASME base material codes and AWS consumable
A 335 P91 (seamless pipes) classifications allow PWHT down to 730°C, whilst
A 387 Gr 91 (plates) BS EN consumable classifications specify 750°C.
A 182 / A336 F91 (forgings)
Optimum properties are obtained with a tempering
A 217 C12A (castings)
A 234 WP91 parameter (P) of around 21 or above, where
A 369 FP91 P = °C+273 (log t + 20) x 10–3. Maximum PWHT
DIN / BS EN temperature varies, AWS consumable specifications
1.4903 (X10CrMoVNb 9 1) are 760°C, BS EN 770°C; BS 1503 allows up to 790°C
BS for base material forgings.
1503 Gr91 When compared with directly matching weld
3059-2 Gr91 metal, the addition of some nickel and reduction
AFNOR of niobium provides a useful improvement in
NF A-49213/A-49219 Gr TU Z 10 CDVNb 09-01 toughness after conveniently short PWHT at
750–760°C. PWHT above 765°C is not generally
recommended for Ni-containing consumables,
APPLICATIONS because some re-hardening could occur due to
These consumables are designed to weld equivalent the proximity of Ac1. Some authorities specify weld
‘type 91’ 9CrMo steels modified with small additions metal Ni + Mn < 1.5% to keep Ac1 high enough to
of niobium, vanadium and nitrogen to give improved allow higher PWHT temperature if required.
long term creep properties.
These consumables are specifically intended for high ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
integrity structural service at elevated temperature More detailed information on the products and
so the minor alloy additions responsible for its creep properties of P91 steels are available in the
strength are kept above the minimum considered Technical Profile – "Welding Consumables for
necessary to ensure satisfactory performance. In P91 Steels for the Power Generation Industry" –
this case, weldments will be weakest in the softened available from Metrode Technical Department
(intercritical) HAZ region of parent material, as PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
indicated by so-called ‘type IV’ failure in transverse
weld creep tests. Process Product Specification
Modified 9CrMo steels are now widely used for Chromet 9MV-N AWS E9015-B91
components such as headers, main steam piping, Chromet 9MVN+ AWS E9015-B91
valves and turbine casings, in fossil fuelled power MMA
Chromet 9-B9 AWS E9015-B91
generating plants. They may also find future use in Chromet 91VNB AWS E9015-B91
oil refineries and coal liquefaction and gasification
9CrMoV-N AWS ER90S-B9
plants. TIG/MIG
9CrMoV AWS ER90S-B9
MICROSTRUCTURE MIG (MCW) Cormet M91 AWS E90C-B9
In the PWHT condition the microstructure consists 9CrMoV-N (wire) AWS EB91
of tempered martensite with alloy carbides. SAW
LA490 (flux) ISO SA FB 155 AC H5
FCW Supercore F91 AWS E91T1-B9

CHROMET 9MV-N
LOW ALLOY STEELS

MMA ELECTRODE TO AWS/BS EN WITH HIGH NI TO MA XIMISE TOUGHNESS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – Basic metal powder type made on high purity steel core wire with Ni addition and lower Nb for improved
toughness, conforming to BS EN ISO 3580-A.
Recovery is approx 120% with respect to core wire, 65% with respect to whole electrode.
Moisture resistant coatings giving very low weld metal hydrogen levels.

AWS A5.5M E9015-B91 H4 QW422 P-No 15E group 1
BS EN ISO 3580-A E CrMo91 B 3 2 H5 QW432 F-No 4
APPROVALS TÜV QW442 A-No 5

C Mn* Si S P Cr Ni** Mo Nb V N Cu
min. 0.08 0.50 -- -- -- 8.0 0.4 0.85 0.04 0.15 0.03 --
max. 0.12 1.20 0.30 0.01 0.01 10.0 0.8 1.2 0.07 0.25 0.07 0.25
Typical 0.1 0.6 0.25 0.008 0.01 9.0 0.7 1.0 0.05 0.2 0.05 0.05
* Mn+Ni < 1.5
** “ ** Low Ni and low Ni+Mn variant is available, Chromet 9-B9.
PWHT 760°C / 2h Min. (1) Typical 550°C 600°C 650°C
Tensile strength (MPa) 620 770 >450 >375 >285
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 530 640 >360 >255 >175
Elongation (%) 4d 17 22 -- -- --
5d 17 19 >15 >17 >21
Reduction of area % -- 60 >68 >75 >80
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C 47 65 -- -- --
Lateral expansion +20°C -- 1.00 -- -- --
Hardness (HV) after PWHT -- 250 -- -- --
as-welded -- 450 -- -- --
(1)
Minimum strength for parent material is lower than AWS requirement shown.
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
kg/carton 14.1 13.5 17.4 16.5
STORAGE
3 hermetically sealed ring-pull metal tins per carton, with unlimited shelf life. Direct use from tin will give hydrogen <5ml/100g weld
Storage of redried electrodes at 100 – 200°C in holding oven, or 50 – 150°C in heated quivers: no limit, but maximum 6 weeks
recommended.
FUME DATA
15 5 <0.1 <3 <0.1 < 0.1 18 1.7
www.metrode.com DS A-17-CHROMET 9MV-N | Rev. 02-03/16 41

CHROMET 9MVN+
LOW ALLOY STEELS
MMA ELECTRODE TO AWS/BS EN WITH HIGH NI TO MA XIMISE TOUGHNESS

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – Basic type made on matching core wire with Ni addition and lower Nb for improved toughness, conforming to BS
EN ISO 3580-A and AWS specifications.

BS EN ISO 3580-A E CrMo91 B 3 2 H5 QW432 F-No 4

C Mn* Si S P Cr Ni** Mo Nb V N Cu
Min. 0.08 0.50 -- -- -- 8.0 0.4 0.85 0.04 0.15 0.03 --
Max. 0.12 1.20 0.30 0.01 0.01 10.0 0.8 1.2 0.07 0.25 0.07 0.25
Typical 0.1 0.67 0.25 0.008 0.01 9 0.7 1 0.05 0.2 0.05 0.05
* Mn+Ni < 1.5
** Low Ni variant is available, Chromet 9-B9.
PWHT 760°C / 2h Min. (1) Typical
5d 17 19
Hardness (HV) after PWHT -- 250
(1)

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 250 350 350 450
kg/carton 10.2 13.5 14.1 16.5
STORAGE
recommended.
FUME DATA
15 5 <0.1 <3 <0.1 < 0.1 18 1.7
42 www.metrode.com DS A-17-CHROMET 9MVN+ | Rev. 02-03/16

CHROMET 9-B9
LOW ALLOY STEELS

MMA ELECTRODE MEETING AWS/ASME
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – Basic metal powder type made on high purity steel core wire manufactured to the requirements of AWS A5.5
E9015-B9 and BS EN ISO 3580-B.

BS EN ISO 3580-B E 6216-9C1MV QW432 F-No 4
QW442 A-No 5

C Mn* Si S P Cr Ni* Mo Nb V N Cu Al
Min. 0.08 0.40 -- -- -- 8.0 0.2 0.85 0.03 0.15 0.03 -- --
Max. 0.12 0.75 0.30 0.01 0.01 10.0 0.4 1.2 0.07 0.25 0.07 0.25 0.04
Typical 0.1 0.55 0.25 0.008 0.008 9 0.3 1 0.04 0.2 0.05 0.05 0.01
* Ni + Mn ≤ 1. 0%. Nickel is below 0.4% (as parent material) although AWS allows up to 1.0%Ni. See Chromet 9MV-N or Chromet
9MVN+ for variant with 0.4–1.0%Ni conforming to BS EN ISO specification.

PWHT 760°C / 2h Min. (1) Typical 550°C 600°C 650°C
Tensile strength (MPa) 620 710 >450 >375 >285
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 530 590 >360 >255 >175
Elongation (%) 4d 17 22 -- -- --
5d 17 19 >15 >17 >21
Reduction of area % -- 63 >68 >75 >80
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C -- 75 -- -- --
Lateral expansion +20°C --
1.10 -- -- --
Hardness (HV) after PWHT -- 240 -- -- --
as-welded -- 450 -- -- --
(1)
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0*
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
kg/carton 13.5 13.5 13.5 16.5
STORAGE
recommended.
FUME DATA
15 5 <0.1 <3 <0.1 < 0.1 18 1.7
www.metrode.com DS A-17-CHROMET 9-B9 | Rev. 01-03/16 43

CHROMET 91VNB
LOW ALLOY STEELS
MMA ELECTRODE FOR ROOT WELDING

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode - Basic coated for root welding applications made on high purity steel core wire.
SPECIFICATIONS
QW422 P-No 15E group 1
AWS A5.5M E9015-B91 H4
QW432 F-No 4
QW442 A-No 5

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Nb V N Cu Al
Min. 0.08 0.40 -- -- -- 8.00 0.4 0.85 0.03 0.15 0.03 -- --
Max. 0.12 1.2 0.30 0.01 0.01 9.5 0.8 1.2 0.07 0.25 0.07 0.25 0.04
Typical 0.1 0.8 0.25 0.008 0.008 8.5 0.5 1.0 0.04 0.2 0.05 0.05 0.01

PWHT 760°C / 2h Min. (1) Typical
5d 17 18
(1)

Diameter (mm) 2.5
min A. 60
max A. 100
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5
Length (mm) 350
kg/carton 13.5
Pieces/carton 678
STORAGE
recommended.
FUME DATA
15 5 <0.1 <3 <0.1 < 0.1 18 1.7
44 www.metrode.com DS A-17-CHROMET 91VNB | Rev. 01-03/16

9CrMoV-N
LOW ALLOY STEELS

SOLID WIRE FOR TIG, MIG AND SAW
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire, non-copper coated, for TIG, MIG and SAW

TIG MIG SAW QW422 P-No 15E group 1
AWS A5.23M -- -- EB91 QW432 F-No 4
AWS A5.28M ER90S-B9 ER90S-B9 -- QW442 A-No 5
BS EN ISO 21952-A W CrMo91 G CrMo91 --
BS EN ISO 24598-A -- -- S CrMo91
APPROVALS TÜV

Min. 0.08 0.40 0.15 -- -- 8.5 0.40 0.85 0.03 0.15 0.03 -- --
Max. 0.13 0.80 0.50 0.010 0.010 9.5 0.80 1.10 0.08 0.25 0.07 0.10 0.04
Typical 0.10 0.5 0.25 0.004 0.008 9.0 0.6 1.0 0.05 0.2 0.05 0.03 <0.01

TIG SAW typical
PWHT 760°C / 2h Min.
typical LA490 flux
5d 16 19 23
Reduction of area (%) -- 70 70
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C -- * 220 60
Hardness (HV) (mid) -- 265 230
* Minimum impact required by BS EN ISO is 47 J.
PARAMETERS
MIG Ar + 1-3%O2 or 5-20% CO2 DC+ 1.2 260A, 26V
SAW LA490 DC+ 2.4 420A, 28V, 390mm/min
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.8/0.9/1.0/1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG 0.7 / 5 / 15 kg spools to order. 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube
MIG 15kg spool -- -- -- --
SAW to order to order to order 25kg spool 25kg spool
FUME DATA
Fume composition (wt %); TIG and SAW fume are negligible:
50 4 <0.4 6 < 0.5 0.5 5
www.metrode.com DS A-17-9CrMoV-N | Rev. 03-06/16 45

9CrMoV
LOW ALLOY STEELS
SOLID WIRE FOR TIG,MIG AND SAW

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire with Ni+Mn<1.0%, non-copper coated, for TIG, MIG and SAW

AWS A5.23M - - EB 91 QW432 F-No 6
QW442 A-No 5
AWS A5.28M ER90S-B9 ER90S-B9 -
BS EN ISO 21952-B W 9C1MV G 9C1MV -
BS EN ISO 24598-B W 9C1MV G 9C1MV S 9C1MV

Min. 0.08 0.40 0.15 -- -- 8.5 0.10 0.85 0.03 0.15 0.03 -- --
Max. 0.13 0.80 0.50 0.010 0.010 9.5 0.40 1.10 0.08 0.25 0.07 0.10 0.04
Typical 0.10 0.5 0.25 0.004 0.008 8.7 0.3 1.0 0.05 0.2 0.05 0.03 <0.01
*Ni + Mn ≤ 1. 0%. Nickel is below 0.4% (as parent material) although AWS allows up to 1.0%Ni.
See 9CrMo-N for variant with 0.4–0.8%Ni conforming to BS EN ISO suffix “A” specification.

TIG SAW
PWHT 760°C / 2h Min.
typical typical
5d 17 19 23
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C -- * 220 65
Hardness (HV) (mid) -- 255 220
* Minimum impact required by BS EN ISO is 47 J.
PARAMETERS
MIG Ar + 1-3%O2 or 5-20% CO2 DC+ 1.2 280A, 26V
SAW LA490 DC+ 2.4 420A, 28V, 390mm/min
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.8/0.9/1.0/1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG 0.7 / 5 / 15 kg spools to order. 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube
MIG 15kg spool -- -- -- --
SAW -- -- -- 25kg spool 25kg spool
FUME DATA
Fume composition (wt %); TIG and SAW fume are negligible:
50 4 <0.4 6 < 0.5 0.5 5
46 www.metrode.com DS A-17-9CrMoV | Rev. 02-08/16

LA490
LOW ALLOY STEELS

SUB-ARC FLUX FOR USE WITH 9CRMOV-N AND 9CRMOV SOLID WIRES
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Agglomerated fluoride-basic flux for P91 and P92 modified 9CrMo creep resistant steels
SPECIFICATIONS COMPOSITION (FLUX WT%)

BS EN ISO 14174 (flux) SA FB 155 AC H5 SiO2 + Al2O3 30%
AWS A5.23M CaO + Mg O 36%
F62P0-EB91-B91
(flux wire combination) CaF2 27%
Basicity index (Boniszewski) ~3.0
ANALYSIS DEPOSIT (TYPICAL)

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Nb V N
9CrMoV-N Wire 0.10 0.5 0.25 0.004 0.008 9.0 0.6 1.0 0.05 0.20 0.05
Deposit with LA490 0.09 0.7 0.20 0.006 0.008 8.7 0.6 1.0 0.04 0.20 0.05

PWHT 760°C / 2h Min. typical
5d 17 23
Reduction or area -- 70
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C --* 60
Hardness (HV) (mid) -- 230
* Minimum impact required by BS EN ISO 24598-A : 38 J after 3h.
AC or DC+: typical 420A, 28V, 390mm/min
PACKAGING DATA
25kg moisture resistant aluminium Sahara™ bags.
If flux becomes damp, rebake at 300–350°C/ 1–2hours to restore to as-packed condition. For critical work, it is recommended to
redry to ensure <5ml H2/100g.

CORMET M91
LOW ALLOY STEELS
METAL CORED WIRE FOR MIG WELDING

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Metal cored wire for MIG welding. High purity steel sheath with 96% metal recovery with respect to wire.

AWS A5.28M E90C-B9 QW422 P-No 15E group 1
AWS A5.36M E90T15-M12PZ-B91 QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO 17634-B T69T15-0M-9C1MV QW442 A-No 5
PA/1G PB/2F

C Mn* Si S P Cr Ni* Mo Nb V N Cu Al
Min. 0.08 0.60 -- -- -- 8.0 -- 0.85 0.03 0.18 0.03 -- --
Max. 0.13 1.20 0.50 0.015 0.020 10.0 0.80 1.20 0.07 0.25 0.07 0.15 0.04
Typical 0.1 1 0.3 0.01 0.01 9 0.3 1 0.05 0.2 0.05 0.05 0.03
* Ni + Mn ≤1.50
PARAMETERS
Operability is influenced by the type of shielding gas; higher CO2 levels, up to 20%, give better arc characteristics but lower CO2 and
O2 levels produce better impact properties. The best compromise is considered to be obtained from Ar-2½%CO2 although if impact
properties are not a major concern, higher CO2 levels can be used to obtain optimum arc characteristics.
Diameter (mm) Gas flow Optimum Stickout
1.2 15 – 25 l/min DC+ 260A 28V 10 – 20mm
1.6 15 – 25 l/min DC+ 330A 29V 15 – 25mm

typical
PWHT 750 – 760°C / 2 – 3h Min.
Ar-2½%CO2 80/20 Ar-He-CO2
Elongation (%) 4d 16 17 17 17
5d 14 16 16 16
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C -- 30 25 35
Lateral expansion + 20°C -- 0.30 0.28 0.45
Hardness (HV) -- 260 260 260
PACKAGING DATA
porosity, it is advised that part-used spools are returned to polythene wrappers. 15kg spools.
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Ni Cr3 Mo Cu OES (mg/m3)
60 5 <0.5 5 < 0.1 < 0.1 5
48 www.metrode.com DS A-17-CORMET M91 | Rev. 01-03/16

SUPERCORE F91
LOW ALLOY STEELS

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
All-positional flux cored wire designed to weld equivalent modified 9CrMo steels (P91). Rutile flux system with an high purity strip
producing weld metal recovery of about 90%.

AWS A5.29M E91T1-B9C/M-H4 QW432 F-No 6
AWS A5.36M E91T1-C1PZ-B91-H4 or QW442 A-No 5
(dependent on shielding gas)
E91T1-M21PZ-B91-H4
BS EN ISO 17634-B T69T1-1C/M-9C1MV

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Nb V N Cu Al Ni+Mn
Min. 0.08 0.60 -- -- -- 8.0 -- 0.85 0.02 0.15 0.02 -- -- --
Max. 0.13 1.20 0.50 0.015 0.020 10.0 0.80 1.2 0.07 0.25 0.07 0.15 0.04 1.50
Typical 0.1 0.8 0.3 0.010 0.016 9.0 0.5 1.0 0.04 0.2 0.05 0.05 0.01 1.30

typical typical High Temperature
PWHT 760°C / 2h (6h) Min.
760°C/2h 760°C/6h +566°C +600°C +650°C
Tensile strength (MPa) 690 790 750 450 420 396
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 565 660 630 360 288 245
Elongation (%) 4d 17 20 23 21 27 29
5d 14 18 20 20 25 26
Reduction of area -- 55 58 73 81 85
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C -- 28 36 -- -- --
Hardness (HV) -- 260 250 -- -- --
Shielding gas: 80%Ar-20%CO2 (or 15 – 25%CO2) or 100% CO2 at 20-25l/min.
Diameter (mm) welding position amp-volt rane * typical stickout
1.2 (0.045in) Positional 140-170A, 24-26V 160A, 25V 15-25mm
* Using 100%CO2 the voltage should be increased by 1-2V
PACKAGING DATA
Spools vacuum-sealed in barrier foil with cardboard carton: 15kg (33 lbs)
FUME DATA
Fume composition (wt %), shielding gas 80%Ar-20%CO2:
18 8 < 0.5 3 3 <1 8 1.7
www.metrode.com DS A-17-SUPERCORE F91 | Rev. 01-03/16 49

Data Sheet A-18
LOW ALLOY STEELS

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
CONSUMABLES FOR E911 CrMo STEEL

Modified 9CrMo type generically called E911, with a In the PWHT condition consists of tempered
nominal composition of 9%Cr-1%Mo-1%W+NbVN. martensite.
WELDING GUIDELINES
Preheat-interpass range for E911 is 200-300°C.
EN/DIN Before PWHT it is preferable to cool to 100°C or
1.4905 X11CrMoWVNb 9 1 1 lower to ensure full martensite transformation.
1.4906 G-X12CrMoWVNbN 10 1 1 (cast)
ASTM
A182/A336 F911 (forgings) PWHT
A213 T911 (seamless tube) PWHT requirements are essentially the same as
A234 WP911 (fittings) for P91, which requires PWHT in the range 730-
A335 P911 (seamless pipe) 780°C. Castings are often PWHT at temperatures
A369 FP911 (forged pipe) towards the bottom of this range but the time
A387 Grade 911 (plate)
is proportionally increased to ensure sufficient
tempering. As a general rule the tempering
APPLICATIONS parameter (P), should be 21, or higher, to achieve
adequate tempering.
Electrodes for the new European creep-resistant steel
E911, which is essentially the ASTM P91 type with 1%W
P = °C+273(20+logt) x 10-3
added to increase creep strength for service up to at
(t = time in hours)
least 600°C.
Suggested conditions are 12h at 730°C or 3h at
760°C.
These consumables are mainly intended for castings,
which have a slightly higher Cr level. Castings also have
up to 1%Ni to suppress retained ferrite; in wrought
products nickel is limited to 0.4%. For microstructural RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
control and to optimise toughness after PWHT, the This alloy is closely related to the P91 alloy (data
weld metal has about 0.6%Ni added. sheet A-17) and P92 alloy (data sheet A-20). The
9CrWV TIG wire (A-20) can be used in conjunction
Applications for E911 steels include components such with Chromet 10MW. Also see alloy 921 (data
as headers, main steam piping, boiler tubes, turbine sheet A-25).
casings and steam valves in fossil fuelled power
generating plants. It may also find future use in oil
refineries and coal liquefaction and gasification plants. PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
MMA Chromet 10MW E9015-G
TIG/MIG Cormet 10MW E90C-G

CHROMET 10MW
LOW ALLOY STEELS

MMA ELECTRODE FOR E911 CREEP-RESISTING STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a basic low hydrogen flux system made on high purity steel core wire. Electrode is all-positional with a
moisture resistant coating giving very low weld metal hydrogen levels.

AWS A5.5M E9015-G H4 (E911) QW432 F-No 4
QW442 A-No 5

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo W Nb V N Al
min. 0.08 0.50 0.15 -- -- 9.0 0.40 0.85 0.85 0.04 0.18 0.03 --
max. 0.14 1.20 0.30 0.015 0.02 10.5 0.80 1.2 1.2 0.08 0.25 0.07 0.02
Typical 0.11 0.8 0.25 0.008 0.010 9.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 0.05 0.22 0.05 0.01

Typical after PWHT: 730°C/12h typical
Reduction of area % 62
Impact ISO-V(J) + 20°C 60
Hardness (HV) 250

min. A 80 100 140
max. A 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 350 450 450
kg/carton 13.5 16.5 16.8
STORAGE
FUME DATA
15 5 < 0.2 <3 < 0.1 < 0.1 18 1.7
www.metrode.com DS A-18-CHROMET 10MW | Rev. 01-03/16 51

CORMET 10MW
LOW ALLOY STEELS
METAL CORED WIRE FOR E911 CREEP-RESISTING STEEL

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Metal cored wire designed to weld equivalent E911 steels. Metal powder core with an alloyed strip producing weld metal
recovery of about 96%.

AWS A5.28M E90C-G(E911) QW432 F-No --
QW442 A-No --

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo W Nb V N B Al Cu
min. 0.08 0.50 -- -- -- 9.0 0.40 0.9 0.9 0.04 0.18 0.03 -- -- --
max. 0.13 1.20 0.40 0.015 0.02 10.0 0.85 1.2 1.2 0.08 0.25 0.07 0.0015 0.04 0.1
Typical 0.11 0.8 0.30 0.01 0.017 9.5 0.6 1.0 1.0 0.05 0.2 0.05 0.0005 0.01 0.05

PWHT 755°C / 3h Typical
5d 9
Reduction of area 20
Impact ISO-V(J) + 20°C 14
Hardness HV 260
Shielding gas: Ar + 2.5-20%CO2 at 20-25l/min (operability is improved at higher CO2 contents but impact properties are better with
lower CO2 contents).
Current: DC+ ve ranges as below:
Diameter (mm) amp-volt, range Stickout
1.2 260A 28V 15-25mm
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Cr3 Ni Pb Cu OES (mg/m3)
60 5 5 < 0.5 < 0.1 < 0.1 5.0
52 www.metrode.com DS A-18-Cormet 10MW | Rev. 02-03/16

Data Sheet A-19
LOW ALLOY STEELS

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
12CrMoV CREEP RESISTING STEEL

ALLOY TYPE WELDING GUIDELINES
12%Cr creep resisting steel also with nominally The room temperature hardness of as-deposited
1%Mo-0.5%W-0.3%V. The matching base material is weld metal exceeds 500HV over a wide range
generically called X20. of cooling conditions. Preheat of 400°C with
maximum interpass temperature of 500°C is
specified by DIN 8575. These temperatures are
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED above the austenite-martensite transformation
AISI range (Ms-Mf about 350-150°C) and more recent
Type 422. procedures have benefited from welding in
DIN the 200-350°C preheat range to reduce grain-
X20CrMoV 12 1 (1.4935) coarsening and promote some tempering of
G-X22CrMoV 12 1 (1.4931) cast. partially transformed multipass weld metal.
BS
3604 grade 762. After welding, the joint must be cooled slowly to
120C (100-150°C) and held for 1-2 hours, to allow
transformation before post-weld heat treatment.
APPLICATIONS If immediate heat treatment is not possible, the
Chromet 12MV deposits high strength martensitic weld transformation step must be followed by a post-
metal of nominally 0.2%C-12%Cr-1%Mo modified with heat of about 350°C for 1-4 hours for hydrogen
vanadium and tungsten. The alloying is balanced with release, before cooling below 60°C is allowed. In
a small addition of nickel to ensure a fully martensitic this condition, the hard weld zone is potentially
microstructure. sensitive to stress corrosion cracking (SCC) and
must be kept dry, with minimum delay before
12%CrMoV steels are used for critical heat and creep PWHT.
resisting service up to at least 550ºC. The high
chromium level confers superior steam and fireside PWHT
corrosion performance compared with 2-9%CrMo For production welds typical PWHT is in the
creep-resisting steels. temperature range 730-770°C. Normally this
would be required for a minimum of three
Used in cast and wrought form for high pressure hours but will vary according to thickness, see
steam piping and headers, heat exchangers and appropriate application code for details.
turbine components, particularly in the power
generation industry and sometimes in petrochemical
applications. RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
The newer P91 materials have replaced many of
the original applications for this alloy (data sheet
MICROSTRUCTURE
A-17).
In the PWHT condition the microstructure consists of
tempered martensite.
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
MMA Chromet 12MV BS EN E CrMoWV 12 B
TIG 12CrMoV BS EN W CrMoWV 12 Si

CHROMET 12MV
LOW ALLOY STEELS
BASIC ALL-POSITIONAL MMA ELECTRODE FOR 12%CR CREEP RESISTING STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Basic low hydrogen metal powder type made on high purity core wire. Moisture resistant coating giving very low weld metal
hydrogen levels.

BS EN ISO 3580-A E CrMoWV12 B 3 2 H5 QW432 F-No --
QW442 A-No --

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo W V
min. 0.15 0.40 -- -- -- 10.0 -- 0.80 0.40 0.20
max. 0.22 1.30 0.80 0.025 0.025 12.0 0.8 1.20 0.60 0.40
Typical 0.20 0.8 0.25 0.010 0.017 11 0.5 1 0.5 0.3

Elevated temperature
Room temperature
PWHT 760°C / 3 hrs 350°C 400°C 450°C
min * typical min typ min typ min typ
Tensile strength (MPa) 690 750 -- 590 -- 560 -- 520
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 550 550 370 450 355 420 325 410
Elongation (%) 4d -- 24 -- 18 -- 20 -- 17
5d 15 21 -- 16 -- 16 -- 14
Reduction of area % -- 55 -- 50 -- 48 -- 48
Impact ISO-V(J) + 20°C 34 40 -- -- -- -- -- --
0°C -- 33 -- -- -- -- -- --
Hardness (HV) -- 235 -- -- -- -- -- --
* Minimum requirements after PWHT of 740-780°C/2 hours.
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
kg/carton 12.6 13.8 16.8 16.8
STORAGE
3 hermetically sealed ring-pull metal tins per carton, with unlimited shelf life. Direct use from tin will give hydrogen <5ml/100g for
Redry 250 – 300°C/1-2h to ensure H2<10ml/100g, 300 - 350°C/1-2h to ensure H2<5ml/100g. Maximum 420° C, 3 cycles, 10h total.
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Ni Cr Cu Mo V F OES (mg/m3)
20 4 0.1 3 <0.2 0.1 0.1 16 1.7
54 www.metrode.com DS A-19-CHROMET 12MV | Rev. 01-03/16

12CrMoV
LOW ALLOY STEELS

SOLID TIG WIRE FOR 12%CR CREEP RESISTING STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for TIG.

BS EN ISO 21952-A W CrMoWV 12 Si QW432 F-No --
QW442 A-No --

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo V W
min. 0.17 0.40 0.20 -- -- 10.5 -- 0.80 0.20 0.35
max. 0.24 1.00 0.60 0.020 0.025 12.0 0.80 1.20 0.40 0.80
Typical 0.2 0.6 0.4 0.005 0.01 11 0.6 1 0.3 0.5

PWHT 760ºC/2h min typical
Impact ISO-V(J) + 20°C 34 50
PARAMETERS
Shielding Current Diameter (mm) Voltage
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.4
TIG 5kg tube
FUME DATA
Fume composition (wt %) (TIG fume negligible)
55 4 8 <0.5 <0.5 <0.5 5
www.metrode.com DS A-19-12CrMoV | Rev. 01-03/16 55

Data Sheet A-20
LOW ALLOY STEELS

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
P92 CREEP RESISTING STEEL

9Cr steel alloyed with W, Mo, V, Nb, and N for high In the as-welded condition the microstructure
temperature creep resistance. consists of tempered martensite.
PWHT
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED Minimum preheat temperature 200°C with
ASTM maximum interpass temperature of 350°C;
A 213 T92 (seamless tubes) in practice a preheat-interpass range of 200
A 335 P92 (seamless pipes) – 300°C is normal. To ensure full martensite
A 387 Gr 92 (plates) transformation welds shall be cooled to ~100°C
A 182 F92 (forgings) prior to PWHT; up to 50mm wall thickness can
A 369 FP92 (forged & bored pipe) be cooled to room temperature whilst thick wall
EN 10216-2 (seamless tubes) forgings or castings should not be cooled below
X10CrWMoVNb 9-2 ~80°C prior to PWHT.
ASME base material codes allow PWHT down

to 730°C but for weld metals PWHT is normally
APPLICATIONS carried out in the range 750-770°C. Optimum
These consumables are designed to weld equivalent properties are obtained with PWHT at 760°C for
‘type 92’ 9%Cr steels modified with tungsten, 4 hours.
vanadium, niobium, nitrogen and a small addition
boron to give improved long term creep properties. When compared with directly matching weld
metal, the addition of some nickel and reduction
They are specifically intended for high integrity of niobium provides a useful improvement in
structural service at elevated temperature so the toughness after PWHT.
minor alloy additions responsible for its creep
strength are kept above the minimum considered ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
necessary to ensure satisfactory performance. In More detailed information on the products and
practice, weldments will be weakest in the softened properties of P92 steels are available in the
(intercritical) HAZ region of parent material, as Technical Profile – "Welding Consumables for
indicated by so-called ‘type IV’ failure in transverse P92 Steels for the Power Generation Industry" –
weld creep tests. available from Metrode Technical Department.
The rupture strength of P92 is up to 30% greater than PRODUCTS AVAILABLE

P91, and interest in its use is growing as a candidate Process Product Specification
for components such as headers, main steam piping MMA Chromet 92 AWS E9015-B92
and turbine casings, in fossil fuelled power generating
TIG/MIG 9CrWV AWS ER90S-G (92)
plants.
9CrWV (wire) AWS EG (92)
SAW
LA490 (flux) ISO SA FB 155 AC H5
FCW Supercore F92 E91T1-C1PZ-B92-H4

CHROMET 92
LOW ALLOY STEELS

MMA ALL-POSITIONAL ELECTRODE FOR JOINING P92 CREEP RESISTING STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Basic coated MMA electrode made on matching core wire. Moisture resistant coatings giving very low weld metal hydrogen
levels.
Recovery is approximately 120% with respect to core wire, 65% with respect to whole electrode.
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.5M E9015-B92 H4
QW422 P-No 15E group 1
BS EN ISO 3580-A E ZCrMoWVNb 9 0.5 2 B 3 2 H5 QW432 F-No 4

min. 0.08 0.40 -- -- -- 8.0 -- 0.30 1.5 0.04 0.15 0.03 0.001 -- --
max. 0.13 1.00 0.40 0.015 0.020 9.5 0.80 0.60 2.0 0.07 0.25 0.07 0.005 0.03 0.15
Typical 0.11 0.6 0.25 0.01 0.01 9 0.6 0.45 1.7 0.05 0.2 0.05 0.003 <0.01 <0.05

High Temperature
PWHT 760°C / 2-4h min. typical
+550°C +600°C +650°C
Elongation (%) 4d 17 22 15 19.5 19.5
5d 16 19 14 18 18
Reduction of area % -- 50 64 73 80
Impact ISO-V(J) + 20°C -- 60 -- -- --
Hardness (HV) -- 230-260 -- -- --
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 12 14.1 13.5 16.5
STORAGE
recommended.
FUME DATA
15 5 < 0.1 <3 < 0.1 < 0.1 18 1.7

9CrWV
LOW ALLOY STEELS

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire, non-copper coated, for TIG, MIG and SAW

AWS A5.23M -- -- EG (92) QW432 F-No 6
AWS A5.28M ER90S-G (92) ER90S-G (92) -- QW442 A-No 5
BS EN ISO 21952-A W ZCrMoWVNb 9 0.5 1.5 G ZCrMoWVNb 9 0.5 1.5 S ZCrMoWVNb 9 0.5 1.5
APPROVALS TÜV

min. 0.08 0.40 -- -- -- 8.0 -- 0.30 1.5 0.04 0.15 0.03 0.001 -- --
max. 0.13 0.80 0.40 0.015 0.015 9.5 0.80 0.60 2.0 0.07 0.25 0.07 0.005 0.03 0.15
Typical 0.10 0.75 0.30 0.004 0.008 9 0.5 0.45 1.7 0.06 0.2 0.05 0.003 <0.01 <0.05

High Temperature
PWHT 760°C / 2-4h min. typical
+550°C +600°C +650°C
Elongation (%) 4d 16 22 24.5 20.5 28
5d -- 19 22.5 19 25.5
Impact ISO-V(J) + 20°C -- 220 -- -- --
Hardness (HV) -- 265 -- -- --
PARAMETERS
Shielding Current Diameter (mm) Typical parameters
TIG Argon DC+ 2.4 100A, 12V
MIG Ar + 1-3%O2 or 5-20% CO2 DC+ 1.2 260A, 26V
SAW LA490 flux DC+ 2.4 420A, 28V, 390mm/min
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.8/0.9/1.0/1.2 1.6 2.4 3.2
TIG 0.7 / 5 / 15 kg Spools to order 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube
MIG 15kg spool -- -- --
SAW -- -- 25kg spool 25kg spool
FUME DATA
Fume composition (wt %); TIG and SAW fume is negligible:
Fe Mn Ni Cr Mo Cu OES (mg/m3)
50 4 < 0.4 6 0.5 < 0.5 5
58 www.metrode.com DS A-20-9CrWV | Rev. 02-06/16

LA490
LOW ALLOY STEELS

SUB-ARC FLUXES FOR USE WITH 9CrW V SOLID WIRE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Agglomerated fluoride-basic flux for P91 and P92 modified 9CrMo creep resistant steels
SPECIFICATIONS COMPOSITION (FLUX WT%)

BS EN ISO 14174 (flux) SA FB 155 AC H5 SiO2 + Al2O3 30%
AWS A5.23M CaO + Mg O 36%
F62PZ-EG(92)-G(92)
(flux wire combination) CaF2 27%
Basicity index (Boniszewski) ~3.0
ANALYSIS DEPOSIT (TYPICAL)

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo W Nb V N B
9CrWV Wire 0.10 0.5 0.3 0.004 0.008 9.0 0.6 0.4 1.7 0.06 0.20 0.05 0.003
Deposit with LA490 0.09 0.7 0.3 0.004 0.008 8.5 0.60 0.4 1.7 0.05 0.20 0.05 0.021

PWHT 760°C / 4h Min. typical
5d 17 22
Reduction or area 65 70
Hardness (HV) (mid) 225 230
* Minimum impact required by BS EN ISO 24598-A : 38 J after 3h.
AC or DC+: typical 420A, 28V, 390mm/min
PACKAGING DATA
25kg moisture resistant aluminium Sahara™ bags.
If flux becomes damp, rebake at 300–350°C/ 1–2hours to restore to as-packed condition. For critical work, it is recommended to
redry to ensure <5ml H2/100g.

SUPERCORE F92
LOW ALLOY STEELS

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
All-positional flux cored wire designed to weld equivalent P92 steels. Rutile flux system with an alloyed strip producing weld
metal recovery of about 90%.

E91T1-C1PZ-B92-H4 or E91T1-M21PZ-B92-H4 QW432 F-No
AWS A5.36M
(dependent on shielding gas) QW442 A-No

min. 0.08 0.40 -- -- -- 8.5 0.30 0.30 1.5 0.03 0.15 0.03 0.001 -- --
max. 0.13 1.20 0.40 0.015 0.020 9.5 0.80 0.60 2.0 0.07 0.25 0.07 0.005 0.03 0.15
Typical 0.11 0.8 0.30 0.01 0.017 9 0.5 0.45 1.7 0.04 0.2 0.04 0.003 <0.01 <0.05

High Temperature
PWHT 760°C / 2-4h typical
+550°C +600°C +650°C +650°C
Elongation (%) 4d 21 18.5 25 26.5 25.5
5d 18 17 22.5 24.5 23.5
Reduction of area % 50 68 77 81 86
Impact ISO-V(J) + 20°C 25 -- -- -- --
Hardness (HV) 260 -- -- -- --

Diameter (mm) Amp-Volt Range Typical stickout welding position
1.2 140-170A, 24-26V 160A, 25V 15 – 25mm Positional
* Using 100% CO2 the voltage should be increased by 1-2V
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
18 8 < 0.5 3 3 <1 8 1.7
60 www.metrode.com DS A-20-SUPERCORE F92 | Rev. 02-03/16

Data Sheet A-21
LOW ALLOY STEELS

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
T23 CREEP RESISTING STEEL

2¼%Cr steel alloyed with W, Mo, V, Nb, and B for high In the as-welded condition the microstructure
temperature creep resistance. consists of bainite.
WELDING GUIDELINES
In many situations it is claimed that thin wall tube
ASTM can be welded without preheat; if preferred, and
A 213 T23 (seamless tubes) for thicker wall sections, preheat of 150-200°C
A 335 P23 (pipe) can be applied. Maximum interpass temperature
BS EN should be kept to 350°C.
10216 X7CrWVMoNb9-6 (proposed)
For many current applications T23 tube is put
into service in the as-welded condition. During
APPLICATIONS production of the tube the typical tempering
These consumables are designed to weld equivalent cycle applied is 760°C/30 minutes; the ASME code
‘type 23’ 2¼%Cr steels modified with tungsten, case specifies a minimum tempering temperature
vanadium, niobium, and a small boron addition to give of 730°C for base material. When it has been
improved long term creep properties. The Chromet applied PWHT in the range 715-740˚C has been
23L electrode is specifically designed for as-welded applied.
applications but can also be subject to PWHT; the flux
cored wire will typically be used on thicker wall pipe
where it is envisaged that PWHT will be applied. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
J C Vaillant, B Vandenberghe, C Zakine, J Gabrel,
The consumables are intended for high integrity W Bendick: “The T23/P23 Book” Vallourec &
service at elevated temperature so the minor alloy Mannesmann Tubes, 2006.
additions responsible for creep strength are kept
within the parent material range.
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
The rupture strength of T23 can be up to twice that of Process Product Specification
T22 and interest in its use is growing as a candidate for MMA Chromet 23L E9015-G (23)
components such as waterwalls in ultra-super-critical
TIG 2CrWV ER90S-G (23)
boilers, in fossil fuelled power generating plants.

CHROMET 23L
LOW ALLOY STEELS
MMA ALL-POSITIONAL ELECTRODE FOR JOINING T23 CREEP RESISTING STEEL

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Basic coated MMA electrode made on high purity, alloyed core wire.

AWS A5.5M E9015-G (23) H4 QW422 P-No 5B group 2
BS EN ISO 3580-A E ZCrWV2 1.5 B 3 2 H5 QW432 F-No 4
QW442 A-No 5

min. 0.04 0.10 -- -- -- 1.9 -- 0.05 1.45 0.02 0.20 -- 0.0005 -- --
max. 0.10 1.00 0.50 0.015 0.020 2.6 0.80 0.30 1.75 0.08 0.30 0.03 0.0060 0.03 0.15
Typical 0.05 0.5 0.25 0.01 0.01 2.2 0.6 0.2 1.6 0.03 0.23 0.02 0.001 <0.01 <0.05

typical as-welded typical 715°C/1h
5d 16 20
Reduction of area % 50 60
Impact ISO-V(J) + 20°C 22 70
Hardness (HV) 290-350 220-260

min. A 70 80 100
max. A 110 140 180
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 350 350 450
kg/carton 10.2 13.8 16.2
STORAGE
recommended.
FUME DATA
15 5 < 0.1 <3 < 0.1 < 0.1 18 1.7
62 www.metrode.com DS A-21-CHROMET 23L | Rev. 01-03/16

2CrWV
LOW ALLOY STEELS

SOLID WIRE FOR TIG
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for TIG

AWS A5.28M ER90S-G (23) QW422 P-No 5B group 2
BS EN ISO 21952-A W ZCrWV 2 1.5 QW432 F-No 6
QW442 A-No --

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo W Nb V B Al Cu
min. 0.04 -- -- -- -- 1.9 -- 0.05 1.45 0.02 0.20 0.0005 -- --
max. 0.10 1.0 0.5 0.015 0.020 2.6 0.8 0.30 1.75 0.08 0.30 0.0060 0.03 0.25
Typical 0.06 0.6 0.3 0.01 0.01 2.4 0.5 0.2 1.6 0.05 0.25 0.003 <0.01 0.15

typical typical typical
as-welded 715°C/30min 740°C/2h
5d 19 20 24
Reduction of area (%) 55 70 80
Impact ISO-V(J) + 20°C 50 190 >250
Hardness (HV) mid 325 255 220
PARAMETERS
Shielding Current Diameter (mm) Typical parameters
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.4
TIG 5kg tube
FUME DATA
Fume composition (wt %); TIG fume is negligible:
Fe Mn Ni Cr Mo Cu OES (mg/m3)
55 5 1.3 <0.5 <0.5 1.2 5
www.metrode.com DS A-21-2CrWV | Rev. 01-03/16 63

Data Sheet A-23
LOW ALLOY STEELS

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
WB36/P36 STEEL
ALLOY TYPE PWHT
WB36 is a NiMo base material with Cu and Nb WB36 is tempered during manufacture in the
additions with good hot strength. Although temperature range 580-680°C, depending on
consumables of matching composition are not used specifications and requirements and following
compatible alternatives have been found to provide welding PWHT is required for WB36. The PWHT
the required properties. requirements will depend on a number of factors
but will normally be about 590±30°C.
The consumables listed on this data sheet can be
used for a wide variety of applications (see also ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
data sheets A-50, A-61 and A-64) but this data sheet There is a Technical Profile P36 and the related
concentrates on the welding of: welding consumables.
DIN
15NiCuMoNb5 For offshore oil well-head process pipework and
1.6368 fittings, after PWHT these low nickel consumables
BS EN 10216-2 satisfy NACE MR0175 requirements (<1%Ni &
15NiCuMoNb5-6-4 <22HRC) intended to ensure resistance to sulphide-
1.6368 induced stress corrosion cracking in sour service,
BS 3604 combined with good sub-zero toughness.
Grade 591
ASTM Also find applications for the repair of medium
Code Case 2353 strength low alloy steel castings where a stress-
A182 F36, A213 T36 & A335, P36 relief only (rather than N+T) is to be applied.
Proprietary
WB36 (V+M) More detailed information on the products and
properties of WB36 steels are available in the
APPLICATIONS METRODE Technical Profile.
WB36 is a high temperature construction steel for
service up to 450°C; typical applications are below PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
400°C designed on the basis of tensile rather than
creep properties. It is mainly used for feedwater Process Product Specification
piping systems in place of standard carbon steels MMA 1NiMo.B AWS E9018-G
(eg.A106 grade C) in conventional and nuclear power TIG/MIG MnMo AWS ER80S-D2
stations. WB36 also finds applications for headers, SA 1NiMo (wire) AWS EF3
manifolds and fittings in power stations. SAW
LA436 (flux) BS EN SA AB 167
MICROSTRUCTURE
In the stress relieved condition the microstructure
consists of tempered ferrite/bainite.
WELDING GUIDELINES
The actual preheat and PWHT requirements will
depend on the thickness of the base material being
welded. Normally preheat/interpass temperatures
will be in the range 100-250°C depending on wall
thickness.

1NiMo.B
LOW ALLOY STEELS

ALL-POSITIONAL NIMO LOW ALLOY STEEL MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a basic flux coating on high purity mild steel core wire. Moisture resistant coating provides very low weld
metal hydrogen levels.

AWS A5.5M E9018-G H4 QW432 F-No 4
BS EN 757 E 55 4 1NiMo B 3 2 H5 QW442 A-No 10
APPROVALS TÜV

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu V
min. 0.05 1.0 -- -- -- -- 0.8 0.20 -- --
max. 0.12 1.4 0.5 0.020 0.025 0.3 1.2 0.50 0.10 0.03
Typical 0.07 1.2 0.3 0.01 0.01 0.1 1.0 0.4 0.05 0.01

High Temperature
PWHT 590-620°C/1-2h: Min. Typical
250°C 350°C 450°C
Elongation (%) 4d 17 25 22 28 24
5d -- 22 -- -- --
Impact ISO-V(J) 0°C -- 130

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
kg/carton 12.9 13.5 16.8 18.0
STORAGE
FUME DATA
14 5 0.5 <0.1 <0.2 18 5
www.metrode.com DS A-23-1NiMo.B | Rev. 01-03/16 65

MnMo
LOW ALLOY STEELS
SOLID MNMO LOW ALLOYED WIRE FOR TIG AND MIG

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

AWS A5.28M ER80S-D2, ER90S-D2 QW432 F-No 6
EN ISO 16834-B 4M31 QW442 A-No 11
EN ISO 14341-A W 46 3 M G4Mo
EN ISO 14341 A 4Mo / B S4M31
BS EN 440 (G4Mo)

C Mn Si S P Ni Mo Cu
Min. 0.07 1.60 0.50 -- -- -- 0.40 --
Max. 0.12 2.10 0.80 0.025 0.025 0.15 0.60 0.4
Typical 0.1 1.9 0.6 0.005 0.01 0.05 0.5 0.1

MIG ----- High Temperature -----
PWHT 590-620°C/1-2h Min. TIG
Ar + 5%CO2 Ar + 20%CO2 250°C 350°C 450°C
Tensile strength (MPa) 550 640 725 605 650 665 585
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 470 530 625 490 525 490 460
Elongation (%) 4d 17 32 28 25 24 27 25
Impact ISO-V(J) -30°C 47 200 >100 >100 -- -- --
Hardness (HV) cap/mid -- 235/210 235/220 220/205 -- -- --
* Minimum as-welded values are for AWS ER80S-D2. As shown MAG welds using more oxidising shielding gas (higher CO2 + O2) have
lower strength. The AWS classification for ER80S-D2 is based on 100%CO2 which is seldom used; alternatively this wire can also be
classified as ER90S-D2 using low CO2 gas mixtures.
PARAMETERS
MIG Ar + 1-3%O2 or 5-20% CO2 * DC+ 1.2 280A, 26V
* Ar + 5%CO2 provides the highest strength and best impact properties, see above. Other proprietary gas mixtures also suitable.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG -- 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube
MIG 15kg spool -- -- -- --
FUME DATA
Fume composition (wt %)(TIG fume inegligible)
55 10 <0.1 <0.1 <0.5 1.2 5
66 www.metrode.com DS A-23-MnMo | Rev. 02-08/16

SA 1NiMo
LOW ALLOY STEELS

SOLID NIMO ALLOYED WIRE FOR SAW
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid copper coated wire for submerged arc welding. Nominal composition of 1%Ni-0.5%Mo capable of achieving 90ksi (620MPa)
tensile strength. Supplied to NACE MR0175 1.0%Ni maximum on request.

AWS A5.23M EF3 QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO 14171 S 3Ni1Mo QW442 A-No 10 (Nearest )

C Mn Si S P Ni * Mo Cr Cu
min. 0.07 1.30 0.05 -- -- 0.8 0.45 -- --
max. 0.15 1.80 0.25 0.020 0.020 1.2 0.65 0.20 0.30
Typical 0.11 1.75 0.2 0.005 0.01 0.9 0.55 0.05 0.1
* Ni supplied to 1.0% maximum (NACE MR0175) on request.

Typical values as-welded & PWHT AW 590°C/2h
PARAMETERS
SAW LA436 flux DC+ 2.4 450A, 30V, 450mm/min
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.6 2.4 3.2 4.0
25kg spool
SAW 25kg spool 25kg spool 25kg spool
To order
FUME DATA
50 10 <0.5 <0.5 <1.5 1.2 5
www.metrode.com DS A-23-SA1NiMo | Rev. 02-08/16 67

Data Sheet A-25
LOW ALLOY STEELS

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
C(F)B2 CREEP RESISTING STEEL

Advanced 9CrMoV alloy with nominal composition Preheat and Interpass temperature range 200-
0.12%C-9.5%Cr-1.5%Mo-1%Co-0.25%V-0.05%Nb+B 300°C. Welding heat input should be kept below
for high temperature creep resistance. ~3kJ/mm.
PWHT
Cooling to <100°C before PWHT is advisable to
For advanced creep resistant steel B2 developed in ensure full transformation to martensite. PWHT:
the European COST programme in forged (FB2) or 730°C/16-24h or preferably 760°C/~4h for Chromet
cast (CB2) forms, such as GX-13CrMoCoVNbNB 9-2-1. WB2 and 730°C/24h or preferably 760°C/~6h for
Supercore WB2.
APPLICATIONS
COST alloy B2 was originally developed as a RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
turbine rotor material and its outstanding creep Equivalent solid wire is not currently available;
performance (above P91 and E911) has been nearest for compatible properties is 9CrWV
confirmed with further optimisation. Applications (P92), see data sheet A-20.
of CB2 and FB2 use are growing as a candidate
for components such as turbine rotors, vales and
casings, etc, in fossil fuelled power generating plants. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Zhuyao Zhang and Graham B Holloway “Welding
The weld metals deposited by Chromet WB2 Consumables for Advanced Boron-Cobalt Alloyed
electrode and Supercore WB2 flux cored wire are 9%Cr-Mo Creep Resisting Steels for Power
designed to match the base material composition Generation”, IIW Doc IX-2420-12, 2012.
quite closely for fabricating thick wall components
used in the construction of power plants operating
with advanced steam parameters up to at least PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
600°C. Process Product Specification
MMA Chromet WB2 E9015-G H4
FCW Supercore WB2 E91T1-G H4
E91T1-C1PZ-G-H4
MICROSTRUCTURE
In the PWHT condition, the microstructure consists
of tempered martensite.

CHROMET WB2
LOW ALLOY STEELS

MMA ALL-POSITIONAL ELECTRODE FOR C(F)B2 CREEP RESISTING STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Basic coated MMA electrode made on matching core wire.

AWS A5.5M E9015-G H4 QW422 P-No 15E group 1
QW432 F-No 4
QW442 A-No 2

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Nb V N B Co
min. 0.10 0.40 0.15 -- -- 9.0 0.40 1.4 0.04 0.20 0.001 0.003 0.80
max. 0.15 1.00 0.50 0.015 0.020 10.5 0.80 1.7 0.07 0.30 0.035 0.010 1.20
Typical 0.12 0.6 0.25 0.009 0.010 9.5 0.6 1.5 0.05 0.25 0.02 0.005 1.0

Typical Typical High Temperature *
PWHT 760°C / 4h or equivalent Min.
760°C/4h 760°C/10h +600°C +650°C +700°C
Elongation (%) 4d 17 23 21 21 34 30
5d 15 21 19 19 31 28
Reduction of area % -- 58 56 71 80 85
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C -- 40 40 -- -- --
Hardness (HV) -- 230-260 230-260 -- -- --
* After PWHT at 730°C/12h + 730°C/12h.

Diameter (mm) 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.0
min. A 80 100 140 200
max. A 140 180 240 300
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.0
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
kg/carton 13.5 16.5 16.5 16.5
STORAGE
recommended.
FUME DATA
15 5 < 0.1 <3 < 0.1 < 0.1 18 1.7
www.metrode.com DS A-25-CHROMET WB2 | Rev. 02-03/16 69

SUPERCORE WB2
LOW ALLOY STEELS
ALL-POSITIONAL FLUX CORED WIRE FOR C(F)B2 CREEP RESISTING STEEL*

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
All-positional flux cored wire designed to weld equivalent C(F)B2 steels. Rutile flux system with an alloyed strip producing weld
metal recovery of about 90%.
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.29M E91T1-G H4
QW432 F-No -
AWS A5.36M E91T1-C1PZ-G-H4 or E91T1-M21PZ-G-H4
(dependent on shielding gas) QW442 A-No -

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Nb V N B Co
Min. 0.10 0.40 0.15 -- -- 9.0 0.40 1.4 0.04 0.20 0.001 0.005 0.80
Max. 0.15 1.00 0.50 0.015 0.020 10.5 0.80 1.7 0.07 0.30 0.035 0.015 1.20
Typical 0.12 0.6 0.25 0.007 0.017 9.5 0.7 1.5 0.05 0.25 0.02 0.008 1.0

Typical Typical ----- High Temperature *-----
PWHT 760°C / 4h or equivalent Min.
760°C/4h 760°C/10h +600°C +650°C +700°C
Elongation (%) 4d 17 19 20 15 19.5 47
5d 15 18 18 14 18 43
Reduction of area % -- 53 56 64 73 89
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C -- 22 32 -- -- --
Hardness (HV) -- 265 250 -- -- --
* After PWHT at 730°C/12h + 730°C/12h.
Diameter (mm) welding position amp-volt range * typical stickout
1.2 Positional 140-170A, 24-26V 160A, 25V 15-25mm
(0.045in) Down hand 180-260A, 28-30V 210A, 30V 15-25mm
* Using 100%CO2 the voltage should be increased by 1-2V
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
Fume composition (wt %), shielding gas 80%Ar-20%CO2
18 8 < 0.5 3 3 <1 8 1.7
*: Previously Supercore F921
70 www.metrode.com DS A-25-SUPERCORE WB2 | Rev. 01-03/16

Data Sheet A-40
LOW ALLOY STEELS

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
1%Ni FOR IMPROVED TOUGHNESS

Low alloy steel alloyed with nominally 1%Ni for In the as-welded condition the microstructure is
improved toughness. Actual Ni content is kept ferritic with a component of acicular ferrite for
below 1% to ensure conformance with NACE optimum toughness.
MR0175.
WELDING GUIDELINES
Preheat will dependent on the grade and thickness
of the base material.
CMn steels with yield stress of 450MPa or where
good toughness is required down to –50°C, such as:
ASTM RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
A333 & A334 Grade 6. The 2%Ni (data sheet A-41) and 3%Ni (data sheet
A350 Grades LF2 & LF5. A-42) are also designed for applications requiring
A352 Grades LCB & LCC (cast). low temperature toughness.
API
5L X65
BS PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
4360 Grades 43E, 50E, 55C, 55EE, 55F. Process Product Specification
MMA Tufmet 1Ni.B AWS E8018-C3
APPLICATIONS TIG/MIG 1Ni AWS ER80S-Ni1
For welding higher strength steel structures where
PWHT is impracticable so that welds must possess
an appropriate degree of toughness and crack
resistance.
The addition of about 1%Ni promotes microstructural

refinement, with improved tolerance to procedural
variations compared to plain CMn weld metal. Nickel
also increases atmospheric weathering resistance
and improves electrochemical balance between
weld and base metal, thus minimising preferential
weld area corrosion in marine environments. For
offshore oilfield sour service, a maximum of 1.0%Ni
is commonly required (NACE MR0175).
Also recommended where design requirements
specify toughness testing of higher strength low
alloy steel welds down to –50°C eg. offshore
construction, pipelines and pressure vessels.

TUFMET 1Ni.B
LOW ALLOY STEELS
1%NI MMA ELECTRODE FOR GOOD LOW TEMPER ATURE TOUGHNESS

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a basic, metal powder, type flux on high purity low carbon core wire.
Moisture resistant coating giving very low weld metal hydrogen levels.
AWS A5.5M E8018-C3 H4 QW432 F-No 4
BS EN ISO 2560-A E 46 6 1Ni B 4 2 H5 QW442 A-No 10
BS EN ISO 2560-B E5518-N2 A U
Conforms with NACE MR0175

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo V Nb Cu
min. -- 0.80 -- -- -- -- 0.80 -- -- -- --
max. 0.10 1.20 0.80 0.030 0.030 0.15 1.00* 0.2 0.05 0.05 0.3
Typical 0.05 1.0 0.4 0.015 0.015 0.05 0.9 0.1 0.01 <0.05 0.05
* BS and AWS 1.10%Ni max.
As welded Min. Typical
Tensile strength (MPa) 550-680 610
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 470-550 520
5d 20 25
Reduction of area (%) -- 70
Impact ISO-V(J) - 20°C -- 150
- 40°C 47 120
- 50°C -- 80
- 60°C 47 65
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 16.8 16.2
STORAGE
metal during working shift of 8h.
Redry 250 – 300°C/1-2h to ensure H2 <10ml/100g, 300-350°C/1-2h to ensure H2 <5ml/100g. Maximum 420° C, 3 cycles, 10h total.
FUME DATA
Fume composition (wt %) typical
14 5 < 0.5 < 0.1 0.2 < 0.1 18 5
72 www.metrode.com DS A-40-TUFMET 1Ni.B | Rev. 01-03/16

1Ni
LOW ALLOY STEELS

SOLID WIRE FOR TIG AND MIG
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

AWS A5.28M ER80S-Ni1 QW432 F-No 6
EN ISO 636-A W 42 6 W3Ni (TIG wire) QW442 A-No 10
EN ISO 14341-A G 46 5 M 3Ni (MIG wire)

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo * Cu V
Min. 0.06 0.80 0.40 -- -- -- 0.80 -- -- --
Max. 0.12 1.25 0.80 0.015 0.020 0.15 1.00 0.35 0.35 0.05
Typical 0.10 1 0.5 0.010 0.010 0.05 0.9 0.02 0.2 0.01
* Most wires have a typical Mo of 0.02% but some batches will have typically 0.3% Mo.

Typical values as welded min * TIG MAG Ar + 5%CO2
Yield strength (MPa) -- 472 498
Impact ISO-V(J) - 50°C 27 > 120 > 130
- 75°C -- > 110 > 50
Hardness (HV) cap/mid -- 195/240 190/205
* Minimum as-welded properties according to AWS. All-weld tests show actual proof stress values close to minimum or slightly
lower, depending on process, shielding gas and Mo content (higher Mo wires produce the higher typical strengths reported).
However, note that yield point is typically 10-20MPa above the 0.2% proof stress, and in either case, exceeds 450MPa (65ksi).

MIG Ar + 5-20% CO2 * DC+ 1.2 280A, 26V
* Ar + 1-5%CO2 and proprietary mixtures also suitable.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.0 (not 3.2)
MIG 15kg spool -- -- -- --
FUME DATA
MIG fume composition (wt %)(TIG fume negligible)
55 6 < 0.1 0.5 < 0.1 1.2 5
www.metrode.com DS A-40-1Ni | Rev. 01-03/16 73

METCORE DWA 55E
LOW ALLOY STEELS
NI ALLOYED ALL-POSITIONAL FLUX CORED WIRE

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Flux cored wire with a rutile flux system for spray transfer at low currents and easy operation in all welding positions.
The wire is alloyed with about 0.4%Ni and provides good as-welded ed toughness down to –40°C.
Low moisture potential giving weld metal hydrogen content of typically < 5ml/100g.
Metal recovery 90% with respect to wire.

AWS A5.20M E71T-5 (MJ )* QW432 F-No 6
AWS A5.36M E71T1-M21A2-CS1-H4 QW442 A-No 1
BS EN ISO 17632-A T42 4 P M 1 H5
BS EN ISO 17632-B T494T12-1MAP-H5
* Meets suffix M (Ar+20%CO2) and J (27J at –40°C) requirements.
Note that the new classification E71T-9MJ introduced in AWS A5.20-95 is strictly more appropriate.

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo V
min. -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.30 -- --
max. 0.08 1.75 0.90 0.03 0.03 0.20 0.50 0.30 0.08
Typical 0.05 1.1 0.5 0.01 0.02 < 0.1 0.35 < 0.1 0.02

Typical
As welded (PWHT with caution) Min*
as-welded 600°C/4h **
Impact ISO-V(J) -40°C 27 115 >27
* As specified by AWS A5.20 E71T-5MJ as-welded.
** PWHT has a detrimental effect on impact energy but all batches are impact tested after PWHT of 600°C/4h.
Shielding gas: 80%Ar-20%CO2 at 20-25l/min. Proprietary gases may be used but argon should not exceed 80%.
1.2 130-300A, 16-32V 232A, 26V 15-25mm
PACKAGING DATA
Spools supplied in cardboard carton: 15kg
Resistance to moisture absorption is high, but to maintain the high integrity of the wire surface and prevent any possibility of poro-
sity, it is advised that part-used spools are returned to polythene wrappers.
FUME DATA
33 12 < 0.5 < 0.1 < 0.5 2 5
74 www.metrode.com DS A-40-METCORE DWA 55E | Rev. 01-03/16

Data Sheet A-41
LOW ALLOY STEELS

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
2%Ni FOR IMPROVED TOUGHNESS

Nominally 2.5%Ni low alloy steels. In the as-welded condition the microstructure is
ferritic with a component of acicular ferrite for
optimum toughness.
CMn and low alloy steel plate, pipe, forgings WELDING GUIDELINES
and castings used extensively for service at low Preheat according to base material and thickness.
temperature eg. LT50. Although AWS consumable specifications require
ASTM PWHT many fabrications will be left as-welded.
A203 Grade A & B plate. The need for PWHT will generally be determined
A333 Grade 6 pipe. by applicable design codes.
A350 Grade LF1 & LF2 forgings.
A352 Grade LC2 casting.
BS RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
1501-224 Grade 490B plate. The 1%Ni low alloy consumables (data sheet A-40)
Also proprietary medium tensile steels eg. Hyplus and 3%Ni types (data sheet A-42) are also designed
29 (Corus) and Corten weathering steel (Corus, US
Steels). for applications requiring low temperature
toughness.
APPLICATIONS PRODUCTS AVAILABLE

Fabrication of storage tanks, process plant and
associated pipework where good fracture toughness Process Product Specification
from as-welded joints is demanded down to MMA Tufmet 2Ni.B AWS E8018-C1
temperatures in the region of -60°C. TIG/MIG 2Ni AWS ER80S-Ni2
The addition of about 2.5%Ni improves
microstructural refinement and tolerance to
procedural variations compared to plain CMn weld
metal. It also promotes the formation of a stable
patina as required for matching the characteristics
of weathering steels, and is an alternative to using
matching consumables (data sheet A-70).

TUFMET 2Ni.B
LOW ALLOY STEELS
2.5%NI MMA ELECTRODE FOR GOOD LOW TEMPER ATURE TOUGHNESS

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a basic flux, metal powder type coating on low carbon core wire. Moisture resistant coating giving very low
weld metal hydrogen levels.

AWS A5.5M E8018-C1 H4 QW432 F-No 4
BS EN ISO 2560-A (E 46 6 2Ni B 4 2 H5) QW442 A-No 10
BS EN ISO 2560-B E5518-N5 P U

C Mn Si S P Ni Cr Mo Cu V Nb
min. -- 0.50 -- -- -- 2.00 -- -- -- -- --
max. 0.10 1.25 0.80 0.030 0.030 2.60 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.05 0.05
Typical 0.05 0.75 0.3 0.015 0.010 2.4 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.01 <0.01

As welded or PWHT 605°C/1h * Min. Typical
Tensile strength (MPa) 550-680 ** 600
5d 20 23
Impact ISO-V(J) - 60°C 47 100
- 75°C -- *** 65
* BS & BS EN ISO-A properties are as-welded, AWS & BS EN ISO-B after PWHT.
** Maximum according to DIN 8529 is optional.
*** Typically >30J as-welded, meeting BS 2Ni.LB/AWS E7018-C1L properties.

min. A 70 80 100
max. A 110 140 180
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 350 350 450
kg/carton 12.0 13.8 16.8
STORAGE
Redry 250 – 300°C/1-2h to ensure H2 <10ml/100g, 300-350ºC/1-2h to ensure H2 <5ml/100g.. Maximum 420°C, 3 cycles, 10h total.
Storage of redried electrodes at 100– 200°C in holding ovens, or 50-150ºC in heated quivers: no limit, but maximum 6 weeks
recommended. Recommended ambient storage conditions for opened tins (using plastic lid): < 60% RH, > 18°C.
FUME DATA
14 5 <0.5 <0.1 0.2 <0.1 18 5
76 www.metrode.com DS A-41-TUFMET 2Ni.B | Rev. 01-03/16

2Ni
LOW ALLOY STEELS

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid copper coated wire for TIG and MIG welding.

AWS A5.28M ER80S-Ni2 QW432 F-No 4
EN ISO 636-A W 2 Ni2 (TIG wire) QW442 A-No 10
EN ISO 14341-A G 46 6 M 2Ni2 (MIG wire)

C Mn Si S P Ni Cu
Min. 0.06 0.8 0.40 -- -- 2.00 --
Max. 0.12 1.25 0.80 0.025 0.025 2.75 0.35
Typical 0.08 1 0.5 0.010 0.010 2.5 0.10

Typical values as welded (AW) and TIG MAG: Ar + 5%CO2 MAG: Ar + 20%C02
min *
PWHT 605ºC/1h: AW PWHT AW PWHT AW PWHT
Elongation (%) 4d 24 32 35 28 32 28 32
Impact ISO-V(J) - 60°C 27 175 200 45 140 40 100
-101°C -- -- 34 -- 50 -- 30
Hardness (HV) cap/mid -- 220/190 185/220 240/230 195/185 220/195 185/175
* Minimum properties after PWHT 620ºC/1h according to AWS. Actual tests show conformance as-welded, as required for most
fabrications. Proof stress values below AWS are found after PWHT at 605ºC/1h (=typical practice and PWHT for AWS E8018-C1/
Tufmet 2Ni.B).
Note that superior as-welded toughness may be obtained with Metrode 1Ni.

MIG Ar + 5-20% CO2 * DC+ 1.2 280A, 26V
* Ar + 1-5%O2 and proprietary mixtures also suitable.
Less oxidising shielding gas such as Ar + 5%CO2 produced the best mechanical properties, see above.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG -- 5 kg tube To order 5 kg tube To order
MIG 15kg spool -- -- -- --
FUME DATA
54 6 <0.1 1.5 <0.1 1.2 5
www.metrode.com DS A-41-2Ni | Rev. 01-03/16 77

Data Sheet A-42
LOW ALLOY STEELS

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
TUFMET 3NiB
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION WELDING POSITIONS (ISO/ASME)
3.5%Ni alloyed steel electrode with basic flux, metal powder
type coating on low carbon mild steel core wire. Recovery is PA/1G PB/2F PC/2G PF/3Gu PE/4G
approximately 120% with respect to core wire, 65% with respect
to whole electrode. Moisture resistant coating giving very low weld CHEMICAL COMPOSITION (WELD METAL WT %)
C Mn Si S P Ni
Min. -- 0.30 -- -- -- 3.00
SPECIFICATIONS Max. 0.10 1.25 0.80 0.020 0.030 3.75
AWS A5.5M E8018-C2 H4 Typical 0.05 0.5 0.3 0.01 0.015 3.3
BS EN ISO 2560-A E 46 6 3Ni B 42 ALL-WELD MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
BS EN ISO 2560-B E5518-N7 P As welded or PWHT 605°C/1h(1) min typical
Tensile strength (MPa) 560-680(2) 620
QW432 F-No 4 QW442 A-No 10. Elongation (%) 4d 19 > 22
5d 20 25
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED Reduction of area % -- 70
3.5%Ni alloyed steels specifically for service at cryogenic Impact ISO-V(J) - 60°C -- 100
temperatures down to –80°C - 75°C 30 > 90
(1)
BS & BS EN ISO-A properties are as-welded, AWS & BS EN ISO-B after
Plate PWHT.
(2)
Maximum according to DIN 8529 is optional.
BS1501Grade 503 and A203 Grades D,E,F
Forgings OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC +VE OR AC (OCV: 70V MIN)
BS1503 Grade 503 and ASTM A350 Grade LF3 Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0
min. A 70 80 100
Castings
max. A 110 140 180
BS1504 Grade 503 LT60 and ASTM A352 Grade LC3
Pipe PACKAGING DATA
ASTM A333 Grade 3 Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0
Length (mm) 350 380 450
APPLICATIONS kg/carton 12.0 13.5 16.8
Construction of cryogenic plant and associated pipework eg. Pieces/carton 627 393 243
petrochemical industry, demanding resistance to weld brittle
fracture when operating at temperatures down to -80°C in the STORAGE
manufacture, storage and distribution of volatile liquids and
liquified gases. 3 hermetically sealed ring-pull metal tins per carton, with unlimited
As with Tufmet 2Ni.B, it can be used for welding C-Mn and low shelf life. Direct use from tin will give hydrogen <5ml/100g weld
alloy steels for critical applications demanding a combination of metal during 8h working shift.
strength and reliable toughness down to temperatures in the For electrodes that have been exposed:
region of -60°C. Rebake 250-300°C/1-2h to ensure H2 <10ml/100g, 300-350°C/1-2h
For applications specifying impact properties at -100°C, the use of to ensure H2 <5ml/100g. Maximum 420°C, 3 cycles, 10h total.
matching 3.5%Ni weld metal may be unacceptable because of its
Storage of rebaked electrodes at 100-200°C in holding oven
sensitivity to procedure, heat input etc, which results in excessive
scatter of the impact properties. In this situation nickel-base filler or 50-150°C in heated quiver: no limit, but maximum 6 weeks
metals are usually recommended eg. Metrode 20.70.Nb TIG root, recommended. Recommended ambient storage conditions for
with Nimrod AKS or 182KS fill and cap. For all-TIG applications such opened tins (using plastic lid): < 60% RH, >18°C.
as thin-wall pipework, Metrode 2Ni TIG root followed by 20.70.Nb
may be used, or 20.70.Nb throughout.
There is no matching TIG wire for this electrode, Metrode 2Ni TIG
MICROSTRUCTURE wire is available which is suitable for root runs (data sheet A-41).
In the as-welded condition the microstructure is ferritic with a
component of acicular ferrite for optimum toughness
FUME DATA
WELDING GUIDELINES
Preheat and interpass temperature according to base material 14 5 <0.5 <0.1 0.2 <0.1 18 5
thickness
78 www.metrode.com DS A-42-TUFMET 3NiB | Rev. 01-03/16

Data Sheet A-50
LOW ALLOY STEELS

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
MnMo HIGH STRENGTH STEELS

Low alloy steel consumables with MnMo additions The actual preheat and PWHT requirements
for welding high strength steels. will depend on the base material being welded.
Normally preheat/interpass temperatures will be
in the range 100-250°C.
These consumables are used for a variety of ferritic
CMn and low alloy steels. PWHT
E9018-D1 is used for materials with a minimum The PWHT requirements will depend on a number
tensile strength requirement of 620MPa (90ksi); eg. of factors including, base material, property
AISI 4130 (90ksi condition), ASTM A487 grades 2A, B requirements, need to conform to NACE etc.
& C (cast). Temperatures will normally be about 620°C but
E10018-D2 is used for materials with a minimum when welding 4130 using E10018-D2 temperatures
tensile strength requirement of 690MPa (100ksi); up to about 645°C may be required to temper the
eg. AISI 4130, 4140, 8630; BS970 grades 709M40 HAZ.
(En19); DIN 42CrMo4 (1.7225), 34CrMo4 (1.7220); ASTM
A487 grades 4A, 4B, 4D & 6A (cast).
APPLICATIONS Although MnMo wire is the nearest match to
Fabrication of higher strength steels for use in the the E9018-D1/E10018-D2 electrodes in terms
stress relieved condition. of composition when welding base materials
requiring high temperature or prolonged soak
For offshore oil well-head process pipework and PWHT (eg. 4130) it may not retain the required
fittings, these low nickel consumables satisfy NACE strength. In these circumstances the 1CrMo or
MR0175 requirements intended to ensure resistance 2CrMo wires may prove useful (data sheets A-12
to sulphide-induced stress corrosion cracking in sour and A-13). See also alloy WB36 (data sheet A-23).
service, combined with good sub-zero toughness.
Also finds applications for the repair of medium

strength low alloy steel castings where a stress- PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
relief only (rather than N+T) is to be applied.
E9018-D1 AWS E9018-D1
MICROSTRUCTURE MMA
E10018-D2 AWS E10018-D2
In the stress relieved condition the microstructure TIG/MIG MnMo AWS ER80S-D2
consists of tempered bainite.

E9018-D1
LOW ALLOY STEELS
ALL-POSITIONAL MnMo LOW ALLOY STEEL MMA ELECTRODE

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a basic flux coating on high purity mild steel core wire. Moisture resistant coating provides very low weld

AWS A5.5M E9018-D1 H4 QW432 F-No 4
QW442 A-No 11

min. -- 1.25 -- -- -- -- -- 0.25 --
max. 0.10 1.75 0.80 0.025 0.025 -- -- 0.45 --
Typical 0.07 1.5 0.4 0.01 0.015 0.15 0.15 0.35 0.05

PWHT 620°C/1h: Min. Typical
5d 15 20
- 50°C 30 55

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
kg/carton 12.0 13.8 15.9 16.8
STORAGE
FUME DATA
16 7 <0.1 <0.1 <0.2 17 5
80 www.metrode.com DS A-50-E9018-D1 | Rev. 01-03/16

E10018-D2
LOW ALLOY STEELS

MnMo LOW ALLOY STEEL MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a basic flux coating on high purity mild steel core wire.
Moisture resistant coating provides very low weld metal hydrogen levels.

AWS A5.5M E10018-D2 H4 QW432 F-No 4
BS EN 757 (E 624 MnMoB) QW442 A-No 11

Min. 0.07 1.65 0.20 -- -- -- -- 0.25 --
Max. 0.15 2.00 0.60 0.025 0.025 -- 0.9 0.45 --
Typical 0.10 1.8 0.4 0.01 0.015 0.15 0.6 0.35 0.05
Typical after PWHT: min 620°C/1h * 645°C/4h **
5d 18 21 22
Impact ISO-V(J) 0°C -- -- >100
- 40°C 27 >27 >60
Hardness HV -- 250 230
HRC -- -- <22
* PWHT according to AWS.
** PWHT typically applied to weldments in alloy 4130 to meet <22HRC in HAZ for oilfield sour service (NACE MR0175).

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.0
min. A 70 80 100 140 200
max. A 110 140 180 240 300
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.0
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450 450
kg/carton 13.5 12.6 16.8 17.1 16.5
Pieces/carton 690 351 243 159 105
STORAGE
FUME DATA
16 7 <0.1 <0.1 <0.2 17 5
www.metrode.com DS A-50-E10018-D2 | Rev. 01-03/16 81

MnMo
LOW ALLOY STEELS
SOLID MnMo ALLOYED WIRE FOR TIG AND MIG

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid copper coated wire for TIG and MIG welding.

AWS A5.28M ER80S-D2, ER90S-D2 QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO 16834-B 4M31 QW442 A-No 11
EN ISO 14341-A W 46 3 M G4Mo
EN ISO 14341 A 4Mo / B S4M31
BS EN 440 (G4Mo)

C Mn Si S P Ni Mo Cu
min. 0.07 1.60 0.50 -- -- -- 0.40 --
max. 0.12 2.10 0.80 0.025 0.025 0.15 0.60 0.4
Typical 0.1 1.9 0.6 0.005 0.01 0.05 0.5 0.1

Typical values as-welded TIG MAG Ar + 5%CO2 MAG Ar + 20%CO2
Min*
(AW) & PWHT AW 620°C/1 645°C/4 AW 620°C/1 AW 620°C/1
Tensile strength (MPa) 550 720 640 610 725 >635 625 605
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 470 610 530 530 625 >525 510 490
Elongation (%) 4d 17 27 32 31 29 >25 28 25
Impact ISO-V(J) - 30°C 47 >80 >200 -- >100 -- >55 >100
- 45°C -- >50 >100 >130 >70 >110 -- --
Hardness (HV) -- 250 220 220 235 220 215 205
* Minimum as-welded values are for AWS ER80S-D2. As shown MAG welds using more oxidising shielding gas (higher CO2 + O2) have
lower strength. The AWS classification for ER80S-D2 is based on 100%CO2 which is seldom used; alternatively this wire can also be
classified as ER90S-D2 using low CO2 gas mixtures. Maximum strength is found with Ar + 5%CO2, an economic procedure to obtain
as-welded properties equivalent to AWS ER100S-G (and the closest approximation to electrode E10018-D2).

MIG Ar + 5-20% CO2 * DC+ 1.2 280A, 26V
* Ar + 5%CO2 provides the highest strength and best impact properties, see above.
Other proprietary gas mixtures also suitable.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
MIG 15kg spool -- -- -- --
FUME DATA
55 10 <0.1 <0.1 <0.5 1.2 5
82 www.metrode.com DS A-50-MnMo | Rev. 01-03/16

Data Sheet A-60
LOW ALLOY STEELS

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
HIGH STRENGTH NI-MO LOW ALLOY

A range of Mn-Ni-Mo low alloy consumables covering The microstructure of all the consumables is
tensile strength requirements from 620MPa (90ksi) up predominantly ferrite; some will contain high
to 825MPa (120ksi). Some are designed for as-welded proportions of acicular ferrite for optimum as-
applications whilst others are predominantly used welded toughness (eg. Tufmet 1NiMo and Tufmet
following a stress relief PWHT. 3NiMo).
WELDING GUIDELINES
Preheat according to base material and thickness,
These consumables are used for a variety of high although materials likely to be welded by the
strength steels. Depending on strength requirements,
some examples are: higher strength consumables will normally
TUFMET require 100°C minimum preheat.
1NiMo With some HSLA steels interpass temperatures
API 5A L80; BS 4360 grade 55F
above 200°C may result in a reduction of strength
and toughness.
RQT 601 (Corus); HY80; Navy Q1(N).
PWHT generally dependent on base material
E11018-M
and application, the solid wire ER110S-G is not
Q1(N); HY80; RQT 701 (Corus); QT445; NAXTRA 70; Hystal77.
recommended for applications requiring PWHT.
TUFMET Further information can be found under each
3NiMo individual product.
HY80 & Q1(N);
possibly HY100 & Q2(N).

APPLICATIONS The 1NiMo.B electrode (data sheet A-61) is used
All the consumables are used for a range of high for applications requiring maximum retained
strength low alloy steels. The E11018-M and Tufmet strength after extended PWHT.
3NiMo electrodes in particular are used for military The MnMo consumables (data sheet A-50) may
applications by the MoD and US Navy for construction be suitable for some of the same applications.
and repair of naval craft and submarines. The Tufmet
1NiMo was developed for the offshore industry where
high strength and –50°C toughness is required in the
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
as-welded condition.
All of the consumables also have applications for Process Product Specification
general structural steel fabrications in HSLA steels, Tufmet 1NiMo AWS E9016-G
which may be used for cranes, earth moving equipment, MMA E11018-M AWS E11018-M
and other highly stressed structural components.
Tufmet 3NiMo AWS E12016-G
TIG/MIG ER110S-G AWS ER110S-G

TUFMET 1NiMo
LOW ALLOY STEELS
ALL-POSITIONAL MMA ELECTRODE WITH HIGH STRENGTH AND TOUGHNESS

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a low hydrogen basic flux on a high purity mild steel core wire.
Moisture resistant coating ensures very low weld metal hydrogen levels. Provides minimum strength of 620MPa (90ksi) in the
as-welded and stress-relieved condition.
AWS A5.5M E9016-G H4 QW432 F-No 4
Approval: Statoil R-SF-163 QW442 A-No 10

C Mn Si S P Ni Mo
min. 0.030 1.30 0.25 -- -- 0.6 --
max. 0.075 1.80 0.60 0.02 0.02 1.0 0.3
Typical 0.05 1.5 0.35 0.008 0.01 0.85 0.15

Typical values as-welded and PWHT Min. As-welded PWHT 600°C/4-8h
Tensile strength (MPa) 620-730 670 630
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 550-660 600 525
5d 20 25 --
Impact ISO-V(J) 0°C -- -- 130
- 50°C 60 >100 >100
OPERATING PARAMETERS, AC (OCV: 60V MIN) OR DC -VE

Operation on DC+ve is not as favourable as above,
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 80 100 140
max. A 100 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
kg/carton 13.5 15.0 18.0 16.8
STORAGE
3 hermetically sealed ring-pull metal tins per carton, with unlimited shelf life.
Direct use from tin will give hydrogen <5ml/100g weld metal during 8h working shift.
recommended.
FUME DATA
14 <7 <0.5 <0.5 0.2 18 5
84 www.metrode.com DS A-60-TUFMET 1NiMo | Rev. 01-03/16

E11018-M
LOW ALLOY STEELS

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a low hydrogen basic, metal powder type, flux on a high purity mild steel core wire.
Moisture resistant coating ensures very low weld metal hydrogen levels.
Conforms to military electrode specification used for Q1(N) and HY80 type steels used in naval construction by MoD and US Navy.
Also suitable for similar high strength steels requiring a minimum strength of 760MPa (110ksi) in the as-welded and stress-
relieved condition.

AWS A5.5M E11018-M H4 QW432 F-No 4
QW442 A-No 12

min. -- 1.30 -- -- -- -- 1.50 0.25 --
max. 0.10 1.80 0.60 0.030 0.030 0.40 2.50 0.50 0.05
Typical 0.05 1.7 0.35 0.012 0.012 0.2 2.2 0.4 0.02
Typical as welded and PWHT min As-welded PWHT 620°C/2h
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 680-760 730 760
5d 20 22 16
Reduction of area (%) -- 65 --
Impact ISO-V(J) + 20°C -- 125 --
- 50°C 30 80 40
Lateral expansion mm (mils) - 50°C -- 0.9 (37) --
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
kg/carton 12.0 14.1 16.2 16.8
STORAGE
recommended.
FUME DATA
14 <7 <0.5 <0.5 0.2 18 5
www.metrode.com DS A-60-E11018-M | Rev. 01-03/16 85

TUFMET 3NiMo
LOW ALLOY STEELS

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a low hydrogen basic flux on a high purity mild steel core wire. Moisture resistant coating ensures very low
weld metal hydrogen levels.
The electrode was specially designed for welding HY80 and Q1(N) castings which are N+T following welding. Also suitable for other
high strength steels requiring minimum tensile strength of about 820MPa (120ksi) in the as-welded and stress-relieved condition;
or yield strength up to about 800MPa in the as-welded condition.
AWS A5.5M E12016-G H4 QW432 F-No 4
Approvals: MoD NES 769 for Q1(N) in Q+T condition. QW442 A-No 10

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo
min. 0.02 0.8 -- -- -- 0.6 3.5 0.4
max. 0.06 1.5 0.5 0.025 0.025 1.0 4.5 0.8
Typical 0.045 1.2 0.4 0.01 0.015 0.8 4 0.5
Stress relieved Q+T 900°C/1-6h WQ +
Typical values min As-welded
600-620°C/1h 635-650°C/1-6h WQ
Tensile strength (MPa) 830 950 920 710-770
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 740 870 870 590-660
Elongation (%) 4d 14 20 22 --
5d -- 18 20 20-25
Reduction of area (%) -- 55 58 65-70
Impact ISO-V(J) 0°C -- 65 -- --
- 50°C -- 45 30 65-135
CTOD (mm) - 5°C -- -- -- >0.46
min. A 80 100 140
max. A 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 350 450 450
kg/carton 13.8 17.7 16.5
STORAGE
recommended.
FUME DATA
14 <7 <0.5 <0.5 0.2 18 5
86 www.metrode.com DS A-60-TUFMET 3NiMo | Rev. 01-03/16

ER110S-G
LOW ALLOY STEELS

HIGH STRENGTH SOLID WIRE FOR TIG AND MIG
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid copper wire for TIG and MIG welding of Q+T steels requiring as-welded tensile strength up to about 760MPa (110ksi).
It is not recommended for applications requiring PWHT.

(Classified on the basis of mechanical properties in the as-welded condition) QW442 A-No 12
BS EN ISO 16834-A (Mn3Ni1CrMo)

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo V Cu
min. 0.05 1.4 0.4 -- -- 0.2 1.2 0.2 0.04 --
max. 0.12 1.8 0.8 0.020 0.020 0.4 1.8 0.4 0.13 0.25
Typical 0.1 1.6 0.5 0.01 0.01 0.3 1.4 0.3 0.09 0.1

MAG MAG
Typical values as welded min TIG
Ar+5%CO2 Ar+20%CO2
Elongation (%) 4d 15 23 21 21
Impact ISO-V(J) - 20°C -- 120 60 50
Hardness (HV) cap/mid -- 300 280 255
* Minimum values for AWS ER110S-G MAG welds are typically obtained with low CO2 content shielding gases;
more oxidising gases give AWS ER100S-G properties, as shown above.

MIG Ar + 5-20% CO2 * DC+ 1.2 280A, 26V
* Ar + 5%CO2 provides the highest strength and best impact properties, see above.
Other proprietary gas mixtures also suitable.
PACKAGING DATA
TIG -- -- 5 kg tube
MIG 20kg spool 15kg spool --
FUME DATA
50 10 1 0.4 <1.5 1.2 5
www.metrode.com DS A-60-ER110S-G | Rev. 02-08/16 87

Data Sheet A-61
LOW ALLOY STEELS

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
1NiMo.B
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION WELDING GUIDELINES
MMA electrode with low hydrogen basic flux coating on Preheat and PWHT requirements dependent on base
high purity mild steel core wire. Moisture resistant coating material.
ensures very low weld metal hydrogen levels. WELDING POSITIONS (ISO/ASME)
Recovery is about 120% with respect to the core wire, 65%
with respect to whole electrode. PA/1G PB/2F PC/2G PF/3Gu PE/4G
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.5M E9018-G H4 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION (WELD METAL WT %)
BS EN 757 E 55 4 1NiMo B 3 2 H5 C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu
Min. 0.05 1.0 -- -- -- -- 0.8 0.20 --
APPROVALS TÜV
Max. 0.12 1.4 0.5 0.020 0.025 0.3 1.2 0.50 0.10
Typical 0.07 1.2 0.3 0.01 0.01 0.1 1.0 0.4 0.05
QW432 F-No 4 QW442 A-No 10. PWHT 610-650°C/1-6h min typical
Tensile strength (MPa) 620-780* 640-700
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 530 ** 540-630
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED Elongation (%) 4d 17 24-30
ASTM 5d -- 21-26
A302 grades C &D.
Impact ISO-V(J) - 20°C -- 75-110
A508 class 1, 1A, 2 & 3. - 40°C -- 60
A533 grades A-D, class 1 & 2. - 60°C -- 45
AISI Hardness (HV) AW -- 220
* Maximum according to DIN 8529 is optional.
4130 and similar alloys. ** Meets 550MPa minimum (DIN) according to yield point.
BS
1501 grades 271 & 281.
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
3604 grades HFS 591 & CFS 591.
min. A 70 80 100 140
DIN max. A 110 140 180 240
15NiCuMoNb5 (1.6368).
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
APPLICATIONS Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
Designed for welding low alloy steels used for pressure kg/carton 12.9 13.5 16.8 18.0
vessels (often thick wall) and other applications where Pieces/carton 546 369 240 171
high strength must be maintained after extended, or
STORAGE
multiple, PWHT cycles. These steels may also be used
3 hermetically sealed ring-pull metal tins per carton, with
at modest elevated temperature and tests have shown
unlimited shelf life. Direct use from tin will give hydrogen
typically 15% reduction in tensile strength at +300°C <5ml/100g weld metal during 8h working shift.
compared to the room temperature values for 1NiMo.B For electrodes that have been exposed:
weld metal. Redry 250-300°C/1-2h to ensure H2 <10ml/100g, 300-350°C/1-
It is also used for welding type 4130, and other high 2h to ensure H2 <5ml/100g. Maximum 420°C, 3 cycles, 10h
strength steels, requiring good sub-zero toughness for total.
oilfield and well-head equipment. In comparison with Storage of redried electrodes at 100-200°C in holding oven
the MnMo types (data sheet A-50) 1NiMo.B has improved or 50-150°C in heated quiver: no limit, but maximum 6 weeks
resistance to softening at high tempering parameters. recommended. Recommended ambient storage conditions
for opened tins (using plastic lid): < 60% RH, >18°C.
MICROSTRUCTURE
FUME DATA
In the PWHT condition the microstructure consists of
tempered high strength ferrite.
14 5 0.5 <0.1 <0.2 <0.1 18 5
88 www.metrode.com DS A-61-1NiMo.B | Rev. 01-03/16

Data Sheet A-70
LOW ALLOY STEELS

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
LOW ALLOY Ni-Cu CONSUMABLES FOR

WEATHERING STEELS
Low alloy steel with Ni-Cu-Cr additions for welding Preheat according to joint thickness and restraint.
weathering steels. Normally left in the as-welded condition so no
PWHT required.
ASTM
The Chromet 1L electrode (data sheet A-12) may
A588 Grades A, B, C, K. be preferred for welding vanadium treated
A242 Types 1, 2.
Corten B1 steel intended for non-critical elevated
DIN temperature applications eg. chimney stacks.
1.8960, 1.8961, 1.8963
BS RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
4360 Grades WR50A, WR50B, WR50C. The 2%Ni consumables (data sheet A-41) provide
Proprietary comparable weathering resistance and are also
Corten A, B1 (Corus and US Steel) compatible with the weathering steels
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
APPLICATIONS
Mainly used for weathering steels containing a Process Product Specification
similar controlled copper addition and claimed MMA 1NiCu.B AWS E8018-W2
to offer a three-fold improvement in corrosion TIG/MIG/SAW ER80S-W AWS ER80S-G
resistance and a more stable patina compared with SAW flux LA436 BS EN SA AB 1
plain CMn steel.
Applications include architectural structures,
bridges and exhaust gas flues, chimneys.
This weld metal also resists preferential corrosion
in seawater, particularly in arctic waters high in
oxygen and salinity, and has applications for welding
micro-alloyed and CMn steels in ice-breaker vessels
and off-shore structures.
MICROSTRUCTURE
In the as-welded condition the microstructure is
ferritic with a high proportion of acicular ferrite for
optimum toughness.

1NiCu.B
LOW ALLOY STEELS
MMA ELECTRODE FOR WELDING CORTEN TYPE WEATHERING STEELS

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a basic flux, metal powder type coating on low carbon mild steel core wire.
AWS A5.5M E8018-W2 H4 QW432 F-No 4
BS EN ISO 2560-B E5518-NCC1 A QW442 A-No (not allocated)

min. 0.04 0.50 0.35 -- -- 0.45 0.40 -- 0.30
max. 0.12 1.30 0.80 0.02 0.03 0.70 0.80 -- 0.75
Typical 0.06 1 0.6 0.01 0.015 0.6 0.6 0.02 0.5

Tensile strength (MPa) 550-720 * 610
5d 17 20
Impact ISO-V(J) + 20°C -- 150
-20°C 27 100
-40°C -- 70
-60°C -- 40
* Maximum according to DIN 8529 is optional.

min. A 70 80 100
max. A 110 140 180
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 350 350 450
kg/carton 12.9 13.5 16.8
STORAGE
Storage of redried electrodes at 100 – 200°C in holding oven or 50-150ºC in heated quivers:: no limit, but maximum 6 weeks
FUME DATA
14 5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.1 18 5
90 www.metrode.com DS A-70-1NiCu.B | Rev. 01-03/16

ER80S-W
LOW ALLOY STEELS
LOW ALLOY STEELS

SOLID WIRE FOR TIG, MIG AND SAW OF CORTEN WEATHERING STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid copper coated wire for TIG, MIG and SAW welding.

BS EN ISO 16834-A (Mn3Ni1Cu) QW442 A-No not allocated

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Cu
Min. 0.04 1.0 0.5 -- -- -- 0.6 0.2
Max. 0.12 1.6 1.0 0.025 0.025 0.4 1.2 0.6
Typical 0.09 1.4 0.7 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.8 0.4

PWHT 760°C / 4h or equivalent Min. Ar-20%CO2
Yield stress (MPa) -- 525
- 50°C -- 75
Hardness (HV) mid/cap -- 190/245

MIG Ar + 5-20% CO2 DC+ 1.2 280A, 26V
SAW LA436 DC+ 2.5 350A, 28V
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.4 2.5
TIG -- -- 5 kg tube 5 kg tube --
MIG 15kg spool 15kg spool -- -- --
SAW -- -- -- -- 25kg spool
FUME DATA
52 8 0.2 0.5 < 0.5 1.6 5
www.metrode.com DS A-70-ER80S-W | Rev. 01-03/16 91

Data Sheet A-80
LOW ALLOY STEELS

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
RAILROD
MMA electrode for rail welding utilising basic low hydrogen
flux coating with low moisture absorption characteristics. PA/1G PB/2F PC/2G
Recovery is about 110% with respect to core wire, 65%

with respect to whole electrode. CHEMICAL COMPOSITION (WELD METAL WT %)
SPECIFICATIONS
Min. 0.06 0.7 0.2 -- -- 2.0 -- --
None strictly applicable, nearest AWS E12016-G and nearest Max. 0.12 1.5 0.8 0.020 0.025 2.6 0.5 0.5
BS EN E69 Z Z B. Typical 0.09 1 0.5 0.008 0.012 2.3 0.2 0.2
QW432 F-No - QW442 A-No - PWHT 610-650°C/1-6h typical
Rail steels with up to 0.8% carbon and nominal tensile Elongation (%) 4d 17
strength of > 700 MPa. Impact ISO-V(J) - 20°C 18-48
APPLICATIONS - 40°C 14-43
This electrode is especially designed for the butt welding Hardness (HV) 280
of rails with square preparation. It can also be used * For comparison, typical thermit rail weld: 8J @ 20°C, 5J @ 0°C.
for welding similar cross-sections such as bars, thick
plates, flanges, etc. The electrode is specially designed OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC +VE OR AC (OCV: 70V MIN)
to enable good fusion to the side walls to take place Diameter (mm) 3.2 5.0 6.0
without excessive slag interference. Weld metal has good min. A 100 200 240
resistance to collapse under compression by rolling loads. max. A 160 280 360
Applications include rails for rolling stock and crane rails
in dockyards, mines, steelworks and petrochemical plants. PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 3.2 * 5.0 6.0 *
Note that this technique has not been generally accepted
as an alternative to the thermit process for in-situ welding Length (mm) 350 450 450
of passenger track. kg/carton 15.0 17.7 18.3
MICROSTRUCTURE Pieces/carton 447 183 135
Mainly auto-tempered bainitic ferrite. * supplied to order
WELDING GUIDELINES STORAGE

Preheat typically 200°C for >0.5%C rail steel, increasing 3 hermetically sealed ring-pull metal tins per carton,
to 300°C for >0.7%C rail steel. It is important to maintain with unlimited shelf life. Direct use from tin will give
these minimum temperatures during welding. Maximum hydrogen <5ml/100g weld metal during 8h working shift.
suggested interpass temperature 400°C. Slow cool under For electrodes that have been exposed:
insulation after welding. Redry 250-300°C/1-2h to ensure H2 <10ml/100g,
This electrode is normally used in the downhand (flat) 300-350°C/1-2h to ensure H2 <5ml/100g. Maximum 420°C,
position with a slag-over-slag technique. Rail ends are 3 cycles, 10h total.
square butt welded by setting 15-20mm apart with a Storage of redried electrodes at 100-200°C in holding
prepared 4-6mm thick steel insert at the weld root, then oven or 50-150°C in heated quiver: no limit, but
copper shims are stacked to form an enclosure for the weld maximum 6 weeks recommended. Recommended
pool whilst allowing excess slag to run free. ambient storage conditions for opened tins (using plastic
Good surface profile underneath the weld root area will lid): < 60% RH, >18°C.
maximise fatigue resistance of the joint. Initial support for FUME DATA
depositing the root can utilise a copper backing plate or Fume composition, wt % typical:
wire-reinforced window glass. Before and during welding Fe Mn Ni Cr Cu Pb F OES (mg/m3)
it is important to use a sufficient preheat-interpass range, 15 5 < 0.2 0.8 < 0.2 < 0.1 18 5
and to retard cooling.
92 www.metrode.com DS A-80-railrod | Rev. 01-03/16

Section B : STAINLESS STEELS HANWORTH LANE, CHERTSEY
Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
MARTENSITIC STAINLESS STEEL CONSUMABLES
STAINLESS STEELS
Stainless steels begin with about 12%Cr, leading to a series of plain chromium steels with up to 28%Cr. At 0.1%C the leanest alloy type
410 is just martensitic, but transformation hardening is suppressed by increasing chromium in types 430 and 446, which are essentially
ferritic. Unfortunately, chromium also progressively raises the ductile-to-brittle transition temperature and restricts mechanical
properties. However, this is controlled by adding some nickel to form the basis of 12-17%Cr martensitics with greatly improved
properties, or 20-26%Cr duplex alloys (eg. data sheets B-60 to B-63).
This section deals with consumables giving compositions and properties close to those of the more common martensitic stainless
base materials. All are low hydrogen types and most have rutile flux coverings for use in the flat and H-V positions, since welds are
more common in plate, forgings and castings than fixed pipework. Post Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT) is mandatory, particularly for
tempering the weld and HAZ of martensitic types. Procedural guidelines are given on relevant data sheets.
Excluding specialised proprietary creep-resistant 'super 12%Cr' martensitic stainless steels, the most common types can be broadly
sub-divided into 3 groups: plain chromium (410, 420), chromium-nickel soft-martensitic (CA6NM or 410NiMo), and precipitation
hardening (FV520, 17-4PH or 630). Raising carbon in 410 makes a much harder martensitic cutlery or tool steel type 420. Combining
0.15% carbon with 2% nickel turns ferritic 430 into a much stronger and tougher hybrid 431. Replacing carbon with more nickel in
alloys of up to 17%Cr gives tougher and more ductile 'soft' martensitic steels with better weldability. The new supermartensitics are
an improved extension of this group, which are currently welded using superduplex consumables.
Further additions of copper and other alloying enables these standard and proprietary alloys to be precipitation hardened during heat
treatment, making them the strongest of all stainless steels with useful ductility and toughness. Unfortunately, as alloying is raised
for strength or corrosion resistance, the as-cooled weld and HAZ may not fully transform to martensite without special PWHT. Not
far beyond this limit lie austenitic stainless steels (data sheets B-30 to B-35).
Compared with austenitic stainless steels, procedures for martensitics are complicated by the need for hydrogen cracking control
(particularly in thicker sections), and the need for PWHT which is most inconvenient for precipitation hardening types. To overcome
the need for PWHT of precipitation hardening types, two simplified alternatives are suggested with some compromise in strength:
use a leaner type 410NiMo with single PWHT, or duplex type (data sheet B-60, B-61 or B-62) and no PWHT. If required, the toughness
of matching welds in alloy 410 can be improved with a special 13%Cr-1.5%Ni variant, which might also be considered for alloy 431.
Again, a dissimilar type such as 309L (data sheet B-50) could be used without PWHT under some conditions.
Ferritic stainless steels are also produced with 12%Cr by lowering carbon and adding Al (alloy 405) or Ti (409). Hybrid utility ferritics
with controlled martensite (such as Cromweld 3CR12) have emerged more recently; a dissimilar type 309L with no PWHT is usual for
these. A specialised group of high purity 18-26% Cr+Mo superferritics are ideally welded with matching TIG filler, but rarely
encountered. The remaining heat-resistant plain 17-28%Cr ferritics are welded with matching consumables and preferably given
PWHT. Better as-welded properties are obtained using a 25%Cr-5%Ni electrode, particularly for the bulk of heavier welds.
The lower strength and non-hardenability of ferritics makes them less prone but not immune to hydrogen cracking. With increasing
chromium, ambient sensitivity to brittle cracking increases at notches or stress concentrations, so preheat is often advised for alloys
with 17%Cr or more. Grain growth in the HAZ is also a limiting feature of weldment properties particularly ductility and toughness.
The possibility of hot cracking in these and martensitic weld metals is poorly documented and in practice does not occur with the low
impurity levels typically present.
www.metrode.com DS B-01 | Rev. 01-03/16 93

13.RMP E410-26 E 13 R 5 2
MMA
B-10 410 13.1.BMP (E410-15) (E 13 B 5 2)
TIG/MIG 12Cr ER410 13
13.4.Mo.L.R E410NiMo-26 E 13 4 R 5 2
MMA
13.4.Mo.L.B E410NiMo-25 E 13 4 B 6 2
B-11 410NiMo
TIG/MIG ER410NiMo (ER410NiMo) 13 4
FCW Supercore 410NiMo E410NiMoT1-1/4 T 13 4 P C/M 2
STAINLESS STEELS
FV520-1 - -
MMA
17.4.PH/ 17.4.Cu.RL - -
B-12
FV520 FV520-B - -
TIG/MIG
17-4PH ER630 -
STANDARD AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL CONSUMABLES

The stainless steels in most widespread use are standard austenitic types. They combine general ease of fabrication with useful
properties over a wide range of temperatures. Low carbon and other grades, effectively immune to HAZ corrosion (once known as
weld decay), are produced economically by continuous casting, a process which relies on a particular solidification mode that also
guarantees welds their resistance to hot cracking.
Consumables in this section are intended to match austenitic stainless steels, and some are modified for special service properties.
The majority of electrodes have rutile or acid-rutile flux coverings for ease of use, although improved basic types are gaining
popularity for fixed pipework. Many types have family variants optimised for particular user requirements: Supermet for downhand
and HV welds, Ultramet (rutile) for all-positional welding, Ultramet P (rutile) and Ultramet B (basic) types for pipewelding, Vertamet for
higher speed vertical-down welding, and Supercore for flux cored wires.
For normal service below about 400°C, it is common to weld low carbon 304L with 308L consumables, and Ti-stabilised 321 or
unstabilised 304 with Nb-stabilised 347, although either is suitable for any combination of these 19%Cr-9%Ni alloys. Similarly,
19%Cr-12%Ni-2.5%Mo type 316L can be used instead of 318 (Nb-stabilised 316) for 316 and 316Ti as well as parent 316L. Above about
400°C 'H' grades are usual, and these high temperature weld metals with >0.04% carbon for strength and stability are covered in
Section C. For cryogenic service, see below.
Austenitics are not thermally hardenable and in practice are annealed by quenching. Hydrogen is soluble in austenite and does not
cause weld cracking. Preheat is not needed or desirable except possibly to eliminate condensation. Interpass and heat input control
is usually more important in thinner sections to minimise distortion, since austenitics have lower thermal conductivity and higher
expansion rates than lower alloy steels. PWHT is rarely applied, although solution treatment may be specified in procedures for
upgrading castings.
Two interrelated issues have generated voluminous literature in connection with welding austenitics: ferrite and hot cracking. Only
a summary is possible here. Fully austenitic weld metal is potentially sensitive to solidification cracking during deposition as well as
microfissuring in reheated beads of multipass welds. Its prevention is helped by low heat input, controlling impurities and silicon
content and raising manganese (low silica rutile or basic fluxes are more suitable than acid rutile types here). However, when
composition balance promotes some weld metal ferrite, and in particular when ferrite is the leading phase formed during
solidification, abrupt resistance to cracking occurs - even in contaminated welds. The benefit of ferrite in weld deposits (typically
3-10FN in standard types) has been known for decades and is routinely measured and controlled in electrode production. Alternatively,
to predict ferrite from composition, Schaeffler (later Espy), DeLong and latest WRC diagrams progressively improve in accuracy.
However, the deeper significance of a primary ferritic solidification mode is shown in the Suutala diagram: above a Cr/Ni equivalent
ratio of 1.5, few welds crack. The new WRC diagram shows this boundary. Since the same principle applies to parent material, the
likelihood of cracking in autogenous or diluted welds can be checked - including those in free-machining grades with high sulphur or
selenium.
An arbitrary ferrite limit of 8-12FN is common, although ASME III (nuclear code) permits up to 18FN and castings often exceed it to
raise stress-corrosion resistance. However, for service down to –130°C, a maximum of about 8FN is desirable, or less than 5FN at
–196°C. Fully austenitic welds are therefore toughest, but 308L and 316L consumables are available with 2-5FN controlled ferrite (suffix
CF on data sheets B-37 & B-38) which meet the usual criterion of >0.38mm (15 mils) Charpy lateral expansion. Ferrite is also limited
for two other service conditions. For high temperature service (300H products in Section C) control of ferrite, carbon and total alloying
minimises formation of brittle intermetallic phases. To resist nitric acid or the Huey test, molybdenum-bearing weld metal such as
316L must contain no ferrite (suffix NF), because unlike 308L it is preferentially attacked. Modified fully austenitic 316L (data sheet
B-33) is also useful for its cryogenic and non-magnetic properties.also useful for its cryogenic and non-magnetic properties.
94 www.metrode.com DS B-01 | Rev. 01-03/16

Consumables for high strength low alloy steels requiring tensile strengths from 620MPa up to 825MPa
Supermet 308L E308L-17 E 19 9 L R 3 2
Ultramet 308L E308L-16 E 19 9 L R 3 2
MMA
Ultramet 308LP E308L-16 E 19 9 L R 1 1
Ultramet B308L E308L-15 E 19 9 L B 4 2
TIG 308S92 ER308L W 19 9 L
B-30 308L
MIG Supermig 308LSi ER308LSi G 19 9 L Si
STAINLESS STEELS
SAW 308S92 ER308L S 19 9 L
Supercore 308L E308LT0-1/4 T 19 9 L R C/M 3
FCW Supercore 308LP E308LT1-1/4 T 19 9 L P C/M 2
Superoot 308L R308LT1-5 TS308L-R I1
Ultramet 347 E347-16 E 19 9 Nb R32
MMA
Ultramet B347 E347-15 E 19 9 Nb B 4 2
B-31 347 TIG/MIG/SAW 347S96 ER347 19 9 Nb
MIG Supermig 347Si ER347Si G 19 9 Nb Si
FCW Supercore 347 E347T0-1/4 T19 9 Nb R C/M 3
Supermet 316L E316L-17 E 19 12 3 L R 3 2
Ultramet 316L E316L-16 E 19 12 3 L R 3 2
MMA
Ultramet 316LP E316L-16 E 19 12 3 L R 11
Ultramet B316L E316L-15 E 19 12 3 L B 4 2
TIG 316S92 ER316L W 19 12 3 L
B-32 316L
MIG Supermig 316LSi ER316LSi G 19 12 3 L Si
SAW 316S92 ER316L S 19 12 3 L
Supercore 316L E316LT0-1/4 T 19 12 3 L R C/M 3
FCW Supercore 316LP E316LT1-1/4 T 19 12 3 L P C/M 2
Superoot 316L R316LT1-5 TS316L-R I1
Ultramet 316NF (E316LMn-16) E 18 15 3 L R 3 2
MMA
Ultramet B316NF (E316LMn-15) E 18 15 3 L B 4 2
B-33 316NF
TIG/MIG ER316MnNF ER316LMn 20 16 3 Mn L
FCW Supercore 316NF (E316LT0-4) (T 18 16 5 N L R C/M 3)
MMA Supermet 318 E318-17 E 19 12 3 Nb R 3 2
B-34 318
TIG/MIG/SAW 318S96 ER318 19 12 3 Nb
MMA Ultramet 317L E317L-16 E 19 13 4 N L R 3 2
B-35 317L TIG/MIG ER317L ER317L 19 13 4 L
FCW Supercore 317LP E317LT1-1/4 (T 19 13 4 N L P C/M 2)
Ultramet 308LCF E308L-16 E 19 9 L R 3 2
MMA
Ultramet B308LCF E308L-15 E 19 9 L B 4 2
B-37 308LCF TIG ER308LCF ER308L 19 9 L
SAW ER308LCF ER308L 19 9 L
FCW Supercore 308LCF E308LT1-1/4J T 19 9 L P C/M 2
Ultramet 316LCF E316L-16 T 19 9 L P C/M 2
MMA
Ultramet B316LCF E316L-15 E 19 12 3 L B 4 2
B-38 316LCF TIG ER316LCF ER316L 19 12 3 L
SAW ER316LCF ER316L 19 12 3 L
FCW Supercore 316LCF E316LT1-1/4J (T 19 12 3 L P C/M 2)

309L AND 309MO CONSUMABLES FOR DISSIMILAR WELDING
There are three basic variants of 23%Cr-12%Ni type 309 consumables: unstabilised, Nb-stabilised and Mo-bearing. All are typically
low carbon (< 0.04%C) with ferrite above 10FN and they are essentially over-alloyed versions of standard austenitic consumables 308L,
347 and 316L respectively. The original purpose of this over-alloying was to compensate for the effect of dilution when used as the
first buffer layer in welding stainless-clad mild steel, for which they are still used. Choice of the appropriate variant is logically related
to the alloy required for subsequent and finishing layers.
STAINLESS STEELS
However, as a consequence of their versatility, types 309L and 309Mo have also become two of the most widely used consumables
for dissimilar metal welds. A 309L type is most appropriate where one side of a joint is a stainless steel and the other side mild or low
alloy steel. The 12%Cr utility ferritics are also usually welded with this type. Consumables of type 309Mo have considerably greater
tolerance to dilution conferred by a higher ferrite content and for many applications they compete effectively with type 312 (data
sheet E-22).
Nb-stabilised type 309Nb should be used more cautiously because the presence of niobium can make this weld metal more prone to
hot cracking than the others if dilution conditions lead to a microstructure without ferrite. As a result of the embrittlement of ferrite,
PWHT is avoided for 309L types unless some reduction of ductility or toughness is acceptable. In conjunction with higher carbon base
materials, PWHT can also intensify carbide precipitation at the fusion boundary. Again, there are reasons to suspect that the
presence of Nb may exaggerate this effect.
For the above and other reasons, 309L types are not used in weldments for service at temperatures above about 300°C, or lower than
about –50°C. In these cases, nickel-base weld metal is used (see data sheets D-10 and D-11). A specially controlled type (suffix CF) is
available to match as closely as possible the heat-resisting parent alloy type 309 (data sheet C-21). Also see the 308Mo (armour
welding), 307 and 312 types in Section E for general purpose dissimilar welding applications.

Supermet 309L E309L-17 E 23 12 L R
Ultramet 309L E309L-16 E 23 12 L R
MMA
Ultramet 309LP E309L-16 E 23 12 L R
Ultramet B309L E309L-15 E 23 12 L B
B-50 309L TIG 309S92 ER309L W 23 12 L
MIG Supermig 309LSi ER309LSi G 23 12 L Si
SAW 309S92 ER309L S 23 12 L
Supercore 309L E309LT0-1/4 T 23 12 L R
FCW
Supercore 309LP E309LT1-1/4 T 23 12 L P
Supermet 309Mo E309LMo-17 E 23 12 2 L R
MMA Ultramet B309Mo E309LMo-15 E 23 12 2 L B
Vertamet 309Mo E309LMo-17 E 23 12 2 L R
B-51 309Mo
TIG/MIG/SAW ER309Mo (ER309Mo) 23 12 2 L
Supercore 309Mo E309LMoT0-1/4 T 23 12 2 L R C/M 3
FCW
Supercore 309MoP E309LMoT1-1/4 T 23 12 2 L P C/M 2
B-53 309Nb MMA Ultramet 309Nb E309Cb-16 BS: 23.12.Nb.R
SUPERAUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL CONSUMABLES

LEAN DUPLEX, DUPLEX AND SUPERDUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL CONSUMABLES
Although duplex and superaustenitic stainless steels are distinct alloy groups, they are both designed to resist severe corrosion and
in some cases compete with each other. The duplex types have considerably higher strength. All have greatly increased resistance
to stress-corrosion compared with the standard austenitics. High resistance to general corrosion and especially pitting in high
chloride media is obtained with increased levels of chromium, molybdenum and nitrogen.
Duplex types are sub-divided into three groups based on their typical pitting resistance equivalent, PRE (%Cr + 3.3%Mo + 16%N).
Standard duplex types with typically 22%Cr have a PRE of around 35 and superduplex types with typically 25%Cr have a PRE above
40. Parent material composition and processing is designed to give a microstructure balanced with 50:50 ferrite and austenite. Weld
metals have similar composition except that nickel is increased to control ferrite in the as-welded condition within a desirable range
of 25-60% for optimum mechanical and corrosion properties. Nitrogen additions also play an essential role in promoting austenite
re-formation in weld metal and parent HAZ, as well as raising the pitting resistance.

The third group of duplex alloys, the lean duplex types, have a PRE of about 25 with corrosion performance comparable to 316L so they
are generally not used in highly corrosive environments. The main use has been for structural applications where the high strength
is beneficial. The lean duplex stainless steels are so called because some of the higher cost alloying, particularly Ni, is reduced to lower
the cost. The lean duplex types can be welded with standard duplex consumables but matching lean duplex consumables are also
offered (data sheet B-59).
In welding standard duplex alloys in general fabrication, procedures similar to the standard austenitics are usually satisfactory.
However, these alloys are frequently used for pipework in which root corrosion performance is critical and this requires more stringent
procedural control. Such controls are even more important for the superduplex alloys. Technical profiles are available which give
STAINLESS STEELS
guidance on these issues.
The superaustenitic stainless steels occupy a region of alloying between the standard austenitics and nickel-base alloys. (In nickel
base alloys, nickel rather than iron forms the major balance of alloying). Since these alloys are fully austenitic, controlled interpass
temperatures and heat input are desirable to minimise any possibility of hot cracking. Note that although a matching electrode type
20.18.6.Cu.R is available for the most common 6%Mo superaustenitic type S31254, this is only used when post-weld solution treatment
is carried out. Otherwise S31254, and other superaustenitic alloys, are normally welded with overmatching nickel base types (Section
D).

Ultramet 904L E385-16 E 20 25 5 CuNL R
MMA
B-40 904L Ultramet B904L E385-15 E 20 25 5 CuNL B
TIG/MIG 20.25.4.Cu ER385 20 25 5 CuNL
B-41 20 MMA E320LR-15 E320LR-15 -
MMA E825L-15 - DIN: EL-NiCr28Mo
B-42 825
TIG/MIG 82-50 ERNiFeCr-1 BS: NA41
B-45 310L MMA 25.20.LR - -
B-46 310MoLN MMA Ultramet B310MoLN - E 25 22 2 N L B
B-47 Matching 6%Mo MMA 20.18.6.Cu.R - -
MMA Ultramet 2304 - -
B-59 Lean duplex
FCW Supercore 2304P - -
Supermet 2205 - -
Ultramet 2205 E2209-16 E 22 9 3 N L R
MMA
Supermet 2205AR E2209-17 E 22 9 3 L N R
2205XKS E2209-15 E 22 9 3 N L B
B-60 Duplex
TIG/MIG/SAW ER329N ER2209 22 9 3 N L
MCW Supercore M2205 EC2209 T 22 9 3 N L M12 3
Supercore 2205 E2209T0-1/4 T 22 9 3 N L R C/M 3
FCW
Supercore 2205P E2209T1-1/4 T 22 9 3 N L P C/M 2
MMA Zeron® 100XKS E2595-15 E 25 9 4 N L B
Zeron® 100
B-61 TIG/MIG/SAW Zeron® 100X ER2594 25 9 4 N L
superduplex
FCW Supercore Z100XP E2594T1-4 TS 2594-F M21 1
2507XKS E2594-15 E 25 9 4 N L B
MMA
Ultramet 2507 E2594-16 E 25 9 4 N L R
2507
B-62 TIG 2507 ER2594 W 25 9 4 N L
superduplex
Supercore 2507 E2594T0-4 T 25 9 4 N L R M21 3
FCW
Supercore 2507P E2594T1-4 T 25 9 4 N L P M21 2
MMA Supermet 2506Cu E2553-16 E 25 9 4 CuNL R
B-63 2553
FCW Supercore 2507Cu - -
Matching Supermet 2506 - BS: 25.6.2.R
- MMA
composition Supermet 2507Cu - -

NUCLEAR APPLICATIONS
The next group consumables are intended for nuclear power applications. There are two types firstly those with an (N) suffix designed
to meet the requirements of the French RCC-M Nuclear Construction Code (data sheets B-80, B-81 and B-83). The second group are
the Nitric Acid Grade (NAG) 308L consumables designed for spent nuclear fuel reprocessing applications (data sheet B-88)
STAINLESS STEELS

MMA Ultramet 308L(N) E308L-16 E 19 9 L R
B-80 308L(N) Ultramet B308L(N) E308L-15 E 19 9 L B
TIG 308S92(N) ER308L W 19 9 L
MMA Ultramet 316L(N) E316L-16 E 19 12 3 L R
B-81 316L(N) Ultramet B316L(N) E316L-15 E 19 12 3 L B
TIG 316S92(N) ER316L W 19 12 3 L
MMA Ultramet 309L(N) E309L-16 E 23 12 L R
B-83 309L(N Ultramet B309L(N) E309L-15 E 23 12 L B
TIG 309S92(N) ER309L W 23 12 L
MMA NAG 19.9.L.R E308L-16 E 19 9 L R
B-88 NAG
TIG NAG 19.9.L ER308L W 19 9 L

Data Sheet B-10 HANWORTH LANE, CHERTSEY
Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
12%Cr MARTENSITIC STAINLESS

STAINLESS STEELS
12%Cr (410) martensitic stainless steel; the In the PWHT condition the microstructure
13.1.BMP electrode also has 1.5%Ni. consists of tempered martensite with some
retained ferrite.
wrought cast
ASTM 410, 403 A487 grade CA15 WELDING GUIDELINES
UNS S41000, S40300 Preheat of 150-250°C is required for heavier
DIN 1.4006 (X10Cr13) 1.4006 (G-X10Cr13) sections. Following welding, components should
1.4000, 1.4024 be cooled to room temperature before PWHT.
BS 410S21 (En56A) 410C21 Weld metal and HAZ’s have poor ductility and
403S17 toughness in the as-welded condition, careful
The 13.1.BMP with 1.5%Ni is also suitable for ASTM handling is recommended prior to PWHT to
A487 CA15M and DIN 1.4008 (G-X8CrNi13). minimise physical shock.
APPLICATIONS
These consumables are designed for welding wrought PWHT
or cast martensitic 12%Cr (type 410) stainless steel.
Plain 410 - A typical industrial PWHT following
Fabrication welds of matching composition such as this
welding for plain 410, consists of slowly cooling
must be tempered by appropriate PWHT, owing to high
to room temperature to allow full transformation
hardness (~450HV) and low ductility in the as-welded
to take place (range is Ms-350°C Mf-100°C), then
condition. Conventional 410 has variable toughness
temper at 680-760°C followed by air cool. To
but following PWHT the 13.1.BMP electrode with 1.5%Ni
ensure <22HRC (NACE) in the weld area, PWHT at
has good impact properties down to –10°C or lower
745°C is preferred.
depending on the heat treatment schedule.
13.1.BMP – The optimum properties are obtained
Plain 12%Cr steels are the most simple and economic
after PWHT at around 700°C, close to the Ac1
alloys with stainless properties. Variants with Ti (409),
temperature for this weld metal, which (due
Al (405) or low carbon (410S) are more or less fully ferritic
to the added nickel) has a lower Ac1 than plain
with typically lower strength than type 410. These
410. If needed PWHT time can be extended but
types, and the newer «utility ferritics», are normally
higher temperatures may cause re-hardening
welded without PWHT using 309/309L consumables
with fresh martensite formation on cool-out.
(data sheet B-50). The same applies to type 410 when
Superior toughness can be achieved with a
PWHT is not practicable.
double temper (cool to ambient between cycles)
Type 410 contains just sufficient carbon to enable
and this is recommended to conform to NACE,
air-hardening transformation to a predominantly
22HRC maximum.
martensitic microstructure. Structural properties
below ambient are limited by its relatively high ductile-
brittle transition temperature (particularly weldments), PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
and up to about 550ºC by its modest creep resistance.
It has useful resistance to general corrosion in non- Process Product Specification
aggressive media, sulphide-induced SCC in sour crude 13.RMP AWS E410-26
MMA
oil service, and oxidation up to about 800°C. 13.1.BMP DIN E 13 1 MPB
Typical applications include hydrocrackers, reaction TIG/MIG 12Cr AWS ER410
vessels, distillation plants and associated pipework in
refineries; furnace parts, linings; surfacing run-out rolls
in steel mills; cast valve bodies, turbine parts and burner
nozzles.

13.RMP
RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE FOR WELDING 410
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Rutile metal powder MMA electrode made on pure low carbon core wire.
Diameters above 3.2mm are not recommended for positional welding.
STAINLESS STEELS
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.4M E410-26
QW432 F-No 1
BS EN ISO 3581 E 13 R 5 2
QW442 A-No 6

min. -- -- -- -- -- 11.0 -- -- --
max. 0.08 1.0 0.90 0.025 0.030 13.5 0.60 0.5 0.50
Typical 0.06 0.5 0.30 0.010 0.015 11.5 0.4 0.2 0.05

850°C/2h * 745°C/1h **
After PWHT
Min. Typical Min. Typical
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 250 270 -- 610
Elongation (%) 4d -- 36 20 21
5d 20 34 -- 18
Reduction of area % -- 52 -- 59
* BS & BS EN PWHT: 840-870°C for 2 hours, furnace cool to 595°C at 55°C/h. max. Air cool to ambient. This gives a relatively low
strength condition.
** AWS PWHT: 730-760°C for 1 hour, furnace cool to 315°C at 60°C/h max., air cool to ambient. This gives a higher strength tempered
condition more representative of normal fabrication welds.
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 12.6 14.1 14.1 16.8
STORAGE
3 hermetically sealed ring-pull metal tins per carton, with unlimited shelf life. Direct use from tin is satisfactory for longer than a
working shift of 8h. Excessive exposure of electrodes to humid conditions will cause some moisture pick-up and increase the risk
of porosity.
Redry 300 – 350°C/1-2h to restore to as-packed condition. Maximum 420° C, 3 cycles, 10h total.
FUME DATA
20 2 <0.5 3 <0.2 <0.1 <0.1 18 1.7
100 www.metrode.com DS B-10-13.RMP | Rev. 01-03/16

13.1.BMP
13%CR-1.5%NI BASIC MMA ELECTRODE FOR WELDING 410
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Basic low hydrogen metal powder MMA electrode made on pure low carbon core wire.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.4 (E410-15) QW432 F-No 1
Nearest classifications QW442 A-No 6
BS EN ISO 3581 (E 13 B 5 2)

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo * Cu
Min. 0.02 0.4 -- -- -- 11.0 1.0 0.15 --
Max. 0.06 1.0 0.50 0.025 0.030 14.0 2.0 0.50 0.5
Typical 0.04 0.7 0.25 0.01 0.02 13 1.5 0.3 0.05
* Molybdenum is controlled to satisfy minimum requirements for ASTM A487 CA15M castings (0.15-1.0% Mo).
Typical after PWHT Min. 790°C/5h + 700°C/5h 680°C/2h + 620°C/2h
5d 15 23 17
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C -- 105 --
-10°C -- 90 60
Hardness (HRC) <22 ** 18 19
* Tensile properties based on ASTM CA15 and CA15M castings.
Specifications for wrought grades vary in tensile strength 415-700MPa.
** For conformance to NACE a double temper is mandatory.
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 380 450 450
kg/carton 12.6 13.5 16.5 16.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
20 2 <0.5 3 <0.2 <0.1 <0.1 18 1.7
www.metrode.com DS B-10-13.1.BMP | Rev. 01-03/16 101

12Cr
SOLID WIRE FOR WELDING 410
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for TIG & MIG.

AWS A5.9M ER410 QW432 F-No 6
STAINLESS STEELS
BS EN ISO 14343-A 13 QW442 A-No 6

BS EN ISO 14343-B SS410

Min. 0.06 -- 0.25 -- -- 12.0 -- -- --
Max. 0.12 0.6 0.50 0.02 0.03 13.5 0.3 0.3 0.3
Typical 0.1 0.4 0.3 0.01 0.02 12.5 0.2 0.03 0.2
* BS 2901: Pt2 requires 0.09-0.15%C.

MIG: Ar+20%CO2
Typical values after PWHT
740°C/1h (AWS) 740°C/3h
5d 19 18
Reduction of area % 50 50
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C <20
20
Hardness cap/mid HV 225/230 215/220
HRC -- 18/21

TIG ArgonΜ DC- 2.4 100A, 12V
MIG Ar / 1-3%O2 or Ar / 3-20%CO2 ** DC+ 1.2 280A, 28V
** Most economic gas is Ar-20%CO2. This gas provides the highest resistance to weld metal porosity and carbon content typically
not exceeding 0.12%.
PACKAGING DATA
TIG -- 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube
MIG 15kg spool 15kg spool --
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Cr3 Ni Cu OES (mg/m3)
55 4 8 <0.1 <0.5 5
102 www.metrode.com DS B-10-12Cr | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
410NiMo MARTENSITIC STAINLESS

ALLOY TYPE
STAINLESS STEELS
WELDING GUIDELINES
12%Cr-4.5%Ni-0.5%Mo (410NiMo) soft martensitic Preheat-interpass range of 100-200°C is
alloy. recommended to allow martensite transformation
during welding. Cool to room temperature before
PWHT.
wrought cast
ASTM F6NM CA6NM PWHT
UNS S41500 For maximum resistance to sulphide-induced SCC
BS EN / DIN 1.4313 G-X5CrNi 13 4 in sour oil conditions NACE MR0175 specifies a
BS -- 425C11 hardness of <23HRc. This is often difficult to achieve
because weld metal and HAZ are very resistant to
AFNOR -- Z6 CND 1304-M
softening by PWHT. A double temper for 5-10h
is necessary. Common practice is 675°C/10h +
APPLICATIONS 605ºC/10h with intermediate air cool to ambient.
High strength (>760MPa) martensitic stainless steel Recent work indicates 650ºC + 620°C is optimum,
with better resistance to corrosion, hydro-cavitation, and that intermediate air cooling to ambient or
sulphide-induced SCC, and good sub-zero toughness lower is essential. Another authority suggests
when compared with plain 12%Cr steels (e.g. type 410/ raising the first PWHT cycle for full austenitisation
CA15). anneal at 770°C/2h prior to final temper. Control of
Weld metal of this type greatly overmatches the distortion may be more critical in this case. In the
strength of equivalent parent material and is case of the Supercore 410NiMo flux cored wire it
remarkably resistant to softening during PWHT. These has not been possible to reduce the hardness to
properties can be exploited for welding martensitic 23HRC irrespective of the PWHT carried out.
precipitation-hardening alloys if corrosion conditions If 410NiMo consumables are considered for welding
are compatible with lower alloy weld metal, with plain 12Cr martensitic stainless steels such as type
the advantage of a single PWHT at 450-620°C for 410 or CA15, the PWHT should not exceed about
tempering. The 410NiMo consumables are also used 650°C unless a second temper at 590-620°C is
for overlaying mild and CMn steels. applied.
13%Cr-4%Ni alloys are used in cast or forged form
for hydraulic turbines, valve bodies, pump bowls,
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
compressor cones, impellers and high pressure pipes
in power generation, offshore oil, chemical and Process Product Specification
petrochemical industries. 13.4.Mo.L.R AWS E410NiMo-26
MMA
13.4.Mo.L.B AWS E410NiMo-25
TIG/MIG ER410NiMo AWS ER410NiMo
MICROSTRUCTURE
In the PWHT condition the microstructure consists of FCW Supercore 410NiMo AWS E410NiMoT1-1/4
tempered martensite with some retained austenite.

13.4.Mo.L.R
RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE FOR 410NiMo
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Rutile metal powder type made on pure low carbon core wire.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.4M E410NiMo-26 QW432 F-No 1
BS EN ISO 3581 E 13 4 R 5 2 QW442 A-No 6

min. -- -- -- -- -- 11.0 4.0 0.40 --
max. 0.06 1.0 0.90 0.025 0.03 12.5 5.0 0.70 0.50
Typical 0.03 0.8 0.25 0.01 0.01 12 4.5 0.6 0.05
Typical properties Min. PWHT (1) As-welded (2)
Elongation (%) 4d 15 17 4.5
5d 15 16 3
Impact ISO-V(J) + 20°C -- 45 27
- 40°C -- 35 13
- 60°C -- 30 8
Hardness (HV) -- 270-300 350
(1) AWS & BS PWHT: 595-620ºC for 1 hour, air cooled. See front page for details on PWHT.
(2) This weld metal is not usually recommended for use in the as-welded condition, except for surfacing applications where a hardness of
330-400HV is useful.
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
kg/carton 12.6 15.0 18.0 16.8
STORAGE
of porosity.
Redry 300 – 350°C/1-2h to restore to as-packed condition. Maximum 420°C, 3 cycles, 10h total.
FUME DATA
18 2 0.5 3 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 18 1.7
104 www.metrode.com DS B-11-13.4.Mo.L.R | Rev. 01-03/16

13.4.Mo.L.B
BASIC MMA ELECTRODE FOR WELDING 410NiMo
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Basic metal powder type made on pure low carbon core wire.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.4M E410NiMo-25* * 2005 Edition QW432 F-No 1
BS EN ISO 3581 E 13 4 B 6 2 QW442 A-No 6

Min. -- -- -- -- -- 11.0 4.0 0.40 --
Max. 0.06 1.0 0.90 0.025 0.03 12.5 5.0 0.70 0.50
Typical 0.03 0.7 0.25 0.01 0.01 12 4.5 0.6 0.05

Typical properties Min. PWHT (1)
5d 15 16
(1) AWS PWHT: 595-620ºC for 1 hour, air cooled. See front page for details on PWHT.
OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC +VE

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 350 450 450
kg/carton 12.6 14.1 18.0 17.1
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
18 2 0.5 3 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 18 1.7
www.metrode.com DS B-11-13.4.Mo.L.B | Rev. 01-03/16 105

ER410NiMo
SOLID WIRE FOR WELDING 410NiMo
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for TIG and MIG.

AWS A5.9M (ER410NiMo) Does not always strictly conform, see composition. QW432 F-No 6
STAINLESS STEELS
BS EN ISO 14343-A 13 4 QW442 A-No 6

BS EN ISO 14343-B (SS410NiMo)

C Mn * Si * S P Cr Ni Mo Cu
Min. -- 0.4 -- -- -- 11.0 4.0 0.4 --
Max. 0.05 1.0 0.60 0.02 0.03 12.5 5.0 0.7 0.3
Typical 0.02 0.8 0.4 0.005 0.015 12.3 4.5 0.5 0.1
* AWS requires 0.6%Mn max and 0.50%Si max.

Typical values after PWHT 610°C/1h: TIG
5d 20
Impact ISO-V(J) 0°C 90
-50°C 60
Hardness cap/mid HRC 25-30
HV 300

MIG Ar with 1-2%O2 or 1-5%CO2 ** DC+ 1.2 220A, 28V
** Proprietary gas mixtures with <5%CO2 are also suitable.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4
TIG -- 2.5 kg tube To order 2.5 kg tube
FUME DATA
54 5 8 3.2 <0.5 <0.5 5
106 www.metrode.com DS B-11-ER410NiMo | Rev. 01-03/16

SUPERCORE 410NiMo
ALL –POSITIONAL FLUX CORED WIRE FOR WELDING 410NiMo
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
All-positional rutile flux cored wire made on a high purity stainless steel strip
Metal recovery about 90% with respect to wire.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.22M E410NiMoT1-1/4 QW432 F-No 1
BS EN ISO 17633-A T 13 4 P C/M 2 QW442 A-No 6
BS EN ISO 17633-B TS410NiMo-FB1

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu Co
Min. -- -- -- -- -- 11.0 4.0 0.4 -- --
Max. 0.06 1.0 1.0 0.025 0.030 12.5 5.0 0.7 0.3 0.05
Typical 0.03 0.7 0.4 0.005 0.017 11.8 4.5 0.5 0.03 0.03

650°C/10h
Typical values Min. 610°C/1h 610°C/10h +620°C/10h
Tensile strength (MPa) 760 940 870 --
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 500 850 700 --
Elongation (%) 4d 15 20 23 --
5d 15 17 19 --
Reduction of area (%) -- 50 55 --
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C -- 45 50 50
-40°C -- 30 40 35
Hardness HV -- 330 310 310
HRC -- 31 27 28
AWS PWHT = 593-621°C/1 hour. BS EN PWHT = 580-620°C/2 hours.
Shielding gas Ar-20%CO2 or 100% CO2 at 20-25l/min.
Current DC+ve parameters as below (for 100%CO2 increase voltage by 1-3V):
Diameter (mm) range typical stickout
1.2 150-280A, 25-32V 180A, 29V 15-25mm
1.6 200-350A, 26-34V 260A, 30V 15-25mm
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
Fume composition, wt %
Fe Mn CrVI Ni Mo Cu OES (mg/m3)
18 3 2.5 1 0.2 <0.5 2
www.metrode.com DS B-11-SUPERCORE 410NiMo | Rev. 01-03/16 107

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
MARTENSITIC PRECIPITATION
HARDENING STAINLESS STEELS
STAINLESS STEELS

High strength martensitic precipitation hardening Preheat not usually necessary for thickness up to
stainless steels. 15mm, for thicker restrained sections, a preheat-
interpass temperature range of 100-200°C is
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED recommended. Temperatures above 200°C
will suppress martensite transformation with
FV520 Types: consequent microstructural coarsening.
ASTM
A564, A693, A705; Grade XM-25 PWHT
UNS When matching composition consumables are
S45000 used for welding these materials a PWHT must be
BS carried out. Normal practice is for the materials
3146 Grade ANC 20. ‘S’ grades; 2S.143; 3S.144; 3S.145 to be used in the over-aged condition. PWHT for
Proprietary over-ageing consists of: 750°C for 2 hours, air cool
FV520B (Firth Vickers), Custom 450 (Carpenter) to 15°C; followed by 550°C for 2 hours and air cool.
630 / 17.4.PH Types:
ASTM ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
A564; Grade 630, A747; CB7Cu-1 (cast) On cooling the weld metal transforms from
UNS austenite to martensite (Ms) below about 250°C,
S17400 but a significant fraction of austenite is still
BS EN retained at ambient temperature. Since sub-zero
10088-2; X5CrNiCuNb 16-4 (1.4542) cooling is impractical, this austenite is destabilised
by annealing at 750-850°C. Carbide precipitation in
DIN
the austenite raises its Ms temperature to enable
1.4548, 1.4549
complete transformation when cooled, ensuring
Proprietary more effective tempering and ageing during the
17-4PH (Armco Steel), Custom 630 (Carpenter) second PWHT cycle. Omission of the inconvenient
APPLICATIONS first PWHT cycle may give properties with greater
batch variability. The use of 410NiMo (B-11) allows
Used for welding very high strength martensitic
a simplified PWHT to be used, and when PWHT
stainless steels, precipitation hardened by additions is not possible 2205 duplex (B-60) or superduplex
of copper. Strength can be up to three times that of (B-61 & B-62) consumables may allow PWHT to
standard 300 series austenitic stainless steels. be avoided without compromising mechanical
The FV520/450 type alloys have corrosion resistance properties too much.
comparable to 304 stainless steel. The 630/17-4PH
types, with no Mo and higher carbon, do not have such PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
good resistance to intergranular and pitting corrosion Process Product Specification
as the FV520/450 types.
FV520-1 --
Applications include pump shafts, impellers, hydraulic MMA
equipment used in oil and gas industries, petrochemical, 17.4.Cu.R (AWS E630-16)
marine and nuclear engineering. FV520B --
TIG
17-4PH AWS ER630
MICROSTRUCTURE
MCW Metcore FV520 --
In the PWHT condition the microstructure consists
of precipitation hardened tempered martensite with
some retained austenite.

FV520-1
MMA ELECTRODE FOR FV520 BASE MATERIAL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Rutile metal powder coating on pure low carbon steel core wire.
Moisture resistant coating gives very low weld metal hydrogen levels.
STAINLESS STEELS
There are no national specifications for this electrode. QW432 F-No --
QW442 A-No --

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu Nb
min. -- 0.4 0.2 -- -- 13.0 4.5 1.2 1.2 0.15
max. 0.05 1.0 0.5 0.030 0.030 15.5 6.0 2.0 2.0 0.5
Typical 0.03 0.6 0.3 0.010 0.015 14 5 1.5 1.6 0.3
Typical properties PWHT Aged * Over-aged **
Elongation (%) 4d -- 16
5d 10 15
Reduction of area (%) 30 37
Hardness (HV) 420 345
* 850°C/2 hours, air cool to 15°C + 450°C/4 hours, air cool. Not recommended for structural work.
** 750°C/2 hours, air cool to 15°C + 550°C/2 hours, air cool. More commonly applied PWHT.

min. A 70 80 100
max. A 110 140 180
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 350 350 350
kg/carton 13.5 14.4 13.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
15 3 0.5 4 0.8 0.2 <0.1 18 1.2
www.metrode.com DS B-12-FV520-1 | Rev. 01-03/16 109

17.4.Cu.R
MMA ELECTRODE FOR 17-4PH BASE MATERIAL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Rutile metal powder coating on pure low carbon steel core wire.
Moisture resistant coating gives very low weld metal hydrogen levels.
STAINLESS STEELS

There are no national specifications for this electrode, but is is similar to AWS A5.4 E630-16 QW432 F-No --
QW442 A-No --

Min. -- -- -- -- -- 14.0 3.5 -- 1.5
Max. 0.10 1.0 0.8 0.030 0.030 16.5 4.5 0.5 2.5
Typical 0.02 0.7 0.25 0.01 0.01 15 4 0.2 2

Typical properties PWHT Over-aged *
5d 9
Reduction of area (%) 24
Hardness (HV) 330
* 750°C/2 hours, air cool to 15°C + 550°C/2 hours, air cool.

min. A 70 80 100
max. A 110 140 180
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 350 350 450
kg/carton 12.3 15.0 18.6
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
15 3 0.5 4 0.8 0.2 <0.1 18 1.2
110 www.metrode.com DS B-12-17.4.Cu.R | Rev. 01-03/16

FV520B
SOLID TIG WIRE FOR WELDING FV520 STAINLESS STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for TIG welding.
STAINLESS STEELS
QW442 A-No --

Min. -- 0.5 0.2 -- -- 13.2 5.0 1.2 1.2 0.15
Max. 0.07 1.0 0.5 0.03 0.03 14.7 6.0 2.0 2.0 0.5
Typical 0.05 0.7 0.3 0.01 0.02 14 5.5 1.6 1.7 0.3

Typical PWHT Aged * Over-aged ** Over-aged *** single cycle 550°C
Tensile strenght (MPa) 1345 1100 1025 1200
Elongation (%) 4d 5 19 22 19
5d 5 16 21 16
Reduction of area (%) 15 50 60 50
Impact ISO-V(J) + 20°C 7 60 125 125
- 20°C -- 20 85 75
Hardness mid HV 450 380 315 400
* 850°C/2 hours, air cool to 20°C + 450°C/4 hours, air cool. Not recommended for structural work.
** 750°C/2 hours, air cool to 20°C + 550°C/2 hours, air cool. More commonly applied PWHT.
*** 750°C/2 hours, air cool to 20°C + 620°C/2 hours, air cool.

PACKAGING DATA
TIG 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube
FUME DATA
52 4 11 4 <0.5 2.7 4.5
www.metrode.com DS B-12-FV520B| Rev. 01-03/16 111

17-4PH
SOLID TIG WIRE FOR WELDING 17-4PH STAINLESS STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.9 ER630 QW432 F-No 6

Min. -- 0.25 -- -- -- 16.00 4.5 -- 3.25 0.15
Max. 0.05 0.75 0.75 0.03 0.03 16.75 5.0 0.75 4.00 0.30
Typical 0.03 0.6 0.4 0.005 0.02 16.3 4.8 0.2 3.5 0.2

Typical PWHT Over-aged *
Elongation (%) 10
* 750°C/2 hours, air cool to 15°C + 550°C/2 hours, air cool; or 1040°C, air cool + 620°C/4 hours.

PACKAGING DATA
TIG 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube
FUME DATA
50 4 13 3.5 <0.5 5.5 3.6
112 www.metrode.com DS B-121-17-4PH | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
308L STAINLESS STEELS
STAINLESS STEELS
308L austenitic stainless steels for joining 304L base No preheat, maximum interpass temperature
materials. 250°C; no PWHT required.
There is a Technical Profile available on sub-arc
ASTM BS EN & DIN welding with 308S92. There is also additional
304L 1.4306 information available covering the Supercore flux
304 1.4301
304LN
cored wires.
1.4311
CF3 1.4308
CF8 1.4541
321 1.4543/1.4561/1.4550 RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
347 308L stainless steel consumables for LNG, and
other cryogenic applications, are in data sheet
BS UNS B-37. Stainless steel consumables for high
304S11 S30403 temperature applications on 304H can be found
304S15/16/31 S30400 in data sheets C-10 or C-12.
304S61 S30453
304C12 S32100
304C15 S34700
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
321S31
347S31 Process Product Specification
Supermet 308L AWS E308L-17
Ultramet 308L AWS E308L-16
APPLICATIONS MMA
Ultramet B308L AWS E308L-15
Used to weld 18/8 stainless steels including 301, 302,
303, nitrogen bearing 304LN and titanium stabilised 321. Ultramet 308LP AWS E308L-16
Service temperatures are typically –100°C to about TIG 308S92 AWS ER308L
400°C. MIG Supermig 308LSi AWS ER308LSi
Applications include food, brewery, pharmaceutical 308S92 AWS ER308L
equipment, architectural and general fabrication, and
SAW SS300 BS EN SA AF2
nuclear engineering.
The 308L consumables covered here are not suitable SSB BS EN SA AF2
for 304/304H in elevated temperature structural Supercore 308L AWS E308LT0-1/4
applications, see data sheets C-10 and C-12. For FCW Supercore 308LP AWS E308LT1-1/4
cryogenic applications (–196°C) see data sheet B-37. Superoot 308L AWS R308LT1-5
MICROSTRUCTURE
Austenite with a controlled level of ferrite, normally in
the range 3-10FN depending on the application.

SUPERMET 308L
GENER AL PURPOSE RUTILE 308L MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – rutile aluminosilicate flux on high purity 304L core wire giving very low typical carbon level.
‘Low hydrogen’ manufacturing technology ensures high resistance to weld metal porosity. ‘Supermet Technology’ gives acid
rutile operability combined with controlled silicon content for maximum cracking/corrosion resistance.
Designed for ease of use, exceptional weld bead appearance and high weld metal integrity, primarily in the downhand and HV
positions; smaller sizes offer all-positional operability.
STAINLESS STEELS
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.4M E308L-17 ASME IX QUALIFICATION
BS EN ISO 3581 E 19 9 L R 3 2 QW432 F-No 5
QW442 A-No 8

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu FN
Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 18.0 9.0 -- -- 3
Max. 0.04 2.0 0.90 0.025 0.030 21.0 11.0 0.5 0.5 10
Typical 0.02 0.8 0.6 0.01 0.02 19.5 10 0.10 0.05 6
As-welded Min. typical
5d 30 40
TYPICAL OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC +VE OR AC (OCV: 50V MIN)

Diameter (mm) 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 50 60 75 100 130
max. A 70 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 300 350 450 450
kg/carton 10.5 11.4 12.0 16.5 16.5
Pieces/carton 846 609 333 243 156
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Cr Ni Mo Cu F* OES (mg/m3)
8 5 5 0.8 - < 0.2 16 1
* F=28% for basic coated Ultramet B308L but this does not affect the OES.
114 www.metrode.com DS B-30-SUPERMET 308L | Rev. 02-03/16

ULTRAMET 308L
ALL-POSITIONAL RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE FOR 304L
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – rutile flux coated 308L electrode on high purity 304L core wire. Ultramet has all the benefits of an advanced
rutile flux design – this includes optimum versatility for downhand welding with high cosmetic finish and weld metal integrity;
and all-positional welding with the 2.5/3.2mm electrodes including fixed pipework.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.4M E308L-16 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 19 9 L R 3 2 QW442 A-No 8
Approvals TÜV

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 18.0 9.0 -- -- 3
Max. 0.04 2.0 0.90 0.025 0.030 21.0 11.0 0.50 0.5 10
Typical <0.03 1 0.6 0.01 0.02 19 9.5 0.1 0.1 6

As welded Min. typical 1050°C + WQ
5d 30 42 48
Impact ISO-V(J) -100°C -- 35 --
-196°C -- * -- > 60
* See Ultramet 308LCF (data sheet B-37) for as-welded cryogenic applications at –196°C.

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 13.5 17.1
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 5 5 0.8 - < 0.2 16 1
www.metrode.com DS B-30-ULTRAMET 308L | Rev. 01-03/16 115

ULTRAMET B308L
BASIC COATED MMA PIPE-WELDING ELECTRODE FOR 304L
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – designed and manufactured to give high moisture resistance using a basic flux system and high purity 304L
core wire. Ultramet B308L is particularly suited to the most demanding vertical and overhead welding applications including
fixed pipework in the ASME 5G/6G position. Under site conditions it is tolerant to adverse wind and drafts.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.4M E308L-15 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 19 9 L B 4 2 QW442 A-No 8

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 18.0 9.0 -- -- 3
Max. 0.04 2.0 0.90 0.025 0.030 21.0 11.0 0.50 0.5 10
Typical 0.03 1.2 0.3 0.01 0.015 19 10 0.1 <0.1 6

5d 30 40
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C --
80-120
-196°C -- 35-50
TYPICAL OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC +VE ONLY

min. A 60 75 100
max. A 90 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 13.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 5 5 0.8 - < 0.2 16 1
116 www.metrode.com DS B-30-ULTRAMET B308L| Rev. 01-03/16

ULTRAMET 308LP
ALL-POSITIONAL PIPE WELDING AND ROOT WELDING ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – rutile flux on high purity 304L core wire giving very low typical carbon level. Ultramet 308LP is a fully all-
positional electrode capable of the most demanding fixed pipework applications including ASME 5G/6G.
The Ultramet 308LP electrode has also been designed to deposit single-side root runs without the need for a gas purge.
The electrode is also suitable for vertical-down welding on thin sheet material.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.4M E308L-16 QW432 F-No 5
PA/1G PB/2F PC/2G PF/3Gu PE/4G PG/3Gd

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 18.0 9.0 -- -- 3
Max. 0.04 2.0 0.90 0.025 0.030 21.0 11.0 0.1 0.5 10
Typical 0.02 0.8 0.8 0.01 0.02 19 10 0.01 0.1 6

5d 30 43
Impact ISO-V(J) -105°C --
35

min. A 50 60 75
max. A 70 90 120
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 300 350
kg/carton 11.7 12.0 14.1
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 5 5 0.8 - < 0.2 16 1
www.metrode.com DS B-30-ULTRAMET 308LP | Rev. 01-03/16 117

308S92 and SUPERMIG 308LSi
SOLID WIRES FOR TIG, MIG AND SAW
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wires for TIG, MIG and sub-arc welding.

STAINLESS STEELS
308S92 (TIG & Sub-arc) Supermig 308LSi (MIG) QW432 F-No 6

AWS A5.9M ER308L ER308L Si QW442 A-No 3
BS EN ISO 14343-A 19 9 L G 19 9 L Si
BS EN ISO 14343-B SS308L SS308L Si
APPROVALS TÜV (TIG)

C Mn Si * S P Cr Ni Mo Cu FN
Min. -- 1.0 0.30 -- -- 19.5 9.0 -- -- 3
Max. 0.025 2.0 0.65 0.020 0.030 21.0 11.0 0.3 0.3 12
Typical 0.01 1.7 0.4 0.01 0.015 20 10 0.1 0.15 10
* Supermig 308LSi: Si range is 0.65 – 1.0%, typically 0.8%.

Typical
As welded
TIG MIG SAW + SS300
5d 33 40 37
Impact ISO-V(J) -130°C 110 70 50
-196°C * 80 30-60 30
Hardness cap/mid HV 200/220 200/220 195/215
* For applications requiring cryogenic toughness see data sheet B-37.

MIG Ar+2%O2* DC+ 1.2 260A, 26V
SAW SS300** DC+ 2.4 350A,28V
* Also proprietary Ar and Ar-He gas mixtures with < 3%CO2.
** SSB, L2N and LA491 also suitable.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2 4.0
TIG (308S92) -- 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube --
MIG (Supermig 308LSi) 15kg reel 15kg reel 15kg reel -- -- -- -- --
SAW (308S92) -- -- -- -- -- 25kg spool 25kg spool 25kg spool
FUME DATA
MIG fume composition (wt %) (TIG and SAW fume negligible)
32 12 16 8 < 0.5 < 0.5 3.1
118 www.metrode.com DS B-30-308S92 and SUPERMIG 308LSi | Rev. 01-03/16

SUPERCORE 308L, 308LP
RUTILE FLUX CORED WIRES
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Flux cored wires – the wires are made with an austenitic stainless steel sheath and rutile flux system. Supercore 308L combines
easy operability, high deposit quality and exceptional weld bead appearance for downhand and HV welding.
Supercore 308LP is designed for all-positional welding including fixed pipework.
Metal recovery is about 90% with respect to the wire.
STAINLESS STEELS
The Supercore 308L wire is not suitable for applications requiring PWHT or solution annealing – for these applications, it is
recommended that Supercore 308LP is used.

Supercore 308L Supercore 308LP QW432 F-No 6
AWS A5.22M E308LT0-1/4 E308LT1-1/4 QW442 A-No 8
BS EN ISO 17633-A T 19 9 L R C/M 3 T 19 9 L P C/M 2
BS EN ISO 17633-B TS308L-FB0 TS308L-FB1
Approvals TÜV, DNV, LRS TÜV

Min. -- 0.5 0.2 -- -- 18.5 9.0 -- -- 3
Max. 0.04 2.0 1.0 0.025 0.030 20.5 11.0 0.3 0.3 12
Typical 0.03 1.3 0.7 0.02 0.02 19.5 10 0.1 0.1 8

5d 30 42
-110°C -- 40
Hardness HV -- 200
Shielding gas: 80%Ar-20%CO2 or 100% CO2 at 20-25l/min. Proprietary gases may be used but argon should not exceed 85%.
Current: DC+ve ranges as below for Ar-20%CO2. Welding with 100%CO2 requires approx 3V higher:
1.2 120 – 280A, 22 – 34V 180A, 29V 15 – 20mm
1.2P 120 – 250A, 22 – 32V 150A, 25V 15 – 20mm
1.6 200 – 350A, 26 – 36V 250A, 30V 15 – 25mm
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
12 6 1 7 1 <1 12 1
www.metrode.com DS B-30-SUPERCORE 308L, 308LP | Rev. 01-03/16 119

SUPEROOT 308L
FLUX CORED TIG WIRE FOR ROOT WELDS WITHOUT BACK PURGE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Flux cored TIG wire Superoot 308L is made with a seamless austenitic stainless steel sheath, which results in a robust moisture
resistant wire and rutile flux system.
Superoot 308L is designed specifically for situations where it is impractical to apply back-purge for the TIG root run, or where
there is an economic benefit in eliminating back-purge.
STAINLESS STEELS
Metal recovery is 90% with respect to the whole wire.

AWS A5.22M R308LT1-5 QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO 17633-B TS308L-RI1 QW442 A-No 6

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 18.0 9.0 -- --
Max. 0.03 2.5 1.2 0.03 0.04 21.0 11.0 0.5 0.5
Typical 0.02 1.7 0.8 0.005 0.020 19.6 10.3 0.1 0.05
Typically 8FN.

As welded Typical
Note: In practice, mechanical properties of the root bead are assessed with the whole joint and subsequent filler.

* No back-purge is required.
Satisfactory application of Superoot 308L requires the use of a keyhole welding technique. Further details are available on request.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.2
TIG 1 kg tube
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Ni Cr3 Mo Cu F OES (mg/m3)
32 12 8 16 <0.5 < 0.5 -- 3.1
120 www.metrode.com DS B-30-SUPEROOT 308L | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
347 STAINLESS STEELS
STAINLESS STEELS
347 austenitic stainless steel for joining 321 and 347 Austenite with a controlled level of ferrite,
base materials. normally in the range 3-12FN.

ASTM-ASME BS EN & DIN No preheat, maximum interpass temperature
321 1.4541 250°C; no PWHT required.
347 1.4543 / 1.4561 / 1.4550
CF8C (cast) 1.4552 (cast)
BS UNS There is a Technical Profile available on sub-arc
321S31 S32100
welding with 347S96. There is also additional
347S31 S34700
347C17 (cast) information available covering the Supercore flux
cored wires.
APPLICATIONS RELATED ALLOY GROUPS

Used to weld titanium and niobium stabilised 18/8 The 308L consumables cover many of the
stainless steel types 321 and 347. Also suitable same base materials and applications (B-30).
for unstabilised grades such as 304/304L. Service For elevated temperature applications 347H
temperatures are typically -100°C to about 400°C. consumables should be used (C-11).
Applications are similar to 308L (B-30) and include food,

brewery, pharmaceutical equipment, architectural and PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
general fabrication, and nuclear engineering.
The 347 consumables covered here are generally not Ultramet 347 AWS E347-16
MMA
suitable for service in elevated temperature structural Ultramet B347 AWS E347-15
applications where 0.04-0.08% carbon is specified for TIG/MIG 347S96 AWS ER347
creep resistance, see data sheets C-11 and C-12. MIG Supermig 347Si AWS ER347Si
347S96 AWS ER347
For cryogenic applications requiring >0.38mm (15mils)
charpy lateral expansion at –196°C, use unstabilised SAW SS300 BS EN SA AF2
weld metal with low carbon and controlled ferrite (B- SSB BS EN SA AF2
30). FCW Supercore 347 AWS E347T0-1/4

ULTRAMET 347
ALL-POSITIONAL RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE FOR 321/347
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA rutile flux coated 347 electrode on high purity 304L core wire.
Ultramet 347 has all the benefits of an advanced rutile flux design, including all-positional fixed pipework welding with the
2.5/3.2mm diameter electrodes.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.4M E347-16 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 19 9 Nb R 3 2 QW442 A-No 8

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Nb Cu FN
Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 18.0 9.0 -- 10xC -- 4
Max. 0.04 2.0 0.9 0.025 0.030 21.0 11.0 0.50 1.00 0.50 12
Typical 0.02 0.7 0.7 0.01 0.02 19 9.5 0.05 0.4 0.07 6

As-welded Min. Typical
5d 25 37
-196°C -- 20
-196°C -- 53 (1050°C + WQ)

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 11.4 13.5 13.5 16.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Ni Cr Cu F* OES (mg/m3)
8 5 0.8 5 <0.2 16 1
* F=28% for basic coated Ultramet B347 but this does not affect the OES.
122 www.metrode.com DS B-31-ULTRAMET 347 | Rev. 01-03/16
ULTRAMET B347
BASIC PIPE-WELDING ELECTRODE FOR 321/347
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with basic carbonate-fluoride flux on high purity 304L core wire. Designed to give good moisture resistance
and hence freedom from weld porosity. The electrode is particularly suited to positional welding of fixed pipework qualified in
the ASME 5G/6G position and is tolerant to adverse wind and draughts under site conditions. Compared with rutile types, the
basic flux gives a more convex fillet bead profile and although the slag does not self-lift, it is easily removed and gives welds of
STAINLESS STEELS
exceptional appearance and quality.
AWS A5.4M E347-15 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 19 9 Nb B 4 2 QW442 A-No 8

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 18.0 9.0 -- 10xC -- 4
Max. 0.06 2.0 0.9 0.025 0.030 21.0 11.0 0.50 1.00 0.50 12
Typical 0.03 1.2 0.3 0.01 0.02 19 9.5 0.05 0.5 0.07 6
As welded Min. typical
5d 25 37
Impact ISO-V(J) -50°C -- 90
TYPICAL OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC +VE

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350/450 450
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 13.5/17.4 17.4
Pieces/carton 669 396 258/267 162
* 350mm is the standard length, 450mm is available to order.
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 5 0.8 5 <0.2 16 1
www.metrode.com DS B-31-ULTRAMET B347 | Rev. 01-03/16 123

347S96 and SUPERMIG 347Si
SOLID WIRES FOR TIG, MIG & SAW OF 321/347
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

STAINLESS STEELS
347S96 (TIG, MIG & sub-arc) Supermig 347Si (MIG) QW432 F-No 6
AWS A5.9M ER347 ER347Si QW442 A-No 8
BS EN ISO 14343-A 19 9 Nb G 19 9 Nb Si
W=TIG, G=MIG, S=SAW
BS EN ISO 14343-B SS347 SS347 Si

Min. -- 1.0 0.30 -- -- 19.0 9.0 -- 10xC -- 4
Max. 0.08 2.5 0.65 0.020 0.030 21.0 11.0 0.3 1.0 0.3 12
Typical < 0.04 1.5 0.4 0.005 0.02 19.5 9.7 0.2 0.6 0.1 8

Typical values as welded TIG MIG/Supermig 347Si
5d 40 42
Impact ISO-V(J) 20°C 230 100
- 50°C 150
- 196°C 35
Hardness cap/mid HV 220/240

MIG Ar+2%O2** DC+ 1.2 260A, 26V
SAW SS300 or SSB DC+ 2.4 350A,28V
** Also proprietary Ar and Ar-He mixtures with <3%CO2.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG -- -- 2.5 kg tube To order 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube
MIG 15kg spool 15kg spool -- -- -- --
SAW -- -- 25kg spool -- 25kg spool 25kg spool
FUME DATA
32 12 16 8 <0.5 <0.5 3.1
124 www.metrode.com DS B-31-347S96 and SUPERMIG 347Si | Rev. 01-03/16

SUPERCORE 347
DOWNHAND RUTILE FLUX CORED WIRE FOR 321/347
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Flux cored wire made with an austenitic stainless steel sheath and rutile flux system. Supercore 347 combines easy operability,
high deposit quality and good weld bead appearance for downhand and HV welding. Metal recovery is about 90% with respect
to wire.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.22M E347T0-1/4 QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO 17633-A T19 9 Nb R C/M 3 QW442 A-No 8
BS EN ISO 17633-B TS347-FB0

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 18.0 9.0 -- 8xC -- 4
Max. 0.08 2.0 1.0 0.025 0.030 21.0 11.0 0.3 1.0 0.3 12
Typical 0.03 1.2 0.4 0.01 0.02 19 10.5 0.1 0.5 0.1 8

5d 25 42
90
Shielding gas: 80%Ar-20%CO2 at 20-25l/min. Proprietary gases may be used but argon should not exceed 85% argon.
The wire is suitable for use on CO2 but with some loss of cosmetic appearance and increased spatter.
Current: DC+ve ranges as below (for 100%CO2 increase voltage by 2-3V):
1.2 120 – 280A, 22 – 34V 180A, 29V 15 – 20mm
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
17 11 2 4 5 <1 5 1
www.metrode.com DS B-31-SUPERCORE 347 | Rev. 01-03/16 125

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168

STAINLESS STEELS
ALLOY TYPE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

316L Mo bearing austenitic stainless. There are Technical Profiles available on Superoot
316L and sub-arc welding with 316S92. There is
also additional information available covering
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED the Supercore flux cored wires.
ASTM BS EN & DIN
316L 1.4404 / 1.4401 RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
316 1.4436
316LN 1.4406 / 1.4429
316L stainless steel consumables for LNG, and
CF3M 1.4408 other cryogenic applications, are in data sheet
CF8M 1.4437 B-38. Stainless steel consumables for high
temperature applications on 316H can be found
BS UNS in data sheets C-12 or C-13.
316S11 / 13 S 31603
316S16 / 31 / 33 S 31600
316S61 S 31653 PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
316C12 / 16 / 71
Supermet 316L AWS E316L-17
APPLICATIONS Ultramet 316L AWS E316L-16
MMA
These consumables are used for Mo bearing austenitic Ultramet B316L AWS E316L-15
stainless steels with 1.5 – 3% Mo. They are also Ultramet 316LP AWS E316L-16
suitable for Ti or Nb stabilised and nitrogen-bearing
TIG 316S92 AWS ER316L
or free machining versions of the above alloys. Type
316/316L steels are widely used for their good resistance MIG Supermig 316LSi AWS ER316LSi
to pitting, many acids and general corrosion. 316S92 AWS ER316L
SAW SS300 BS EN SA AF2
The 316L consumables covered here are not suitable SSB BS EN SA AF2
for 316/316H in elevated temperature structural Supercore 316L AWS E316LT0-1/4
applications, see data sheets C-12 and C-13. For
FCW Supercore 316LP AWS E316LT1-1/4
cryogenic applications (–196°C) see data sheet B-38.
Superoot 316L AWS R316LT1-5
MICROSTRUCTURE
Austenite with a controlled level of ferrite, normally in
the range 2-10FN depending on the application.
WELDING GUIDELINES
No preheat, maximum interpass temperature 250°C;
no PWHT required.

SUPERMET 316L
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – rutile aluminosilicate flux on high purity 304L core wire giving very low typical carbon level. ‘Low hydrogen’
manufacturing technology ensures high resistance to weld metal porosity. ‘Supermet Technology’ gives acid rutile operability
combined with controlled silicon content for maximum cracking/corrosion resistance. Designed for ease of use, exceptional weld
bead appearance and high weld metal integrity, primarily in the downhand and HV positions; smaller sizes offer all-positional
operability. Recovery is about 115% with respect to core wire, 65% with respect to whole electrode.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.4M E316L-17 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 19 12 3 L R 3 2 QW442 A-No 8

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo* Cu FN
Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 17.0 11.0 2.0 -- 3
Max. 0.04 2.0 0.90 0.025 0.030 20.0 13.0 3.0 0.5 10
Typical 0.02 0.8 0.6 0.01 0.02 19 12 2.7 0.1 6
* DIN & BS EN require Mo 2.5 – 3.0%.
As-welded Min. typical 1050°C + WQ
5d 25 39 49
Impact ISO*-V(J) +20°C -- 70 --
-196°C -- -- 35
* See data sheet B-38 for as-welded cryogenic applications at –196°C

Diameter (mm) 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 25 50 60 75 100 130
max. A 45 70 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 250 300 300 350 450 450
kg/carton 8.7 10.5 11.4 12.6 17.4 16.8
Pieces/carton 1344 846 603 339 249 159
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 7 5 1 0.5 < 0.2 16 1
www.metrode.com DS B-32-SUPERMET 316L | Rev. 01-03/16 127

ULTRAMET 316L
ALL-POSITIONAL RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE FOR 316L
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
and all-positional welding with the 2.5/3.2mm electrodes including fixed pipework.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.4M E316L-16 QW432 F-No 5
Approvals TÜV, LRS

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 17.0 11.0 2.0 -- 3
Max. 0.04 2.0 0.90 0.025 0.030 20.0 13.0 3.0 0.5 10
Typical <0.03 1 0.6 0.01 0.02 19 12 2.6 <0.1 6
* DIN & BS EN require Mo 2.5 – 3.0%.

As welded Min. typical 1050°C + WQ
5d 25 41 50
Impact ISO-V(J) + 20°C -- 70 --
-100°C -- 40 --
-196°C -- -- 40
Hardness HV -- 230 185
* See data sheet B-38 for as-welded cryogenic applications at –196°C.
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 11.4 12.9 13.5 16.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 7 5 1 0.5 < 0.2 16 1
128 www.metrode.com DS B-32-ULTRAMET 316L | Rev. 01-03/16

ULTRAMET B316L
BASIC COATED MMA PIPE-WELDING ELECTRODE FOR 316L
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.4M E316L-15 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 19 12 3 L B 4 2 QW442 A-No 8

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 17.0 11.0 2.0 -- 3
Max. 0.04 2.0 0.90 0.025 0.030 20.0 13.0 3.0 0.5 10
Typical <0.03 1.2 0.3 0.01 0.02 19 12 2.6 <0.1 6
5d 25 33
80
-196°C -- 45
Lateral expansion * (mm) -196°C 0.38 0.5
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 13.5 16.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 7 5 1 0.5 < 0.2 16 1
www.metrode.com DS B-32-ULTRAMET B316L | Rev. 01-03/16 129

ULTRAMET 316LP
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
positional electrode capable of the most demanding fixed pipework applications including ASME 5G/6G. The Ultramet 316LP
electrode has also been designed to deposit single-side root runs without the need for a gas purge. The electrode is also suitable
for vertical-down welding on thin sheet material.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.4M E316L-16 QW432 F-No 5

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 17.0 11.0 2.0 -- 3
Max. 0.04 2.5 0.90 0.025 0.030 20.0 13.0 3.0 0.5 10
Typical 0.02 0.8 0.8 0.01 0.02 19 12 2.7 0.1 6

5d 25 35
40

min. A 50 60 75
max. A 70 90 120
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 300 350
kg/carton 11.7 12.3 14.4
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 7 5 1 0.5 < 0.2 16 1
130 www.metrode.com DS B-32-ULTRAMET 316LP | Rev. 01-03/16

316S92 and SUPERMIG 316LSi
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
STAINLESS STEELS
316S92 (TIG & sub-arc) Supermig 316LSi (MIG) QW432 F-No 6
AWS A5.9M ER316L ER316LSi QW442 A-No 8
BS EN ISO 14343-A 19 12 3 L G 19 12 3 LSi
BS EN ISO 14343-B SS316L SS316LSi
Approvals TÜV, LRS TÜV, LRS
W=TIG, G=MIG, S=SAW

Min. -- 1.0 0.30 -- -- 18.0 11.0 2.5 -- 3
Max. 0.03 2.0 0.65 0.020 0.030 20.0 14.0 3.0 0.3 10
Typical 0.01 1.4 0.5 0.01 0.015 18.5 12.8 2.6 0.15 6

Typical
As welded Min.
TIG MIG SAW + SS300
Elongation (%) 4d 30 35 42 41
5d 30 33 40 37
Impact ISO-V(J) -130°C -- > 100 > 70 > 45
-196°C -- > 60 30-60 30
Hardness cap/mid HV -- 200/220 200/220 195/215

MIG Ar+2%O2* DC+ 1.2 260A, 26V
SAW SS300** DC+ 2.4 350A,28V
* Also proprietary Ar and Ar-He gas mixtures with < 3%CO2.
** SSB also suitable.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG (316S92) To order -- 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube
MIG (Supermig 316LSi) 15kg reel 15kg reel 15kg reel 15kg reel -- -- -- --
SAW (316S92) -- -- -- -- -- -- 25kg spool 25kg spool
FUME DATA
30 12 15 11 1.5 < 0.5 3.3
www.metrode.com DS B-32-316S92 and SUPERMIG 316LSi | Rev. 01-03/16 131

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
easy operability, high deposit quality and exceptional weld bead appearance for downhand and HV welding. Supercore 316LP is
designed for all-positional welding including fixed pipework. Metal recovery is about 90% with respect to the wire.
The Supercore 316L wire is not suitable for applications requiring PWHT or solution annealing – for these applications, it is
STAINLESS STEELS
recommended that Supercore 316LP is used.

BS EN ISO 17633-A T 19 12 3 L R C/M 3 T 19 12 3 L P C/M 2
Approvals (1.2 & 1.6mm) TÜV, LRS TÜV, LRS, ABS, DNV

Min. -- 0.5 0.2 -- -- 17.0 11.0 2.5 -- 3
Max. 0.04 2.0 1.0 0.025 0.030 20.0 13.0 3.0 0.3 12
Typical 0.03 1.3 0.5 0.02 0.02 18 12.5 2.7 0.1 6
* 0.9mm diameter Supercore 316L is typically 2.3%Mo and does not conform to BS EN ISO 17633-A.

5d 25 38
-110°C -- 40
Hardness cap/mid HV -- 200/210
Shielding gas: Either 80%Ar-20%CO2 or 100% CO2 shielding gas at 20-25l/min. Proprietary gases may be used but argon should not
exceed 85%.
0.9 (Supercore 316L only) 75 – 170A, 20 – 30V 120A, 26V 15 – 20mm
1.2 120 – 280A, 21 – 35V 180A, 28V 15 – 20mm
1.2P 120 – 250A, 20 – 32V 160A, 26V 15 – 20mm
1.6 200 – 350A, 26 – 36V 250A, 30V 15 – 25mm
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
13.5 1.5 1.5 7.5 1 <1 11 1.2
132 www.metrode.com DS B-32-SUPERCORE 316L, 316LP | Rev. 01-03/16

SUPEROOT 316L
FLUX CORED TIG WIRE FOR ROOT WELDS WITHOUT BACK PURGE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Flux cored TIG wire Superoot 316L is made with a seamless austenitic stainless steel sheath, which results in a robust moisture
resistant wire and rutile flux system. Superoot 316L is designed specifically for situations where it is impractical to apply back-
purge for the TIG root run, or to gain the economic benefit of eliminating back-purge. For most applications, the use of a 316L
root bead is considered compatible with subsequent filling with 308L, 347 or 316L as appropriate.
STAINLESS STEELS
Metal recovery is 90% with respect to the whole wire.

AWS A5.22M R316LT1-5 QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO 17633-B TS316L-RI1 QW442 A-No 8

Min. -- 1.0 0.2 -- -- 17.0 11.0 2.0 --
Max. 0.03 2.0 1.0 0.025 0.03 20.0 14.0 3.0 0.5
Typical 0.01 1.6 0.8 0.005 0.020 19.2 12.5 2.2 0.05
Typically 5FN.

As welded Typical
Note: In practice, mechanical properties of the root bead are assessed with the whole joint and subsequent filler.

* No back-purge is required.
Satisfactory application of Superoot 316L requires the use of a keyhole welding technique. Further details are available on request.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.2
TIG 1 kg tube
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Ni Cr3 Cu F OES (mg/m3) OES (mg/m3)
30 12 11 15 < 0.5 -- 3.3 3.1
www.metrode.com DS B-32-SUPEROOT 316L | Rev. 01-03/16 133

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
NON-MAGNETIC 316L CONSUMABLES

MICROSTRUCTURE
STAINLESS STEELS
ALLOY TYPE
Nil-ferrite, modified 316L alloy for non-magnetic, Fully austenitic.
cryogenic and nitric acid applications.
WELDING GUIDELINES
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED No preheat required, and maximum interpass
For type 316L and similar parent materials where temperature 150°C.
ferrite-free and non-magnetic weld metal is required;
also suitable for 304/304L and 316/316L for cryogenic ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
service. ASTM A262 practice C (Huey) corrosion test
May be suitable for welding 200 series stainless steels, (immersion in boiling, 65%, nitric acid for five
eg. UNS S20910 (XM-19), Nitronic 50 (Armco) and other. 48 hour periods): typical corrosion rates are
nitrogen strengthened stainless steels. 0.7–1.2µm/48hr (0.13-0.22mm/year). Stamicarbon
requirement is 3.3µm/48hr.
APPLICATIONS
The high nickel and nitrogen levels provide a fully
austenitic and non-magnetic weld deposit with RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
maximum magnetic permeability of 1.01. A typical The 310L and 904L alloys may also be useful for
tensile strength above 600MPa is also achieved by low magnetic permeability applications.
means of the controlled level of nitrogen. A high
manganese content ensures freedom from micro-
fissuring in the ferrite-free weld metal. PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
Applications exploiting non-magnetic properties
Ultramet 316NF BS EN E 18 15 3 L R 3 2
include welding of 316L fittings for minesweepers and MMA
Ultramet B316NF BS EN E 18 15 3 L B 4 2
offshore downhole instrumentation collars.
TIG/MIG ER316MnNF BS EN 20 16 3 Mn N L
The fully austenitic microstructure gives excellent FCW Supercore 316NF (BS EN T 18 16 5 N L R C/M 3)
strength and toughness at cryogenic temperatures
for joining 304L and 316L LPG and LNG storage vessels.
Useful toughness is also maintained down to liquid
helium temperatures -269°C (4°K) for superconducting
applications. Impact testing procedures at this
temperature are complex and expensive, with results of
questionable validity. To qualify the toughness of weld
metal for service at 4°K, the ASME Code Committee
has proposed >0.53mm (21mils) at –196°C (77°K). This
proposal is based on correlations between fracture
toughness and Charpy data at these temperatures.
Unlike conventional 316L weld metal containing ferrite,

which suffers preferential attack in concentrated nitric
acid, the nil-ferrite alloy has excellent resistance and
is suitable for deposition directly onto CMn steel to
provide corrosion resistant overlays.

ULTRAMET 316NF
ALL-POSITIONAL RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Rutile (low silica) flux on high purity 304L core wire.
Special control of residuals coupled with a high manganese content ensures freedom from microfissuring.
STAINLESS STEELS
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.4M (E316LMn-16) Nearest classification QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 18 15 3 L R 3 2 This is nearest because the electrode
does not strictly conform to AWS

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu N
Min. -- 2.5 -- -- -- 16.5 14.0 2.5 -- 0.1
Max. 0.04 4.0 0.9 0.025 0.030 19.5 17.0 3.5 0.5 0.2
Typical < 0.03 3.0 0.4 0.01 0.02 18 16 2.8 < 0.1 0.15
Maximum magnetic permeability 1.01
5d 30 35
Impact ISO-V(J) -196°C * -- 60
Lateral expansion(mm, mils) -196°C * -- 0.7mm / (28mils)
* Useful impact properties are maintained down to 4°K (-269°C) and exceeds proposed ASME Code recommendation.

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 350
kg/carton 13.5 15.0 15.0 16.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Ni Cr Cu F* OES (mg/m3) OES (mg/m3)
8 10 1.5 5 <0.2 16 1 1
* F=28% for basic coated Ultramet B316NF but this does not affect OES.
www.metrode.com DS B-33-ULTRAMET 316NF | Rev. 01-03/16 135

ULTRAMET B316NF
BASIC ALL-POSITIONAL MMA PIPE WELDING ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Basic carbonate-fluoride flux on high purity 304L core wire. Special control of residuals coupled with a high manganese to ensure
freedom from microfissuring.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.4M (E316LMn-15) Nearest classification QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 18 15 3 L B 4 2 This is nearest because the electrode
does not strictly conform to AWS

Min. -- 2.5 -- -- -- 16.5 14.0 2.5 -- 0.1
Max. 0.04 4.0 0.9 0.025 0.030 19.5 17.0 3.5 0.5 0.2
Typical < 0.03 3.5 0.4 0.01 0.02 18 16 2.8 < 0.1 0.15
Maximum magnetic permeability 1.01.
5d 30 35
Impact ISO-V(J) -196°C * -- 50
Lateral expansion(mm, mils) -196°C * -- 0.6 / (24mils)

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 350
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 13.5 16.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Ni Cr Cu F* OES (mg/m3) OES (mg/m3)
8 10 1.5 5 <0.2 16 1 1
* F=28% for basic coated Ultramet B316NF but this does not affect OES.
136 www.metrode.com DS B-33-ULTRAMET B316NF | Rev. 01-03/16

ER316MnNF
NON-MAGNETIC SOLID WIRES FOR TIG AND MIG
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for TIG and MIG welding.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.9M ER316LMn QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO 14343-A 20 16 3 Mn N L QW442 A-No --

Min. -- 6.0 0.30 -- -- 19.0 15.0 2.5 -- 0.12
Max. 0.025 8.0 0.65 0.02 0.030 21.0 18.0 3.5 0.3 0.20
Typical 0.02 7 0.5 0.01 0.02 20 16 3 0.15 0.15

Typical values as welded TIG
5d 34
Impact ISO-V(J) - 100°C 140
- 196°C * 95
Lateral expansion mm (mils) - 196°C * 1.0 (40)

MIG Ar+2%O2** DC+ 1.2 260A, 26V
* Proprietary Ar and Ar-He gas mixtures with <3%CO2 also suitable.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.4
TIG -- -- 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube
MIG 15kg spool 15kg spool -- --
FUME DATA
26 22 15 13 1.5 < 0.5 3.3
www.metrode.com DS B-33-ER316MnNF | Rev. 01-03/16 137

SUPERCORE 316NF
RUTILE FLUX CORED WIRE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Flux cored wire made with an austenitic stainless steel sheath and rutile flux system.
Supercore 347 combines easy operability, high deposit quality and good weld bead appearance for downhand and HV welding.
Metal recovery is about 90% with respect to wire.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.22M (E316LT0-1/4) Nearest classification QW432 F-No --
BS EN ISO 17633-A (T 18 16 5 N L R C/M 3) Nearest classification QW442 A-No --
Approval TÜV

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo N
Min. -- 2.0 0.2 -- -- 17.0 14.0 2.5 0.08
Max. 0.04 3.0 1.0 0.025 0.03 19.0 16.0 3.5 0.20
Typical 0.03 2.5 0.4 0.01 0.025 18 15 3 0.12

5d 25 34
Impact ISO-V(J) - 196°C * -- 50
Lateral expansion (mm) - 196°C * 0.38 (15mils) 0.6
Hardness HV -- 185
The wire is suitable for use on 100%CO2 with some loss of cosmetic appearance and increased spatter.
Current: DC+ve parameters as below (for 100%CO2 increase voltage by ~3V):
1.2 130A-25V to 280A-34V 180A-29V 12-20mm
PACKAGING DATA
Spools vacuum-sealed in barrier foil with cardboard carton: 12.5kg
FUME DATA
12 18 2 4 4 <1 6 1.2
138 www.metrode.com DS B-33-SUPERCORE 316NF | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
STAINLESS STEELS
Nb stabilised, Mo-bearing stainless steel. No preheat, maximum interpass temperature
250°C.
wrought cast
ASTM/ASME 316Ti, 316Cb CF10MC Supermet 318 is not recommended for cryogenic
DIN & BS EN 1.4571 / 1.4573 1.4579 / 1.4581
applications, nor elevated temperature structural
service.
1.4580 / 1.4583
BS 320S31 / 33 318C17
UNS S31635, RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
31640
The 316L consumables can be used for many of the
same base materials and applications (data sheet
APPLICATIONS B-32). For cryogenic applications see controlled
Use to weld titanium or niobium-stabilised grades of ferrite 316L consumables (data sheet B-32) and for
molybdenum-bearing austenite stainless steels, or elevated temperature see 316H (C-13) or 16.8.2 (C-12)
as an alternative electrode for unstabilised grades consumables.
such as 316/316L. It is not recommended for structural
service above about 400°C.
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
It is also used for depositing corrosion resistance Process Product Specification
overlays and valve seat inlays on medium carbon alloy
MMA Supermet 318 AWS E318-17
steels, and for this reason the electrode is normally
supplied with a typical ferrite content of 3-14FN. TIG/MIG 318S96 AWS ER318
SAW 318S96 AWS ER318
SS300 BS EN SA AF2
MICROSTRUCTURE
SSB BS EN SA AF2
Austenite with 3-14FN (3-12% ferrite), typically 10FN.

SUPERMET 318
NB STABILISED MO-BEARING STAINLESS STEEL MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Rutile-aluminosilicate flux on high purity 304L core wire giving very low (<0..025%) typical carbon levels.
Designed for ease of use, exceptional weld bead appearance, and high weld metal integrity, primarily in the downhand and H-V
welding positions. Smaller sizes up to 3.2mm offer excellent all-positional operability.
Low hydrogen manufacturing technology ensures high resistance to weld metal porosity.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.4M E318-17 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 19 12 3 Nb R 3 2 QW442 A-No 8

min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 17.0 11.0 2.5 10 x C -- 6
max. 0.04 2.0 0.90 0.025 0.030 20.0 13.0 3.0 1.0 0.50 13
Typical 0.025 0.8 0.7 0.01 0.02 19 11.5 2.7 0.6 0.1 9

5d 25 35

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 11.4 14.1 13.2 18.0
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Ni Cr Mo Cu F OES (mg/m3)
8 7 1 5 0.5 <0.2 16 1
140 www.metrode.com DS B-34-SUPERMET 318 | Rev. 01-03/16

318S96
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.9M ER318
QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO 14343-A 19 12 3 Nb
QW442 A-No 8

Min. -- 1.0 0.30 -- -- 18.5 11.0 2.5 10xC -- 3
Max. 0.07 2.0 0.65 0.02 0.030 20.0 13.0 3.0 1.0 0.3 12
Typical 0.035 1.8 0.45 0.01 0.02 19.5 11.5 2.5 0.6 0.2 10

5d 35

MIG Ar+2%O2 ** DC+ 1.2 260A, 26V
SAW SS300 *** DC+ 2.4 350A, 28V
* Also required as a back purge for root runs.
** Also proprietary Ar and Ar-He mixtures with <3%CO2.
*** SSB also suitable.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4
TIG -- 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube
SAW -- -- -- 25kg spool
FUME DATA
30 12 15 11 1.5 <0.5 3.3
www.metrode.com DS B-34-318S96 | Rev. 01-03/16 141

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168

STAINLESS STEELS

19%Cr-13%Ni-3.5%Mo (317L) austenitic stainless steel. Austenite with 3-10FN (3-9% ferrite), typically 5FN.

wrought cast No preheat required, and a maximum interpass of
ASTM/UNS 150°C is desirable. Normally used in the as-welded
317 / S31700 CG8M condition.
317L / S31703 CG3M
DIN & BS EN
1.4438 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
BS The 317LM and 1.4539 alloys, with 4-5%Mo, can be
317S16 317C16 welded with the overmatching 904L consumables
317S12 317C12 (data sheet B-40).

Use to weld 317/317L stainless steels in which the 317L falls between the lower alloyed 316L (data
raised Mo level provides improved resistance to sheet B-32) and the higher alloyed 904L (data sheet
pitting in high chloride environments and to some B-40) materials.
acids (not nitric acid). These steels are used in marine,
chemical process, papermaking, and food processing
applications. PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
Also suitable for 316/316L and their stabilised versions Process Product Specification
when the benefits of higher molybdenum weld metal MMA Ultramet 317L AWS E317L-16
are required to maximise weld area pitting resistance. TIG/MIG ER317L AWS ER317L
Not suitable for structural service above about 400°C, FCW Supercore 317LP AWS E317LT1-1/4
or for cryogenic applications.

ULTRAMET 317L
ALL-POSITIONAL MMA ELECTRODE FOR 317L STAINLESS STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Rutile flux on high purity 304L core wire giving very low (<0.025%) typical carbon levels. A controlled addition of nitrogen, in
conjunction with ~3.8%Mo, provides improved pitting corrosion resistance compared to 316L. Ultramet 317L gives both welder
and weld metal all the benefits of advanced rutile electrode design. These features include optimum versatility for downhand
and positional welding, combined with high cosmetic finish and full volumetric weld metal integrity. The smaller electrode sizes
are particularly suited to vertical and overhead welding applications including fixed pipework. Low hydrogen manufacturing
STAINLESS STEELS
technology ensures high resistance to weld metal porosity.
AWS A5.4M E317L-16 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 19 13 4 N L R 3 2 QW442 A-No 8

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu N FN
min. -- 1.0 -- -- -- 18.0 12.0 3.5 -- 0.08 3
max. 0.04 2.5 0.90 0.025 0.030 20.0 14.0 4.0 0.50 0.20 10
Typical 0.02 1.2 0.6 0.01 0.02 19 13 3.8 0.1 0.12 5
5d 25 36
-50°C -- 30
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 13.5 18.6
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Ni Cr Cu Mo F OES (mg/m3)
8 6 1 6 <0.2 0.6 16 0.8

ER317L
SOLID WIRES FOR TIG AND MIG
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.9M ER 317, ER 317L ASME IX QUALIFICATION

BS EN ISO 14343-A 19 13 4 L QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO 14343-B SS317, SS317L QW442 A-No 8

Min. -- 1.0 0.30 -- -- 18.5 13.0 3.0 -- 2
Max. 0.03 2.5 0.65 0.02 0.030 20.0 15.0 4.0 0.3 10
Typical 0.015 1.5 0.4 0.01 0.02 19 14 3.5 0.15 5


MIG Ar+2%O2 ** DC+ 1.2 260A, 26V
** Proprietary Ar and Ar-He gas mixtures with <3%CO2 also suitable.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.4
FUME DATA
MIG fume composition (wt %) (TIG fume negligible):
28 12 12 15 2 <0.5 1
144 www.metrode.com DS B-35-ER317L | Rev. 01-03/16

SUPERCORE 317LP
ALL-POSITIONAL RUTILE FLUX CORED WIRE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Flux cored wire made with an austenitic stainless steel sheath and rutile flux system. Supercore 317LP is designed for all-
positional welding including fixed pipework but provides excellent operability in the flat and HV positions as well. Metal recovery
is about 90% with respect to the wire.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.22M E317LT1-1/4 QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO 17633-A (T 19 13 4 N L P C/M 2) Nearest classification QW442 A-No 8
BS EN ISO 17633-B TS317L-FB1

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu N FN
min. -- 0.5 0.2 -- -- 18.0 12.0 3.0 -- -- 3
max. 0.04 2.5 1.0 0.025 0.030 20.0 14.0 4.0 0.5 0.20 10
Typical 0.03 1 0.6 0.02 0.02 19 13 3.5 0.1 0.07 6

5d 20 25
-50°C -- 45
Hardness HV -- 220
1.2 120 – 280A, 22 – 34V 180A, 29V 15 – 20mm
PACKAGING DATA
Spools vacuum-sealed in barrier foil with cardboard carton: 15kg spool.
FUME DATA
17 10 1.5 3 5 <1 5 1
www.metrode.com DS B-35-SUPERCORE 317LP | Rev. 01-03/16 145

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
CRYOGENIC 308LCF CONSUMABLES

STAINLESS STEELS

Controlled ferrite 308L austenitic stainless steels No preheat, maximum interpass temperature
for joining 304L base materials used in cryogenic 250°C (300°C may be acceptable on thicker
applications. section material); no PWHT required.
For optimum impact properties use heat inputs
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED at the higher end of the allowable ranges.
ASTM BS EN & DIN
304L 1.4306 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
304 1.4301
304LN 1.4311 There is a Technical Profile covering the use
CF3 1.4308 of the controlled ferrite consumables for LNG
CF8 applications.
G B Holloway et al ‘Stainless steel arc welding
BS UNS consumables for cryogenic applications.’
304S11 S 30403 Stainless Steel World America 2004 Conference,
304S15 / 16 / 31 S 30400 Houston, 2004.
304S61 S 30453
304C12
304C15 RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
General purpose 308L stainless steel consumables
are in data sheet B-30. Stainless steel
APPLICATIONS consumables for high temperature applications
Used to weld 18/8 stainless steels with service on 304H can be found in data sheets C-10 or C-12.
temperatures down to –196°C. The controlled ferrite
SMAW electrodes and flux cored wires are specifically
designed for cryogenic service; they are not batch PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
selected consumables.
Applications include pipework and vessels subject to Process Product Specification
cryogenic service (-196°C) eg LNG. Ultramet 308LCF AWS E308L-16
MMA
Standard 308L consumables for general purpose Ultramet B308LCF AWS E308L-15
fabrication can be found in data sheet B-30. The 308L TIG ER308LCF AWS ER308L
consumables covered here are not suitable for 304/304H
ER308LCF AWS ER308L
in elevated temperature structural applications, see SAW
data sheets C-10 and C-12. SS300 BS EN SA AF2
FCW Supercore 308LCF AWS E308LT1-1/4J
MICROSTRUCTURE
Austenite with a controlled level of ferrite, 2-5FN (3-
8FN for solid wires).

ULTRAMET 308LCF
RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE FOR CRYOGENIC 304L APPLICATIONS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – special rutile flux coated 308L electrode on high purity 304L core wire. Versatile downhand and positional
capability, Ultramet 308LCF has a controlled composition and ferrite content designed for cryogenic service requiring >0.38mm
lateral expansion at minus 130-196°C. Also suitable for unusual occasions when 304L is specified for service up to 550°C and
corrosion conditions preclude the use of 308H.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.4M E308L-16 QW432 F-No 5

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 18.0 9.0 -- -- 2
Max. 0.04 2.0 0.90 0.025 0.030 21.0 11.0 0.50 0.5 5
Typical <0.025 1 0.6 0.01 0.02 18.5 10 0.1 <0.1 3

5d 30 46
Impact ISO*-V(J) -100°C -- 45
-196°C -- 35
Lateral expansion* (mm) -196°C 0.38 0.50
* Batch tested for Charpy lateral expansion >0.38mm at –196°C

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 11.4 13.5 13.5 16.2
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 5 5 0.8 - < 0.2 16 1
* F=28% for basic coated Ultramet B308LCF but this does not affect the OES
www.metrode.com DS B-37-ULTRAMET 308LCF | Rev. 01-03/16 147

ULTRAMET B308LCF
BASIC MMA PIPE-WELDING ELECTRODE FOR CRYOGENIC 304L APPLICATIONS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
core wire. Ultramet B308LCF is particularly suited to the most demanding vertical and overhead welding applications including
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.4M E308L-15 QW432 F-No 5

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 18.0 9.0 -- -- 2
Max. 0.04 2.0 0.90 0.025 0.030 21.0 11.0 0.50 0.5 5
Typical 0.03 1.2 0.3 0.01 0.015 18.5 10 0.05 <0.1 3

5d 30 40
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C -- 80-120
-196°C -- 35-50
* Batch tested for Charpy lateral expansion >0.38mm at –196°C.

min. A 60 75 100
max. A 90 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 13.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 5 5 0.8 - < 0.2 16 1
* F=28% for basic coated Ultramet B308LCF but this does not affect the OES
148 www.metrode.com DS B-37-ULTRAMET B308LCF | Rev. 01-03/16

ER308LCF
SOLID WIRES FOR CRYOGENIC 304L APPLICATIONS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Batch selected solid wire for TIG and sub-arc welding.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.9M ER308L QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO 14343-A 19 9 L QW442 A-No 8
BS EN ISO 14343-B SS308L

Min. -- 1.0 0.30 -- -- 19.5 9.0 -- -- 3
Max. 0.025 2.0 0.65 0.020 0.030 21.0 11.0 0.3 0.3 8
Typical 0.01 1.7 0.4 0.01 0.015 20 10 0.1 0.15 7

Typical
As welded Min.
TIG SAW + SS300
5d 30 33 37
110 50
-196°C -- 80 45
Lateral expansion * (mm) -196°C 0.38 1.0 0.5
* ER308LCF SAW wire batch tested, with SS300 flux, for Charpy lateral expansion >0.38mm at –196°C.C.

SAW SS300 DC+ 2.4 350A,30V
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube
SAW -- -- 25kg spool 25kg spool
FUME DATA
32 12 16 8 < 0.5 < 0.5 3.1
www.metrode.com DS B-37-ER308LCF | Rev. 01-03/16 149

SUPERCORE 308LCF
RUTILE ALL-POSITIONAL FLUX CORED WIRE FOR CRYOGENIC 304L APPLICATIONS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Supercore 308LCF has a controlled composition and ferrite content designed for cryogenic service requiring >0.38mm lateral
expansion at minus 130-196°C.
Supercore 308LCF is designed for all-positional welding including fixed pipework. Metal recovery is about 90% with respect to
the wire.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.22M E308LT1-1/4J QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO 17633-A T 19 9 L P C/M 2 QW442 A-No 8

Min. -- 0.5 0.2 -- -- 18.0 9.0 -- -- 2
Max. 0.04 2.0 1.0 0.025 0.030 21.0 11.0 0.3 0.3 5
Typical 0.03 1.4 0.6 0.01 0.02 18.6 10.5 0.1 0.1 3

5d 30 46
Impact ISO-V(J) + 20°C --
74
-130°C -- 40
-196°C -- 36
CCurrent: DC+ve ranges as below for Ar-20%CO2. Welding with 100%CO2 requires approx 3V higher:
120 – 280A, 22 – 34V 180A, 29V (downhand)
1.2 15 – 25mm
150A, 25V (positional) 15 – 20mm
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
17 10 1.5 3 5 <1 5 1
150 www.metrode.com DS B-37-SUPERCORE 308LCF | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
CRYOGENIC 316LCF CONSUMABLES

ALLOY TYPE
STAINLESS STEELS
WELDING GUIDELINES
Controlled ferrite 316L austenitic stainless steels No preheat, maximum interpass temperature
for joining 316L base materials used in cryogenic 250°C (300°C may be acceptable on thicker
applications. section material); no PWHT required.
For optimum impact properties use heat inputs
at the higher end of the allowable ranges.
ASTM BS EN & DIN
316L 1.4404 / 1.4401 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
316 1.4436 There is a Technical Profile covering the use
316LN 1.4406 / 1.4429 of the controlled ferrite consumables for LNG
CF3M 1.4408 applications.
CF8M 1.4437
G B Holloway et al ‘Stainless steel arc welding
BS UNS consumables for cryogenic applications.’
316S11 / 13 S 31603
316S16 / 31 / 33 S 31600
Stainless Steel World America 2004 Conference,
316S61 S 31653 Houston, 2004.
316C12
316C16 / 71
General purpose 316L stainless steel consumables
APPLICATIONS are in data sheet B-32. Stainless steel
consumables for high temperature applications
These consumables are used for Mo bearing austenitic
on 316H can be found in data sheets C-12 or C-13.
stainless steels with 1.5 – 3% Mo. Type 316/316L steels
are widely used for their good resistance to pitting,
many acids and general corrosion. . The controlled
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
ferrite SMAW electrodes and flux cored wires are
specifically designed for cryogenic service; they are not Process Product Specification
batch selected consumables. Ultramet 316LCF AWS E316L-16
MMA
Ultramet B316LCF AWS E316L-15
Applications include pipework and vessels subject to
TIG ER316LCF AWS ER316L
cryogenic service (-196°C) eg LNG.
ER316LCF AWS ER316L
SAW
Standard 316L consumables for general purpose SS300 BS EN SA AF2
fabrication can be found in data sheet B-32. The 316L FCW Supercore 316LCF AWS E316LT1-1/4J
consumables covered here are not suitable for 316/316H
in elevated temperature structural applications, see
data sheets C-12 and C-13.
MICROSTRUCTURE
Austenite with a controlled level of ferrite, 2-5FN (3-
8FN for solid wires).

ULTRAMET 316LCF
RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE FOR CRYOGENIC 316L APPLICATIONS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – special rutile flux coated 316L electrode on high purity 304L core wire. Versatile downhand and positional capability,
Ultramet 316LCF has a controlled composition and ferrite content designed for cryogenic service requiring >0.38mm lateral expansion
at minus 130-196°C. Also suitable for unusual occasions when 316L is specified for service up to 550°C and corrosion conditions
preclude the use of 316H.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.4M E316L-16 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 (E 19 12 3 L R 3 2) Nearest classification QW442 A-No 8

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 17.0 11.0 2.0 -- 2
Max. 0.04 2.0 0.90 0.025 0.030 20.0 13.0 3.0 0.5 5
Typical <0.03 1 0.6 0.01 0.02 18 12 2.2 <0.1 3
* Does not conform to DIN & BS EN which requires Mo 2.5 – 3.0%.
5d 25 39
Impact ISO*-V(J) + 20°C -- 70
-100°C -- 50
-196°C -- 30
Hardness HV -- 230
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 11.4 13.5 13.5 16.5
STORAGE
3 hermetically sealed ring-pull metal tins per carton, with unlimited shelf life. Direct use from tin is satisfactory for longer than a working shift
of 8h. Excessive exposure of electrodes to humid conditions will cause some moisture pick-up and increase the risk of porosity.
Storage of redried electrodes at 50 – 200°C in holding oven or heated quiver: no limit, but maximum 6 weeks recommended. Recommended
ambient storage conditions for opened tins (using plastic lid): < 60% RH, > 18°C.
FUME DATA
8 7 5 1 0.5 < 0.2 16 1
* F=28% for basic coated Ultramet B316LCF but this does not affect the OES.
152 www.metrode.com DS B-38-ULTRAMET 316LCF | Rev. 01-03/16

ULTRAMET B316LCF
BASIC MMA PIPE-WELDING ELECTRODE FOR CRYOGENIC 316L APPLICATIONS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
core wire. Ultramet B316L is particularly suited to the most demanding vertical and overhead welding applications including fixed
pipework in the ASME 5G/6G position. Under site conditions it is tolerant to adverse wind and drafts.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.4M E316L-15 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 (E 19 12 3 L B 4 2) Nearest classification QW442 A-No 8

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo * Cu FN
Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 17.0 11.0 2.0 -- 2
Max. 0.04 2.0 0.90 0.025 0.030 20.0 13.0 3.0 0.5 5
Typical <0.03 1.2 0.3 0.01 0.02 19 12 2.2 <0.1 3
* Does not conform to DIN & BS EN which requires Mo 2.5 – 3.0%.

5d 25 33
-196°C -- 35
OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC +VE ONLY

min. A 60 75 100
max. A 90 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 450
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 17.4
STORAGE
FUME DATA
8 7 5 1 0.5 < 0.2 16 1
* F=28% for basic coated Ultramet B316LCF but this does not affect the OES.
www.metrode.com DS B-38-ULTRAMET B316LCF | Rev. 01-03/16 153

ER316LCF
SOLID WIRES FOR CRYOGENIC 316L APPLICATIONS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wires for TIG and sub-arc welding.

STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.9M ER316L W=TIG, S=SAW QW432 F-No 6

BS EN ISO 14343-A 19 12 3 L QW442 A-No 8

Min. -- 1.0 0.30 -- -- 18.0 11.0 2.5 -- 3
Max. 0.025 2.0 0.65 0.020 0.030 20.0 14.0 3.0 0.3 8
Typical 0.01 1.4 0.5 0.01 0.015 18.5 12.8 2.6 0.15 6

Typical
As welded Min.
TIG SAW + SS300
5d 25 45 37
> 100 > 45
-196°C -- > 60 40
Lateral expansion * (mm) -196°C 0.38 1.0 0.5
* ER316LCF SAW wire batch tested, with SS300 flux for Charpy lateral expansion >0.38mm at –196°C.

SAW SS300 DC+ 2.4 350A, 28V
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube
SAW -- -- 25kg spool --
FUME DATA
Fume composition (wt%), (TIG and SAW fume negligible)
30 12 15 11 1.5 < 0.5 3.3
154 www.metrode.com DS B-38-ER316LCF | Rev. 01-03/16

SUPERCORE 316LCF
RUTILE ALL-POSITIONAL FLUX CORED WIRE FOR CRYOGENIC 316L APPLICATIONS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Supercore 316LCF has a controlled composition and ferrite content designed for cryogenic service requiring >0.38mm lateral
expansion at minus 130-196°C.
Supercore 316LCF is designed for all-positional welding including fixed pipework. Metal recovery is about 90% with respect to the
wire.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.22M E316LT1-1/4J QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO 17633-A (T 19 12 3 L P C/M 2) Nearest classification QW442 A-No 8

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo * Cu FN
Min. -- 0.5 0.2 -- -- 17.0 11.0 2.0 -- 2
Max. 0.04 2.0 1.0 0.025 0.030 20.0 13.0 3.0 0.5 5
Typical 0.03 1.4 0.6 0.01 0.02 18.0 12.4 2.2 0.1 3
* Does not conform to BS EN ISO 17633-A which requires Mo 2.5 – 3.0%.

5d 25 38
75
-130°C -- 45
-196°C -- 34
Lateral expansion * (mm) -130°C -- 0.70
-196°C 0.38 0.55
120 – 280A, 22 – 34V 180A, 29V (downhand)
1.2 15 – 20mm
150A, 25V (positional) 160A, 26V
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
14 12 2.5 4 4 <1 5 1.2
www.metrode.com DS B-38-SUPERCORE 316LCF | Rev. 01-03/16 155

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168

STAINLESS STEELS
904L is a nominally 20%Cr-25%Ni-5%Mo-2%Cu fully In the as-welded condition the weld metal
austenitic alloy with good corrosion resistance. microstructure is fully austenitic.

DIN No preheat or PWHT is required, interpass should
ASTM - ASME
1.4505 be controlled to 150°C maximum and heat input
N08904
1.4506 should also be controlled particularly with larger
BS 1.4536 diameter MMA electrodes.
1449: 904S13 1.4539
1504: 364C11 (cast) 1.4585
1.4500 (cast)
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
Proprietary alloys Process Product Specification

Uddelholm 904L Ultramet 904L E385-16
2RK65 (Sandvik)
MMA
Ultramet B904L E385-15
Cronifer 1925LC (VDM)
254SLX (Avesta Polarit)
TIG/MIG 20.25.4Cu ER385
Uranus B6 & B6M (Creusot Loire)
Suitable for copper-free variants of the above alloys
and also to overmatch leaner alloys such as 317L, 317LN,
317LM, 317LMN, 1.4439, 1.4440 and S31726.
APPLICATIONS
These consumables give a fully austenitic, low carbon
weld metal with molybdenum and copper, with good
resistance to corrosion in sulphuric, phosphoric and
other inorganic and organic acids.
They are not normally chosen for resistance to

corrosion in concentrated nitric acid. For service in
severe chloride pitting media, overmatching nickel-
base weld metal is recommended, see alloy 625 (data
sheet D-20).
It is the preferred weld metal for some lower alloy

austenitics such as Creusot UHB 34L and UHB 734L for
wet process phosphoric acid service.
Applications include tanks and process vessels, piping

systems, agitators and rotors and cast pumps and valves
for use in the fertiliser, phosphoric, sulphuric and acetic
acid plants, and in salt and seawater environments. It
is also used in some offshore applications, including
overlays on mild and low alloy steels.
DS B-40 | Rev. 01-03/16

156 www.metrode.com
ULTRAMET 904L
RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE FOR ALLOY 904L
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode (formerly 21.26.5.CuNb.R) with a special rutile flux on low carbon, high purity austenitic stainless steel core wire.
Careful control of carbon, silicon, manganese and molybdenum contents to give resistance to microfissuring.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.4M E385-16 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 20 25 5 Cu N L R 5 2 QW442 A-No 9

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu Nb N
Min. -- 1.0 -- -- -- 19.5 24.0 4.2 1.2 -- --
Max. 0.03 2.5 0.90 0.02 0.030 21.5 26.0 5.2 2.0 0.5 0.25
Typical 0.02 1.2 0.55 0.015 0.02 20.5 25 4.6 1.5 0.02 0.09

5d 25 35
Impact ISO*-V(J) -196°C -- 50

min. A 60 75 100
max. A 90 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 14.1
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Ni Cr Mo Cu F* OES (mg/m3)
8 8 2 7 1.5 0.5 18 0.7

ULTRAMET B904L
BASIC ALL-POSITIONAL MMA PIPE-WELDING ELECTRODE FOR ALLOY 904L
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Special basic flux on low carbon, high purity austenitic stainless steel core wire. Careful control of carbon, silicon, manganese and
molybdenum contents to give resistance to microfissuring.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.4M E385-15 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 20 25 5 Cu N L B 6 2 QW442 A-No 9

Min. -- 1.0 -- -- -- 19.5 24.0 4.2 1.2 -- --
Max. 0.03 2.5 0.90 0.02 0.030 21.5 26.0 5.2 2.0 0.5 0.25
Typical 0.025 2 0.4 0.005 0.02 21 25 4.8 1.8 0.05 0.08

5d 25 38

min. A 60 75 100
max. A 90 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 11.4 13.5 14.1
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Ni Cr Mo Cu F* OES (mg/m3)
8 8 2 7 1.5 0.5 18 0.7
158 www.metrode.com DS B-40-ULTRAMET B904L | Rev. 01-03/16

20.25.4.Cu
SOLID WIRES FOR TIG AND MIG FOR ALLOY 904L
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
STAINLESS STEELS
BS EN ISO 14343-A 20 25 5 Cu L QW442 A-No 9

Min. -- 1.0 0.25 -- -- 19.5 24.0 4.2 1.2
Max. 0.025 2.5 0.50 0.015 0.020 21.5 26.0 5.2 2.0
Typical 0.01 1.7 0.3 0.001 0.015 20 25 4.5 1.5

5d 32

MIG Ar+2%O2 ** DC+ 1.2 230A, 30V
** Ar-He-CO2 proprietary mixtures also suitable.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4
TIG -- 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube
FUME DATA
28 13 16 20 3 2.5 2.5
www.metrode.com DS B-40-20.25.4.Cu | Rev. 01-03/16 159

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
CONSUMABLES FOR ALLOY 20

STAINLESS STEELS

20%Cr-34%Ni-3.5%Cu-2.5%Mo (alloy 20) austenitic No preheat, interpass to be controlled to 150°C
corrosion resistant alloy. maximum and heat input to be controlled
particularly with 4mm diameter electrodes.
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED Repair of alloy 20 castings may present particular

problems with HAZ regions being sensitive
ASTM to fissuring and weld metal increasing in
A351, A744 Grade CN-7M
crack sensitivity if silicon pick-up takes place.
BS Troublesome castings may require buttering at
1504 Grade 332C11 very low heat input with small diameter electrodes
Proprietary and minimum dilution.
Alloy 20, 20Cb, 20Cb-3 (Carpenter)
Paramount P20 (Lake & Elliot)
Langalloy 20V (Meighs) PWHT
Welds are normally left in the as-welded condition
but castings to ASTM specifications may require
APPLICATIONS solution treatment at 1125°C following major
This electrode is usually made to order. It gives a repairs.
fully austenitic, niobium stabilised weld metal with
molybdenum and copper and a high resistance
to corrosion in sulphuric acid, other mineral acids, RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
organic acids and their mixtures. Most parent
The 825 consumables (data sheet B-42) are similar
material specifications are for castings.
high alloy corrosion resistant products and can be
Applications include tanks, process piping, heat offered as a technically compatible alternative in
exchangers, agitators and rotors, cast pumps and some applications.
valves; for use in the chemical processing, metal
cleaning and pickling industries.
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
MICROSTRUCTURE MMA E320LR-15 AWS E320LR-15
In the as-welded condition the microstructure is
fully austenitic.

E320LR-15
MMA ELECTRODE FOR ALLOY 20
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a specially balanced basic-fluoride-rutile flux on an over-matching high purity core wire. The E320LR-15
electrode is manufactured with strict controls on the maximum carbon, silicon, sulphur and phosphorus (to optimise as-welded
corrosion resistance); and also restricted ranges for manganese and niobium. This low residual (LR) electrode is intended to
reduce sensitivity to microfissuring whilst maintaining excellent corrosion resistance, but interpass temperature and heat input
STAINLESS STEELS
still need to be controlled.
AWS A5.4M E320LR-15 QW432 F-No 5
QW442 A-No 9

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Nb Cu
min. -- 1.5 -- -- -- 19.0 32.0 2.0 8xC 3.0
max. 0.03 2.5 0.30 0.015 0.020 21.0 36.0 3.0 0.40 4.0
Typical 0.02 2 0.2 0.005 0.01 20 34 2.5 0.3 3.5
As welded Min. (1) Typical
0.2% proof strength (MPa) -- 345
5d 25 30
- 40°C -- 98
(1) ASTM N08020 parent material requires TS >550MPa, PS >240MPa

min. A 60 70 90
max. A 80 110 150
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 275 350 325
kg/carton 12.0 13.8 13.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
5 5 2 6 1 1 20 0.8
www.metrode.com DS B-41-E320LR-15 | Rev. 01-03/16 161

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
CONSUMABLES FOR ALLOY 825

STAINLESS STEELS

Cr-Ni-Mo-Cu alloy of the generic 825 type. In the as-welded condition the weld metal
microstructure is fully austenitic.

Matching 825 materials: No preheat required, interpass should be restricted
ASTM/ UNS to 150)C maximum and the heat input should
N08825 be controlled particularly with 4mm and 5mm
DIN diameter electrodes.
2.4858
BS
1501 & 3072 Grade NA16
Some authorities accept or prefer overmatching
Proprietary
type 625 weld metal (data sheet D-20) but 825 is the
Incoloy 825 (Special Metals)
conventional type for welding alloy 825. Both the
Incoloy 825CP, cast (Special Metals)
E825L-15 electrode and 82-50 wire are also suitable
Nicrofer 4221 (Krupp VDM)
for welding the leaner alloy 20 type materials. The
The E825L-15 MMA electrode is also suitable for the MMA electrode E825L-15 (but not the 82-50 wire)
28%Cr alloy 28 materials: can also be used for welding the 28%Cr, alloy 28
ASTM/ UNS type, materials.
N08028
DIN
1.4563 RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
Proprietary The 625 alloy (data sheet D-20) is sometimes used
Nicrofer 3127LC (Krupp VDM) for welding 825 and alloy 28 materials.
Sanicro 28 (Sandvik)
Also suitable for lower nickel materials of the alloy PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
20 type.
MMA E825L-15 DIN EL-NiCr28Mo
TIG/MIG 82-50 AWS ERNiFeCr-1
APPLICATIONS
The consumables deposit Cr-Ni-Mo-Cu weld metal
with a high corrosion resistance to organic acids
and hot sulphuric acid. The high nickel content
gives good resistance to stress corrosion cracking in
chloride and H2S environments.
Applications include tanks and process vessels,

pipework systems, heat exchangers, agitators and
rotors, and cast pumps and valves for use in the
chemical processing and increasingly offshore oil and
gas industries. Also suitable for corrosion resistant
overlays and for welding dissimilar materials.

E825L-15
MMA ELECTRODE FOR AUSTENITIC ALLOY 825
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode for welding 825, alloy 28 and alloy 20 type materials. Specially balanced basic-fluoride-rutile flux on high purity
825 core wire. The electrodes are designed for fixed pipework welds including the demanding ASME 5G/6G positions. Careful
control of carbon, manganese, silicon and nitrogen to maximise corrosion resistance in the as-welded condition and to ensure
high resistance to solidification cracking and microfissuring in multipass welds. The composition is controlled to give a Pitting
Resistance Equivalent (PRE) of about 40, where PRE = %Cr + 3.3%Mo.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.4M (E383-15) QW432 F-No 5
Does not strictly conform; Ni & Cu are higher in E825L-15 compared to the E383-15 classification (This is nearest because the electrode
does not strictly conform to AWS.
DIN EL-NiCr28Mo

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu Nb Fe
min. -- 1.0 -- -- -- 27.0 35.0 3.2 1.5 -- --
max. 0.03 3.0 0.5 0.015 0.030 31.0 40.0 4.5 3.0 1.0 30
Typical 0.02 2 0.3 0.01 0.01 28 38 3.5 2 0.3 27
5d 25 39
- 196°C -- 65

min. A 60 70 90
max. A 80 110 150
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 275 325 325
kg/carton 10.8 13.8 14.1
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
4 5 3 7 1 1 20 0.7
www.metrode.com DS B-42-E825L-15 | Rev. 01-03/16 163

82-50
SOLID TIG AND MIG WIRE FOR AUSTENITIC ALLOY 825
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for TIG and MIG welding of 825 and alloy 20 type materials. The 82-50 wire only has a nominal 21%Cr and so is not
suitable for alloy 28. Note MIG wire is to order only.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.14M ERNiFeCr-1 QW432 F-No 45
BS EN ISO 18274 SNi8065
Also known generically as filler metal 65 (FM65)

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu Al Ti Fe
min. -- -- -- -- -- 19.5 38.0 2.5 1.5 -- 0.60 22.0
max. 0.05 1.0 0.50 0.015 0.020 23.5 46.0 3.5 3.0 0.20 1.2 bal
Typical 0.02 0.5 0.3 0.005 0.015 22 40 3 2 0.1 0.8 30

Typical values as welded TIG (Ar) TIG (Ar+2%H2)
5d 16 35

MIG Argon DC+ ** 1.2 220A, 30V
* Also required as a purge for root runs. Ar+1-5%H2 can prove beneficial see mechanical properties.
** Pulsed current may provide better arc transfer characteristics.
PACKAGING DATA
TIG -- 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube
MIG (To order) 15kg spool -- --
FUME DATA
Fume composition (wt%), (TIG fume negligible)
23 2 19 29 2 3 1.7
164 www.metrode.com DS B-42-82-50 | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
STAINLESS STEELS
Low carbon 25%Cr-20%Ni (310L) for corrosion Fully austenitic.
resisting applications.
WELDING GUIDELINES
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED No preheat is required. Owing to the inherent
BS EN / DIN hot cracking susceptibility of fully austenitic weld
X1CrNi25 21 (1.4335) metal it is desirable to keep interpass temperature
AFNOR below 150°C and heat input below 1.5kJ/mm..
Z1 CN 25 20
Z2 CN 25 20 M (cast) RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
Proprietary The standard 310 alloy, with 0.1%C (data sheet
2RE10 (Sandvik) C-30) is related but is used for entirely different
Uranus 65 (Usinor Industeel)) high temperature applications and the two alloys
Cronifer 2521LC (Krupp VDM) cannot be interchanged.
APPLICATIONS The 316NF consumables (data sheet B-33) and the

310L consumables are designed for welding special Ultramet B310MoLN electrode can be used for
low-carbon 25%Cr-20%Ni alloys which are used for similar corrosion resisting applications.
their excellent resistance to oxidising media, e.g.
nitric acid. Applications range from the chemical PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
process plant used in fertiliser production to the
waste nuclear fuel reprocessing industries. It is not Process Product Specification
intended for welding standard type 310 used for MMA 25.20.L.R None
heat resisting applications (see data sheet C-30).
The electrode can also be used for surfacing steels

to give a deposit with properties similar to the bulk
weld metal, but care should be taken to deposit
sufficient layers to eliminate any effects of dilution.
The low carbon fully austenitic deposit has

excellent cryogenic toughness and it can be used
as an alternative to 308L/316L types for welding
conventional austenitic materials where superior
impact values are required at temperatures at or
below -196°C.

25.20.L.R
MMA ELECTRODE FOR 310L STAINLESS STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Special low silica basic rutile flux on low carbon stainless steel core wire.
Detrimental residual elements including silicon are kept to low levels for optimum corrosion performance.
Coupled with raised manganese, these features also ensure excellent resistance to microfissuring hot cracking.
Suitable for all-positional welding up to 3.2mm diameter.
STAINLESS STEELS

Approvals: Approved for welding equivalent parent material Uranus 65 by independent tests. QW442 A-No --

min. -- 4.0 -- -- -- 24.0 19.0 -- -- --
max. 0.040 7.0 0.4 0.020 0.025 26.0 22.0 0.2 0.3 0.3
Typical 0.03 5 0.3 0.008 0.01 25 21 0.1 <0.1 0.08
As welded Typical
5d 30
Hardness (HV) 170
ALL-WELD CORROSION PROPERTIES
The weld metal has been subjected to the Huey test (ASTM A262 practice C: 5 x 48hr periods in boiling 65% nitric acid).
The corrosion rates were as follows:
Condition Corrosion rate Selective attack
As-welded 0.40 µm/48hr (= 0.07mm or 3 mils/year) < 0.01mm
PWHT 815°C/2hrs 0.73 µm/48hr (= 0.13mm or 5 mils/year) < 0.13mm
min. A 75 100
max. A 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 350 350
kg/carton 13.5 13.2
Pieces/carton 318 192
STORAGE
FUME DATA
9 10 2 7.5 <0.2 18 0.6
166 www.metrode.com DS B-45-25.20.L.R | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
310MoLN STAINLESS STEELS
STAINLESS STEELS
25%Cr-22%Ni-2.5%Mo-0.15%N (alloy 310MoLN) In the as-welded condition the microstructure is
austenitic corrosion resistant alloy. fully austenitic. Typical magnetic permeability is
<1.01.
WELDING GUIDELINES
AISI
No preheat required and interpass should be
310MoLN
controlled to 150°C maximum. It is also desirable
AFNOR
for heat input to be limited to a maximum of 1.5kJ/
Z1 CND 25.22.Az
mm, particularly with 4mm diameter electrodes.
UNS
S31050
DIN / EN ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
1.4465 (X2CrNiMoN 25-25-2) The alloy has excellent resistance to the ASTM
1.4466 (X1CrNiMoN 25-22-2) A262 practice C corrosion test (Huey test). Typically
Proprietary required to meet <0.16g/m2/h (0.18mm/year), and
Uranus 25 22 2 (Usinor Industeel) selective attack <0.07mm.
2RE69, 3R60U.G (Sandvik)
Cronifer 25.25.LCN (VDM)
HR3ELM (Sumitomo)
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
MMA Ultramet B310MoLN BS EN: E 25 22 2 NLB
APPLICATIONS
Ultramet B310MoLN is used primarily for welding
similar wrought or cast 310MoLN parent alloys. It
is particularly suited to positional welding, including
fixed pipework qualified in the ASME 6G position,
in material thickness from 3mm up to the heaviest
sections.
The 310MoLN alloy has very good resistance to

pitting, intergranular corrosion, chloride bearing
media and nitric acid. The main applications of the
alloy are in the production and processing of urea
and sulphuric acid.
Applications are mainly for joining matching steels

although it can also be used for surfacing.

ULTRAMET B310MoLN
MMA ELECTRODE FOR ALLOY 310MOLN
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a specially balanced basic carbonate-fluoride flux on high purity stainless steel core wire. Low silicon and
high manganese levels ensure freedom from microfissuring.
STAINLESS STEELS

BS EN ISO 3581 E 25 22 2 N L B 4 2 QW432 F-No 5
(This is nearest because the electrode
does not strictly conform to AWS)

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo N Cu
min. -- 3.0 -- -- -- 24.0 20.0 2.0 0.10 --
max. 0.04 5.0 1.0 0.025 0.030 27.0 23.0 3.0 0.20 0.50
Typical 0.03 4 0.4 0.005 0.02 25 22 2.2 0.15 0.05

5d 25 36

min. A 60 75 100
max. A 90 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 11.4 13.8 13.8
Pieces/carton 465 375 21.0
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
9 10 2 7.5 <0.2 18 0.6
168 www.metrode.com DS B-46-ULTRAMET B310MoLN | Rev. 02-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
20.18.6.CU.R
STAINLESS STEELS
MMA electrode with basic-rutile flux system, including Preheat not required. Interpass temperature is restricted
to minimise the possibility of hot cracking in the parent
alloying, made on high purity stainless steel core wire. HAZ. In susceptible castings, buttering with 100°C
Recovery is about 130% with respect to core wire and 65% maximum interpass temperature and <1.0kJ/mm heat input
with respect to the whole electrode. may be required prior to filling the joint using more relaxed
parameters.
SPECIFICATIONS WELDING POSITIONS (ISO/ASME)
There are no national specifications for this electrode.
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED PA/1G PC/2G PB/2F
ASTM CHEMICAL COMPOSITION (WELD METAL WT %)

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu N PRE
A351 CK3MCuN (cast).
Min. -- 0.2 0.2 -- -- 19.5 17.5 6.0 0.5 0.15 40
A182 F44. Max. 0.03 1.0 0.8 0.02 0.03 21.0 20.0 7.0 1.0 0.28 --
S31254 Typical 0.02 0.8 0.3 0.01 0.02 20.5 18.5 6.5 0.7 0.2 44
BS EN PRE = Cr + 3.3Mo + 16N
1.4547 ALL-WELD MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
Proprietary Solution annealed 1200-1250°C/2h + WQ min* typical
254SMO (Outokumpu) Tensile strength (MPa) 550 716
APPLICATIONS 5d -- 47
This electrode deposits weld metal that closely matches Reduction of area % -- 54
the composition of equivalent 6%Mo superaustenitic Impact ISO-V(J) - 50°C -- >120
parent material, usually castings, and is used only when
* Minimum properties for CK3MCuN castings.
post weld solution annealing is applied.
As deposited weld metal of this type has inherent Mo OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC +VE OR AC (OCV: 70V MIN)
segregation and it is essential that welds are fully solution Diameter (mm) 3.2 4.0
annealed to obtain the excellent pitting resistance this alloy min. A 80 130
is capable of. When solution annealing is not possible the max. A 110 160
use of over-matching nickel base electrodes (Nimrod 625KS, PACKAGING DATA
Nimrod C22KS or Nimrod C59KS) is normal practice.
The main applications for this electrode are in foundry Length (mm) 350 350
repair or fabrication of castings for use in process plant kg/carton 15.0 14.1
where high resistance to chloride pitting and crevice Pieces/carton 378 201
corrosion is required. Applications include: heat exchangers
and pipework for seawater contaminated oil and gas plant, STORAGE
equipment for pulp bleaching, gas cleaning systems (FGD), 3 hermetically sealed ring-pull metal tins per carton, with
and components handling acid solutions with halides. unlimited shelf life. Direct use from tin is satisfactory for
longer than a working shift of 8h. Excessive exposure of
MICROSTRUCTURE electrodes to humid conditions will cause some moisture
Fully austenitic. pick-up and increase the risk of porosity.
HEAT TREATMENT Redry 200–300°C/1-2h to restore to as-packed condition.
To eliminate segregation this weld metal must be Maximum 250° C, 3 cycles, 10h total.
solution annealed. High Mo austenitic alloys are prone to Storage of redried electrodes at 50-200°C in holding oven or
intermetallic phase formation (sigma, chi) at 600-1000°C. 50-150°C in heated quiver: no limit, but maximum 6 weeks
This damage could occur in the HAZ and weld metal during recommended. Recommended ambient storage conditions
welding but will certainly occur as the temperature rises for opened tins (using plastic lid): < 60% RH, >18°C.
slowly during PWHT.
A minimum temperature of 1200°C is required to dissolve FUME DATA
these intermetallic phases and some authorities require Fume composition, wt % typical:
>1230°C. This is followed by water quenching to prevent Fe Mn Ni Cr Mo Cu F OES (mg/m3)
further intermetallic formation on cooling. 8 8 7 2 1.5 1 18 0.7

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168

STAINLESS STEELS

24%Cr-13%Ni (309L) austenitic stainless for dissimilar Preheat and interpass temperatures depend on
joint buffer layers etc. base material hardenability. For guidance, no
preheat on mild steels; up to 250°C on hardenable
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED steels.
Mainly used under high dilution conditions,
particularly dissimilar welds between stainless and ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
CMn steels. There is a Technical Profile on sub-arc welding
with 309S92 and also additional information
APPLICATIONS covering the Supercore flux cored wires.
There are 3 main areas of application:
Buffer layers and clad steels: Overlays on CMn, mild RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
steel or low alloy steels and for joining 304L/321 clad The 309Mo consumables (B-51), 307 (E-21) and 29.9
plate. Subsequent layers are deposited with an types (E-22) cover similar applications. For high
electrode chosen to match the cladding, eg 308L, 347. temperature applications refer to the controlled
ferrite 309 types (C-21) and high carbon 309H (C-
Dissimilar joints: Tolerance to dilution is exploited in 22) for matching high carbon cast alloys.
joining stainless types 410, 304L, 321 and 316L to mild
and low alloy steels such as stiffeners, brackets and
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
other attachments. Service temperatures above 400°C
are normally avoided. It is also used for welding 12%Cr Process Product Specification
‘utility ferritics’ such as Cromweld 3CR12, to itself and Supermet 309L AWS E309L-17
other steels. Ultramet 309L AWS E309L-16
MMA
Ultramet B309L AWS E309L-15
Similar metal joints: Wrought and cast steels of 23Cr-
12Ni type (eg ASTM 309 and CH8, BS 309S24 and 309C30) Ultramet 309LP AWS E309L-16
can be welded if the service requirement is corrosion TIG 309S92 AWS ER309L
resistance below 400°C. However, for high temperature MIG Supermig 309LSi AWS ER309LSi
structural service, weld metal with controlled higher 309S92 AWS ER309L
carbon and lower ferrite should be used (Thermet SAW SS300 BS EN SA AF2
309CF – data sheet C-21).
SSB BS EN SA AF2
Supercore 309L AWS E309LT0-1/4
MICROSTRUCTURE FCW
Supercore 309LP AWS E309LT1-1/4
Austenite with ferrite in the range 8-20FN. The solid
wires tend to have lower ferrite than the MMA and FCW
consumables, the ferrite falling in the range 8-15FN for
the solid wires.

SUPERMET 309L
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – rutile aluminosilicate flux on high purity 304L core wire giving very low typical carbon level. ‘Low hydrogen’
manufacturing technology ensures high resistance to weld metal porosity. ‘Supermet Technology’ gives acid rutile operability
combined with controlled silicon content for maximum cracking/corrosion resistance. Designed for ease of use, exceptional weld
bead appearance and high weld metal integrity, primarily in the downhand and HV positions; smaller sizes offer all-positional
operability.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.4M E309L-17 QW432 F-No 5
APPROVALS TÜV, ABS

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 22.0 12.0 -- -- 8
Max. 0.04 2.5 0.90 0.025 0.030 25.0 14.0 0.5 0.5 20
Typical 0.02 0.8 0.6 0.01 0.02 24 13 0.05 0.1 15
5d 30 36
Impact ISO*-V(J) +20°C -- 55

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 450 450
kg/carton 11.4 13.5 18.3 18.0
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
9 6 7 1 0.1 < 0.2 17 0.7
www.metrode.com DS B-50-SUPERMET 309L | Rev. 01-03/16 171

ULTRAMET 309L
ALL-POSITIONAL RUTILE 309L MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
and all-positional welding with the 2.5/3.2mm electrodes including fixed pipework. The 2.5mm electrodes are also designed for
open butt root welding.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.4M E309L-16 QW432 F-No 5
APPROVALS TÜV

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 22.0 12.0 -- -- 8
Max. 0.04 2.5 0.90 0.025 0.030 25.0 14.0 0.50 0.5 20
Typical 0.03 0.8 0.6 0.01 0.02 23.5 13 0.1 0.1 15
5d 30 38
Impact ISO-V(J)
- 20°C -- 45

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 11.4 13.5 13.5 18.0
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
9 6 7 1 0.1 < 0.2 17 0.7
172 www.metrode.com DS B-50-ULTRAMET 309L | Rev. 01-03/16

ULTRAMET B309L
BASIC COATED 309L MMA ELECTRODE FOR PIPE-WELDING
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.4M E309L-15 QW432 F-No 5
BS 2926 23.12.L B
DIN 8556 E 23 12 L B 20+

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 22.0 12.0 -- -- 8
Max. 0.04 2.5 0.90 0.025 0.030 25.0 14.0 0.50 0.5 20
Typical 0.03 1.2 0.3 0.01 0.02 23.5 13 0.1 0.1 15
5d 30 34
75
-50°C -- 50
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 * 5.0 **
Length (mm) 300 350 350/450 450
kg/carton 12.0 13.8 14.1/17.4 17.1
Pieces/carton 675 402 267/267 159
* 350mm is the standard length for 4.0mm diameter; 450mm is available to order.
** 5.0mm diameter made to order.
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
9 6 7 1 0.1 < 0.2 17 0.7
www.metrode.com DS B-50-ULTRAMET B309L | Rev. 01-03/16 173

ULTRAMET 309LP
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
positional electrode capable of the most demanding fixed pipework applications including ASME 5G/6G. The Ultramet 309LP
electrode has also been designed to deposit single-side root runs without the need for a gas purge. The electrode is also suitable
for vertical-down welding on thin sheet material.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.4M E309L-16 QW432 F-No 5

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 22.0 12.0 -- -- 8
Max. 0.04 2.5 0.90 0.025 0.030 25.0 14.0 0.50 0.5 20
Typical 0.03 0.8 0.6 0.01 0.02 23.5 13 0.1 0.1 15
5d 30 38
47
-20°C -- 42

min. A 50 75
max. A 80 120
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350
kg/carton 11.7 12.0
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
9 6 7 1 0.1 < 0.2 17 0.7
174 www.metrode.com DS B-50-ULTRAMET 309LP | Rev. 01-03/16

309S92, SUPERMIG 309LSi
309L SOLID WIRES FOR TIG, MIG AND SAW
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
STAINLESS STEELS
309S92 (TIG & sub-arc) Supermig 309LSi (MIG) QW432 F-No 6
AWS A5.9M ER309L ER309L Si QW442 A-No 8
BS EN ISO 14343-A 23 12 L G 23 12 L Si
BS EN ISO 14343-B SS309L SS309L Si
APPROVALS TÜV

Min. -- 1.0 0.30 -- -- 23.0 12.0 -- -- 8
Max. 0.03 2.5 0.65 0.020 0.030 25.0 14.0 0.3 0.3 20
Typical 0.015 1.7 0.5 0.005 0.015 23.5 13 0.1 0.15 12

Typical
As welded
TIG MIG
4d 43 42
Elongation (%)
5d 41 39
Impact ISO-V(J) + 20°C >200 100
- 20°C -- 80
- 75°C >150 --

MIG Ar+2%O2** DC+ 1.2 260A, 26V
SAW SS300*** DC+ 2.4 350A,28V
** Also proprietary Ar and Ar-He gas mixtures with < 3%CO2.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG (309S92) -- -- -- 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube 5 kg tube
MIG (Supermig 309LSi) 15kg spool 15kg spool 15kg spool -- -- -- --
SAW (309S92) -- -- -- 25kg spool -- 25kg spool 25kg spool
FUME DATA
32 12 20 11 < 0.5 < 0.5 2.5
www.metrode.com DS B-50-309S92, SUPERMIG 309LSi | Rev. 01-03/16 175

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
easy operability, high deposit quality and exceptional weld bead appearance for downhand and HV welding. Supercore 309LP is
designed for all-positional welding including fixed pipework. Metal recovery is about 90% with respect to the wire.
STAINLESS STEELS

BS EN ISO 17633-A T 23 12 L R C/M 3 T 23 12 L P C/M 2
Approvals TÜV, LRS TÜV, ABS, DNV

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 22.0 12.0 -- -- 12
Max. 0.04 2.0 1.0 0.025 0.030 25.0 14.0 0.3 0.3 22
Typical 0.03 1.3 0.6 0.02 0.02 24 12.5 0.1 0.1 15

5d 25 36
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C -- 65 *
-110°C -- 55 *
* These values are for Supercore 309LP. Values for Supercore 309L are 45J at +20°C, 40J at -20°C.
exceed 85%.
1.2 120 – 280A, 22 – 34V 180A, 29V 15 – 20mm
1.2P 120 – 250A, 22 – 32V 150A, 25V 15 – 20mm
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
9 4 1 6 1 <1 15 1.2
176 www.metrode.com DS B-50-SUPERCORE 309L, 309LP | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
309Mo STAINLESS STEELS
STAINLESS STEELS
23%Cr-13%Ni-2.5%Mo (309Mo) austenitic stainless Preheat and interpass temperatures depend on
steel. base material hardenability. For guidance, no
preheat on mild steels, up to 250°C on hardenable
steels.
Mainly used under high dilution conditions,
particularly dissimilar welds between stainless and CMn ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
steels. There are no comparable base materials. There is a Technical Profile available on sub-arc
welding with 309Mo. There is also additional
APPLICATIONS information available covering the Supercore flux
There are 3 main areas of application: cored wires.
Buffer layers and clad steels: Overlays on CMn, mild
steel or low alloy steels and for joining 316L clad plate. RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
Subsequent layers are deposited with an electrode
chosen to match the cladding, eg 316L, 318. Also as a The 309L consumables (B-50), 307 consumables
(E-21) and 29.9 consumables (E-22) cover a similar
buffer layer prior to hardsurfacing with chromium
range of applications.
carbide types.
Dissimilar joints: Tolerance to dilution is exploited in PRODUCTS AVAILABLE

joining stainless types 410, 304L, 321 and 316L to mild
and low alloy steels such as stiffeners, brackets and
Supermet 309Mo AWS E309LMo-17
other attachments. Service temperatures above 300°C MMA
are normally avoided. For some of these applications Vertamet 309Mo AWS E309LMo-17
a more economic alternative may be suitable, eg 309L, TIG/MIG ER309Mo EN ISO 23 12 2 L
307. ER309Mo EN ISO 23 12 2 L
SAW SS300 EN ISO SA AF2 64
Hardenable steels: The high level of alloying and ferrite SSB EN ISO SA AF2
level tolerates dilution from a wide range of alloyed and Supercore 309Mo AWS E309LMoT0-1/4
hardenable steels to give crack-free welds. FCW
Supercore 309MoP AWS E309LMoT1-1/4
MICROSTRUCTURE
Austenite with ferrite normally in the range 10-30FN.

SUPERMET 309Mo
GENER AL PURPOSE RUTILE 309MO MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Acid rutile electrode made on nearly matching austenitic steel core wire.
Moisture resistant coating gives sound porosity-free deposits.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.4M E309LMo-17 QW432 F-No 5

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 22.0 12.0 2.0 -- 10
Max. 0.04 2.5 0.9 0.025 0.030 25.0 14.0 3.0 0.5 30
Typical 0.02 0.8 0.6 0.01 0.02 23.5 12.5 2.5 0.05 25

5d 30 35
Impact ISO*-V(J) +20°C -- 50

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 450 450
kg/carton 12.0 13.2 17.7 18.0
STORAGE
Direct use from tin is satisfactory for longer than a working shift of 8h.
Excessive exposure of electrodes to humid conditions will cause some moisture pick-up and increase the risk of porosity.
FUME DATA
9 6 1 7 < 0.5 17 0.7
* F=28% for basic coated Ultramet B309Mo but this does not affect the OES.
178 www.metrode.com DS B-51-SUPERMET 309Mo | Rev. 01-03/16

VERTAMET 309Mo
RUTILE VERTICAL-DOWN 309MO MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Rutile-aluminosilicate flux on high purity 309L core wire giving very low typical carbon levels. ‘Low hydrogen’ manufacturing
technology ensures high resistance to weld metal porosity. The electrode is designed for all-positional use where the emphasis
is on fast welding speeds achieved by the vertical-down welding technique (BS EN 287-1 PG position). For fillet and lap joints in
thinner sheet material, an added advantage is reduced distortion resulting from the lower heat input of vertical-down welding.
STAINLESS STEELS
Although designed primarily for vertical-down it can be successfully used in all other positions.
AWS A5.4M E309LMo-17 QW432 F-No 5

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 22.0 12.0 2.0 -- 10
Max. 0.04 2.5 0.90 0.025 0.030 25.0 14.0 3.0 0.5 30
Typical 0.02 0.8 0.8 0.01 0.02 23 12 2.4 0.1 15
5d 30 38
min. A 60 75
max. A 90 120
Typical vertical-up ≈65 ≈80
Typical vertical-down ≈85 ≈110
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 300
kg/carton 12.9 12.9
STORAGE
FUME DATA
9 6 1 7 < 0.5 17 0.7
* F=28% for basic coated Ultramet B309Mo but this does not affect the OES.
www.metrode.com DS B-51-VERTAMET 309Mo | Rev. 01-03/16 179

ER309Mo
SOLID 309Mo WIRES FOR TIG, MIG AND SAW
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for TIG, MIG and sub-arc welding.

STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.9M (ER309LMo) Nearest classification QW432 F-No 6

EN ISO 14343-A 23 12 2 L QW442 A-No 8
EN ISO 14343-B (SS309LMo) Nearest classification Most relevant F & A No because wire does not conform to AWSA5.9

Min. -- 1.0 0.30 -- -- 21.0 11.0 2.0 -- 5
Max. 0.03 2.5 0.65 0.02 0.030 25.0 15.5 3.5 0.3 20
Typical 0.015 1.7 0.5 0.005 0.015 22 14.5 2.7 0.2 10

As welded TIG
5d 31
Hardness cap/mid (HV) 205/220

MIG Ar+2%O2* DC+ 1.2 260A, 26V
SAW SS300** DC+ 2.4 350A,28V
* Proprietary Ar and Ar-He gas mixtures with <3%CO2 also suitable.
** SSB also suitable.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG -- -- -- 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube
MIG 15kg spool 15kg spool 15kg spool -- -- -- --
SAW -- -- -- -- -- 25kg spool 25kg spool
FUME DATA
32 12 20 11 1.5 <0.5 2.5
180 www.metrode.com DS B-51-ER309Mo | Rev. 01-03/16

SUPERCORE 309Mo, 309MoP
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Flux cored wires made using an austenitic stainless steel sheath and rutile flux system. Supercore 309Mo combines easy
operability, high deposit quality and exceptional weld bead appearance for downhand and HV welding. Supercore 309MoP is
designed for all-positional welding.
STAINLESS STEELS
Supercore 309Mo Supercore 309MoP QW432 F-No 6
AWS A5.22M E309LMoT0-1/4 E309LMoT1-1/4 QW442 A-No 8
EN ISO 17633-A T 23 12 2 L R C/M 3 T 23 12 2 L P C/M 2
EN ISO 17633-B TS309LMo-FB0 TS309LMo-FB1
Approvals DNV DNV, LRS

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 22.0 12.0 2.0 -- 15
Max. 0.04 2.0 1.0 0.025 0.030 25.0 14.0 3.0 0.3 25
Typical 0.03 1.3 0.7 0.01 0.02 23 12.8 2.3 0.1 20

5d 25 30
50
1.2 120A-22V to 280A-34V 180A-29V 15-20mm
1.2P 120A-22V to 250A-32V 160A-26V 15-20mm
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
11 6 2 8.5 1 <1 11 0.8
www.metrode.com DS B-51-SUPERCORE 309Mo, 309MoP | Rev. 01-03/16 181

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
ULTRAMET 309Nb
STAINLESS STEELS
MMA electrode with rutile flux system made on high purity

304L stainless steel core wire. Deposits a low carbon 309 PA/1G PB/2F PC/2G
type weld metal with a minimum niobium level of 0.7%.

Recovery is about 115% with respect to core wire and 65% CHEMICAL COMPOSITION (WELD METAL WT %)
with respect to the whole electrode. C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Nb Cu
Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 22.0 12.0 -- 0.70 --
SPECIFICATIONS Max. 0.04 2.5 0.9 0.025 0.030 25.0 14.0 0.50 1.00 0.50
Typical 0.03 1.5 0.5 0.01 0.02 23 12.5 0.05 0.8 0.1
AWS A5.4M E309Nb-16 (previously E309Cb-16)
BS EN ISO 3581 E 23 12 Nb R 32
ASME IX QUALIFICATION As welded Typical
QW432 F-No 5 QW442 A-No 8 Tensile strength (MPa) 660
5d 31
There are no comparable parent materials; Reduction of area % 52
used for overlays only.
PARAMETERS, DC +VE OR AC (OCV: 70V MIN)
APPLICATIONS
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Ultramet 309Nb is designed specifically for use where min. A 60 75 100 130
niobium stabilised weld metal is required in overlays, or max. A 90 120 155 210
inlays, on CMn or low alloy steels. A minimum niobium
content of 0.7% in undiluted weld metal ensures a fully PACKAGING DATA
stabilised deposit of approximately 347 composition is Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
produced in the first layer on mild and medium carbon Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
steels. kg/carton 13.8 15.6 15.9 18.0
It may also be useful for the first run when welding 321 Pieces/carton 717 441 288 168
or 347 clad steels, prior to completion with 347 type weld
metal. It is not recommended as an alternative to 309L STORAGE
types for dissimilar welded joints. 3 hermetically sealed ring-pull metal tins per carton, with
MICROSTRUCTURE unlimited shelf life. Direct use from tin is satisfactory for
longer than a working shift of 8h. Excessive exposure of
In the as-welded condition the microstructure consists of
electrodes to humid conditions will cause some moisture
austenite with a ferrite content of 8-20FN.
pick-up and increase the risk of porosity.
WELDING GUIDELINES For electrodes that have been exposed:
Preheat is dependent on the base material hardenability, Redry 150 – 200°C/1-2h to restore to as-packed condition.
eg none on mild steel, up to 200°C on hardenable (0.4%C) Maximum 250° C, 3 cycles, 10h total.
steels. Storage of redried electrodes at 100-200°C in holding oven or
With a typical dilution of 25-30% on a medium carbon 50-200°C in heated quiver: no limit, but maximum 6 weeks
steel, Ultramet 309Nb could produce a fully austenitic recommended. Recommended ambient storage conditions
weld deposit. It is well known that weld metals containing for opened tins (using plastic lid): < 60% RH, >18°C.
niobium are especially sensitive to hot cracking when
little or no ferrite is present. Therefore it is desirable to
FUME DATA
minimise dilution in the first layer of overlays by controlling
parameters and bead overlap (aim for 50% overlap). Fume composition, wt % typical
If PWHT is applied there will be some weld metal 9 6 1 7 <0.5 <0.2 17 0.7
embrittlement, although ductility should remain
acceptable after normal times and temperature. However
fusion boundary embrittlement can be more severe and
acceptability should be established with representative
procedure tests.
182 www.metrode.com DS B-53-ULTRAMET 309Nb | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
LEAN DUPLEX STAINLESS STEELS
STAINLESS STEELS
Ferritic-austenitic lean duplex stainless steels. Multipass welds in the as-welded condition contain
about 25–50% ferrite depending on dilution and
heat input/cooling rate conditions.
BS EN & DIN WELDING GUIDELINES
X2CrNiN23L Preheat not generally required. Interpass
1.4362 temperature 150°C max, although for many
ASTM/UNS applications this could be relaxed to 250°C. Heat
S32304 input in the range 1.0–2.5 kJ/mm (depending on
S32101 material thickness) should be acceptable. Welds
S32001 are left in the as-welded condition.
Proprietary alloys include:
Sandvik SAF 2304
Usinor Industeel Uranus 35N RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
Avesta Polarit LDX 2101 The 22%Cr duplex consumables (data sheet B-60)
AK Steel Nitronic 19D are related and can also be used for welding the
lean duplex stainless steels.
APPLICATIONS There is no matching solid wire available. The
Lean duplex stainless steels (LDSS) provide cost ER329N (AWS ER2209) wire should be used for MIG/
savings compared to 22%Cr duplex stainless steels TIG/SAW applications, data sheet B-60.
because of the reductions in Ni and Mo. The LDSS
also provide a strength advantage compared to
austenitic stainless steels and generally have PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
comparable corrosion resistance to austenitic Process Product Specification
stainless steels.
MMA Ultramet 2304 --
FCW Supercore 2304P --
The LDSS are finding more widespread use in
today’s economic climate, particularly in structural
applications. Uses include: bridges and structural
work generally replacing austenitic stainless steels
and carbon steels rather than replacing standard
duplex alloys.

ULTRAMET 2304
RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE FOR LEAN DUPLEX STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode made on high quality stainless steel core wire with rutile flux system optimised for all welding positions except
vertical down.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.4M Proposed E2101-16 QW432 F-No--
QW442 A-No--

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu N PREN
min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 22.5 8.0 0.1 -- 0.10 24
max. 0.04 1.5 0.9 0.02 0.03 25.5 9.5 0.8 0.5 0.20 31
Typical 0.03 0.7 0.7 0.015 0.025 24.5 9.1 0.2 0.3 0.13 27
PREN = Cr + 3.3Mo + 16N

- 20°C -- 50
- 50°C -- 37
OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC +VE OR AC (OCV 55V MIN)

min. A 50 65 100
max. A 90 120 160
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 450
kg/carton 12 13.5 17.4
STORAGE
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Cr Ni Mo Cu F OES (mg/m3)
7 6 6 1 0.2 <0.2 16 0.8

SUPERCORE 2304P
ALL-POSITIONAL RUTILE FLUX CORED WIRE FOR LEAN DUPLEX STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
High performance rutile all positional flux cored wire produced in the most versatile size of 1.2mm.
Made with an austenitic stainless steel sheath and rutile flux system.
Weld metal carbon content is typically <0.04% when using either 80%Ar-20%CO2 or 100% CO2 shielding gas.
Metal recovery about 90% with respect to the wire.
STAINLESS STEELS
NONE QW432 F-No--
QW442 A-No--

min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 22.5 8.0 0.1 -- 0.08 24
max. 0.04 2.0 1.00 0.02 0.03 25.5 10.0 0.8 0.75 0.20 31
Typical 0.03 1.0 0.6 0.01 0.02 24.5 9.2 0.2 0.2 0.14 27
PREN (pitting resistance equivalent) = Cr + 3.3Mo + 16N

5d 20 32
- 20°C -- 70
Impact ISO-V(J)
- 50°C -- 55
exceed 85%.
1.2 P 120A-22V to 250A-34V 150A-25V 15-20mm
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
10 12 2 4 5.5 <0.5 9 0.9
www.metrode.com DS B-59-SUPERCORE 2304P | Rev. 01-03/16 185

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
22%Cr DUPLEX STAINLESS STEELS

STAINLESS STEELS
22%Cr standard ferritic-austenitic duplex stainless Multipass welds in the as-welded condition
steels. contain about 25–50% ferrite depending on
dilution and heat input/cooling rate conditions.
WELDING GUIDELINES
ASTM UNS
Preheat not generally required. Interpass
A182 Gr F51 S31803
A890 Gr 4A (cast) temperature 150°C max. Heat input in the range
S32205
1.0–2.5 kJ/mm (depending on material thickness)
BS S32101
S32304
should be acceptable but some codes restrict the
318S13
S32001 max to 1.75 or 2.0kJ/mm.
BS EN & DIN J92205 (cast) PWHT
1.4462
Although welds in wrought duplex stainless steels
X2CrNiMoN22-5-3
are almost always left in the as-welded condition,
Proprietary alloys include: major repairs to castings are generally specified
Sandvik SAF2205 in the solution treated condition. Experience has
Avesta Polarit 2205 indicated good properties following 1120°C/3-6h +
Creusot Ind UR 45N water quench with or without a cooling step to
Böhler A903 1060°C before quenching.
VDM Cronifer 2205LCN
S+C Maresist F51 (cast) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Sumitomo SM22Cr A Technical Profile covering duplex and
Lean and Mo-free duplex including: superduplex stainless steels is available.
(UNS S32304 / DIN 1.4362 / X2CrNiN23L)
Sandvik SAF 2304
Creusot Ind UR35N Lean duplex (data sheet B-59), superduplex (data
LDX 2101 Avesta Polarit sheets B-61, B-62 and B-63) and duplex matching
consumables for casting repairs.
APPLICATIONS
Duplex stainless steel pipe, plate, fittings and forgings PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
have an approximate 50:50 microstructure of austenite Process Product Specification
with a ferrite matrix.
Supermet 2205 -
This, coupled with general alloying level, confers:
- high strength compared with standard Ultramet 2205 AWS E2209-16
MMA
austenitic steels, eg type 316L. Supermet 2205AR AWS E2209-17
- good general corrosion resistance in a range 2205XKS AWS E2209-15
of environments. TIG/SAW ER329N AWS ER2209
- high resistance to chloride induced stress
MIG ER329N AWS ER2209
corrosion cracking (CSCC).
- high resistance to pitting attack in chloride MCW Supercore M2205 AWS EC2209
environments, eg seawater. SAW flux SSB BS EN SA AF2 DC
These alloys are finding widening application in the Supercore 2205 AWS E2209T0-1/4
offshore oil/gas, chemical and petrochemical process FCW
Supercore 2205P AWS E2209T1-1/4
industries, eg pipework systems, flowlines, risers,
manifolds etc.

SUPERMET 2205
OVER ALLOYED RUTILE ELECTRODE FOR 22%Cr DUPLEX STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with enhanced Cr, Mo and N levels, giving higher weld pitting resistance than the nearest AWS specification A5.4 E2209-16.
See Ultramet 2205 for rutile type conforming to AWS.
Supermet 2205 is made on high quality stainless steel core wire with a rutile flux system designed to give minimum carbon content coupled
with optimum operating characteristics.
Supermet 2205 is designed for welding wrought, forged or cast «standard» duplex stainless steels for service in the as-welded condition.
STAINLESS STEELS
Good properties are also obtained when solution treated, as frequently required for casting repairs. The electrode has a rutile flux system
and is used primarily for downhand and H-V welding applications. Smaller sizes offer excellent all-positional operability.

AWS A5.4M E2209-16 nearest classification QW432 F-No --
QW442 A-No 8
PA/1G PB/2F PC/2G

Min. -- 0.5 0.3 -- -- 24.0 8.5 3.0 -- 0.14 36
Max. 0.03 2.0 1.0 0.02 0.03 26.0 10.0 4.0 0.5 0.25 43
Typical 0.02 1 0.7 0.01 0.02 25 9.5 3.4 0.1 0.17 38
PREN = Cr + 3.3Mo + 16N
As welded Min. Typical Pipe butt weld 1120°C/ 3h + WQ
Elongation (%) 4d 20 30 25 32
Reduction of area % -- 40 35 --
Impact ISO*-V(J) +20°C -- 60-73 -- --
- 20°C -- 45-55 45-50 --
- 30°C -- 40-52 42-46 > 90
- 40°C -- 35-47 38-43 > 70
- 50°C -- 30-40 35-40 > 35
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 50 65 100 130
max. A 90 120 160 190
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 12.0 13.2 13.8 18.6
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
7 6 6 1 0.2 <0.2 16 0.8
* F = 28% for basic coated 2205XKS but this does not affect OES.
www.metrode.com DS B-60-SUPERMET 2205 | Rev. 01-03/16 187
ULTRAMET 2205
RUTILE ALL-POSITIONAL MMA ELECTRODE FOR 22%Cr DUPLEX STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode made on duplex stainless steel core wire with a rutile flux system designed to give minimum carbon content
coupled with optimum operating characteristics. The electrode has a rutile flux system optimised for all welding positions except
vertical down and provides excellent operability.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.4M E2209-16 QW432 F-No 5

Min. -- 0.5 0.3 -- -- 22.0 8.5 2.8 -- 0.14 34
Max. 0.03 2.0 0.90 0.02 0.03 23.5 10.0 3.5 0.5 0.2 38
Typical 0.02 1 0.7 0.01 0.02 23.2 9 3.2 0.1 0.17 36
5d 20 25
Impact ISO-V(J) + 20°C -- > 54 (> 0.8)
- 20°C -- 43-48 (> 0.5)
- 50°C -- 32-41 (>0.38)
Hardness (HRC) HV10 -- < 305 (< 28)

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 190
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 350
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 13.5 13.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
7 6 6 1 0.2 <0.2 16 0.8

SUPERMET 2205AR
RUTILE DOWNHAND MMA ELECTRODE FOR 22%Cr DUPLEX STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode made on high quality stainless steel core wire with a rutile flux system designed to give minimum carbon
content coupled with optimum operating characteristics.
The electrode has a rutile flux system optimised for operability.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.4M E2209-17 QW432 F-No 5
PA/1G PB/2F PC/2G

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 21.5 8.5 2.5 -- 0.14 35
Max. 0.04 2.0 1.00 0.025 0.030 23.5 10.5 3.5 0.5 0.2 38
Typical 0.03 0.8 0.7 0.01 0.02 23 9 3.2 0.1 0.17 36

5d 20 26
45
- 20°C -- 40
- 50°C -- 35
Hardness (HRC) HV10 -- < 310 (< 28)

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 190
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 450 450
kg/carton 11.4 13.5 18.0 18.6
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
7 6 6 1 0.2 <0.2 16 0.8
www.metrode.com DS B-60-SUPERMET 2205AR | Rev. 01-03/16 189

2205XKS
BASIC PIPE-WELDING MMA ELECTRODE FOR 22%Cr DUPLEX STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode made on duplex stainless core wire with a special basic flux to give optimum all-positional operability.
The electrode has a basic flux system and is recommended where the highest sub-zero toughness is required, and for the most
demanding positional welding applications such as fixed pipework in the ASME 6G position.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.4M E2209-15 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 22 9 3 N L B 4 2 QW442 A-No 8
Approvals ABS, DNV, TÜV

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 22.0 8.5 3.0 -- 0.15 35
Max. 0.04 2.0 0.90 0.02 0.03 23.5 10.0 3.5 0.75 0.20 38
Typical 0.03 1 0.6 0.01 0.02 23 9 3.2 0.1 0.17 36
As welded Min. Typical 1120 – 1135°C +WQ
5d 20 26 37
> 85 --
- 50°C 47 > 60 > 75
- 75°C -- > 30 --
Hardness (HV) -- 260-290 240

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 50 70 100 130
max. A 75 95 155 190
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 350
kg/carton 12.0 12.9 13.5 13.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
7 6 6 1 0.2 <0.2 16 0.8
190 www.metrode.com DS B-60-2205XKS | Rev. 02-08/16

ER329N
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid TIG, MIG and sub-arc wires for welding 2205 type duplex stainless steels.
STAINLESS STEELS
BS EN ISO 14343-A 22 9 3 N L QW442 A-No 8
Approvals DNV, TÜV For TIG wires

Min. -- 1.0 0.25 -- -- 22.5 8.0 3.0 -- 0.14
Max. 0.03 2.0 0.65 0.020 0.030 23.5 9.5 3.5 0.3 0.20
Typical 0.015 1.6 0.5 0.001 0.015 23 8.2 3.2 0.1 0.17*
Duplex weld metal microstructure with austenite + 30-50% ferrite.
Pitting resistance equivalent PREN = Cr + 3.3Mo + 16N is > 35.
* ER329N MIG spooled wire is selected for suitability for both MIG and auto-TIG, with typically 0.15%N to control porosity.

Typical
As welded Min.
TIG MIG SAW + SSB
Tensile strength (MPa) 690 790 800-835 790
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 450 620 560-620 630
Elongation (%) 4d 20 36 28-35 30
5d 20 33 30 27
Impact ISO-V(J) - 30°C -- 180 (> 140) > 70 75 (>55)
- 50°C -- 180 (> 120) > 60 55 (>35)
- 75°C -- 125 (>70) -- --
Hardness HV -- 270 (< 310) 270 (< 310) 275 (< 320)
HRC -- 23 (< 28) 23 (< 28) 23 (< 28)

TIG Argon DC- 1.6 / 2.4 100A, 12V
MIG Ar / He / CO2 pulsed 1.2 180A, 28V
SAW SSB flux * DC+ 2.4 350A,30V
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG -- -- 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube
MIG 15kg reel 15kg reel 15kg reel 15kg reel -- -- --
SAW -- -- -- 25kg spool To order 25kg spool 25kg spool
FUME DATA
28 10 20 8 1.5 < 0.5 2.5
www.metrode.com DS B-60-ER329N | Rev. 01-03/16 191

SUPERCORE M2205
METAL CORED WIRE FOR 22%CR DUPLEX STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
The wire is made with an austenite stainless steel sheath and high purity metal powders.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.22M EC2209 QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO 17633-A T 22 9 3 N L M M12 3 QW442 A-No 8
BS EN ISO 17633-B TS2209-FB0

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu N PRE*
Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 21.5 7.5 2.5 -- 0.08 34
Max. 0.03 2.0 0.90 0.025 0.030 23.5 9.5 3.5 0.5 0.20 38
Typical 0.02 1.4 0.8 0.010 0.018 22.5 8.5 3.0 0.15 0.15 35
* PRE (pitting resistance equivalent) = Cr + 3.3Mo + 16N

As welded Min. Typical Ar-38%He-2%CO2
5d 20 27
- 50°C -- 38
Hardness HV -- 280
Shielding gas: Stainshield heavy, Ar-38%-He-2%CO2 shielding gas at 15-20l/min.
Current: DC+ve
1.2 180A-27V to 250A-32V 200A-29V 10-20mm
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
fume composition (wt %)
28 10 20 8 1.5 < 0.5 2.5
192 www.metrode.com DS B-60-SUPERCORE M2205 | Rev. 01-03/16

SUPERCORE 2205, 2205P
FL AT AND ALL-POSITIONAL FLUX CORED WIRES FOR 22%CR DUPLEX STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
High performance rutile flux cored wires produced in the most versatile size of 1.2mm.
Supercore 2205 is suited to welding in the flat and horizontal-vertical positions (material > 6mm).
Supercore 2205P is optimised for positional welding, both vertical up and for fixed pipework qualified in the ASME 5G or 6G wel-
ding positions (pipe typically > 150mm diameter, > 15mm wall).
STAINLESS STEELS
Made with an austenitic stainless steel sheath and rutile flux system.
Weld metal carbon content is typically <0.03% when using either 80%Ar-20%CO2 or 100% CO2 shielding gas.

Supercore 2205 Supercore 2205P QW432 F-No 6
AWS A5.22M E2209T0-1/4 E2209T1-1/4 QW442 A-No 8
BS EN ISO 17633-A T 22 9 3 N L R C/M 3 T 22 9 3 N L P C/M 2
BS EN ISO 17633-B TS2209-FB0 TS2209-FB1
Approvals LRS

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu N PRE*
Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 21.5 8.5 2.8 -- 0.08 34
Max. 0.04 2.0 1.00 0.02 0.030 24.0 10.0 4.0 0.3 0.20 38
Typical 0.03 1.2 0.7 <0.01 0.02 23 9.2 3.1 0.1 0.12 35
* PRE (pitting resistance equivalent) = Cr + 3.3Mo + 16N

As welded Min. Supercore 2205P typical Supercore 2205 typical
5d 20 29 26
Impact ISO-V(J) - 20°C -- 65 50
- 50°C -- 45 40
- 75°C -- 30 -
exceed 85%. Gas mixtures without oxygen additions can be helpful for optimum weld metal toughness.
Fillet weld penetration and profile will be related to the skill level of the operator.
1.2 150A-25V to 280A-34V 200A-30V 15-20mm
1.6 200A-28V to 330A-34V 230A-30V 15-25mm
1.2 P 120A-22V to 250A-34V 150A-25V 15-20mm
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
11 6 1 9 1.5 0.1 12 0.9
www.metrode.com DS B-60-SUPERCORE 2205, 2205P | Rev. 01-03/16 193

SSB FLUX
SUB-ARC FLUX
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Agglomerated basic non-alloying flux for submerged arc welding.
STAINLESS STEELS

DIN 32522 BFB6 63353 DC8M QW432 F-No --
BS EN ISO 14174 SA AF2 DC QW442 A-No --
COMPOSITION (TYPICAL)
ER329N wire 0.015 1.6 0.5 0.001 0.015 23 8.5 3.2 0.1 0.17
deposit 0.02 1.3 0.5 -- -- 22.5 8.5 3.1 0.1 0.15

As welded
Impact ISO-V(J) - 30°C 75 (>55)
- 50°C 55 (>35)
Hardness HV 275 (< 320)
HRC 23 (< 28)
Current: DC +ve ranges as below:
1.6 200-350A, 27-31V 300A, 28V 20-25mm
2.4 250-450A, 28-32V 350A, 29V 20-25mm
PACKAGING DATA
Metrode SSB Flux is supplied in sealed moisture resistant 20kg metal drums.
Preferred storage conditions for opened drums: < 60%RH, > 18°C.
If the flux has become damp or has been stored for a long period, it should be redried in the range 250-400°C/1-3h.
194 www.metrode.com DS B-60-SSB FLUX | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
25%Cr SUPERDUPLEX STEELS - ZERON® 100
STAINLESS STEELS
25%Cr ferritic-austenitic superduplex stainless steels Multipass welds in the as-welded or solution
matching the proprietary Zeron® 100 alloy. annealed condition consist of an austenite-ferrite
duplex microstructure with an approximate 30-
60% ferrite level, depending on heat input/cooling
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED conditions.
MATCHING
wrought cast
WELDING GUIDELINES
UNS S32760 UNS J93380, DIN 1.4508
DIN 1.4501 ASTM A890 6A,
temperature 150°C max. Heat input in the range
ASTM A182 F55 ACI CD3MWCuN
OTHER SUPERDUPLEX, INCLUDING
should be acceptable but most codes restrict the
wrought
max to 1.5 or 1.75kJ/mm.
UNS S32750 UNS S32550
UR47N (CLI) UR52N+ (CLI)
PWHT
S32520 UNS S39274
Although welds in wrought duplex stainless steels
Ferralium SD40 (Meighs) UNS S32950
DP3W (Sumitomo)
major repairs to castings are generally specified
7-Mo Plus (Carpenter)
in the solution treated condition. Experience has
2507 (Sandvik/Avesta)
indicated good properties following 1120°C/3-6h +
cast
water quench.
UNS J93404 DIN 1.4469
ASTM A890 5A ACI CE3MN
Further information on the welding of Zeron® 100
is available in the Metrode Technical Profile on
duplex and superduplex.
APPLICATIONS
Zeron® 100 has an exceptional combination of
2507 superduplex (data sheet B-62) and matching
strength and resistance to corrosion and erosion in
consumables for casting repair (solution annealed)
a wide range of aggressive media. The presence of
applications.
Cu+W provides superior resistance to sulphuric and
hydrochloric acids when compared to similar alloys
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
without these additions. Offshore applications exploit
the high resistance to pitting and stress-corrosion Process Product Specification
cracking in seawater. It is also highly resistant MMA Zeron® 100XKS BS EN E25 9 4 N L B
to caustic alkalis and phosphoric acid. Service TIG/MIG/ SAW Zeron® 100X BS EN 25 9 4 N L
temperature range is usually limited to –50°C to
SAW flux SSB BS EN SA AF 2
280°C, the upper limit owing to thermal instability
("450°C" and sigma embrittlement). FCW Supercore Z100XP AWS E2594T1-4
It is widely used in oil and gas production and process
pipework, risers, manifolds, pressure vessels, valves,
pumps, desalination plant, systems for flue-gas
desulphurisation (FGD) and also in the mining, chemical
and pharmaceutical industries. Zeron® 100 wires are
also used for joining supermartensitic stainless steels.

ZERON® 100XKS
BASIC PIPE-WELDING MMA ELECTRODE FOR SUPERDUPLEX STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Basic coated all-positional MMA electrode for welding Zeron® 100 and other superduplex alloys for service in the as-welded
condition. This electrode is overmatching with respect to nickel content to achieve correct austenite-ferrite microstructural
phase balance. It is designed for the most demanding vertical and overhead welding positions such as fixed pipework qualified in
the ASME 6G position.
Fully alloyed matching Zeron® 100 core wire including W and Cu. Moisture resistant flux technology.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.4M E2595-15 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 25 9 4 N L B 4 2 QW442 A-No 8
Weir Materials MDS 12809/08
Approvals ABS, DNV

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo W Cu N PREN PREW
min. -- -- -- -- -- 24.0 9.0 3.5 0.5 0.5 0.2 40 40
max. 0.03 1.0 1.0 0.01 0.03 26.0 10.0 4.0 1.0 1.0 0.3 -- --
Typical 0.025 0.9 0.5 0.005 0.02 25 9.3 3.6 0.7 0.7 0.23 41 42
Pitting resistance equivalent PREN = Cr + 3.3Mo + 16N
Pitting resistance equivalent PREW = Cr + 3.3Mo + 1.65W + 16N

Tensile strength (MPa) 760 800-950
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 550 650-750
5d 20 22-27
Reduction of area % -- 40-45
Impact ISO-V(J) - 20°C -- > 55
- 50°C -- > 40
Hardness (HV) -- 270-320
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 50 70 100 130
max. A 75 95 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 350
kg/carton 12.0 14.1 13.5 13.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
7 6 1 7 0.5 0.2 <0.1 28 0.7
196 www.metrode.com DS B-61-ZERON 100XKS | Rev. 02-08/16

ZERON® 100X
SOLID WELDING WIRE FOR SUPERDUPLEX STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
For applications where Zeron® 100X wire is to be used for welding supermartensitic stainless steels it is possible for wire to be
supplied with a total hydrogen content of 3ppm maximum.
STAINLESS STEELS
BS EN ISO 14343-A 25 9 4 N L (prefix W=TIG, G=MIG, S=SAW) QW442 A-No 8
Weir Materials MDS 12809/07
Approvals ABS, TÜV, DNV (TIG and SAW in conjunction with SSB flux)

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo W Cu N PREN PREW
Min. -- -- -- -- -- 24.0 9.0 3.5 0.5 0.5 0.2 40 40
Max. 0.03 1.0 1.0 0.01 0.03 26.0 10.0 4.0 1.0 1.0 0.3 -- --
Typical 0.015 0.7 0.4 0.002 0.02 25 9.3 3.7 0.6 0.7 0.23 41 42

Typical values as welded Min. TIG MIG SAW TIG at 160°C
Elongation (%) 4d 15 36 25 26 39
5d 20 32 23 24 34
Reduction of area (%) -- 68 28 48 72
Impact ISO-V(J) -50°C -- 130 60 40 --
-75°C -- >100 -- -- --
Hardness cap/mid (HV) -- 290 290 290 --

TIG Argon DC- 1.6 / 2.4 100A, 12V
MIG Ar / He / CO2 pulsed 1.2 180A, 28V
SAW SSB flux DC+ 1.6 350A,30V
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
MIG To order To order To order To order -- -- --
SAW -- -- -- 25kg spool -- 25kg spool --
FUME DATA
7 6 1 7 0.5 0.2 <0.1 28 0.7
www.metrode.com DS B-61-ZERON 100X | Rev. 01-03/16 197

SSB FLUX
SUB-ARC FLUX
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Agglomerated basic non-alloying flux for submerged arc welding.
STAINLESS STEELS

BS EN ISO 14174 SA AF2 DC QW432 F-No --
QW442 A-No --
C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu W N
Zeron® 100X wire 0.015 0.7 0.4 0.002 0.023 25 9.3 3.7 0.7 0.7 0.23
Deposit 0.02 0.6 0.4 0.002 0.02 24.5 9.3 3.6 0.7 0.7 0.21
ALL-WELD MECHANICAL PROPERTIES WITHZERON® 100X WIRE

Typical values as welded min SAW
5d 20 24
Reduction of area (%) -- >40
1.6 200-350A, 27-31V 300A, 28V 20-25mm
2.4 250-450A, 28-32V 350A, 29V 20-25mm
PACKAGING DATA
Metrode SSB Flux is supplied in sealed moisture resistant 20kg metal drums.
198 www.metrode.com DS B-61-SSB FLUX | Rev. 01-03/16

SUPERCORE Z100XP
RUTILE ALL-POSITIONAL FLUX CORED WIRE FOR SUPERDUPLEX STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Flux cored wire made with an alloyed stainless steel sheath and rutile flux system.
Supercore Z100XP combines easy operability, high deposit quality for both positional pipework and downhand welding.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.22M E2594T1-4 QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO 17633-B TS 2594-F M21 1 QW442 A-No 8

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu W N PREN PREW
Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 24.0 8.5 3.5 0.5 0.5 0.2 40 40
Max. 0.04 1.5 1.0 0.02 0.03 26.0 10.0 4.0 1.0 1.0 0.3 -- --
Typical 0.03 1.0 0.5 0.005 0.02 24.5 9.1 3.7 0.6 0.6 0.22 41 42
Pitting resistance equivalent PREW = Cr + 3.3Mo + 1.65W + 16N

Typical values Min. T ypical
5d 18 25
-50°C -- 32
Hardness HV -- 280
HRC -- 26

Current: DC+ve ranges as below for Ar-20%CO2:
1.2 120 – 250A, 22 – 34V 180A, 29V 15 – 20mm
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
14 4 1 11 3 <1 10 1.0
www.metrode.com DS B-61-SUPERCORE Z100XP | Rev. 01-03/16 199

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
25%Cr SUPERDUPLEX STEELS - 2507

STAINLESS STEELS

25%Cr ferritic-austenitic superduplex stainless steels. Multipass welds in the as-welded or solution
annealed condition consist of an austenite-ferrite
duplex stainless steel microstructure with an
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED approximate 30-60% ferrite level, depending on
heat input/cooling conditions.
25%Cr superduplex:
UNS S32750, S32760 *
ASTM A182 F53, F55 WELDING GUIDELINES
BS EN 10088-2 X2CrNiMoN25-7-4 (1.4410)
SAF 2507 (Sandvik/Avesta)
temperature 150°C max. Heat input in the range
Uranus 47N (CLI)
Castings: should be acceptable but most codes restrict the
UNS J93404 max to 1.5 or 1.75kJ/mm.
ASTM A890 Gr5A, 6A *
ACI CE3MN
PWHT
* Zeron® 100 (see DS: B-61) Although welds in wrought duplex stainless steels
major repairs to castings are generally specified
APPLICATIONS in the solution treated condition. Experience has
Superduplex stainless steel pipe, plate, fittings and indicated good properties following 1120°C/3-6h +
forgings have an approximate 50:50 microstructure water quench.
of austenite with a ferrite matrix. This, coupled with
general alloying level confers: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Further information on the welding of 2507
- high strength compared with standard austenitic superduplex is available in the Metrode Technical
steels eg. type 316L. Profile on duplex and superduplex.
- good general corrosion resistance in a range of
environments.
- high resistance to chloride induced stress corrosion RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
cracking (CSCC). Zeron® 100 superduplex (data sheet B-61) and
- high resistance to pitting attack in chloride matching consumables for casting repair (solution
environments eg. seawater. annealed) applications.
These alloys are finding widening application in the PRODUCTS AVAILABLE

offshore oil/gas, chemical and petrochemical process
industries, eg. pipework systems, flowlines, risers, Process Product Specification
manifolds etc. 2507XKS AWS 2594-15
MMA
Ultramet 2507 AWS 2594-16
TIG 2507 AWS ER2594
Supercore 2507 AWS E2594T0-4
FCW
Supercore 2507P AWS E2594T1-4

2507XKS
BASIC PIPE-WELDING MMA ELECTRODE FOR SUPERDUPLEX STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Basic coated all-positional MMA electrode for welding superduplex alloys for service in the as-welded condition. This electrode is
overmatching with respect to nickel content to achieve correct austenite-ferrite microstructural phase balance. It is designed for
the most demanding vertical and overhead welding positions such as fixed pipework qualified in the ASME 5G/6G position, and for
applications requiring the highest toughness.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.4M E2594-15 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 25 9 4 N L B 4 2 QW442 A-No--

min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 24.0 8.5 3.5 -- 0.20 40
max. 0.04 2.0 1.0 0.02 0.03 26.0 10.5 4.5 0.5 0.30 46
Typical 0.03 1 0.5 0.01 0.02 25 9.5 3.8 0.1 0.22 41
As welded Min. typical >1120°C/>3h + WQ transverse *
Tensile strength (MPa) 800 870 >760
5d 18 25 --
Reduction of area % -- 45 --
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C -- 85 --
-50°C -- 60 >80
-75°C -- 35 --
Hardness (HV) -- 280-330 <300
* Representative properties for solution treated welds in castings of ASTM A890 grade 5A. Ferrite >30%.

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 50 70 100 130
max. A 75 95 155 190
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 350
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 13.5 13.5
STORAGE
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Ni Cr Cu Mo V F* OES (mg/m3)
7 6 1 7 0.5 0.2 <0.1 16 0.7
* F = 28% for basic coated 2507XKS electrode but this does not affect the OES.
www.metrode.com DS B-62-2507XKS | Rev. 01-03/16 201

ULTRAMET 2507
RUTILE ALL-POSITIONAL MMA ELECTRODE FOR SUPERDUPLEX STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Rutile coated MMA electrode for welding superduplex alloys for service in the as-welded condition. This electrode is
overmatching with respect to nickel content to achieve the correct austenite-ferrite microstructural phase balance.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.4M E2594-16 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 25 9 4 N L R 3 2 QW442 A-No --

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 24.0 8.5 3.5 -- 0.20 40
Max. 0.04 1.5 1.0 0.02 0.03 26.0 10.5 4.5 0.5 0.30 46
Typical 0.03 1 0.8 0.01 0.02 25 9.5 4 0.1 0.23 42
5d 20 24
-50°C -- >21
Hardness HV -- 275-315
HRC -- 28

min. A 60 75 100
max. A 90 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 11.4 13.5 13.8
STORAGE
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Ni Cr Cu Mo V F* OES (mg/m3)
7 6 1 7 0.5 0.2 <0.1 16 0.7
* F = 28% for basic coated 2507XKS electrode but this does not affect the OES.

2507
SOLID WELDING WIRE FOR SUPERDUPLEX STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for TIG
STAINLESS STEELS
BS EN ISO 14343-A W 25 9 4 N L QW442 A-No --
COMPOSITION (WIRE WT %))

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo W Cu N PREN
Min. -- -- -- -- -- 24.0 8.0 3.0 -- -- 0.20 40
Max. 0.03 2.5 1.0 0.02 0.03 27.0 10.5 4.5 0.5 0.5 0.30 --
Typical 0.02 0.8 0.4 0.005 0.02 25 9.3 3.9 0.05 0.05 0.25 42
ALL-WELD MECHANICAL PROPERTIES WITHZERON® 100X WIRE

Typical values as welded Min. TIG
5d 20 32
Hardness cap/mid HV -- 300

TIG Argon DC- 1.6 / 2.4 100A, 12V
PACKAGING DATA
TIG 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube
FUME DATA
28 10 22 8 2 1.3 2.3
www.metrode.com DS B-62-2507 | Rev. 01-03/16 203

SUPERCORE 2507, 2507P
RUTILE FLUX CORED WIRES FOR SUPERDUPLEX STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Flux cored wire made with an alloyed stainless steel sheath and rutile flux system. The Supercore 2507 combines easy operability,
high deposit quality and exceptional bead appearance for downhand and HV welding. Supercore 2507P combines easy operability,
high deposit quality for both positional pipework and downhand welding. Metal recovery is about 90% with respect to the wire.
STAINLESS STEELS

Supercore 2507 Supercore 2507P QW432 F-No 6
AWS A5.22M E2594T0-4 E2594T1-4 QW442 A-No --
BS EN ISO 17633-A T 25 9 4 N L R M21 3 T 25 9 4 N L P M21 2

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu W N PREN
Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 24.0 8.5 3.5 -- -- 0.20 40
Max. 0.04 2.0 1.0 0.02 0.03 26.0 10.5 4.5 0.5 0.5 0.30 --
Typical 0.03 1.0 0.5 0.010 0.02 24.5 9.3 3.8 0.05 0.05 0.23 41

As welded Min. T ypical
5d 18 29
-20°C -- 45
-50°C -- 35

1.2 120 – 280A, 22 – 34V 180A, 29V 15 – 20mm
1.2P 120 – 250A, 22 – 32V 150A, 25V 15 – 20mm
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
11 6 1 9 2 <1 12 1.0
204 www.metrode.com DS B-62-SUPERCORE 2507, 2507P | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
25%Cr SUPERDUPLEX STEELS WITH 2%Cu
STAINLESS STEELS
25%Cr ferritic-austenitic superduplex stainless steels In the as-welded, or solution annealed condition,
with nominally 25%Cr-8%Ni-3.5%Mo-1.5%Cu-0.2%N. the microstructure is an austenite-ferrite duplex
with about 25-60% ferrite.
ASTM WELDING GUIDELINES
A240 UNS S32550 (wrought). For general fabrication welds no preheat is
A351 & A744 grade CD4MCu. generally required and interpass is kept below
A890 grade 1A/UNS J93370. 150°C. For castings and other highly restrained
A890 grade 1B/UNS J93372. welds a preheat-interpass range of 100-225°C is
DIN helpful in avoiding any risk of hydrogen cracking.
1.4515 (G-X3CrNiMoCuN 26 6 3).
1.4517 (G-X3CrNiMoCuN 26 6 3 3).
BS PWHT
3100 grade 332C13. The consumables are designed to be predominantly
3146 grade ANC21. used in the solution annealed condition. Castings
Proprietary will invariably require solution annealing and
Ferralium 255 and SD40 (Meighs).
both electrode and flux cored wire provide higher
Uranus 50M, 55, 52N, 52N+ (CLI).
toughness and somewhat lower strength after
Ferrinox 255 (Advanced Metals).
solution annealing. The G48A performance is also
better following solution annealing. Typical PWHT
is carried out at 1120°C for about 2-3 hours and then
APPLICATIONS
water quenched.
These consumables are designed to match similar
alloys, usually supplied as castings. The addition of
copper improves corrosion resistance in sulphuric RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
acid media and potentially increases strength and
Solid filler wire to match these alloys (AWS ER2553)
wear resistance, but as-welded toughness and
pitting performance in chloride media are reduced has only 6%Ni, so welds usually have excess
in comparison to alloys with <1%Cu. Although the ferrite. The best alternative is Zeron® 100X with
composition is controlled to ensure a minimum 0.7%Cu (DS B-61). Copper-free 2507 electrodes are
Pitting Resistance Equivalent (PRE) of 40 to match also available (DS B-62).
the superduplex alloys and maximise resistance to
pitting consumables with <1%Cu may be preferred
for non-sulphuric acid media unless PWHT is applied
(see later). PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
Applications include pumps and valves, corrosion/ Process Product Specification
wear resisting parts, and process equipment for use MMA Supermet 2506Cu AWS E2553-16
in offshore oil and gas industries, pulp, paper and Supercore 2507Cu (AWS E2553T0-4)
textile industries, and chemical and petrochemical FCW
plant. Supercore 2507CuP (AWS E2553T1-4)

SUPERMET 2506Cu
RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE FOR COPPER BEARING SUPERDUPLEX STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode made on a low carbon stainless steel core wire with a rutile flux containing additional elements for alloying and
deoxidation. Nitrogen and nickel are controlled to give a balanced duplex structure to minimise the risk of cracking, particularly
in highly restrained welds.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.4M E2553-16 QW432 F-No5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 25 9 3 Cu N L R 5 2 QW442 A-No 8

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu N PRE *
min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 24.0 7.5 2.9 1.5 0.18 40
max. 0.04 1.5 1.0 0.025 0.030 27.0 8.5 3.9 2.5 0.25 --
Typical 0.03 1 0.4 0.01 0.02 25.5 8 3.5 1.7 0.22 41
* PRE (Pitting Resistance Equivalent) = %Cr + 3.3%Mo + 16%N
1120°C/2h + WQ As-welded
Typical as-welded and PWHT
Min. * Typical Min. Typical
Elongation (%) 4d 16 32 15 17
5d -- -- 15 16
Reduction of area (%) -- 40 -- 25
Impact ISO-V(J) + 20°C -- 70 -- 35
- 30°C -- 60 -- 22
Hardness HV -- 260 -- 340
HRC -- -- -- 30
* These properties are appropriate for ASTM CD4MCu castings solution treated for optimum corrosion resistance; rapid cooling is
important for best impact properties.
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 12.0 15.0 14.1 16.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
9 5 1 7.5 1 0.6 <0.1 16 0.6
206 www.metrode.com DS B-63-SUPERMET 2506Cu | Rev. 01-03/16

SUPERCORE 2507Cu, 2507CuP
RUTILE FLUX CORED WIRES FOR CU CONTAINING SUPERDUPLEX STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Flux cored wire made with an alloyed stainless steel sheath and rutile flux system. Supercore 2507Cu combines easy operability,
high deposit quality and exceptional bead appearance for downhand and HV welding (material >6mm). Supercore 2507CuP is
optimised for positional welding, both vertical up and for fixed pipework qualified in the ASME 5G or 6G welding positions (pipe
typically >150mm diameter, >15mm wall).
STAINLESS STEELS
Made with an austenitic stainless steel sheath and rutile flux system. Weld metal carbon content is typically <0.03% when using
either 80%Ar-20%CO2 or 100% CO2 shielding gas.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supercore 2507Cu Supercore 2507CuP
QW432 F-No 6
AWS A5.22M E2553T0-4 E2553T1-4 Nearest classification
QW442 A-No 8
BS EN ISO 17633-A T 25 9 4 Cu N L R C/M 3 T 25 9 4 Cu N L P C/M 2
BS EN ISO 17633-B TS2553-FB0 TS2553-FB1 Nearest classification

min. -- -- -- -- -- 24.0 8.5 3.2 1.0 0.2 40
max. 0.04 1.5 1.0 0.02 0.03 26.0 10.5 4.2 2.0 0.3 --
Typical 0.03 0.8 0.5 0.005 0.02 24.5 9.3 3.7 1.4 0.25 41

1120°C/2h + WQ As-welded
Typical as welded and PWHT
typical Min. Typical
Elongation (%) 4d 40 -- 35
5d 39 20 33
Reduction of area (%) -- -- 32
Impact ISO-V(J) - 20°C 65 -- 40
- 50°C 45 -- >27
Hardness (HV) 250 -- 300
1.2 140 – 280A, 22 – 35V 180A, 28V 15 – 20mm
1.2P 120 – 250A, 20 – 32V 180A, 26V 15 – 20mm
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
14 10 1.5 5 5 1 5 1.0
www.metrode.com DS B-63-SSUPERCORE 2507Cu, 2507CuP | Rev. 01-03/16 207

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
NUCLEAR 308L CONSUMABLES

STAINLESS STEELS

308L austenitic stainless steels conforming to RCC-M No preheat, maximum interpass temperature
for joining 304L base materials used in nuclear 250°C; no PWHT required.
applications.
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

ASTM BS EN & DIN Requirements are taken from the relevant
304L 1.4306 consumable data sheets in the French RCC-M
304 1.4301 code.
304LN 1.4311
CF3 1.4308 For consumable qualification data sheets (B-93
CF8 and B-94) in accordance with RCC-M S 5142 please
contact Metrode Technical Department.
UNS
S 30403
S 30400
S 30453
See data sheet B-81 and B-83 for related 316L
APPLICATIONS and 309L consumables conforming to the RCC-M
Used to weld 304L (18/8) stainless steels for applications requirements.
in the nuclear industry requiring conformance to the
RCC-M code.
Standard 308L consumables for general purpose

PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
fabrication can be found in data sheet B-30. 308H
consumables for elevated temperature service can be Process Product Specification
found in data sheets C-10 and C-12. Controlled ferrite Ultramet 308L(N) AWS E308L-16
308L consumables for cryogenic applications can be RCC-M S 2920
MMA
found in data sheet B-37. Ultramet B308L(N) AWS E308L-15
RCC-M S 2920
TIG 308S92(N) AWS ER308L
MICROSTRUCTURE RCC-M S 2910
Austenite with a controlled level of ferrite, 5-15FN.

ULTRAMET 308L(N)
RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – special rutile flux coated 308L electrode on high purity 304L core wire.
Versatile downhand and positional capability, Ultramet 308L(N) has a controlled composition and ferrite content designed to
meet the requirements of the RCC-M data sheet S 2920.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.4M E308L-16 QW432 F-No 5
RCC-M S 2920

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu Co N FN *
Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 18.00 9.00 -- -- -- -- 5
Max. 0.035 2.0 0.90 0.025 0.025 21.00 11.00 0.50 0.5 0.20 -- 15
Typical <0.025 0.7 0.6 0.01 0.02 19.5 9.5 0.1 <0.1 0.04 0.08 8
* Ferrite calculated in accordance with DeLong diagram.

As-welded Min. Typical Min +350°C Typical +350°C
Tensile strength (MPa) 520 600 -- 410
Elongation (%) 4d 35 47 -- 30
5d 30 45 -- --
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C 60 (42) * 65 -- --
* Minimum average (minimum individual value).

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 11.4 13.5 13.5 16.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 5 5 0.8 - < 0.2 16 1
www.metrode.com DS B-80-ULTRAMET 308L(N) | Rev. 01-03/16 209

ULTRAMET B308L(N)
BASIC MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – special basic flux coated 308L electrode on high purity 304L core wire. Versatile downhand and positional
capability, Ultramet B308L(N) has a controlled composition and ferrite content designed to meet the requirements of the RCC-M
data sheet S 2920.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.4M E308L-15 QW432 F-No 5
RCC-M S 2920

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 18.00 9.00 -- -- -- -- 5
Max. 0.035 2.0 0.90 0.025 0.025 21.00 11.00 0.50 0.5 0.20 -- 15
Typical 0.02 1.2 0.3 0.01 0.02 19.5 9.5 0.1 <0.1 0.04 0.05 8

As-welded Min. Typical Min +350°C Typical +350°C
Elongation (%) 4d 35 44 -- 30
5d 30 42 -- --
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C 60 (42) * 100 -- --

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 11.4 13.5 13.5 16.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 5 5 0.8 - < 0.2 16 1
210 www.metrode.com DS B-80-ULTRAMET B308L(N) | Rev. 01-03/16

308S92(N)
SOLID WIRES FOR TIG
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for TIG welding that meets the requirements of RCC-M data sheet S 2910.
STAINLESS STEELS
BS EN ISO 14343-A W 19 9 L QW442 A-No 8
RCC-M S 2910

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu Co FN *
Min. -- 1.00 0.30 -- -- 19.5 9.00 -- -- -- 5
Max. 0.030 2.50 0.60 0.020 0.025 21.0 11.00 0.3 0.3 0.20 15
Typical 0.01 1.7 0.4 0.01 0.015 20 10 0.1 0.15 0.04 8

As-welded Min. +20°C Typical +20°C Min +350°C Typical +350°C
Elongation (%) 4d 35 48 -- 30
5d 30 39 -- --
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C 60 (42) * 160 -- --

PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4
TIG 5kg or 15kg spool 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube
FUME DATA
32 12 16 8 < 0.5 < 0.5 1
www.metrode.com DS B-80-308S92(N) | Rev. 01-03/16 211

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168

STAINLESS STEELS

316L austenitic stainless steels conforming to RCC-M No preheat, maximum interpass temperature
for joining 316L base materials used in nuclear 250°C; no PWHT required.
applications.
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED Requirements are taken from the relevant
ASTM BS EN & DIN consumable data sheets in the French RCC-M
316L 1.4401 / 1.4404 code.
316 1.4436
316LN 1.4406 / 1.4429
For consumable qualification data sheets (B-90
CF3M 1.4408
CF8M 1.4437
and B-92) in accordance with RCC-M S 5142 please
contact Metrode Technical Department.
UNS
S 31603
S 31600
S 31653 RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
See data sheet B-80 for related 308L consumables
conforming to the RCC-M requirements
APPLICATIONS
Used to weld 316L (19/12/3) stainless steels for
applications in the nuclear industry requiring
conformance to the RCC-M code.
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
Standard 316L consumables for general purpose Process Product Specification
fabrication can be found in data sheet B-32. 316H Ultramet 316L(N) AWS E316L-16
consumables for elevated temperature service can be RCC-M S 2925
MMA
found in data sheets C-12 and C-13. Controlled ferrite Ultramet B316L(N) AWS E316L-15
RCC-M S 2925
316L consumables for cryogenic applications can be
found in data sheet B-38. RCC-M S 2915
MICROSTRUCTURE
Austenite with a controlled level of ferrite, 5-15FN

ULTRAMET 316L(N)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – special rutile flux coated 316L electrode on high purity 304L core wire. Versatile downhand and positional
capability, Ultramet 316L(N) has a controlled composition and ferrite content designed to meet the requirements of the RCC-M
data sheet S 2925.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.4M E316L-16 QW432 F-No 5
RCC-M S 2925

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 18.00 12.00 2.5 -- -- -- 5
Max. 0.035 2.0 0.90 0.025 0.025 20.00 13.0 3.00 0.75 0.20 -- 15
Typical <0.025 0.7 0.6 0.01 0.02 19.5 12.5 2.6 <0.1 0.04 0.1 8

As-welded Min. Typical +20°C Min +350°C Typical +350/+360°C
Tensile strength (MPa) 520 600 -- 470/470
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 320 500 140/130 340/340
Elongation (%) 4d 35 38 -- 33/30
5d 30 36 -- --
Reduction of area (%) -- 55 -- 50/50
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C 60 (42) * 65 -- --

min. A 60 75 100
max. A 90 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 11.4 12.9 13.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 5 5 1 0.5 < 0.2 16 1

ULTRAMET B316L(N)
BASIC MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – special basic flux coated 308L electrode on high purity 304L core wire. Versatile downhand and positional
capability, Ultramet B316L(N) has a controlled composition and ferrite content designed to meet the requirements of the RCC-M
data sheet S 2925
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.4M E316L-15 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 19 12 3 L B 4 2 QW442 A-No 8
RCC-M S 2925

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 18.00 12.00 2.5 -- -- -- 5
Max. 0.035 2.0 0.90 0.025 0.025 20.00 13.0 3.00 0.75 0.20 -- 15
Typical 0.025 1.3 0.3 0.01 0.02 19.5 12.5 2.6 <0.1 0.04 0.05 10

Elongation (%) 4d 30 39 -- 30/30
5d 30 37 -- --
Reduction of area (%) -- 58 -- 50/50
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C 60 (42) * 85 -- --

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 13.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 5 5 1 0.5 < 0.2 16 1

316S92(N)
SOLID WIRES FOR TIG
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for TIG welding that meets the requirements of RCC-M data sheet S 2915.
STAINLESS STEELS
BS EN ISO 14343-A W 19 12 3 L QW442 A-No 8
RCC-M S 2915

Min. -- 1.00 0.30 -- -- 18.00 12.00 2.5 -- -- 5
Max. 0.030 2.50 0.60 0.020 0.025 20.00 14.00 3.00 0.3 0.20 15
Typical 0.01 1.7 0.4 0.01 0.015 19 12.5 2.6 0.15 0.04 10

4d -- 48 -- 30/30
Elongation (%)
5d 30 33 -- --
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C 60 (42) * 110 -- --

PACKAGING DATA
TIG 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube
FUME DATA
32 12 16 8 < 0.5 < 0.5 3.1

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168

STAINLESS STEELS

309L austenitic stainless steel electrode conforming Preheat and interpass temperatures depend on
to RCC-M for dissimilar joints in nuclear applications. base material hardenability. For guidance, no
preheat on mild steels; up to 250°C on hardenable
steels.
Mainly used under high dilution conditions, particu-
larly dissimilar welds between stainless and CMn ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
steels.
Requirements are taken from the relevant
consumable data sheets in the French RCC-M
code.
APPLICATIONS
Buffer layers and clad steels: Overlays on CMn, mild For consumable qualification data sheets (B-93,
steel or low alloy steels and for joining 304L/321 clad B-94 and B-95) in accordance with RCC-M S 5142
plate. Subsequent layers are deposited with an please contact Metrode Technical Department.
electrode chosen to match the cladding, eg 308L, 347.
Dissimilar joints: Tolerance to dilution is exploited in

joining stainless types 410, 304L, 321 and 316L to mild RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
and low alloy steels such as stiffeners, brackets and See data sheet B-80 and B-81 for related 308L
other attachments. Service temperatures above 400°C and 316L consumables conforming to the RCC-M
are normally avoided. It is also used for welding 12%Cr requirements.
‘utility ferritics’ such as Cromweld 3CR12, to itself and
other steels.
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
MICROSTRUCTURE Process Product Specification
Ultramet 309L(N) AWS E309L-16
Austenite with ferrite in the range 8-18FN. RCC-M S 2930
MMA
Ultramet B309L(N) AWS E309L-15
RCC-M S 2930

ULTRAMET 309L(N)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – special rutile flux coated 309L electrode on high purity 304L core wire.
Versatile downhand and positional capability, Ultramet 309L(N) has a controlled composition and ferrite content designed to meet
the requirements of the RCC-M data sheet S 2930.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.4M E309L-16 QW432 F-No 5
RCC-M S 2930

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 22.00 12.00 -- -- -- 8
Max. 0.030 2.5 0.90 0.025 0.025 25.00 14.00 0.50 0.75 0.15 18
Typical 0.025 0.8 0.6 0.01 0.02 23.5 12.3 0.1 <0.1 0.04 14
* Ferrite calculated in accordance with DeLong diagram

5d 25 38

min. A 60 75 100
max. A 90 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 12.6 13.5 13.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
Fume composition (wt % typical)
9 6 7 1 0.1 < 0.2 17 0.7

ULTRAMET B309L(N)
BASIC MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – special basic flux coated 309L electrode on high purity 304L core wire.
Versatile downhand and positional capability, Ultramet 309L(N) has a controlled composition and ferrite content designed to meet
the requirements of the RCC-M data sheet S 2930.
STAINLESS STEELS

AWS A5.4M E309L-15 QW432 F-No 5
RCC-M S 2930

Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 22.00 12.00 -- -- -- 8
Max. 0.030 2.5 0.90 0.025 0.025 25.00 14.00 0.50 0.75 0.15 18
Typical 0.02 1.2 0.3 0.01 0.02 23.5 12.3 0.1 <0.1 0.04 14
5d 25 35
min. A 60 75 100
max. A 90 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 12.6 13.5 13.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
Fume composition (wt % typical)
9 6 7 1 0.1 < 0.2 17 0.7

309S92(N)
SOLID WIRES FOR TIG
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for TIG welding that meets the manufacturing quality requirements of RCC-M.
STAINLESS STEELS

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu FN *
Min. -- 1.00 0.30 -- -- 23.0 12.0 -- -- 8
Max. 0.025 2.50 0.60 0.020 0.025 25.0 14.0 0.3 0.3 18
Typical 0.01 1.7 0.4 0.01 0.015 23.5 13 0.1 0.05 12

As-welded min +20°C
5d 41
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C >200

PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
32 12 20 11 < 0.5 < 0.5 2.5

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
NUCLEAR NAG 308L CONSUMABLES

STAINLESS STEELS

308L austenitic stainless steels for joining Nitric Acid No preheat, maximum interpass temperature
Grade (NAG) 304L base materials. The consumables 250˚C, no PWHT required.
are manufactured to BNFL (now Sellafield Ltd)
specifications.
These products are approved and certified by
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED Sellafield Ltd (SL) and are only supplied to SL
ASTM contractors for use on SL projects.
304L
BS Huey tests on weld deposits achieve corrosion
304S11 rates of <0.3mm/year as-welded and <0.6mm/year
BS EN & DIN in the sensitised condition.
1.4306
UNS
S30403 RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
304L material that meets the specific NAG requirements. Standard 308L consumables for general fabrication
applications are in data sheet B-30. RCC-M nuclear
grade 308L consumables are in data sheet B-80
APPLICATIONS
Used to weld nitric acid grade (NAG) 304L stainless
steels used in the construction of waste nuclear PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
fuel processing plant. Process Product Specification
It is also suitable for the welding of conventional MMA NAG 19.9.L.R NF 0086/1
304L stainless steels for nuclear applications TIG NAG 19.9.L NF 0087/1
– particularly for QA reasons where NAG and
conventional 304L steels are being fabricated
together.
MICROSTRUCTURE
In the as-welded condition the weld metal
microstructure consists of austenite with ferrite
content of about 6FN.

NAG 19.9.L.R
RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE FOR WELDING NITRIC ACID GR ADE 304L STAINLESS STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – rutile flux coated 308L electrode on special high purity 304L core wire.
A special flux system is used to maintain carbon, sulphur and phosphorus within specified limits and also give porosity-free
deposits.
All electrode sizes have optimum versatility for downhand welding with high cosmetic finish and weld metal integrity; and all
positional welding with the 2.5/3.2 mm electrodes.
STAINLESS STEELS
AWS A5.4M E308L-16 QW432 F-No 5
BNFL (now Sellafield Ltd.) NF 0086/1

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu W B FN
min. -- 0.2 -- -- -- 18.0 9.0 -- -- -- -- 3
max. 0.025 2.0 0.80 0.015 0.018 21.0 11.0 0.20 0.30 0.30 0.0010 10
Typical 0.02 1 0.5 0.01 0.015 19.5 10 0.05 0.1 0.01 0.0005 6

5d 30 42
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 350
kg/carton 12 13.5 12.9 12.9
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 5 0.8 5 -- <0.2 16 1
www.metrode.com DS B-88-NAG 19.9.L.R | Rev. 01-03/16 221

NAG 19.9.L
SOLID WIRE FOR WELDING NITRIC ACID GR ADE 304L STAINLESS STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
STAINLESS STEELS

BNFL (now Sellafield Ltd.) NF 0087/1

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu W B
min. -- 1.0 -- -- -- 19.5 9.0 -- -- -- --
max. 0.025 2.0 0.65 0.015 0.018 22.0 11.0 0.20 0.30 0.30 0.0010
Typical 0.015 1.7 0.3 0.004 0.015 20 10 0.1 0.07 0.02 0.0003

As welded TIG
5d 39

PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.8 1.2 1.2 1.6 2.4 3.2
TIG 1kg or 5kg spool 5kg or 15kg spool 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube
222 www.metrode.com DS B-88-NAG 19.9.L | Rev. 01-03/16

Section C : HIGH TEMPERATURE ALLOYS HANWORTH LANE, CHERTSEY
Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
CONSUMABLES FOR ELEVATED TEMPERATURE SERVICE
The 300H consumables are designed for welding matching high carbon stainless steels typically used at service temperatures of 400-
800°C. To ensure optimum performance under these service conditions not only is the carbon controlled (normally 0.04-0.08%C) but
the ferrite and total alloying are also carefully regulated to minimize the formation of brittle intermetallic phases.
The 309 consumables in this section should not be confused with the 309L/309Mo types used for dissimilar welding (B-50 and B-51).
The 309 consumables in Section C generally have controlled carbon and ferrite and are designed for matching base materials for
elevated temperature service.
HIGH TEMPERATURE ALLOYS

Consumables in the 330, 800 and HP40 alloy sections are designed to match a wide range of special austenitic alloys which are used
primarily for resistance to creep and hot corrosion or oxidation. In all types, the presence of a controlled level of carbon is essential
for hot strength. Parent alloys with 0.4% carbon or more are produced predominantly in cast form and have quite low room
temperature ductility, but in general this does not have an adverse effect on weldability.
Preheat is not normally required for welding these alloys, with the exception of the highest alloy high carbon types containing
tungsten which can suffer from cold cracking due to build up of residual stresses and low ductility. Interpass temperature and heat
input control is more important for the lower carbon types to minimise any possibility of hot cracking. The presence of a copious
primary carbide eutectic tends to suppress hot cracking in the higher carbon types. PWHT is rarely applied to any of the alloys in this
section, although service-aged base material may require solution treatment to restore satisfactory ductility prior to welding.

300H stainless steel consumables for elevated temperature service
Ultramet 308H E308H-16 E 19 9 H R 3 2
MMA
Ultramet B308H E308H-15 E 19 9 H B 4 2
C-10 308H TIG/MIG/SAW 308S96 ER308H 19 9 H
Supercore 308H E308HT0-1/4 TS308H-FB0
FCW
Supercore 308HP E308HT1-1/4 TS308H-FB1
Ultramet 347H E347-16 E 19 9 Nb R 3 2
MMA
Ultramet B347H E347-15 E 19 9 Nb B 4 2
C-11 347H
TIG/SAW ER347H ER347 19 9 Nb
FCW Supercore 347HP E347HT1-1/4 T 19 9 Nb P M 2
Supermet 16.8.2 E16.8.2-17 -
MMA
E16.8.2-15 E16.8.2-15 -
TIG ER16.8.2 ER16.8.2 W 16 8 2
C-12 16.8.2
SAW ER16.8.2 ER16.8.2 S 16 8 2
Supercore 16.8.2 - -
FCW
Supercore 16.8.2P - -
17.8.2.RCF ( E 16.8.2-16) BS 17.8.2.R
MMA Ultramet 316H AWS E316H-16 E 19 12 2 R 3 2
Ultramet B316H AWS E316H-15 E 19 12 2 B 4 2
C-13 316H
TIG/MIG/SAW 316S96 ER316H 19 12 3 H
SS300 BS EN SA AF2 AC -
SAW FLUX
SSB BS EN SA AF2 DC -
www.metrode.com DS C-01 | Rev. 01-03/16 223

High temperature 309 alloys
C-20 253MA MMA Supermet 253MA - -
MMA Thermet 309CF E309H-16 (E 22 12 R 3 2)
C-21 309
TIG/MIG 309S94 ER309 22 12 H
High temperature austenitic stainless steel
C-25 Super 304H TIG MT304H - -
310 stainless steels for high temperature service
25.20 Super R (E310-16) E 25 20 R 3 2.
MMA
C-30 310 Ultramet B310Mn (E310-15) E 25 20 B 4 2
TIG/MIG/SAW 310S94 ER310 25 20
C-31 310H MMA Thermet 310H E310H-15 E 25 20 H B 4 2
Consumables for alloys 330 and 800
MMA Thermet 800Nb - -
C-40 800
TIG/MIG 21.33.MnNb - -
C-41 330 MMA Thermet R17.38H (E330H-16) BS 15.35.H.R
C-45 25.35.Nb MMA Thermet 25.35.Nb - -
Consumables for HP40 and other high carbon cast alloys
MMA Thermet HP40Nb - BS 25.35.H.Nb.B
C-50 HP40Nb
TIG/MIG 25.35.4C.Nb - -
MMA Thermet 35.45.Nb - -
C-60 35.45
TIG/MIG 35.45.Nb - -
C-70 HP50 MMA Thermet HP50WCo - -
C-80 22H MMA Thermet 22H - -
C-90 657 MMA Nimrod 657 ENiCr-4 -
224 www.metrode.com DS C-01 | Rev. 01-03/16

Data Sheet C-10 HANWORTH LANE, CHERTSEY
Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
308H STAINLESS STEELS

For 304/304H materials used at elevated temperatures. Austenite with delta ferrite controlled 2-8FN.

wrought cast Preheat not required; maximum interpass
ASTM/UNS 304H/S30409 CF10, CF8 temperature 250°C. No PWHT required.

DIN 1.4948
BS 304S51 302C25, 304C15 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Farrar J.C.M. and Marshall A.W.: ‘Type ‘300H’
austenitic stainless steel weld metals for high
temperature service’
Marshall A.W. and Farrar J.C.M.: ‘Influence of
residuals on properties of austenitic stainless steel
APPLICATIONS weld metal, with particular reference to energy
The 308H consumables are designed to match industries’ (Conference) Stainless Steels ‘84, pp
unstabilised 18Cr-10Ni austenitic stainless steels 271-285, Metals Society, London 1985.
for elevated temperature strength and oxidation There is also a Metrode Technical Profile covering
resistance. These steels and the weld metal have the use of these products in the petrochemical
carbon content controlled to 0.04-0.08%. industry on cat crackers.
Composition limits of the MMA electrodes and
FCAW wires are tightened above those of BS/AWS RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
specifications in order to meet requirements of Shell
and other operators of refinery equipment. Weld See also the consumables in the related alloy
metal Cr and Ni are kept low and ferrite is controlled groups of 347H (C-11), 16.8.2 (C-12) and 316H (C-13).
to minimise embrittlement by sigma phase. Beneficial
and detrimental minor elements and residuals are also
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
controlled to optimise high temperature properties.
No bismuth-bearing constituents are allowed in these Process Product Specification
consumables, to ensure <0.002%Bi as required by API Ultramet 308H AWS E308H-16
582. MMA
Ultramet B308H AWS E308H-15
The 308H consumables should also be considered for TIG/MIG 308S96 AWS ER308H
welding thick (>12mm) stabilised grades 321H or 347H 308S96 AWS ER308H
to avoid in-service HAZ cracking and low creep rupture SAW SS300 BS EN SA AF2
ductility associated with 347 weld metal. Note that SSB BS EN SA AF2
some authorities recommend the use of type 16-8-2
types for these steels, including 304H. Supercore 308H AWS E308HT0-1/4
FCW
Supercore 308HP AWS E308HT1-1/4
308H is widely used in petrochemical and chemical
process plant, particularly for the fabrication of
cyclones, transfer lines used to re-circulate the
catalyst in catalytic crackers (cat crackers) operating in
the range 400-815°C.

ULTRAMET 308H
RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE FOR 304H STAINLESS STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with rutile flux on matching core wire.
Ultramet 308H gives both welder and weld metal all the benefits of advanced rutile electrode design.
These features include optimum versatility for downhand and positional welding, combined with high cosmetic finish and full
volumetric weld metal integrity.
The smaller sizes are particularly suited to vertical and overhead welding applications including fixed pipework.
In addition, the 2.5mm diameter is specifically designed to enable the root pass to be deposited in single side butt welds using
standard MMA equipment without a gas purge.
AWS A5.4M E308H-16 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 19 9 H R 3 2 QW442 A-No 8

min. 0.04 0.5 -- -- -- 18.0 9.0 -- -- 2
max. 0.08 1.5 0.9 0.025 0.030 21.0 11.0 0.25 0.5 8
Typical 0.05 1 0.6 0.01 0.02 18.5 9.5 0.1 0.05 3
Mo + Nb + Ti = 0.25% max
Note: Cr content of 2.5mm is typically 19.5%.
High Temperature
650°C 732°C 816°C
Elongation (%) 4d 35 45 -- -- --
5d 30 43 28 51 53
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C -- 80 -- -- --
Hardness (HV) -- 190-210 -- -- --
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 13.5 17.1
STORAGE
Direct use from tin is satisfactory for much longer than a working shift of 8h.
FUME DATA
8 5 0.8 5 < 0.2 16 1
226 www.metrode.com DS C-10-ULTRAMET 308H | Rev. 01-03/16

ULTRAMET B308H
SOBASIC PIPE WELDING MMA ELECTRODE FOR 304H STAINLESS STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with basic carbonate-fluoride flux on matching core wire.
Ultramet B308H is particularly suited to positional welding, including fixed pipework qualified in the ASME 6G position, in materials
thickness from 3mm up to the heaviest sections.
AWS A5.4M E308H-15 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 19 9 H B 4 2 QW442 A-No 8


Min. 0.04 0.5 -- -- -- 18.0 9.0 -- -- 2
Max. 0.08 2.0 0.9 0.025 0.030 21.0 11.0 0.25 0.5 8
Typical 0.05 1 0.4 0.01 0.02 18.5 9.5 0.1 0.05 3
Mo + Nb + Ti = 0.25% max
High Temperature
Typical values as welded Min. Typical
650°C 732°C 816°C
Elongation (%) 4d 35 41 -- -- --
5d 30 38 24 48 47
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C -- 100 -- -- --
Hardness (HV) -- 210 -- -- --

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 13.5 16.5
STORAGE
Direct use from tin is satisfactory for much longer than a working shift of 8h.
FUME DATA
8 5 0.8 5 < 0.2 16 1
www.metrode.com DS C-10-ULTRAMET B308H | Rev. 01-03/16 227

308S96
SOLID WIRE FOR 304H STAINLESS STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

AWS A5.9M ER308H QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO 14343-A 19 9 H QW442 A-No 8
BS EN ISO 14343-B SS308H

min. 0.04 1.0 0.30 -- -- 19.5 9.0 -- --
max. 0.08 2.0 0.65 0.020 0.030 20.5 10.0 0.25 0.25
Typical 0.05 1.8 0.4 0.002 0.015 19.9 9.5 0.1 0.1
Typical ferrite level of undiluted weld metal is in the range 3-8FN.
ER19-10H (on request) has Cr ≤ 20.0, Mo ≤ 0.25, Nb ≤ 0.05, Ti ≤ 0.05.

Hardness HV 195/215

Shielding gas Current Diameter (mm) Voltage
TIG Argon 100A, DC- 2.4 12V
MIG Ar/2%O2 or Ar/1-3%CO2 260A, DC+ 1.2 28V
SAW SS300 or SSB flux 350A, DC+ 2.4 30V
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG -- -- To order 2.5kg tube To order 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube
MIG To order To order 15kg spool -- -- -- --
SAW -- -- -- 25kg spool -- 25kg spool To order
FUME DATA
32 12 16 8 <0.5 <0.5 3.1
228 www.metrode.com DS C-10-308S96 | Rev. 01-03/16

SUPERCORE 308H / 308HP
DOWNHAND AND ALL-POSITIONAL FCW FOR 304H STAINLESS STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Flux cored wires made with an austenitic stainless steel sheath and rutile flux system.
Supercore 308H is designed for ease of use, exceptional weld bead appearance and high weld metal integrity, primarily in downhand
and H-V welding situations with plate and material of a 6mm thickness or greater.
Supercore 308HP designed for all-positional welding from 1G/2G up to 5G/6G pipework.

Supercore 308H Supercore 308HP (1.2mm only) QW432 F-No 6
AWS A5.22M E308HT0-1/4 E308HT1-1/4 QW442 A-No 8
BS EN ISO 17633-B TS308H-FB0 TS308H-FB1

min. 0.04 1.0 -- -- -- 18.0 9.0 -- -- 3
max. 0.08 2.0 1.0 0.03 0.04 20.0 11.0 0.5 0.5 8
Typical 0.05 1.3 0.5 0.01 0.02 18.8 9.5 0.1 0.1 5

High Temperature
650°C 732°C 816°C
0.2% proof strength (MPa) -- 420 213 177 140
Elongation (%) 4d 30 40 -- -- --
5d 30 36 30 46 40
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C -- 100 -- -- --
Aged at 730°C/1000h -- 90 -- -- --

1.2 120A-22V to 280A-34V 180A-29V 12 – 20mm
1.2P 120A-22V to 250A-32V 150A-25V 12 – 20mm
1.6 200A-28V to 330A-34V 230A-30V 15 – 25mm
PACKAGING DATA
Resistance to moisture absorption is high, but to prevent any possibility of porosity it is advised that part-used spools are returned
to polythene wrappers.
Where possible, preferred storage conditions are 60% RH maximum, 18°C minimum.
FUME DATA
13 8 1 7 2 <1 12 1
www.metrode.com DS C-10-SUPERCORE 308H / 308HP | Rev. 01-03/16 229

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168

ALLOY TYPE
MICROSTRUCTURE
Controlled, high carbon Nb stabilised stainless steel
Austenite with 2-9FN, typically 4FN (solid wire
for elevated temperature service.
typically 8FN).
ASTM-ASME BS EN & DIN WELDING GUIDELINES
321H 1.4941
No preheat or PWHT required; maximum
347H 1.4961
interpass temperature 250°C.
BS UNS
321S51 S32109
347S51 S34709
APPLICATIONS The 308H (data sheet C-10), 16.8.2 (data sheet
Used to weld titanium and niobium stabilised 18/8 high C-12) and 316H (data sheet C-13) consumables are
carbon stainless steel types 321H and 347H. also relevant for many of the same materials and
applications.
Applications include catalytic crackers (cat crackers),
cyclones, transfer lines, furnace parts, steam piping,
superheater headers, some gas and steam turbine
components, used in petrochemical, chemical process
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
plants and in power generation industries.
Note that the alloy 16.8.2 (data sheet C-12) was Ultramet 347H AWS E347-16
developed as a more ductile alternative to 347H MMA
Ultramet B347H AWS E347-15
consumables to avoid in-service HAZ failure in 347H
TIG ER347H AWS ER347
base material of >12mm thickness. For this reason
when joining thicker section 321H/347H the 16.8.2 FCW Supercore 347HP AWS E347HT1-1/4
consumables are considered a preferable alternative.
For welding 321/347 for general corrosion resisting

applications at temperatures up to about 400°C use 347
(data sheet B-31) or 308L (data sheet B-30) consumables.
For cryogenic applications requiring >0.38mm (15mils)

charpy lateral expansion at –196°C, use unstabilised
weld metal with low carbon and controlled ferrite (B-
37).

ULTRAMET 347H
ALL-POSITIONAL RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE FOR 321H/347H STAINLESS STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA rutile flux coated 347 electrode on high purity 304L core wire. Ultramet 347H has all the benefits of an advanced rutile flux
design, including all-positional fixed pipework welding with the 2.5/3.2mm diameter electrodes.

AWS A5.4M E347-16 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 19 9 Nb R 3 2 QW442 A-No 8

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Nb * Cu FN
Min. 0.04 0.5 -- -- -- 18.0 9.0 -- 8xC -- 2
Max. 0.08 2.0 0.9 0.025 0.030 21.0 11.0 0.50 1.00 0.50 8
Typical 0.05 0.7 0.7 0.01 0.02 19 9.5 0.05 0.5 0.07 4
* BS requires 10xC minimum.

Room Temperature High Temperature
As-welded
Min. Typical 650˚C 732˚C 815˚C
0.2% proof strength
350 500 283 269 206
(MPa)
Elongation (%) 4d 30 40 -- -- --
5d 25 37 19 20 7
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 12.9 16.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 5 0.8 5 <0.2 16 1
www.metrode.com DS C-11-ULTRAMET 347H | Rev. 01-03/16 231

ULTRAMET B347H
BASIC PIPE-WELDING MMA ELECTRODE FOR 321H/347H STAINLESS STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with basic carbonate-fluoride flux on high purity 304L core wire. Designed to give good moisture resistance and
hence freedom from weld porosity. The electrode is particularly suited to positional welding of fixed pipework qualified in the
ASME 5G/6G position and is tolerant to adverse wind and draughts under site conditions.
Compared with rutile types, the basic flux gives a more convex fillet bead profile and although the slag does not self-lift, it is
easily removed and gives welds of exceptional appearance and quality.
AWS A5.4M E347-15 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 19 9 Nb B 4 2 QW442 A-No 8

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Nb * Cu FN
Min. 0.04 0.5 -- -- -- 18.0 9.0 -- 8xC -- 2
Max. 0.08 2.0 0.9 0.025 0.030 21.0 11.0 0.50 1.00 0.50 8
Typical 0.05 1.5 0.3 0.01 0.02 19 9.5 0.05 0.6 0.07 5
* BS requires 10xC minimum.

As-welded
Elongation (%) 4d 30 40 -- -- --
5d 25 37 18 14 5

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 11.4 13.5 13.5 16.8
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 5 0.8 5 <0.2 16 1
232 www.metrode.com DS C-11-ULTRAMET B347H | Rev. 01-03/16

ER347H
SOLID WIRES FOR 321H/347H STAINLESS STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

BS EN ISO 14343-A 19 9 Nb QW442 A-No 8

Min.

0.04 1.0 0.30 -- -- 19.0 9.0 -- 10xC -- 3
Max. 0.08 2.5 0.65 0.020 0.030 20.0 11.0 0.3 1.0 0.3 9
Typical 0.055 1.7 0.4 0.005 0.02 19.5 9.2 0.1 0.6 0.1 8

Typical High Temperature
As welded
TIG 650˚C 732˚C 815˚C
Elongation (%) 4d 42 23 22 22
5d 40 21 20 21
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C 125 -- -- --
Hardness cap/mid (HV) 190/230 -- -- --

TIG Argon * DC- 2.4 100A, 12V
MIG Ar/2%O2 or Ar/1-3%CO2 DC+ 1.0 190A, 26V
PACKAGING DATA
TIG -- 2.5 kg tube
MIG 15kg spool --
FUME DATA
32 12 16 8 < 0.5 < 0.5 3.1
www.metrode.com DS C-11-ER347H | Rev. 01-03/16 233

SUPERCORE 347HP
ALL-POSITIONAL RUTILE FLUX CORED WIRE FOR 321H/347H STAINLESS STEELS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Flux cored wire made with an austenitic stainless steel sheath and rutile flux system.
Supercore 347HP is designed for all-positional welding from 1G/2G up to 5G/6G fixed pipework.
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.22M E347HT1-1/4 ASME IX QUALIFICATION
BS EN ISO 17633-A T 19 9 Nb P C/M 2 QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO 17633-B TS347-FB1 QW442 A-No 8
APPROVALS DNV

Min. 0.04 0.5 -- -- -- 18.0 9.0 -- 8xC -- 4
Max. 0.08 2.0 1.0 0.025 0.030 21.0 11.0 0.3 1.0 0.3 9
Typical 0.05 1.4 0.6 0.01 0.02 19.5 10.2 0.1 0.5 0.1 5

As welded
Min. Typical 732°C
5d 25 40 22
70 --
Shielding gas: 80%Ar-20%CO2 at 20-25l/min. Proprietary gases may be used but argon should not exceed 85% argon.
180A, 29V (downhand)
1.2 120-280A, 22-34V 12-20mm
160A, 25V (positional)
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
17 11 2 4 5 <1 5 1
234 www.metrode.com DS C-11-SUPERCORE 347HP | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
16.8.2 FOR HIGH TEMPERATURE

3XXH STAINLESS STEELS
16.8.2 for high temperature 3XXH stainless steels. Austenite with delta ferrite of 1-6FN typically. Hot
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED cracking is not reported at low FN.
ASTM/UNS DIN BS
304H / S30409 1.4948 304S51 WELDING GUIDELINES
321H / S32109 1.4941 321S51 Preheat is not required; maximum interpass

347H / S34709 1.4961 347S51
temperature 250°C. Welds are left as-welded, no
316H / S31609 - 316S51, 316S53
PWHT required.
APPLICATIONS
The 16.8.2 consumables have a controlled composition, ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
optimised for performance in structural service at temperatures
up to about 800°C. With molybdenum specifically at the lower O R Carpenter and R D Wylie: "16-8-2 Cr-Ni-Mo for
limit for AWS 16.8.2, it is essentially a dilute hybrid between welding electrodes" Met. Prog. 1956, 70, (5), 65-73.
E308H and E316H. Rather than matching any single parent This paper describes the original development
material, it has applications for welding all the ‘3XXH’ series of (by Babcock and Wilcox) of E16-8-2 to weld 347
stainless steels with 0.04-0.10% carbon, which combine creep, for power plant applications.
oxidation and general corrosion resistance.
R D Thomas: "HAZ cracking in thick sections of
A low total Cr+Mo with controlled carbon and ferrite content
ensures high resistance to thermal embrittlement by austenitic stainless steels" Part 1, Weld J 1984,
intermetallic phases (and also excellent toughness at low 63, 12, 24-32; Part 2 idem 355s-368s. This detailed
temperatures). A strictly limited level of Mo provides valuable review covers all standard stainless steels,
effects on creep ductility and thermal fatigue, balanced against in particular for high temperature structural
control of oxidation under stagnant conditions above 650°C, applications.
and sigma or chi phase formation in service. No bismuth-
bearing constituents are allowed in these consumables, to
There is also a Metrode Technical Profile available
ensure <0.00 2%Bi as required by API 582. on the use of 16.8.2 consumables in cat crackers.
For 304H, some authorities now choose 16.8.2 specifically to
avoid hot ductility and creep-fatigue problems in thick sections RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
which traditionally would have been welded with 308H.
Historically, this weld metal was initially developed to avoid in- See also the consumables in the related alloy
service HAZ failure in 347H of >12mm thickness. For the same groups of 308H (C-10), 347H (C-11), 316H (C-13).
reasons it is also a candidate for 321H, although HAZ failures
here are not so well documented. For thermal stability, it is
equally suitable for 316H in preference to matching weld metal. PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
In some applications, the chromium in 16.8.2 weld metal may
be considered too low for satisfactory resistance to corrosion Process Product Specification
(possibly under dew-point conditions during plant shutdown). Supermet 16.8.2 AWS E16.8.2-17
However, the weld root is normally on the process side, and MMA
is conventionally deposited by TIG using higher chromium E16.8.2-15 AWS E16.8.2-15
weld metal. Similar electrodes for capping runs are available TIG ER16.8.2 AWS ER16.8.2
if required.
FCW Supercore 16.8.2/P None relevant
Applications include catalytic crackers (cat crackers), cyclones,
transfer lines, furnace parts, thick wall steam piping, superheater
headers, some gas and steam turbine components used in
petrochemical, chemical process plants and in power generation
industries.
Owing to the lean composition and controlled ferrite content,
the 16.8.2 consumables also show useful cryogenic toughness
down to -196°C.

SUPERMET 16.8.2
RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE FOR 3X XH STAINLESS STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
General purpose, all-positional MMA electrode with rutile-aluminosilicate flux on high purity 304L core wire.
Manufactured with ‘controlled hydrogen’ and moisture resistant flux covering technology to ensure high resistance to weld
porosity.

AWS A5.4M E16-8-2-17 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 (E 16 8 2 R) QW442 A-No 8


Min. 0.04 0.5 -- -- -- 14.5 7.5 1.0 -- 1
Max. 0.08 2.5 0.60 0.03 0.03 16.5 9.5 2.0 0.75 6
Typical 0.05 1 0.45 0.01 0.02 15.5 8.5 1.2 0.1 3
* Mo controlled around 1.0 – 1.3% unless requested otherwise.
BS EN E16 8 2 R has Mo 1.50 – 2.50%.
High Temperature
650˚C 732˚C 816˚C
Tensile strength (MPa) 550 > 620 310 232 161
0.2% proof strength (MPa) -- > 410 225 179 126
Elongation (%) 4d 35 42 -- -- --
5d 25 42 28 47 43
+ 20°C -- > 70 (>1.3) -- -- --
Impact ISO and LE*-V(J(mm))
- 50°C -- > 50 (>0.9) -- -- --
* LE = Charpy lateral expansion, mm (0.38mm = 15 mils)
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 13.5 18.0
STORAGE
3 hermetically sealed ring-pull metal tins per carton, with unlimited shelf life. Direct use from tin is satisfactory for much longer
than a working shift of 8h. Excessive exposure of electrodes to humid conditions will cause some moisture pick-up and increase
the risk of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 5 0.7 5 0.1 0.2 16 1
236 www.metrode.com DS C-12-SUPERMET 16.8.2 | Rev. 01-03/16

E16.8.2-15
BASIC PIPE WELDING MMA ELECTRODE FOR 3X XH STAINLESS STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with fully basic lime-fluoride flux on high purity 304L core wire. E16.8.2-15 is a basic coated all-positional electrode
suited to the most demanding vertical and overhead welding applications, including fixed pipework in the ASME 5G/6G positions.

AWS A5.4M E16-8-2-15 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 (E16 8 2 B) QW442 A-No 8

Min. 0.04 0.5 -- -- -- 14.5 7.5 1.0 -- 1
Max. 0.08 2.5 0.60 0.03 0.03 16.5 9.5 2.0 0.75 6
Typical 0.05 1.8 0.3 0.01 0.02 15.5 8.5 1.2 0.06 3
* BS EN E16 8 2 B has Mo 1.50 – 2.50%
Mo controlled around 1.0 – 1.3% unless requested otherwise.
High Temperature
650˚C 732˚C 816˚C
Elongation (%) 4d 35 40 -- -- --
5d -- 37 27 36 57
Impact ISO -V(J) -100°C -- > 50 -- -- --
TYPICAL OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC +VE. UNSUITABLE FOR AC.

min. A 60 75 100
max. A 90 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 13.5
STORAGE
FUME DATA
8 5 0.7 5 0.1 0.2 16 1
www.metrode.com DS C-12-E16.8.2-15 | Rev. 01-03/16 237

ER16.8.2
SOLID WIRE TIG AND SAW FOR 3X XH STAINLESS STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for TIG welding and sub-arc welding of 300H stainless steel.

AWS A5.9M ER16-8-2 QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO 14343-A 16 8 2 QW442 A-No 8
BS EN ISO 14343-B S 16-8-2

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo* Cu
Min. 0.04 1.0 0.3 -- -- 14.5 7.5 1.0 --

Max. 0.10 2.0 0.6 0.02 0.03 16.5 9.5 2.0 0.3
Typical 0.06 1.4 0.4 0.01 0.01 15.5 8.5 1.3 0.1
* Mo 1.0 – 1.3% on request. Typical ferrite level 1-6FN.

Typical High Temperature
As-welded
TIG SAW 650˚C 732˚C 816˚C
Elongation (%) 4d 35 29 -- -- --
5d -- 29 31 36 42
Impact ISO-V(J) -196°C -- 30 -- -- --

TIG Argon 100A 2.4 12V
PACKAGING DATA
SAW -- 25kg spool 25kg spool
FUME DATA
40 10 12 7 0.5 < 0.5 4.2
238 www.metrode.com DS C-12-ER16.8.2 | Rev. 01-03/16

SUPERCORE 16.8.2 / 16.8.2P
RUTILE FLUX CORED WIRES FOR 3X XH STAINLESS STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
These wires are made with an austenitic stainless steel sheath and rutile flux system with alloying controlled to maximise high
temperature strength and resistance to service embrittlement.
Supercore 16.8.2 is made in 1.6mm only and is designed for applications primarily in the downhand and HV positions on plate and
material of about 6mm thickness and above.
Supercore 16.8.2P is made in 1.2mm only and is designed for welding in all welding positions from ASME 1G/2G up to 5G/6G
pipework, and also provides very good operability in the flat/HV position.

AWS A5.22M None applicable QW432 F-No --
BS EN ISO 17633-B (TS16-8-2-FM1) nearest classification QW442 A-No 8

Min. 0.04 0.5 -- -- -- 14.5 7.5 1.0 -- 1
Max. 0.08 2.0 0.70 0.03 0.04 17.0 10.0 2.0 0.5 8
Typical 0.05 1.2 0.5 0.01 0.02 16.2 9.2 1.1* 0.1 4
* Mo controlled around 1.0 – 1.3% unless requested otherwise.

High Temperature
650°C 732°C 816°C
0.2% proof strength (MPa) -- 410 207 180 134
4d 35 42 -- -- --
Elongation (%)
5d 25 42 30 44 39
+ 20°C -- 100 (1.8) -- -- --
Impact ISO-V(J) (mm) -130°C -- 50 (0.8) -- -- --
-196°C -- 45 (0.7) -- -- --
* LE = Charpy lateral expansion, mm (0.38mm = 15 mils)
1.2 120A-22V to 280A-34V 180A-29V 12 – 20mm
1.2P 120A-22V to 280A-34V 150A-25V 12 – 20mm
1.6 200A-28V to 350A-34V 300A-30V 15 – 25mm
PACKAGING DATA
Resistance to moisture absorption is high, but to prevent any possibility of porosity it is advised that part-used spools are returned
to polythene wrappers.
Where possible, preferred storage conditions are 60% RH maximum, 18°C minimum.
FUME DATA
17 11 1.5 4 4 <1 5 1.2
www.metrode.com DS C-12-SUPERCORE 16.8.2 / 16.8.2P | Rev. 01-03/16 239

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168

For 316/316H materials used at elevated temperatures Austenite with delta ferrite typically controlled in
the range 2-8FN.
ASTM BS UNS
316/316H 316S51 S31609 WELDING GUIDELINES
CF10M 316S52 Preheat not required, maximum interpass
316S53 temperature 250°C. PWHT not required.

316C16
316C71
APPLICATIONS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
These consumables are designed for welding There is a Metrode Technical Profile available
316/316H austenitic stainless steels operating at high covering 3XXH consumables and their use in
temperatures (500-800°C) under long term creep refinery cat crackers.
conditions. The 17.8.2.RCF MMA electrode is a modified
316H weld metal of lean composition to resist thermal
embrittlement. RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
The consumables can also be used for welding 321/321H See also the consumables in the related alloy
and 347/347H grades in high temperature structural groups of 308H (C-10), 347H (C-11) and 16.8.2 (C-12).
service. This is particularly important in thick
highly restrained weldments, since the possibility of
premature service failure by intergranular HAZ cracking PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
is reduced by using more ductile weld metal rather Process Product Specification
than 347H.
17.8.2.RCF BS 17.8.2.R
Used for welding steam piping, superheater headers,
furnace parts, some gas and steam engine turbine MMA Ultramet 316H AWS E316H-16
components, in the petro-chemical industry, in fossil Ultramet B316H AWS E316H-15
and nuclear fuelled power stations. TIG/MIG/SAW 316S96 AWS ER316H
SS300 BS EN SA AF2 AC
SAW flux
SSB BS EN SA AF2 DC

17.8.2.RCF
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a rutile (low silica) flux on high purity 304L core wire, giving a tightly controlled level of silicon and residual
elements to minimise formation of intermetallic phases (sigma, chi) during service.
Designed primarily for downhand and HV welding although for structural applications it is usable positionally.

AWS A5.4M (E16.8.2-16) Nearest classification QW432 F-No 5
QW442 A-No 8


Min. 0.06 0.5 -- -- -- 16.5 8.0 1.5 -- 3
Max. 0.10 2.5 0.50 0.030 0.040 18.5 9.5 2.5 0.50 8
Typical 0.08 1.6 0.25 0.008 0.02 17 8.5 2 <0.1 5

As-welded
Elongation (%) 4d -- > 30 -- -- --
5d 25 > 30 28 44 53
Reduction of area (%) -- > 45 55 61 75
Impact energy -100°C -- > 50 -- -- --
Hardness HV -- 200 -- -- --

min. A 60 75 100
max. A 90 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 12.6 14.4 14.7
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 5 0.7 5 0.1 < 0.2 16 1
www.metrode.com DS C-13-17.8.2.RCF | Rev. 01-03/16 241

ULTRAMET 316H
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Rutile coated electrode made on high purity 304 core wire, previously called Metrode E316H-16. The higher alloy content
compared to 17.8.2.RCF does increase the risk of intermetallic formation during service at elevated temperatures (500-800°C).

AWS A5.4M E316H-16 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 19 12 2 R 3 2 QW442 A-No 8


Min. 0.04 0.5 -- -- -- 17.0 11.0 2.0 -- 3
Max. 0.08 2.0 0.90 0.025 0.030 20.0 13.0 3.0 0.5 8
Typical 0.05 1 0.6 0.01 0.02 18 12 2.2 0.1 5

As-welded
Elongation (%) 4d 30 35 -- -- --
5d 25 33 32 43 54
Impact energy +20°C -- 70 -- -- --
Hardness HV -- 210 -- -- --
TYPICAL OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC +VE. OR AC (OCV: 50V MIN)

min. A 60 75 100
max. A 90 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 11.4 13.5 13.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 5 0.7 5 0.1 < 0.2 16 1
242 www.metrode.com DS C-13-ULTRAMET 316H | Rev. 02-08/16

ULTRAMET B316H
BASIC PIPE WELDING MMA ELECTRODE FOR 316H STAINLESS STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – designed and manufactured to give high moisture resistance using a basic flux system and high purity 304L core
wire. Ultramet B316H is particularly suited to the most demanding vertical and overhead welding applications including fixed
pipework in the ASME 5G/6G position. Under site conditions it is tolerant to adverse wind and drafts. The higher alloy content
compared to 17.8.2.RCF does increase the risk of intermetallic formation during service at elevated temperatures (500-800°C).

AWS A5.4M E316H-15 QW432 F-No --
BS EN ISO 3581 E 19 12 2 B 4 2 QW442 A-No 8


Min. 0.04 0.5 -- -- -- 17.0 11.0 2.0 -- 3
Max. 0.08 2.0 0.90 0.025 0.030 20.0 13.0 3.0 0.5 8
Typical 0.05 1.0 0.3 0.01 0.02 18 12 2.2 0.1 5
As-welded
Elongation (%) 4d 30 35 29 44 49
5d 25 33 26 43 48
Impact energy +20°C -- 100 -- -- --
Hardness HV -- 210 -- -- --
min. A 60 75
max. A 90 120
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350
kg/carton 12.0 13.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 5 0.7 5 0.1 < 0.2 16 1
www.metrode.com DS C-13-ULTRAMET B316H | Rev. 01-03/16 243

316S96
SOLID WIRE FOR TIG, MIG AND SAW OF 316H STAINLESS STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for TIG, MIG and SAW which can not only be used in conjunction with E316H-16, but also with 17.8.2.RCF and other 300H
consumables.

AWS A5.9M ER316H QW432 F-No --
BS EN ISO 14343-A 19 12 3 H QW442 A-No 8
BS EN ISO 14343-B SS316H

Min. 0.04 1.0 0.30 -- -- 18.0 11.0 2.0 -- 3

Max. 0.08 2.5 0.65 0.02 0.025 20.0 14.0 3.0 0.3 8
Typical 0.05 1.8 0.5 0.01 0.02 19 13 2.2 0.15 4

As welded Typical

TIG Argon 100A, DC- 2.4 12V
MIG Ar + 2%O2/CO2 220A, DC+ 1.2 26V
PACKAGING DATA
MIG 15 kg reel - -
TIG - 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube
SAW - - 25kg spool
FUME DATA
30 12 15 11 1.5 < 0.5 3.3

SS300 and SSB FLUXES
SUB-ARC FLUX
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SS300 and SSB are agglomerated basic fluxes producing weld deposits with minimal Si pick-up and low Mn and Cr losses. SS300
has a BI of ~1.6 and SSB has a BI of ~2.2.

SS300 flux SSB flux QW432 F-No --
BS EN ISO 14174 SA AF2 AC SA AF2 DC QW442 A-No --

wire (316S96) 0.05 1.8 0.5 0.01 0.02 19 13 2.2 0.15
Deposit (with SS300/SSB flux) 0.04 1.6 0.6 0.01 0.02 18 13 2.2 0.15
ALL-WELD MECHANICAL PROPERTIES with 316S96

Typical PWHT 690-720°C/1-2h typical
2.4 250-450A, 28-32V 350A, 30V 20-25mm
PACKAGING DATA
Metrode SS300 Flux is supplied in sealed moisture resistant 25kg metal drums and SSB Flux in 20kg metal drums. Preferred storage
conditions of opened drums: <60%RH, >18°C. If the flux has become damp or has been stored or has been stored for a long period,
it should be redried in the range 250-400°C/1-3h
www.metrode.com DS C-13-SS300SSB | Rev. 01-03/16 245

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
OXIDATION RESISTANT 253MA ALLOY

ALLOY TYPE
Iron based 22%Cr-10%Ni alloy with controlled MICROSTRUCTURE
additions of C, Si, N and rare earths (RE), predominantly Austenite with controlled ferrite of about 5FN.
cerium, with excellent oxidation resistance.
wrought WELDING GUIDELINES
ASTM - ASME S30815
No preheat required, it is desirable to keep
BS EN 10095 1.4818 X6CrNiSiNCe 19-10

interpass below 150°C.
1.4828 X15CrNiSi 20-12
1.4835 (X9CrNiSiNCe 21-11-2).
DIN 1.4893 (X8CrNiSiN 21 11).
1.4891 (X4CrNiSiN 18 10)
Proprietary Avesta 253MA
There are other consumables that also provide
Also suitable for similar material:
ASTM UNS S30415
excellent oxidation resistance but they are
Avesta 153MA generally more highly alloyed than the 253MA
alloy.
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
APPLICATIONS Process Product Specification
Designed to match equivalent alloys with good hot MMA Supermet 253MA --
strength coupled with excellent resistance to oxidation
up to about 1100°C. Resistance to sulphidation under
oxidising conditions is superior to many higher nickel
heat-resistant alloys. Resistance to nitriding and
carburisation is satisfactory except under reducing
conditions where higher nickel alloys are superior.
Also satisfactory for dissimilar combinations of

materials with related levels of alloying. However,
control of hot cracking in this high silicon weld metal
is dependent on some ferrite being present during
solidification. Caution is therefore required when
considering dilution by dissimilar materials which could
promote fully austenitic solidification, such as type 310
and other high nickel alloys. Combinations with alloys
stabilised with Ti and especially Nb should be avoided,
due to the possibility of embrittlement by Si-rich
eutectics with these elements.
Applications include furnaces and furnace parts, high

temperature flues, exhaust and heat recuperator
systems, combustion nozzles.

SUPERMET 253MA
RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE FOR MATCHING ALLOY 253MA
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
All-positional MMA electrode with an acid rutile flux system on alloyed core wire.
Controlled Si and rare earth (RE) additions (mainly cerium) provide excellent oxidation resistance.

There are no applicable national standards QW432 F-No --
QW442 A-No 8

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo N Cu Ce * FN
Min. 0.04 -- 1.4 -- -- 21.0 9.0 -- 0.14 -- -- 3
Max. 0.10 1.0 2.0 0.020 0.035 23.0 11.0 0.50 0.20 0.50 trace 10
Typical 0.06 0.8 1.5 0.01 0.02 22 10.3 0.1 0.16 0.1 0.005 5
* Cerium is present but actual value not reported on test certificate.

As-welded Typical
5d 38

min. A 50 75 100
max. A 75 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 11.4 13.5 14.4
STORAGE
FUME DATA
9 6 1 7 <0.2 17 0.7
www.metrode.com DS C-20-SUPERMET 253MA | Rev. 01-03/16 247

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
CONTROLLED FERRITE 309 CONSUMABLES

ALLOY TYPE
MICROSTRUCTURE
23%Cr-12%Ni (309) alloy with a controlled ferrite and
carbon content to match similar heat resistant alloys. Austenite with up to 8% ferrite and some carbides.
wrought cast WELDING GUIDELINES
A351 Grades
ASTM/UNS S30900 (309) CH8, CH10, CH20. Preheat not required for most applications.
S30908 (309S)
S30909 (309H) .
DIN 1.4829 1.4832
(X12CrNi 22 12) (G-X25CrNiSi20 14)
BS 309S24 309C30 RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
EN 1.4833 (X12CrNi23-12) The 309L consumables (data sheet B-50) typically
used for dissimilar joints are related but are not
used for the same high temperature applications.
APPLICATIONS PRODUCTS AVAILABLE

These consumables deposit 309 type weld metal with Process Product Specification
a controlled carbon of about 0.08% and low ferrite
content. These controls are designed to increase MMA Thermet 309CF AWS E309H-16
the high temperature strength and microstructural TIG/MIG 309S94 AWS ER309
stability for service applications above 400°C. The
widely used 309L dissimilar weld metal has lower hot
strength and is more prone to embrittlement during
long term high temperature service for which it is not
intended.
The main application for this electrode is for welding

steels of similar composition although some high
temperature steels of dissimilar composition, such as
ferritic CrAl and CrSiAl alloys are applicable. It is also
a candidate for welding ‘utility ferritic’ stainless steels
for elevated temperature service.
309 steels have useful oxidation resistance up to about
1000°C and the lower nickel content gives better
sulphidation resistance than 310 types.
They are normally used in furnace or flue-gas systems

and ducting where the structural creep requirements
are modest.

THERMET 309CF
RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE WITH CONTROLLED CARBON AND FERRITE CONTENT
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a rutile flux coating on high purity 304L core wire.

AWS A5.4M E309H-16 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 (E 22 12 R 3 2) Cr 20.0-23.0% QW442 A-No 8


min. 0.06 0.5 0.2 -- -- 22.0 12.0 -- -- 2
max. 0.15 2.0 0.8 0.025 0.030 24.0 14.0 0.5 0.50 8
Typical 0.08 1.5 0.3 0.01 0.02 22.7 12.8 0.1 0.1 5

5d 25 31

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 350
kg/carton 13.5 15.0 15.0 15.9
STORAGE
FUME DATA
9 6 7 1 <0.2 17 0.7
www.metrode.com DS C-21-THERMET 309CF | Rev. 01-03/16 249

309S94
SOLID WIRE WITH CONTROLLED CARBON AND FERRITE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for TIG and MIG welding

BS EN ISO 14343-A 22 12 H QW442 A-No 8
UNS S30980

Min. 0.04 1.0 0.30 -- -- 23.0 12.0 -- -- 3
Max. 0.12 2.5 0.65 0.02 0.030 24.0 14.0 0.3 0.3 12
Typical 0.07 1.7 0.5 0.01 0.02 23.5 13 0.1 0.1 6

5d 39

MIG Ar+2%O2 ** DC+ 1.2 260A, 26V
** Proprietary Ar, and Ar-He mixtures with <3%CO2 are also suitable.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.4
FUME DATA
32 12 20 11 <0.5 <0.5 2.5

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
SUPER 304H STAINLESS STEELS

High carbon 304 alloy with copper, niobium and In the as-welded condition the multi-pass weld
nitrogen additions to provide improved creep metal microstructure consists of austenite
performance. matrix with precipitates and carbo-nitrides.
During service creep strength is enhanced by the
precipitation of copper rich precipitates, Nb carbo-
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED nitride and NbCrN.

EN 10216-5
1.4907 / X10CrNiCuNb 18 9 3. WELDING GUIDELINES
ASTM A213 For most applications no preheat or PWHT is
UNS S30432.
required. Maximum interpass temperature 150°C
Grade 18Cr-9Ni-3Cu-Cb-N in ASME Code Case 2328-1 2003.
and heat input 1.5kJ/mm although these controls
VdTÜV material data sheet 550 (2003).
may need to be tightened depending on tube
dimensions.
Super 304H (Sumitomo)
DMV 304HCu (Salzgitter Mannesmann Stainless Tubes)

APPLICATIONS This wire can also be used to weld TP347HFG
This alloy was designed for use as superheater and high temperature stainless steel (Nippon Steel &
reheater boiler tube in the latest generation of Ultra Sumitomo Metal).
Super Critical (USC) coal fired power plant.
The alloy is designed to cope with the latest power

plant designs were steam temperatures can be in PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
the region of 600°C; although ASME Code Case 2328-1 Process Product Specification
specifies allowable stresses up to 815°C. TIG/MIG MT304H -

MT304H
SOLID WIRE FOR TIG WELDING OF SUPERCORE 304H
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Straight lengths and spooled wire for manual and automatic TIG welding.

There are no national specifications for this wire. QW432 F-No --
QW442 A-No --

min. 0.07 2.5 -- -- -- 17.0 14.5 0.7 2.5 0.5 0.15

max. 0.13 4.0 0.40 0.015 0.015 20.0 18.0 1.2 3.5 1.0 0.25
Typical 0.1 3.2 0.2 0.005 0.005 18 16 0.9 2.8 0.7 0.2

TIG TIG High Temperature
As-welded
Room Temperature 550°C 650°C 750°C
Elongation (%) 4d 30 25 18 7
5d 28 -- -- --
Impact ISO -V(J) +20°C 90 -- -- --
-50°C 80 -- -- --
Hardness cap/mid (HV) 200/240 -- -- --

PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.9 1.0 2.0 2.4
Spooled 0.7/5/12.5kg spools (To order) 0.7/5/12.5kg spools (To order) -- --
FUME DATA
24 18 16 13 1 3 2.8
252 www.metrode.com DS C-25-MT304H | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168

ALLOY TYPE
MICROSTRUCTURE
25%Cr-20%Ni (310) stainless steel. Fully austenitic.
Typical magnetic permeability <1.01.
wrought cast
ASTM/UNS 310 / S31000 CK20 WELDING GUIDELINES
310S / S31008 No preheat required. Preferably keep interpass
temperature below 150°C and heat input below

DIN 1.4841, 1.4842, 1.4845 1.4840
BS 310S24, 310S31 310C45 1.5kJ/mm; this is particularly important for high
Proprietary Immaculate 5 (Firth Vickers) heat input processes eg. SAW.
Sirius 3 (CLI)
15RE10 (Sandvik)

These standard 310 alloy should not be confused
APPLICATIONS with 0.4% carbon 310H cast alloys of the HK40
These consumables are used primarily for welding type (see data sheet C-31), or the very low carbon
similar wrought or cast 25%Cr-20%Ni (310) parent 310L alloys which are used in severely corrosive
alloys with up to 0.25% carbon. Parent metal and weld conditions (see data sheet B-45).
metal are fully austenitic, unlike the other common
300 series stainless steels. For maximum resistance
to solidification cracking and microfissuring, the MMA
weld metal manganese range is raised to 2-5% in
accordance with European practice. PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
The high alloy content of type 310 gives useful
25.20 Super R (E310-16)
oxidation resistance up to peak temperatures of about MMA
1200°C for heat shields, furnace parts and ducting. Ultramet B310Mn (E310-15)
TIG/MIG/SAW 310S94 AWS ER310
These consumables can also be used for mixed welding
and dissimilar joints including those where PWHT is
applied, but it should be noted that the relatively high
thermal expansion coefficient may promote thermal
fatigue in transition joints which are subject to thermal
cycling. In such cases, nickel base consumables are
usually preferred (eg. D-10, D-11).
Other uses include buffer layers and for surfacing.

The fully austenitic weld metal can be useful for
specialised applications requiring low magnetic
permeability (typically <1.01). 310 weld metals are
also inherently tough down to –196°C and therefore
suitable for cryogenic installations involving any of the
standard 300 series austenitic stainless steels.

25.20 SUPER R
RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE FOR 310 STAINLESS STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with low silica rutile flux on high purity 310 core wire.
Low silicon and high manganese levels are desirable to ensure freedom from microfissuring.

AWS A5.4M (E310-16) AWS specification has Mn range of 1.0-2.5%. QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 25 20 R 3 2 (This is nearest because the electrode
QW442 A-No 9

min. 0.08 2.0 -- -- -- 25.0 20.0 -- --
max. 0.15 5.0 0.70 0.025 0.030 27.0 22.0 0.50 0.50
Typical 0.12 3.5 0.4 0.008 0.02 26 21 0.2 0.1

5d 25 35
- 196°C -- 45

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 12.0 14.7 14.7 20.1
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
9 10 2 7.5 <0.2 18 0.6
254 www.metrode.com DS C-30-25.20 SUPER R | Rev. 01-03/16

ULTRAMET B310Mn
ALL-POSITIONAL BASIC MMA ELECTRODE FOR 310 STAINLESS STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with basic carbonate-fluoride flux on high purity 310 core wire.
Low silicon and high manganese levels are desirable to ensure freedom from microfissuring.
The electrode is particularly suited to positional welding, including fixed pipework in the ASME 5G/6G positions.

AWS A5.4M (E310-15) AWS specification has Mn range of 1.0-2.5%. QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 25 20 B 4 2 (This is nearest because the electrode
QW442 A-No 9


Min. 0.08 2.0 -- -- -- 25.0 20.0 -- --
Max. 0.15 5.0 0.70 0.025 0.030 27.0 22.0 0.50 0.50
Typical 0.1 3.8 0.4 0.008 0.018 26 21 0.2 0.1
5d 25 34
- 196°C -- 75

min. A 60 75 100
max. A 90 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 13.5
STORAGE
FUME DATA
9 10 2 7.5 <0.2 18 0.6
www.metrode.com DS C-30-ULTRAMET B310Mn | Rev. 01-03/16 255

310S94
SOLID WIRES FOR TIG, MIG AND SAW OF 310 STAINLESS STEEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

BS EN ISO 14343-A 25 20 QW442 A-No 9
UNS S31080

min. 0.08 1.0 0.30 -- -- 25.0 20.0 -- --

max. 0.15 2.5 0.65 0.02 0.030 27.0 22.0 0.3 0.3
Typical 0.11 1.8 0.4 0.005 0.02 26 21 0.1 0.1

Typical values as welded MIG Ar+2%O2
Impact ISO-V(J) -196°C 70
Hardness cap/mid (HV) 185

MIG Ar/2%O2 ** DC+ 1.2 260A, 29V
SAW*** SS300 or SSB flux DC+ 2.4 325A, 30V
** Proprietary Ar and Ar-He mixtures with <3%CO2 also suitable.
*** Heat input should be restricted with SAW to minimise the risk of solidification cracking.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.4 3.2
TIG -- -- 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube
SAW -- -- 25kg spool 25kg spool --
FUME DATA
MIG fume composition (wt %) (TIG & SAW fume negligible)
30 13 22 16 <0.5 <0.5 2.3

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
310H ELECTRODE TO MATCH HK40

0.4%C-25%Cr-20%Ni (310H) austenitic cast alloy for In the as-welded condition the weld metal
heat resisting service.. microstructure consists of austenite with eutectic
and secondary carbides.
ASTM/UNS
A351, A608 Grade HK40
WELDING GUIDELINES

DIN Generally no preheat or PWHT are required.
1.4846 (X40CrNi 25 21)
1.4848 (G-X40CrNiSi 25 20)
BS
3100 Grade 310C40
1504 Grade 310C40
Proprietary There are two other 310 alloy groups: the 310L (data
H20 (Doncasters Paralloy) sheet B-45) which is used for corrosion resistant
Thermalloy 47 (Duraloy) applications not high temperature service, and
Lloyds T47 (LBA) the standard 310 alloys (data sheet C-30) which are
HR6 (Cronite) used for the standard (0.1 %C) base materials.
APPLICATIONS
Thermet 310H is designed to weld HK40 which is one
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
of the standard materials for centrifugally cast tubes
operating at around 1000°C. Process Product Specification
MMA Thermet 310H AWS E310H-15
These alloys are used in reformer and steam cracker
coils in chemical and petrochemical plants. Also for
components such as billet skids, calinating tubes, kiln
nose segments, conveyor rolls, and furnace structural
items in the cement, ceramic and steel industries.

THERMET 310H
BASIC ALL-POSITIONAL MMA ELECTRODE FOR HK40 TYPE CASTINGS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with basic flux coating made on 310 core wire to give low residual levels.
The electrode is optimised for DC+ welding in all positions including fixed pipework in ASME 5G/6G positions.
Moisture resistant coating giving sound porosity free deposits.

AWS A5.4M E310H-15 QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 25 20 H B 4 2 QW442 A-No --


min. 0.35 1.0 -- -- -- 25.0 20.0 -- --
max. 0.45 2.0 0.70 0.025 0.030 28.0 22.0 0.50 0.50
Typical 0.41 1.7 0.5 0.01 0.02 26 21 0.1 0.03

5d 10 17
These alloys are designed for operation at elevated temperatures and modest ambient temperature elongations in the range
10-20% are normal.

min. A 60 75 100
max. A 90 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 11.4 13.5 14.4
STORAGE
FUME DATA
12 6 2 8.5 <0.2 <0.2 16 0.6
258 www.metrode.com DS C-31-THERMET 310H | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
CONSUMABLES TO MATCH
CAST & WROUGHT ALLOY 800
ALLOY TYPE
MICROSTRUCTURE
Austenitic heat resisting consumables to match alloy 800.
As-welded weld metal microstructure consists of
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED austenite with cellular NbC-rich network.
ASTM
A351 CT15C
BS WELDING GUIDELINES

NA15, NA15H No preheat, interpass <150°C preferred. Usually
BS EN & DIN welds are not heat treated however in elevated
temperature service the HAZ of welds in alloys
1.4850, 1.4859, 1.4876
800/800H/800HT with progressively increasing
UNS levels of Ti+Al may be susceptible to stress-
N08800, N08810, N08811 relaxation cracking. For pressure boundary welds
Proprietary alloys include: designed for >538°C, ASME VIII UNF-56 requires
cast: wrought: PWHT >885°C/1h + 1h/25mm (eg. 900°C/3h), or
Paralloy CR32W. Incoloy 800, 800H, 800HT solution annealing.
Manaurite 900 (Manoir). (Special Metals). API 560 currently does not require PWHT but some
Thermalloy T52 (Lloyds) Sanicro 31 (Sandvik). specifiers may require it for particular operating
Vicro 8 (Firth Vickers). RA330 (Rolled Alloys).
conditions.
MORE 21 (Duraloy). Nicrofer 3220 (VDM).
Centralloy 4859 (Centracero).
E2032Nb (Engemasa).
APPLICATIONS
The consumables are designed to deposit weld metal ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
with composition and properties closely matching Marshall A.W. & Farrar J.C.M. ‘Matching consumables
type 800 alloys in cast and wrought forms. The weld for type 800 alloys’, Stainless Steel World, Sept
metals are based on the composition of castings, with 1999, pp 56-60.
controlled carbon and niobium for optimum corrosion
resistance and creep performance. Most wrought
materials have Ti and Al instead of Nb. Weld metal Mn
and Si levels are modified to give high resistance to RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
hot cracking in highly restrained welds. For optimum The nickel base alloys AB (data sheet D-11), 625
resistance to ageing embrittlement, the composition (data sheet D-20) and 617 (data sheet D-40) are
will generally meet the Chiyoda parameter: sometimes used as alternatives for the same base
P ≤ 9 where P = (7C + 5Si + 8Nb – 3Mn). materials.
These alloys are used for their resistance to corrosion,

thermal fatigue and shock at temperatures up to
about 1000°C, for the fabrication of muffles and PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
radiant tubes, heat treatment trays and baskets, Process Product Specification
reformer furnace outlet manifolds and ethylene plant MMA Thermet 800Nb None
transfer lines, in the furnace, petrochemical and
nuclear engineering industries. TIG/MIG 21.33.MnNb None
These consumables are used as alternatives to

various nickel base consumables up to 1000°C, with
the added benefit of expansion coefficient and
sulphidation resistance similar to parent material.

THERMET 800Nb
BASIC MMA ELECTRODE TO MATCH ALLOY 800
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – Basic moisture resistant coated electrode made on high alloy, high purity core wire.

QW442 A-No --


min. 0.06 1.6 -- -- -- 19.0 30.0 -- 0.8 --
max. 0.12 4.5 0.6 0.02 0.03 23.0 35.0 0.5 1.5 0.5
Typical 0.1 2.5 0.3 0.007 0.015 21 32 0.4 1.3 0.15

As welded Min. * Typical
Elongation (%) 4d -- > 33
5d 25 > 32
Impact ISO-V(J) + 20°C -- > 55
* Minimum tensile properties based on wrought alloy 800H.

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 320 320 450
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 13.5 18.0
STORAGE
FUME DATA
4 6 6 2 < 0.2 < 0.2 18 0.8
260 www.metrode.com DS C-40-THERMET 800Nb | Rev. 01-03/16

21.33.MnNb
SOLID TIG/MIG WIRES FOR 800H AND SIMILAR HEAT RESISTING ALLOYS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire – This is a high Mn, 21%Cr-33%Ni-1%Nb, micro-alloyed wire for TIG/MIG welding of 800 type alloys.

QW442 A-No --

C* Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Nb Cu Al Ti
min. 0.10 3.5 -- -- -- 19.0 30.0 -- 0.8 -- -- --

max. 0.20 5.0 0.70 0.015 0.025 23.0 35.0 0.50 1.5 0.5 0.35 0.30
Typical 0.15 4.3 0.5 0.008 0.012 21 33 0.3 1 0.1 0.1 0.15
* Weld deposit carbon is typically a little lower than wire analysis.

As welded Min. * Typical, TIG
5d -- 25

MIG Ar/2%O2 ** DC+ 1.2 220A, 29V
** Proprietary Ar and Ar-He mixtures with <3%CO2 also suitable.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG -- To order To order 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube
MIG 12.5kg spool -- -- -- --
FUME DATA
40 15 18 20 <1 2.5
www.metrode.com DS C-40-21.33.MnNb | Rev. 01-03/16 261

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
HIGH CARBON 18/37 HEAT RESISTING

AUSTENITIC ALLOY
0.45%C-17%Cr-38%Ni high carbon austenitic heat In the as-welded condition the weld metal
resisting steel often called 18/37 or 37/18 alloy. microstructure consists of austenite with eutectic
and secondary carbides. Although fully austenitic
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED the alloy is slightly magnetic with an apparent
ASTM / ASME BS DIN ferrite of up to 5FN.
A297 HT & HU 3100 Gr 330C11 1.4865
A351 HT30 3100 Gr 331C40

4534 Gr 8 & 9
WELDING GUIDELINES
Proprietary
Paralloy H38, H40, H33, H35 (Doncasters Paralloy)
Preheat is not generally required.
Cronite HR5, HR17, HR31 (Cronite)
Lloyds T50 (LBA)
Thermalloy T50, T58 (Duraloy) RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
RA330-HC (Rolled Alloys)
The AB type nickel base alloys are often used
Incoloy DS & 330 (Special Metals) (wrought)
to weld the wrought versions of this alloy (data
sheet D-11).
APPLICATIONS
Thermet R17.18H is designed to match fully austenitic There is no matching solid wire for this alloy.
high alloy heat resisting steels often called 17/38 or
38/17. Alloys of this type are produced as castings with
about 0.4%C, or in wrought form with carbon of about
0.08%. Thermet R17.38H matches the composition PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
of castings but experience has also shown it to be Process Product Specification
compatible with the wrought alloys, although higher
weld metal ductility will be obtained with a nickel base MMA Thermet R17.38H (E330H-16)
type (data sheet D-11). BS 15.35.H.R
The high nickel content and low thermal expansion

of the alloys give good resistance to thermal shock.
The alloy is also highly resistant to carburisation and
oxidation but is not suitable for use in high sulphur
bearing atmospheres.
These alloys retain good mechanical strength up to

1050-1100°C and are used for heat treatment trays
and containers, retorts furnace rollers, moulds, hearth
plates, radiant tubes, and furnace fittings and headers
in the heat treatment industries and high temperature
process plants.

THERMET R17.38H
BASIC MMA ELECTRODE TO MATCH HIGH CARBON 18/37 HEAT RESISTING ALLOYS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a basic-rutile flux covering on a high alloy core wire.
Moisture resistant coating giving sound, porosity-free deposits. Sizes above 3.2mm are not recommended for positional welding.

Thermet R17.38H has higher QW432 F-No 5
AWS A5.4M (E330H-16) C, Cr & Ni than AWS specification.
(This is nearest because the electrode
QW442 A-No --

Min. 0.35 1.0 0.3 -- -- 17.0 35.0 --
Max. 0.60 2.0 1.0 0.030 0.040 20.0 40.0 0.5
Typical 0.45 1.5 0.5 0.01 0.015 18.5 38 0.4

4d 10 16
Elongation (%)
5d 5 14
These alloys are designed for operation at elevated temperatures and modest ambient temperature elongations in the range
10-20% are normal.

min. A 60 75 100
max. A 90 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 12.6 15.6 15.6
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
4 7 4 5 <0.1 <0.2 16 1
www.metrode.com DS C-41-THERMET R17.38H | Rev. 01-03/16 263

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
HP10CB AUSTENITIC CAST ALLOYS

0.1%C-25%Cr-35%Ni-0.6%Nb (HP10Cb) austenitic cast In the as-welded condition the weld metal
alloy for heat resisting service. microstructure consists of austenite with some
grain boundary carbides.
Similar cast alloys:

Alloy HP10Cb (ACI-ASTM terminology)
WELDING GUIDELINES
Paralloy CR39W (Doncasters Paralloy) Generally no preheat or PWHT are required;
Lloyds T57 (LBA) interpass temperatures below 150°C are
Centralloy H101 (Centracero) recommended.

This electrode is specially designed to deposit weld There is no directly equivalent solid wire, the
metal which matches the composition of similar nearest available is Metrode 21.33.Nb/21.33.Mn
castings. This alloy was developed from 800 type (see data sheet C-40).
alloys with increased chromium and nickel contents
and exhibits improved carburisation and oxidation
resistance. It is used at temperatures up to 1100°C and
is resistant to thermal shock and fatigue.
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
Applications include the welding of centrifugally cast Process Product Specification
pyrolysis coils, reformer tubes, return bends and tees
MMA Thermet 25.35.Nb --
for the petrochemical industry.

THERMET 25.35.Nb
BASIC ALL-POSITIONAL MMA ELECTRODE FOR ‘HP10CB’ TYPE CASTINGS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Recovery MMA electrode with basic flux coating made on nearly matching core wire. The electrode is optimised for DC+ welding
in all positions including fixed pipework in ASME 5G/6G positions. Moisture resistant coating giving sound porosity-free deposits.

There are no relevant national standards. QW432 F-No --
QW442 A-No --


C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Nb Cu Pb Sn
Min. 0.08 2.5 0.2 -- -- 24.0 34.0 -- 0.50 -- -- --
Max. 0.14 4.0 1.0 0.02 0.03 28.0 39.0 0.5 1.50 0.15 0.01 0.01
Typical 0.12 3.5 0.5 0.01 0.01 26 36 0.2 0.8 0.05 <0.001 0.005

4d 20 34
Elongation (%)
5d 20 32

min. A 60 75 100
max. A 90 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 320 350
kg/carton 10.5 12.0 12.0
STORAGE
FUME DATA
4 6 2 7 <0.1 <0.2 18 0.7
www.metrode.com DS C-45-THERMET 25.35.Nb | Rev. 01-03/16 265

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
HP40Nb CAST ALLOYS

Consumables to match 0.4%C-25%Cr-35%Ni-Nb heat In the as-welded condition the weld metal consists
resistant cast alloys. of austenite with eutectic and secondary carbide.
MATCHING ALLOYS
ASTM-ASME DIN WELDING GUIDELINES
A297 ‘HP40Cb’ 1.4852 (G-X40NiCrNb 35 25)
Generally preheat is not required.

1.4853 (wrought)
Proprietary alloys
Paralloy H39W (Doncasters Paralloy)
Lloyds T64 (LBA)
MORE 10 & 10-MA (Duraloy) RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
Thermalloy 64 (Duraloy) There are a number of related high carbon Cr-
Manaurite 36X & 36XM (Manoir)
Ni alloys which are used in the same type of
Pyrotherm G25/35Nb & NbTZ (Pose Marre)
applications, see other alloys in the Hot Zone.
Centralloy 4852 & 4852 Micro (Schmidt + Clemens - Centracero)
E2535Nb & E2535Nb-MA (Engemasa)
There is also a lower carbon version of the 25%Cr-
35%Ni alloy (data sheet C-40) which provides
Nb-FREE ALLOYS
better thermal shock and fatigue, with some
ASTM-ASME DIN
A297 HP or HP40 1.4857 (G-X40NiCrSi 35 25) reduction in creep strength.
1.4853 (wrought)
Proprietary alloys
Paralloy H39 (Doncasters Paralloy)
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
Lloyds T63 (LBA)
HR33 (Cronite) Process Product Specification
MMA Thermet HP40Nb --
Also suitable for high carbon 18%Cr-37%Ni-Nb alloys
eg. DIN 1.4849. TIG/MIG 25.35.4CNb --
APPLICATIONS
These consumables are designed to match heat
resistant cast alloys with 0.4%C-25%Cr-35%Ni-Nb,
including those micro-alloyed with Ti to increase
creep resistance.
They are also suitable for the Nb free alloys and leaner
high carbon Cr-Ni alloys such as HK40, HT40 and IN519
where overmatching weld metal will normally be
acceptable.
Alloy HP40Nb is not prone to sigma phase

embrittlement and the presence of eutectic and
secondary carbides provide excellent hot strength and
creep resistance in the typical service temperature
range 900-1100°C. High levels of Cr and Ni provide
good resistance to oxidation and carburisation.
The principal applications are pyrolysis coils and
reformer tubes for ethylene production in the
petrochemical industry.

THERMET HP40Nb
BASIC MMA ELECTRODE MATCHING HP40NB ALLOYS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Basic moisture resistant MMA electrode made on high purity alloy core wire, giving high resistance to microfissuring and porosity
in large multi-run deposits.
No relevant national specifications. QW432 F-No --
QW442 A-No --

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Nb Ti

min. 0.35 0.5 0.2 -- -- 23.0 32.0 -- 0.75 0.02
max. 0.50 2.0 1.3 0.030 0.040 27.0 36.0 0.5 1.50 0.20
Typical 0.43 1.7 0.9 0.010 0.010 25 35 0.1 1.1 0.08
* Does not always comply to obsolete classification BS2926: 25.3.5H.Nb.B which requires Si<1.0%. Please contact technical department for supply
according to BSEN 2926: 25.3.5H.Nb.B.
Tensile strength (MPa) 600 (450) 740
0.2% proof strength (MPa) -- (250) 560
Elongation (%) 4d -- (5) 15
5d -- 15
* Minimum tensile strength of 600MPa is from BS2926; the values in brackets are minimum values for base material static castings.
Room temperature elongation has little significance for weld metal designed for high temperature service and creep resistance.
Values down to 4.5% (on 4d) are allowed in ASTM HP40 castings and the ductility of multipass welds may approach this value due to
carbide precipitation in successive runs.
STRESS RUPTURE/CREEP DATA:
Temperature Stress Life Elongation
°C °F MPa ksi Hours %
871 1600 48.2 7 1431 6
927 1700 27.6 4 2398 3
982 1800 17.3 2.5 2414 3
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 320 320 450
kg/carton 11.1 12.3 12.0 12.3
STORAGE
FUME DATA
4 6 7 7 < 0.5 < 0.1 < 0.1 18 0.7
www.metrode.com DS C-50-THERMET HP40Nb | Rev. 01-03/16 267

25.35.4CNb
SOLID TIG AND MIG WIRES FOR MATCHING HP40NB ALLOYS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for TIG, auto-TIG and MIG welding.

QW442 A-No --

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Nb Ti Zr Cu Sn Pb
min. 0.40 1.0 0.5 -- -- 23.0 32.0 -- 0.75 0.05 0.01 -- -- --

max. 0.50 2.5 1.6 0.02 0.02 27.0 36.0 0.50 1.50 0.25 0.15 0.5 -- --
Typical 0.43 1.7 1.1 0.005 0.01 26 35 <0.3 1.1 0.1 0.03 0.1 <0.01 <0.01

As welded Min. * Typical, TIG
4d 5 12
Elongation (%)
5d -- 13
Room temperature elongation has little significance for weld metal designed for high temperature service and creep resistance.
Values down to 4.5% (on 4d) are allowed in ASTM HP40 castings and the ductility of multipass welds may approach this value due to
carbide precipitation in successive runs.

PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG -- 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube
Spooled wire normally 12.5kg reel -- -- -- --
used for automatic TIG
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Cr3 Mo Cu OES (mg/m3)
35 13 26 < 0.5 < 0.5 2
268 www.metrode.com DS C-50-25.35.4CNb | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
HIGH CARBON 35Cr-45Ni-1Nb ALLOYS

High carbon 35Cr-45Ni-1Nb to match heat-resisting In the as-welded condition the multi-pass weld
castings, which are often micro-alloyed with Ti and Zr. metal microstructure consists of austenite with
primary eutectic and secondary precipitated
carbides.

Paralloy H46M (Doncasters Paralloy) WELDING GUIDELINES
Manaurite XT/XTM (Manoir Industries)
For the thicker section materials a preheat may
Centralloy ET45 Micro (Schmidt + Clemens-Centracero)
prove beneficial owing to the low ductility of
Lloyds T80 (LBA)
the material. There would not normally be any
Lloyds T75MA (LBA)
requirement for PWHT.
E3545Nb-MA (Engemasa)

APPLICATIONS There are a number of other high carbon austenitic
These alloys have superior carburisation and alloys for high temperature service e.g.. 25Cr-35Ni-
oxidation resistance to alloys based on 25%Cr-35%Ni 1Nb types (data sheet C-50).
for service up to 1150°C but with some reduction in
creep strength.
Applications include pyrolysis coils and reformer tubes PRODUCTS AVAILABLE

for the petrochemical industry.
MMA Thermet 35.45.Nb -
TIG/MIG 35.45.Nb -

THERMET 35.45.Nb
BASIC MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Thermet 35.45.Nb is a basic coated electrode with some alloy additions in the coating and is made on a high purity NiCr core wire.
Recovery is approximately 140% with respect to core wire, 65% with respect to whole electrode.

No relevant national specifications. QW432 F-No --
QW442 A-No --


C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Nb Mo Ti Fe
min. 0.40 0.5 1.0 - - 34 44 0.60 - 0.04 -
max. 0.50 1.5 1.6 0.01 0.01 38 50 1.30 0.25 0.15 bal
Typical 0.45 0.9 1.2 0.005 <0.01 35 47 0.8 0.05 0.07 13

Hardness (HV) - 270
* Minimum values are for static castings.

min. A 70 85 110
max. A 95 120 160
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 300 350
kg/carton 9.9 10.5 12.6
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Cr6 Ni Cu F OES (mg/m3)
3 6 10 9 <0.2 18 0.5
270 www.metrode.com DS C-60-THERMET 35.45.Nb | Rev. 01-03/16

35.45.Nb
SOLID WELDING WIRE FOR TIG WELDING
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Straight lengths and spooled wire for manual and automatic TIG welding.

QW442 A-No --

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Nb Mo Ti Zr Fe
min. 0.40 0.8 1.0 - - 34 44 0.6 - 0.04 - -
max. 0.50 1.5 1.6 0.015 0.02 38 48 1.3 0.50 0.15 0.15 bal

Typical 0.43 1.0 1.2 0.005 0.012 36 46 0.9 0.05 0.1 0.05 13

As welded Typical, TIG
Elongation (%) 4d 3
Hardness (HV) 280

PACKAGING DATA
TIG 12.5kg spool 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube
FUME DATA
15 5 28 28 <0.5 <0.5 1.8
www.metrode.com DS C-60-35.45.Nb | Rev. 01-03/16 271

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
HIGH CARBON 25Cr-35Ni-WCo ALLOYS

0.5%C-25%Cr-35%Ni-15%Co-5%W cast alloy for The as-welded microstructure consists of
elevated temperature service. high alloy austenite with primary eutectic and
secondary carbides.
Proprietary cast alloys: WELDING GUIDELINES

MORE 6 (Duraloy) Preheat is often recommended owing to the low
Supertherm (Duraloy) ductility of this alloy, coupled with high strength
Lloyds T66 (LBA) and residual stress levels of multipass welds. For
Centralloy ET35Co (Schmidt & Clemens – Centracero) thicker sections, preheat of 300°C or more may
Manaurite 35K (Manoir Industries) be advisable.
APPLICATIONS
This electrode matches similar cast alloys originating The cobalt free 22H alloy is related to this alloy
from the Abex alloy Supertherm, which is itself related and is used for similar applications (data sheet
to the cobalt free Blaw-Knox alloy 22H (data sheet C-80).
C-80).
The high carbon high alloy matrix provides excellent

hot strength and oxidation resistance at typical
service temperatures of 950-1250°C. Cobalt and PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
tungsten are important for maintaining matrix Process Product Specification
strength beyond about 1150°C when carbides are
progressively dissolved. MMA Thermet HP50WCo --
Applications include highly stressed furnace parts,

sintering and calcining muffles, cement kiln components
resistant to hot abrasion, radiant tubes and pyrolysis
coils.

THERMET HP50WCo
BASIC MMA ELECTRODE FOR MATCHING HIGH CARBON AUSTENITIC CAST ALLOYS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Recovery MMA electrode with basic flux coating made on nearly matching core wire. The electrode is optimised for DC+ welding
in all positions including fixed pipework in ASME 5G/6G positions. Moisture resistant coating giving sound porosity-free deposits.
QW442 A-No --

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Co W Mo Cu Fe
Min. 0.40 0.5 0.2 -- -- 24.0 34.0 13.0 4.0 -- -- --
Max. 0.60 1.5 1.2 0.020 0.030 28.0 40.0 18.0 6.0 0.5 0.5 bal
Typical 0.50 0.6 0.5 0.008 0.010 25 35 14 4.6 0.05 0.05 19
As welded Min. * Typical **
Elongation (%) 4d 3 8.5
5d -- 8
* Minimum values are for static castings. Average strength of centrispun tube is typically 550MPa with <10% elongation.
** The high strength of the weld metal is derived from the chill-cast microstructure coupled with carbide precipitation and strain-
hardening by successive weld beads. Room temperature elongation has little significance for weld metal designed for elevated
temperature service.

min. A 70 85 110
max. A 95 120 160
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 265 320 320
kg/carton 10.5 12.0 13.2
STORAGE
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Ni Cr Cu Co F OES (mg/m3)
3 6 8 7 <0.2 2 22 0.7
www.metrode.com DS C-70-THERMET HP50WCo | Rev. 01-03/16 273

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
ALLOY 22H HEAT RESISTANT

AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEELS
0.5%C-28%Cr-50%Ni-5%W cast high temperature The as-welded microstructure consists of
alloy. high alloy austenite with primary eutectic and
secondary carbides.
DIN
2.4879 G-NiCr28W WELDING GUIDELINES

G-X45NiCrWSi 48 28 Preheat is often recommended owing to the low
Proprietary cast alloys: ductility of this alloy, coupled with high strength
22H (Duraloy) and residual stress levels of multipass welds. For
Super 22H (Duraloy; +2%Co) thicker sections, preheat of 300°C or more may
Paralloy H48T (Doncasters Paralloy)
be advisable.
Centralloy 4879 (Schmidt & Clemens – Centracero)
Marker G4879 (Schmidt & Clemens)
Pyrotherm G 28/48/5W (Pose-Marre) RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
HR23 (Cronite) In an alternative alloy for similar applications
Lloyds T75 (LBA) about 15%Ni is replaced with cobalt, see data
Thermax 70 (Sheepbridge) sheet C-70.
Manaurite 50W (Manoir Industries)
Thermalloy T75 (Manoir Electroalloys)
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
APPLICATIONS
This electrode is designed to match similar high MMA Thermet 22H --
carbon cast alloys originating from Blaw-Knox (now
Duraloy) alloy 22H.
The high carbon 28%Cr-50%Ni-5%W matrix provides

excellent hot strength and oxidation resistance at
typical service temperatures of 950-1250°C. High
nickel gives the alloy good resistance to carburisation
and under oxidising conditions high chromium
provides useful resistance to sulphidation.
Applications include highly stressed furnace parts,

sintering and calcining muffles, cement kiln components
resistant to hot abrasion, radiant tubes and pyrolysis
coils.

THERMET 22H
BASIC ALL-POSITIONAL MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Basic all-positional MMA electrode designed to match similar cast alloys.
Basic flux system with alloy additions on high purity NiCr core wire.


C Mn Si S P Cr Ni W Fe
Min. 0.40 0.5 0.5 -- -- 27.0 47.0 4.0 --
Max. 0.60 1.5 1.2 0.020 0.030 30.0 54.0 6.0 bal
Typical 0.50 1 0.7 0.006 0.010 28 51 5 14

As welded Min. * Typical **
4d -- 7
Elongation (%)
5d 4 6
* Minimum values for DIN 2.4879 castings.
** The high strength of the weld metal is derived from the chill-cast microstructure coupled with carbide precipitation and strain-
hardening by successive weld beads. Room temperature elongation has little significance for weld metal designed for elevated

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 85 110 140
max. A 95 120 160 200
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 260 310 310 310
kg/carton 10.5 12.0 13.5 12.0
STORAGE
FUME DATA
3 6 9 7 <0.2 22 0.7
www.metrode.com DS C-80-THERMET 22H | Rev. 01-03/16 275

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
SPECIAL ELECTRODE FOR IN-657

50Cr-50Ni alloy for high temperature corrosion Arc length should be kept low to avoid nitrogen
resistance. pick up. Preheating is usually necessary; 150-
200°C at 10mm thick with 200-250°C for most
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED applications and up to 450°C for the thickest
Inco IN-657, IN-671 sections. Maintain interpass temperatures and
ASTM A560 Grade 50Cr-50Ni-Cb slow cool.
DIN 2.4678, 2.4680, 2.4813
Paralloy N50W (Doncasters Paralloy) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Duraloy 50/50Cb Weldment stress-rupture tests have been carried
out on transverse specimens extracted from 25
APPLICATIONS mm thick centricast IN-657 tube. Tests were
Nimrod 657 (formerly 50.50.Nb) was developed in carried out at 900°C and the results are shown
conjunction with Inco to match their proprietary cast in the graph. It can be seen that about 75% joint
alloy IN-657 produced by licenced foundries world- efficiency is achieved in the long-term tests.
wide. It is also suitable to weld the Ti-bearing wrought
version IN-671.
Kcal
60 STRESS RUPTURE
Nimrod 657
9
Alloy 657 with its high chromium content has (transverse tests
exceptional resistance to hot corrosion (800-950°C) 50 8

by fuel ash containing vanadium pentoxide and alkali 7
metal sulphates arising from the combustion of low
STRESS (MPa)
grade heavy fuel oils. 40 6
IN-657 castings are used in a wide range of components 5

in oil-fired furnaces and boilers such as tube sheets, 30
4
tube hangers, supports and spacers in ships, power
stations, refineries, and petrochemical plants. 20
3
2
MICROSTRUCTURE 500 1000 2000 5000
10 20 50 100 200
Very careful control of chromium and niobium is 900°C RUPTURE LIFE (hours)
maintained to minimise the risk of weld metal cracking.

The microstructure of IN-657 castings and Nimrod REFERENCES
657 weld metal consists of two phases: a chromium- Thornley J.C. ‘Welding of 50Ni-50Cr and 50Ni-
rich alpha phase (bcc) and a nickel-rich gamma phase 50Cr-1.5Nb Alloys’ Parts 1 & 2, Metal Construction
(fcc). The precise structure obtained is complicated by Nov 1976, pp 480-487, and Dec 1976, pp 535-541.
thermal history and composition, but has an important
‘High chromium Cr-Ni alloys to resist residual fuel
effect on the control of weld metal cracking.
oil ash corrosion’. Inco publication No. 4299 (1975).
At lower chromium and niobium contents, the primary
dendrites which form during solidification are gamma ‘IN-657 cast-nickel-chromium-niobium alloy
phase and this tends to promote sensitivity to for service against fuel-ash corrosion’. Inco
solidification cracking. Higher chromium and niobium publication no. 4320 (1974).
contents result in a primary alpha dendritic phase
which is less ductile and hence more prone to cold PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
cracking during cooling. Process Product Specification
An undesirable but infrequent eutectic phase may
MMA Nimrod 657 AWS ENiCr-4
also occur. The composition of both weld metal and
castings is therefore carefully balanced to minimise
detrimental microstructural components and so reduce
the risk of cracking. Carbon and nitrogen also reduce
ductility and are kept as low as practicable.
276 www.metrode.com DS C-90 | Rev. 01-03/16| p. 1/2
NIMROD 657
BASIC MMA ELECTRODE FOR ALLOY 657/671
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode made on a special nickel-chromium core wire, with a basic lime-fluorspar flux covering.

AWS A5.11M ENiCr-4 QW432 F-No 43

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Nb Fe N Cu
Min. -- -- -- -- -- 48 bal 1.0 -- -- --
Max. 0.10 1.5 1.0 0.02 0.02 52 -- 2.5 1.0 0.16 0.25
Typical 0.07 1.0 0.5 0.01 0.01 50 47 1.8 0.5 0.07 0.05

Min. Typical
As welded IN-657 (as cast)
Nimrod 657 Nimrod 657
Tensile strength (MPa) 760 830-985 600-700
0.2% proof strength (MPa) -- 570-725 330-400
Elongation (%) 4d -- 2-4 10-40
Hardness (HV) -- 340 210-260
Note: Weld metal tensile properties are much higher than those of as-cast IN-657, mainly because pre-ageing takes place during
multipass welding. IN-657 responds similarly at high temperature and differences between the two are effectively eliminated
during service.
TYPICAL OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC +VE OR AC(OCV:70V)

min. A 70 85 110
max. A 95 120 160
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 300 350
kg/carton 10.5 11.4 12.0
STORAGE
FUME DATA
1 2 2.5 8 0.1 0.1 23 0.6
www.metrode.com DS C-90-NIMROD 657 | Rev. 01-03/16 277

Section D : NICKEL BASE ALLOYS HANWORTH LANE, CHERTSEY
Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
NICKEL BASE CONSUMABLES

As a whole, nickel-base consumables have a very wide range of applications. They can be roughly divided into those with compositions
matching specific parent materials, usually for corrosion resistance, and those with compositions unique to weld metal specifications
some of which have specialised uses and others more general purpose applications.
Electrode characteristics vary according to the intended application and the constraints dictated by particular alloys.
Most types have basic flux coverings, those with the suffix KS being suitable for positional welding of fixed pipework. Rutile flux
systems are compatible with some of the high molybdenum corrosion-resistant alloys. A low level of impurities is desirable in all cases
to minimise sensitivity to hot cracking and microfissuring.
The most important general purpose group are the 'Inconel' types, very loosely based on heat-resistant alloy 600 with 15%Cr-75%Ni-
8%Fe. Compared with alloy 600, all these weld metals have significant additions of manganese and niobium which give resistance to
hot cracking and raise hot strength. Nimrod 182/182KS have the highest manganese to maximise resistance to hot cracking, whereas
in Nimrod AB/AKS manganese is partially replaced by molybdenum which has the additional effect of improving creep resistance. In
many applications these two types can be used interchangeably, particularly in dissimilar metal welds between nickel base and most
steels or other ferrous alloys. Useful service properties range from cryogenic up to elevated temperatures of 1000°C plus. Related to
these is the more specialised heat resisting type Nimrod 132KS used primarily for welding 600 and similar materials in cast or wrought
form.
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS
Nimrod 625/625KS electrodes and 62-50 wires are designed to match alloy 625 which was originally developed for heat-resisting
applications. However, parent material and consumables of this alloy have gained more widespread use for many applications
exploiting its excellent pitting and crevice corrosion resistance and high strength at all service temperatures.
Electrode types Nimrod C276KS, C22KS and Nimax B2L and complimentary solid wires match the current specifications for corrosion-
resistant parent alloys C276, C22 and B2 respectively. Also related to this group is the higher alloy Nimrod 59KS, matching alloy 59.
Their uses include overmatching welds for various superaustenitic stainless steels.
The precursor to alloy C276 was alloy C which is represented by rutile electrodes Nimrod C and the high efficiency type Nimax C. Their
general corrosion resistance is useful for overlays and high work-hardening rate and thermal fatigue resistance for build-up and repair
of hot-work dies.
Nickel, nickel-copper (Monel®) and cupronickel consumables are well established for use in high integrity fabrication welds between
their respective parent alloys. For surfacing steels or dissimilar welds it should be noted that tolerance to iron dilution decreases with
increasing copper content and the pure nickel type is therefore used as a buffer layer.

Nimrod 182KS ENiCrFe-3 E Ni6182
MMA Nimrod 182 ENiCrFe-3 E Ni6182
D-10 182
Nimax 182 ENiCrFe-3 E Ni6182
TIG/MIG/SAW 20.70.Nb ERNiCr-3 SNi6082
MMA Nimrod AKS ENiCrFe-2 E Ni 6133
D-11 AB
TIG/MIG/SAW 20.70.Nb ERNiCr-3 S Ni 6082
D-12 132 MMA Nimrod 132KS ENiCrFe-1 E Ni6062
Nimrod 625 ENiCrMo-3 E Ni 6625
MMA
Nimrod 625KS ENiCrMo-3 E Ni 6625
D-20 625
TIG/MIG/SAW 62-50 ERNiCrMo-3 SNi6625
FCW Supercore 625P ENiCrMo3T1-4 T Ni 6625 P M/C 2
278 www.metrode.com DS D-01 | Rev. 01-03/16

NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

MMA Nimrod C276KS ENiCrMo-4 E Ni6276
D-30 C276
TIG/MIG/SAW HAS C276 ERNiCrMo-4 SNi6276
MMA Nimrod 59KS ENiCrMo-13 E Ni6059
D-31 59
TIG/MIG HAS 59 ERNiCrMo-13 SNi6059
MMA Nimrod C22KS ENiCrMo-10 SNi6022
D-32 C22
TIG/MIG HAS C22 ERNiCrMo-10 E Ni6117
D-33 9% Nickel FCW SUPERCORE 620P - -
MMA Nimrod 617KS ENiCrCoMo-1 E Ni6117
D-40 617
TIG/MIG 61-70 ERNiCrCoMo-1 SNi2061
MMA Nimrod 690KS ENiCrFe-7 E Ni 6152
D-41 690
TIG/MIG ER690 ERNiCrFe-7 S Ni6052
MMA Nimrod 200Ti ENi-1 E Ni2061
D-50 Nickel
TIG/MIG Nickel 2Ti ERNi-1 SNi6617
MMA Nimrod 190 ENiCu-7 E Ni4060
D-60 Monel
TIG/MIG/SAW 65NiCu ERNiCu-7 SNi4060
MMA Cupromet N30 ECuNi -
D-70 Cupronickel TIG/MIG 70CuNi ERCuNi BS: C18
TIG 90CuNi - BS C16
D-80 B2 MMA Nimax B2L ENiMo-7 E Ni1066
MMA EPRI P87 - -
D-87 Dissimilar
TIG EPRI P87 - -
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

E-45 C MMA Nimax C (ENiCrMo-5) DIN: E23-UM-200CKT
www.metrode.com DS D-01 | Rev. 01-03/16 279

Data Sheet D-10 HANWORTH LANE, CHERTSEY
Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
NICKEL BASE 182 CONSUMABLES

Inconel™ type consumables with manganese and High nickel austenite with some carbides.
niobium additions.

Nickel alloys such as Inconel™ 600, Nimonic 75. Requirements for preheat and PWHT will be
Nickel base alloys to themselves and to mild, low dependent on the base material being welded.
alloy and stainless steels. High temperature transition For most nickel-base materials, no preheat is
joints. Cryogenic 3% and 5% Ni steels. required.
APPLICATIONS
These weld metals have no directly equivalent
parent material, although the composition is related The AB alloys (data sheet D-11) cover similar
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS
to Inconel™ 600. Mn and Nb are added to give high applications.

resistance to hot cracking, tolerance to dilution by
many combinations of nickel-base and ferrous alloys,
with stable properties over a wide range of service
temperatures from –269°C to above 900°C. PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
Applications include heat-resisting nickel-base alloys
to themselves for use in furnace equipment up to
about 900°C. Other applications include: Nimrod 182KS AWS ENiCrFe-3
Mixed welds between most nickel-base alloys, MMA Nimrod 182 AWS ENiCrFe-3
including Monel 400 and stainless, low alloy or CMn Nimax 182 AWS ENiCrFe-3
steels without need to preheat. TIG/MIG/SAW 20.70.Nb AWS ERNiCr-3
Transition welds between creep-resisting ferritic and
SAW flux NiCr BS EN SA FB2
austenitic steels, such as 2CrMo and 316H for long term
service at elevated temperature in petrochemical and
power generation plants.
Low temperature applications such as 3% or 5% Ni
steels used for cryogenic vessels and pipework in
service at or below –100°C.
Stress relief may be carried out if required.

NIMROD 182KS
ALL-POSITIONAL INCONEL™ TYPE MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – This electrode is made on a nearly matching core wire with a basic flux system designed to produce optimum
operability and radiographically sound weld metal.
Nimrod 182KS is optimised for DC+ welding in all positions including pipework qualified in the ASME 6G position.
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.11M ENiCrFe-3
QW432 F-No 43
BS EN ISO 14172 E Ni 6182
APPROVALS TÜV

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Nb Fe Cu Ti Co * Ta *
min. -- 5.0 -- -- -- 13.0 61 1.0 2.0 -- -- -- --
max. 0.10 9.5 1.0 0.015 0.02 17.0 bal 2.5 9.0 0.50 1.0 0.12 0.30
Typical 0.05 7 0.5 0.01 0.01 16 ~ 65 1.5 <8 0.1 0.1 < 0.05 0.05
* Co and Ta maximums only when specified at time of order.
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

5d 27 37

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 70 100 130
max. A 80 110 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 300 350 350
kg/carton 12.0 12.3 15.0 15.0
STORAGE
FUME DATA
2 13 5 10 0.2 0.1 15 1
www.metrode.com DS D-10-NIMROD 182KS | Rev. 01-03/16 281

NIMROD 182
INCONEL™ T YPE MMA ELECTRODE FOR DOWNHAND WELDING AND SURFACING
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – This electrode is made on a nearly matching core wire with a basic slag system designed to produce optimum
operability and weld metal soundness for downhand/HV welding.
Optimised for DC+ operability primarily for surfacing and cladding applications.
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.11M ENiCrFe-3 (3.2mm will not necessarily satisfy 3G usability criteria)
QW432 F-No 43
PA/1G PB/2F PC/2G

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Nb Fe Cu Ti Co * Ta *
min. -- 5.0 -- -- -- 13.0 61 1.0 2.0 -- -- -- --
max. 0.10 9.5 1.0 0.015 0.02 17.0 bal 2.5 9.0 0.50 1.0 0.12 0.30
Typical 0.05 6 0.5 0.01 0.01 16 ~ 65 1.5 <8 0.1 0.1 < 0.05 0.05
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

5d 27 37

min. A 70 100 130
max. A 110 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 330
kg/carton 12.0 14.1 14.1
STORAGE
FUME DATA
2 13 5 10 0.2 0.1 15 1
282 www.metrode.com DS D-10-NIMROD 182 | Rev. 01-03/16

NIMAX 182
HIGH RECOVERY MMA ELECTRODE FOR CL ADDING & SURFACING
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode – high efficiency metal powder type with basic flux covering on high conductivity pure nickel core wire.
Nimax 182 is a high efficiency version of Nimrod 182KS, with versatile features for fabrication, repair and maintenance.

AWS A5.11M ENiCrFe-3 QW432 F-No 43
PA/1G PB/2F PC/2G

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Nb Fe Cu Ti
min. -- 5.0 -- -- -- 13.0 61 1.0 2.0 -- --
max. 0.10 9.5 1.0 0.015 0.02 17.0 bal 2.5 9.0 0.50 1.0
Typical 0.06 6 0.4 0.008 0.01 15 ~ 69 1.5 7 0.05 0.07

NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

5d 27 38
Impact ISO-V(J) -196°C -- > 80

Diameter (mm) 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 40 70 90 130 160
max. A 60 115 155 210 260
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 300 350 350 330
kg/carton 11.7 12.0 13.5 13.5 17.1
Pieces/carton 750 468 291 192 129
STORAGE
FUME DATA
2 13 5 10 0.2 0.1 15 1
www.metrode.com DS D-10-NIMAX 182 | Rev. 01-03/16 283

20.70.Nb
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wires for TIG, MIG and sub-arc welding of nickel base alloys and dissimilar joints between nickel alloys, ferritic and austenitic
stainless steels.

AWS A5.14M ERNiCr-3 QW432 F-No 43
BS EN ISO 18274 S Ni 6082
UNS N06082

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Nb Cu Ti Fe
min. -- 2.5 -- -- -- 18.0 67.0 2.0 -- -- --
max. 0.05 3.5 0.50 0.015 0.020 22.0 bal 3.0 0.50 0.7 3.0
Typical 0.02 3 0.1 0.005 0.01 20 73 2.5 0.01 0.4 1

Typical values as welded Typical
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

Impact ISO-V(J) -196°C > 100

MIG Argon Pulsed 1.2 180A, 26V
SAW NiCr flux DC+ 1.6 300A, 26V
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG -- -- -- -- 2. 5 kg tube 2. 5 kg tube 2. 5 kg tube 2. 5 kg tube
MIG 15kg spool 15kg spool 15kg spool 15kg spool -- -- -- --
SAW -- -- -- -- -- -- 25kg spool --
FUME DATA
1 6 15 56 < 0.1 < 0.5 0.9
284 www.metrode.com DS D-10-20.70.Nb | Rev. 01-03/16

NiCr FLUX
SUB-ARC FLUX
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Sub-arc flux – Agglomerated, fluoride basic flux of high basicity (Boniczewski B1~3).
The high basicity ensures low loss of critical alloying elements in the transfer from wire to weld deposit; the low silica content
ensures a low silicon content of the weld metal and reduces the risk of hot cracking.
NiCr flux can be used DC+, DC- and AC, although DC+ operation is preferred.
Flux:wire ratio is 1-2:1 depending on operating conditions; recycled flux should be limited to about 10% to avoid build-up of fines.
SPECIFICATIONS
BS EN ISO 14174 SA FB2
C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Nb Fe Ti
20.70.Nb wire 0.02 3 0.1 0.005 0.01 20 bal 2.5 1 0.4
deposit 0.01 3 0.2 0.006 0.006 20.5 bal 2.3 1 0.08

With 20.70.Nb wire / as welded Typical
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

1.6 200-350A, 27-31V 300A, 28V 20-25mm
2.4 250-450A, 28-32V 350A, 29V 20-25mm
PACKAGING DATA
Metrode NiCr Flux is supplied in sealed moisture resistant 25kg metal drums.
www.metrode.com DS D-10-NiCr FLUX | Rev. 01-03/16 285

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
NICKEL BASE AB CONSUMABLES

Inconel™ type consumables similar to the 182 but with In the as-welded condition this nickel base weld
lower Mn and a Mo addition. metal consists of austenite with a few carbides.

Inconel 600, Incoloy 800, Incoloy DS, Nilo, Brightray Requirements for preheat and PWHT will be
and other nickel base or high nickel alloys to them- dependent on the base material being welded.
selves and to mild, low alloy, and stainless steels. For most nickel base materials no preheat or
Cryogenic 3-5%Ni steels.
PWHT is required.
APPLICATIONS
The weld metal deposited by these consumables has RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
no directly equivalent parent material, although its The 182 alloys (data sheet D-10) cover similar
composition is related to Inconel 600 (0.05C-75Ni-
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS
applications.
16Cr-8Fe). Mo and Nb are added to give high
resistance to hot cracking, tolerance to dilution by
many combinations of nickel base and ferrous alloys,
and stable properties over a wide range of service
temperatures from –269°C to above 900°C. PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
The presence of Mo improves elevated temperature Process Product Specification
properties above about 600°C, compared to the 182 MMA Nimrod AKS AWS ENiCrFe-2
alloys (data sheet D-10).
TIG/MIG/SAW 20.70.Nb AWS ERNiCr-3
These consumables are used for welding Inconel
600, Incoloy 800/800H and similar heat resisting or SAW flux NiCr BS EN SA FB2
high nickel alloys to themselves for use in furnace
equipment and petrochemical plants up to about
900°C.
In addition they are suitable for dissimilar combinations

of the above alloys and others such as Monel 400,
Incoloy 825 to stainless, low alloy CMn steels without
the need to preheat. Stress relief may be carried out if
necessary, and transition welds for high temperature
service have good structural stability.
They can also be used for low temperature applications
such as 3%Ni or 5%Ni steels used for cryogenic vessels
and pipework in service at or below –100°C.

NIMROD AKS
ALL-POSITIONAL INCONEL™ TYPE MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a basic flux system on a nearly matching core wire designed to give radiographically sound weld metal.
It is optimised for DC+ welding in all positions including pipework in the ASME 5G/6G positions.
SPECIFICATIONS
QW432 F-No 43

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Nb Fe Mo Cu Co * Ta *
min. -- 1.0 -- -- -- 13.0 62 1.5 -- 1.0 -- -- --
max. 0.10 3.5 0.75 0.015 0.02 17.0 Bal 3.0 12.0 2.5 0.50 0.12 0.30
Typical 0.05 2.8 0.5 0.01 0.01 16 69 2 8 1.5 0.05 0.05 0.05
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

5d 27 39
Hardness (HV) -- 200/215

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 70 100 130
max. A 80 110 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 300 350 350
kg/carton 12.0 12.6 14.4 13.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
2 13 10 5 0.2 0.1 15 1
www.metrode.com DS D-11-NIMROD AKS | Rev. 01-03/16 287

20.70.Nb
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wires for TIG, MIG and sub-arc welding of nickel base alloys and dissimilar joints between nickel alloys, ferritic and austenitic
stainless steels.

AWS A5.14M ERNiCr-3 QW432 F-No 43
UNS N06082

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Nb Cu Ti Fe
min. -- 2.5 -- -- -- 18.0 67.0 2.0 -- -- --
max. 0.05 3.5 0.50 0.015 0.020 22.0 bal 3.0 0.50 0.7 3.0
Typical 0.02 3 0.1 0.005 0.01 20 73 2.5 0.01 0.4 1

NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

Impact ISO-V(J) -196°C > 100

MIG Argon** DC+ *** 1.2 180A, 26V
** Proprietary Ar/He mixtures also suitable.
*** Pulsed current may provide benefits with respect to operability and arc transfer characteristics.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG -- -- -- -- 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube
MIG 15kg spool 15kg spool 15kg spool 15kg spool -- -- -- --
SAW -- -- -- -- -- -- 25kg spool --
FUME DATA
1 6 15 56 < 0.1 < 0.5 0.9
288 www.metrode.com DS D-11-0.70.Nb | Rev. 01-03/16

NiCr FLUX
SUB-ARC FLUX
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Sub-arc flux – Agglomerated, fluoride basic flux of high basicity (Boniczewski B1~3).
The high basicity ensures low loss of critical alloying elements in the transfer from wire to weld deposit; the low silica content
ensures a low silicon content of the weld metal and reduces the risk of hot cracking.
NiCr flux can be used DC+, DC- and AC, although DC+ operation is preferred.
Flux:wire ratio is 1-2:1 depending on operating conditions; recycled flux should be limited to about 10% to avoid build-up of fines.
SPECIFICATIONS
BS EN ISO 14174 SA FB2
C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Nb Fe Ti
20.70.Nb wire 0.02 3 0.1 0.005 0.01 20 bal 2.5 1 0.4
deposit 0.01 3 0.2 0.006 0.006 20.5 bal 2.3 1 0.08

NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

1.6 200-350A, 27-31V 300A, 28V 20-25mm
2.4 250-450A, 28-32V 350A, 29V 20-25mm
PACKAGING DATA
Metrode NiCr Flux is supplied in sealed moisture resistant 25kg metal drums.
www.metrode.com DS D-11-NiCr FLUX | Rev. 01-03/16 289

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
NIMROD 132KS (ENiCrFe-1)

MMA electrode with a special basic flux covering on a
matching core wire. The electrode is optimised for DC+ PA/1G PB/2F PC/2G PF/3Gu PE/4G
welding in all positions including fixed pipework in the

ASME 5G/6G positions. RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
Recovery about 105% with respect to core wire, 65% with The 182 (data sheet D-10) and AB alloys (data sheet D-11) are
respect to whole electrode. very similar; and the 20.70.Nb solid wire would be used in
conjunction with Nimrod 132KS.
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.11 ENiCrFe-1 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION (WELD METAL WT %)
BS EN 14172 E Ni 6062 C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Nb Fe
Min. 0.03 1.0 -- -- -- 14.0 62.0 0.25 1.5 6.0
DIN 1736 EL-NiCr15FeNb (2.4805) Max. 0.08 3.5 0.75 0.015 0.030 17.0 Bal 0.50 3.5 11.0
ASME IX QUALIFICATION Typical 0.05 3 0.4 0.01 0.01 16.5 70 0.3 2.6 6.5
Cu<0.50%.
QW432 F-No 43 Minimum Mo and Fe applies to DIN only.
Residual Co<0.12% and Ta<0.30% when requested.
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED ALL-WELD MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS
Alloy 600 and similar:

UNS N06600 Inconel 600 (Special Metals) 0.2% proof strength (MPa) 360 390
BS NA14 Nicrofer 7216 (Krupp VDM) Elongation (%) 4d 30 38
DIN 2.4816 (NiCr15Fe) Nicrofer 7216H (Krupp VDM) 5d 27 35
AFNOR NC15Fe Pyromet 600 (Carpenter) Reduction of area (%) -- 38
ASTM A494 CY40 (cast) RA600 (rolled Alloys) Impact ISO-V(J) - 196°C -- 100
Other alloys:
Alloy 330 Nimonic 75 (Special Metals)
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Alloy 601 (to about 900°C)
min. A 60 70 100 130
APPLICATIONS max. A 80 110 155 210
Nimrod 132KS deposits an Inconel type weld metal similar in PACKAGING DATA
composition to the 182 types (data sheet D-10) but with lower Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
manganese. The electrode is used mainly for welding alloy 600, Length (mm) 300 300 350 350
the nearest equivalent base material, with service applications kg/carton 12.0 12.9 15.0 15.0
up to about 1000°C. The lower Mn level is preferred by some Pieces/carton 909 474 300 198
authorities, as Mn raises thermal expansion coefficient and high
levels may reduce oxidation resistance at the upper service STORAGE
temperatures. Additions of both Mn and Nb are sufficient to
suppress hot cracking and provide good hot strength.
unlimited shelf life. Direct use from tin is satisfactory for
The good oxidation and excellent nitriding and carburisation
much longer than an 8h working shift.
resistance of alloy 600 is exploited for heat treatment
equipment and annealing muffles. Resistance to dry chlorine up
Redry 200-250°C/1-2h to restore to as-packed condition.
to about 550°C is important in plants for PVC synthesis, and
Maximum 350°C, 3 cycles, 10h total.
it has many applications in the chemical, petrochemical, food
processing and nuclear industries. Storage of redried electrodes at 100-200°C in holding oven
or 50-150°C in heated quiver: no limit, but maximum 6 weeks
recommended. Recommended ambient storage conditions
for opened tins (using plastic lid): < 60% RH, >18°C.
MICROSTRUCTURE
High alloy austenite with some carbides. FUME DATA
WELDING GUIDELINES 2 12 11 5 0.1 15 1
No preheat or PWHT required. Fume composition, wt % typical:

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
NICKEL BASE 625 CONSUMABLES

Consumables matching the nickel base 625 alloy with In the as-welded condition this nickel base weld
typical composition of Ni-21%Cr-9%Mo-3.5%Nb. metal consists of solid-solution strengthened
austenite with carbides.
MATCHING ALLOY 625
WELDING GUIDELINES
ASTM / ASME DIN BS
UNS N06625 2.4856 NA21 No preheat required and maximum interpass of
A494 CW-6MC (cast)
250°C. When welding superaustenitic alloys the
interpass temperature should be controlled to a
Proprietary maximum of 100°C.
Inconel 625 (Inco)
Nicrofer 6020hMo (VDM)
Nicrofer 6022hMo (VDM)
OTHER ALLOYS RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
High Nickel Alloys: Superaustenitic alloys: For welding superaustenitic stainless steels C276
Inconel 601 (Inco) UNS S31254 (D-30), alloy 59 (D-31) and alloy C22 (D-32) are also
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

Incoloy 800H (Inco) 254SMO (Avesta) suitable.
Incoloy 825 (Inco) 904L
And equivalents Similar alloys
Cryogenic: Dissimilar:
9%Ni steels Combinations of above PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
APPLICATIONS
Nimrod 625 AWS ENiCrMo-3
These consumables are designed to match the MMA
composition and properties of alloy 625. Originally Nimrod 625KS AWS ENiCrMo-3
developed to give high temperature strength and TIG/MIG 62-50 AWS ERNiCrMo-3
structural stability, alloy 625 is also widely used for its 62-50 AWS ERNiCrMo-3
resistance to general corrosion, pitting, crevice and SAW
stress corrosion cracking in severe chloride media. NiCr BS EN SA FB2
These properties are conferred by high levels of FCW Supercore 625P AWS ENiCrMo3T1-1/4
chromium, molybdenum and niobium, which also raise
strength to the highest amongst standard nickel-base
alloys. Useful properties from –269°C to above 1000°C
are achieved.
In addition to matching alloy 625, suitable for welding
heat resisting alloys including Inconel 601 (except
severe sulphidising conditions), Incoloy 800/800H
(preferred to Nimrod AKS above about 900°C), or
combinations of these with other alloys for furnace
equipment, petrochemical and power generation
plants. Some other applications include:
Overmatching corrosion-resistant welds in alloy 825,
Hastelloys G and G3, alloy 28, 904L, 6%Mo super-
austenitic stainless 254SMo, and also overlays on
pumps, valves and shafts, often in offshore and marine
environments where high pitting resistance (PRE = 50)
and tolerance to weld metal dilution are essential.
Welds in high strength ferrous alloys including
cryogenic 9% nickel steels and for reclamation of
dies where rapid work-hardening and toughness are
required.

NIMROD 625
DOWNHAND MMA ELECTRODE FOR SURFACING
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode designed to combine easy operation with the deposition of high quality weld metal and a finished bead of good
appearance. The electrode has a basic-rutile flux system and is made on a nickel core wire.
Nimrod 625 operates on AC or DC+ and is designed primarily for the downhand/flat or H-V positions.
Optimised for surfacing and overlays, for joining Nimrod 625KS is preferred.
AWS A5.11M ENiCrMo-3 QW432 F-No 43
PA/1G PB/2F PC/2G

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Nb Fe Mo Cu
Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 20.0 55 3.15 -- 8.0 --
Max. 0.10 1.0 0.75 0.015 0.020 23.0 -- 4.15 2.5 10.0 0.50
Typical 0.04 0.8 0.7 0.005 0.008 21.5 64 3.4 < 1.5 9 0.05
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

5d 27 32
Impact ISO-V(J) -196°C -- > 28
Hardness (HV) as welded -- 250
work-hardened -- 450
* Cannot meet TS > 827MPa required by cold rolled ASTM N06625 Grade 1, but meets PS > 414MPa and properties of hot rolled
grades. Cast CW-6MC solution annealed 1175°C + WQ requires TS > 485MPa. .
TYPICAL OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC +VE OR AC (OCV: 70V)

min. A 90 130 160
max. A 155 210 260
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 13.8 13.5 16.8
STORAGE
FUME DATA
1 4 9 6 1 0.1 20 0.8
292 www.metrode.com DS D-20-NIMROD 625 | Rev. 01-03/16

NIMROD 625KS
BASIC MMA PIPE-WELDING ELECTRODE FOR 625
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a basic flux system made on a 625 core wire. The electrode is designed to combine easy operation with the
deposition of high quality, radiographically sound weld metal and a finished bead of good appearance.
Nimrod 625KS is optimised for DC+ welding in all positions including pipework qualified in the ASME 6G position.
EN ISO 14172 E Ni 6625
APPROVALS TÜV

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Nb Fe Mo Cu
Min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 20.0 55 3.15 -- 8.0 --
Max. 0.10 1.0 0.75 0.015 0.020 23.0 -- 4.15 2.5 10.0 0.50
Typical 0.04 0.7 0.4 0.005 0.005 22 63 3.2 < 1.5 9.3 0.01
As welded Min. * Typical +160°C
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

5d 27 38 31
Impact ISO-V(J) -196°C -- 60 --
Hardness (HV) as welded -- 250 --
work-hardened -- 450 --
* Cannot meet TS > 827MPa required by cold rolled ASTM N06625 Grade 1, but meets PS > 414MPa and properties of hot rolled
grades. Cast CW-6MC solution annealed 1175°C + WQ requires TS > 485MPa. .

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 70 100 130
max. A 80 110 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 300 350 350
kg/carton 11.1 12.6 15.0 15.0
STORAGE
FUME DATA
1 4 9 6 1 0.1 20 0.8

62-50
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

AWS A5.14M ERNiCrMo-3 QW432 F-No 43
EN ISO 18274 S Ni 6625

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Nb Cu Al Ti Fe
Min. -- -- -- -- -- 20.0 60.0 8.0 3.15 -- -- -- --
Max. 0.05 0.50 0.50 0.015 0.015 23.0 bal 10.0 4.15 0.50 0.40 0.40 1.0
Typical 0.015 0.02 0.05 0.004 0.004 22 65 9 3.5 0.05 0.2 0.2 0.2

Typical values as welded TIG SAW + NiCr TIG +165°C
5d 40 47 40
Reduction of area (%) 100 -- --
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS
Impact ISO-V(J) -196°C 80 100 --

205/225 235/255 --
Hardness cap/mid (HV) -- 250
Cannot meet TS > 827MPa required by cold rolled ASTM N06625 Grade 1, but meets PS > 414MPa and properties of hot rolled grades.
Cast CW-6MC solution annealed 1175°C + WQ requires TS > 485MPa.

TIG* Argon DC- 2.4 100A, 12V
MIG Argon or ArHe Pulsed 1.2 130A, 29V (mean)
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
MIG 15kg spool To order 15kg spool -- -- -- --
SAW -- -- -- 25kg spool -- 25kg spool --
FUME DATA
MIG fume composition (wt %)(TIG & SAW fume negligible)
1 1 17 50 9 < 0.5 1
294 www.metrode.com DS D-20-N62-50 | Rev. 01-03/16

SUPERCORE 625P
RUTILE ALL-POSITIONAL FLUX CORED WIRE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Flux cored wire made with a nickel alloy sheath and rutile flux system.
Supercore 625P is designed for all-positional welding and combines easy operability, high deposit quality and exceptional weld
bead appearance.

AWS A5.34M ENiCrMo3T1-1/4 QW432 F-No 43
EN ISO 12153 T Ni 6625 P M/C 2
APPROVALS LRS

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Nb Cu Ti Fe
Min. -- -- -- -- -- 20.0 58.0 8.0 3.15 -- -- --
Max. 0.10 0.50 0.50 0.015 0.02 23.0 -- 10.0 4.15 0.50 0.40 5.0
Typical 0.02 0.3 0.2 0.005 0.005 21 66 8.5 3.4 0.02 0.2 1.0

NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

5d 22 42
-196°C -- 80
Lateral expansion (mm) -196°C -- 1.00
CTOD (mm) -170°C -- 0.50
Current: DC+ve ranges as below for Ar-20%CO2. Welding with 100%CO2 requires approx. 2-3V higher:
1.2 (downhand) 150 – 250A, 25 – 32V 180A, 29V 15 – 20mm
1.2 (positional) 150 – 180A, 25 – 28V 160A, 26V 15 – 20mm
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
MIG fume composition (wt %)
1 2 10 5 5 0.1 5 1.0
www.metrode.com DS D-20-SUPERCORE 625P | Rev. 01-03/16 295

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
CORROSION RESISTANT ALLOY C276

ALLOY TYPE
Alloy C276 is a Ni-15%Cr-16%Mo-4%W-5%Fe nickel MICROSTRUCTURE
base alloy. In the as-welded condition the weld metal consists
of austenite with some carbides.
wrought cast
ASTM/UNS UNS N10276 A494 CW-12MW WELDING GUIDELINES
A743/A744 CW-12M Preheat is not required, interpass temperature
DIN 2.4819 (NiMo16Cr15W) 2.4883 (G-NiMo16Cr) should preferably be kept below 100°C and heat
input restricted to 1.5kJ/mm.
Proprietary Hastelloy™ Alloy C-276 (Haynes International
alloys: Inc)
Inco Alloy C-276 (Special Metals)

Nicrofer 5716hMoW (VDM) RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
APPLICATIONS Alloy 59 (D-31) and alloy C22 (D-32) are also NiCrMo
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS
The weld deposit composition matches parent alloy alloys but with higher Cr for improved corrosion
C276 with Ni-15%Cr-16%Mo-4%W-5%Fe. Carbon and resistance.
silicon are controlled as close as possible to the very
low levels of the wrought alloy to minimise carbide
and intermetallic phase precipitates which can reduce
as-welded corrosion resistance. Cast versions of the
alloy typically have higher carbon and silicon (like the PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
original wrought Hastelloy alloy C, now obsolete), but Process Product Specification
repair welds are usually solution treated for optimum
MMA Nimrod C276KS AWS ENiCrMo-4
corrosion resistance.
Alloy C276 has high resistance to corrosion in a wide TIG/MIG HAS C276 AWS ERNiCrMo-4
range of acids and salts under oxidising and especially HAS C276 AWS ERNiCrMo-4
reducing conditions. These include hydrochloric and SAW
NiCr flux BS EN SA FB2
hydrofluoric acids, hypochlorites, chlorides and wet
chlorine gas, sulphuric, phosphoric and many organic
acids. Exceptional resistance to crevice corrosion
and pitting in seawater and chloride-induced stress-
corrosion cracking (superior to alloy 625). High
temperature stability is limited by intermetallic phase
formation.
In addition to fabrication welds in alloy C276, these
consumables have good tolerance to dilution by
most ferrous and high nickel alloys, and are suitable
for surfacing and dissimilar welds which exploit
the corrosion resistance, strength and toughness.
Excellent properties to below -196°C allow its use for
welding 5-9%Ni cryogenic installations.
Applications include pumps, valves, pipework and
vessels for use in aggressive environments in
chemical process plants; also in equipment for flue gas
desulphurisation and critical equipment in offshore oil
and gas production.

NIMROD C276KS
ALL-POSITIONAL PIPE WELDING MMA ELECTRODE FOR ALLOY C276
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with special basic flux coating on matching nickel-chromium-molybdenum core wire to provide clean and homoge-
nous weld metal. Nimrod C276KS has exceptional operability, optimised for DC+ welding in all positions including fixed pipework
qualified in the ASME 6G (inclined overhead) position.

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo W Fe V Cu Co
min. -- -- -- -- -- 14.5 50.0 15.0 3.0 4.0 -- -- --
max. 0.02 1.0 0.2 0.015 0.02 16.5 -- 17.0 4.5 7.0 0.35 0.50 2.5
Typical 0.02 0.3 0.20 0.01 0.01 15.0 58.0 16.0 4.0 5.0 0.1 0.05 0.05

NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

5d 25 28
-196°C -- 55
Hardness* (HV) -- 240
* Work hardens to about 450HV.

min. A 60 75 100
max. A 80 110 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 300 350
kg/carton 13.5 13.5 15.0
STORAGE
FUME DATA
1 4 10 5 5 0.2 16 1
www.metrode.com DS D-30-NIMROD C276KS | Rev. 01-03/16 297

HAS C276
SOLID WIRES FOR TIG/MIG/SAW
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

UNS N10276

min. -- -- -- -- -- 14.5 bal 15.0 3.0 4.0 -- -- --
max. 0.02 1.0 0.08 0.015 0.020 16.5 -- 17.0 4.5 7.0 0.3 0.50 2.50
Typical 0.005 0.5 0.05 0.005 0.01 16 58 16 3.5 6 0.2 0.05 0.50

Typical values as welded Min. TIG SAW
Elongation (%) 4d -- 46 38
5d 30 43 36
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

MIG Argon or Ar-He Pulsed 1.2 160A, 28V (mean)
SAW Nicr Flux
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG -- -- -- 2.5kg tube To order 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube
MIG 12.5kg spool 15kg spool 15kg spool (to order) -- -- -- --
SAW -- -- -- 25kg spool --
FUME DATA
MIG fume composition (wt %) (TIG & SAW fume negligible)
14 3 10 28 11 1 1.8
298 www.metrode.com DS D-30-HAS C276 | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
CORROSION RESISTANT ALLOY 59

ALLOY TYPE
Some authorities do not allow or have
Ni-23%Cr-16%Mo alloy commonly known as alloy 59. discontinued use of 625 type consumables for
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED such applications, where deleterious Nb-rich
precipitates may form in diluted or partially mixed
ALLOY 59 AND SIMILAR:
regions around the fusion boundary. Alloy C276 is
ASTM/UNS
possibly a more economic alternative depending
N06059
on the required properties in this situation.
DIN
2.4605 (NiCr23Mo16Al) Applications of alloy 59 in aggressively
Proprietary corrosive media include scrubbers for flue gas
Nicrofer 5923hMo (Krupp VDM).
Inconel™ Alloy 686 (Special Metals) +W.
desulphurisation (FGD), digesters and papermaking
Hastelloy™ Alloy C-2000™ (Haynes International Inc) +Cu. equipment, chemical process plants, corrosion
ALLOY C22 AND SIMILAR: resistant overlays and in severe offshore and
ASTM/UNS petrochemical environments.
N06022
A494 Grade CX2MW (cast)
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

MICROSTRUCTURE
DIN
2.4602 (NiCr21Mo14W)
Solid-solution strengthened high nickel austenite,
2.4811, 2.4836 (NiCr20Mo15) with some microsegregation typical of as-
2.4697 (G-NiCr20Mo15) (cast) deposited weld metal.
Proprietary
Hastelloy™ Alloy C-22™ (Haynes International Inc)
WELDING GUIDELINES
Nicrofer 5621hMoW (Krupp VDM)
SUPERAUSTENITICS INCLUDING: No preheat required, heat input <1kJ/mm and
interpass temperature 100°C maximum are
ASTM/UNS
S32654, S31254, S34565
desirable to minimise precipitates which may
reduce corrosion resistance and ductility of the
Proprietary
weld metal.
654SMO (Avesta Polarit)
Uranus B66 (Usinor Industeel)
Also dissimilar joints between any combination of the
above and dissimilar joints between them and superduplex RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
stainless steels. The alloy C22 is related and covers many of the
APPLICATIONS same applications and base materials.
The weld deposit composition of 59%Ni-23%Cr-
16%Mo is designed to match the nickel base corrosion PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
resistant alloy commonly known as alloy 59. The
high level of Mo is similar to alloys C276 and C4 but
performance in a wide range of more oxidising media is MMA Nimrod 59KS AWS ENiCrMo-13
significantly enhanced by increasing Cr to 23% in alloy TIG/MIG HAS 59 AWS ERNiCrMo-13
59. Total alloying exceeds the level typically present in
alloy C22; it is therefore considered suitable for welding
this group of alloys.
Alloy 59 consumables also provide strong, tough Nb-
free weld metal for dissimilar welds in superaustenitic
and superduplex stainless steels or combinations of
these with nickel base alloys.

NIMROD 59KS
BASIC ALL-POSITIONAL PIPE-WELDING MMA ELECTRODE FOR ALLOY 59
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with special basic flux covering on high purity NiCrMo core wire to give clean homogenous weld metal.
Very low levels of C and Si minimise the occurrence of deleterious precipitates in the as-welded condition. The special flux
coating provides exceptional operability, optimised for DC+ welding in all positions including fixed pipework in the ASME 5G/6G
positions. The electrode is equally suitable for general fabrication welds.
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.11M ENiCrMo-13
QW432 F-No 43

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Fe Cu
min. -- -- -- -- -- 22.0 57.0 15.0 -- --
max. 0.02 1.0 0.2 0.010 0.015 24.0 bal 16.5 1.5 0.50
Typical 0.01 0.5 0.15 0.006 0.01 23 60 15.5 1 0.01
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

5d 25 30

min. A 60 75 100
max. A 80 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 300 350
kg/carton 10.5 13.5 15.0
STORAGE
FUME DATA
1 4 10 5 6 0.2 16 1
300 www.metrode.com DS D-31-NIMROD 59KS | Rev. 01-03/16

HAS 59
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

BS EN ISO 18274 SNi6059

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Fe Co Al
Min. -- -- -- -- -- 22.0 56.0 15.0 -- -- 0.1
Max. 0.010 0.5 0.10 0.005 0.015 24.0 Bal 16.5 1.5 0.3 0.4
Typical 0.003 0.2 0.03 0.003 0.003 23 60 15.6 0.4 0.1 0.3

NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

5d 32
Hardness HV 240

PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG -- -- To order 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube
MIG 15 kg spool 15 kg spool -- -- -- --
FUME DATA
1 1 17 50 11 <0.5 1
www.metrode.com DS D-31-HAS 59 | Rev. 01-03/16 301

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
CORROSION RESISTANT ALLOY C22

ALLOY TYPE
Nickel base 22%Cr-13.5%Mo-3%W, alloy C22. MICROSTRUCTURE
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED Solid solution strengthened high nickel austenite,
with some microsegregation typical of as-
MATCHING ALLOY C22:
deposited weld metal.
ASTM
A494 CX2MW (cast)
UNS N06022
DIN WELDING GUIDELINES
2.4602 (NiCr21Mo14W) Preheat not normally required, interpass
2.4811, 2.4836 (NiCr20Mo15) temperature restricted to 100°C and heat inputs
2.4697 (G-NiCr20Mo15) (cast)
below 1kJ/mm are desirable.
Proprietary
Hastelloy™ Alloy C-22™ (Haynes International Inc)
Nicrofer™ 5621hMoW (VDM)
Inconel™ 622 (Special Metals)
OTHER ALLOYS: RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS
Alloy C4 Alloy 59 is similar but with slightly higher Cr and

ASTM UNS N06455 Mo for similar or more severe applications – see
DIN 2.4610 (NiMo16Cr16Ti)
data sheet D-31.
Hastelloy™ Alloy C-4 (Haynes International Inc)
Superaustenitics
UNS S31254, S31266, S32654, S34565.
N08367, N08925, N08926.
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
1.4529, 1.4565, 1.4575, 1.4652.
254SMO and 654SMO (Outokumpu). Process Product Specification
Uranus B66 (Usinor Industeel).
MMA Nimrod C22KS AWS ENiCrMo-10
APPLICATIONS TIG/MIG HAS C22 AWS ERNiCrMo-10
The weld deposit composition of Ni-22Cr-13.5Mo-3W
is designed to match the nickel base alloy commonly
known as alloy C22. The high level of molybdenum is
similar to alloys C276 and C4 but performance in a wide
range of more oxidising media is significantly enhanced
in alloy C22 by increasing chromium to 22%.
Alloy C22 also provides a tough Nb-free weld metal for

dissimilar welds in superaustenitic and superduplex
stainless steels or combinations of these with nickel
base alloys. Some authorities do not allow or have
discontinued using alloy 625 consumables for such
applications, where deleterious Nb-rich precipitates
may form in diluted or partially mixed regions around
the fusion boundary.
Applications of alloy C22 in aggressively corrosive

media include scrubbers for flue gas desulphurisation
(FGD), digesters and papermaking equipment, chemical
process plants, corrosion resistant overlays and in severe
offshore and petrochemical environments.

NIMROD C22KS
ALL-POSITIONAL MMA ELECTRODE FOR ALLOY C22
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Basic flux covered electrode with exceptional operability optimised for DC+ welding in all positions including fixed pipework
qualified in the ASME 5G/6G positions. It is equally suitable for general fabrication welds.
Special basic flux covering on matching high purity nickel alloy core wire to give clean and homogenous weld metal. Very low
levels of carbon and silicon minimise the occurrence of deleterious precipitates in the as-welded condition.
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.11M ENiCrMo-10
QW432 F-No 43

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo W V Co Cu Fe
min. -- -- -- -- -- 20.0 49.0 12.5 2.5 -- -- -- 2.0
max. 0.02 1.0 0.2 0.015 0.02 22.5 -- 14.5 3.5 0.35 2.5 0.50 6.0
Typical 0.01 0.5 0.15 0.008 0.008 21 58 14 3 0.05 0.05 0.05 4
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

5d 22 35
Hardness, cap/mid (HV) -- 245/275
min. A 60 75 100
max. A 80 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 300 350
kg/carton 13.5 13.5 15.6
STORAGE
Direct use from tin is satisfactory for much longer than an 8h working shift.
Excessive exposure of electrodes to humid conditions will cause some moisture pick-up and increase risk of porosity.
recommended.
Recommended ambient storage conditions for opened tins (using plastic lid): <60%RH, >18°C.
FUME DATA
1 4 10 5 6 0.2 16 1
www.metrode.com DS D-32-NIMROD C22KS | Rev. 01-03/16 303

HAS C22
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION


C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo W V Co Cu Fe
Min. -- -- -- -- -- 20.0 49.0 12.5 2.5 -- -- -- 2.0
Max. 0.01 0.50 0.08 0.010 0.02 22.5 -- 14.5 3.5 0.3 2.5 0.50 6.0
Typical 0.003 0.2 0.03 0.002 0.01 21 56 13.5 3 0.15 1.5 0.1 4

5d 42
Impact ISO-V(J) -196°C 130
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS
Hardness (HV) 220

PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG -- -- 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube
MIG To order To order -- -- -- --
FUME DATA
14 1 17 30 10 <0.5 1.7
304 www.metrode.com DS D-32-HAS C22 | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
9% NICKEL STEEL CONSUMABLES

ALLOY TYPE
MICROSTRUCTURE
NiCrMo-6 type nickel base consumables for welding
9% Nickel steels. In the as-welded condition the weld metal
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED consists of high alloy nickel base solid-solution
strengthened austenite with some carbides.
9% NICKEL STEELS, INCLUDING:
ASTM UNS
A353 / A353M K81340
A553 / A553M Type I K71340 WELDING GUIDELINES
A553 / A553M Type II
No preheat required and maximum interpass of
BS
250°C.
1501 510 and 510N, 1502 and 1503 509-690
DIN
1.5662 X8Ni9 (wrought) and G-X8Ni9 (cast)
5% AND 3.5% NICKEL STEELS, INCLUDING:
ASTM UNS RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
A645 K41583 For welding 9% Ni steels of LNG storage tanks,
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

A352 LC4 (cast) Metrode also manufactures an all positional 625
A333 Grade 3 type flux cored wire, Supercore 625P. Please refer
A202 Grade E
to data sheet D-20 for details.
DIN
1.5680 X12Ni (12Ni19)
1.5637 10Ni14 (3.5%Ni), 1.5637 12Ni14 (3.5%Ni)
For other consumables for welding 9% Ni steels,
625 (D-20) and C276 (D-30) can also be considered.
APPLICATIONS
Metrode Supercore 620P all-positional flux cored wire is
specifically designed for welding 9% Ni steels used in the
fabrication of cryogenic containment plant demanding good
properties down to -196°C. The typical application is the PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
welding of 9% Ni steels for LNG storage tanks.
Supercore 620P deposits a controlled carbon and solid Process Product Specification
solution strengthened alloy with high strength and
toughness in the as-welded condition. To satisfy procedural Nyloid 2* AWS ENiCrMo-6
MMA
and property requirements in aimed applications, Supercore Nyloid 4* AWS ENiCrMo-6
620P meets the following criteria:
- All-positional operation, including full-automated 3G butt FCW Supercore 620P (AWS ENiCrMo6T1-4)
weld of 9%Ni steels for LNG storage tanks.
- Good welding operability with 80%Ar-20%CO2 mix gas; For * : Lincoln group products which have been widely
less demanding welding positions, useful performance can used in the construction of 9% Ni LNG storage
also be achieved with 100% CO2 shield. tanks (project reference list available).
- Operates on power source polarity of DC+. For reference, please refer to Lincoln Electric
- High deposition efficiency.
- Proof stress of weld metal exceeds 400MPa (typically Europe “Welding Consumable Product Catalogue”..
>420MPa) with UTS above 700MPa.
- Nickel-base alloy weld metal with excellent impact toughness
at -196°C independent from procedure.
- Similar thermal expansion coefficient to 9% Ni steels.
Supercore 620P can also be used for welding 5% Ni and 3.5%

Ni steels with satisfactory weld metal mechanical properties
including excellent cryogenic impact toughness.
This wire is equally suitable for welding other low alloy

and hardenable steels, including applications where PWHT
is required, and for dissimilar welds between these and
austenitic steels or high nickel alloys.
SUPERCORE 620P
RUTILE ALL-POSITIONAL FLUX CORED WIRE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Flux cored wire made with a nickel alloy sheath and rutile flux system.
Supercore 620P is specifically designed for all-positional welding of 9% Ni steels.
It combines easy operability, high deposit quality and exceptional weld bead appearance.

AWS A5.34M -- QW432 F-No 43

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Nb W Fe Cu
Min. -- 2.0 -- -- -- 12.0 58.0 5.0 0.5 1.0 -- --
Max. 0.08 4.0 1.0 0.015 0.02 17.0 -- 8.0 2.0 2.0 10.0 0.50
Typical 0.04 3.0 0.4 0.008 0.008 16.0 66 6.0 1.5 1.5 4.0 0.05

5d -- 38
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

+ 20°C -- 90
-196°C 47 75
Lateral expansion (mm) -196°C 0.38 >1.20
Shielding gas: 80%Ar-20%CO2 or 100%CO2 at 20-25l/min. Proprietary gases may be used but argon should not exceed 85%.
Current: DC+ve ranges as below for Ar-20%CO2. Welding with 100%CO2 requires approx. 2-3V higher:
1.2 (downhand) 150 – 250A, 25 – 32V 180A, 29V 15 – 20mm
1.2 (positional) 150 – 180A, 25 – 28V 160A, 26V 15 – 20mm
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
MIG fume composition (wt %)
2 13 10 5 5 <0.5 5 1.0
306 www.metrode.com DS D-33-SUPERCORE 620P | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
HIGH TEMPERATURE ALLOY 617

ALLOY TYPE APPLICATIONS
Nickel base alloy of nominally Ni-24%Cr-12%Co-9%Mo Nimrod 617KS is primarily intended for high temperature
designed for high temperature service. applications up to about 1100°C. It provides good
microstructural stability, high creep strength and excellent
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED resistance to oxidation and carburisation. In a variety of
MATCHING ALLOY 617: aqueous media, the alloy also has useful resistance to
general corrosion, pitting and stress-corrosion cracking.
ASTM
UNS NO6617 The electrode is optimised for DC+ welding in all positions
DIN including fixed pipework qualified in the ASME 5G/6G
2.4663 (NiCr23Co12Mo) positions.
Proprietary
Inconel alloy 617 (Special Metals) In addition to welding the parent alloy 617, some authorities
Nicrofer 5520Co (Krupp VDM) specify it in preference to other nickel-base filler metals
for welding alloys 800H and 800HT for service above
OTHER ALLOYS: 760°C. It is also suitable for the heat-resistant alloy 601
Alloys 800H and 800HT (usually above 900°C) and dissimilar welds including high
ASTM UNS N08810, N08811 carbon heat resistant cast alloys and any combination of
BS NA15H those mentioned.
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

DIN 1.4876 (X10NiCrAlTi 32 20)
Incoloy 800H and 800HT (Special Metals) Applications include combustion, pyrolysis, heat treatment
Nicrofer 3220H (Krupp VDM) and furnace components, flare tips, ducting and gas turbine
Alloy 601 & other oxidation resistant alloys parts.
ASTM UNS N06601
DIN 2.4851 MICROSTRUCTURE
Inconel alloy 601 (Special Metals)
High nickel alloy austenite with carbides.
Nicrofer 6023 (Krupp VDM)
ASTM UNS N06333
WELDING GUIDELINES
RA333 (Rolled Alloys)
High Carbon Austenitic Alloy Normally no preheat required, interpass
Cast HK40, HP40Nb, etc temperature generally limited to 150°C maximum.
Also dissimilar welds between above.
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
MMA Nimrod 617KS AWS ENiCrCoMo-1
TIG/MIG 61-70 AWS ERNiCrCoMo-1

NIMROD 617KS
617 MMA ELECTRODE FOR HIGH TEMPER ATURE APPLICATIONS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Special basic flux on matching nickel alloy core wire. The chromium range of the weld metal is higher than the parent material to
maintain oxidation resistance at a lower aluminium level.
The electrode is optimised for DC+ welding in all positions including fixed pipework qualified in the ASME 5G/6G positions.
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.11M ENiCrCoMo-1
QW432 F-No 43

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Co Mo Nb Cu Fe Al Ti
min. 0.05 0.3 -- -- -- 21.0 45.0 9.0 8.0 -- -- -- -- --
max. 0.15 2.5 0.75 0.015 0.020 26.0 bal 15.0 10.0 1.0 0.50 5.0 1.5 0.6
Typical 0.07 1.0 0.4 0.003 <0.01 24 52 12 9 <0.5 0.05 1 0.15 0.2
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

5d 25 40

min. A 60 75 100
max. A 80 110 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 300 350
kg/carton 12.0 15.0 15.0
STORAGE
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Ni Co Cr6 Mo Cu F OES (mg/m3)
1 4 9 2.5 6 1 0.2 20 0.8
308 www.metrode.com DS D-40-NIMROD 617KS | Rev. 01-03/16

61-70
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wires for TIG and MIG welding alloy 617.

AWS A5.14M ERNiCrCoMo-1 QW432 F-No 43

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Co Mo Cu Fe Al Ti
Min. 0.05 -- -- -- -- 20.0 44.0 10.0 8.0 -- -- 0.80 --
Max. 0.15 1.0 0.5 0.015 0.020 24.0 bal 15.0 10.0 0.5 3.0 1.50 0.60
Typical 0.08 0.1 0.1 0.002 <0.01 22 55 12 9 <0.2 0.5 1 0.3

Typical values as welded Min. TIG typical MIG typical
5d 30 41 40
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C -- 230 >100
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS


MIG Argon ** DC+ *** 1.2 220A, 30V
** Proprietary Ar/He mixtures also suitable.
*** Pulsed current may provide benefits with respect to operability and arc transfer characteristics.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.4
TIG -- -- -- 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube
MIG 15kg spool 15kg spool 15kg spool -- --
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Cr3 Ni Mo Co OES (mg/m3)
1 1 17 45 9 11 0.9
www.metrode.com DS D-40-61-70 | Rev. 01-03/16 309

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
ALLOY 690
ALLOY TYPE
Ni-30%Cr-10%Fe alloy commonly known as alloy 690. MICROSTRUCTURE
High alloy nickel base austenite.
ASTM
B163, B166-8 WELDING GUIDELINES
DIN
2.4642 (NiCr29Fe) Preheat and PWHT is not generally required.
UNS
N06690
Proprietary
Inconel 690 (Special Metals)
Nicrofer 6030 (Krupp VDM) RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
There are no directly related alloys.
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS
APPLICATIONS
The consumables are designed to match alloy 690, which
is finding increasing use in place of alloy 600 for high
temperature corrosion applications, especially in the
nuclear industry. The high chromium content provides PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
good elevated temperature corrosion resistance in Process Product Specification
oxidising and sulphidising atmospheres.
MMA Nimrod 690KS AWS ENiCrFe-7
In addition to joining matching base materials, the TIG/MIG ER690 AWS ERNiCrFe-7
consumables can also be used for surfacing applications
on CMn and low alloy steels.
Applications include nuclear engineering; sulphuric, nitric

and hydrofluoric acid processing equipment

NIMROD 690KS
BASIC ALL-POSITIONAL PIPE-WELDING MMA ELECTRODE FOR ALLOY 690
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Nickel base MMA electrode designed for welding matching base materials, and for surfacing CMn and low alloy steels.
Special basic flux coating on a nickel alloy core wire optimised for DC+ welding in all positions including pipework in the ASME
5G/6G positions.
SPECIFICATIONS
QW432 F-No 43

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Nb Fe Mo Ti Al Cu Co
min. -- 3.0 -- -- -- 28.0 50.0 1.2 8.0 -- -- -- -- --
max. 0.045 5.0 0.65 0.008 0.02 31.5 bal 2.2 12.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.10
Typical 0.04 3.6 0.3 0.005 0.007 29 55 1.6 8.5 0.1 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.02
As welded PWHT 610°C/40h
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

Min. Typical RT +360°C
Elongation (%) 4d 30 40 42 45
5d 27 38 38 42
Reduction of area (%) -- 45 60 46
Impact ISO, KCV (J) - 50°C -- >50 -- --
Impact energy, KCU (J/cm²) + 20°C -- -- 84 --

min. A 60 70 100
max. A 80 110 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 300 350
kg/carton 11.7 12.9 15.0
STORAGE
Redry 200–250°C/1-2h to restore to as-packed condition. Maximum 350° C, 3 cycles, 10h total.
FUME DATA
2 13 10 8 0.2 0.1 16 0.6

ER690
SOLID WIRE FOR TIG WELDING OF ALLOY 690
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wires for TIG.

AWS A5.14M ERNiCrFe-7 QW432 F-No 43
BS EN ISO 18274 S Ni6052

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Nb Fe Mo Ti Al Cu Al+Ti
Min. -- -- -- -- -- 28.0 54.0 -- 7.0 -- -- -- -- --
Max. 0.04 1.0 0.50 0.015 0.020 31.5 -- 0.10 11.0 0.50 1.0 1.10 0.30 1.5
Typical 0.03 0.7 0.2 0.005 0.010 29 60 0.03 8.5 0.05 0.6 0.6 0.05 1.2

As welded As welded PWHT 610°C/40h
typical, RT typical, +360°C typical
5d 40 -- --
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS
Reduction of area (%) 60 50 --

Impact ISO, KCV (J) - 50°C 200 -- 145
Impact energy, KCU (J/cm²) + 20°C 160 -- 130

PACKAGING DATA
TIG 0.7 or 5kg spool 2.5kg tube
FUME DATA
10 3 20 50 <1 <1 0.9
312 www.metrode.com DS D-41-ER690 | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
PURE NICKEL CONSUMABLES

ALLOY TYPE
Low carbon pure nickel weld metal with titanium
de-oxidation. MICROSTRUCTURE
In the as-welded condition the microstructure
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED consists of almost pure nickel austenite. It is
strongly ferromagnetic at room temperature.
ASTM-ASME
UNS N02200
UNS N02201
BS WELDING GUIDELINES
NA11
NA12 Pure nickel weld metals are sluggish and can lead
to irregular weld beads which may require inter-
DIN
run dressing.
2.4066
2.4068
2.4061
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

Proprietary alloys
Nickel 200 and 201 (Special Metals) PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
Nickel 99.6 and 99.2 (VDM)
MMA Nimrod 200Ti AWS ENi-1
APPLICATIONS TIG/MIG Nickel 2Ti AWS ERNi-1
These consumables give low carbon pure nickel

with the addition of titanium for refinement and de-
oxidation. They are used for joining pure nickel to
itself, for buffer layers, and for cladding joint faces and
flanges. The solid wire is also useful for welding cast
iron to give soft low strength deposit.
Applications include tanks and vessels, process

pipework and heat exchangers, in chemical plant for salt
production, chlorination and evaporation of caustic soda.
Also used for handling corrosive alkalis and halides.
DS D-50 | Rev. 01-03/16

www.metrode.com 313
NIMROD 200Ti
ALL-POSITIONAL PURE NICKEL MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with special carbonate-fluoride-rutile flux system on matching core wire.
Smaller diameters offer excellent all-positional operability.
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.11M ENi-1
QW432 F-No 41

C Mn Si S P Ni Ti Al Fe Cu Nb
min. -- -- -- -- -- 92.0 1.0 -- -- -- --
max. 0.10 0.7 1.2 0.015 0.02 bal 4.0 1.0 0.7 0.2 0.5
Typical 0.04 0.5 0.6 0.005 0.005 97 1.5 0.1 0.3 0.1 <0.1

NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

5d 18 20

min. A 60 70 90
max. A 80 110 145
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 12.3 13.5 14.4
STORAGE
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Ni Cu F OES (mg/m3)
<1 1 10 0.2 10 5
314 www.metrode.com DS D-50-NIMROD 200Ti | Rev. 01-03/16

NICKEL 2Ti
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.14M ERNi-1 ASME IX QUALIFICATION
BS EN ISO 18274 S Ni 2061 QW432 F-No 41
UNS N02061
C Mn Si S P Ni Ti Al Cu Fe
Min. -- -- -- -- -- 93.0 2.0 -- -- --
Max. 0.15 1.0 0.7 0.015 0.020 bal 3.5 1.5 0.2 1.0
Typical <0.02 0.4 <0.3 0.005 0.005 96 3 0.1 <0.02 0.1

5d 25 31
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS


* Ar + 1-5%H2 also suitable.
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4
TIG -- 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube
FUME DATA
2 2 <0.1 68 0.1 <0.5 0.7
DS D-50-NICKEL 2Ti | Rev. 01-03/16

www.metrode.com 315
Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
NICKEL-COPPER ALLOY 400

ALLOY TYPE
Nickel-copper alloy based on alloy 400 with raised MICROSTRUCTURE
levels of manganese and titanium to suppress hot Solid solution, single phase alloy, slightly
cracking and porosity. ferromagnetic near room temperature.
ASTM-ASME BS DIN
UNS N04400 NA13 2.4360 WELDING GUIDELINES
UNS N04405 NA1 (cast) 2.4361 No preheat required, maximum interpass
UNS N05500 2.4365 (cast) temperature 150°C and no PWHT required.
A494 M-35-1 (cast)
A494 M-35-2 (cast)
Proprietary
Monel alloy 400, R405, K500 (Special Metals)
Nicorros (VDM) Alloy 400 parent material is noted for its
good resistance to both hydrofluoric acid and
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS
APPLICATIONS hydrogen fluoride vapour. However, weld metal

Nimrod 190 deposits 65%Ni-30%Cu weld metal based compositions within standard specification
on Monel alloy 400 with raised levels of manganese limits have inferior resistance to these media.
and titanium to suppress hot cracking and porosity. It A fully optimised composition for this specific
is optimised to give the highest as-welded ductility and application is not currently available. Contact
strength attainable in weld metal of this type.
Metrode for guidance.
For welding alloy 400 and similar parent material to
itself and to others in the Ni-Cu alloy system, such as
pure nickel and cupronickel. Welds in alloy K500 are
satisfactory, but cannot match the strength of this PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
precipitation-hardened alloy. Castings of alloy 400 Process Product Specification
with up to about 1.5%Si are welded with Nimrod 190,
but higher silicon grades such as BS3071 NA2 and ASTM MMA Nimrod 190 AWS ENiCu-7
A743 M35-2 are virtually unweldable because of HAZ TIG/MIG/SAW 65NiCu AWS ERNiCu-7
cracking.
For dissimilar joints between alloy 400 and other alloys

or steels, sensitivity to dilution by Fe (20-30%) or Cr (3-
6%) can lead to low ductility (or bend-test fissuring)
in weld metal close to the fusion boundary. Direct
welds to mild or low alloy steels are satisfactory with
dilution control, although ENiCrFe-X (ERNiCr-3 wire)
is preferable and necessary for stainless and higher
chromium alloys (see data sheets D-10 and D-11).
Alternatively, the steel or alloy can be buttered with
pure nickel (see data sheet D-50) and this procedure is
also useful when surfacing with alloy 400 consumables.
Alloy 400 has a useful combination of strength, thermal

conductivity and resistance to corrosion by seawater,
inorganic salts, sulphuric and hydrofluoric acids,
hydrogen fluoride and alkalis. Applications include
heat exchangers, piping, vessels and evaporators in the
offshore, marine, chemical, petrochemical and power
engineering industries.
NIMROD 190
NICKEL-COPPER MMA ELECTRODE FOR MONEL ALLOY 400
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Special basic carbonate-fluoride-rutile flux system on matching 400 core wire to give low levels of residuals.
Deoxidation system designed to ensure sound deposits.
The raised levels of manganese and titanium help suppress hot cracking and porosity.
Analysis is optimised to give the highest as-welded ductility and strength attainable in weld metal of this type.
The smaller electrode sizes are particularly suitable for fixed pipework welds demanding qualification in the ASME 6G position.
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.11M ENiCu-7
QW432 F-No 42

C Mn Si * S P Ni Cu Ti Fe Al
min. -- 1.0 -- -- -- 62.0 27.0 -- 0.5 --
max. 0.15 4.0 1.5 0.015 0.02 69.0 34.0 1.0 2.5 0.5
Typical 0.08 3.5 1.2 0.005 0.01 63 30 0.9 1 0.03
* DIN maximum 1.0% Si
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

5d 27 35

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 70 90 120
max. A 80 110 145 190
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 350
kg/carton 12.6 13.5 15.0 15.0
STORAGE
FUME DATA
1 7 4 16 8 1.2
www.metrode.com DS D-60-NIMROD 190 | Rev. 01-03/16 317

65NiCu
SOLID WIRES FOR TIG, MIG & SAW TO MATCH MONEL ALLOYS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

AWS A5.14M ERNiCu-7 QW432 F-No 42

C Mn Si S P Ni Cu Ti Fe Al
Min. -- 3.0 -- -- -- 62.0 28.0 1.5 -- --
Max. 0.15 4.0 1.2 0.015 0.020 69.0 32.0 3.0 2.5 1.2
Typical 0.03 3.2 0.2 0.005 0.005 64 29 2.2 <1 0.1

NICKEL BASE ALLOYS
5d 25 38

SAW NiCu DC+ 2.4 300A, 28V
* Ar + 1-5%H2 also suitable.
PACKAGING DATA
TIG -- 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube
MIG 15kg spool -- --
SAW -- -- 25kg reel
FUME DATA
2 2 <0.1 68 0.1 <0.5 0.7
318 www.metrode.com DS D-60-65NiCu | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
CUPRONICKEL ALLOYS
ALLOY TYPE
MICROSTRUCTURE
70/30 and 90/10 copper-nickel alloys.
Solid solution, single phase alloy.
70/30 90/10 WELDING GUIDELINES
ASTM/UNS C71500 C70600
Preheating not normally required, maximum
C96400 (cast) C96200 (cast)
interpass temperature 150°C and no PWHT.
DIN 2.0882 2.0872
Contamination of the weld zone with foreign
2.0883
material, particularly any source of lead, tin or zinc
BS CN106 CN102
(eg. Gun metals) must be scrupulously avoided to
CN107
prevent weld metal cracking.
CN108
CDA CA715 CA706
Proprietary Kunifer 30 (IMI) Kunifer 10 (IMI)
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

Cunifer 30 Cunifer 10
(Krupp VDM) (Krupp VDM) No closely related alloys but the alloy 400 (D-60) or
The Cupromet N30 and 70CuNi can be used for weld- pure nickel (D-50) consumables may be required as
ing the 70/30 and 90/10 base materials; the 90CuNi is a buffer layer for cladding applications.
only suitable for the 90/10 alloys.
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
MMA Cupromet N30 AWS ECuNi
APPLICATIONS TIG/MIG 70CuNi AWS ERCuNi
These consumables deposit a copper-nickel weld TIG 90CuNi BS C16
metal; the MMA electrode and 70CuNi solid wire are
both nominally 67%Cu and 30%Ni, whereas the 90CuNi
solid wire is nominally 86%Cu and 10.5%Ni. The 70/30
consumables are suitable for welding 70/30, 80/20 and
90/10 base materials. The 70/30 consumables match
the 70/30 base materials for strength and colour and
overmatch the 90/10 alloys for strength.
The consumables are suitable for surfacing and

cladding provided the need for an appropriate
buttering layer is addressed, normally either alloy 400
(D-60) or pure nickel (D-50).
Applications include offshore construction,

desalination plant, evaporators, condensers etc, in salt
and sea water processing systems.

CUPROMET N30
ALL-POSITIONAL MMA ELECTRODE FOR CUPRONICKEL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode made on matching 70/30 core wire with a special basic flux system giving very low residuals (S, P, Pb, Sn, Zn etc) and
hence maximum crack resistance. Suitable for all-positional welding.

AWS A5.6M ECuNi QW432 F-No 34

Cu Mn Si S P Ni Fe Ti Pb
min. bal 1.00 -- -- -- 29.0 0.40 -- --
max. -- 2.50 0.50 0.015 0.020 33.0 0.75 0.50 0.02
Typical 67 1.8 0.2 0.005 0.010 30 0.6 0.15 0.002

NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

5d -- 36
Hardness, mid (HV) -- 130

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 300 350 350
kg/carton 12.6 15.0 15.0 15.0
STORAGE
FUME DATA
<1 2 3 16 15 1.2
320 www.metrode.com DS D-70-CUPROMET N30 | Rev. 01-03/16

70CuNi
SOLID 70/30 CUPRONICKEL WIRES FOR TIG AND MIG
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

AWS A5.7M ERCuNi QW432 F-No 34
BS EN ISO 24373 S Cu 7158 / CuNi30Mn1FeTi

Mn Si S P Cu Ni Fe Ti Pb C
Min. 0.5 -- -- -- bal 29.0 0.40 0.20 -- --
Max. 1.0 0.25 0.01 0.02 -- 32.0 0.7 0.50 0.02 0.04
Typical 0.8 0.01 0.005 0.003 67 31 0.5 0.3 0.001 0.03

NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

Hardness (HV) 105

TIG Argon or Ar + 1-5%H2 DC- 2.4 100A, 12V
MIG Argon or Ar-He Pulsed 1.2 160A, 28V
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4
TIG -- 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube
FUME DATA
<1 5 <0.1 22 <0.1 72 0.3
www.metrode.com DS D-70-70CuNi | Rev. 01-03/16 321

90CuNi
SOLID 90/10 CUPRONICKEL WIRE FOR TIG
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for TIG welding

BS EN ISO 24373 S Cu 7061 / CuNi10 QW432 F-No 34

Mn Si S P Cu Ni Fe Ti Pb C
min. 0.5 -- -- -- bal 9.0 0.5 0.1 -- --
max. 1.5 0.2 0.02 0.02 -- 11.0 2.0 0.5 0.02 0.05
Typical 0.8 0.02 0.001 0.002 86 10.5 1.2 0.3 0.001 0.01

Hardness cap/mid (HV) 105
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

TIG Argon or Ar + 1-5%H2 DC- 2.4 100A, 12V
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2
TIG 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube
FUME DATA
2 5 <0.1 8 <0.1 80 0.3
322 www.metrode.com DS D-70-90CuNi | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM ALLOY B2
ALLOY TYPE
MICROSTRUCTURE
Ni-28%Mo consumables to match alloy B2. Solid solution alloy, high nickel austenite with some
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED microsegregation typical of as-deposited weld
metal (homogenised by solution treatment around
wrought cast 1150°C and rapidly cooled for casting repairs).
ASTM/UNS B333, B335, B619, B626 A494: N-7M
UNS N10001 (alloy B) A743: N-12M
WELDING GUIDELINES
UNS N10665 (alloy B2) A744: N-12M
DIN 2.4617 2.4685, 2.4882 No preheat and maximum interpass of 150°C for
wrought alloys.
BS 3146: ANC 15 For castings of low ductility a preheat-interpass of
Proprietary Hastelloy alloy B-2 (Haynes) NB (Paralloy) up to 200-300°C may be required on sections above
Nimofer 6928 (VDM) Langalloy B (Meighs) 15mm. In this case a post-weld solution treatment
AR5 (LaBour/Darwins) must be applied to restore satisfactory weld area
Similar alloys: properties.
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

UNS N10675, Hastelloy Alloy B-3 (Haynes).
UNS N10629, DIN 2.4600, Nimofer 6629 (VDM), alloy B-4. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
APPLICATIONS Alloy B-2 was introduced to suppress the

These consumables deposit nickel-molybdenum formation of carbides and silicon-rich intermetallic
weld metal with very low carbon and silicon levels phases which occur in the original alloy B during
appropriate for alloy B-2, although it is equally processing and welding. However, experience
suitable for the original alloy B, now obsolete in has revealed that elimination of Fe promoted
wrought form. In addition, specially controlled levels sensitivity to another intermetallic, beta phase
of iron and chromium ensure good as-welded ductility Ni4Mo. This can be limited significantly by
in multipass deposits. controlled Fe (and Cr) additions within the B-2
specification, and this modification is extended
These modifications bring the composition close in the new alloys B-3 (1.5%Fe, 1.5%Cr) and B-4
to the more recent alloys B-3 and B-4 which have (3%Fe, 1.3%Cr). Intermetallics reduce ductility and
better microstructural stability and weldability than corrosion resistance.
alloy B-2. There are no electrode specifications for If PWHT is required to restore maximum corrosion
these alloys at present, and these consumables are resistance of casting repairs, castings should be
therefore offered as an acceptable candidate within solution treated at about 1150°C followed by a
current specification limits. These alloys are designed
rapid cool.
to resist hydrochloric acid at all concentrations and
temperatures up to boiling point under non-oxidising
conditions. They are also resistant to hydrogen
chloride gas, sulphuric and acetic acids under certain PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
conditions. The newer alloys B-3 and B-4 with Process Product Specification
additional Fe and Cr have improved SCC resistance
MMA Nimax B2L AWS ENiMo-7
in chloride media. Contamination of acid media with
oxidising ferric or cupric salts must be avoided. Alloys
with much higher chromium (C-4 or C-276 etc.) are
superior under oxidising conditions.
Applications include pumps, valves and process

equipment operating in aggressive environments in
chemical plant.
NIMAX B2L
HIGH MOLYBDENUM NICKEL BASE MMA ELECTRODE TO MATCH ALLOY B-2
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode made on pure nickel core wire with a special basic flux coating to give low levels of impurities.
Sizes above 3.2mm are not suitable for positional welding.

AWS A5.11M ENiMo-7 QW432 F-No 4 4

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo W Cu Fe Co V
min. -- -- -- -- -- 0.3 64.5 26 -- -- 1.0 -- --
max. 0.02 1.75 0.2 0.015 0.02 1.0 bal 30 1.0 0.50 2.0 1.0 0.4
Typical 0.018 1.3 0.1 0.005 0.01 0.7 68 28 0.1 0.01 1.5 0.04 0.1

NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

4d 25 31
Elongation (%)
5d 22 30
ASTM A494 castings require elongation >6% (N-12MV) or >20% (N-7M) after solution treatment.

min. A 70 90 130
max. A 115 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 12.6 15.0 14.1
STORAGE
FUME DATA
1 2 10 0.2 15 0.2 16 5
324 www.metrode.com DS D-80-NIMAX B2L | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
EPRI P87
MICROSTRUCTURE
High alloy austenite.
ALLOY TYPE
EPRI P87 is a Ni-Fe weld metal covered by U.S.Patent
7,562,807 «Weld Filler For Welding Dissimilar Alloy Steels WELDING GUIDELINES
and Method Using Same,» July 21, 2009.
Preheat and PWHT requirements will be
determined by the base material being welded. For
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED example P91 is normally preheated to 200°C and
PWHT at 760°C for 2 hours (or time appropriate to
Designed for dissimilar joints between austenitic stain-
material thickness). Alternatively if P91 is subjected
less steels (eg. 304H) and creep resisting CrMo (eg. P91).
to a full N+T the heat treatment would typically be
Suitable for as-welded, PWHT or N+T joints in CrMo 1060°C/1 hour + 760°C/2 hours.
steels.
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

APPLICATIONS
EPRI P87 consumables are designed for welding high The alloy is balanced to provide excellent resistance
temperature creep resisting CrMo steels, including to carbide formation at the fusion boundary.
P91. The consumables can be used for dissimilar
The thermal expansion coefficient is also closer to
applications between CrMo creep resisting steels and
austenitic stainless steels. The EPRI P87 consumables the base material than with standard nickel base
are also suitable for joining CrMo steels to themselves. weld metals.
The EPRI P87 weld metal is also proposed for N+T

joints in P91. The weld metal will allow joints to be
buttered in the workshop and then subjected to a full PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
N+T heat treatment; joints on the buttered faces can Process Product Specification
then be completed in the field without the need for MMA EPRI P87 --
PWHT.
TIG/MIG EPRI P87 --
The all-weld metal strength at ambient temperature
may not meet that of P91 but transverse tests
have shown strengths above the P91 base material
requirement, and elevated temperature strength
exceeds the minimum base material requirement.

EPRI P87
BASIC MMA ELECTRODE FOR HIGH TEMPER ATURE APPLICATIONS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a special basic flux covering on a nickel-iron alloy core wire.
The electrode is optimised for DC+ welding in all positions including fixed pipework in the ASME 5G/6G positions.
Recovery about 115% with respect to core wire, 65% with respect to whole electrode.

No current national standards but covered by U.S Patent 7,562,807. QW432 F-No --
COMPOSITION (WELD METAL WT %)

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Nb Fe
Typical 0.1 1.5 0.3 0.008 0.008 9 Bal 2 1 38

Ambient Hot strength 593°C
Typical values
as-welded as-welded N+T
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

Reduction of area (%) 30 24 33
Impact ISO (J) +20°C 80 -- --

min. A 60 70 90
max. A 80 110 150
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 12.6 15.0 14.7
STORAGE
Direct use from tin is satisfactory for much longer than an 8h working shift.
Redry 200-250°C/1-2h to restore to as-packed condition. Maximum 350°C, 3 cycles, 10h total.
Storage of redried electrodes at 100-200°C in holding oven or 50-150°C in heated quiver: no limit, but maximum 6 weeks
recommended.
FUME DATA
9 5 6 2.5 <0.5 12 2
326 www.metrode.com DS D-87-EPRI P87E | Rev. 01-03/16

EPRI P87
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

No current national standards but covered by U.S Patent 7,562,807. QW432 F-No --

C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Nb Fe
Typical 0.1 1.5 0.3 0.008 0.008 9 Bal 2 1 38

Typical values as welded
Impact ISO (J) 150
NICKEL BASE ALLOYS

PACKAGING DATA
TIG -- 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube
MIG 12.5kg spool -- --
FUME DATA
Fume composition (wt %) (TIG fume negligible)
9 5 6 2.5 <0.5 12 2
www.metrode.com DS D-87-EPRI P87 | Rev. 01-03/16 327

Section E : REPAIR & MAINTENANCE HANWORTH LANE, CHERTSEY
Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
This section includes a diverse range of consumables for many repair and maintenance applications, including cast iron, dissimilar
welding and hardfacing. There is also a selection of non-ferrous solid wires for copper base alloys. The final selection of products
covers mild steel TIG wires and some specialist mild steel electrodes.
CONSUMABLES FOR WELDING CAST IRONS
The welding of cast irons has been notoriously called a 'black-art'. Individual castings of equivalent types can vary in response to
welding, and so do the details of procedure considered critical by experienced practitioners. Most castings are produced to net shape,
so welding is usually for repair and maintenance rather than fabrication. Structural load-bearing use is typically compressive, not
critically tensile.
The two commonest types of cast iron have around 3%C and 2%Si. Flake graphite grey iron varies in quality and impurity content,
with relatively low strength and ductility. Spheroidal graphite (SG), nodular or ductile iron is treated with magnesium, has fewer
impurities, superior mechanical properties, and more reliable weldability.
Electrodes based on pure nickel and nickel-iron alloys are most widely used. Electrode flux coverings are of basic type plus graphite
to give a weld deposit deoxidised and saturated with carbon. This mimics some of the characteristics of cast iron but is non-
hardenable and easily machined. Recommended welding techniques are given on relevant data sheets.
Another group, high alloy austenitic irons (Ni-Resist types) are also produced in flake and SG grades. Electrodes of the NiFe type are
used because matching weld metal is too hard. Preheat of 300-350°C is required for the flake graphite grades, but for the SG grades
buttering at low temperatures is preferred to avoid HAZ hot cracking.
MAINTENANCE & REPAIR
Martensitic cast iron (Ni-Hard types) and the various white irons are generally considered too crack-sensitive or brittle to be welded
satisfactorily.

MMA CI Soft Flow Ni ENi-CI E C Ni-CI 1
E-10 Ni Cast Iron
TIG/MIG Nickel 2Ti ERNi-1 S Ni 20 6 1
CI Special Cast NiFe ENiFe-CI E C NiFe-CI 1
MMA
E-11 NiFe Cast Iron CI Met NiFe ENiFe-CI E C NiFe-CI 1
MIG 55NiFe - S C NiFe-1
328 www.metrode.com DS E-01 | Rev. 01-03/16

DISSIMILAR WELDING CONSUMABLES
Transition welds between dissimilar materials are often necessary, requiring weld metal compatible with dilution by these materials
to provide satisfactory service properties. Weld metal dissimilar to the base material may also enable a safer or simplified welding
procedure to be used, such as in armour welding. Dissimilar weld metal is almost always applied when buttering, cladding or
surfacing. The metallurgy of dissimilar metal welds is a large and complex subject, considering the variety of possible combinations
of industrial alloys and service conditions as a whole.
The popular stainless types in this section are restricted to service at near ambient temperatures between most ferrous materials,
from mild steel up to stainless steels, but excluding high nickel and non-ferrous alloys. Note that 309L and 309Mo types in Section B
(data sheets B-50 and B-51) are also relevant to these applications.
Compositions do not match any commercial steels, but are designed to resist cracking and remain ductile and tough when diluted by
base materials as indicated on the data sheets. The Schaeffler diagram is useful to assess the risk of dilution cracking, except for 307
types which have high manganese rather than increasing ferrite content to prevent hot cracking. Generally, if dilution gives fully
austenitic weld metal this increases the risk of hot cracking, whilst the presence of martensite reduces bend ductility and increases
the risk of cold cracking. Low dilution buttering procedures can help in difficult cases.
Little or no preheat is required to avoid HAZ cold cracking in hardenable 'difficult to weld' steels because almost no hydrogen diffuses
from austenitic weld metal into the HAZ. The limited toughness of hardened untempered HAZ and fusion zones in high carbon alloy
steels should be considered in relation to impact or shock loads, although increasing preheat helps to moderate peak HAZ hardness
and promote some tempering.
Post-weld-heat-treatment (PWHT) is deliberately avoided unless a tempered HAZ is essential to reduce hardness. Depending on
material combination, PWHT can reduce weld ductility and promote fusion zone carbide embrittlement, with overall stress-relief
limited by dissimilar thermal expansions. Nickel-base weld metal minimises these limitations, and should also be used when high
temperature or cryogenic service is involved (see data sheets D-10 and D-11).

MMA Armet 1 E308Mo-16 E 20 10 3 R
Armour
E-20 Supercore 20.9.3 E308MoT0-1/4 T 20 10 3 R C/M 3
plate FCW
Supercore 20.9.3P E308MoT1-1/4 T 20 10 3 P C/M 2
Metmax 307R E307-26 E 18 9 Mn Mo R

MMA
E-21 307 19.9.6Mn (E307-16) (E18 8 Mn R)
MIG 19.9.6Mn (ER307) 18 8 Mn
MMA 29.9 Super R (E312-17) E 29 9 R
E-22 312
TIG/SAW 312S94 ER312 29 9
COPPER AND COPPER ALLOY WIRES
The non-ferrous alloys in the following section are primarily used for joining equivalent base materials, although many are also used
for surfacing. There are no MMA electrodes in this section; the gas shielded solid wire TIG/MIG processes are preferred for high
integrity work. Note the cupronickel consumables are in section D, details can be found on data sheet D-70.

E-30 Copper TIG/MIG 100Cu ERCu S Cu 1898/CuSn1
E-31 Copper Silicon TIG 97CuSi ERCuSi-A S Cu 6560/CuSiMn 1
E-33 Bronze TIG 92CuSn (ERCuSn-C) S Cu 5210/CuSn8P
E-36 Al Bronze TIG/MIG 90CuAl ERCuAl-A2 S Cu 6180/CuAl10Fe
E-37 Ni Al Bronze TIG/MIG 80CuNiAl ERCuNiAl S Cu 6328/CuAl9Ni5Fe3Mn2
www.metrode.com DS E-01 | Rev. 01-03/16 329

CONSUMABLES FOR SURFACING AND HARDFACING
Hardfacing is just one aspect of surfacing in general. In principle, almost any electrode with the desired properties can be chosen to
modify the working surface of a base metal for improved service life or performance.
Electrodes in this section are types recognised for their value to combat many forms of destructive wear found in different working
environments. Flexibility of electrode design allows overlay compositions unique to this process, or similar to base materials for tool
and component repairs.
The most suitable type for a given application can lead to conflicting choices. Often this is based (perhaps with good reason) on
previous experience, or even the simple judgement of 'harder is better'. This is rarely strictly true because actual performance usually
involves a combination of factors. These include response of the particular weld composition and microstructure to size and density
of abrasive (when present), impact, corrosion, friction and heat. Weld metal cracking, the need for buffer layers and alloy cost are also
relevant. Brief details are given to help assess some of these questions.
Martensitic types offer the lowest cost-hardness ratio. These transformable steels air-harden roughly in proportion to carbon and
alloy level. Higher alloys include high speed and hot-work tool steels which may be heat treated if used for tool repairs. If critical,
cracking in martensitic types is easily controlled with preheat. Lower hardness types are used for extensive build-up or intermediate
layers.
Chromium carbide types resist extreme grinding abrasion, increasing with volume and type of carbides in the high alloy matrix. With
almost no ductility or response to heat treatment, build-up is limited by stress cracking, although this may not be detrimental to
service performance.
Cobalt base types are costly but excel at high temperatures in combination with aggressive wear or corrosion. Increasing preheat with
hardness and weld thickness is needed for the alloy order 6, 12 and 1, to control stress cracking but none for the more ductile alloy 8,
which also resists thermal shock and work-hardens strongly.
'Hadfield' non-stainless austenitic 13%Mn steels, show unique resistance to gouging and impact or coarse particle abrasion. Others
such as type 307 (data sheet E-21) could be classed as work-hardening types for ambient temperatures.
Buffer or build-up layers are usually intermediate in alloying between base and capping layers. Hardness of a martensitic type will be
reduced if deposited on a stainless buffer (data sheets B-50, B-51, E-20, E-21 and E-22), but would be ideal beneath chromium carbide
and work-hardening types (and generally optional for cobalt base).

E-45 C MMA Nimax C (ENiCrMo-5) ENi2
MMA Methard 350 - (EFe1)
E-50 350
FCW Hardcore 350 - TFe1
Methard 650 - (EFe2)
MMA
E-51 650 Methard 650R - (EFe2)
FCW Hardcore 650 - TFe2
E-53 Tool steel MMA Methard 750TS EFe5-B EFe4
Methard 850 - EFe14
MMA
Methard 950 - EFe14
E-55 850/950
Hardcore 850 - TFe15
FCW
Hardcore 950 - TFe15
E-58 1050 MMA Methard 1050 - EFe16
E-60 13%Mn MMA Workhard 13Mn EFeMn-B EFe9
E-65 Cobalt MMA Cobstel 6 ECoCr-A (ECo2)
E-66 Cobalt MMA Cobstel 8 ECoCr-E ECo1

SPECIALIST RANGE OF MILD STEEL CONSUMABLES
The mild steel TIG wires and flux cored wire are used for general purpose mild steel fabrication, the other consumables in this section
have specialised applications. Ultramild is an E6018 type depositing soft and ductile low hydrogen weld metal mainly for buffer layers.
Nilsil is a modified E6013 type giving very low silicon weld metal for welding galvanising baths.
EN / EN ISO
DataSheet Alloy Process Product AWS Classifications
Classifications
ER70S-2 ER70S-2 A15
TIG ER70S-3 ER70S-3 (A17)
E-70 Mild steel
ER70S-6 ER70S-6 A18
FCW Metcore DWA50 E71T-1 T 422 PM1
E-71 Low strength mild steel MMA Ultramild E6018 -
E-72 Low silicon MMA Nilsil - -

Data Sheet E-10 HANWORTH LANE, CHERTSEY
Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
PURE NICKEL FOR CAST IRON

Pure nickel type for welding cast iron. Welding is often carried out without preheat but
heavy multipass deposits or highly restrained joints
may require preheat up to 150°C.
Prior to welding surfaces should be prepared by
ASTM A159, A319, A126, A48 careful gouging and/or grinding using limited
BS 1452 – Grey iron amounts of heat to avoid propagating cracks. The
area to be welded should be cleaned as far as
APPLICATIONS practicable from sand, oil, grease, paint or rust.
Pure nickel consumables are used for welding and repair Preheating can help to remove impregnated oil on
of standard grades of grey cast irons and malleable used castings which are being repaired.
cast irons to give low strength deposits which can be
readily machined even in thin layers. The resistance If welding is carried out without preheat it is
to hardening of diluted weld metal can be useful for desirable to minimise the width of the HAZ by using
buttering prior to filling with more economic NiFe a low heat input and low interpass temperature. A
consumables (data sheet E-11). skip welding technique can be beneficial in helping
to achieve this.
They are also suitable for joining these cast irons to
steels, monels, copper etc where high strength is not For thicker section welds and highly restrained welds
required. preheat up to150°C may be necessary. Light peening
to reduce contraction stresses can also be beneficial
Typical components are general engineering castings, but care should be taken not to exhaust the ductility
including machine bases, engine blocks, gear housings of the weld metal.
etc operating under low stresses.

Buttering the joint faces, or sides of the repair
cavity, prior to filling can also be desirable whether a
preheat is used or not.
MICROSTRUCTURE
MMA electrode deposits austenitic nickel with finely On completion of welding the workpiece should be
distributed graphite; the solid wire deposits almost
allowed to cool slowly, using insulation if necessary.
pure nickel refined with Ti.

The NiFe alloy (data sheet E-11) is also used for welding
cast iron and covers many similar applications.
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
MMA CI Soft Flow Ni AWS ENi-CI
TIG/MIG Nickel 2Ti AWS ERNi-1

CI SOFT FLOW Ni
PURE NICKEL MMA ELECTRODE FOR CAST IRON
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with special basic-graphite flux (no barium compounds) on pure nickel core wire. Good refining action provides
maximum resistance to cracking and freedom from porosity. Sound welds can be produced even with oil impregnated and
contaminated surfaces. The stable arc characteristics also provide uniform low penetration and minimum dilution. The smallest
diameters can be used in all positions including vertical down.
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.15M ENi-CI
QW432 F-No 1
BS EN 1071 E C Ni-CI 1
PA/1G PB/2F PC/2G PF/3Gu PG/3Gd PE/4G

C Mn Si S P Cu Ni Fe Al
min. -- -- -- -- -- -- 92 -- --
max. 2.0 2.5 2.0 0.03 0.03 2.5 bal 5.0 1.0
Typical 0.5 2 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.1 96 2 0.1

As welded Typical
Elongation (%) 5-10
Hardness (HV) 140-160

Mechanical properties will depend upon amount of dilution, and variations in welding procedure and run sequence.

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0*
min. A 60 70 90 120
max. A 80 110 150 190
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0*
Length (mm) 300 350 400 450
kg/carton 13.5 13.5 19.5 19.2
* 5.0mm diameter made to order, minimum order quantity.
STORAGE
3 hermetically sealed ring-pull metal tins per carton, with unlimited shelf life. Direct use from tin is satisfactory.
Storage: Recommended ambient storage conditions for opened tins (using plastic lid): < 60% RH, > 18°C.
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Ni Cu F Ba OES (mg/m3)
0.5 1 10 <0.5 12 <0.5 5
www.metrode.com DS E-10-CI SOFT FLOW Ni | Rev. 01-03/16 333

NICKEL 2Ti
SOLID PURE NICKEL WIRE FOR CAST IRON
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for TIG and MIG welding. This is the same wire that is used for alloy 200 pure nickel base materials (data sheet D-50) but
it is also useful for welding cast irons as a match for the CI Soft Flow Ni electrode.

AWS A5.14M ERNi-1 Also known generically QW432 F-No 41
BS EN ISO 18274 Ni 2061 as filler metal 61 (FM61)

C Mn Si S P Ni Ti Al Cu Fe
Min. -- -- -- -- -- 92.0 2.0 -- -- --
Max. 0.15 1.0 0.7 0.015 0.03 bal 3.5 1.5 0.25 1.0
Typical <0.02 0.4 <0.3 0.005 0.005 96 3 0.1 <0.02 0.1

5d 31

MIG Ar or Ar-He Pulsed 1.2 150A, 29V (mean)
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4
TIG -- 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube 2.5 kg tube
MIG 15kg spool - - -
FUME DATA
2 2 <0.1 68 0.1 <0.5 0.7
334 www.metrode.com DS E-10-NICKEL 2Ti | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
NICKEL-IRON FOR CAST IRON

ALLOY TYPE
Nominally Fe-55% Ni alloy for the repair and For thicker section welds and highly restrained welds
joining of cast iron. preheat in the range 150-250°C may be necessary.
Light peening to reduce contraction stresses can
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED also be beneficial but care should be taken not to
exhaust the ductility of the weld metal.
ASTM A602, A47, A338, A220
Buttering the joint faces, or sides of the repair
BS 2789 – SG irons
cavity, prior to filling can also be desirable whether a
6681 – Ductile irons preheat is used or not.
On completion of welding the workpiece should be
allowed to cool slowly, using insulation if necessary.
APPLICATIONS
The NiFe alloy is suitable for welding all grades of cast
iron but particularly for spheroidal graphite (SG), nodular ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
or ductile irons and some alloy cast irons. It provides The NiFe weld metals produce higher strength than
compatible strength, ductility and toughness, coupled the pure nickel cast iron types and are therefore
with good machinability. preferable for dissimilar joints, nodular irons
The NiFe consumables can also be used on some of the and higher strength cast irons. The NiFe types
high alloy austenitic irons (Ni-Resist). The flake graphite are also less sensitive to hot cracking caused by
grades are welded with a preheat of 300-350°C but the pick-up of impurities such as phosphorus which
SG grades are best buttered using low heat input, and are often present in castings. The low matrix
low temperature techniques to avoid HAZ hot cracking. contraction coefficient of NiFe is also enhanced in
Note the martensitic Ni-Hard cast irons and white irons the higher carbon electrode deposits by expansion
are generally considered to be unweldable because they accompanying graphite precipitation and results in

are too crack-sensitive. lower stresses in heavy repairs; the possibility of cold
The NiFe consumables are also suitable for welding cracking is therefore reduced.
transition joints between cast iron and cast steels, and
cast iron and mild/low alloy steels.
Typical components are machine bases, pump bodies,
engine blocks, gears and transmission housings. RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
The pure nickel types (data sheet E-10) are also
WELDING GUIDELINES used for welding cast iron.
Welding is often carried out without preheat but
heavy multipass deposits or highly restrained joints
may require preheat 150-250°C.
Prior to welding surfaces should be prepared by PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
careful gouging and/or grinding using limited Process Product Specification
amounts of heat to avoid propagating cracks. The
CI Special Cast NiFe AWS ENiFe-CI
area to be welded should be cleaned as far as MMA
practicable from sand, oil, grease, paint or rust. CI-Met NiFe AWS ENiFe-CI
Preheating can help to remove impregnated oil on MIG 55NiFe BS NA47
used castings which are being repaired.
If welding is carried out without preheat it is
desirable to minimise the width of the HAZ by using
a low heat input and low interpass temperature. A
skip welding technique can be beneficial in helping
to achieve this.

CI SPECIAL CAST NiFe
NIFE MMA ELECTRODE FOR MOST GR ADES OF CAST IRON
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with special basic-graphite flux (no barium compounds) on a 55%Ni alloy core wire. Good refining action provides
maximum resistance to cracking and freedom from porosity.
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.15M ENiFe-CI
QW432 F-No
BS EN 1071 E C NiFe-CI 1

C Mn Si S P Fe Ni Al Cu
min. -- -- -- -- -- bal 45.0 -- --
max. 2.0 2.5 2.0 0.03 0.03 bal 60.0 1.0 2.5
Typical 0.5 1.5 0.5 0.010 0.005 42 55 <0.1 <0.1

As welded Typical
Elongation (%) 10-12


min. A 60 70 90
max. A 80 110 150
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 400
kg/carton 13.5 13.2 15.0
STORAGE
Redry 100 – 150°C/1-2h to restore to as-packed condition. Maximum 150° C, 3 cycles, 10h total
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Ni Cr Cu F Ba OES (mg/m3)
3.5 1 2 <0.2 <0.5 12 <0.5 5
336 www.metrode.com DS E-11-CI SPECIAL CAST NiFe | Rev. 01-03/16

CI-MET NiFe
NIFE MMA ELECTRODE ON BI-METALLIC CORE WIRE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with special basic-graphite flux (no barium compounds) on bi-metallic Fe clad Ni core wire. Good refining action
provides maximum resistance to cracking and freedom from porosity. The bi-metallic core wire minimises the risks of over-
heating normally associated with NiFe MMA electrodes and produces excellent operability.
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.15M ENiFe-CI
QW432 F-No
BS EN 1071 E C NiFe-CI 1

C Mn Si S P Fe Ni Al Cu
min. -- -- -- -- -- bal 45.0 -- --
max. 2.0 2.5 2.0 0.03 0.03 bal 60.0 1.0 2.5
Typical 0.5 1.5 0.5 0.010 <0.01 42 55 <0.1 <0.1

As welded Typical
Elongation (%) 10-12

min. A 60 75 100
max. A 80 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 400
kg/carton 13.5 13.5 18.0
STORAGE
Redry 100 – 150°C/1-2h to restore to as-packed condition. Maximum 150° C, 3 cycles, 10h total
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Ni Cr Cu F Ba OES (mg/m3)
3.5 1 2 <0.2 <0.5 12 <0.5 5
www.metrode.com DS E-11-CI-MET NiFe| Rev. 01-03/16 337

55NiFe
SOLID MIG WIRE FOR WELDING CAST IRONS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for MIG welding.

BS EN 1071 S C NiFe-1 QW432 F-No

C Mn Si S P Ni Fe Cu Co
Min. -- -- -- -- -- 52.0 bal -- --
Max. 0.15 1.0 0.5 0.02 0.03 60.0 bal 0.5 2.0
Typical 0.05 0.7 0.2 <0.01 <0.01 58 40 0.01 0.05

Typical values as welded MIG (Ar-5%CO2)
Elongation (%) 24
Hardness (HV) 150

MIG Ar / Ar + 1-2%O2 / Ar + 2-25%CO2 / 100%CO2 DC+ 1.2 200A, 28V
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.2

MIG 15kg spool
FUME DATA
MIG fume composition, wt %:
35 2 <0.1 30 <0.5 1.7
338 www.metrode.com DS E-11-55NiFe | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
ARMOUR WELDING CONSUMABLES

20%Cr-10%Ni-2.5%Mo weld metal composition Preheat not generally required for CMn and low
designed for welding armour plate. alloy steels with up to 0.3%C. However 50-200°C is
recommended progressively with increasing base
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED material thickness, hardenability and restraint.
Armour plate: MVEE 816 (MoD)
Armox 816 (Swedish Steel) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Compass B555 (Sleeman) Because of the high ferrite level (20 FN) and moderate
13%Mn (Hadfield steel): Abro M (Creusot) carbon content (0.06%), these consumables are not
Red Diamond 14 suitable for cryogenic applications or structural service
(Spartan Redheugh) at temperatures exceeding about 300°C. Some loss
< 0.4%C hardenable steel: BS970 709M40 (En19), of ductility will occur if weldments are post weld heat
treated. They should not be confused with low carbon
817M40 (En24), 826M40 (En 26),
austenitic and duplex stainless alloys specifically
897M39 (EN40C) etc designed for corrosion resistance. However, AWS A5.4
Wear-resistant steels: Hardox 400 & 500 (Swedish Steel) and A5.22 include the related E308MoL which may be
ARQ360, A-R-COL (Corus) used for ASTM CF3M castings when a higher ferrite
Creusabro 4000, Abro 360 and 500 (Creusot) type than 316L is required for improved stress-corrosion
ABR 500 (Taysteel) resistance.
Red Diamond 20, 21, 22 (Spartan Redheugh) These consumables are used successfully for steels
which are judged ‘difficult to weld’ on the basis of their
ASTM: CF8M
carbon equivalent (CE). For example, armour plate and
Also for dissimilar combinations between the above and to En26 have CE ~ 1, potentially up to 1.36 maximum for
standard stainless steels and CMn steels
classical armour with nominal 0.3%C-2%Cr-0.5%Ni-
APPLICATIONS 0.4%Mo. Some proprietary armour steels are leaner,
with CE 1 max. The greatly hardened HAZ of these steels

These consumables are well-established and approved is only partially tempered in a multipass weldment,
for armour welding. They deposit a modified austenitic resulting in high sensitivity to hydrogen (cold) cracking.
stainless weld metal with moderately high ferrite content, By using a specially balanced austenitic consumable
giving strong, tough and crack-resistant welds in many this problem is avoided, because very little hydrogen
other hardenable steels, often without the need for can diffuse from the weld into the HAZ. It is still helpful
preheat. Applications include tanks, other military and to apply some preheat since this will encourage self-
security vehicles, general engineering components. tempering and reduce peak HAZ hardness. However,
They are also useful for welding many wear and abrasion- the presence of a hardened HAZ should be considered in
resisting steels, to avoid the need for ‘hydrogen control’ relation to service conditions
procedures, particularly for heavier sections and the harder
types. In addition, the high work-hardening rate gives
these welds good resistance to impact wear and scuffing. RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
This feature can also be exploited for overlays combined There is no equivalent solid wire but the 307 types (data
with corrosion and wet abrasion resistance. sheet E-21) provide the best alternative if required. For
Although the resistance to gouging abrasion of 13%Mn dissimilar joints etc. the 309L (B-50), 309Mo (B-51), 307
Hadfield steel is unique and arises from its extreme (E-21) and 29.9 types (E-22) may also be suitable
work-hardenability, these consumables have a long and
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
successful history for the build-up and reclamation of
this steel. It is an economic ductile buffer layer prior to Process Product Specification
hardfacing with high alloy weld metals such as chromium MMA Armet 1 AWS E308Mo-16
carbide types.
Supercore 20.9.3 AWS E308MoT0-1/4
FCW
Supercore 20.9.3.P AWS E308MoT1-1/4
MICROSTRUCTURE
Austenite with ferrite 10 – 25FN, typically about 20FN

ARMET 1
RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE FOR WELDING ARMOUR PLATE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Rutile MMA electrode made on austenitic stainless steel core wire. High moisture resistance, designed and manufactured with
low hydrogen technology to give weld metal with low potential hydrogen content.
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.4M (E308Mo-16)*
QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 20 10 3 R 32
QW442 A-No 8
APPROVALS: MoD MVEE 1050 Class 1A and 1B
*Mn: 2.0 – 3.0 for AWS standard

min. 0.03 0.5 -- -- -- 18.5 9.0 2.0 -- 10
max. 0.08 2.5 1.0 0.025 0.030 21.0 12.0 3.0 0.75 25
Typical 0.06 1.1 0.7 0.010 0.025 20 9.5 2.5 0.1 15
As welded min. typical
Tensile strength (MPa) 620 670-780
0.2% proof strength (MPa) 400 > 520
Elongation (%) 4d 35 > 40
5d 30 > 30
Reduction of area % -- > 25
> 55
-50°C -- > 45
Hardness (HV) -- 220 *

* Increases to about 400 – 450HV on work hardening

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 70 100 150
max. A 90 120 170 230
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 350
kg/carton 11.4 13.5 13.5 16.5
STORAGE
3 hermetically sealed ring-pull metal tins of redried electrodes at 50 – 200°C in holding oven or heated quiver: no limit, but maximum
6 weeks recommended. Recommended ambient storage conditions for opened tins (using plastic lid): < 60% RH, > 18°C.
Storage: of redried electrodes at 50 – 200°C in holding oven or heated quiver: no limit, but maximum 6 weeks recommended.
Recommended ambient storage conditions for opened tins (using plastic lid): < 60% RH, > 18°C..
FUME DATA
8 5 1 4 < 0.2 16 1.2
340 www.metrode.com DS E-20-ARMET 1 | Rev. 01-03/16

SUPERCORE 20.9.3, 20.9.3P
RUTILE FLUX CORED WIRE FOR WELDING ARMOUR PLATE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Flux cored wires – the wires are made with an austenitic stainless steel sheath and rutile flux system. Supercore 20.9.3 combines
easy operability, high deposit quality and exceptional weld bead appearance for downhand and HV welding. Supercore 20.9.3P is
designed for all-positional welding. including fixed pipework.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supercore 20.9.3 Supercore 20.9.3.P
QW432 F-No 6
AWS A5.22M E308MoT0-1/4 E308MoT1-1/4
QW442 A-No 8
BS EN ISO 17633-A T 20 10 3 R C/M 3 T 20 10 3 P C/M 2
BS EN ISO 17633-B TS308Mo-FM0 TS308Mo-FM1
APPROVALS: MoD MVEE 1050 Class VII MoD MVEE 1050 Class VII

min. -- 0.5 -- -- -- 19.5 9.0 2.0 -- 10
max. 0.08 2.5 0.9 0.025 0.035 21.0 11.0 3.0 0.3 25
Typical 0.06 1.2 0.5 0.01 0.03 20 9.5 2.8 0.05 17

5d 30 33
60
Hardness cap/mid -50°C -- 50
HV -- 230 *

Shielding gas: 80%Ar-20%CO2 at 20-25 l/min. Proprietary gas mixtures may be used but argon should not exceed 85%. The wire
is suitable for use on 100%CO2 but with some loss of cosmetic appearance and increased spatter.
Current: DC+ve ranges as below, with Ar-20%CO2 (when using CO2, voltages need to be increased by 2-3V)
Diameter (mm) Amp-Volt Range Typical Stickout
1.2 130A-25V to 250A-32V 180A-29V 15-20mm
1.2P 120 – 250A, 20 – 32V 160A, 26V 15 – 20mm
1.6 200A-28V to 330A-34V 230A-30V 15-25mm
PACKAGING DATA
Spools vacuum-sealed in barrier foil with cardboard carton: Supercore 20.9.3 - 15.0kg (1.2/1.6mm), Supercore 20.9.3.P - 12.5kg
(1.2mm).
The as-packed shelf life is virtually indefinite. Resistance to moisture absorption is high, but to maintain the high integrity of the
wire surface and prevent any possibility of porosity, it is advised that part-used spools are returned to polythene wrappers. Where
possible, preferred storage conditions are 60% RH max, 18°C min.
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Ni Cr3 Cr6 F OES (mg/m3)
Ar+20%CO2 14 11 1 8 4 5 1.2
CO2 17 10 1 9.5 1 5 5
www.metrode.com DS E-20-SUPERCORE 20.9.3, 20.9.3P | Rev. 01-03/16 341

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
307 FOR DISSIMILAR WELDS

Strong tough austenitic weld metal composition Consists of austenite with approximately 5FN.
for dissimilar joints and buffer layers.
WELDING GUIDELINES
Dissimilar combinations of CMn, stainless,
Preheat not generally required unless welding thick
hardenable, wear-resistant and armour steels. Also
sections, except that HAZ properties of higher carbon
suitable for 13%Mn manganese (Hadfield) steel. hardenable steels should be taken into consideration in
relation to service conditions.
APPLICATIONS
Mixed welding applications including the welding of mild, When welding 13%Mn (Hadfield) steels in order to
stainless, hardenable, and armour steels to themselves minimise embrittlement and cracking the work piece
or each other with or without preheat. Tolerance to must be kept cool. This means that the following
dilution (resistance to hot cracking) is provided by the high controls should be applied: no preheat, maximum
manganese content, unlike armour welding and 309 types interpass controlled to 150°C maximum, low heat input,
which depend on a high ferrite level. In some cases, they small weld beads and cool with water if necessary.
may offer an alternative to high nickel weld metal in joints
between cast iron and stainless steels. Weldments subject
to PWHT retain ductility with satisfactory toughness down
to -50°C. Reasonable scaling resistance up to 850°C.
For dissimilar joints etc. the 309L (B-50), 309Mo (B-
Can be used as buffer layers to weld or reclaim 13% Mn 51), armour welding consumables (E-20) and 29.9
(Hadfield) steel used in rock crushing plant and earth types (E-22) may also be suitable.
moving equipment. Buffer layer work hardens and can be
used as a base for Workhard 13Mn or Methard 650 or 850.
Has also been found satisfactory as buffer layer on cast iron PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
prior to hardsurfacing. Process Product Specification
Use as surfacing consumable which work hardens from 200
MetMax 307R AWS E307-26
MMA
to 400 HV, suitable for repair of alloy rails, crossing parts, 19.9.6Mn EN ISO E 18 8 Mn R
frogs etc. without need for preheat, however, the work- MIG 19.9.6Mn EN ISO G 18 8 Mn
hardening rate is lower than 13% Mn steel and overlays of
more than 1 layer may suffer unacceptable collapse under
heavy rolling loads. In this case they may be used as a
buffer under Workhard 13Mn.

METMAX 307R
RUTILE HIGH RECOVERY MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Rutile high recovery, metal powder, electrode made on high purity steel core wire. Moisture resistant coating ensures sound
porosity free deposits.
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.4M E307-26
QW432 F-No 5
BS EN ISO 3581 E 18 9 Mn Mo R 5 2
QW442 A-No

min. 0.04 3.3 -- -- -- 18.0 9.0 0.5 --
max. 0.14 4.75 0.9 0.025 0.035 21.5 10.7 1.5 0.75
Typical 0.1 4.0 0.6 0.010 0.015 19 9.5 0.8 0.1

As welded min. typical PWHT 600°C/2h
5d 25 36 --
85 --
-50°C -- 70 47
Hardness HV -- 210 * --


Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 90 130 160
max. A 115 155 210 260
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 350 350 450
kg/carton 12.0 13.5 13.2 15.0
STORAGE
FUME DATA
19 11 1 5 < 0.2 - 18 1
www.metrode.com DS E-21-METMAX 307R | Rev. 01-03/16 343

19.9.6Mn
ALL-POSITIONAL RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Rutile electrode made on nearly matching austenitic steel core wire. Moisture resistant coating ensures sound porosity free
deposits.
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.4M (E307-16) Nearest classification
BS EN ISO 3581 E 18 8 Mn R 3 2 F-No 5 (This is nearest
QW432 because the electrode does
not strictly conform to AWS)

min. -- 4.5 -- -- -- 17.0 7.0 --
max. 0.20 7.0 0.80 0.025 0.035 20.0 10.0 0.75
Typical 0.12 5.8 0.5 0.01 0.02 18 9 0.4

80
Hardness HV -- 210 *

min. A 60 75 100
max. A 90 120 155
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 300 350 350
kg/carton 12.0 14.1 15.0
STORAGE
FUME DATA
18 15 1 5 < 0.2 - 18 1
344 www.metrode.com DS E-21-19.9.6Mn | Rev. 01-03/16

19.9.6Mn
SOLID WIRE FOR MIG AND SAW
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for MIG welding.

AWS A5.9M Similar to ER307 QW432 F-No 6
(AWS ranges: 3.3-4.75%Mn, 19.5-22.0%Cr and 0.5-1.5%Mo) (This is nearest because the
BS EN ISO 14343-A G 18 8 Mn electrode does not strictly
conform to AWS)

Min. -- 5.0 -- -- -- 17.0 7.0 -- --
Max. 0.20 8.0 1.2 0.025 0.03 20.0 10.0 0.5 0.5
Typical 0.08 6 0.8 0.01 0.015 19 8.5 0.2 0.1

As welded MIG: Ar + 5%CO2 SAW
Elongation (%) 4d -- 42 41
5d 25 40 40
105 140
-50°C -- 65

MIG Ar+5%CO2 * DC+ 1.2 220A, 26V
* Other proprietary shielding gases also suitable eg. Ar+2%O2, Ar-He mixtures etc
PACKAGING DATA
MIG 15kg spool 15kg spool
FUME DATA
MIG fume composition, wt %:
30 26 12 3.5 <0.5 <01 3.8
www.metrode.com DS E-21-19.9.6Mn | Rev. 01-03/16 345

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
29.9 FOR DISSIMILAR WELDS

Austenite-ferrite weld metal composition of nominally Duplex austenite-ferrite microstructure with about
29%Cr-9%Ni for dissimilar joints and difficult to weld 40% ferrite.
steels.
WELDING GUIDELINES
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED Procedure will depend on base material. Preheat not
Medium and high carbon hardenable steels, tool steels normally required for small components and buffer
and free-cutting steels. layers, although desirable for thicker high carbon steels
Eg. BS970 part 21: 080M40 (En8), 070M55 (En9), 709M40 to avoid possible HAZ quench cracking and to control
(En19) etc. peak hardness, 100-250°C.
APPLICATIONS
Use for welding medium and high carbon hardenable ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
steels, of known or unknown specifications, for example Although 29.9 alloys have good resistance to high
tool steels, shafts, gear teeth, free-cutting steels, dissimilar temperature oxidation, duplex high ferrite weld metal is
alloy combinations, buffer layers, overlays etc. subject to 475°C embrittlement above about 300°C and
sigma embrittlement at higher temperatures. This alloy
Combination of high alloy and high ferrite content (40- is therefore not used where high temperature structural
50FN) gives extreme tolerance to dilution on a wide range service or PWHT is involved.
of hardenable and alloy steels with minimum or no preheat.
It has also been found useful for welding free-cutting steels
or those with a low Mn:S ratio (especially < 20 or so), where
other weld metals may fail to prevent hot cracking due to

liquation at the fusion boundary. For dissimilar joints etc. the 309L (data sheet
B-50), 309Mo (data sheet B-51), armour welding
Weld deposit work-hardens and gives good wear and consumables (data sheet E-20) and 307 types (data
friction resistance. sheet E-21) may also be suitable.
Useful for resistance to corrosion and to high temperature

scaling up to about 1000°C, but not recommended for
structural applications above 300°C or for welds to be post- PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
weld heat treated, owing to embrittlement.
Not recommended for filling up heavy joints nor for MMA 29.9 Super R (AWS E312-17)
sub-zero applications or where high notch toughness TIG/SAW 312S94 AWS ER312
is required. In these cases, it is generally best to use the SS300 BS EN SA AF2 AC
electrode for buttering only (preheat if appropriate), then Flux
fill with a more ductile austenitic type (no preheat needed) SSB BS EN SA AF2 DC
according to required properties.

29.9 SUPER R
ACID RUTILE MMA ELECTRODE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with acid rutile flux on matching 312 stainless steel core wire.

AWS A5.4M (E312-17) nearest classification F-No 5 (This is nearest because
BS EN ISO 3581 E 29 9 R 3 2 QW432 the electrode does not strictly
conform to AWS)
QW442 A-No

min. -- -- -- -- -- 28.0 8.0 -- --
max. 0.15 1.5 1.2 0.025 0.035 31.0 10.5 0.5 0.75
Typical 0.1 0.8 1 0.01 0.02 29 9.5 0.1 0.1
Elongation (%) 4d 22 * 26
5d 15 25
Hardness HV -- 280
*Minimum elongation required by AWS not always obtained.

A high tensile strength with moderate ductility is typical for multipass all-weld test specimens but these properties may be altered
under conditions of high dilution from base material for which this electrode is intended. Dilution typically raises ductility.

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 60 75 100 130
max. A 90 120 155 210
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 300 350 350 450
kg/carton 12.0 13.8 13.2 13.5
STORAGE
of porosity.
FUME DATA
8 4 1 8 0.2 17 0.6
www.metrode.com DS E-22-29.9 SUPER R | Rev. 01-03/16 347

312S94
SOLID WIRE FOR TIG AND SAW
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid wire for TIG and sub-arc welding.

BS EN ISO 14343-A 29 9 QW442 A-No

min. -- 1.0 0.30 -- -- 28.0 8.0 -- --
max. 0.15 2.5 0.65 0.02 0.030 32.0 10.5 0.3 0.3
Typical 0.1 1.8 0.4 0.005 0.02 30 9.3 0.1 0.1

TIG MIG
Typical values as welded
Ar + 5%CO2 Ar + 2%O2
5d 19 24 10
Reduction of area % 35 31 10
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C 50 -- 27
Hardness HV 275 270 300

TIG Ar * DC- 2.4 120A, 14V

MIG Ar + 2-5%CO2 ** DC+ 1.2 220A, 26V
SAW SS300 *** DC+ 2.4 350A, 30V
** Ar – CO2 gases were found to produce better ductility than Ar – 2%O2 (see properties above).
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.2 1.6 2.4 3.2
TIG - 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube To order
SAW - 25kg spool 25kg spool -
FUME DATA
30 12 9 22 <1 <1 2.3
348 www.metrode.com DS E-22-312S94 | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
100Cu – PURE COPPER

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION CHEMICAL COMPOSITION (WIRE WT %)
Cu Mn Si Sn Pb Al P
Deoxidised pure copper. min 98.0 -- -- -- -- -- --
max bal 0.50 0.50 1.0 0.02 0.01 0.15
typ 99 0.3 0.3 0.6 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.7M ERCu TYPICAL OPERATING PARAMETERS
BS EN ISO 24373 S Cu 1898 / CuSn1 Diameter
Shielding Current Parameters
(mm)
TIG He * DC- 2.4 250A, 15V **
MIG Ar, He or Ar-He DC+ 1.2 300A, 28V **
QW432 F-No 31
* Ar can also be used but He produces deeper penetration,
permits higher travel speeds and allows preheat to be
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED reduced.
Oxygen free copper ** Higher currents will be required as material thickness
BS grade C103, UNS C10200, ISO Cu-OF / Cu-OFS. increases, parameters given are suitable for material of about
6mm thickness.
APPLICATIONS
PACKAGING DATA
100Cu produces a deoxidised pure copper deposit for Diameter (mm) 1.2 1.6 2.4
maximum thermal and electrical conductivity.
Applications include plate for chemical plant and TIG - 2.5kg spool 2.5kg spool
moulds, stills and calorifiers, rods and wires for MIG 15kg spool - -
electrical components and tubes for heat exchangers.
STORAGE

Recommended ambient storage conditions: <60% RH,
MICROSTRUCTURE
>18°C.
Single phase (fcc).

WELDING GUIDELINES The copper silicon wire (data sheet E-31) is also used for
Apart from very thin material (<3mm thick) a preheat welding copper when a more highly deoxidised filler is
will be required. The required preheat will range from required.
about 100°C at 6mm thick up to about 400/500°C for
material 15mm thick. FUME DATA
Fume composition, wt % typical (TIG fume negligible):
Typical as welded TIG <1 2 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 82 0.2
Elongation 4d (%) 20
Hardness (HV) 60

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
97CuSi – SILICON BRONZE

Cu Mn Si Sn Pb Al Fe Zn P
Pure copper deoxidised with 3% silicon.
min bal 0.5 2.8 -- -- -- -- -- --
max bal 1.5 4.0 0.2 0.02 0.01 0.50 0.4 0.05
SPECIFICATIONS typ 96 0.9 3 0.1 0.002 <0.01 0.04 <0.1 <0.01

AWS A5.7M ERCuSi-A
BS EN ISO 24373 S Cu 6560 / CuSi3Mn1 ALL-WELD MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
As welded TIG
ASME IX QUALIFICATION 0.2% proof strength (MPa) 105
QW432 F-No 32
Hardness (HV) 85
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED TYPICAL OPERATING PARAMETERS

General purpose including phosphorus deoxidised Diameter
Shielding Parameters
Current
copper, silicon bronze, nickel silver and some brasses. (mm)
TIG Ar or He DC-* 2.4 200A, 15V
**AC with argon provides optimum arc cleaning action
APPLICATIONS
97CuSi silicon bronze has a wider range of general PACKAGING DATA
purpose applications than 100Cu, including overlaying Diameter (mm) 2.4
of steels and cast irons. TIG 2.5kg tube
Applications include plate for chemical plant and
moulds, stills and calorifiers, rods and wires for

electrical components and tubes for heat exchangers.
STORAGE
>18°C.
MICROSTRUCTURE
Single phase (fcc).).
The pure copper wire (data sheet E-30) is used for
welding copper when optimum thermal or electrical
WELDING GUIDELINES conductivity is required.
Preheat is not required when welding silicon bronze
and interpass temperature should be kept below
100°C.
FUME DATA
If welding copper then preheat of about 100°C will
be required for 6mm material increasing up to about
400/500°C for 15mm thick material. <1 5 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 80 0.3
.

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
92CuSn – TIN BRONZE

Tin bronze alloy wire for welding similar tin bronze Cu Sn Pb Al P Zn Fe Ni
(phosphor bronze) alloys. min bal 7.5 -- -- 0.01 -- -- --
max bal 8.5 0.02 0.01 0.4 0.2 0.1 0.2
typ 92 7.8 0.01 <0.01 0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.7M (ERCuSn-C) ALL-WELD MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
Typical as welded TIG
BS EN ISO 24373 S Cu 5210 / CuSn8P
ASME IX QUALIFICATION Elongation 5d (%) 58
Hardness (HV) 86
QW432 F-No 33
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED TYPICAL OPERATING PARAMETERS

Diameter
Up to 10%Sn+0.5%P. BS PB101- Shielding Current Parameters
(mm)
Tin bronze
103, UNS C50100-C52400 TIG Ar DC- 2.4 250A, 15V
BS LG3, LG4, LPB1,
Gunmetals (but >5%Pb leaded types difficult). PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 1.6
Bell metal Cu + 20-25%Sn.
TIG 2.5kg tube
Brass Cu + 40%Zn, manganese bronze
STORAGE
APPLICATIONS Recommended ambient storage conditions: <60% RH,
REPAIR & MAINTENANCE

92 CuSn tin bronze alloy wire is used for welding a >18°C.
range of copper base alloys to themselves and to CMn
steels or cast irons, and also for the repair and joining
of castings.
It is also suitable, if low dilution is achieved, for weld
surfacing to give a bearing surface and/or corrosion FUME DATA
resistant overlay on steel components, shafts etc.
Stainless steels should be avoided because chromium Fume composition, wt % typical (TIG fume negligible):
pick-up causes embrittlement. Fe Mn Cr3 Ni Mo Cu OES (mg/m3)
<1 5 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 80 0.3
MICROSTRUCTURE
A multi phase copper base structure with complex
eutectoids.
WELDING GUIDELINES
The tin bronze weld metal tends to be sluggish
because of its wide melting range. Preheating to
about 200°C can help improve fluidity when welding
thick sections. To avoid hot cracking it is desirable to
keep the interpass temperature below 200°C

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
90CuAl – ALUMINIUM BRONZE

Cu Al Fe Zn Si Pb
9% Al bronze for welding similar 5-11% Al alloys min -- 8.5 0.5 -- -- --
max bal 11.0 1.5 0.02 0.10 0.02
SPECIFICATIONS typ 90 9 1.0 <0.01 0.02 0.004
AWS A5.7M ERCuAl-A2
BS EN ISO 24373 S Cu 6180 / CuAl10Fe
ASME IX QUALIFICATION ALL-WELD MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
QW432 F-No 36 Typical as welded TIG
Tensile strength (MPa) 550-615
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED 0.2% proof strength (MPa) 250-350
UNS C61400, BS CA101-103, Elongation 4d (%) 21
Aluminium bronze:
BS 1400 AB1 (cast), Alloy D. Reduction of area (%) 25
Beryllium copper: Cu+ 0.5-2%Be; closest strength.
Brass: Cu–Zn.
Aluminium brass: eg. Yorkalbro Cu-22%Zn-2%Al. TYPICAL OPERATING PARAMETERS
Manganese bronze: Cu + 20-45%Zn + 1-3%Mn. Diameter
(mm)
Silicon bronze: Cu + 1-3.5%Si,
(also see data sheet E-31). TIG Ar AC 2.4 250A, 15V
235A, 25V
APPLICATIONS MIG Ar, He or Ar-He Pulsed 1.2
(mean)
For welding 5-11% Al bronzes plus other copper alloys
as listed above. For brasses the weld colour is similar
and the presence of aluminium in the filler helps to PACKAGING DATA
suppress zinc volatilisation during welding. Diameter
1.2 1.6 2.4 3.2
(mm)
It can also be used to overlay CMn steels and cast irons

to give wear and corrosion resistant bearing surfaces, TIG - 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube 2.5kg tube
or to join these to most copper base alloys. MIG 15kg spool - - -
Applications include corrosion resistant and spark
resistant pumps, castings, machinery parts, heat
exchangers for offshore, marine and mining equipment. STORAGE
MICROSTRUCTURE >18°C.
In the as-welded condition consists of a duplex α + β
microstructure.
WELDING GUIDELINES FUME DATA
For aluminium bronze alloys preheat is not required Fume composition, wt % typical (TIG fume negligible):
and maximum interpass temperature should be Fe Mn Cr Ni Mo Cu OES (mg/m3)
200°C. 3 1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 80 0.3
When welding brass a preheat of 100-300°C should
be used on thicker sections, the lower preheat Beryllium has a very low OEL (0.002mg/m3) so special precautions
may be required when welding beryllium coppers.
temperatures being used for the high-zinc brasses.
Although this wire is suitable for many dissimilar
combinations of copper and ferrous alloys, care is
necessary to minimise dilution by high chromium
alloys such as stainless steels. The limited tolerance
to chromium pick-up may cause embrittlement and
cracking especially if bend tests are applied. In this
situation low heat input buttering is beneficial.
Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
80CuNiAl – NICKEL ALUMINIUM BRONZE

Cu-9%Al-5%Ni bronze for welding similar nickel aluminium Cu Al Ni Fe Mn Si Zn Pb
bronze alloys. min bal 8.50 4.0 3.0 0.60 -- -- --
max bal 9.50 5.5 5.0 3.50 0.10 0.10 0.02
typ 82 9.3 4.2 3.3 0.8 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
SPECIFICATIONS
AWS A5.7M ERCuNiAl
BS EN ISO 24373 S Cu 6328 / CuAl9Ni5Fe3Mn2 ALL-WELD MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
Typical As welded TIG
ASME IX QUALIFICATION 0.2% proof strength (MPa) 400
QW432 F-No 37
Hardness (HV) 220
C63200, C63000 (CA630), C95800
ASTM (cast), C95500 (cast), C95520 TYPICAL OPERATING PARAMETERS
(cast). Diameter
BS CA104, CA105, AB2 (cast), Alloy E. (mm)
2.0966 (CuAl10Ni), 2.0978 TIG Ar AC 2.4 250A, 15V
DIN (CuAl11Ni), 2.0970 (G-CuAl10Ni), MIG Ar, He or Ar-He Pulsed 1.2
235A, 25V
2.0980 (G-CuAl11Ni) (mean)
MoD DGS 1043 Grade 2.
APPLICATIONS

PACKAGING DATA
80CuNiAl wire deposits nickel aluminium bronze
and is suitable for welding wrought and cast parent Diameter (mm) 1.2 2.4
materials of similar composition. These alloys have TIG - 2.5kg tube
high strength and resistance to stress corrosion, MIG 15kg spool -
cavitation erosion, corrosion fatigue, and attack by
acids and chlorides.
Applications include corrosion resistant and spark
resistant pumps, ship propellers, heat exchangers for STORAGE
offshore, marine and mining equipment. Recommended ambient storage conditions: <60% RH,
>18°C.
MICROSTRUCTURE
In the as-welded condition consists of a duplex α + β
microstructure.
FUME DATA
WELDING GUIDELINES Fume composition, wt % typical (TIG fume negligible):
For aluminium bronze alloys preheat is not required Fe Mn Cr3 Ni Mo Cu OES (mg/m3)
and maximum interpass temperature should be
6 4 <0.1 3 <0.1 75 0.3
150°C.
Resistance to hot cracking in thick sections with high
restraint is said to be inferior to plain aluminium
bronze. An alternative is to fill with higher ductility
aluminium bronze (data sheet E-36) and cap with
80CuNiAl.

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
ALLOY C
Alloy C is a Ni-15%Cr-16%Mo-4%W-5%Fe nickel Solid solution strengthened high nickel austenite
base alloy. with some carbides and microsegregation typical
of as-deposited weld metal.
WELDING GUIDELINES
ASTM A494 CW-12MW - A743/A744 CW-12M
Preheat is not generally required but may be
DIN 2.4883 (G-NiMo16Cr)
necessary for higher carbon hardenable steels. For
Also used for surfacing and overlays
best corrosion resistance interpass temperature
should be kept below 150°C and heat input restricted
APPLICATIONS to 1.5kJ/mm.
The weld deposit composition matches cast alloy C with
Ni-15%Cr-16%Mo-4%W-5%Fe. Wrought forms of this
alloy (C276) have low C and Si, see data sheet D-30. Cast RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
versions of the alloy typically have higher carbon and Alloy C276 (D-30), alloy 59 (D-31) and alloy C22 (D-
silicon (like the original wrought alloy C which is now 32) are also NiCrMo.
obsolete) but repair welds are usually solution treated
for optimum corrosion resistance.
A controlled level of carbon raises strength and PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
response to work-hardening. These properties extend
to elevated temperatures, and with good resistance
to impact and thermal fatigue the weld metal finds MMA Nimax C AWS ENiCrMo-5A
extensive use for surfacing or build-up of hot-work
forging dies, especially where large volumes of weld
metal must be deposited economically. It is also used as

a buffer layer prior to surfacing with more exotic nickel
or cobalt base alloys.
Although these consumables are not intended for
aggressive chemical plant applications this alloy has
intrinsically high resistance to general corrosion,
pitting attack and stress corrosion in high chloride
environments such as seawater. It is useful for
corrosion resistant overlays especially when combined
with erosion or cavitation. These properties are also
exploited for site repairs without preheat on high
strength martensitic stainless steels used for hydro
turbines.

NIMAX C
HIGH RECOVERY ALLOY C ELECTRODE PRIMARILY USED FOR SURFACING
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with special metal powder rutile- basic flux coating on high conductivity pure nickel core wire.

AWS A5. 13M ENiCrMo-5A QW432 F-No 7 1
BS EN 14700 E Ni2
PA/1G PB/2F PC/2G

Typical 0.05 0.8 0.7 0.01 0.02 16 56 16.5 3.6 5.5 0.1 0.05 0.05

As welded Typical Typical
Elongation 4d (%) 4 10-25
Work hardens to about 450HV.
* Minimum properties are for ASTM A494 CW-12MW castings which are solution treated at 1120°C + WQ.

Diameter (mm) 5.0
min. A 160
max. A 260
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 5.0*
Length (mm) 450
kg/carton 18.0
Pieces/carton 102
STORAGE
of porosity.
Redry 200–250°C/1-2h to restore to as-packed condition. Maximum 350° C, 3 cycles, 10h total.
FUME DATA
1 4 10 5 5 0.2 16 1
www.metrode.com DS E-45-NIMAX C | Rev. 01-03/16 355

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
350 HARDFACING CONSUMABLES

Martensitic hardfacing alloy producing a deposit In the as-deposited condition the microstructure
of nominally 350HV hardness. consists of martensite with some carbides.
WELDING GUIDELINES
These consumables are used for surfacing not joining. Preheat is not normally required but 100-200°C
They can be used for surfacing many materials may be required with thick and/or complex sections
including structural steels (BS 4360), general purpose particularly with low alloy base materials or where
cast steels (BS 3100) and rail steels (BS 11). there is a risk of hydrogen-induced cracking.
APPLICATIONS
These consumables deposit weld metal with a hardness PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
in the range 380-410HV; actual hardness depends
on base metal composition and number of layers Process Product Specification
deposited. MMA Methard 350 (BS EN EFe1)
The deposit gives a wear resistant crack-free deposit FCW Hardcore 350 BS EN TFe1
suitable for conditions of moderate abrasion and
friction coupled with resistance to heavy impact
Items suitable for surfacing include slideways,
trackwheels, rails, roller guides, couplings, brake drums
and shoes, rope winches, caterpillar tracks, and clutch
plates and cones.

METHARD 350
350HV HARDNESS MMA ELECTRODE FOR SURFACING
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA surfacing electrode with a rutile metal powder type flux made on low carbon core wire.

BS EN 14700 E Fe1 (Nearest classification) QW432 F-No

C Mn Si Cr Mo
Typical 0.3 0.2 0.2 3 0.1

Typical hardness as-welded assuming at least three layers on mild steel base plate:
Vickers (HV) 380-410
Rockwell (HRC) 39-42
Brinell (HB) 360-390
Preheat and dilution will affect hardness in the first two layers but will have little effect in subsequent layers.

min. A 80 100 140
max. A 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 450 450 450
kg/carton 18.6 18.9 18.0
STORAGE
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Cr F OES (mg/m3)
16 5 1 18 1
www.metrode.com DS E-50-METHARD 350 | Rev. 01-03/16 357

HARDCORE 350
SELF-SHIELDED FLUX CORED WIRE FOR SURFACING
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
A self-shielded flux cored wire for surfacing applications in the flat and HV positions. The lime-fluorspar flux fill eliminates the
need for an external shielding gas. Metal recovery about 90% with respect to wire.

BS EN 14700 T Fe1 QW432 F-No

C Mn Si Cr Mo Al
Typical 0.25 2 0.1 1 0.2 1.7

Typical hardness as-welded assuming at least three layers on mild steel base plate:

No shielding gas is required.

Diameter (mm) Amp-Volt Range stickout
1.2 150-250A, 20-26V 40-50mm
1.6 200-300A, 24-30V 40-50mm
2.8 300-500A, 27-35V 40-50mm
PACKAGING DATA
Spools in cardboard carton: 13kg
FUME DATA
18 8 <0.5 1 <1 8 5
358 www.metrode.com DS E-50-HARDCORE 350 | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
650 HARDFACING CONSUMABLES

Martensitic alloy for hardfacing producing a Preheat is not normally required but 100-200°C
deposit of nominally 650HV hardness. may be required with thick and/or complex sections
particularly with low alloy base materials or where
there is a risk of hydrogen-induced cracking.
For substantial build-ups on plain carbon or CMn
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED steels 350 types (data sheet E-50) should be used
as a buffer layer to reduce the risk of cracking or
These consumables are not used for joining they are spalling.
used for surfacing/hardfacing applications. They
can be used for hardfacing many materials including
structural steel (BS 4360), wear resisting steel, high
strength cast steel (BS 3100 & BS 1504), and Hadfield ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
13%Mn steel. The combination of a 307 type (data sheet E-21)
buffer with two or more layers of 650 has proved
to be particularly successful for excavation and
crushing equipment in cement plants in areas
where the high stress abrasion resistance of
APPLICATIONS 13%Mn steel is inadequate.
These consumables give a hardfacing deposit with
a hardness in the range 53-59 HRC dependent upon
parent material dilution and the number of layers.
It is particularly suitable for resistance to abrasion but
will withstand a reasonable amount of impact damage RELATED ALLOY GROUPS

and battering. The 350 surfacing consumables (data sheet E-50)
Typical applications are bulldozer blades, excavator are used for less abrasion resistant applications
teeth, crusher jaws, buckets, scrapers and swing where better impact resistance is required. The
hammers in conditions of severe abrasion from soil, chromium carbide types (data sheet E-55) are
sand and crushed minerals, coupled with the risk of used for more severe abrasion applications.
impact from large rocks and compacted materials.
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
MICROSTRUCTURE Methard 650 (BS EN EFe2)
In the as-deposited condition the microstructure MMA
Methard 650R (BS EN EFe2)
consists of martensite with some carbides
FCW Hardcore 650 BS EN TFe2

METHARD 650
MMA HARDFACING ELECTRODE OF NOMINAL 650HV HARDNESS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Rutile metal powder flux on a low carbon core wire.


C Mn Si Cr Mo V
Typical 0.7 0.6 0.4 8 0.6 0.5

Typical hardness as-welded on mild steel base plate: 1 layer 3 layers
Vickers (HV) 600-700 700-760
Rockwell (HRC) 55-60 60-63


min. A 80 100 140
max. A 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 450 450 450
kg/carton 18.6 18.6 19.5
STORAGE
FUME DATA
Fe Mn Cr Mo V F OES (mg/m3)
20 6 2.5 0.1 0.5 18 2
360 www.metrode.com DS E-51-METHARD 650 | Rev. 01-03/16

METHARD 650R
HIGH RECOVERY MMA HARDFACING ELECTRODE OF NOMINAL 650HV HARDNESS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Rutile high recovery metal powder flux made on pure low carbon core wire.


C Mn Si Cr Mo V
Typical 0.4 0.3 0.8 8 1 0.6

Typical hardness as-welded on mild steel base plate: 1 layer 3 layers 1 layer on high carbon steel
Vickers (HV) 560-600 620-680 580-640
Rockwell (HRC) 53-55 56-59 54-57
The weld metal will retain its hardness up to about 450°C but then softens markedly at temperatures in the range 550-700°C.

Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
min. A 70 80 100 140
max. A 110 140 180 240
PACKAGING DATA
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Length (mm) 350 350 350 450
kg/carton 12.0 12.0 13.2 15.0
STORAGE
FUME DATA
20 6 2.5 0.1 0.5 18 2
www.metrode.com DS E-51-METHARD 650R | Rev. 01-03/16 361

HARDCORE 650
SELF-SHIELDED FLUX CORED WIRE OF NOMINAL 650HV HARDNESS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Self-shield flux cored wire for surfacing applications in the flat and HV positions. The tubular wire has a lime-fluorspar flux fill
which eliminates the need for an external shielding gas.Metal recovery about 90% with respect to wire.


C Mn Si Cr Mo Al
Typical 0.8 2 0.8 2.5 0.2 1.7

Typical all-weld metal hardness:

1.2 150-250A, 20-26V 40-50mm
1.6 200-300A, 24-30V 40-50mm
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
18 7 <0.5 1.5 <0.5 12 5
362 www.metrode.com DS E-51-HARDCORE 650 | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
METHARD 750TS – 750HV HARDFACING CONSUMABLE

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION CHEMICAL COMPOSITION (WELD METAL WT %)
MMA electrode with basic metal powder type flux made C Mn Si S P Cr Mo W V
on carbon steel core wire. Electrode coating is designed min 0.5 -- -- -- -- 3.0 5.0 1.0 0.8
to give sound porosity-free deposits coupled with smooth max 0.9 0.6 0.8 0.03 0.03 5.0 9.5 2.5 1.3
operation. Recovery is about 120% with respect to core
typ 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.01 0.02 4 8 1.7 1.1
wire, 65% with respect to whole electrode.
SPECIFICATIONS ALL-WELD MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
AWS A5.13 EFe5-B Typical hardness: HRC HV
As welded 62 750
BS EN 14700 E Fe4
Annealed (800°C + FC) <25 <270
ASME IX QUALIFICATION Tempered (550°C/2 + AC) 60-65 700-850
QW432 F-No 71
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED WELDING POSITIONS (ISO/ASME)
Various tool steels.
Used for surfacing mild or low alloy steel blanks.
APPLICATIONS
This electrode gives a Mo alloyed high speed tool TYPICAL OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC +VE OR AC (OCV: 60V MIN)
steel deposit with hot hardness (up to 600°C), good Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0
toughness and crack resistance (similar to AISI M1). min. A 70 90 130
Used for the reclamation, repair and modification of max. A 115 155 210
high speed cutting and machining tools in either the
PACKAGING DATA
as-welded, tempered or rehardened condition. New Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0
tools can be manufactured by overlaying mild or Length (mm) 350 380 380
alloyed steel blanks, annealing to facilitate machining,

kg/carton 11.7 12.6 13.2
quenching and tempering to required hardness. Pieces/carton 420 246 177
Applications include cutting and piercing tools, dies and
drills, punches and knives, ingot tongs etc.
MICROSTRUCTURE STORAGE
In the as-welded condition the microstructure consists 3 hermetically sealed ring-pull metal tins per carton, with
of partially tempered martensite with carbides and unlimited shelf life. Direct use from tin is satisfactory.
some retained austenite, which is reduced if double For electrodes that have been exposed:
tempered. Redry 200–300°C/1-2h to restore to as-packed condition.
Maximum 400° C, 3 cycles, 10h total.
WELDING GUIDELINES Storage: Recommended ambient storage conditions for
It is possible to weld without preheat provided the opened tins (using plastic lid): < 60% RH, > 18°C.
electrodes are properly dried but preheats on the
range 100-200°C will be necessary in thick or complex
sections and when welding hardenable steels FUME DATA
For machining the weld metal can be annealed Fume composition, wt % typical:
(800°C + furnace cool) otherwise grinding is Fe Mn Cr Mo V F OES (mg/m3)
necessary. Rehardening is carried out by preheating
slowly to 800°C then raising to 1200°C for 5 minutes 20 6 2 2 0.5 20 2.5
followed by air or oil quenching (brittle condition);
final temper can then be carried out to achieve
required hardness.
As-welded properties can be improved by tempering
or double tempering. During heat treatment
precautions should be taken against decarburisation.
www.metrode.com DS E-53-METHARD 750TS | Rev. 01-03/16 363
Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
CHROMIUM CARBIDE HARDFACING

Use with a stringer bead technique or a wide weave
Chromium carbide hardfacing.
for maximum coverage. Thermal contraction
stresses will normally cause some cold cracking
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED (stress-relief checking). Preheating to 200-450°C and
These consumables are not used for joining they are slow cooling can minimise surface cracking but not
used for surfacing/hardfacing applications. They eliminate it.
can be used for hardfacing many materials including Build-ups should be restricted to two layers or a
structural steel (BS 4360), wear resisting steel, high maximum of three (8mm maximum build-up). For
strength cast steel (BS 3100 & BS 1504), and Hadfield large build-ups on low alloy steels, or any hardfacing
13%Mn steel (with appropriate buffer layer). on 13%Mn Hadfield steel, a buffer layer of 307 (data
sheet E-21) should be used.
APPLICATIONS Deposits are non-machinable or heat-treatable
These consumables produce high carbon, high but can be ground. With the MMA electrodes a
chromium, chromium carbide deposits with high weave/wash technique produces a very smooth
hardness and resistance to extreme abrasion. They also glass like surface which is highly resistant to fine
exhibit high temperature stability with good oxidation hard powder abrasion.
resistance up to about 1000°C (although hot hardness Hardness figures are quoted for all the products
above about 450°C is inferior to cobalt types); also have but these only provide a guide to expected
moderate corrosion resistance. performance, because of the complex nature of
Used for earth moving and dredging equipment, steel the chromium carbide weld deposit. Chromium
works equipment, sinter plants, cement works, sizing carbide types have greater resistance to high
screens, augers, rolling mill guides, pump impellers, stress abrasion than martensitic types of
augers and feed screws; which are handling abrasive equivalent hardness.
sands and sludges under conditions of extreme abrasion
but limited impact RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
For lower abrasion resistance but better impact
properties the 650 hardfacing types (data sheet
E-51) are used. The cobalt hardfacing types (data
MICROSTRUCTURE
sheet E-65) have superior hot hardness.
In the as-welded condition the microstructure
consists of an austenitic alloy matrix (bulk
hardness 500-600HV) and chromium/complex PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
carbides (approximate hardness 1500HV).
Methard 850 BS EN EFe14
MMA
Methard 950 BS EN EFe14
Hardcore 850 BS EN TFe15
FCW
Hardcore 950 BS EN TFe15

METHARD 850
MMA ELECTRODE PRODUCING A CHROMIUM CARBIDE DEPOSIT
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a rutile metal powder type flux coating on a pure low carbon core wire. Moisture resistant coating giving
freedom from porosity.
Recovery is about 175% with respect to core wire.

BS EN 14700 E Fe14 QW432 F-No
PA/1G PB/2F

C Mn Si Cr Mo+Nb+V+W
Typical 3 0.8 1 25 2

Typical hardness on mild steel: 1 layer 2 layers 3 layers
Vickers (HV) 450-500 600-700 650-750
Rockwell (HRC) 45-50 55-60 58-62
Actual hardness is dependent upon base material composition, number of layers, cooling rate and welding conditions

min. A 110 150
max. A 160 220
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 350 350
kg/carton 12.6 13.2
STORAGE
FUME DATA
25 4 12 2 0.5 3 0.4

METHARD 950
MMA ELECTRODE PRODUCING A CHROMIUM CARBIDE DEPOSIT
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MMA electrode with a rutile metal powder type flux coating on a pure low carbon core wire. Moisture resistant coating giving
freedom from porosity.
Recovery is about 175% with respect to core wire.

BS EN 14700 E Fe14 QW432 F-No
PA/1G PB/2F

C Mn Si Cr Mo+Nb+V+W
Typical 4 1.2 1 34 3

Typical hardness on mild steel: 1 layer 2 layers 3 layers
Vickers (HV) 475-575 675-750 700-850
Rockwell (HRC) 48-54 56-62 60-66
Actual hardness is dependent upon base material composition, number of layers, cooling rate and welding conditions.

min. A 110 150 190
max. A 160 220 280
PACKAGING DATA
Length (mm) 350 350 450
kg/carton 12.3 13.8 15.9
STORAGE
FUME DATA
25 4 12 2 0.5 3 0.4

HARDCORE 850
SELF-SHIELDED HARDFACING FLUX CORED WIRE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
which eliminates the need for an external shielding gas. Nominal 60HRC deposit is produced which is non-machinable. Metal
recovery about 90% with respect to wire.


C Mn Si Cr
Typical 4.8 2.7 1.7 22

Typical all-weld metal hardness on mild steel:
55-59 HRC
Actual hardness dependent on base material, number of layers, cooling rate and welding conditions.
Maximum deposit thickness 8mm.

1.6 200-300A, 24-30V 40-50mm

PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
35 7 1 13 5 <1 12 1

HARDCORE 950
SELF-SHIELDED HARDFACING FLUX CORED WIRE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
which eliminates the need for an external shielding gas. Nominal 60HRC deposit is produced which is non-machinable. Metal
recovery about 90% with respect to wire.


C Mn Si Cr
Typical 5 3 1.5 27

Typical all-weld metal hardness:
57-60 HRC
Actual hardness dependent on base material, number of layers, cooling rate and welding conditions.
Maximum deposit thickness 8mm (2-3 layers).

1.6 200-300A, 24-30V 40-50mm
PACKAGING DATA
FUME DATA
35 7 1 13 5 <1 12 1

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
METHARD 1050 FOR HARDFACING

MMA electrode with rutile metal powder type flux made C Mn Si Cr Mo+Nb+V+W
on carbon steel core wire. Electrode coating is designed typ 4.5 0.2 1 28 12
to give sound porosity-free deposits coupled with smooth
operation. Recovery is about 200% with respect to core
wire, 65% with respect to whole electrode. ALL-WELD MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
Typical hardness: HRC HV
As welded 62-66 750-850
SPECIFICATIONS These values are for guidance only actual hardness is
BS EN 14700 E Fe16 dependent on base material, number of layers, cooling rate
and welding conditions.
Surfacing of mild and low alloy steels.
APPLICATIONS
This electrode gives a high alloy complex chromium
carbide deposit to produce very high hardness, resistance
PA/1G PB/2F
to extreme abrasion and thermal stability up to 600°C,
coupled with reasonable corrosion resistance. The deposit
is not machinable but can be ground if necessary. OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC +VE OR AC (OCV: 70V MIN)
Used for equipment in contact with hot metal, slag and hot Diameter (mm) 3.2 4.0
gases at temperatures in excess of 600°C. For applications min. A 110 150
requiring high resistance to thermal shock one of the max. A 160 220
cobalt based Cobstel types should be considered. For
ambient temperature applications Methard 850 or 950 (E-
55) are more economic alternatives. PACKAGING DATA

Used for surfacing slag crushers, ore processors, furnace Diameter (mm) 3.2 4.0
guides, rollers and moulds, in the steel, ceramic, cement, Length (mm) 350 350
pottery and glass industries. kg/carton 12.6 12.6
MICROSTRUCTURE
In the as-welded condition the microstructure consists
of an austenitic alloy matrix (bulk hardness 500-600HV)
STORAGE
and a large proportion of chromium and complex alloy
carbides (1500-2000HV).
unlimited shelf life. Direct use from tin is satisfactory.
WELDING GUIDELINES For electrodes that have been exposed:
Redry 200–300°C/1-2h to restore to as-packed condition.
Preheat to 200-450°C and slow cool to minimise
Maximum 350° C, 3 cycles, 10h total.
surface cracking. Use a stringer bead or wide weave Storage: Recommended ambient storage conditions for
for maximum coverage. opened tins (using plastic lid): < 60% RH, > 18°C
Build-up is normally limited to 2 layers (maximum 3).
Surface crazing or cracking (checking) is normal but
can be minimised by preheating and slow cooling.
FUME DATA
For large build-ups or any surfacing on 13%Mn steels
use a buffer layer of a 307 type (data sheet E-21).
25 4 12 2 0.5 3 0.4

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
WORKHARD 13MN
MMA electrode with basic metal powder type flux made on C Mn Si S P Cr Mo
low carbon steel core wire. Electrode coating is designed min 0.5 11.0 0.3 -- -- -- 0.6
to give sound porosity-free deposits coupled with smooth max 0.9 16.0 1.3 0.03 0.03 0.5 1.4
operation. Recovery is about 120% with respect to core typ 0.8 13 0.6 0.01 0.02 0.2 1
SPECIFICATIONS Typical hardness: As deposited Work Hardened
AWS A5.13 EFeMn-B Brinell (HB) 170-220 380-550
BS EN 14700 E Fe9 Vickers (HV) 180-230 400-580
Rockwell 87-96 HRB 41-54 HRC
QW432 F-No 71 WELDING POSITIONS (ISO/ASME)
13%Mn Hadfield steel. Used for surfacing other steels
using a suitable buffer layer PA/1G PB/2F PC/2G PF/3Gu PE/4G
APPLICATIONS
Workhard 13Mn electrode deposits a fairly soft ductile OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC +VE OR AC (OCV: 70V MIN)
weld metal which rapidly work hardens under heavy Diameter (mm) 3.2 4.0 5.0
impact and battering to become wear and abrasion min. A 80 100 140
resistant. The parent steel, developed by Hadfield in max. A 140 180 240
1883, is the oldest alloy steel and its resistance to gouging
abrasion is exceptional and unique.
Used for the reclamation, surfacing and joining of 13%Mn
PACKAGING DATA
steel. Applications include dredger, bucket and grab tips;

hammers and rolls in crushing plants; various equipment Diameter (mm) 3.2 4.0 4.0
in quarries and other mineral extraction industries. Also Length (mm) 380 450 450
used for rail track points, crossings and frogs; and prison kg/carton 15.0 16.5 16.8
bars.
MICROSTRUCTURE
In the as-deposited condition the microstructure consists STORAGE
of a soft manganese alloy austenite which rapidly work 3 hermetically sealed ring-pull metal tins per carton, with
hardens under impact loading. unlimited shelf life. Direct use from tin is satisfactory.
WELDING GUIDELINES Redry 150 – 250°C/1-2h to restore to as-packed condition.
C and Mo are carefully controlled to minimise the Maximum 350° C, 3 cycles, 10h total.
risk of carbide embrittlement but the weld metal Storage: Recommended ambient storage conditions for
and particularly base material are susceptible to opened tins (using plastic lid): < 60% RH, > 18°C.
embrittlement when exposed to temperatures in the
range 370-590°C. To minimise embrittlement and
cracking the weld and work piece must be kept cool
FUME DATA
(below 150°C). Use no preheat, low heat inputs, small
weld beads and cool with water, swabs or air blasts if
Fe Mn Cr F OES (mg/m3)
necessary.
A buffer layer, such as MetMax 307R, should be used prior 19 23 0.1 10 2.2
to surfacing mild or alloy steels with WorkHard 13Mn.
MetMax 307R should also be used as a buffer to avoid the
need for large multi-pass deposits of WorkHard 13Mn.
370 www.metrode.com DS E-60-WORKHARD 13Mn | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
COBSTEL 6 (ECoCr-A)
MMA electrode with rutile type flux made on special cobalt C Mn Si Cr Ni Mo W Fe Co
alloy core wire. Electrode coating is designed to give sound min 0.7 -- -- 25.0 -- -- 3.0 -- bal
porosity-free deposits coupled with smooth operation and max 1.4 2.0 2.0 32.0 3.0 1.0 6.0 5.0 bal
low dilution. Recovery is about 110% with respect to core typ 1.2 0.2 0.8 28 2 <0.5 4.5 3 60
SPECIFICATIONS Temperature, °C
AWS A5.13 ECoCr-A Typical as-welded hardness :
+20 +400 +600 +800 +900
BS EN 14700 E Co2 (Nearest classification) Vickers (HV) 350-440 320 280 230 200
Rockwell 35-45 32 28 22 -
Although the hardness reduces steadily with temperature oxidation
resistance is good to in excess of 1000°C.
QW432 F-No 71 WELDING POSITIONS (ISO/ASME)
Used for surfacing mild, low alloy and stainless steels;
and also for nickel base alloys. PA/1G PB/2F
Can also be used for the repair of UNS R30006, Stellite 6
(Deloro Stellite). OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC+/- VE OR AC (OCV: 50V MIN)
APPLICATIONS min. A 70 90
max. A 115 155
This is the most widely used cobalt base type and
combines good abrasion resistance with resistance to
corrosion, erosion and thermal shock. It also has excellent PACKAGING DATA

resistance to galling, sliding friction and compression at Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2
all temperatures. Length (mm) 300 350
It is used to surface valves and valve seats, hot shear kg/carton 13.5 13.8
blades, punches and dies, ingot tong ends and equipment Pieces/carton 594 333
for handling hot steel. Used for cat cracker slide valves in
petrochemical industry. Also finds applications in a very
wide range of industries including steel, cement, marine STORAGE
and power generation. 3 hermetically sealed ring-pull metal tins per carton, with
MICROSTRUCTURE unlimited shelf life. Direct use from tin is satisfactory.
In the as-welded condition the microstructure consists of For electrodes that have been exposed:
a cobalt based austenite with a number of carbides and Redry 150 – 250°C/1-2h to restore to as-packed condition.
other complex phases. Maximum 350° C, 3 cycles, 10h total.
Storage: Recommended ambient storage conditions for
opened tins (using plastic lid): < 60% RH, > 18°C.
WELDING GUIDELINES
For smoothest operation DC+ve or AC should be used,
but for minimum dilution DC-ve is preferable.
Preheat in the range 100-300°C or higher with slow FUME DATA
cooling may be required to avoid the risk of cracking in Fume composition, wt % typical:
multi-run deposits and/or highly restrained conditions. Fe Mn Ni Cr Co W F OES (mg/m3)
Deposits are machinable with carbide tools and may be 1 3 <1 11 18.5 1 9 0.5
finished by grinding where necessary.
www.metrode.com DS E-65-COBSTEL 6 | Rev. 01-03/16 371

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
COBSTEL 8 (ECOCR-E)
MMA electrode with rutile type flux made on special cobalt C Mn Si Cr Ni Mo W Fe Co
alloy core wire. Electrode coating is designed to give sound min 0.15 -- -- 24.0 2.0 4.5 -- -- bal
porosity-free deposits coupled with smooth operation and max 0.40 1.5 1.0 29.0 4.0 6.5 0.50 5.0 bal
low dilution. Recovery is about 110% with respect to core typ 0.3 0.2 0.6 26 3 5.5 <0.1 3 60
SPECIFICATIONS Temperature, °C
Typical as-welded hardness :
AWS A5.13 ECoCr-E +20 +400 +600 +800 +900
BS EN 14700 E Co1 Vickers (HV) 320 210 170 110 100
UNS W73021 Rockwell 30 - - - -
The as-deposited room temperature hardness can be increased to
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED 450HV (44HRC) by work hardening.
Used for surfacing mild, low alloy and stainless steels;
and also for nickel base alloys. WELDING POSITIONS (ISO/ASME)
Can also be used for the repair of similar base materials
(UNS R30021, Stellite 21 - Deloro Stellite, and BS 3146 ANC
14 castings) although it is optimised for surfacing not
joining. PA/1G PB/2F
APPLICATIONS OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC+/- VE OR AC (OCV: 50V MIN)

This low carbon cobalt base type combines good high Diameter (mm) 3.2
temperature strength with high ductility. The improved min. A 90
ductility provides better resistance to weld cracking than max. A 155
the high carbon types. It has high resistance to corrosion,
oxidation and sulphidation; good resistance to cavitation-
PACKAGING DATA
erosion and resists thermal shock better than high carbon

Diameter (mm) 3.2
types. Galling resistance is inferior to high carbon types
Length (mm) 350
but bed-in properties are better.
kg/carton 13.5
It is used to surface valves and valve seats, hot shear
Pieces/carton 384
blades, hot work dies, ingot tong ends and equipment for
handling hot steel. Used for cat cracker slide valves in
petrochemical industry. Also finds applications in a very
wide range of industries including steel, cement, marine STORAGE
and power generation. 3 hermetically sealed ring-pull metal tins per carton, with
unlimited shelf life. Direct use from tin is satisfactory.
MICROSTRUCTURE Redry 150 – 250°C/1-2h to restore to as-packed condition.
In the as-welded condition the microstructure consists of Maximum 350° C, 3 cycles, 10h total.
a cobalt based austenite with a number of carbides and Storage: Recommended ambient storage conditions for
other complex phases. opened tins (using plastic lid): < 60% RH, > 18°C.
WELDING GUIDELINES
For smoothest operation DC+ve or AC should be used, FUME DATA
but for minimum dilution DC-ve is preferable. Fume composition, wt % typical:
Preheat not required, but advisable for first layer when Fe Mn Ni Cr Co W F OES (mg/m3)
deposited on hardenable alloy steels. Interpass control 1 4 1 10 19 1 9 0.5
to ~200°C maximum is advisable to minimise possible
hot cracking in heavy multipass deposits.
Deposits are machinable with carbide tools and may be
finished by grinding where necessary.
372 www.metrode.com DS E-66 COBSTEL 8 | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
MILD AND CMn STEELS

Consumables for welding mild and CMn steels of
340-510MPa tensile strength. Preheat and PWHT would often not be required
but actual requirements will depend on grade and
thickness of base material being welded.
API 5L grades A, B, X42, X52, X60
ASTM/ASME A36; A106 grades A, B &C; A139; A210
grades A1 & C; A234 grade WPB; A334 RELATED ALLOY GROUPS
The 1%Ni consumables (data sheet A-40) are used
grade 1, A216 grade WCA, WCB, WCC
for applications requiring better low temperature
BS EN 10025 grades S235 & S275
impact properties.
BS 1449 pt 1 grades 1-15 & 34/20-43/25;
3059, 3601 & 3602 grades 320 & 360;
4360 grades 43 & 50; 1501 grades 151
& 161
DIN St37; St44; St50; St52
PRODUCTS AVAILABLE
ER70S-2 AWS ER70S-2
TIG ER70S-3 AWS ER70S-3
APPLICATIONS ER70S-6 AWS ER70S-6
Used for a diverse range of applications in general FCW Metcore DWA 50 AWS E71T-1M

engineering and fabrication, pipework and pressure
vessel fabrication. The flux cored wire also finds
widespread use in ship and bridge building.
MICROSTRUCTURE
Predominantly ferrite

ER70S-2
MILD STEEL WIRE FOR TIG
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid copper coated wire for TIG welding. This wire has extra deoxidation (Al, Ti & Zr) and is often referred to as ‘triple deoxi-
dised’. This is claimed to have advantages for rimming or semi-killed steels and rusty or contaminated plate. Owing to the high
levels of deoxidants some precipitation may occur in multipass welds, particularly following PWHT. Also suitable for subsequent
vitreous enamelling, where the low carbon and the Ti+Zr suppress blistering of the enamel during stoving.

AWS A5.18M ER70S-2 QW432 F-No 6
BS EN ISO 636-A (W 2Ti) nearest classification QW442 A-No 1

C Mn Si S P Cu Al Ti Zr Ni Cr Mo V
Min. -- 0.90 0.40 -- -- -- 0.05 0.05 0.02 -- -- -- --
Max. 0.07 1.40 0.70 0.025 0.025 0.4 0.15 0.15 0.12 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.03
Typical 0.05 1.2 0.5 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.08 0.10 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.01 0.005

Typical as welded min typical
Tensile strenght (MPa) 480 620
Impact ISO-V(J) - 30°C 27 30*
* Single values may be lower, particularly after PWHT**

PACKAGING DATA
STORAGE
Recommended ambient storage conditions: <60% RH, >18°C.
FUME DATA
53 7 < 0.1 < 0.1 0.1 1.2 5
374 www.metrode.com DS E-70-ER70S-2 | Rev. 02-08/16

ER70S-3
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid copper coated wire for TIG welding. This is a higher carbon double deoxidised wire with Mn and Si which produces reliable
impact properties.

BS EN ISO 636-A W 42 5 W2Si QW442 A-No 1

C Mn Si S P Cu Ni Cr Mo V
Min. 0.06 0.90 0.45 -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Max. 0.15 1.40 0.70 0.025 0.025 0.4 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.03
Typical 0.1 1.1 0.6 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.04 0.04 0.01 0.005



PACKAGING DATA
TIG to order to order
STORAGE
FUME DATA
53 7 < 0.1 < 0.1 0.1 1.2 5
www.metrode.com DS E-70-ER70S-3 | Rev. 01-03/16 375

ER70S-6
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Solid copper coated wire for TIG welding. This is a good general purpose filler wire, double deoxidised with higher levels of Mn
and Si, providing reliable impact properties.

BS EN ISO 636-A W 42 5 W3Si1 QW442 A-No 1

C Mn Si S P Cu Ni Cr Mo V
Min. 0.06 1.40 0.80 -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Max. 0.12 1.60 1.15 0.025 0.035 0.4 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.03
Typical 0.08 1.5 0.85 0.015 0.01 0.15 0.04 0.04 0.01 0.005



PACKAGING DATA
STORAGE
FUME DATA
53 7 < 0.1 < 0.1 0.1 1.2 5
376 www.metrode.com DS E-70-ER70S-6 | Rev. 02-08/16

METCORE DWA 50
ALL-POSITIONAL CMn RUTILE FLUX CORED WIRE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Flux cored wire with a rutile flux system for spray transfer at low currents and easy operation in all welding positions, including
positional pipework. The wire is designed for standard mild and CMn steels. Suitable for single-sided welds on ceramic backing
systems. Low moisture potential giving weld metal hydrogen content of typically < 5ml/100g. Metal recovery 90% with respect
to wire.

AWS A5.20M E71T-1M QW432 F-No 6
AWS A5.36M E71T1-M21A0-CS1-H4 QW442 A-No 1
BS EN ISO 17632-A T 422 PM1 H5
BS EN ISO 17632-B T492T1-1MA-H5

min. -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
max. 0.08 1.75 0.90 0.03 0.04 0.20 0.50 0.30 0.08
Typical 0.05 1.2 0.5 0.01 0.01 < 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.02

Typical
As welded (PWHT with caution) Min*
as-welded 600°C/4h
Tensile strength (MPa) 510-650 580 575
5d 18 25 30
Impact ISO-V(J) 0°C -- 150 140
-20°C 27 90 45

Hardness (HV) -- 200 --
*As specified by AWS A5.20 E71T-1M as-welded. Since toughness may be reduced by PWHT, batch testing (to order) is advised to
confirm specific requirements.
1.2 130-300A, 16-32V 232A, 26V 15-25mm
PACKAGING DATA
Spools supplied in cardboard carton: 15kg
FUME DATA
36 10 <0.1 <0.1 <0.5 2 5
www.metrode.com DS E-70-METCORE DWA 50 | Rev. 01-03/16 377

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
ULTRAMILD
Special low strength MMA electrode made with a basic low C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu Nb V
hydrogen coating on pure iron core wire. Moisture resistant min -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
coating gives weld metal hydrogen content <5ml/100g. max 0.03 0.6 0.4 0.015 0.020 0.10 0.30 0.10 0.10 0.05 0.05
Recovery is about 120% with respect to core wire, 65% with typ 0.02 0.4 0.3 0.010 0.010 0.02 0.05 0.01 0.03 0.01 0.01
respect to whole electrode.
SPECIFICATIONS Tensile strength (MPa) 430 460
AWS A5.1M E6018 H4 0.2% proof strength (MPa) 330 370
4d 22 33
Elongation (%)
5d -- 29
+20° -- 200
QW432 F-No 71 Impact ISO-V(J) -20°C -- 100
QW442 A-No 1 -30°C 27 45
Mild and CMn steels.
APPLICATIONS
Ultramild gives a soft, ductile low strength weld metal
designed to absorb high shrinkage strains and minimise
the build-up of residual stresses. It is a basic low hydrogen PA/1G PB/2F PC/2G PF/3Gu PE/4G
electrode with the lowest levels of alloying, microalloying
and deoxidation compatible with satisfactory radiographic OPERATING PARAMETERS, DC +VE OR AC (OCV: 70V MIN)
quality, resulting in ductile weld metal of about 300MPa yield Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0
strength. min. A 70 80 100
Applications include repair of fabrication-induced cracks in max. A 110 140 180
CMn and low alloy steels, buttering layers to avoid lamellar

tearing in areas of high restraint, restrained root runs under
adverse conditions of low ambient temperature (-20°C) and PACKAGING DATA
minimal or no preheat, and welding of steel conductor rails Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0
requiring high electrical conductivity. Length (mm) 380 380 450
kg/carton 13.5 15.0 18.0
MICROSTRUCTURE Pieces/carton 663 408 264
In the as-welded and PWHT conditions, the microstructure
consists of low strength ferrite. STORAGE
WELDING GUIDELINES 3 hermetically sealed ring-pull metal tins per carton, with
Preheating requirements will be dependent on the grade unlimited shelf life. Direct use from tin will give hydrogen
and thickness of the base material. <5ml/100g weld metal during 8h working shift.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Redry 250-300°C/1-2h to ensure H2 <10ml/100g, 300-350°C/1-
Although Ultramild has tensile properties which match 2h to ensure H2 <5ml/100g. Maximum 420°C, 3 cycles, 10h
those of the commonly used low strength grades of total.
structural and pressure vessel steels, it would not normally Storage of redried electrodes at 100-200°C in holding oven
be chosen for the complete welding of highly stressed or or 50-150°C in heated quiver: no limit, but maximum 6 weeks
pressure containment welds. It can, however be used to recommended. Recommended ambient storage conditions
advantage in the repair of such welds particularly in root for opened tins (using plastic lid): < 60% RH, >18°C.
areas, buttering layers, and the filling of deep grooves where FUME DATA
the high restraint can be absorbed in the weld metal and Fume composition, wt % typical:
so minimise the risk of cracking. The bulk of the joint can
be completed using the usual higher strength consumable
without any loss in performance resulting from the use of 15 3 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 17 5
Ultramild.

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
NILSIL
MMA electrode with a special rutile alumino-silicate flux on C Mn Si * S P
high purity mild steel core wire. In common with E6013 type min -- 0.2 -- -- --
electrodes, the as-deposited weld metal hydrogen may exceed max 0.10 0.8 0.10 0.03 0.03
a hydrogen potential of 15ml/100g. typ 0.05 0.5 0.06 0.01 0.02
Metal recovery is about 95% with respect to core wire, 65% Sizes larger than 3.2mm not recommended for positional
with respect to whole electrode.
SPECIFICATIONS As welded Typical
No relevant national specifications, nearest AWS A5.1 E6013 Tensile strength (MPa) 450
ASME IX QUALIFICATION Reduction of area % 60
QW432 F-No
QW442 A-No
Low silicon steels.
BS 2858. PA/1G PB/2F PC/2G PF/3Gu PE/4G
Armco iron.
APPLICATIONS Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0
Nilsil deposits mild steel weld metal with a very low silicon min. A 70 80 100 140
content of 0.10% maximum. It is designed specifically for the max. A 110 140 180 240
fabrication and repair of hot-dip zinc galvanising baths and * Analysed silicon will include a small proportion present as
lead pots. The steels used for these applications are usually non-metallic silicate inclusions. Alloyed silicon is therefore
either Armco iron, aluminium killed or rimming steel which are

lower than analysed.
almost silicon free.
A low silicon content is necessary to resist corrosion/erosion
by molten zinc at the operating temperature of 450-500°C, PACKAGING DATA
particularly at the molten metal/air interface. Residual zinc Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0
may also attack pots used for molten lead. Weld metals with Length (mm) 380 450 450
more than 0.10% silicon are particularly subject to attack kg/carton 18.0 21.0 21.0
and at 0.4% silicon a four-fold increase would be typical. Pieces/carton 543 342 225
Manganese in the weld metal is also held at the optimum of
about 0.5%.
Nilsil is also recommended for welding articles made from low
STORAGE
silicon galvanising steels intended for subsequent bright zinc
coating. Welds of a higher silicon content can give a dull and unlimited shelf life. Direct use from tin satisfactory for
uneven surface. longer than 8h working shift.
For electrodes that are damp:
Redry 100-120°C/1-2h. Maximum 150°C, 3 cycles, 10h total.
MICROSTRUCTURE Storage of redried electrodes at 100-200°C in holding oven or
Ferritic 50-150°C in heated quiver: no limit, but maximum 6 weeks
recommended. Recommended ambient storage conditions
for opened tins (using plastic lid): <60% RH, >18°C.
In the process of hot-dip galvanising, a thin bonding layer of
Fe-Zn alloy is formed at the steel interface. Silicon content FUME DATA
of the steel has a controlling influence on the Fe-Zn reaction
and coating quality. Modern zinc baths may have about
Fe Mn Cu Pb F OES (mg/m3)
0.1%Ni added to improve brightness of coatings on higher
silicon steels. 25 5 <0.2 <0.1 <2 5

Section F : FLUXES FOR SUBMERGED ARC WELDING HANWORTH LANE, CHERTSEY
Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
FLUXES FOR USE WITH LOW ALLOY CrMo, STAINLESS STEEL AND NICKEL BASE WIRES
This section includes submerged arc welding (SAW) fluxes for CrMo low alloy steels, austenitic stainless steels, duplex and superduplex
stainless steels and nickel base alloys. The data sheets in this section include data specific to the flux, further information on the
wires and strips can be found on the relevant alloy data sheet in Sections A, B, C, D & E.
An indication of the basicity of the fluxes is given using a basicity index (BI) the most common of which is the Boniszewski index which
is calculated from the molecular weight of each component using the following formula:
CaO + MgO + BaO + CaF2 + Na2O + K2O + 0.5(MnO + FeO)

SiO2 + 0.5(Al2O3 + TiO2 + ZrO2)
Flux consumption will vary slightly from one flux to another and also with welding parameters, the consumption increasing as the
voltage increases. As a general approximation about 1kg of flux is consumed for every kg of wire melted; for estimation purposes a
flux:wire ratio between 1 & 2 is normally used. The unfused flux can be recycled but the recycled flux should be limited to about 10%
of the blend to avoid the build-up of fines.
There is a European specification (BS EN ISO 14174) for the classification of fluxes and also a DIN specification both of which allow a
flux to be classified according to its characteristics. ASME/AWS does not have any standards for the classification of a flux they only
classify wire-flux combinations. The ASME/AWS standards currently only cover mild and low alloy steel wire–flux combinations; there
are no ASME/AWS standards for stainless steel or nickel base wire-flux combinations.
AWS EN / EN ISO
DataSheet Product AWS Classifications
Classifications Classifications
F-11 LA436 General purpose flux for low alloy and Cr-Mo steels -- S A AB 1
F-14 LA490 High basicity flux for P91 and P92 -- S A FB 1
F-20 SSB Flux for duplex and superduplex stainless steel -- S A AF 2
F-22 SS300 Flux for general purpose stainless steel -- S A AF 2
F-30 NiCu Basic flux for alloy 400 -- S A CS 2
F-35 NiCr Basic low silica flux for nickel alloys -- S A FB 2
FLUX
380 www.metrode.com DS F-01 | Rev. 02-03/16

Data Sheet F-11 HANWORTH LANE, CHERTSEY
Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
LA436 FLUX
Neutral, aluminate basic, agglomerated flux. The appropriate preheat or interpass temperature
Basicity Index (according to Boniszewski) is ~1.6. controls will be dependent on the material being
welded, guidelines can be found on the data sheet
for the appropriate wire. PWHT recommendations, if
required, will also be found on the appropriate wire data
sheet.
SPECIFICATIONS
BS EN ISO 14174 S A AB 1 67 AC H5 TYPICAL OPERATING PARAMETERS
Current: DC or AC; DC+ operation is preferred.
Suitable for single or tandem wire, with a current
carrying capacity of 700A.
Typical parameters for a 2.4mm wire are:
ASME IX QUALIFICATION 300-500A, 28-36V, 350-700mm/min travel speed.
QW432 F-No QW442 A-No
PACKAGING DATA
Metrode LA436 flux is supplied in sealed moisture
resistant 25kg metal drums.
The base materials to be welded include ASTM A335 P11,
P22 and P36.
STORAGE
Preferred storage conditions for open drums: <60%RH,
APPLICATIONS >18°C.
The LA436 flux is designed for welding low alloy and creep If flux has become damp or has been stored for a long
resisting CrMo steels (eg. data sheets A-12, A-13 and A-23). period, it should be redried in the range 250-400°C for
LA436 flux is suitable for joining and surfacing. LA436 1-2 hours.
shows a silicon pick-up of ~0.3% and manganese pick-up
of ~0.4% with a 1%Mn wire (in accordance with BS EN ISO
14174). FUME DATA
SAW fume is negligible.
TYPICAL WELD DEPOSIT ANALYSIS, WT%

Wire C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo
1NiMo 0.06 1.9 0.5 <0.01 <0.02 -- 0.9 0.5
1CrMo 0.08 1.1 0.4 <0.01 <0.02 1.1 -- 0.5
FLUX
2CrMo 0.08 0.8 0.4 <0.01 <0.02 2.1 -- 1.0

9CrMo 0.07 0.5 0.4 <0.01 <0.02 9.0 0.1 0.9

PWHT
Wire 1NiMo 1CrMo 2CrMo
Impact ISO-V(J) +20°C 140 >100 >100
www.metrode.com DS F7-11 - LA436 | Rev. 01-03/16 381

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
LA490 FLUX
Agglomerated fluoride basique flux for 9% chromium Guidelines will depend on the material being welded.
creep resisting steels. For further details see the appropriate alloy data sheet
Basicity Index (according to Boniszewski) is ~3.0. Particle eg. for modified 9CrMo (P91) using 9CrMoV-N wire see
size is 0.2–2.0mm. Nominal composition of the flux is: data sheet A-17 and for P92 using 9CrWV wire see data
sheet A-20.
36%(CaO+MgO) + 27%(CaF2) + 30%(SiO2 +Al2O3)

SPECIFICATIONS Current: DC+ or AC, 800A maximum.
BS EN ISO 14174 S A FB 1 55 AC H5
PACKAGING DATA
ASME IX QUALIFICATION Metrode LA490 flux is supplied in hermetic moisture
QW432 F-No QW442 A-No resistant "SaharaTM” bag.
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED STORAGE

Major application is for welding modified 9CrMo (P91 and P92) Preferred storage conditions for open packaging:
creep resisting steels (data sheet A-17 and A-20). <60%RH, >18°C.
If flux has become damp or has been stored for a long
period, it should be redried in the range 300-350°C for
APPLICATIONS 1-2 hours.
The LA490 flux is metallurgically neutral with respect
to Mn and Si. It is a hydrogen controlled flux depositing
FUME DATA
low diffusible hydrogen content weld metal and hence is
suitable for thick section joints. Also suitable for tandem SAW fume is negligible.
and multi-wire welding systems.

Wire C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo N Others
9CrMoV-N 0.09 0.7 0.2 0.006 0.008 8.7 0.6 1.0 0.05 0.2V, 0.05 Nb
9CrWV 0.09 0.7 0.3 0.006 0.008 8.60 0.60 0.4 0.04 1.7W, 0.14V, 0.054Nb, 0.001B
FLUX

760°C/2h
Wire 9CrMoV-N 9CrWV
382 www.metrode.com DS F-14 - LA490 | Rev. 03-06/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
SSB FLUX
Basic non-alloying agglomerated flux for submerged arc Specific guidelines will depend on the alloy being
welding with a wide range of stainless steels. Basicity Index welded but for most alloys that SSB flux is used with no
(according to Boniszewski) is ~2.2. Nominal composition of preheat will be required. For austenitic stainless steels
the flux is: the maximum recommended interpass temperature
40%(Al2O3+MnO) + 10%(SiO2+TiO2) + 50%(CaF2). is 250°C but for duplex and superduplex this would
The low level of silica minimises pick-up of Si, and loss of normally be restricted to 100-150°C maximum.
Mn and Cr.
Designed for DC+ only with wires up to 4mm diameter
SPECIFICATIONS and ~750A. However wires for the materials listed
BS EN ISO 14174 S A AF2 DC below would normally be 1.6, 2.4 or 3.2mm with a maxi-
mum of ~600A; with ER329N and Zeron® 100X the wire
diameter is further restricted as are the welding para-
meters, see alloy data sheets for further information.
ASME IX QUALIFICATION Typical parameters for 2.4mm wire are:
270-430A, 27-28V, 350-500mm/min travel speed.
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED PACKAGING DATA

Suitable for most stainless steels including: 304L (data sheet Metrode SSB flux is supplied in sealed moisture resistant
B-30), 347 (data sheet B-31), 316L (data sheet B-32), duplex 20kg metal drums.
(data sheet B-60) and superduplex (data sheet B-61); see wire
data sheets for further information. STORAGE
>18°C.
APPLICATIONS If flux has become damp or has been stored for a long
SSB flux is designed specifically for the butt welding of period, it should be redried in the range 250-400°C for
stainless steels, where high integrity and good mechanical 1-3 hours.
properties are required
FUME DATA

Wire C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu N Others
308S92 0.02 1.2 0.6 0.01 0.02 19.7 10 - 0.1 - -
347S96 0.03 1.2 0.6 0.01 0.02 19.2 10 - 0.1 - 0.5 Nb
316S92 0.02 1.2 0.6 0.01 0.02 18.2 12 2.6 0.1 - -
FLUX
309S92 0.03 1.5 0.6 0.01 0.02 24 12.5 - 0.1 - -

ER329N 0.02 1.3 0.5 0.01 0.02 22.5 8.5 3.1 0.1 0.15 -
Zeron® 100X 0.02 0.6 0.4 0.01 0.02 24.5 9.3 3.6 0.7 0.21 0.7 W
TYPICAL MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
Wire 308S92 347S96 316S92 309S92 ER329N Zeron® 100X
Elongation (%) 4d 41 35 41 35 30 25
Impact ISO-V(J) -130°C 50* - 45 - - -
-100°C - 30 - - - -
-50°C - - - 70 55 40
For -196°C impact properties with austenitic stainless steel wires SS300 flux is preferred (see data sheet F-22) and batch testing
of the selected wire-flux combination is recommended.
www.metrode.com DS F-20 - SSB | Rev. 01-03/16 383

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
SS300 FLUX
Basic non-alloying agglomerated flux for submerged arc Specific guidelines will depend on the alloy being welded
welding with a wide range of stainless steels. Basicity but for most alloys that SS300 flux is used with no
Index (according to Boniszewski) is ~1.6. preheat will be required. For austenitic stainless steels
The low level of silica minimises pick-up of Si, and loss of the maximum recommended interpass temperature is
Mn and Cr. 250°C but this may be restricted to 100-150°C maximum
for some applications.

Designed for DC/AC with wires up to 4mm diameter and
SPECIFICATIONS ~700A. However wires for the materials listed below
BS EN ISO 14174 S A AF2 64 AC would normally be 1.6, 2.4 or 3.2mm with a maximum of
~600A; see alloy data sheets for further information.
Typical parameters for 2.4mm wire are:
270-430A, 27-28V, 350-500mm/min travel speed.
PACKAGING DATA
Metrode SS300 flux is supplied as standard in sealed
moisture resistant 25kg Sahara ReadyBagTM. It can
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED also be supplied in sealed moisture resistant 25kg metal
drums under special requirement.
Suitable for most stainless steels including: 304L (data sheet
B-30), 347 (data sheet B-31), and 316L (data sheet B-32); see
wire data sheets for further information. STORAGE
>18°C.
APPLICATIONS If flux has become damp or has been stored for a long
SS300 flux is designed for the butt welding of stainless period, it should be redried in the range 250-400°C for
steels, and also for surfacing/cladding applications 1-3 hours.
involving stainless steel wires.
FUME DATA

Wire C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu N Others
308S92 0.02 1.4 0.6 0.01 0.02 19.7 10 - 0.1 - -
ER308LCF 0.02 1.4 0.6 0.01 0.02 19.7 10 - 0.1 - -
347S96 0.03 1.2 0.6 0.01 0.02 19.2 10 - 0.1 - 0.5 Nb
316S92 0.02 1.2 0.6 0.01 0.02 18.2 12 2.6 0.1 - -
FLUX
ER316LCF 0.02 1.2 0.6 0.01 0.02 18.2 12 2.6 0.1 - -

309S92 0.03 1.5 0.6 0.01 0.02 23 12.5 - 0.1 - -
HAS C276 0.01 0.5 0.2 0.002 0.006 15.0 57.5 15.6 0.02 - 3.7 W

Wire 308S92 ER308LCF 347S96 316S92 ER316LCF 309S92 HAS C276
Elongation (%) 4d 40 41 35 40 41 35 43
Impact ISO-V(J) -196°C - 45 - - 40 - 80
-100°C 50 - - 45 - - -
-75°C - - 30 - - - -
-50°C - - - - - 60 -
384 www.metrode.com DS F-22 - SS300 | Rev. 01-03/16

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
NiCu FLUX
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION MICROSTRUCTURE
Basic agglomerated flux for submerged arc welding and Solid solution, single phase alloy, slightly ferromagnetic
strip cladding using 65NiCu wire (AWS ERNiCu-7). near room temperature.
Basicity Index (according to Boniszewski) is 0.6. Particle

size is 0.4 – 1.4mm. Nominal composition of the flux is:
50%(SiO2) + 30%(CaO+MgO+MnO+K2O) + 12%(CaF2) + WELDING GUIDELINES
8%(Al2O3). No preheat required, maximum interpass temperature
150°C and no PWHT required.
SPECIFICATIONS
BS EN ISO 14174 S A CS 2
ASME IX QUALIFICATION CHEMICAL COMPOSITION (WELD METAL WT %)

QW432 F-No QW442 A-No C Mn Si Cu Fe Ti Ni
Wire 0.07 3.8 0.4 29 0.15 2.0 bal
deposit 0.02 3.6 1.3 29 2.5 0.6 bal
ASTM DIN
UNS N04400 2.4360
UNS N04405 2.4361 ALL-WELD MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
UNS N05500 2.4365 (cast) As welded typical
A494 M-35-1 (cast) Proprietary Tensile strength (MPa) 490
A494 M-35-2 (cast) Monel alloy 400, R405,
K500 (Special Metals) Elongation (%) 5d 45
BS Nicorros (VDM) Impact ISO-V(J) + 20°C 100
NA13
NA1 (cast)
APPLICATIONS Current: DC+, DC- or AC. 800A maximum.
For welding alloy 400 and similar parent material to itself
and to others in the Ni-Cu alloy system, such as pure nickel
and cupronickel. Welds in alloy K500 are satisfactory, but PACKAGING DATA
cannot match the strength of this precipitation-hardened Metrode NiCu flux is supplied in sealed moisture resistant
alloy. Castings of alloy 400 with up to about 1.5%Si are welded 20kg metal drums.
with Nimrod 190, but higher silicon grades such as BS3071 NA2
and ASTM A743 M35-2 are virtually unweldable because of HAZ
cracking. For dissimilar joints between alloy 400 and other STORAGE
alloys or steels, sensitivity to dilution by Fe (20-30%) or Cr (3- Preferred storage conditions for open drums: <60%RH,
6%) can lead to low ductility (or bend-test fissuring) in weld
FLUX
metal close to the fusion boundary. Direct welds to mild or

>18°C.
low alloy steels are satisfactory with dilution control, although If flux has become damp or has been stored for a long
ERNiCr-3 wire is preferable and necessary for stainless and period, it should be redried in the range 300-400°C for
higher chromium alloys (see data sheets D-10 and D-11). 1-2 hours.
Alternatively, the steel or alloy can be buttered with pure
nickel (see data sheet D-50) and this procedure is also useful
when surfacing with alloy 400 consumables. FUME DATA
Alloy 400 has a useful combination of strength, thermal SAW fume is negligible.
conductivity and resistance to corrosion by seawater,
inorganic salts, sulphuric and hydrofluoric acids, hydrogen
fluoride and alkalis. Applications include heat exchangers,
piping, vessels and evaporators in the offshore, marine,
chemical, petrochemical and power engineering industries.
www.metrode.com DS F-30 - NICU | Rev. 01-03/16 385

Tel: +44(0)1932 566721 / Fax: +44(0)1932 565168
NiCr FLUX
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Highly basic agglomerated flux for submerged arc welding Current: DC+, Dc- or AC; DC+ operation is preferred.
with a wide range of nickel base alloys (e.g. 20.70.Nb, 62-50 Normally used for single wires up to 3.2mm diameter
and HAS C276). and up to 450A. Smaller wires and lower currents are
Basicity Index (according to Boniszewski) is ~4.5. Nominal normally used to minimise the risk of hot cracking,
composition of the flux is: particularly for joining applications.
5%(SiO2) + 50%(CaO+MgO+MnO+K2O) + 10%(CaF2) +
Typical parameters for joining with 1.6mm wire are:
35%(Al2O3) 260A, 26V, 350mm/min travel speed.
SPECIFICATIONS PACKAGING DATA
BS EN ISO 14174 S A FB 2 Metrode NiCr flux is supplied in sealed moisture resistant
20kg metal drums.
QW432 F-No QW442 A-No STORAGE
MATERIALS TO BE WELDED >18°C.
With appropriate wires nickel base alloy 625 (data sheet D-20),
If flux has become damp or has been stored for a long
alloy 600 (data sheet D-10) and alloy C-276 (data sheet D-30)
period, it should be redried in the range 250-400°C for
can be welded; see wire data sheets for further details.
1-3 hours.
APPLICATIONS FUME DATA

NiCr flux is suitable for joining and surfacing. The high basicity
ensures minimal loss of alloying elements, and the very low
silica content produces low silicon weld metal and minimises
the risk of hot cracking.
WELDING GUIDELINES
NiCr flux is generally used on alloys that require no
preheat, have a maximum interpass temperature of
150°C and do not require PWHT. Further information
can be found on the data sheet for the respective alloy.

FLUX
Wire C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Nb Fe Ti W
20.70.Nb 0.01 3 0.2 0.01 0.01 20.5 bal - 2.3 1 0.1 -
62-50 0.02 0.2 0.2 0.01 0.01 21.5 bal 8.5 3.3 1 0.1 -
HAS C276 0.02 0.3 0.2 0.01 0.01 15.5 bal 15.0 - 5 - 3.7

Wire 20.70.Nb 62-50 HAS C276
Impact ISO-V(J) -196°C 100 80 76
386 www.metrode.com DS F-35 - NiCr | Rev. 01-03/16

OTHER USEFUL INFORMATION
FAMILY NAMES
“Families” of related consumables are identified with brand names which are briefly described below.
Armet Armour welding electrode
Chromet Chromium-molybdenum low alloy electrodes
Cobstel Cobalt-base stellite type electrodes
Cormet Chromium-molybdenum flux and metal cored wires
Cupromet Copper and cupronickel electrodes
Hardcore Hardfacing cored wires
KS Suffix for all-positional (generally basic) electrodes with emphasis on pipework
Methard Hardfacing electrodes
Metmax Stainless high recovery electrodes made on mild steel core wire
Nimax Nickel-base high recovery electrodes made on nickel core wire
Nimrod Nickel-base electrodes
Super R Stainless rutile electrodes (25.20 and 29.9 only)
Supercore Stainless, Nickel base and P91, P92 gas-shielded flux cored wires
Supercore P All-positional stainless gas-shielded flux cored wires
Supermet Stainless (acid) rutile electrodes
Supermig Stainless (high silicon) solid MIG wires
Thermet High temperature austenitic electrodes
Tufmet Low alloy electrodes for sub-zero toughness
Ultramet Stainless rutile all-positional electrodes
Ultramet B Stainless basic all-positional electrodes
Ultramet P Fully positional (including vertical down) pipe welding electrodes, suitable for root welding
Vertamet Stainless (acid) rutile vertical down electrodes
Workhard Hardfacing electrodes with ability to work-harden
SYMBOLS OF THE ELEMENTS
Al aluminium Cu copper N nitrogen Si silicon

Ar argon F fluorine Nb niobium Sn tin
As arsenic Fe iron Ni nickel Ta tantalum
B boron H2 hydrogen O2 oxygen Ti titanium
Bi bismuth He helium P phosphorus V vanadium
C carbon Mg magnesium Pb lead W tungsten
Cb columbium (niobium) Mn manganese S sulphur Zn zinc
Cr chromium Mo molybdenum Sb antimony Zr zirconium
OTHER INFORMATION
www.metrode.com 387
ABBREVIATIONS
A amps
AC alternating current
AFNOR l'Association Française de Normalisation (French Standards Association)
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM specifications form ASME Code II parts A and B)
AW as-welded
AWS American Welding Society (AWS specifications form ASME Code II part C)
BS British Standard
BS EN British Standard Euronorm (progressively superseding BS)
CTOD crack tip opening displacement (measurement of fracture toughness)
DC+/-ve direct current, electrode positive/negative
DIN Deutsche Institut für Normung (German Standards Institute)
FCAW Flux Cored Arc Welding
FCW Flux Cored Wire
FN Ferrite Number (FN = % ferrite up to 8FN, 18FN = 15% ferrite)
GMAW Gas Metal Arc Welding (= MIG/MAG)
GTAW Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (= TIG)
HAZ heat affected zone
HB hardness, Brinell scale
HRC hardness, Rockwell C scale
HV hardness, Vickers scale (= VPN, Vickers Pyramid number); also horizontal-vertical welding position
ISO International Organisation for Standardisation
J Joule (unit of energy in Charpy test or heat input, 1 watt-second)
kJ/mm kilojoules per mm: heat input = V x A x time (sec) divided by 1000 x ROL (mm)
ksi (=1000psi) kilopounds per square inch (1ksi = 6.895N/mm2)
LNG liquefied natural gas
LPG liquefied petroleum gas
MAG Metal Active Gas welding (= GMAW) MCW
MCW Metal Cored Wire
MIG Metal Inert Gas welding (= GMAW)
MMA Manual Metal Arc welding (stick electrodes = SMAW)
MPa (=N/mm2) megapascals (=Newtons per square mm ), (1N/mm2 = 0.145 ksi)
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers (USA)
OCV open circuit voltage for AC operation
PREN Pitting Corrosion Resistance Equivalent Number (= %Cr + 3.3%Mo + 16%N)
PREW Pitting Corrosion Resistance Equivalent (= %Cr + 3.3%Mo + 1.75%W + 16%N)
PWHT post weld heat treatment (usually equivalent to stress-relief)
RCC-M Design and Construction Rules for Mechanical Components of PWR Nuclear island
RH relative humidity, %
ROL run-out length, mm
SAW Submerged Arc Welding
SMAW Shielded Metal Arc Welding (stick electrodes = MMA)
TIG Tungsten Inert Gas (= GTAW)
TÜV
V volts
WH work hardened
WRC Welding Research Council
> greater than (prefix)
OTHER INFORMATION
< less than (prefix)

~ approximately (prefix)
388 www.metrode.com
WELDING POSITIONS
Some welding engineers prefer to use the standard AWS/ASME terminology for welding positions – some use a general description – some
use a mixture of both!
It is useful in describing welding procedures if we all understand each other. This chart shows the basic AWS/ASME (and BS EN) welding
positions, together with the outline descriptions. The AWS/ASME positions are described in ASME IX and the European terminology is used in
BS EN 287-1 and defined in ISO 6947.
ASME (BS EN) POSITIONS
FLAT HORIZONTAL VERTICAL OVERHEAD

FILLET WELD
GROOVE WELD
Pipe is rotated
FOR PIPES
while welding
PH / 5Gu Inclined HL-045 / 6Gu

PJ / 5Gd position 45° JL-045 / 6Gd
SYMBOLS USED ON DATA SHEETS FOR WELDING POSITIONS – ASME (BS EN)
OTHER INFORMATION

Downhand / Standing Horizontal Vertical up Vertical Overhead
gravity Fillet vertical down
www.metrode.com 389
CONSTITUTION DIAGRAMS
SCHAEFFLER DIAGRAM
WRC 1992 DIAGRAM

OTHER INFORMATION
The WRC-1992 diagram predicts ferrite content for a wide range of stainless weld metal compositions, including duplex and superduplex types.
Weld metals solidifying in the FA and F regions have best resistance to hot cracking; those in the fully austenitic region (A) are most sensitive.
When nitrogen content is unknown (and not intentionally added) assume 0.08%N for gas-shielded MIG/FCW, 0.12%N for self-shielded FCW,
and 0.06%N for all other purposes.
390 www.metrode.com
DELONG DIAGRAM
CONVERSIONS
APPROXIMATE ELECTRODE SIZE EQUIVALENTS APPROXIMATE CONVERSION FACTORS
Diameter Length To convert into multiply by
mm inch inch SWG mm inch General
0.8 1/32 0.031 21 inch (in) millimetre (mm) 25.4
200 8
0.9 - 0.035 - millimetre (mm) inch (in) 0.0394
1.0 - 0.039 19 230 9 foot (ft) metre (m) 0.3048
1.2 3/64 0.047 18 metre (m) foot (ft) 3.281
1.6 1/16 0.063 16 250 10 pound (lb) kilogram (kg) 0.4536
2.0 5/64 0.078 14 kilogram (kg) pound (lb) 2.205
2.4 3/32 0.094 12 300 12 ton tonne 1.0161
2.5 - 0.098 - imp gallon litre (l) 4.546
3.0 - 0.118 11 350 14
cubic foot (cu ft) litre (l) 28.32
3.2 1/8 0.125 10 cubic foot/hour (cfh) litre/min (l/min) 0.472
4.0 5/32 0.156 8 380 15
litre/min (l/min) cubic foot/hour (cfh) 2.12
5.0 3/16 0.188 6 Stress
450 18
6.0 1/4 0.250 4 tonf/in2 N/mm2 (= MPa) 15.44
LENGTHS OF TIG WIRE PER KILOGRAM* kgf/mm2 (kp/mm2) N/mm2 (= MPa) 9.807
ksi (=1000 lbf/in2) N/mm2 (= MPa) 6.895
Diameter N/mm2 (= MPa) tonf/in2 0.0647
mm m/kg N/mm2 (= MPa) kgf/mm2 (kp/mm2) 0.102
0.8 260 N/mm2 (= MPa) ksi (=1000 lbf/in2) 0.145
N/mm2 (= MPa) hbar 0.1
1.0 158
Impact energy
1.2 114 ft lbf J 1.356
1.6 65 kgf m J 9.807
OTHER INFORMATION
kgf m ft lbf 7.233

2.0 40
J ft lbf 0.7376
2.4 29 J kgf m 0.102
3.2 16 ft lbf kgf m 0.1383
Temperature
4.0 10
°C = 5/9 x (°F – 32)
* Based on ferrous alloys with a density of ~8g/cm3
Note: 2.2mm diameter Superoot 316L has ~30 lengths per kg °F = (°C x 9/5) + 32
°K = °C + 273
www.metrode.com 391
CONVERSIONS
APPROXIMATE HARDNESS CONVERSION (BASED ON ASTM E140)
Rockwell B Rockwell C Vickers Brinell Products of approximately equivalent hardness
55 - 100 100
60 - 107 107
65 - 116 116
70 - 125 125
75 - 137 137
80 - 150 150 CI Soft Flow Ni
85 - 165 165 Ultramild
90 - 185 185 CI Special Cast NiFe
95 - 210 210 308L, 316L, 307 (AW)
100 ~20 240 240 Nimrod/Nimax C (AW), P91/P92 (PWHT)
- 22 248 247 625 (AW)
- 25 266 253
- 28 286 271 Railrod, 29.9 Super R, duplex
- 30 302 286 Chromet 2 (AW), superduplex
- 35 345 327 410NiMo (AW)
- 40 392 371 Methard 350
- 45 446 421 Cobstel 6, 625 (WH), 307 (WH), P91/P92 (AW)
- 50 513 481
- 55 595 560 Methard 650
- 60 697 654 Methard 850
- 62 746 688 Methard 750TS
- 65 832 - Methard 950, Methard 1050
- 68 940 -
TWI HARDNESS CONVERSION FOR DUPLEX AND SUPERDUPLEX

60
TWI
50
E140
40
30
Rockwell C
20
10
HRC = 0.091 HV - 2.4
0
OTHER INFORMATION
200 250 300 350 400 450 500

Vickers Hardness
392 www.metrode.com
STRENGTH ENERGY TEMPERATURE WEIGHT

MPa ksi J ft.lbf °C °F kg lb
25 4 5 4 -269 -452 0.5 1.1
50 7 10 7 -196 -321 1.0 2.2
75 11 15 11 -175 -283 1.5 3.3
100 15 20 15 -150 -238 2.0 4.4
125 18 25 18 -125 -193 2.5 5.5
150 22 30 22 -110 -166 3.0 6.6
175 25 35 26 -100 -148 3.5 7.7
200 29 40 30 -75 -103 4.0 8.8
225 33 45 33 -60 -76 4.5 9.9
250 36 50 37 -50 -58 5.0 11.0
275 40 55 41 -40 -40 5.5 12.1
300 44 60 44 -30 -22 6.0 13.2
325 47 65 48 -20 -4 6.5 14.3
350 51 70 52 -10 14 7.0 15.4
375 54 75 55 0 32 7.5 16.5
400 58 80 59 10 50 8.0 17.6
425 62 85 63 20 68 8.5 18.7
450 65 90 66 30 86 9.0 19.8
475 69 95 70 40 104 9.5 20.9
500 73 100 74 50 122 10.0 22.1
525 76 105 77 75 167 10.5 23.2
550 80 110 81 100 212 11.0 24.3
575 83 115 85 125 257 11.5 25.4
600 87 120 89 150 302 12.0 26.5
625 91 125 92 175 347 12.5 27.6
650 94 130 96 200 392 13.0 28.7
675 98 135 100 225 437 13.5 29.8
700 102 140 103 250 482 14.0 30.9
725 105 145 107 275 527 14.5 32.0
750 109 150 111 300 572 15.0 33.1
775 112 155 114 325 617 15.5 34.2
800 116 160 118 350 662 16.0 35.3
825 120 165 122 400 752 16.5 36.4
850 123 170 125 450 842 17.0 37.5
875 127 175 129 500 932 17.5 38.6
900 131 180 133 550 1022 18.0 39.7
925 134 185 136 600 1112 18.5 40.8
950 138 190 140 650 1202 19.0 41.9
975 141 195 144 700 1292 19.5 43.0
1000 145 200 148 750 1382 20.0 44.1
1025 149 205 151 800 1472 20.5 45.2
1050 152 210 155 850 1562 21.0 46.3
1075 156 215 159 900 1652 21.5 47.4
1100 160 220 162 950 1742 22.0 48.5
1125 163 225 166 1000 1832 22.5 49.6
1150 167 230 170 1050 1922 23.0 50.7
1175 170 235 173 1100 2012 23.5 51.8
1200 174 240 177 1150 2102 24.0 52.9
1225 178 245 181 1200 2192 24.5 54.0
1250 181 250 184 1250 2282 25.0 55.1
OTHER INFORMATION
www.metrode.com 393
PACKAGING AND STORAGE

The following shows the typical packaging used for the various processes with nominal dimensions taken from
national standards (eg. EN ISO 544 and AWS A5.02). If packaging is critical then this should be confirmed at the
time of order with our Customer Care Department.
MMA / SMAW Electrode

Standard MMA packaging is hermetically sealed metal tins with a ring-pull top; tin weights vary depending on
product and diameter. There are three tins to a cardboard carton.
The tins are hermetically sealed and meet the definition for hermetically sealed containers given in AWS A5.5. If
unopened, and appropriately stored, this packaging will maintain the electrodes in the as-packed condition for
an indefinite period of time.
Electrodes can be used directly from the tin without the need for rebaking. Once opened the tins can be closed
using the plastic lid supplied and should be stored at >18˚C and <60% relative humidity. Redrying requirements
are given on the data sheets for individual electrodes. MMA electrodes can, for selected products, also be
supplied in Sahara Ready Packs®, an advanced vacuum packaging system.
TIG / GTAW Wire

Standard packaging for cut length TIG wire is 2.5kg or 5kg plastic tubes. Superoot flux cored TIG wire is packed
in a 1kg plastic tube.
TIG wires that may otherwise be susceptible to rusting (mild or low alloy steel) are copper coated. Under normal
storage conditions TIG wires do not present any handling difficulties.
MIG / GMAW Wire

Standard packaging for MIG wire is 12.5kg or 15kg 300mm diameter spools, in a cardboard carton. Some wires are
also available on 0.7kg/1.0kg 100mm diameter mini-spools or 5kg 200mm diameter midi-spools.
Different spool types and dimensions are shown on the next page.
MIG wires that may otherwise be susceptible to rusting (mild or low alloy steel) are copper coated. MIG spools
should be properly handled and stored because any damage to spools can lead to feeding problems.
Flux Cored Wire

Standard packaging for flux cored wire is 15kg 300mm diameter spools, vacuum sealed in barrier foil and in
cardboard carton. Different spool types and dimensions are shown on the next page.
As supplied wires are adequately protected from moisture pick-up but once opened part-used spools need to be
correctly stored. It is recommended that spools are removed from machines overnight and put in a controlled
store. If an opened spool is to be stored for any period of time it should be adequately protected (in a plastic
bag with desiccant) and held in a controlled store.
Submerged Arc Wire

Standard packaging for submerged arc wire is 25kg spools in a cardboard carton. Different spool types and
dimensions are shown on the next page.
Submerged Arc Flux

Standard packaging for flux is 20kg, 22.5kg or 25kg plastic bags in a sealed metal drum; or 25kg bags.
For most applications it is recommended that the flux be dried prior to use.
OTHER INFORMATION
394 www.metrode.com
PACKAGING AND STORAGE
B300 (metal, requiring adaptor)
R435 (metal)
Type Code Nominal weight Outer diameter Inner diameter Outer width Bore diameter Pin hole
(kg) d1 d2 b d3 d4 e1
Plastic - mini S100 0.7/1.0 100 - 45 16.5 - -
Plastic – midi S200 5 200 55 50.5 55 44.5
Plastic S300 12.5/15 300 - 103 50.5 10 44.5
Wire basket BS300 12.5/15 300 189 103 50.5 - -
Wire spool (adaptor) B300 12.5/15 300 180 100 - - -
OTHER INFORMATION
Submerged arc R435 20/25 435 300 90 - -

All measurements are in mm and are the nominal dimensions, for tolerances refer to international standards eg. AWS A5.02 or EN ISO 544
www.metrode.com 395
INDEX
INDEX 1 : PRODUCT DESIGNATION

PRODUCT NAME DATASHEET PAGE PRODUCT NAME DATASHEET PAGE
2507 B-62 203 CHROMET 1 A-12 12
2507 B-62 203 CHROMET 10MW A-18 51
100Cu E-30 349 CHROMET 12MV A-19 54
12Cr B-10 102 CHROMET 1L A-12 13
12CrMoV A-19 55 CHROMET 1V A-14 30
13.1.BMP B-10 101 CHROMET 1X A-12 14
13.4.Mo.L.B B-11 105 CHROMET 2 A-13 21
13.4.Mo.L.R B-11 104 CHROMET 23L A-21 62
13.RMP B-10 100 CHROMET 2L A-13 22
13CMV A-14 31 CHROMET 2X A-13 23
17.4.Cu.R B-12 110 CHROMET 5 A-15 34
17.8.2.RCF C-13 241 CHROMET 9 A-16 37
17-4PH B-12 112 CHROMET 91VNB A-17 44
19.9.6Mn E-21 344 CHROMET 92 A-20 57
1CrMo A-12 15 CHROMET 9-B9 A-17 43
1Ni A-40 73 CHROMET 9MV-N A-17 41
1NiCu.B A-70 90 CHROMET 9MVN+ A-17 42
1NiMo.B A-61 65 CHROMET WB2 A-25 69
20.18.6.Cu.R B-47 169 CI SOFT FLOW Ni E-10 333
20.25.4.Cu B-40 159 CI SPECIAL CAST NiFe E-11 336
20.70.Nb D-10, D-11 284, 288 CI-MET NiFe E-11 337
21.33.MnNb C-40 261 CMo A-10 10
2205XKS B-60 190 COBSTEL 6 E-65 371
25.20 SUPER R C-30 254 COBSTEL 8 E-66 372
25.20.LR B-45 166 CORMET 1 A-12 19
25.35.4CNb C-50 268 CORMET 10MW A-18 52
2507XKS B-62 201 CORMET 1V A-14 32
29.9.SUPER R E-22 347 CORMET 2 A-13 28
2CrMo A-13 24 CORMET 2L A-13 28
2CrWV A-21 63 CORMET M91 A-17 47
2Ni A-41 77 CUPROMET N30 D-70 320
308S92 B-30 118 E10018-D2 A-50 81
308S92(N) B-80 211 E11018-M A-60 85
308S96 C-10 228 E16.8.2-15 C-12 237
309S92 B-50 175 E320LR-15 B-41 161
309S92(N) B-83 219 E825L-15 B-42 163
309S94 C-21 250 E9018-D1 A-50 80
310S94 C-30 256 EPRI P87 D-87 326
312S94 E-22 348 ER110S-G A-60 87
316S92 B-32 131 ER16.8.2 C-12 238
316S92(N) B-81 215 ER308LCF B-37 149
316S96 C-13 244 ER309Mo B-51 180
318S96 B-34 141 ER316LCF B-38 154
347S96 B-31 124 ER316MnNF B-33 137
35.45.Nb C-60 271 ER317L B-35 144
55NiFe E-11 338 ER329N B-60 191
5CrMo A-15 35 ER347H C-11 233
61-70 D-40 309 ER410NiMo B-11 106
62-50 D-20 294 ER690 D-41 312
65NiCu D-60 318 ER70S-2 E-70 374
70CuNi D-70 321 ER70S-3 E-70 375
80CuNiAl E-37 353 ER70S-6 E-70 376
82-50 B-42 164 ER80S-B2 A-12 16
90CuAl E-36 352 ER80S-W A-70 91
90CuNi D-70 322 ER90S-B3 A-13 25
92CuSn E-33 351 FV520-1 B-12 109
97CuSi E-31 350 FV520-B B-12 111
INDEX
9CrMo A-16 38 HARDCORE 350 E-50 358

9CrMoV A-17 46 HARDCORE 650 E-51 362
9CrMoV-N A-17 45 HARDCORE 850 E-55 367
9CrWV A-20 58 HARDCORE 950 E-55 368
ARMET 1 E-20 340 HAS 59 D-31 301
396 www.metrode.com
INDEX

PRODUCT NAME DATASHEET PAGE PRODUCT NAME DATASHEET PAGE
HAS C22 D-32 304 SUPERCORE 308LP B-30 119
HAS C276 D-30 298 SUPERCORE 309L B-50 176
LA436 FLUX F-11 381 SUPERCORE 309LP B-50 176
LA490 FLUX F-14 382 SUPERCORE 309Mo B-51 181
METCORE DWA 50 E-70 377 SUPERCORE 309MoP B-51 181
METCORE DWA 55E A-40 74 SUPERCORE 316L B-32 132
METHARD 1050 E-58 369 SUPERCORE 316LCF B-38 155
METHARD 350 E-50 357 SUPERCORE 316LP B-32 132
METHARD 650 E-51 360 SUPERCORE 316NF B-33 138
METHARD 650R E-51 361 SUPERCORE 317LP B-35 145
METHARD 750TS E-53 363 SUPERCORE 347 B-31 125
METHARD 850 E-55 365 SUPERCORE 347HP C-11 234
METHARD 950 E-55 366 SUPERCORE 410NiMo B-11 107
METMAX 307R E-21 343 SUPERCORE 620P D-33 306
MnMo A-23 66 SUPERCORE 625P D-20 295
Mo.B A-10 9 SUPERCORE F91 A-17 48
MT304H C-25 252 SUPERCORE F92 A-20 60
NAG 19.9.L B-88 222 SUPERCORE M2205 B-60 192
NAG 19.9.L.R B-88 221 SUPERCORE WB2 A-25 70
NICKEL 2Ti D-50, E-10 315 - 334 SUPERCORE Z100XP B-61 199
NiCr FLUX F-35 386 SUPERMET 16.8.2 C-12 236
NiCu FLUX F-30 385 SUPERMET 2205 B-60 187
NILSIL E-72 379 SUPERMET 2205AR B-60 189
NIMAX 182 D-10 283 SUPERMET 2506Cu B-63 206
NIMAX B2L D-80 324 SUPERMET 253MA C-20 247
NIMAX C E-45 355 SUPERMET 308L B-30 114
NIMROD 132KS D-12 290 SUPERMET 309L B-50 171
NIMROD 182 D-10 282 SUPERMET 309Mo B-51 178
NIMROD 182KS D-10 281 SUPERMET 316L B-32 127
NIMROD 190 D-60 317 SUPERMET 318 B-34 140
NIMROD 200Ti D-50 314 SUPERMIG 308LSi B-30 118
NIMROD 59KS D-31 300 SUPERMIG 309LSi B-50 175
NIMROD 617KS D-40 308 SUPERMIG 316LSi B-32 131
NIMROD 625 D-20 292 SUPERMIG 347Si B-31 124
NIMROD 625KS D-20 293 SUPEROOT 308L B-30 120
NIMROD 657 C-90 277 SUPEROOT 316L B-32 133
NIMROD 690KS D-41 311 THERMET 22H C-80 275
NIMROD AKS D-11 287 THERMET 25.35.Nb C-45 265
NIMROD C22KS D-32 303 THERMET 309CF C-21 249
NIMROD C276KS D-30 297 THERMET 310H C-31 258
RAILROD A-80 92 THERMET 35.45.Nb C-60 270
SA 1CrMo A-12 17 THERMET 800Nb C-40 260
SA 1NiMo A-23 67 THERMET HP40Nb C-50 267
SA 2CrMo A-13 26 THERMET HP50WCo C-70 273
SA 9CrMo A-16 39 THERMET R17.38H C-41 263
SS300 FLUX F-22 384 TUFMET 1Ni.B A-40 72
SSB FLUX F-20 383 TUFMET 1NiMo A-60 84
SUPERCORE 16.8.2 C-12 239 TUFMET 2Ni.B A-41 76
SUPERCORE 16.8.2P C-12 239 TUFMET 3Ni.B A-42 78
SUPERCORE 20.9.3 E-20 341 TUFMET 3NiMo A-60 86
SUPERCORE 20.9.3P E-20 341 ULTRAMET 2205 B-60 188
SUPERCORE 2205 B-60 193 ULTRAMET 2304 B-59 184
SUPERCORE 2205P B-60 193 ULTRAMET 2507 B-62 202
SUPERCORE 2304P B-59 185 ULTRAMET 308H C-10 226
SUPERCORE 2507 B-62 204 ULTRAMET 308L B-30 115
SUPERCORE 2507Cu B-63 207 ULTRAMET 308L(N) B-80 209
SUPERCORE 2507Cup B-63 207 ULTRAMET 308LCF B-37 147
INDEX
SUPERCORE 2507P B-62 204 ULTRAMET 308LP B-30 117

SUPERCORE 308H C-10 229 ULTRAMET 309L B-50 172
SUPERCORE 308HP C-10 229 ULTRAMET 309L(N) B-83 217
SUPERCORE 308L B-30 119 ULTRAMET 309LP B-50 174
SUPERCORE 308LCF B-37 150 ULTRAMET 309Nb B-53 182
www.metrode.com 397
INDEX

PRODUCT NAME DATASHEET PAGE
ULTRAMET 316H C-13 242
ULTRAMET 316L B-32 128
ULTRAMET 316L(N) B-81 213
ULTRAMET 316LCF B-38 152
ULTRAMET 316LP B-32 130
ULTRAMET 316NF B-33 135
ULTRAMET 347 B-31 122
ULTRAMET 347H C-11 231
ULTRAMET B308H C-10 227
ULTRAMET B308L B-30 116
ULTRAMET B308L(N) B-80 210
ULTRAMET B308LCF B-37 148
ULTRAMET B310Mn C-30 255
ULTRAMET B310MoLN B-46 168
ULTRAMET B316LCF B-38 153
ULTRAMET B316NF B-33 136
ULTRAMET B347 B-31 123
ULTRAMILD E-71 378
VERTAMET 309Mo B-51 179
WORKHARD 13Mn E-60 370
ZERON® 100X B-61 197
ZERON® 100XKS B-61 196
Zeron® is a registered name of RA Materials Ltd
INDEX
398 www.metrode.com
INDEX
INDEX2 : CONSUMABLES SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATION DATASHEET PAGE SPECIFICATION DATASHEET PAGE
13 B-10 99 19.9.R C-10 225
1.4009 B-10 99 1CrMoBH A-12 11
1.4296 C-10 225 1CrMoLBH A-12 11
1.4316 B-30 113 1NiBH A-40 71
1.4332 B-50 170 2.0837 D-70 319
1.4337 E-22 346 2.0873 D-70 319
1.4351 B-11 103 2.1006 E-30 349
1.4370 E-21 342 2.1461 E-31 350
1.4403 C-13 240 2.4155 D-50, E-10 313, 332
1.4430 B-32 126 2.4156 D-50 313
1.4455 B-33 134 2.4366 D-60 316
1.4459 B-51 177 2.4377 D-60 316
1.4519 B-40 156 2.4607 D-31 299
1.4551 B-31 121 2.4609 D-31 299
1.4576 B-34 139 2.4615 D-80 323
13 4 B-11 103 2.4621 D-20 291
13.RMP B-10 99 2.4625 D-11 286
15.35.H.R C-41 262 2.4627 D-40 305
16.8.2 C-12 235 2.4628 D-40 305
17.8.2.AR C-12 235 2.4653 B-42 162
17.8.2.B C-12 235 2.4655 B-42 162
17.8.2.R C-13 240 2.4805 D-12 290
18 8 Mn E-21 342 2.4806 D-10, D-11 280, 286
18.15.3.LMnB B-33 134 2.4807 D-10 280
18.15.3.LMnR B-33 134 2.4831 D-20 291
19 12 3 H C-13 240 2.4886 D-30 296
19 12 3 L B-32 126 2.4887 D-30 296
19 12 3 L Si B-32 126 20 16 3 Mn L B-33 134
19 12 3 Nb B-34 139 20 25 5 Cu L B-40 156
19 13 4 L B-35 142 20.25.5.LCuNb.B B-40 156
19 9 L Si B-30 113 20.25.5.LCuNb.R B-40 156
19 9 Nb B-31, C-11 121, 230 20.34.2.CuNb.B B-41 160
19.12.3.L.AR B-32 126 22 12 H C-21 248
19.12.3.L.B B-32 126 22 9 3 N L B-60 186
19.12.3.L.R B-32 126 23 12 2 L B-51 177
19.12.3.Nb.AR B-34 139 23 12 L B-50 170
19.12.3.R C-13 240 23 12 L Si B-50 170
19.13.4.L.R B-35 142 23.12.2.AR B-51 177
19.9.3.R E-20 339 23.12.L.AR B-50 170
19.9.B C-10 225 23.12.L.B B-50 170
19.9.H C-10 225 23.12.L.R B-50 170
19.9.L B-30 113 23.12.Nb.R B-53 182
19.9.L.AR B-30 113 23.12.R C-21 248
19.9.L.B B-30 113 25 20 C-30 253
INDEX
19.9.L.R B-30 113 25 9 4 N L B-61 195

19.9.Nb.B B-31, C-11 121, 230 25.20.B C-30 253
19.9.Nb.R B-31, C-11 121, 230 25.20.H.B C-31 257
www.metrode.com 399
INDEX

25.20.R C-30 253 C26 E-37 353
25.21.2.LMn.B B-46 167 C7 E-30 349
25.35.H.Nb.B C-50 266 C9 E-31 350
29 9 E-22 346 CrMo1Si A-12 11
29.9.AR E-22 346 CrMo2Si A-13 20
2CrMoBH A-13 20 CrMo5Si A-15 33
2CrMoLBH A-13 20 CrMo9Si A-16 36
2MnMoBH A-50 78 E 13 B 52 B-10 99
2NiBH A-41 75 E 16 8 2 B C-12 235
2NiMoBH A-60 83 E 16 8 2 R C-12 235
302S92 B-50 170 E 19 12 2 R 32 C-13 240
302S93 B-50 170 E 23 12 2 LB 42 B-51 177
302S94 C-21 248 E 25 22 2 N L B B-46 167
302S95 B-51 177 E 46 4 1Ni B 42 A-40 71
307S92 B-35 142 E 46 6 2Ni B 42 A-41 75
307S94 E-21 342 E C Ni-CI 1 E-10 332
307S98 E-21 342 E C NiFe-CI 1 E-11 335
308S92 B-30 113 E10018-D2 A-50 78
308S93 B-30 113 E10-UM-60-G E-55 364
308S96 C-10 225 E10-UM-65-G E-55 364
310S94 C-30 253 E11018-M A-60 83
312S94 E-22 346 E12016-G A-60 83
316S92 B-32 126 E13 4 R 52 B-11 103
316S93 B-32 126 E13 R 52 B-10 99
316S96 C-13 240 E16-8-2-15 C-12 235
318S96 B-34 139 E16-8-2-16 C-13 240
347S96 B-31, C-11 121, 230 E16-8-2-17 C-12 235
410S94 B-10 99 E18 15 3 LB 42 B-33 134
5CrMoBH A-15 33 E18 15 3 LR 32 B-33 134
904S92 B-40 156 E18 8 Mn R 32 E-21 342
9CrMoBH A-16 36 E18 9 MnMo R 52 E-21 342
A15 E-70 373 E19 12 3 LB 42 B-32 126
A17 E-70 373 E19 12 3 LR 11 B-32 126
A18 E-70 373 E19 12 3 LR 32 B-32, B-81 126, 212
A30 A-10 8 E19 12 3 Nb R 32 B-34 139
A31 A-50 78 E19 13 4 NL R 32 B-35 142
A32 A-12 11 E19 9 HB 42 C-10 225
A33 A-13 20 E19 9 HR 32 C-10 225
A34 A-15 33 E19 9 LB 42 B-30 113
A35 A-16 36 E19 9 LR 32 B-30, B-80 113, 208
B50A273 A-14 29 E19 9 Nb B 42 B-31, C-11 121, 230
BFB6 63353 DC8M F-20 383 E19 9 Nb R 32 B-31, C-11 121, 230
BFB7 6534 AC5 F-35 386 E1-UM-400-GP E-50 356
C11 E-33 351 E20 10 3 R 32 E-20 339
INDEX
C13 E-36 352 E20 25 5 Cu N L B 62 B-40 156

C16 D-70 319 E20 25 5 Cu N L R 52 B-40 156
C18 D-70 319 E20-UM-300-CKTZ E-66 372
C20 E-37 353 E20-UM-45-CTZ E-65 371
400 www.metrode.com
INDEX

E2101-16 B-59 183 E308HT1-1/4 C-10 225
E22 12 R 32 C-21 248 E308L-15 B-30, B-80 113, 208
E22 9 3 N L B 42 B-60 186 E308L-16 B-30, B-80 113, 208
E22 9 3 N L R 32 B-60 186 E308L-17 B-30 113
E2209-15 B-60 186 E308LT0-1/4 B-30 113
E2209-16 B-60 186 E308LT1-1/4 B-30 113
E2209-17 B-60 186 E308LT1-1/4J B-37 146
E2209T0-1/4 B-60 186 E308Mo-16 E-20 339
E2209T1-1/4 B-60 186 E308MoT0-1/4 E-20 339
E23 12 2 LR 11 B-51 177 E308MoT1-1/4 E-20 339
E23 12 2 LR 32 B-51 177 E310-15 C-30 253
E23 12 LB 42 B-50 170 E310-16 C-30 253
E23 12 LR 32 B-50 170 E310H-15 C-31 257
E23 12 Nb R 32 B-53 182 E312-17 E-22 346
E25 20 B 42 C-30 253 E316H-15 C-13 240
E25 20 H B 42 C-31 257 E316H-16 C-13 240
E25 20 R 32 C-30 253 E316L-15 B-32 126
E25 9 3 Cu N L R 52 B-63 205 E316L-15 B-32, B-81 126, 212
E25 9 4 N L B 42 B-61, B-62 195, 200 E316L-16 B-32, B-81 126, 212
E25 9 4 N L R 32 B-62 200 E316L-17 B-32 126
E2553-16 B-63 205 E316LMn-15 B-33 134
E2553T0-4 B-63 205 E316LMn-16 B-33 134
E2553T1-4 B-63 205 E316LT0-1/4 B-32 126
E2594-15 B-62 200 E316LT1-1/4 B-32 126
E2594-16 B-62 200 E316LT1-1/4J B-38 151
E2594T0-4 B-62 200 E318-17 B-34 139
E2594T1-4 B-61, B-62 195, 200 E320LR-15 B-41 160
E2595-15 B-61 195 E323H-16 C-41 262
E29 9 R 32 E-22 346 E347-15 B-31,C-11 121, 230
E302H-16 C-21 248 E347-16 B-31,C-11 121, 230
E302L-15 B-50 170 E347HT1-1/4 C-11 230
E302L-16 B-50 170 E347T0-1/4 B-31 121
E302L-17 B-50 170 E383-15 B-42 162
E302LMo-15 B-51 177 E385-15 B-40 156
E302LMo-17 B-51 177 E385-16 B-40 156
E302LMoT0-1/4 B-51 177 E410-15 B-10 99
E302LMoT1-1/4 B-51 177 E410-26 B-10 99
E302LT0-1/4 B-50 170 E410NiMo-26 B-11 103
E302LT1-1/4 B-50 170 E410NiMoT1-1/4 B-11 103
E302Nb-16 B-53 182 E502-15 A-15 33
E307-16 E-21 342 E505-15 A-16 36
E307-26 E-21 342 E5518-N2 A U A-40 71
E307L-16 B-35 142 E5518-N5 P U A-41 75
E307LT1-1/4 B-35 142 E5518-NCC1 A A-70 89
INDEX
E308H-15 C-10 225 E6018 E-71 378

E308H-16 C-10 225 E62 4 MnMoB A-50 78
E308HT0-1/4 C-10 225 E7015-B2L A-12 11
www.metrode.com 401
INDEX

E7018-A1 A-10 8 EFe2 E-51 359
E71T-5 A-40 71 EFe4 E-53 363
E8015-B3L A-13 20 EFe5-B E-53 363
E8015-B6 A-15 33 EFe9 E-60 360
E8015-B8 A-16 36 EFeMn-B E-60 360
E8018-B2 A-12 11 EG(92) A-20 56
E8018-C1 A-41 75 EL-NiCr15FeNb D-12 290
E8018-C3 A-40 71 EMo B 32 A-10 8
E8018-W2 A-70 89 ENi-1 D-50 313
E81T1-B2C/M A-12 11 ENi1066 D-80 323
E9015-B9 A-17 40 ENi2 E-45 354
E9015-G H4 A-18, A-25 50, 68 ENi2061 D-50 313
E9015-G(23) A-21 61 ENi4060 D-60 316
E9015-G(92) A-20 56 ENi6022 D-32 302
E9016-G A-60 83 ENi6059 D-31 299
E9018-B3 A-13 20 ENi6062 D-12 290
E9018-D1 A-50 78 ENi6117 D-40 305
E9018-G A-23, A-61 64,88 ENi6133 D-11 286
E90C-B9 A-17 40 ENi6152 D-41 310
E90C-G A-18 50 ENi6182 D-10 280
E91T1-B3C/M A-13 20 ENi6276 D-30 296
E91T1-B3LC/M A-13 20 ENi6625 D-20 291
E91T1-B9C/M A-17 40 ENi-CI E-10 332
E91T1-C1PZ-B91 A-17 40 ENiCr-4 C-90 276
E91T1-C1PZ-B92-H4 A-20 56 ENiCrCoMo-1 D-40 305
E91T1-M21PZ-B91 A-17 40 ENiCrFe-1 D-12 290
E91T1-M21PZ-B92 A-20 56 ENiCrFe-2 D-11 286
EB2 A-12 11 ENiCrFe-3 D-10 280
EB3 A-13 20 ENiCrFe-7 D-41 310
EB8 A-16 36 ENiCrMo-10 D-32 302
EB91 A-17 40 ENiCrMo-13 D-31 299
EC2209 B-60 186 ENiCrMo-3 D-20 291
ECo1 E-66 372 ENiCrMo3T1-4 D-20 291
ECo2 E-65 371 ENiCrMo-4 D-30 296
ECoCr-A E-65 371 ENiCrMo-5 E-45 354
ECoCr-E E-66 372 ENiCu-7 D-60 316
ECrMo1 B 32 A-12 11 ENiFe-CI E-11 335
ECrMo1L B 32 A-12 11 ENiMo-7 D-80 323
ECrMo2 B 32 A-13 20 ER100S-G A-60 83
ECrMo2L B 32 A-13 20 ER110S-G A-60 83
ECrMo5 B 32 A-15 33 ER16.8.2 C-12 235
ECrMo9 B 32 A-16 36 ER2209 B-60 186
ECrMo91 B 32 A-17 40 ER2594 B-61, B-62 195, 200
ECrMoV1 B 32 A-14 29 ER302 C-21 248
ECrMoWV12 B 32 A-19 53 ER302L B-50 170
INDEX
ECuNi D-70 319 ER302LMo B-51 177

EFe1 E-50 356 ER302LSi B-50 170
EFe14 E-55 364 ER307 B-35 142
EFe16 E-58 369 ER307 E-21 342
402 www.metrode.com
INDEX

ER307L B-35 142 ERNiFeCr-1 B-42 162
ER308H C-10 225 ERNiMo-7 D-80 323
ER308L B-30, B-80 113, 208 F8 P0-EB2-B2 A-12 11
ER308LSi B-30 113 G2Ni2 A-41 75
ER310 C-30 253 G3Ni1 A-40 71
ER312 E-22 346 G4Mo A-50 78
ER316H C-13 240 MDS 12809/07 B-61 195
ER316L B-32, B-81 126, 212 MDS 12809/08 B-61 195
ER316LMn B-33 134 Mn3Ni1CrMo A-60 83
ER316LSi B-32 126 Mn3Ni1Cu A-70 89
ER318 B-34 139 MnMoBH A-50 78
ER320LR B-41 160 MoBH A-10 8
ER347 B-31, C-11 121, 230 MoSi A-10 8
ER385 B-40 156 N02061 D-50, E-10 313, 332
ER410 B-10 99 N06082 D-10, D-11 280, 286
ER410NiMo B-11 103 N10276 D-30 296
ER502 A-15 33 NA47 E-11 335
ER505 A-16 36 R316LT1-5 B-32 126
ER630 B-12 108 RCC-M B-80, B-81 B-83 208, 212, 216
ER70S-2 E-70 373 S A AB 1 67 AC F-11 381
ER70S-3 E-70 373 S A AF 2 F-20 383
ER70S-6 E-70 373 S A AF 2 64 AC F-22 384
ER70S-A1 A-10 8 S A CS 2 F-30 385
ER80S-B2 A-12 11 S A FB 1 55 AC H5 F-14 382
ER80S-B6 A-15 33 S A FB 2 2 F-35 394
ER80S-B8 A-16 36 S C NiFe-1 E-11 335
ER80S-D2 A-23, A-50 64,77 S2860 B-80 208
ER80S-G A-12, A-70 11, 87 S2865 B-81 212
ER80S-Ni1 A-40 71 S2910 B-80 208
ER80S-Ni2 A-41 75 S2915 B-81 212
ER90S-B3 A-13 20 S30280 C-21 248
ER90S-B9 A-17 40 S31080 C-30 253
ER90S-D2 A-23, A-50 64,77 S3Ni1Mo A-23 64
ER90S-G A-13 20 SCrMo1 A-12 11
ER90S-G(92) A-20 56 SCrMo2 A-13 20
ERCu E-30 349 SCrMo9 A-16 36
ERCuAl-A2 E-36 352 SCrMo91 A-17 40
ERCuNi D-70 319 SNi1066 D-80 323
ERCuNiAl E-37 353 SNi2061 D-50, E-10 313, 332
ERCuSi-A E-31 350 SNi4060 D-60 316
ERNi-1 D-50, E-10 313, 332 SNi6022 D-32 302
ERNiCr-3 D-10, D-11 280, 286 SNi6052 D-41 310
ERNiCrCoMo-1 D-40 305 SNi6059 D-31 299
ERNiCrFe-7 D-41 310 SNi6082 D-10, D-11 280, 286
ERNiCrMo-10 D-32 302 SNi6276 D-30 296
INDEX
ERNiCrMo-13 D-31 299 SNi6617 D-40 305

ERNiCrMo-3 D-20 291 SNi6625 D-20 291
ERNiCrMo-4 D-30 296 SNi8065 B-42 162
ERNiCu-7 D-60 316 SS2209 B-60 186
www.metrode.com 403
INDEX

SS302L B-50 170 TS302LMo-FB0 B-51 177

SS307/SS307L B-35 142 TS302LMo-FB1 B-51 177
SS308L B-30, B-80 113, 208 TS307L-FB1 B-35 142
SS316L B-32, B-81 126, 212 TS308H-FB0 C-10 225
SS318 B-34 139 TS308H-FB1 C-10 225
SS347 B-31 121 TS308L-FB0 B-30 113
SS410 B-10 99 TS308L-FB1 B-30, B-37 113, 146
T 13 4 P C/M 2 B-11 103 TS308Mo-FM0 E-20 339
T 18 16 5 N L R C/M 3 B-33 134 TS308Mo-FM1 E-20 339
T 19 12 3 L P C/M 2 B-32, B-38 126, 151 TS316L-FB0 B-32 126
T 19 12 3 L R C/M 3 B-32 126 TS316L-FB1 B-32, B-38 126, 151
T 19 13 4 N L P C/M 2 B-35 142 TS316L-RI1 B-32 126
T 19 9 L P C/M 2 B-30, B-37 113, 146 TS347-FB0 B-31 121
T 19 9 L R C/M 3 B-30 113 TS347-FB1 C-11 230
T 19 9 Nb P C/M 2 C-11 230 TS410NiMo-FB1 B-11 103
T 19 9 Nb R C/M 3 B-31 121 W 19 12 3 L B-81 212
T 20 10 3 P C/M 2 E-20 339 W 19 9 L B-80 208
T 20 10 3 R C/M 3 E-20 339 W2Ni2 A-41 75
T 22 9 3 N L M M12 3 B-60 186 W2Si E-70 373
T 22 9 3 N L P C/M 2 B-60 186 W2Ti E-70 373
T 22 9 3 N L R C/M 3 B-60 186 W3Ni1 A-40 71
T 23 12 2 L P C/M 2 B-51 177 W3Si1 E-70 373
T 23 12 2 L R C/M 3 B-51 177 W72961 E-66 372
T 23 12 L P C/M 2 B-50 170 WCrMo91 A-17 40
T 23 12 L R C/M 3 B-50 170 WCrMoWV12Si A-19 53
T 25 9 4 Cu N L P C/M 2 B-63 205 W73021 E-66 372
T 25 9 4 Cu N L R C/M 3 B-63 205 WCrMo91 A-17 40
T 25 9 4 N L P M21 2 B-62 200 WCrMoWV12Si A-19 53
T 25 9 4 N L R M21 3 B-62 200
T422PM1 E-70 373
T424PM1 A-40 71
T55T1-1C/M-1CM A-12 11
T55T1-1C/M-5CM A-15 33
T55T1-1C/M-9C1M A-16 36
T62T1-1C/M-2C1M A-13 20
T62T1-1C/M-2C1ML A-13 20
T69T1-1C/M-9C1MV A-17 40
T69T15-0M-9C1MV A-17 40
TFe1 E-50 356
TFe15 E-55 364
TFe2 E-51 359
TS16-8-2-FM1 C-12 235
TS2209-FB0 B-60 186
TS2209-FB1 B-60 186
TS2553-FB0 B-63 205
INDEX
TS2553-FB1 B-63 205

TS2594-F M21 1 B-61 195
TS302L-FB0 B-50 170
TS302L-FB1 B-50 170
404 www.metrode.com
INDEX
INDEX3 : MATERIALS TO BE WELDED
BASE MATERIAL DATASHEET PAGE BASE MATERIAL DATASHEET PAGE
304 B-30, B-80, C-10 113, 208, 225 1.4565 D-32 302
309 C-21 248 1.4571 B-34 139
310 C-30 253 1.4573 B-34 139
316 B-32, B-81, C-13 126-212-240 1.4575 D-32 302
321 B-31 121 1.4579 B-34 139
347 B-31 121 1.4580 B-34 139
410 B-10 99 1.4581 B-34 139
422 A-19 53 1.4583 B-34 139
4130 A-50 78 1.4585 B-40 156
4140 A-50 78 1.4652 D-32 302
8630 A-50 78 1.4818 C-20 246
070M55 (En9) E-22 346 1.4828 C-20 246
080M40 (En8) E-22 346 1.4829 C-21 248
1.4003 B-50 170 1.4832 C-21 248
1.4006 B-10 99 1.4835 C-20 246
1.4008 B-10 99 1.4840 C-30 253
1.4301 B-30, B-80 113, 208 1.4841 C-30 253
1.4306 B-30, B-80 113, 208 1.4842 C-30 253
1.4308 B-30, B-80 113, 208 1.4845 C-30 253
1.4311 B-30, B-80 113, 208 1.4846 C-31 257
1.4313 B-11 103 1.4848 C-31 257
1.4335 B-45 165 1.4850 C-40 259
1.4362 B-59, B-60 183, 186 1.4852 C-50 266
1.4401 B-32, B-81 126, 212 1.4853 C-50 266
1.4403 B-32 126 1.4857 C-50 266
1.4404 B-32, B-81 126, 212 1.4858 B-42 162
1.4406 B-32, B-81 126, 212 1.4859 C-40 259
1.4408 B-32, B-81 126, 212 1.4865 C-41 262
1.4429 B-32, B-81 126, 212 1.4876 C-40 259
1.4436 B-32, B-81 126, 212 1.4903 A-17 40
1.4437 B-32, B-81 126, 212 1.4905 A-18 50
1.4438 B-35 142 1.4906 A-18 50
1.4439 B-40 156 1.4907 C-25 251
1.4440 B-40 156 1.4935 A-19 53
1.4462 B-60 186 1.4941 C-11, C-12 230, 235
1.4465 B-46 167 1.4948 C-10, C-12 225, 235
1.4466 B-46 167 1.4961 C-11, C-12 230, 235
1.4500 B-40 156 1.5415 A-10 8
1.4505 B-40 156 1.5419 A-10 8
1.4506 B-40 156 1.5637 D-20, D-33 291, 305
1.4515 B-63 205 1.5662 D-20, D-33 291, 305
1.4517 B-63 205 1.5680 D-20, D-33 291, 305
1.4529 D-32 302 1.6368 A-23, A-61 64,88
1.4536 B-40 156 1.7220 A-50 78
INDEX
1.4539 B-40 156 1.7225 A-50 78

1.4547 B-47, D-20, D-31, D-32 169, 291, 299, 302 1.7706 A-14 29
1.4563 B-42 162 1.8070 A-14 29
www.metrode.com 405
INDEX

1.8960 A-70 89 254SMO (Avesta Polarit) B-47, D-20, D-32 169, 291, 302
1.8961 A-70 89 2RE10 (Sandvik) B-45 165
1.8963 A-70 89 2RE69 B-46 167
10CrMo 9-10 A-13 20 2RK65 (Sandvik) B-40 156
13% manganese steel E-21, E-60 342, 370 2S143 (BS) B-12 108
153MA (Avesta Polarit) C-20 246 302C25 C-10 225
15CrMoV 5 11 A-14 29 304C12 B-30 113
15Mo3 A-10 8 304C15 B-30, C-10 113, 225
15NiCuMoNb5 A-23, A-61 64,88 304H C-10, C-12 225, 235
15RE10 (Sandvik) C-30 253 304L B-30, B-80 113, 208
16Mo3 A-10 8 304LN B-30, B-80 113, 208
17-4PH (Armco) B-12 108 304S11/15/16/31 B-30 113
2.0872 D-70 319 304S51 C-10, C-12 225, 235
2.0882 D-70 319 304S61 B-30 113
2.0883 D-70 319 309C30 C-21 248
2.4061 D-50 313 309H C-21 248
2.4066 D-50 313 309S C-21 248
2.4068 D-50 313 309S24 C-21 248
2.4360 D-60 316 310C40 (BS1504/3100) C-31 257
2.4361 D-60 316 310C45 C-30 253
2.4365 D-60 316 310MoLN B-46 167
2.4602 D-32 302 310S C-30 253
2.4605 D-31 299 310S24 C-30 253
2.4617 D-80 323 310S31 C-30 253
2.4642 D-41 310 316C12 B-32 126
2.4663 D-40 305 316C16/71 B-32, C-12, C-13 134, 235, 240
2.4678 C-90 276 316Cb B-34 139
2.4680 C-90 276 316H C-12, C-13 235, 240
2.4685 D-80 323 316L B-32, B-81 126, 212
2.4697 D-31, D-32 299, 302 316LN B-32, B-81 126, 212
2.4811 D-31, D-32 299, 302 316S11/13/16/31/33 B-32 126
2.4813 C-90 276 316S51 C-12, C-13 235, 240
2.4819 D-30 296 316S53 C-12, C-13 235, 240
2.4856 D-20 291 316S61 B-32 126
2.4858 B-42 162 316Ti B-34 139
2.4879 C-80 274 317/317L B-35 142
2.4882 D-80 323 317C12/16 B-35 142
2.4883 D-30 296 317S12/16 B-35 142
20Cb B-41 160 318C17 B-34 139
20Cb-3 (Carpenter) B-41 160 318S13 B-60 186
21CrMoV5 11 A-14 29 320S31/33 B-34 139
2205 (Avesta Polarit) B-60 186 321H C-12 235
22H (Duraloy) C-80 274 321S31 B-31 121
2304 (Sandvik) B-60 186 321S51 C-11, C-12 230, 235
INDEX
2507 (Avesta/Sandvik) B-61, B-62 195, 200 330C11 (BS3100) C-41 262
253MA (Avesta Polarit) C-20 246 331C40 (BS3100) C-41 262
254SLX (Avesta Polarit) B-40 156 332C13 (BS3100) B-63 205
406 www.metrode.com
INDEX

347C17 B-31 121 A387 Gr 21 & 22 A-13 20

347H C-11, C-12 230, 235 A387 Gr 5 A-15 33
347S31 B-31 121 A387 Gr 9 A-16 36
347S51 C-11, C-12 230, 235 A387 Gr 911 A-18 50
34CrMo4 A-50 78 A389 C24 A-14 29
3-5% Ni steels D-10, D-11 280, 286 A47 E-11 335
364C11 (BS1504) B-40 156 A48 E-10 332
3CR12 (Cromweld) B-50, C-21 170, 248 A487 2A, B, C A-50 78
3S144 (BS) B-12 108 A508 1, 1A, 2, 3 A-61 88
3S145 (BS) B-12 108 A533 A-D A-61 88
403/405/409 B-50 170 A553/A553M Type I D-20, D-33 291, 305
410C21 B-10 99 A553/A553M Type II D-20, D-33 291, 305
410S21 B-10 99 A588 A, B, C, K A-70 89
425C11 (BS3100) B-11 103 A602 E-11 335
42CrMo4 A-50 78 A645 D-20, D-33 291, 305
55EE (BS4360) A-40 71 A744 grade CN-7M B-41 160
55F (BS4360) A-60 83 A890 grade 1A, 2A B-63 205
630 (ASTM) B-12 108 A890 grade 4A B-60 186
654SMO (Avesta Polarit) D-31, D-32 299, 302 A890 grade 5A B-61, B-62 195, 200
709M40 (En19) E-20, E-22, A-50 339, 346, 79 A890 grade 6A B-61, B-62 195, 200
762 (BS3604) A-19 53 AB1 (BS1400) E-36 352
817M40 (En24) E-20 339 AB2 (BS1400) E-37 353
826M40 (En26) E-20 339 AISI See Each Grade
897M39 (En40C) E-20 339 AL-6X/N D-20, D-31, D-32 291, 299, 302
9% Ni steels D-20, D-33 291, 305 Alloy 20 B-41, B-42 160,162
904L (Uddelholm) B-40 156 Alloy 59 D-31 299
904S13 B-40 156 Aluminium bronze E-36 352
91 (ASTM A387) A-17 40 API 5A L80 A-60 83
911 (ASTM A387) A-18 50 Armco iron E-72 379
A126 E-10 332 Armour steel E-20, E-21 339, 342
A159 E-10 332 Armox 816 E-20 339
A202 grade E D-20, D-33 291, 305 ASTM See Each Grade
A204 A, B, C A-10 8 B1 (BS3100) A-10 8
A216 (WCA, WCB, WCC) E-70 373 B2 (BS3100) A-12 11
A220 E-11 335 B3 (BS3100) A-13 20
A297 HP40Cb C-50 266 B5 (BS3100) A-15 33
A302 C, D A-61 88 B50A224 A-14 29
A319 E-10 332 B6 (BS3100) A-16 36
A333 grade 3 D-33 305 B7 (BS3100) A-13 20
A333 grade 6 A-40, A-41 71, 75 Brass E-33, E-36 351, 352
A338 E-11 335 Brightray (Inco) D-11 286
A351 grade CN-7M B-41 160 Bronze E-33 351
A351 grade CT15C C-40 259 BS1452 E-10 332
A352 LC4 (cast) D-20, D-33 291, 305 BS1501 224 grade 490B A-41 75
INDEX
A353/A353M D-20, D-33 291, 305 BS1501 grade 271, 281 A-61 88
A356 Gr 9 A-14 29 BS1501 grade 510/510N D-20, D-33 291, 305
A387 Gr 11 & 12 A-12 11 BS1501 grade 620/621 A-12 11
www.metrode.com 407
INDEX

BS1501 grade 622 A-13 20 CA104-105 E-37 353

BS1501 grade 625 A-15 33 CA15 (ASTM A487) B-10 99
BS1502 grade 509-690 D-20, D-33 291, 305 CA15M (ASTM A487) B-10 99
BS1503 grade 509-690 D-20, D-33 291, 305 CA6NM B-11 103
BS1503 grade 620/621 A-12 11 Cast iron E-10, E-11 332, 335
BS1503 grade 622 A-13 20 CB2 A-25 68
BS1503 grade 625 A-15 33 CB-7Cu-1 (ASTM A747) B-12 108
BS1503 grade 660 A-13 20 CB-7Cu-2 (ASTM A747) B-12 108
BS1503 grade 91 A-17 40 CD4MCu (A351, A744) B-63 205
BS1504 grade 245 A-10 8 Centralloy4852/4852Micro C-50 266
BS1504 grade 332C11 B-41 160 Centralloy 4859 C-40 259
BS1504 grade 620 A-12 11 Centralloy 4879 C-80 274
BS1504 grade 622 A-13 20 Centralloy ET35Co C-70 272
BS1504 grade 625 A-15 33 Centralloy ET45 Micro C-60 269
BS1504 grade 629 A-16 36 Centralloy H101 C-45 264
BS1504 grade 660 A-13 20 CF10 C-10 225
BS2789 E-11 335 CF10M C-12, C-13 235, 240
BS2858 E-72 379 CF10MC B-34 139
BS3059 grade 243 A-10 8 CF3 B-30, B-80 113, 208
BS3059 grade 620 A-12 11 CF3M B-32, B-81 126, 212
BS3059 grade 622 A-13 20 CF8 B-30, B-80, C-10 113, 208, 225
BS3146 ANC15 D-80 323 CF8C B-31 121
BS3146 ANC20 B-12 108 CF8M B-32, B-81 126, 212
BS3604 grade 620/621 A-12 11 CG8M B-35 142
BS3604 grade 622 A-13 20 CH8, 10, 20 (ASTM A351) C-21 248
BS3604 grade 625 A-15 33 CK20 C-30 253
BS3604 grade 629 A-16 36 CN102/106/107/108 D-70 319
BS3604 grade 660 A-13 20 Compass B555 E-20 339
BS3604 grade 762 A-19 53 Copper E-30, E-31 349, 350
BS3604 grade CFS 591 A-23, A-61 64,88 Corten A/B (Corus, USS) A-70 89
BS3604 grade HFS 591 A-23, A-61 64,88 Cronifer 1925LC (VDM) B-40 156
BS3606 grade 243, 245, 261 A-10 8 Cronifer 2205LCN (VDM) B-60 186
BS4534 grade 8, 9 C-41 262 Cronifer 2521LC (VDM) B-45 165
BS6681 E-11 335 Cronifer 2525LCN (VDM) B-46 167
BS970 See Each Grade Cronite HR33 C-50 266
Build-up E-21 342 Cronite HR5, HR17, HR31 C-41 262
C10200 E-30 349 Cronite HR6 C-31 257
C103 E-30 349 CT15C (ASTM A351) C-40 259
C12A (ASTM A217) A-17 40 Cunifer 10/30 (VDM) D-70 319
C5 (ASTM A217) A-15 33 Custom 450 B-12 108
C50100-C52400 E-33 351 Custom 630 B-12 108
C61400 E-36 352 CW-12M (ASTM A743/A744) D-30 296
C70600 D-70 319 CW-12MW (ASTM A494) D-30 296
C71500 D-70 319 CW-6MC (ASTM A494) D-20 291
INDEX
C96200 D-70 319 Dissimilar B-50,B-51,E-21,E-22 170, 177

C96400 D-70 319 DP3W (Sumitomo) B-61 195
CA101-103 E-36 352 Ductile irons E-11 335
408 www.metrode.com
INDEX

En19 (709M40) A-50, E-20, E-22 78, 329, 346 Hastelloy™ C-276 (Haynes) D-30 296
En24 (817M40) E-20 339 High speed steel E-53 363
En26 (826M40) E-20 339 HK40 (ASTM A351/A608) C-31 257
En40C (897M39) E-20 339 HP, HP40, HP40Cb (A297) C-50 266
En56A (410S21) B-10 99 HP10Cb (ASTM A297) C-45 264
En8 (080M40) E-22 346 HR17 (Cronite) C-41 262
En9 (080M50) E-22 346 HR31 (Cronite) C-41 262
F1 (ASTM A336) A-10 8 HR33 (Cronite) C-50 266
F11 (ASTM A182) A-12 11 HR3C D-40 305
F36 (ASTM A182) A-23 64 HT (ASTM A297) C-41 262
F5 (ASTM A336) A-15 33 HT 30 (ASTM A351) C-41 262
F51 (ASTM A182) B-60 186 HU (ASTM A297) C-41 262
F53 (ASTM A182) B-62 200 HY100 A-60 83
F6NM B-11 103 HY80 A-60 83
F9 (ASTM A336) A-16 36 Hystal 77 (Corus) A-60 83
F91 (ASTM A182) A-17 40 Immaculate 5 (Firth Vickers) C-30 253
F911 (ASTM A182, A336) A-18 50 IN-657 (Special Metals) C-90 276
F92 (ASTM A182) A-20 56 IN-671 (Special Metals) C-90 276
FB2 A-25 68 Incoloy™ 800 (Special Metals) C-40, D-11, D-40 259, 286, 307
Ferralium 255/SD40 (Meighs) B-63 205 Incoloy™800H(SpecialMetals) C-40, D-20 259, 291
Ferrinox 255 B-63 205 Incoloy™800HT(SpecialMetals) C-40, D-40 259, 307
FP911 (ASTM A369) A-18 50 Incoloy™825(SpecialMetals) B-42, D-20 162, 165
FV520B (Firth Vickers) B-12 108 Incoloy™DS(SpecialMetals) C-41, D-11 262, 286
G-NiCr28W C-80 274 Inconel™600(SpecialMetals) D-10, D-11, D-12 280, 286, 290
Grey cast iron E-10, E-11 332, 335 Inconel™601(SpecialMetals) D-20, D-40 291, 307
GS-17CrMoV5 11 A-14 29 Inconel™617(SpecialMetals) D-40 305
GS-18CrMo 9 10 A-13 20 Inconel™622(SpecialMetals) D-32 302
GS-22Mo4 A-10 8 Inconel™625(SpecialMetals) D-20 291
GS-25CrMo4 A-12 11 Inconel™686(SpecialMetals) D-31 299
Gunmetal E-33 351 Inconel™690(SpecialMetals) D-41 310
G-X10Cr13 B-10 99 J92205 B-60 186
G-X12CrMoWVNbN 10 1 1 A-18 50 J93370 B-63 205
GX-13CrMoCoVNbNB 9-2-1 A-25 68 J93380 B-61 195
G-X22CrMoV 12 1 A-19 53 J93404 B-61, B-62 195, 200
G-X25CrNiSi20 14 C-21 248 K41583 D-20, D-33 291, 305
G-X45NiCrWSi 48 28 C-80 274 K71340 D-20, D-33, D-80 291, 305, 323
G-X5CrNi13 4 B-11 103 K81340 D-20, D-33, D-80 291, 305, 323
G-X8CrNi13 B-10 99 Langalloy 20V (Meighs) B-41 160
Hadfield steel E-21, E-60 342, 370 LC1 (ASTM A352) A-10 8
Hardfacing E-50, E-51, E-55 356, 359, 364 LC2 (ASTM A352) A-41 75
Hastelloy™ B-2(Haynes) D-80 323 LDX 2101 (Avesta) B-59 183
Hastelloy™ C-2000™ (Haynes) D-31 299 LF1/LF2 (ASTM A350) A-41 75
INDEX
Hastelloy™ C-22 (Haynes) D-31 299 LG3 E-33 351

Hastelloy™ C-22 (Haynes) D-32 302 LG4 E-33 351
Hastelloy™ C-276 (Haynes) D-30 296 Lloyds T47 (LBA) C-31 257
www.metrode.com 409
INDEX

Lloyds T50 (LBA) C-41 262 NA1 D-60 316

Lloyds T57 (LBA) C-45 264 NA11 D-50 313
Lloyds T63 (LBA) C-50 266 NA12 D-50 313
Lloyds T64 (LBA) C-50 266 NA13 D-60 316
Lloyds T66 (LBA) C-70 272 NA14 D-12 290
Lloyds T75(LBA) C-80 274 NA15 C-40 259
Lloyds T75MA(LBA) C-60 269 NA15H D-40 305
Lloyds T80 (LBA) C-60 269 NA16 (BS1501/3072) B-42 162
LPB1 E-33 351 NA21 D-20 291
LT50 A-41 75 Naxtra 70 A-60 83
Manaurite 35K (Manoir) C-70 272 Nickel 200/201 (Inco) D-50 313
Manaurite 36X/36XM (Manoir) C-50 266 Nicrofer™ 3127LC (VDM) B-42 162
Manaurite50W(Manoir) C-80 274 Nicrofer™ 3220 (VDM) C-40 259
Manaurite 900 (Manoir) C-40 259 Nicrofer™ 4221 (VDM) B-42 162
Manaurite XT/XTM C-60 269 Nicrofer™ 5520Co (VDM) D-40 305
Mild steel E-70 373 Nicrofer™ 5716hMoW (VDM) D-30 296
Monel™ 400 (Inco) D-60 316 Nicrofer™ 5923hMo (VDM) D-31 299
Monel™ K500 (Inco) D-60 316 Nicrofer™ 6020hMo (VDM) D-20 291
MORE 10/10A (Duraloy) C-50 266 Nicrofer™ 6022hMo (VDM) D-20 291
MORE 21 (Duraloy) C-40 259 Nil ferrite 316 B-33 134
MORE 6 (Duraloy) C-70 272 Nilo™ (Inco) D-11 286
MVEE 816 (MoD) E-20 339 Nimofer 6928 (VDM) D-80 323
N02200 D-50 313 Nimonic™ 75 (Inco) D-10 280
N02201 D-50 313 Nirosta 4003 (Krupp) B-50 170
N04400 D-60 316 Nitronic 19D B-59 183
N04405 D-60 316 Nitronic 50 B-33 134
N05500 D-60 316 NO6600 D-10, D-12 280, 290
N06022 D-32 302 Non-magnetic 316 B-33 134
N06059 D-31 299 P1 (ASTM A335) A-10 8
N06601 D-20, D-40 291, 307 P11 (ASTM A335) A-12 11
N06617 D-40 305 P12 (ASTM A335) A-12 11
N06625 D-20 291 P22 (ASTM A335) A-13 20
N06690 D-41 310 P23 (ASTM A335) A-21 61
N08028 B-42 162 P36 (ASTM A335) A-23 64
N08367 D-32 302 P5 (ASTM A335) A-15 33
N08800 C-40 259 P9 (ASTM A335) A-16 36
N08810 C-40 259 P91 (ASTM A335) A-17 40
N08811 C-40 259 P911 (ASTM A335) A-18 50
N08825 B-42 162 P92 (ASTM A335) A-20 56
N08904 B-40 156 Paralloy CR32W C-40 259
N08925 D-32 302 Paralloy CR39W C-45 264
N08926 D-32 302 Paralloy H20 C-31 257
N10001 D-80 323 Paralloy H33/35/38/40 C-41 262
N10276 D-30 296 Paralloy H39/H39W C-50 266
INDEX
N10665 D-80 323 Paralloy H46M C-60 269

N-12M (A743/A744) D-80 323 Paralloy H48T C-80 274
N-7M (A494) D-80 323 Paralloy N50W C-90 276
410 www.metrode.com
INDEX

Paramount P20 (Lake & Elliot) B-41 160 S32950 B-61 195
Phosphorbronze E-33 351 S34565 D-31, D-32 299, 302
Pyrotherm G25/35Nb C-50 266 S34709 C-11, C-12 230, 235
Pyrotherm G28/48/5W C-80 274 S39274 B-61 195
Pyrotherm NbTZ C-50 266 S41000 B-10 99
Q1(N) A-60 83 S41500 B-11 103
Q2(N) A-60 83 S45000 B-12 108
R30006 E-65 371 SAE See Each Grade
R30021 E-66 372 SAF 2205 (Sandvik) B-60 186
RA330-HC (Rolled Alloys) C-41 262 SAF 2304 (Sandvik) B-59, B-60 183, 186
Rail steel A-80 92 SAF 2507 (Sandvik) B-61, B-62 195, 200
RQT601 (Corus) A-60 83 Sanicro 28 (Sandvik) B-42 162
RQT701 (Corus) A-60 83 Sanicro 31 (Sandvik) C-40 259
S20910 B-33 134 SG irons E-10, E-11 332, 335
S30400 B-30, B-80 113, 208 Sirius 3 (Industeel) C-30 253
S30403 B-30, B-80 113, 208 Stellite 21 (Deloro) E-66 372
S30409 C-10, C-12 225, 235 Stellite 6 (Deloro) E-65 371
S30415 C-20 246 Super 304H C-25, D-40 251, 307
S30432 C-25 251 Supertherm (Duraloy) C-70 272
S30453 B-30, B-80 113, 208 T1 (ASTM A209, A250) A-10 8
S30815 C-20 246 T11 (ASTM A199, A200, A213) A-12 11
S30900 C-21 248 T12 (ASTM A199, A200, A213) A-12 11
S30908 C-21 248 T22 (ASTM A199, A200, A213) A-13 20
S30909 C-21 248 T23 (ASTM A213) A-21 61
S31000 C-30 253 T36 (ASTM A213) A-23 64
S31008 C-30 253 T5 (ASTM A199, A213) A-15 33
S31050 B-46 167 T9 (ASTM A199, A200, A213) A-16 36
S31254 B-47, D-20, D-31, D-32 169, 291, 299, 302 T91 (ASTM ASTM A213) A-17 40
S31266 D-32 302 T911 (ASTM ASTM A213) A-18 50
S31600 B-32, B-81 126, 212 T92 (ASTM A213) A-20 56
S31603 B-32, B-81 126, 212 Thermalloy T47 (Lloyds) C-31 257
S31609 C-12, C-13 235, 240 Thermalloy T50 (Lloyds) C-41 262
S31635 B-34 139 Thermalloy T52 (Lloyds) C-40 259
S31653 B-32, B-81 126, 212 Thermalloy T58 (Lloyds) C-41 262
S31700 B-35 142 Thermalloy T63/T64 (Lloyds) C-50 266
S31803 B-60 186 Tin bronze E-33 351
S32001 B-59 183 Toolsteel E-53 363
S32101 B-59 183 UNS See Each Grade
S32109 C-11, C-12 230, 235 Uranus 25 22 2 (Industeel) B-46 167
S32205 B-60 186 Uranus 35N (Industeel) B-59, B-60 183, 186
S32304 B-59, B-60 183, 186 Uranus 45N (Industeel) B-60 186
S32550 B-61, B-63 195, 205 Uranus 47N (Industeel) B-62 200
INDEX
S32654 D-32 302 Uranus 52N+ (Industeel) B-61 195

S32750 B-61, B-62 195, 200 Uranus 55/50M (Industeel) B-63 205
S32760 B-61, B-62 195, 200 Uranus 65 (Industeel) B-45 165
www.metrode.com 411
INDEX

BASE MATERIAL DATASHEET PAGE
Uranus B6, B6M (Industeel) B-40 156

Uranus™ B66 (Industeel) D-31, D-32 299, 302
WB36 A-23 64
WC1 (ASTM A217) A-10 8
WC11(ASTM A217) A-12 11
WC6 (ASTM A217) A-12 11
WC9 (ASTM A217) A-13 20
Weathering steel A-70 89
Werkstoff No. See Each Grade
WP911 (ASTM A234) A-18 50
WR50A/C (BS4360) A-70 89
X10Cr13 B-10 99
X10CrMoVNb9 1 A-17 40
X10CrWMoVNb9-2 A-20 56
X11CrMoWVNb 9 1 1 A-18 50
X12CrMo 9 1 A-16 36
X12CrNi22 12 C-21 248
X1CrNi25 21 B-45 165
X20CrMoV12 1 A-19 53
X2CrNiN23L B-59 183
XM-19 B-33 134
XM-25 B-12 108
Z1 CN 25 20 B-45 165
Z2 CN 25 20 M B-45 165
Z6 CND 1304-M B-11 103
Zeron® 100 (RA) B-61 195
Zeron® 100 (RA) B-61 195
Hastelloy and C-2000 are trademarks of Haynes International, Inc.

Inconel, Incoloy, Monel, Nimonic and Nilo are trademarks of
Special Metals.
Nicrofer is a trademark of VDM.
Zeron is a registered name of RA Materials Ltd.
INDEX
412 www.metrode.com
www.metrode.com
Metrode Products Limited
Hanworth Lane, Chertsey
Surrey, KT16 9LL
United Kingdom
tel: +44(0)1932 566721
fax: +44(0)1932 565168
e-mail: sales@metrode.com
www.metrode.com
rev 13 – March 2016

© Metrode Products Limited. All Rights Reserved
ASTM A335 Seamless Ferritic Alloy Steel Pipe Page 1 of 4
About Us | Contact Us | Sitemap Tel: +86-0311-89642206 | Eamil: sales@metalspiping.com
keywords here SUBM
HOME ABOUT US PRODUCTS TECHNICAL NEWS CONTACT US
ASTM A335 Seamless Ferritic Alloy Steel Pipe

Product Categories
Home » Carbon & Alloy Steels / Cr-Mo Alloy Steels
Nickel & Nickel Alloys
ASTM A335 is the standard specification for seamless ferritic alloy steel pipe for high temperature service. It covers sever grades: P1, P2, P5,
Carbon & Alloy Steels P5b, P5c, P9, P11, P12, P15, P21, P22, P23, P91, P92, P122, out of which P5, P9, P11, P22, P91, and P92 are most widely utilized in
practice. The specification covers nominal wall and minimum wall chrome-molybdenum( also known as Cr-Mo, or Cr-Moly) alloy steel pipe
Stinless Steel intended for high-temperature application. Pipe ordered to this specification shall be suitable for bending, flanging(vanstoning), and similar
forming operations, and for fusion welding. ASTM A335 P11, P22, P91 and P92 are commonly used in power plants and chemical-
petrochemical industry, while P9 and P5 are mainly used in petroleum refineries. Hebei Metals supplies ASTM A335 Cr-Mo alloy steel
Contact Us seamless pipes sized from 1/2″ to 24″(NPS15 ~ NPS600) ranging in wall thickness from SCH20 to XXS or even thicker.
Hebei Metals Industrial Limited

(Shijiazhuang Metalsin Pipeline Tech
Co., Ltd)
No. 176, Zhonghua South Street,
Shijiazhuang, China.
Tel: +86-311-89642206
Fax:+86-311-67906676
Web: www.metalspiping.com
Email: sales@metalspiping.com
More than 32000 MT of all grades of ASTM A335 seamless pipes in stock
including grades P11, P22, P91, P92 and P5, etc.
1. UNS Designations and Chemical Composition
ASTM A335/ A335M Chemical Composition %
Grade UNS C Mn P S Si Cr Mo Others
P1 K11522 0.10-0.20 0.30-0.80 0.025 0.025 0.10-0.50 - 0.44-0.65 -
P2 K11547 0.10-0.20 0.30-0.61 0.025 0.025 0.10-0.30 0.50-0.81 0.44-0.65 -
P5 K41545 0.15 0.30-0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50 4.00-6.00 0.45-0.65 -
P5b K51545 0.15 0.30-0.60 0.025 0.025 1.00-2.00 4.00-6.00 0.45-0.65 -
P5c K41245 0.12 0.30-0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50 4.00-6.00 0.45-0.65 *A
P9 S50400 0.15 0.30-0.60 0.025 0.025 0.25-1.00 8.00-10.00 0.90-1.10 -
P11 K11597 0.05-0.15 0.30-0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50-1.00 1.00-1.50 0.44-0.65 -
P12 K11562 0.05-0.15 0.30-0.61 0025 0.025 ≤0.50 0.80-1.25 0.44-0.65 -
P15 K11578 0.05-0.15 0.30-0.60 0.025 0.025 1.15-1.65 - 0.44-0.65 -
P21 K31545 0.05-0.15 0.30-0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50 2.65-3.35 0.80-1.06 -
P22 K21590 0.05-0.15 0.30-0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50 1.90-2.60 0.87-1.13 -
P23 K41650 0.04-0.10 0.10-0.60 0.030 0.010 0.50 1.90-2.60 0.05-0.30 *B
P36 K21001 0.10-0.17 0.80-1.20 0.030 0.025 0.25-0.50 0.30 0.25-0.50 *C
P91 K91560 0.08-0.12 0.30-0.60 0.020 0.010 0.20-0.50 8.00-9.50 0.85-1.05 *D
P92 K92460 0.07-0.13 0.30-0.60 0.020 0.010 0.50 8.50-9.50 0.30-0.60 *E
P122 K92930 0.07-0.14 0.70 0.020 0.010 0.50 10.00-11.50 0.25-0.60 *F
P911 K91061 0.09-0.13 0.30-0.60 0.020 0.010 0.10-0.50 8.50-9.50 0.90-1.10 *G
*The UNS designation is established in accordance with Practice E527, and SAE J 1086 – Practice for numbering metals and alloys.
*All values are the maximum unless a range is furnished.
*A – 4 times of Carbon≤Titanium≤0.70% or Columbium:8 times of Carbon~10 times of Carbon.
*B – V:0.20-0.30, Cb:0.02-0.08, B: 0.0010-0.006, N:≤0.0015, Al:≤0.030, W:1.45-1.75, Ni:≤0.40, Ti: 0.005-0.060, Ti/N:≥3.5.
*C – Ni:1.00-1.30, Cu:0.50-0.80, Cb:0.015-0.045, V:≤0.02, N:≤0.02, Al:≤0.050.
*D – V:0.18-0.25, N:0.030-0.070, Ni:≤0.40, Al:≤0.02, Cb:0.06-0.10, Ti:≤0.01, Zr:≤0.01.
*E – V:0.15-0.25, N:0.03-0.07, Ni:≤0.40, Al:≤0.02, Cb:0.04-0.09, W:1.5-2.0, B:0.001-0.006, Ti:≤0.01, Zr:≤0.01.
*F – V:0.15-0.30, W:1.30-2.50, Cu:0.30-1.70, Cb:0.04-0.10, B:0.0005-0.005, N:0.040-0.1, Ni:≤0.5, Al:≤0.02, (Ti&Zr):≤0.01.
*G – V:0.18-0.25, Ni:≤0.40, Cb:0.060-0.10, B:0.0003-0.006, N:0.04-0.09, Al:≤0.02, W:0.90-1.10, Ti:≤0.01, Zr:≤0.01.
http://www.metalspiping.com/astm-a335-seamless-ferritic-alloy-steel-pipe.html 2/22/2017
2. Mechanical Properties: Tensile, Yield, Elongation & Hardness
Tensile Strength Yield Strength Elongation %

ASTM A335 Grade Hardness(HB)
ksi MPa ksi MPa Longitudinal Transverse
P1 55 380 30 205 30 20 -
P2 55 380 30 205 30 20 -
P5 60 415 30 205 30 20 -
P5b 60 415 30 205 30 20 -
P5c 60 415 30 205 30 20 -
P9 60 415 30 205 30 20 -
P11 60 415 30 205 30 20 -
P12 60 415 32 220 30 20 -
P15 60 415 30 205 30 20 -
P21 60 415 30 205 30 20 -
P22 60 415 30 205 30 20 -
P23 74 510 58 400 20 - -
P91 85 585 60 415 20 - ≤250
P92 90 620 64 440 20 - ≤250
P122 90 620 58 400 20 - ≤250
P911 90 620 64 400 20 - -
*All values are minimum unless otherwise specified.

*The specimen for elongation test shall be in the gauge length of 2 inches or 50 mm(or 4D).
3. Heat Treatment and Delivery Conditions

ASTM A335 pipes may be either hot finished or cold drawn with finishing treatment listed below:
◾ Pipes of all grades of ASTM A335 except P5c, P23, P91, P92, P122, and P911 shall be reheated, and furnished in the full-annealed,
isothermal annealed, or normalized and tempered condition, the minimum tempering temperature for grades P5, P5b, P9, P21, and P22
shall be 1250°F (675°C), the minimum tempering temperature for grades P1, P2, P11, P12, and P15 shall be 1200°F (650°C). It is
recommended that the temperature for tempering should be at least 100°F (50°C) above the intended service temperature; consequently,
the purchaser should advise the manufacturer if the service temperature is to be over 1100°F (600°C).
◾ ASTM A335 Pipe of Grades P1, P2, and P12, either hot finished or cold drawn, may be given a final heat treatment at 1200°F (650°C) to
1300°F (705°C) instead of heat treatments above-mentioned.
◾ Pipe of grade P5c shall be given a final heat treatment in the range from 1325°F (715°C) to 1375°F (745°C).
◾ ASTM A335 grades P92 & P911 shall be normalized at 1900°F (1040°C) minimum and tempered at 1350°F (730°C) minimum as a final
heat treatment.
◾ Grade P122 shall be normalized at 1900°F (1040°C) minimum, and tempered at 1350°F (730°C) minimum as a final heat treatment.
◾ Grade P23 shall be normalized at 1900°F (1040°C) minimum with air cooling or accelerated cooling and tempered at 1350°F (730°C)
minimum as a final heat treatment.
◾ ASTM A335 P91 shall be normalized at 1900°F (1040°C) minimum, and tempered at 1350°F (730°C) minimum as a final heat treatment.
Alternatively, liquid quenching and tempering is allowed for thicknesses above 3 inch when mutually agreed upon between the
manufacturer and the purchaser. In this case the pipe shall be quenched from 1900°F (1040°C) minimum and tempered at 1350°F (730°
C) minimum as final heat treatment.
ASTM A335 P91 pipes, 12″ S40, for 300MW power plant steam pipeline.
4. Tests and Examinations
◾ Unless an alternative nondestructive electric test is selected or otherwise specified by the purchaser, hydrostatic test shall be performed
for each length of ASTM A335 pipe.
◾ Mechanical Tests: pipes of all grades of ASTM A335 shall take transverse or longitudinal tension test and flattening test, hardness test, or
bend test. The test will be made on 5% of the pipe from each heat number.
◾ The nondestructive test (NDT) shall be performed in accordance with Practice E 213, Practice E 309, or Practice E 570. These NDT
methods includes: Ultrasonic Examination, which shall be performed to detect both longitudinally and transversely oriented discontinuities;
Eddy Current Examination, which has the capability to detect significant discontinuities especially of short abrupt type; Flux Leakage
Examination, which is capable of detecting the presence and location of significant longitudinally and transversely oriented discontinuities.
The Ultrasonic Test performed on an A335 P22 SMLS pipe, 16″ SCH80.
5. How to order an ASTM A335 Pipe

When asking for a quote, it will be very helpful if the client can provide detailed information:
◾ Name of material: seamless alloy steel pipe.

◾ Specific grades.
◾ Manufacture: hot rolled or cold drawn.
◾ Size: NPS+Schedule Number; O.D+Nominal W.T; O.D+Minimum W.T; I.D+ Nominal W.T; I.D+Minimum W.T.
◾ Length(fixed or random) and Quantity.
◾ End Finish(butt welding ends or plain ends).
An example: ASTM A335 Gr. P11 SMLS Pipe, 12″ SCH80, Length=6 m, cold drawn, BW ends, 225 pieces.
6. Equivalent Alternatives
The alternative to certain grade of ASTM A335 can be found in ASTM A426 and ASTM A369. ASTM A426 is the standard specification for
centrifugally cast ferritic alloy steel pipe for high-temperature service. ASTM A369 is the standard specification for carbon and ferritic alloy
steel forged or bored pipe for high-temperature service. Both of them specify relatively equivalent grades of Cr-Mo alloy steel pipe. The main
difference between ASTM A335, ASTM A426, and ASTM A369 is the manufacture of the pipe: ASTM A335 – hot rolled or cold drawn; ASTM
A426 – centrifugal casting; ASTM A369: forging.
Other standards related to the seamless Cr-Mo alloy steel pipe include: ASTM A213 – standard specification for seamless ferritic and
austenitic alloy steel boiler, superheater, and heat exchanger tubes; ASTM A199 – standard specification for seamless cold drawn
intermediate alloy steel heat exchanger and condenser tubes; ASTM A200 – standard specification for seamless intermediate alloy steel tubes
for refinery service.
Have any question, Please enter the form below and click the submit button.
Name *
Email *

Message

1+8=?
Verification *
Please enter the answer to the sum & Click Submit to verify your registration.
CATEGORY AND TAGS:
Cr-Mo Alloy Steels
Next: ASTM A182 Low Alloy Steel Forgings
Related Items
ASTM A217 Castings for High- ASTM A387 Cr-Mo Alloy Steel ASTM A234 Cr-Mo Alloy Steel ASTM A213 Low Alloy Steel
Temperature Service Pressure Vessel Plates Pipe Fittings Tubes for Boiler, Superheater
&H tE h
Why Choose Us? Contact Us Recent Posts Social Media
Superior R & D No. 176, Zhonghua South Street, ASME B16.5

Excellent Quality Shijiazhuang, China. Tensile & Yield Strength – Temperature
Prompt Delivery Tel: +86-311-89642206 Ratings of ASTM A335 P91
Top Notch Service Fax:+86-311-67906676
ASME SA335 P91/ ASTM A335 P91: UNS
Web: www.metalspiping.com K91560 or UNS K90901?
Email: sales@metalspiping.com
About Us | Contact Us | Sitemap Tel: +86-0311-89642206 | Eamil: sales@metalspiping.com
Copy©2016 | HeBei Metals Industrial Limited.
See discussions, stats, and author profiles for this publication at: https://www.researchgate.net/publication/274177257
Mechanical properties and fracture

characteristics of ASTM A335 P91 steel used in
boiler materials
Article in International Journal of ChemTech Research · January 2014
CITATIONS READS
0 1,447
3 authors, including:
Maridurai Thirupathy Syed Zameeruddin Mazharuddin

Velammal Engineering College University of Southern California
19 PUBLICATIONS 4 CITATIONS 6 PUBLICATIONS 0 CITATIONS
SEE PROFILE SEE PROFILE
Some of the authors of this publication are also working on these related projects:
Synthesis and Characterization of Yttrium Stabilized Zirconia Nanoparticles View project
All content following this page was uploaded by Maridurai Thirupathy on 29 March 2015.
The user has requested enhancement of the downloaded file. All in-text references underlined in blue are added to the original document
and are linked to publications on ResearchGate, letting you access and read them immediately.
International Journal of ChemTech Research
CODEN (USA): IJCRGG ISSN: 0974-4290
Vol.7, No.2, pp 654-665, 2014-2015
ICONN 2015 [4th -6th Feb 2015]

International Conference on Nanoscience and Nanotechnology-2015
SRM University, Chennai, India
Mechanical properties and fracture characteristics of ASTM

A335 P91 steel used in boiler materials.
Maridurai T1, M.Syed Zameeruddin2*, Sandhyarani Biswas3

1
Mechanical Engineering, Budelkhand University, Jhansi, India
2
Mechanical Engineering, SRM University, Chennai, India
3
Principal, Budelkhand College, Jhansi, India
Abstract : Maximizing the efficiency of the power boilers generally requires operation at
the highest possible temperatures and steam pressures. In turn these most aggressive
operating conditions require the use of higher strength materials than were typically used for
the construction of the power plants. This situation has increased the interest in the issues
related to the processing andthefabrication of alloys such as 90Cr-1Mo-V steels. Of these
steels, the modified 9Cr-1Mo steel known as P91/T91 or, in Europe as X10CrMoVNb9-1,
has been used in a wide range of industrial applications. In addition to the improved room
temperature tensile strength, the modified variant also has increased creep strength, lower
ductile –brittle transitiontemperatures and higher energy. The present study concerned with
the hot tensile properties of SA welded P91 material. The welding was carried out on a 406
mm diameter, 53mm thick wall pipe by using root pass of TIG welding and subsequent
passes of SMAW and SAW. This study examines the effect of the tensile test temperature
ranging from 400◦C to 700 ◦ C on the tensile properties of the P91 SA-weldment. The hot
tensile properties of SA welded P91 compared with the SMA welded P91 steel. The fracture
surfaces of the hot tensile & impact specimens were examined under Scanning electron
microscope and fractographic studies were made. An attempt has also been made to evaluate
the mechanical strength of the weldment and microstructural characteristics of the different
regions in the weldment to correlate fractography features with tensile and impact strength.
Key words: tensile,ductile, SMAW, SAW P91 X20.
1. Introduction:
Cr-Mo ferritic steels are widely used infossil power plant for the structure and piping systems due to
their creep strength and moderate oxidation resistance up to 650 ◦c. the 90Cr-1Mo steel is one of the best alloys
in the family of Cr-Mo steels for elevated temperature applications1,2,3,4,5. With ever increasing the demand of
high efficiency in the power generation industry, the operation temperature is steadily increasing. The
modified90Cr-1Mo steel is a relatively new structural alloy that was originally developed in the steam generator
industry. With minor addition of Nb & V elements in the 90Cr-1Mo steel, the long term creep strength of the
steel can be further improved. P91 is primarily used in the normalized and tempered condition. During the heat
treatment, a fine dispersion of Nb(C,N) and M 22C6 is precipitated. Through the mechanism of precipitation
strengthening, this gives rise to the enhanced mechanical properties. Welding of Cr-Mo ferritic steels play a
M.Syed Zameeruddin et al /Int.J. ChemTech Res.2014-2015,7(2),pp 654-665. 655
crucial role in the power and the petroleum industries, and has been extensively and studied in recent years.
Considerable effort went in the development of 90Cr-1Mo-V steel consumables to optimize strength and
toughness of the weldment.
Welded joints are used as structural parts of boilers, pressure vessels, piping, tunings and other
equipment working at high temperatures. In addition to these properties, the welded structure must be safe
enough during the sudden starts or interruption of its operation. Therefore welded joints of heat resistance steels
must have appropriate Impact properties and resistance against brittle failure6,7, the stringent design,
construction and operational requirements of nuclear plantsdemand consistency of the material behavior. This is
reflected in the more restricted composition and property specification of the normalized and tempered 90Cr-
1Mo steel currently adopted by the UK nuclear industry which meets the broader international standards 8,9,10.
The weld abilityof P91 steels is very good. Due to the high alloying content, a relatively high preheating
temperature (200-350◦C) must be used. The development of the suitable welding filler metal of the similar type
which can employed in the SMAW, GTAE and SAW welding methods11,12. Current trends in the design of large
pressure vessles require massive sections that operate under high stresses at high temperature. To attain good
through section fracture toughness values at higher yield strength that are required for such components, the
steel needed to be used must possess higher hardenability, and greater heat treatment potentials. Toughness
charecterization is one of the important parameters which plays a vital role in determining the performance and
life of the materials under the given service conditions. Toughness characterization is done by impact energy
test, fracture toughness test(plane stress fracture toughness test) (K1C) test15.
The present investigation has been carried out to assees hot tensile properties and fracture toughnesss
characteristics of P91 weldment. SA welding was done on a 406 mm diameter & 53 mm thick wall pipe. This
study examines the effect of tensile test temperatures ranging from 400 to 700 ◦c on the tensile properties of the
SA weldment. The hot tensile properties of SA welded P91 compared with the SMA welded P91 steel. The
fracture surfaces of the hot tensile and impact testes were examined by scanning electron microscope (SEM)
and fractographic studies were made. An attempt has also been made to evaluate the mechanical properties of
the weldment and microstructural characteristics of the different regions in the weldment.
2. Experimental details:
In the current investigation, joining of SA 335 P91 by SMA welding process was carried and the
resultant weldment subjected to mechanical and metallurgical studies. This study examines the effect of the
tensile test temperatures ranging from 400 to 700 ◦c on the tensile properties of SAW and SMAW welded P91
steel. Fractographic studies were done by Scanning electron microscope to know the characteristics of the
fracture surface. The impact testing of SAW weldment was done. Also the microstructural evaluation of the
weldmentas hardness testing was carried out.
2.1 Materials Used:
The material chosen for investigation is SA 335 P91, low alloy ferritic steel. The original dimension of
the pipe was ø460 mm × 53 mm ×300 mm and welded by SAW. The dimensions of the pipe used for SMAW
was ø 120 mm ×12 mm thick.
2.2 Chemical analysis:
Chemical analysis was carried out on the material chosen for investigation (P91) as per standardization
of ASTM E-1086. The experimental result shows that composition of the chosen material matches the ASTM
standard chemical composition value. The table gives the chemical composition (%) of the P91 as per the
ASTM standards and also the experimental analyzed result.
Table 1:chemical composition SA 335 P91.
Table.2:Chemical composition of SAW welded P91.
2.3 Welding consumables:
The following table gives chemical composition of the welding consumables available for
SMAW,GTAW and GMAW.
Table 3. Chemical composition of welding consumables.
2.4 Welding flux:
Flux, marathon 543 is a highly basic agglomerated flux specially designed for SAW with AWS E B9
wire. When used in combination with AWS EB9, Marathon 543 yields a weld deposit that is chemically
balanced to insure optimum mechanical properties, including creep resistance. Welding characteristics are
excellent with good wetting and easy slag removal. Marathon 543 is metallurgical neutral.
2.5 Welding joint details:
The single ‘U’ edge preparation was used for SA- welding of ø 460 mm, 53 mm thick pipe. The single
‘V’ edge preparation was used for SMA-welding of ø 120 mm, 12 mm thick pipe.
Table 4: Details of edge preparation

2.6 welding procedure:
Table 5: GTA welding parameters for root pass (Weld metal deposit 2.5 mm)
Table 6: SMA Welding Parameters for further two passes (Weld metal deposit 10mm)
Table 7: SA welding parameters
The two pipes were preheated and checked with thermal chalks to achieve a minimum temperature of
100 ◦ C. GTAW process was used for tackling the pipes and weld deposit thickness was 2.5 mm. particular
attention was paid to the quality of tack weld welds were dressed by grinding to facile proper fusion where the
root run completed. Back purging by argon was done to prevent oxidation inside the pipe. The SMAW process
was used for the further two passes and the weld metal deposit was 10 mm. the SMAW stick electrodes after
baking were stored in a portable oven at 150◦C.preheating was done using producer gas burners for temperature
of 220◦C and was maintained before and during the course of the welding. The temperature was checked using
thermal chalks. Inter pass temperature was controlled between 230◦- 350◦C and when temperature exceeded the
maxiumum, welding was stopped and resumed afterafter the temperature dropped to 230 ◦C. further passes were
done by using the SAW. Preheating and interpass temperature were manited as same. On completion of welding
the joints were given post heating at 300◦C/2 hours by enclosing thermal blankets. Radigraphic inspection was
done after welding, then gring of capping passes. Then the weld metal was subjected to PWHT of 750◦C for 260
minutes. Preheating and PWHT procedure is given in fig 3.3
Fig 3.3 : Preheating and PWHT Procedure
Table 8: Heat treatment Procedure (Preheating and PWHT
3. Testing:
3.1 Tensile Testing:
Both the base metal and weldment were subjected to tensile testing. ASTM E8M was used for the base
metal tensile testing. The transverse tensile specimens of weldment were prepared in the following dimensions
20 X 20 mm as per the standard AWS B4.0-98. All weld metal tensile test was also done as per the standard.
Two specimens of transverse tensile were taken from the face side of the weldment. Also two specimens were
taken from the root side for tensile testing.
3.2 Hardness Testing:
Hardness survey was done by using Vickers hardness tester with 10Kg load, The indents were made in
Base material, weld metal and Heat affected zone.
VHN=1.85P/L2
Where, P – Load in Kg, L – diagonal length in mm.
The impression appears as a dark square on a light background. The measurements are taken across the
diagonals of the square, and the hardness value corresponding to the readings is obtained from a chart or
calculated by a simple formula.
3.3 Impact Testing:
This test measure the resistance of the metal to fracture in the presence of a sharp notch also called
notched-bar impact test. Minimum impact values are specified in many codes and specifications for ferritic
steels, because some of them fail by brittle fracture in service, even though they exhibit normal properties as
determined from the standard tensile test. Even failure is especially severe when the material used in a notched
condition.
Notched conditions include restraint due to deformation in directions perpendicular to the major stress,
multi-axial stress, and stress concentrations. The energy values determine the variation of impact strength with
temperature and arriving at the transition temperature. They are not useful for engineering design calculations.
There are several impact tests among which charpy-V notch, is well known. To carry out the test, the specimen
is paced in a vice of an impact testing machine. A pendulum, swinging on ball allowed to strike the specimen.
The striking energy is absorbed in fracturing the specimen, is indicated by pointer. The impact test values are
expressed in joules(J). in this present investigation, impact specimens were taken from the face side and root
side of the weldment.
3.4 Side Bend Testing :
The bend test is a simple and inexperience quantitative test that can be used to evaluate both the
ductility and soundness of the material . the bend test coupon was prepared according to AWS specification.
This test was conducted on UTM with 6.66t material at 180⁰ bend. The transverse side bend test is good at
revealing lack of side wall fusion. The test coupon is said to pass only when it does not have discontinuity in
weld.
3.5 Hot Tensile Testing:
This study examines the effect of temperature ranging from 400 to 700⁰C on the tensile test properties
of a SAW weld of modified 9Cr-1Mo ferric steel. Hot tensile testing was performed in an UTN-60 testing
machine. Isothermal tensile test on SAW welded transverse tensile specimens of the six of 12.5 X 6 mm were
carried out at the temperature of 400⁰C, 500⁰C, 600⁰C, and 700⁰C. the specimens were selected from both the
face and root side of the weldment. The present investigation also aims on studying the SMAW welded P91 in
the temperature range of 400 to 700⁰C.
3.6 SEM Analysis of Fracture Surface:
SEM examination of the fracture surfaces of all the hot tensile and impact tested specimens were
carried out then the fractographs were compared together.
4. Results and Discussion:

4.1 Tensile Resting:
The transverse tensile tensiletest results of the weld joint by SAW, all weld tensile and tensile test
results of the base metal are shown in the table 9 and 10. Two test coupons of the weld were evaluated as per
standard. The investigated values of all tension test results are within the requirements of ASTM A213. In each
case of face side transverse tensile the failure was observed in wed metal and the reason behind the failure is
because of the coarse martensite and δ ferrite in the weld metal. Weld metal side failures were observed in root
side tensile test because less strength of the root pass weld metal of 21/4 Cr 1Mo. Because the tensile strength
of P22 material was less than that of the P91 base material and the weld metal. The investigated values of all the
transverse tensile test results are within the requirements of ASME SEC-IX.
Table.9. Transverse tensile test result of P91 SAW weldment

Table.10. Tensile test result of P91 base metal
4.2 Hardness test:
Testing standard – ASTM E92

Equipment – Vickers harness test
Load – 10 kg
Testing temperature -27◦C.
The results (Table-11) show that the hardness values of the weld metal is very high because of fine
martensitic structure. The formation of δ ferrite in the weld metal microstructure restricts the grain growth and
grain size. The presence of α ferrite has the stronger effect on hardness. The HAZ also showing higher hardness
because of the finematensite structure compare to the base metal. The investigated value of all the hardness
values are within the requirements.
4.3 Impact test:
Testing standard – ASTM E23

Equipment – Tinius Olsen
Specimen size- 10× 10 × 55 mm
Test temperature- room temperature
Type-CVN 2mm depth at Weld Centre
Table.12: Impact values of P91 base metal and weld metal
Impact test were carried out for the base metal and welded samples are given in table 12. The face side SAW
weld metal showing the very high impact energy of 146 J compare to the root side weld metal. The reason
behind the less impact energy is fully martensic structure of root side. The weld metal shows nearly half the
impact energy of base metal. This may be due to the carbides and carbonitrides in the weld metal.
4.4 Side bend test:
The test results to the given in the table-13. No open discontinuity was observed in all the four test
specimens and meets the requirement of ASME SEC-IX.
Table.13: side bend test result of P91 SAW weldment.
4.5 Hot tensile test :
The hot tensile are shown in table 14 &15. The sudden drop in tensile value was observed at
temperature of 700◦c because this P91 material is developed to play a role upto 640◦c . A coarse grain structure
of the austenite is the main reason for less tensile value at 700◦c. in each case of face side transverse hot tensile
testing the failure was observed in weld metal. Root side tensile results are slightly higher than face tensile
values at all the temperatures, due to the large amount of the δ ferrite in the sub arc welded region. The SMA
weldment shows the higher tensile value at all the temperature compared to the SA- weldment. The reason
behind the higher tensile value is due to the less δ ferrite in the weld metal and also failure was observed in base
metal region.
Table .14: Hot tensile test result of SA-welded P91 weldment
Table.15: Hot tensile test results of SMA-welded P91 weldment
4.6 Microstructural characterization:
The P91 base metal consists of tempered martensitic metal consists of tempered martensitic structure
and finely distributed carbides and carbonitrides
Fig .1: Micrograph of the P91 base metal at 340 X Fig.2:Micrograph of HAZ at 340 X
(figure.1.). Figure.2 shows the HAZ microstructure of fine martensite with finely distributed carbides.
The precipitates of these regions are probably M23C 6 and QX (Nb-V Carbonitrides).
Fig .3: Micrograph of the face Fig.4: Micrograph of the weld metal
side weld metal (SAW) at 170X (SAW) 2 mm from the top at 170X
Micrograph of the SAW-weld face (figure.3) shows the martensite with δ- ferrite with finely distributed
carbides.
Figure.4 shows the finer martensitic structure which has taken in SAW welded region of -4 mm away
from the weld top. Finer martensite formed due to grain refinement of the multipass welding. The formation of
δ-ferrite in the weld metal microstructure during the solidification restricts the grain and grain size. However,
martensite gradually losses its acicular feature because of the PWHT.
Fig.5: Micrograph of the weld meal Fig.6: The interface between GTAW &
(SMAW) at 170 X SMAW WM at 170 X
The SMAW weld metal structure(figure.5) exhibits fine martensitic structure compare to the SAW weld
metal, this may be because of the low heat input which can accelerate the fast cooling rate.
Figure.6 shows the interface between TIG and SMAW.TIG weld metal consists of acicular ferrite
structure due to the multipass welding effect. The figures 7 & 8 below micro photographs show the interface
weld metal. The SAW shows the wider fusion boundary compare to the SMAW fusion boundary.
Fig. 7: The interfaces of SAW Fig.8: The interface SMAW weld metal at 170 X
weld metal at 170 X
Also coarse grain structure of HAZ is observed in the SAW welds side.
4.7 Fracture characterization studies:
The fracture appearance of SAA-welded face side hot tensile specimen fractured at 400◦C that had
tensile
Fig.9: SEMfractograph of SA-welded Fig.10: SEM fractograph of SA-welded

face side hot tensile at 400◦C face side hot tensile test at 500◦C
Strength of 515 MPa exhibits extensive dimple fracture with micro voids as shown in figure 9. The
fracture surface of the fracture surface of the SA-welded face side hot tensile fractured at 500◦C,
Shows dimple fracture with more number of micro voids (fig.10). Larger sizes of voids are observed in
the fracture surface of SA-welded face side hot tensile specimen tested at 700◦C exhibited a dimple appearance
characteristic of micro void coalescence with grain boundary facets with smaller number of dimples(Fig.12).
The facture surface of SAW root side hot tensile specimen tested at 400◦C shows a dimple
Fig.11 SEM fractograph of SA-welded Fig.12.SEM fractograph of SA-welded

face hot tensile test at 600◦C. face side hot tensile at 700◦C
Fig(13). The fracture appearance of SAW root Fig.14.SEM fractograph of SA-welded

side hot tensile specimen tested at 500 ◦C root side hot tensile at 500◦C
Fig.15 SEM Fractograph of Fig.16.SEM fractograph of SA-welded

SA-welded root side hot tensile at 600⁰C root side hot tensile at 700◦C
Fig.17. SEM fractograph of SMA- Fig.18.SEM fractograph of SMA-

welded hot tensile at 400◦C welded hot tensile at 500◦C
Fig 19.SEM fractograph of SMA Fig .20.SEM fractograph of SMA-

–welded hot tensile at 600◦C welded hot tensile at 700◦C
Fig.21.SEM Fractograph of SAW Fig.22.SEM fractograph of SAW welded

welded face side impact specimen at RT. root side impact specimen at RT
Fracture with some cleavage facets(Fig.13).The fracture appearance of SAW rootside hot tensile
specimen tested at 500⁰C exhibits dimple fracture and micro voids with some cleavage facets (fig.14).Dimple
fracture with micro voids coalescence is observed in the fracture surface of hot tensile tested at 600◦C (fig.15).
The fracture surface of hot tensile fractured at 700◦C shows mainly cleavage dominated fracture with
some dimple fractured area (fig.16). Dimple fracture with some cleavage facets are observed in SMA-welded
hot tensile specimen fractured at 400◦C and 500◦c (fig.17 and 18). Dimples and micro void coalescence with
grain boundary facets are observed in SMA-welded hot tensile tested at 600◦C (fig.19). Cleavage facets
dominated with small amount of dimples are observed in hot tensile specimen tested at 700◦C (Fig.20).(Fig.21
and 22) show SEM fractographs of impact-fractured specimens. The fracture appearance of a SA-welded face
side fractured impact specimen that had impact energy of 131 j exhibits dimple fracture with some cleavage
facets.But root side fractured impact specimen that had impact energy of 79 J exhibits completely cleavage
facets.
5. Conclusion:
Major conclusions drawn from this study relating to the evolution of the microstructures, hot tensile
tests and fracture characteristics of 9Cr-1Mo-V weldment are given below:
The base metal evolution has shown that the P91 steel chosen for the work has the composition within
the specific limit. The mechanical properties, tensile strength, impact toughness and hardness are also meeting
the requirements.
Welding procedure or P91 pipe with root pass welding of GTAW and subsequent passes of SMAW and
SAW were developed qualified as per the standard ASME SEC-IX.
The tensile properties of P91 weldment were measured at room temperature and temperature ranging
from 400⁰C – 700⁰C. Root side tensile results are slightly higher than face side tensile values at all the
temperatures, due to the coarse martensitic and ᵟ ferrite in the sub arc welded region. The SMA-weldment
shows the higher tensile value at all the temperature compare to the SA-weldment, because of fine martensitic
structure with carbides in the weld metal.
From impact testing, it was observed that the base metal exhibits the highest toughness compared to
weld metal of both root side and face side due to tempered martensite and globular carbides in the base metal
microstructure.
From the hardness testing of the weldment, the weld zone registered the highest values ranging from
228-236 HV10. Intermediate hardness values were observed in the HAZ region. The parent metal registered the
hardness value of 206HV10.
Microstructural analysis using light optical microscope reveals the coarse martensite and carbides with ᵟ
ferrite in the weld region. Base metal microstructure consists of tempered martensitic structure and finely
distributed carbides, and HAZ consists of martensite with finely distributed carbides.
Hot tensile specimens fractured ay 400⁰C – 700⁰C exhibits dimple fracture with micro voids. Some
small amount of cleavage facets were observed in the specimen fractured at 700⁰C. the fracture appearance of a
SA-weldment face side fracture impact specimen that had impact energy of 131 J exhibits dimple fracture with
some cleavage facets and root side fracture-impact specimen that had impact energy of 79J exhibits completely
cleavage facets.
6. References:
1. Swindeman, R.W., Santella, M.L., Maziasz, P.J., Roberts, B.W., Coleman, K., Issues in replacing Cr-
Mo Steels and Stainless steel with 9Cr-1Mo-V Steels, Inter-national Journal of Pressure Vessels and
Piping, 2004, 81,507-512.
2. Kspiradek, R., Bauer., and Zeiler, G., microstructural changes during the creep deformation of 9%
chromium steel, materials for advanced power engineer, Kluwer Academic publishers,Dordrecht, 1994,
251-262.
3. Eva-Lena Bergquist., Esab, A.B., Goteborg, Consumables and welding modified 9Cr-1Mo Steel,
svetsaren no.1-2,Central Laboratories in Goteberg,Sweden,1999, 22-25.
4. Knott, J.K., A Genral Introduction to Fracture Mechanics, 1976, 20-21.
5. Laha, K.,.Chandravathi, K.S., Rao, K.B.S., Mannan, S.L., Hot tensile properties of simulated heat
affected zone microstructure of 9Cr-1Mo weldment”,Internationl journal of Pressure Vessels And
Piping 62, 1995, 303-311.
6. Anon., Guide to the welding and weldability of Cr-mo and Cr-MoV heat resitingteels”,IIW Doc.IXG-
319, 1986, 43-44.
7. Regev, M., Investigation of Microstructure,Mechanical and Creep properties of weldments between
T91 and T22 Steels”, Welding Journal, 1996, 261s.
8. Khare, K., Ferritic Steels for High-temperature Applications ,Conference proceedings ASM, Metals
Park Ohio,6-8, 1981, 85-86.
9. Carl, Lundin, D., A Literlature Review on Characteristics of High Temperature Ferritic Cr-Mo steels
and weldments”,WRC Bulletin 454, 2000, p1.
10. David Broek., Elementary Engineering Fracture Mechanics, Vorboff International, 1974, 46-47.
11. Patron, V.Z., Morozov, E.M., Elastic Plastic Fracture Mechanics, Mir Publishers Moscow,1978, 26-
27.
12. Dittrich, S., Heuser, H. ,”Welding of T/P 91 Steel with optimized Filler Metal Addition”,Technical
Information HC/4-105,Bohler Thyssen Welding Institute, 7-28.
13. Blame, R., Leich, K.E., Heuser, H., and Meyer, F.W., Welding of modified 9% Cr Steel, Technical
Information HC/4-105,Bohler Thyssen Welding Institute, 1-6.
14. 14.Heuser, H., GTA-and SA –welding of the 9%Cr-steel T91/P91, the 73rd Annual AWS-convention,
March 24,Chicago 1992.
15. Sperko Engineering Services,Inc. Welding “Grade 91”Alloy Steel, 2005, 2-4.
*****
View publication stats

The National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors Page 1 of 2
Microstructural Degradation
Print Date: 2/23/2017 12:53:32 AM
David N. French, Sc.D.
President of David N. French, Inc., Metallurgists, Northborough, MA
January 1991
Category: Design/Fabrication
Summary: The following article is a part of National Board Classic Series and it was published in the National
Board BULLETIN. (4 printed pages)
TABLE 1. OXIDATION LIMITS
Carbon steel (SA210, SA106) 850oF
Carbon-1/2 Mo (SA209) 900oF
1-1/4 Cr-1/2 Mo (T-11, P-11) 1025oF
2- 1 /4 Cr-1 Mo (T-22, P-22) 1075oF
18 Cr-8 Ni (304, 321, 347) 1300oF
The service conditions of a fossil-fired boiler are among the most severe of any large, engineered structure. Flame
temperatures may reach more than 3000oF during combustion of the fuel. The products of combustion may be
corrosive to the materials of construction. Ideally, only pure water and steam would be used, but, in practice,
deviations from the ideal are expected. Life expectancies of these steam generators are 25 to 30 years or more.
Tube-metal temperatures within the furnace will be 750oF and up; in superheaters and reheaters, temperatures of
1150oF are common; and in the support materials, temperatures of 1400oF or 1500o F are possible. This article
will present some of the changes expected in ferritic boiler tubes in service at elevated temperatures.
It will also approach the subject from the viewpoint of changes in the microstructure, changes that are normal and
expected for ferritic steels and occur without necessarily leading to failure. These microstructural changes occur at
temperatures high enough to allow some atomic mobility. For carbon steels (SA210, SA192, SA178) this
temperature is about 800oF. Thus, below about 800oF, no changes in the microstructure would be expected.
Structural steel, SA36, has a similar composition and metallurgical characteristics as SA210 but is used, for the
most part, at service temperatures not much above 100oF (perhaps 125oF on a hot day in Arizona). No changes in
the appearance of the ferrite and pearlite will ever occur. SA192, on the other hand, may be used in a low-
temperature or primary superheater and may experience metal temperatures above 800o F and suffer changes to
the pearlitic structure of unused tubes.
Construction Materials
The pressure parts of utility boilers are made from carbon steel, low- alloy chromium-molybdenum ferritic steels,
and 18-8 chromium-nickel austenitic stainless steels. In a few unusual cases, 5-9% chromium- molybdenum steels
have been used in superheater and reheater applications. The oxidation limits, the temperatures at which wastage
is excessive for safe service for 25-30 years, for these alloys are listed in Table I.
As part of the original design, changes in material are made as estimated metal temperatures reach the oxidation
limits given above. Thus waterwalls of sub-critical boilers are carbon steel, occasionally SA209. T-11 and T-22
may be used for super-critical units where temperatures may be 900o F. Superheaters and reheater alloys are
https://www.nationalboard.org/PrintPage.aspx?pageID=164&ID=198 2/23/2017
DATA SHEET A-12
SURREY, KT16 9LL
Tel: +44(0)1932 566721
Fax: +44(0)1932 565168 Sales
Fax: +44(0)1932 569449 Technical
Fax: +44(0)1932 566199 Export
1¼Cr-½Mo CREEP RESISTING STEEL Email: info@metrode.com
Internet: http//www.metrode.com
hardsurfacing to resist metal-to-metal wear and heavy

Alloy type
impact.
1¼Cr-½Mo alloyed steel consumables for elevated
Microstructure
After PWHT, the microstructure consists of tempered
Materials to be welded
bainite.
ASTM BS EN & DIN Welding guidelines
A387 Gr 11 & 12 13CrMo 4-5 (1.7355) Preheat and interpass temperature 200°C minimum, up
A182 F11 & F12 13CrMo 4-4 (1.7335) to 300°C for thick sections. Maintain throughout
A217 WC6 & WC11 16CrMo 4-4 (1.7337) welding cycle and some time after completion of
A234 WP11 & WP12 11CrMo 5-5 (1.7339) welding.
A199 T11 GS-25CrMo 4 (1.7128)
A200 T11 GS-17CrMo 5-5 (1.7357) PWHT
A213 T11 & T12 Apart from some special applications, PWHT will
A335 P11 & P12 BS always be required. PWHT temperature is typically
1501 Gr 620 & 621 690°C with time being dependent on section thickness.
1502 Gr 620
1503 Gr 620 & 621 Additional information
1504 Gr 621
There are Technical Profiles available which cover
3100 Gr B2
some of the consumables on this data sheet. Additional
3604 Gr 620/440 & 621
information is available on Chromet 1X and Cormet 1.
3059 Gr 620/460
Applications Products available
These consumables are designed for prolonged elevated Process Product Specification
temperature service up to 550°C. Main areas of MMA Chromet 1 AWS E8018-B2
application are associated with steam generating
Chromet 1L AWS E7015-B2L
power plant, eg piping, turbine castings, steam
chests, valve bodies and boiler superheaters. Some of Chromet 1X * AWS E8018-B2
the consumables will also find service in refineries TIG/MIG 1CrMo BS EN CrMo1Si
where they are used for corrosion resistance to sulphur ER80S-B2 AWS ER80S-B2
bearing crude oil at 250-450°C. Some of the
SAW SA 1CrMo AWS EB2
consumables will also find applications in the chemical
and petro-chemical industries where they are used for LA436 BS EN SA AB 1
resistance to hydrogen attack in the fabrication of FCW Cormet 1 AWS E81T1-B2
hydrocrackers, coal liquefaction plant and NH3
pressure vessels operating at up to 450°C. In the as- * Chromet 1X is the temper embrittlement resistant (TER)
version of Chromet 1.
welded condition the consumables also provide a useful
source of 300HV hardness weld deposit for build-up or


Rev 12 04/10 DS: A-12 (pg 1 of 7)

General Data for all 1¼Cr-½Mo Electrodes
Description Basic flux, metal powder type coatings on low carbon high purity core wire. Recovery is approximately 115%
with respect to the core wire and 65% with respect to whole electrode. Moisture resistant coating gives very low
Storage 3 hermetically sealed ring-pull metal tins per carton, with unlimited shelf life. Direct use from tin will give
hydrogen < 5ml/100g for longer than a working shift of 8h.
Redry 250 – 300°C/1-2h to ensure H2 < 10ml/100g, 300 – 350°C/1-2h to ensure H2 < 5ml/100g. Maximum
420°C, 3 cycles, 10h total.
Storage of redried electrodes at 50 – 200°C in holding oven or heated quiver: no limit, but maximum 6 weeks
Operating parameters DC +ve or AC (OCV: 70V min)
ø mm 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.0

min A 70 80 100 140 200
max A 110 140 180 240 300
Fume data Fume composition, wt % typical:

15 5 < 0.5 < 0.1 < 0.2 18 5
CHROMET 1 1¼Cr-½Mo MMA electrode
Product description MMA electrode meeting AWS and BS EN national standards suitable for most power generation applications.
Specifications AWS A5.5 E8018-B2

BS EN ISO 3580-A E CrMo1 B 3 2
BS 2493 (1CrMo B H)
DIN 8575 ECrMo 1 B 2 6
Composition C Mn* Si S P Cr Mo Cu
(weld metal wt %) min 0.05 0.50 -- -- -- 1.00 0.45 --
max 0.10 0.90 0.80 0.025 0.025 1.40 0.65 0.15
typ 0.07 0.8 0.40 0.012 0.015 1.25 0.55 < 0.10
All-weld mechanical
properties PWHT 690°C/1h min typical
Tensile strength MPa 550 650
0.2% Proof stress MPa 460 570
Elongation on 4d % 19 25
Impact energy + 20°C J 47 160
-10°C J -- 100
Hardness (AW) HV -- 250
(PWHT) HV -- 210
Preheat 150 – 250°C (BS EN), 200 – 300°C (BS), 160 – 190°C (AWS), 200 – 350°C (DIN).
Packaging data ø mm 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.0

length mm 350 380 450 450 450
kg/carton 12.6 15.0 16.8 17.4 17.4
pieces/carton 627 372 243 159 111
Rev 12 04/10 DS: A-12 (pg 2 of 7)

CHROMET 1L Low carbon 1¼Cr-½Mo MMA electrode
Product description MMA electrode – 1¼Cr-½Mo deposit with low carbon which produces lower hardness and residual stresses for
resistance to sulphide stress corrosion cracking when operating in wet 'sour' environments. Also suitable for thin
section joints which are to be left in the as-welded condition.
Specifications AWS A5.5 E7015-B2L

BS EN ISO 3580-A E CrMo1L B 3 2
BS EN ISO 3580-B E 5216-1CML
BS 2493 (1CrMo L B H)
Composition C Mn* Si S P Cr Mo Cu
(weld metal wt %) min 0.03 0.50 -- -- -- 1.00 0.45 --
max 0.05 0.90 0.80 0.025 0.025 1.40 0.65 0.15
typ 0.04 0.8 0.40 0.012 0.015 1.25 0.55 <0.10
All-weld mechanical PWHT 690°C/1h min typical

properties Tensile strength MPa 520 600
Impact energy + 20°C J -- 180
-10°C J -- 120
Hardness (AW) HV -- 220
(PWHT) HV -- 200
Packaging data ø mm 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0

length mm 350 380 450 450
kg/carton 12.0 14.1 17.7 18.0
pieces/carton 612 414 252 168
CHROMET 1X 1¼Cr-½Mo alloyed MMA electrode for temper embrittlement resistance
Product description MMA electrode – 1¼Cr-½Mo deposit which meets specific requirements for improved temper embrittlement
resistance with prolonged service at 400-600°C. Relevant trace elements (P, Sn, As, Sb) are controlled to ensure
low Bruscato (X) and Watanabe (J) factors.
Specifications AWS A5.5 E8018-B2

BS EN ISO 3580-A E CrMo1 B
BS 2493 1CrMo B H
Composition C Mn* Si* S P Cr Mo Cu Sn As Sb

(weld metal wt %) min 0.05 0.50 0.15 -- -- 1.00 0.45 -- -- -- --
max 0.10 0.90 0.30 0.015 0.012 1.40 0.65 0.15 0.005 0.010 0.005
typ 0.06 0.7 0.25 0.012 0.009 1.25 0.55 <0.05 0.002 0.003 <0.002
* Mn+Si < 1.10%
Bruscato factor (X) : 10P + 5Sb + 4Sn + As (ppm) = 15 max
100
Watanabe factor (J) : (Mn+Si)x(P + Sn) x 104 = 180 max
Rev 12 04/10 DS: A-12 (pg 3 of 7)

CHROMET 1X (continued)
All-weld mechanical 690°C/5h 690°C/5h + SC
properties PWHT 690°C/1h (1) (SC = step cooled) min typical typical typical
Tensile strength MPa 550 610 610 595
0.2% Proof stress MPa 460 525 515 490
Elongation on 4d % 19 25 29 29
Elongation on 5d % 20 21 25 25
Impact energy + 20°C J 47 (2) 160 200 200
- 30°C J -- 100 160 140
Hardness (AW) HV -- 300-320 -- --
(PWHT) HV -- 200-210 220 190
(1)
BS & AWS PWHT 690°C/1h, DIN 690°C/>30min, BS EN 720°C/1h.
(2)
DIN & BS EN minimum average.
Packaging data ø mm 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0

length mm 350 380 450 450
kg/carton 12.6 15.0 16.8 17.4
pieces/carton 627 372 243 159
1CrMo Solid welding wire for TIG & MIG.

Product description Copper coated wire for TIG and MIG welding of 1¼Cr-½Mo steels, conforming to European specifications.
Specifications AWS A5.28 ER80S-G

BS EN ISO 21952-A CrMo1Si (W = TIG, G = MIG)
BS 2901: Pt1 (A32)
DIN 8575 (SG CrMo 1)
Composition C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu
(wire wt %) min 0.08 0.80 0.50 -- -- 0.90 -- 0.45 --
max 0.14 1.20 0.80 0.020 0.020 1.30 -- 0.65 0.4
typ 0.1 1 0.6 0.010 0.015 1.2 <0.1 0.5 0.1
All-weld mechanical typical

properties PWHT 690°C/4h (AWS=1h) min TIG MIG
Tensile strength MPa 550 635 590
0.2% Proof stress MPa 470 520 480
Elongation on 4d % 19 25 26
Impact energy -10°C J -- > 200 > 115
Hardness HV(HB) -- 220(215) 195(190)
Typical operating TIG MIG

parameters Shielding Argon Ar-5%CO2
Current DC- DC+
Diameter 2.4mm 1.2mm
Parameters 100A, 12V 280A, 26V
Packaging data ø mm TIG MIG

0.8 -- 15kg reel
1.2 -- 15kg reel
1.6 5kg tube --
2.4 5kg tube --
3.2 5kg tube --
Fume data MIG fume composition (wt %) (TIG fume negligible)

55 5 0.4 < 0.1 < 0.5 1.2 5
Rev 12 04/10 DS: A-12 (pg 4 of 7)

ER80S-B2 Solid welding wire for TIG & MIG.
Product description Copper coated wire for TIG and MIG welding 1¼Cr-½Mo creep resisting steels, conforming to the AWS/ASME
specification.
Specifications AWS A5.28 ER80S-B2

BS EN ISO 21952-B 1CM
BS 2901: Pt1 (A32)
DIN 8575 --
Composition C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Cu
(wire wt %) min 0.07 0.40 0.40 -- -- 1.20 -- 0.40 --
max 0.12 0.70 0.70 0.020 0.020 1.50 0.20 0.65 0.35
typ 0.1 0.5 0.5 0.010 0.015 1.3 <0.1 0.5 0.1
All-weld mechanical typical

properties PWHT 690°C/4h (AWS=1h) min TIG MIG
Tensile strength MPa 550 635 590
0.2% Proof stress MPa 470 520 480
Elongation on 4d % 19 25 26
Hardness HV(HB) -- 220(215) 195(190)
Impact energy - 10°C J -- > 200 > 115
Typical operating TIG MIG

parameters Shielding Argon Ar - 5% CO2
Current DC - DC+
Diameter 2.4mm 1.2mm
Parameters 100A, 12V 280A, 26V
Packaging data ø mm TIG MIG

0.8 -- 15kg reel
0.9 -- 15kg reel
1.0 -- 15kg reel
1.2 -- 15kg reel
1.6 5kg tube --
2.4 5kg tube --
3.2 5kg tube --
Fume data MIG fume composition (wt %) (TIG fume negligible)

55 5 0.4 <0.1 <0.5 1.2 5
Rev 12 04/10 DS: A-12 (pg 5 of 7)

SA1CrMo Solid welding wire for SAW.
Product description Solid wire for Sub Arc Welding of 1¼Cr-½Mo steels.
Specifications AWS A5.23 EB2

BS EN ISO 24598-A SCrMo1
Composition C Mn Si S P Cr Mo
(typical) SA1CrMo wire 0.10 0.8 0.15 0.010 0.012 1.3 0.55
Deposit with LA436 0.08 1.1 0.4 <0.01 <0.02 1.1 0.5
All-weld mechanical PWHT 690°C/1h min typical
properties (LA436 flux) Tensile strength MPa 550 620
Impact energy +20°C J 47 >47
Typical operating Current: DC or AC; DC+ve is preferred

parameters For 2.4mm: 300-500A, 28-36V, 350-700mm/min travel
Packaging data ø mm SAW

2.4 25kg coil
Fume data SAW fume negligible
LA436 Sub-arc flux

Product description LA436 is agglomerated aluminate basic flux (Boniszewski BI ~1.6) with silicon pick-up of ~0.3% and manganese
pick-up of ~0.4%.
Specifications AWS A5.23 F8 P0-EB2 B2

BS EN 760 SA AB 1 67 AC H5
ASME IX Qualification QW432 F-No --, QW442 A-No --
Composition C Mn Si S P Cr Mo
(typical) SA 1CrMo wire 0.10 0.8 0.15 0.010 0.012 1.3 0.55
Deposit with LA436 0.08 1.1 0.4 <0.01 <0.02 1.1 0.5
All-weld mechanical Typical PWHT

properties with 690-720°C/1-2h
SA 1CrMo wire Tensile strength MPa 620
0.2% Proof stress MPa 535
Elongation on 4d % 25
Impact energy +20°C J >47
Typical operating Current: DC or AC; DC+ve is preferred

parameters 2.4mm: 300-500A, 28-36V, 350-700mm/min travel speed
Packaging data Metrode LA436 flux is supplied in sealed moisture resistant 25kg metal drums. Preferred storage conditions for
opened drums: < 60%RH, > 18°C. If the flux has become damp or has been stored for a long period, it should be
redried in the range 300-350°C/1-2h.
Rev 12 04/10 DS: A-12 (pg 6 of 7)

CORMET 1 All-positional flux cored wire
Product description Cormet 1 is an all-positional flux cored wire suitable for welding fixed pipework. Made using a high purity steel
sheath with a metal recovery of about 90% with respect to the wire.
Specifications AWS A5.29 E81T1-B2C/M

BS EN ISO 17634-B T55T1-1C/M-1CM
Composition C Mn Si S P Cr Mo Cu
(weld metal wt %) min 0.05 -- -- -- -- 1.00 0.40 --
max 0.12 1.25 0.80 0.030 0.030 1.50 0.65 0.30
typ 0.06 1.0 0.3 0.01 0.01 1.3 0.55 0.05
All-weld mechanical PWHT 690°C/1-2h min typical

properties Tensile strength MPa 550 650
Impact energy + 20°C J -- > 40
Hardness HV -- 220
Operating parameters Shielding gas: 80%Ar-20%CO2 at 20-25l/min. Proprietary gases may be used but argon should not exceed 80%.
The wire is also suitable for use with 100%CO2. (Note: for 100%CO2 shielding gas, voltage should be 1-2V
higher.)
ø mm amp-volt range typical stickout
1.2 160 – 260A, 24-30V 190A, 25V 15 – 25mm
1.6 220 – 350A, 26-32V 260A, 28V 15 – 25mm
Packaging data Spools vacuum-sealed in barrier foil with cardboard carton: 15kg.
Resistance to moisture absorption is high, but to maintain the high integrity of the wire surface and prevent any
possibility of porosity, it is advised that part-used spools are returned to polythene wrappers.
Fume data Fume composition (wt %)

20 8 < 0.5 1 <1 <1 8 5
Rev 12 04/10 DS: A-12 (pg 7 of 7)

The National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors Page 2 of 2
T-11, T-22 and the 18-8 stainless steels, depending on the expected temperature. Economizers are usually
carbon steel, SA210 or SA178. Downcomers are carbon steel, and the main stream piping is usually P-22, 2-1/4
Cr-1 Mo.
While it is clear why oxidation limits are set for these alloys in elevated-temperature service, there are less
obvious, but important, microstructural changes that occur unseen by casual observation. Oxidation or corrosion of
the fireside is easily observed. However, even at temperatures below the specific oxidation limit, long-term
microstructure degradation may affect the strength and fitness for continued service. For new materials of plain-
carbon and low-alloy chromium and molybdenum ferritic steels, the expected microstructure is ferrite (nearly pure
iron) and pearlite, a lamellar structure of alternating layers of ferrite and iron carbide. This structure is made by
slowly cooling the finished product from about 1650o and is called the normalized structure. In this condition the
steel will meet all specification requirements and is as strong as it will ever be. All microstructural changes that
occur during service will decrease the strength from this pearlitic structure.
As a model for these microstructural changes, a plain-carbon steel similar to SA210, SA192, and SA178 for boiler
tubes, or SA106 for piping and headers, will be used. The Rockwell B hardness is somewhat variable but usually
around 75. The pearlite is made up of alternating layers of iron carbide and ferrite, referred to as a "lamellar
structure." The amount of pearlite depends on the carbon content. The individual particle of iron carbide or
cementite in the pearlite is shaped like a playing card, long in two dimensions and short in the thickness direction.
Each cluster is referred to as a "pearlite colony." The apparent spacing or thickness of the iron carbide and ferrite
layers will depend on how the pearlite colony is sliced. When sliced perpendicular to the blade, the spacing is
close, perhaps too fine to be resolved; when cut at an angle, the apparent thickness is greater.
At temperatures above about 800o F, the plate- or blade-like shape is unstable, and will change to sphere-like
shape. The internal energy of the carbide is reduced by changing its shape to a sphere. The excess surface
energy is the driving force for the change. The process that leads to the new shape is known as "spheroidization."
Another factor besides temperature that will promote spheroidization is high stress. For plain- carbon (SA178,
SA192, SA210) and carbon-1/2 molybdenum (SA209) steels, the iron carbide itself is unstable and will transform
to graphite and ferrite. Thus, a further step in the microstructural changes is the formation of graphite particles
within the steel, a process known as "graphitization."
Graphitization is a well-known phenomenon; and, in fact, the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section I has
notes in Table PG23.1 that warn of the change in iron-carbide to graphite for the plain-carbon steels and the
carbon -1/2 molybdenum steels.
The changes to the shape of iron-carbide, spheriodization, and its decomposition into graphite, graphitization, are
competing processes. At temperatures above about 1000oF, graphite will appear after spheroidization. At
temperatures below about 1000o F, graphitization occurs before the steel is fully spheroidized; that is, the pearlite
colonies are still sharply defined, but graphite particles are clearly visible.
The addition of about 1/2% chromium as an alloying element to steels will prevent the change from iron carbide to
graphite. Thus, T-2, T-11, and T- 22 materials with 1/2%, 1-1/4%, and 2-1/4% chromium will not graphitize.
However, the microstructures will change from ferrite and pearlite to spheroidized carbides and ferrite.
This change in microstructure occurs at elevated temperatures. As temperature increases, the time for
transformation decreases. For example, in SA178 or SA210 steels, spheroidization will occur in a few hours at
1300oF, but will take several years at 800-825oF. For T-22, spheroidization takes many years at 950oF, but less
than a year at 1100o F. Thus there is an equivalency between time and temperature; equal changes as viewed in
the microstructure occur at different times that depend on the service temperature.
Concomitant with these microstructural changes is a decrease in mechanical properties, tensile strength,
hardness, creep strength, etc. All are reduced.
The purpose of a detailed metallurgical analysis of a boiler tube is to identify the root cause of the failure or
establish the overall material condition and predict the nearness of failure. The microstructure at the rupture, and
the tube in general, play an important role in the re-creation of the thermal history. The microstructures just
discussed will provide useful information in the study of high temperature-failures.
Editor's note: Some ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code requirements may have changed because of
advances in material technology and/or actual experience. The reader is cautioned to refer to the latest edition and
addenda of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for current requirements.
https://www.nationalboard.org/PrintPage.aspx?pageID=164&ID=198 2/23/2017
International Journal ofJournal
International ISSI, Vol.11
of ISSI,(2014),
Vol.10No.2, pp.6-10
(2013), No.1
Evaluation of the Melted Zone Microstructure in the Interface of the Dissimilar

Weld between A335 Low Alloy Steel and ER309L Filler Metal by Gas Tungsten
Arc Welding
I. Hajiannia 1*, M. Shamanian 2, M. Kasiri 3

1,3
Department of Materials Engineering, Najafabad Branch, Islamic Azad University, Najafabad 85141-43131,
Iran
2
Department of Materials Engineering, Isfahan University of Technology, Isfahan 84156-83111, Iran
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Abstract
In the present study, the microstructure and mechanical properties of the dissimilar welding between
ASTM A335 low alloy steel and ER309L austenitic stainless steel were investigated using the gas
tungsten arc welding process. The welding of dissimilar materials between ASTM A335 low alloy steel
and ER309L austenitic stainless steel was found to have a significant effect on the microstructure when
the filler metal of ER309L was used. This research also studied the effect of carbon migration from
the heat-affected zone (HAZ) to the melted zone in the interface between A335 low alloy steel and
309L filler metal using microstructure analysis and Scanning electron microscopy-energy dispersive
spectroscopy (SEM-EDS) Line Scan Technique. The results showed that the solidification of 309L as a
primary ferrite exhibited a skeletal ferrite morphology and the solidification of ferritic-austenitic (FA)
type. Moreover, the results of EDS provided evidence showing carbon migration from the low chromium
side to the weld metal which had a higher chromium content and a tiny martensitic zone occurred in the
melt boundary with a high hardness value. In the tensile test, all specimens were broken in the HAZ of
A335 low alloy base metal with a ductile fracture and the welded specimens also showed the ductile
fracture in the impact test.
Keywords: Low alloy steel, Carbon migration, Microstructure, Mechanical properties.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Introduction
Chromium-Molybdenum low alloy steels are resis- zones of dissimilar joints, as well as the mechanical
tant to erosion and corrosion. ASTM A335 low alloy properties in the dissimilar joining of Cr-Mo low al-
steel is widely used in many industries such as petro- loy steel between A335 grades P11 and ER309L. The
chemicals, electric power plants, and nuclear power welding of dissimilar metals is efficient if the welding
plants 1).Cr-Mo low-alloy steels can be employed at conditions that determine the duration of the interac-
high service temperatures with good creep strength. tion between the solid and liquid metal are strictly
Dissimilar joining is used in different parts of steam controlled. The properties of the welded joints and the
generators where the differential temperature is criti- feasibility of the welding processes are influenced by
cal. The result of the welding A335 low alloy steel many factors; for example, carbon migration from the
with austenitic stainless steel ER309L filler metal, low-alloy side and the microstructure gradient and re-
which can be considered as dissimilar welds between sidual stress situations across different regions of the
high Cr steels and low Cr steels, is the formation of a weld metal can be mentioned. One of the important
carbon migration zone due to the difference in carbon factors predicting cracking in several passes is con-
content. In this research, attempts were made to study trolling the weld metal ferrite content (4-9%). It can
the effect of welding on the microstructure in different be observed that during welding stainless steel to car-
bon and low-alloy steels, hot cracking may occur due
to low melting point impurities, such as phosphor (P)
* Corresponding author and sulfur (S). Moreover, there is a risk of low-tem-
Email: Iman_hajiannia@yahoo.com perature cracking, because of the increase in the dilution
Address: Department of Materials Engineering, Najafabad
of the base metal on the carbon/low-alloy steel side; the
Branch, Islamic Azad University, Najafabad 85141-43131,
Iran weld metal contains a hard martensite phase 2). In dis-
1. PhD Student similar welding, one of the most important concerns is
2. Professor the selection of a proper filler material.
3.Associate Professor
6
66
International Journal
International Journal of
of ISSI,
ISSI, Vol.10
Vol.11 (2013),
(2014), No.1,
No.2 pp. 7-13
In recent years, some studies on the evaluation of Table 1. The chemical composition of used materials
dissimilar welding of stainless steel and low alloy steel (based on wt. %).
have been conducted. Sae-teaw et al. 3), for example, in-
vestigated the welding between Cr-Mo Steel grade 9Cr- Welding Parameters
1Mo and 2.25Cr-1Mo. The results showed that the low Volt Welding
Heat
carbon side presented the formation of soft zone while Filler Current Input
Pass No. (V) Speed
Metal (A) (kJmm-1)
the high carbon side led to the formation of a precipitate (mms-1)
zone which was Cr23C6. Klueh 4) investigated the failure 1 150 12 1.1 0.981
of a transferred joint between 2.25 Cr-1Mo steel and
321austenitic stainless steel using Ni-based Inconel 182 2 140 10 1.0 0.840
filler metal. It was illustrated that after heating this joint ER309L 3 130 11 1.1 0.709
at high temperatures for 15 to 20 years, the heat-affect- 4 110 12 1.1 0.720
ed zone contained large ferrite grains; hence, cracking
happened in this zone. In another study, Falat et al.5) According to ASME SEC.IX 7), two specimens
probed the microstructure and creep characteristics of from the weldment metal were selected to evaluate
some dissimilar T91/TP316H martensitic/austenitic the tensile properties. The tensile test was carried out
welded joint with Ni-based weld metal, realizing that by an Instron 8055 tensile machine. The elongation
the microstructure of Ni weld metal was very hetero- ratio, tensile strength and yield strength of specimens
geneous. In addition, the martensitic part of the welded were calculated and the impact test specimens with
joint showed a wide heat-affected zone (HAZ). Con- the dimensions of 55mm*10mm*10mm and 2-mm
versely, the HAZ of the austenitic steel was limited to notches with the angle 45o were prepared based on
only a narrow region with coarsened polygonal grains. ASME SEC.IX to compare the impact resistance of
The aim of this study was to investigate the mechanical the weld metals. The weld metal was placed in the
properties and the microstructure of different welding center of the specimens. There were three specimens
zones. from weldment in this test. The Charpy impact test
was performed on the specimens at -20 oC and 27 oC
2. Experimental Procedure using Santum machine, and the absorbed force was
reported during the test. The crack surfaces of speci-
The base metals used in this study were A335 low mens were evaluated by scanning electron microscopy
alloy steel pipes. The pipes were 8 mm in thickness, after the test. Microindention hardness measurement
400 mm in length and 200 mm in outer diameter. The was performed across the welds to obtain the hard-
filler metal, ER309L, was used to join the base metals. ness profiles in the weld metal, the heat-affected zone
The nominal chemical compositions of the base and and the base metal at a load of 100g using Buehler
filler metals are given in Table 1. microindention hardness tester. In order to study the
microstructure of the base metals, weld metals, and
Table 1. The chemical composition of used materials the heat-affected zone, the metallography procedure
(based on wt. %). was used 7). Therefore, for each joint, two specimens
with proper size were prepared by grinding using 80
Element C Cr Ni Mo Mn Si Ti Cu Nb Fe to 2000 grits silicon carbide paper. This was followed
by final polishing with 0.3 µm alumina powders. The
A335 0.1 1.12 - 0.5 .03 1.0 - 0.08 - BAL
specimens were etched for 15 sec using Nital solution
(2% nitrate acid in alcohol) to show the structure of
ER309L 0.02 23.7 13.9 0.04 1.8 0.51 - 0.05 - BAL
low alloy steel, and they were also etched by Marbel
solution (10 gr of CuSO4 + 50cc HCI + 50cc H2O)
to find the microstructure of austenitic stainless steel
Wires 2.4 mm in diameter were used for root pass weld metal. The (FMP30 Fischer) ferritescope was
and hot and cover passes. Before welding, the pipes also used to determine the ferrite and austenitic phase
were prepared to make a single V groove butt con- ratios.
figuration. The welding was done by gas tungsten
arc welding process with Direct-Current Electrode 3. Results and Discussion
Negative (GTAW-DCEN) and argon gas shield of
99.99% purity. The inter-pass temperature was se- Fig. 1 shows the microstructure of A335 chromium-
lected to be 150 oC in order to minimize the tension molybdenum low alloy steel in which ferrite grains
of the weld metal solidification 6).The welding pa- with dark pearlite grains can be observed.
rameters and the heat input in each welding pass are The microstructure of 309L austenitic stainless steel
given in Table 2. weld metal (which was related to the root pass) is
shown in Fig. 2.
7
International Journal of ISSI, Vol.11 (2014), No.2
The figure shows that the grain growth that occurred

in the HAZ of low alloy steel was planar 8).More-
over, in the transformation zone, melt boundary was
changed impressively in a very short distance. There
was a kind of carbon migration from HAZ to the melt
zone during the welding because of the change in the
chemical composition of A335 which contained more
carbon (Quintuple) than 309L weld metal. The in-
formation obtained from the tension-strain graphs is
given in Table 3.
Table 3. The results of the tension.
Fig. 1. Optical micrographs of A335 low alloy steel. Yield

Type of Ultimate tensile Elongation Location
strength
filler metal strength (MPa) (%) of failure
(MPa)
ER309L 444 572 42 HAZ A335
As shown, the carbon migration made a relatively

soft ferrite region between the stronger weld met-
al and the base metal. As mentioned before, grain
growth happened at the HAZ of A335 low alloy steel.
All these factors could justify the fracture process of
specimens at the HAZ of A335 base metal. In Fig. 4,
the fractured surface of the tensile specimen has been
analyzed using SEM. This fracture surface consisted
of uniform dimples which showed failure in a ductile
manner.
Fig. 2. The microstructure of ER309L weld metal.
The solidification of 309L as a primary ferrite exhib-
ited a skeletal ferrite morphology and the solidification
of FA type. The same results were gained by Lippold
and Koteki 1) for the solidification of this weld metal.
They showed that when the cooling rate of weldment
was moderate and/or when the Creq/ Nieq was low,
though still in the FA range, a skeletal ferrite morphol-
ogy was produced. The ferrite content of root pass of
309L filler metal was about 5.7% (by a ferritescope).
The interface between A335 low alloy steel base metal
and 309L weld metal is presented in Fig. 3.
Fig. 4. SEM fractograph of the fractured tensile specimen,

ER309L.
In Table 4, the results of Charpy impact test for weld

metals at -20 oC and 27 oC are given. The fracture en-
ergy amounts of weld metals revealed that the ductile
fracture happened to all of them.
Table 4. The average of Charpy V-notch impact energy

for the weld metal.
Impact energy Impact energy

(J) (J) Fracture
Weld metal type
type
27 oC -20 oC
Fig. 3. Interfaces between the 309L weld metal and the ER309L 91 74 Ductile
A335 base metal.
88
International Journal
International Journal of
of ISSI,
ISSI, Vol.10
Vol.11 (2013),
(2014), No.1
No.2
The scanning electron microscopy micrographs were metal. Also, a small martensitic zone was formed in
related to the fracture surface of ER309L (Fig. 5) the the melted boundary, thereby increasing the hardness
weld metals. The images which contained uniform of this part intensely 9). The results of EDS line scans
and small dimples showed that the specimens were are presented in Fig. 7.
cracked under the tension pressure in a ductile state,
which could be explained in terms of the microstruc-
ture of the weld metals and the volume fraction of the
austenite 12).
Fig. 7. SEM/EDS line scans image. Redistribution of Cr

(blue) and C (red) across the weld interface.
As shown, carbon concentration was decreased in

the HAZ of A335 region while there was an increase
in carbon concentration in the ER309L weld metal
Fig. 5. SEM fractograph of fractured Charpy impact near the fusion line. Also, the amount of chromium
specimen. between HAZ and weld metal was different 11). In this
figure, it can be seen that the concentration of chro-
The images of the fracture surface of 309L weld mium was decreased from the weld metal to HAZ.
metal displayed the characteristics of a ductile frac- This is because of the fact that filler metal ER309L
ture. The hardness profile of the specimens welded is contains higher chromium (23.7%), in comparison to
displayed in Fig. 6. 1.12% in A335 side. A study conducted by Omar and
Arivazhagan 10) showed that an increase in hardness
across the weld was related to carbon migration from
the low alloy steel and carbon steel side towards the
austenitic stainless steel.
4. Conclusions
.
The following conclusions can be drawn from the re-
sults:
The microstructure of the ER309L weld metal in-
.
cluded primary ferrite with some austenite at the end
of solidification that contained skeleton ferrite.
In the tensile test, all specimens were broken in the
HAZ of A335 low alloy base metal. The welded speci-
men showed a ductile fracture in impact test and the
.
minimum hardness values of the weldment belonged
Fig. 6. The hardness profile of dissimilar welding part of to ER309L austenitic stainless steel filler metals.
A335 low alloy steel with ER309L. There was a carbon migration from HAZ to the melt
zone in the interface between A335 low alloy steel and
309L filler metal. Also, a tiny martensitic zone was
It was revealed that the lowest hardness value was formed in the melt boundary with a high hardness
in the central part of the weld zone due to the aus- value.
tenitic structure. The increase in carbon content and
the presence of carbides (chromium carbides) near References
the low alloy steel base metal increased the hardness
which resulted from the changes in chemical compo- [1] J.C. Lippold, D. Koteki: Welding Metallurgy and
sitions between A335 steel and the diluted 309L filler Weldability of Stainles Steels, John Wiley and Sons,
9
99
International Journal of ISSI, Vol.11 (2014), No.2
New Jersey,(2005), 404. Sci Technol., 23 (2007), 817.

[2] B. Mvola, P. Kah, J. Martikainen: adv. Mater. Sci., [8]D.L. Olson: WeldingBrazing Soldering, ASM
38 (2014), 125. Handbook, Vol 6, ASM International, Metals Park.,
[3]N. Saeteaw, B. Poopat, I. Phungon, T. Chairuang- (1993), 235.
sri: Aijstpme., 3 (2010), 57. [9]H.Jang, C. Parkb, H. Kwona: Acta., 50 (2005),
[4]RL. Klueh, L. King: Weld J., 61 (1982), 302. 3503.
[5]L. Falat, M. Svoboda, A.Vyrostkova, I. Petryshy- [10] N. Arivazhagan, S. SurendraSingh: Materials
nets, M. Sopko: Mater Charact., 72 (2012), 15. and Design., 23 (2011), 3036.
[6] H. Naffakh, M. Shamanian, F. Ashrafizadeh: J [11] H. ShahHosseini, M. Shamanian, A. Kerman-
Mater Process Technol., 209 (2008), 3628. pur: Materials Characterization., 62 (2011), 425.
[7]M. NourI, A. Abdollah-Zadeh, F. Malek :Mater [12]H. Muesch: Nucl Eng Des., 2 (2003), 155.
10
Designation: A 335/A 335M – 06
Standard Specification for

Seamless Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Service1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation A 335/A 335M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope* A 999/A 999M Specification for General Requirements for

1.1 This specification2 covers nominal wall and minimum Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe
wall seamless ferritic alloy-steel pipe intended for high- E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe
temperature service. Pipe ordered to this specification shall be and Tubing
suitable for bending, flanging (vanstoning), and similar form- E 309 Practice for Eddy-Current Examination of Steel Tu-
ing operations, and for fusion welding. Selection will depend bular Products Using Magnetic Saturation
upon design, service conditions, mechanical properties, and E 381 Method of Macroetch Testing Steel Bars, Billets,
high-temperature characteristics. Blooms, and Forgings
1.2 Several grades of ferritic steels (see Note 1) are covered. E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)
Their compositions are given in Table 1. E 570 Practice for Flux Leakage Examination of Ferromag-
netic Steel Tubular Products
NOTE 1—Ferritic steels in this specification are defined as low- and 2.2 ASME Standard:
intermediate-alloy steels containing up to and including 10 % chromium.
B36.10M Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
1.3 Supplementary requirements (S1 to S7) of an optional 2.3 Other Documents:
nature are provided. These supplementary requirements call for SNT-TC-1A Recommended Practice for Nondestructive
additional tests to be made, and when desired, shall be so stated Personnel Qualification and Certification4
in the order together with the number of such tests required. SAE J 1086 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys
1.4 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units (UNS)5
are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each 3. Ordering Information
system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system must 3.1 Orders for material under this specification should
be used independently of the other. Combining values from the include the following, as required, to describe the desired
two systems may result in nonconformance with the specifi- material adequately:
cation. The inch-pound units shall apply unless the “M” 3.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
designation of this specification is specified in the order. 3.1.2 Name of material (seamless alloy steel pipe),
NOTE 2—The dimensionless designator NPS (nominal pipe size) has 3.1.3 Grade (Table 1),
been substituted in this standard for such traditional terms as “nominal 3.1.4 Manufacture (hot-finished or cold-drawn),
diameter,” “size,” and “nominal size.” 3.1.5 Size using one of the following:
3.1.5.1 NPS and schedule number,
2. Referenced Documents 3.1.5.2 Outside diameter and nominal wall thickness,
2.1 ASTM Standards: 3 3.1.5.3 Outside diameter and minimum wall thickness,
3.1.5.4 Inside diameter and nominal wall thickness, and
1
3.1.5.5 Inside diameter and minimum wall thickness.
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee A01 on Steel, 3.1.6 Length (specific or random),
Stainless Steel and Related Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
A01.10 on Stainless and Alloy Steel Tubular Products. 3.1.7 End finish (Ends Section of Specification A 999/
Current edition approved May 1, 2006. Published May 2006. Originally A 999M),
approved in 1951. Last previous edition approved in 2005 as A 335/A 335M-05a.
2
For ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code applications see related Specifi-
cation SA-335 in Section II of that Code.
3 4
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or Available from The American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT), P.O.
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM Box 28518, 1711 Arlingate Ln., Columbus, OH 43228-0518.
5
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on Available from Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE), 400 Commonwealth
the ASTM website. Dr., Warrendale, PA 15096-0001.
*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
A 335/A 335M – 06
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
UNS Composition, %
Designa-
Grade Phos- Molybde-
tionA Man- Sulfur,
Carbon phorus, Silicon Chromium num Others
ganese max
max
P1 K11522 0.10–0.20 0.30–0.80 0.025 0.025 0.10–0.50 ... 0.44–0.65 ...
P2 K11547 0.10–0.20 0.30–0.61 0.025 0.025 0.10–0.30 0.50–0.81 0.44–0.65 ...
P5 K41545 0.15 max 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50 max 4.00–6.00 0.45–0.65 ...
P5b K51545 0.15 max 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 1.00–2.00 4.00–6.00 0.45–0.65 ...
P5c K41245 0.12 max 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50 max 4.00–6.00 0.45–0.65 . . .B
P9 S50400 0.15 max 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 0.25–1.00 8.00–10.00 0.90–1.10 ...
P11 K11597 0.05–0.15 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50–1.00 1.00–1.50 0.44–0.65 ...
P12 K11562 0.05–0.15 0.30–0.61 0.025 0.025 0.50 max 0.80–1.25 0.44–0.65 ...
P15 K11578 0.05–0.15 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 1.15–1.65 ... 0.44–0.65 ...
P21 K31545 0.05–0.15 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50 max 2.65–3.35 0.80–1.06 ...
P22 K21590 0.05–0.15 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50 max 1.90–2.60 0.87–1.13 ...
P23 K41650 0.04–0.10 0.10–0.60 0.030 max 0.010 max 0.50 max 1.90–2.60 0.05–0.30 V 0.20–0.30
Cb 0.02–0.08
B 0.0005–0.006
N 0.030 max
Al 0.030 max
W 1.45–1.75
P36 K21001 0.10–0.17 0.80–1.20 0.030 max 0.025 max 0.25–0.50 0.30 max 0.25–0.50 Ni 1.00-1.30
Cu 0.50-0.80
Cb 0.015-0.045
V 0.02 max
N 0.02 max
Al 0.050 max
P91 K91560 0.08–0.12 0.30–0.60 0.020 0.010 0.20–0.50 8.00–9.50 0.85–1.05 V 0.18–0.25
N 0.030–0.070
Ni 0.40 max
Al 0.02 max
Cb 0.06–0.10
Ti 0.01 max
Zr 0.01 max
P92 K92460 0.07–0.13 0.30–0.60 0.020 0.010 0.50 max 8.50–9.50 0.30–0.60 V 0.15–0.25
N 0.03–0.07
Ni 0.40 max
Al 0.02 max
Cb 0.04–0.09
W 1.5–2.00
B 0.001–0.006
Ti 0.01 max
Zr 0.01 max
P122 K92930 0.07–0.14 0.70 max 0.020 0.010 0.50 max 10.00–11.50 0.25–0.60 V 0.15–0.30
W 1.50–2.50
Cu 0.30–1.70
Cb 0.04–0.10
B 0.0005–0.005
N 0.040–0.100
Ni 0.50 max
Al 0.020 max
Ti 0.01 max
Zr 0.01 max
P911 K91061 0.09–0.13 0.30–0.60 0.020 max 0.010 max 0.10–0.50 8.5–9.5 0.90–1.10 V 0.18–0.25
Ni 0.40 max
Cb 0.060–0.10
B 0.0003–0.006
N 0.04–0.09
Al 0.02 max
W 0.90–1.10
Ti 0.01 max
Zr 0.01 max
A
New designation established in accordance with Practice E 527 and SAE J1086, Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS).
B
Grade P 5c shall have a titanium content of not less than 4 times the carbon content and not more than 0.70 %; or a columbium content of 8 to 10 times the carbon
content.
3.1.8 Optional requirements (Section 8, 12 and 13 of this 3.1.11 Special requirements or any supplementary require-
specification. See the Sections on Hydrostatic Test Require- ments selected, or both.
ments and Permissible Variation in Weight for Seamless Pipe in
Specification A 999/A 999M), 4. General Requirements
3.1.9 Test report required (Certification Section of Specifi- 4.1 Material furnished to this specification shall conform to
cation A 999/A 999M), the applicable requirements of the current edition of Specifi-
3.1.10 Specification designation, and cation A 999/A 999M, unless otherwise provided herein.
2
A 335/A 335M – 06
5. Materials and Manufacture 7. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
5.1 Pipe may be either hot finished or cold drawn with the 7.1 The pipe manufacturer shall explore a sufficient number
finishing treatment as required in 5.3. of visual surface imperfections to provide reasonable assurance
5.2 Grade P2 and P12—The steel shall be made by coarse- that they have been properly evaluated with respect to depth.
grain melting practice. Specific limits, if any, on grain size or Exploration of all surface imperfections is not required but may
deoxidation practice shall be a matter of agreement between be necessary to ensure compliance with 7.2
the manufacturer and purchaser. 7.2 Surface imperfections that penetrate more than 121⁄2 %
5.3 Heat Treatment: of the nominal wall thickness or encroach on the minimum
5.3.1 All pipe shall be reheated for heat treatment and heat wall thickness shall be considered defects. Pipe with such
treated in accordance with the requirements of Table 2. defects shall be given one of the following dispositions:
NOTE 3—It is recommended that the temperature for tempering should 7.2.1 The defect may be removed by grinding provided that
be at least 100 °F [50 °C] above the intended service temperature; the remaining wall thickness is within specified limits.
consequently, the purchaser should advise the manufacturer if the service 7.2.2 Repaired in accordance with the repair welding pro-
temperature is to be over 1100 °F [600 °C].
NOTE 4—Certain of the ferritic steels covered by this specification will
visions of 7.6.
harden if cooled rapidly from above their critical temperature. Some will 7.2.3 The section of pipe containing the defect may be cut
air harden, that is, become hardened to an undesirable degree when cooled off within the limits of requirements on length.
in air from high temperatures. Therefore, operations involving heating 7.2.4 Rejected.
such steels above their critical temperatures, such as welding, flanging,
and hot bending, should be followed by suitable heat treatment. 7.3 To provide a workmanlike finish and basis for evaluat-
ing conformance with 7.2, the pipe manufacturer shall remove
6. Chemical Composition by grinding the following:
6.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to 7.3.1 Mechanical marks, abrasions (see Note 5) and pits,
chemical composition prescribed in Table 1. any of which imperfections are deeper than 1⁄16 in. [1.6 mm].
TABLE 2 Heat Treatment RequirementsA
Grade Heat Treat Type Normalizing Cooling Media Subcritical
Temperature, Annealing or
min or range Tempering
°F [°C] Temperature,
min or range
°F [°C]
P1 full or isothermal anneal . .. ... ...
normalize and temper . .. ... 1200 [650]
subcritical anneal . .. ... 1200-1300 [650-705]
P5b full or isothermal anneal . .. ... ...
P5c subcritical anneal . .. ... 1325-1375 [715-745]
P23 normalize and temper 1900-1975 [1040-1080] air or 1350-1470 [730-800]
accelerated
cooling
P36 normalize and temperB 1650 [900] ... 1100 [595]
P91 normalize and temper 1900-1975 [1040-1080] ... 1350-1470 [730-800]C
quench and temperD 1900-1975 [1040-1080] ... 1350-1470 [730-800]
P92 normalize and temper 1900-1975 [1040-1080] ... 1350-1470 [730-800]
P122 normalize and temper 1900-1975 [1040-1080] ... 1350-1470 [730-800]
E
P911 normalize and temper 1900-1975 [1040-1080] 1365-1435 [740-780]
A
Where ellipses (…) appear in this table there is no requirement.
B
Alternatively, Grade P36, Class 2 shall be cooled from the austenitizing temperature by accelerated cooling in air or by liquid quenching.
C
Except when Supplementary Requirement S7 is specified by the purchaser.
D
When mutually agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser, quenching and tempering shall be permitted for thicknesses greater than 3 in. [75 mm].
E
Accelerated cooling from the normalizing temperature shall be permitted for section thicknesses greater than 3 in. [75 mm].
3
A 335/A 335M – 06
NOTE 5—Marks and abrasions are defined as cable marks, dinges, guide 8.4 If the analysis of one of the tests specified in 8.1 does
marks, roll marks, ball scratches, scores, die marks, and the like. not conform to the requirements specified in 6.1, an analysis of
7.3.2 Visual imperfections, commonly referred to as scabs, each billet or pipe from the same heat or lot may be made, and
seams, laps, tears, or slivers, found by exploration in accor- all billets or pipe conforming to the requirements shall be
dance with 7.1 to be deeper than 5 % of the nominal wall accepted.
thickness.
9. Tensile and Hardness Requirements
7.4 At the purchaser’s discretion, pipe shall be subject to
rejection if surface imperfections acceptable under 7.2 are not 9.1 The tensile properties of the material shall conform to
scattered, but appear over a large area in excess of what is the requirements prescribed in Table 3.
considered a workmanlike finish. Disposition of such pipe shall 9.2 Table 4 lists elongation requirements.
be a matter of agreement between the manufacturer and the 9.3 Pipe of Grades P91, P92, P122, and P36 shall have a
purchaser. hardness not exceeding 250 HB/265 HV [25 HRC].
7.5 When imperfections or defects are removed by grinding, 9.4 Table 5 gives the computed minimum elongation values
a smooth curved surface shall be maintained, and the wall for each 1⁄32-in. [0.8-mm] decrease in wall thickness. Where the
thickness shall not be decreased below that permitted by this wall thickness lies between two values above, the minimum
specification. The outside diameter at the point of grinding may elongation value is determined by the following formula:
be reduced by the amount so removed. Direction of Test EquationB
Longitudinal, all grades except P23, P91, E = 48t + 15.00
7.5.1 Wall thickness measurements shall be made with a P92, P122, and P911 [E = 1.87t + 15.00]
mechanical caliper or with a properly calibrated nondestructive
testing device of appropriate accuracy. In case of dispute, the Transverse, all grades except P23, P91, E = 32t + 10.00
P92, P122, and P911 [E = 1.25t + 10.00]
measurement determined by use of the mechanical caliper shall
govern. Longitudinal, P23, P91, P92, P122, and E = 32t + 10.00
7.6 Weld repair shall be permitted only subject to the P911 [E = 1.25t + 10.00]
Longitudinal, P36 E = 32t + 5.0
approval of the purchaser and in accordance with Specification [E = 1.25t + 5.0]
A 999/A 999M. where:
7.6.1 After weld repair, Grades P23, P91, P92, and P122 E = elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, %, and
t = actual thickness of specimens, in. [mm].
shall be heat treated at 1350-1470 ºF [730-800 ºC].
7.6.2 After weld repair, Grade P911 shall be heat treated at 10. Permissible Variations in Diameter
1365-1435 ºF [740-780 ºC]. 10.1 For pipe ordered to NPS [DN] or outside diameter,
7.7 The finished pipe shall be reasonably straight. variations in outside diameter shall not exceed those specified
in Table 6.
8. Product Analysis 10.2 For pipe ordered to inside diameter, the inside diameter
8.1 At the request of the purchaser, an analysis of two pipes shall not vary more than 6 1 % from the specified inside
from each lot shall be made by the manufacturer. A lot (see diameter.
Note 6) of pipe shall consist of the following:
11. Permissible Variations in Wall Thickness
NPS Designator
Under 2 400 or fraction thereof 11.1 In addition to the implicit limitation of wall thickness
2 to 5 200 or fraction thereof
6 and over 100 or fraction thereof
for pipe imposed by the limitation on weight in Specification
A 999/A 999M, the wall thickness for pipe at any point shall be
NOTE 6—A lot shall consist of the number of lengths specified in 8.1 of within the tolerances specified in Table 7. The minimum wall
the same size and wall thickness from any one heat of steel.
thickness and outside diameter for inspection for compliance
8.2 The results of these analyses shall be reported to the with this requirement for pipe ordered by NPS [DN] and
purchaser or the purchaser’s representative, and shall conform schedule number is shown in ASME B36.10M.
to the requirements specified in Table 1.
8.3 For grade P 91 the carbon content may vary for the 12. Hydrostatic Test
product analysis by −0.01 % and +0.02 % from the specified 12.1 Each length of pipe shall be subjected to the hydro-
range as per Table 1. static test, except as provided for in 12.2 or 12.3.
TABLE 3 Tensile Requirements

Grade
P92, P911
P1, P2 P12 P23 P91 P122 P36 Class 2 All Others
P36 Class 1
Tensile strength, min:
ksi 55 60 74 85 90 90 95.5 60
MPa 380 415 510 585 620 620 660 415
Yield strength, min:
ksi 30 32 58 60 64 58 66.5 30
MPa 205 220 400 415 440 400 460 205
4
A 335/A 335M – 06
TABLE 4 Elongation Requirements 13.2.3 The eddy current examination referenced in this
Elongation Requirements specification has the capability to detect significant disconti-
All grades nuities, especially of the short abrupt type.
except P23, P36 13.2.4 The flux leakage examination referred to in this
P91, P92, P122, P23, P91, P92,
and P911 P122, and P 911 P36
specification is capable of detecting the presence and location
of significant longitudinally or transversely oriented disconti-
Longi- Trans- Longi- Trans- Longi-
tudi- verse tudi- verse tudi- nuities. It should be recognized that different techniques should
nal nal nal be employed to detect differently oriented imperfections.
Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, 13.2.5 The hydrostatic test of Section 12 has the capability
(or 4D), min, %: to find imperfections of a size that permit the test fluid to leak
Basic minimum elongation 30 20 20 ... 15
for wall 5⁄16 in. [8 mm] and through the pipe wall so that it may be either visually seen or
over in thickness, strip tests, detected by a loss of fluid pressure. This test may not detect
and for all small sizes tested very tight, through-wall imperfections, or imperfections that
in full section
When standard round 2-in. 22 14 20 13 ... extend into the wall without complete penetration.
or 50-mm gage length or 13.2.6 A purchaser interested in ascertaining the nature
proportionally smaller size
specimen with the gage
(type, size, location, and orientation) of discontinuities that can
length equal to 4D (4 times be detected in the specific application of these examinations
the diameter) is used should discuss this with the manufacturer of the tubular
For strip tests a deduction 1.50A 1.00A 1.00A ... 1.00A
for each 1⁄32-in. [0.8 mm]
products.
decrease in wall thickness 13.3 Time of Examination:
below in. [8 mm] from the Nondestructive examination for specification acceptance
basic minimum elongation of
the following percentage shall be performed after all mechanical processing, heat
points shall be made treatments and straightening operations. This requirement does
A
Table 5 gives the calculated minimum values. not preclude additional testing at earlier stages in the process-
ing.
13.4 Surface Conditions:
12.2 Unless otherwise specified in the purchase order, each 13.4.1 All surfaces shall be clean and free of scale, dirt,
length of pipe shall, at the option of the manufacturer, be grease, paint, or other foreign material that could interfere with
subjected to the nondestructive electric test as shown in Section interpretation of test results. The methods used for cleaning
13 in lieu of the hydrostatic test. and preparing the surfaces for examination shall not be
12.3 When specified by the purchaser, pipe shall be fur- detrimental to the base metal or the surface finish.
nished without hydrostatic test and without nondestructive 13.4.2 Excessive surface roughness or deep scratches can
examination. produce signals that interfere with the test (see 13.10.2.3).
12.4 When specified by the purchaser, pipe shall be fur- 13.5 Extent of Examination:
nished with both the hydrostatic test and a nondestructive 13.5.1 The relative motion of the pipe and the transducer(s),
examination having been performed. coil(s), or sensor(s) shall be such that the entire pipe surface is
scanned, except for end effects as noted in 13.5.2.
13. Nondestructive Examination 13.5.2 The existence of end effects is recognized, and the
13.1 When selected by the manufacturer or when specified extent of such effects shall be determined by the manufacturer,
in the order, as an alternative to the hydrostatic test (12.2), or and, if requested, shall be reported to the purchaser. Other
when specified in the purchase order in addition to the nondestructive tests may be applied to the end areas, subject to
hydrostatic test (12.4), each pipe shall be examined by a agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
nondestructive examination method in accordance with Prac- 13.6 Operator Qualifications—The test unit operator shall
tice E 213, Practice E 309 or Practice E 570. The range of pipe be certified in accordance with SNT-TC-1A, or an equivalent,
sizes that may be examined by each method shall be subject to recognized and documented standard.
the limitations in the scope of the respective practices. 13.7 Test Conditions:
13.2 The following information is for the benefit of the user 13.7.1 For examination by the ultrasonic method, the mini-
of this specification: mum nominal transducer frequency shall be 2.25 MHz.
13.2.1 The reference standards defined in 13.8 are conve- 13.7.2 For eddy current testing, the excitation coil fre-
nient standards for standardization of nondestructive examina- quency shall be 10 kHz, or less.
tion equipment. The dimensions of these standards should not 13.8 Reference Standards:
be construed as the minimum size imperfection detectable by 13.8.1 Reference standards of convenient length shall be
such equipment. prepared from a length of pipe of the same grade, size (NPS or
13.2.2 Ultrasonic examination can be performed to detect outside diameter and schedule or wall thickness), surface finish
both longitudinally and transversely oriented discontinuities. It and heat treatment condition as the pipe to be examined.
should be recognized that different techniques should be 13.8.2 For ultrasonic testing, the reference notches shall be
employed to detect differently oriented imperfections. The any one of the three common notch shapes shown in Practice
examination may not detect short, deep imperfections. E 213, at the option of the manufacturer. The depth of the notch
5
A 335/A 335M – 06
TABLE 5 Calculated Minimum Elongation Values
Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, %
Wall Thickness All grades except P23, P36, P23, P91, P92,
P36
P91, P92, P122, and P911 P122, and P911
Longi- Longi- Longi-
in. mm Transverse
tudinal tudinal tudinal
⁄
5 16 (0.312) 8 30 20 20 15
⁄
9 32 (0.281) 7.2 28 19 19 14
⁄
14 (0.250) 6.4 27 18 18 13
7⁄32 (0.219) 5.6 26 ... 17 12
3⁄16 (0.188) 4.8 24 ... 16 11
5⁄32 (0.156) 4 22 ... 15 10
1⁄ 8 (0.125) 3.2 21 ... 14 9
3⁄32 (0.094) 2.4 20 ... 13 8
1⁄16 (0.062) 1.6 18 ... 12 7
TABLE 6 Permissible Variations in Outside Diameter NPS Designator Hole Diameter

1 ⁄2 0.039 in. (1 mm)
Over Under
above 1⁄2 to 11⁄4 0.055 in. (1.4 mm)
NPS [DN] Designator in. mm in. mm above 11⁄4 to 2 0.071 in. (1.8 mm)
⁄ to 11⁄2 [6 to 40], incl.
18 1⁄64 (0.015) 0.40 ⁄ (0.015)
1 64 0.40 above 2 to 5 0.087 in. (2.2 mm)
Over 11⁄2 to 4 [40 to 100], 1⁄32 (0.031) 0.79 1⁄32 (0.031) 0.79 above 5 0.106 in. (2.7 mm)
incl.
Over 4 to 8 [100 to 200], 1⁄16 (0.062) 1.59 ⁄
1 32 (0.031) 0.79 13.8.3.2 Transverse Tangential Notch—Using a round tool
incl. or file with a 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) diameter, a notch shall be filed
Over 8 to 12 [200 to 300], 3⁄32 (0.093) 2.38 ⁄
1 32 (0.031) 0.79
incl. or milled tangential to the surface and transverse to the
Over 12 [300] 6 1 % of the longitudinal axis of the pipe. Said notch shall have a depth not
specified
outside
exceeding 121⁄2 % of the specified nominal wall thickness of
diameter the pipe or 0.004 in. (0.1 mm), whichever is greater.
13.8.3.3 Longitudinal Notch—A notch 0.031 in. or less in
width shall be machined in a radial plane parallel to the tube
TABLE 7 Permitted Variations in Wall Thickness
axis on the outside surface of the pipe, to have a depth not
NPS [DN] Designator Tolerance, % from Specified
exceeding 121⁄2 % of the specified nominal wall thickness of
Over Under
the pipe or 0.004 in. (0.1 mm), whichever is greater. The length
A
⁄ to 2 ⁄ [6 to 65] incl., all t/D ratios
18 12 20.0 12.5 of the notch shall be compatible with the testing method.
Above 21⁄2 [65], t/D # 5 %A 22.5 12.5
Above 21⁄2 [65], t/D > 5 %A 15.0 12.5 13.8.4 For flux leakage testing, the longitudinal reference
A
t = Specified Wall Thickness; D = Specified Outside Diameter. notches shall be straight-sided notches machined in a radial
plane parallel to the pipe axis. For wall thickness less than 1⁄2
in. (12.7 mm), outside and inside notches shall be used; for
shall not exceed 121⁄2 % of the specified nominal wall wall thicknesses equal to or greater than 1⁄2 in., only an outside
thickness of the pipe or 0.004 in. (0.1 mm), whichever is notch shall be used. Notch depth shall not exceed 121⁄2 % of
greater. The length of the notch shall be at least twice the the specified nominal wall thickness or 0.004 in. (0.1 mm),
diameter of the transducer(s). The width of the notch shall not whichever is greater. Notch length shall not exceed 1 in. (25.4
exceed the depth. mm), and the width shall not exceed the depth. Outside and
13.8.3 For eddy current testing, the reference standard shall inside notches shall have sufficient separation to allow distinct
contain, at the option of the manufacturer, any one of the identification of the signal from each notch.
following discontinuities: 13.8.5 More or smaller reference discontinuities, or both,
13.8.3.1 Drilled Hole—The reference standard shall contain may be used by agreement between the purchaser and the
three or more holes, equally spaced circumferentially around manufacturer.
the pipe and longitudinally separated by a sufficient distance to 13.9 Standardization Procedure:
allow distinct identification of the signal from each hole. The 13.9.1 The test apparatus shall be standardized at the
holes shall be drilled radially and completely through the pipe beginning and end of each series of pipes of the same size
wall, with care being taken to avoid distortion of the pipe while (NPS or diameter and schedule or wall thickness), grade and
drilling. The hole diameter shall vary with NPS as follows: heat treatment condition, and at intervals not exceeding 4 h
6
A 335/A 335M – 06
during the examination of such pipe. More frequent standard- continuous process, tests shall be made on a sufficient number
izations may be performed at the manufacturer’s option or may of pipe to constitute 5 % of the lot (see Note 7), but in no case
be required upon agreement between the purchaser and the less than 2 pipe.
manufacturer. NOTE 7—The term “lot” applies to all pipe of the same nominal size
13.9.2 The test apparatus shall also be standardized after and wall thickness (or schedule) which is produced from the same heat of
any change in test system settings, change of operator, equip- steel and subjected to the same finishing treatment in a continuous
ment repair, or interruption due to power loss, shutdown or furnace; when final heat treatment is in a batch-type furnace, the lot shall
operator breaks. include only that pipe which is heat treated in the same furnace charge.
13.9.3 The reference standard shall be passed through the 14.2 Hardness Test:
test apparatus at same speed and test system settings as the pipe 14.2.1 For pipe of Grades P91, P92, P122, P911, and P36,
to be tested. Brinell, Vickers, or Rockwell hardness tests shall be made on
13.9.4 The signal-to-noise ratio for the reference standard a specimen from each lot (see Note 7).
shall be 2.5 to 1 or greater and the reference signal amplitude 14.3 Bend Test:
for each discontinuity shall be at least 50 % of full scale of the 14.3.1 For pipe whose diameter exceeds NPS 25 and whose
display. diameter to wall thickness ratio is 7.0 or less shall be subjected
13.9.5 If upon any standardization, the reference signal to the bend test instead of the flattening test. Other pipe whose
amplitude has decreased by 25 % (2 db), the test apparatus diameter equals or exceeds NPS 10 may be given the bend test
shall be considered out of standardization. The test system in place of the flattening test subject to the approval of the
settings may be changed, or the transducer(s), coil(s) or purchaser.
sensor(s) adjusted, and the unit restandardized, but all pipe 14.3.2 The bend test specimens shall be bent at room
tested since the last acceptable standardization must be re- temperature through 180° without cracking on the outside of
tested. the bent portion. The inside diameter of the bend shall be 1 in.
13.10 Evaluation of Imperfections: [25 mm].
13.10.1 Pipes producing a signal equal to or greater than the 14.3.3 Test specimens for the bend test specified in 14.3
signal produced by the reference standard shall be positively shall be cut from one end of the pipe and, unless otherwise
identified and they shall be separated from the acceptable specified, shall be taken in a transverse direction. One test
pipes. The area producing the signal may be reexamined. specimen shall be taken as close to the outer surface as possible
13.10.2 Such pipes shall be subject to one of the following and another from as close to the inner surface as possible. The
three dispositions: specimens shall be either 1⁄2 by 1⁄2 in. [12.5 by 12.5 mm] in
13.10.2.1 The pipes may be rejected without further exami- section or 1 by 1⁄2 in. [25 by 12.5 mm] in section with the
nation, at the discretion of the manufacturer. corners rounded to a radius not over 1⁄16 in. [1.6 mm] and need
13.10.2.2 The pipes shall be rejected, but may be repaired, not exceed 6 in. [150 mm] in length. The side of the samples
if the test signal was produced by imperfections which cannot placed in tension during the bend shall be the side closest to the
be identified, or was produced by cracks or crack-like imper- inner and outer surface of the pipe, respectively.
fections. These pipes may be repaired by grinding (in accor-
dance with 7.2.1), welding (in accordance with 7.6) or section- 15. Certification
ing (in accordance with 7.2.3). To be accepted, a repaired pipe 15.1 In addition to the information required by Specification
must pass the same nondestructive examination by which it A 999/A 999M, the certification shall state whether or not the
was rejected, and it must meet the remaining wall thickness pipe was hydrostatically tested. If the pipe was nondestruc-
requirements of this specification. tively examined, the certification shall so state and shall show
13.10.2.3 Such pipes may be evaluated in accordance with which practice was followed and what reference discontinuities
the provisions of Section 7, if the test signals were produced by were used. In addition, the test method information as given in
visual imperfections such as those listed below: Table 8 shall be appended to the specification number and
(1) Scratches, grade shown on the certification.
(2) Surface roughness,
(3) Dings, 16. Product Marking
(4) Straightener marks, 16.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification
(5) Cutting chips, A 999/A 999M, the marking shall include the length, an
(6) Steel die stamps, additional symbol “S”, if the pipe conforms to any of the
(7) Stop marks, or Supplementary Requirements S1 to S6, the schedule number, if
(8) Pipe reducer ripple. the pipe is ordered to a schedule number, and the heat number
14. Mechanical Tests Required TABLE 8 Test Method Information for Certification and Marking
14.1 Transverse or Longitudinal Tension Test and Flatten- Hydrostatic Nondestructive Marking
ing Test, Hardness Test, or Bend Test—For material heat YES NO Test Pressure
treated in a batch-type furnace, tests shall be made on 5 % of NO YES NDE
NO NO NH
the pipe from each treated lot (see Note 7). For small lots, at YES YES Test Pressure/NDE
least 1 pipe shall be tested. For material heat treated by the
7
A 335/A 335M – 06
or manufacturer’s number by which the heat can be identified. Specification Number ASTM A 335/A 335M
Furthermore, the marking designated in Table 8 to indicate the Pipe P
Grade P-11
test method(s) shall be included. Marking may be by stenciling, NPS 12
stamping, or rolling. Pipe that has been weld repaired in Wall 0.375
accordance with 7.6 shall be marked “WR.”
17.1.4.2
Specification Number ASTM A 335/A 335 M
17. Government Procurement Tube T
Grade P-11
17.1 Scale Free Pipe: Outside Diameter 0.250
17.1.1 When specified in the contract or order, the following Wall 0.035
requirements shall be considered in the inquiry contract or 17.1.5 Ordering Information—Orders for material under
order, for agencies of the U.S. Government where scale free this specification shall include the following in addition to the
pipe is required. These requirements shall take precedence if requirements of Section 3:
there is a conflict between these requirements and the product
17.1.5.1 Pipe or tube,
specification.
17.1.5.2 Part number,
17.1.2 The requirements of Specification A 999/A 999M for
pipe shall be applicable when pipe is ordered to this specifi- 17.1.5.3 Ultrasonic inspection, if required,
cation. 17.1.5.4 If shear wave test is to be conducted in two
17.1.3 Pipe shall be one of the following grades as specified opposite circumferential directions, and
herein: 17.1.5.5 Level of preservation and packing required.
Grade UNS Designation
P11 K11597 18. Keywords
P22 K21590
P5 K41545 18.1 alloy steel pipe; high temperature service; seamless
steel pipe; steel pipe; temperature service applications
17.1.4 Part Number:
17.1.4.1 Pipe shall be ordered to nominal pipe size and
schedule specified in ASME B36.10M
Example: A 335/A 335M Pipe P-11 NPS 12 Sch 40
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
One or more of the following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified in the
purchase order. The purchaser may specify a different frequency of test or analysis than is provided
in the supplementary requirement. Subject to agreement between the purchaser and manufacturer,
retest and retreatment provisions of these supplementary requirements may also be modified.
S1. Product Analysis specified. If a specimen from any length fails because of lack
S1.1 Product analysis shall be made on each length of pipe. of ductility prior to satisfactory completion of the first step of
Individual lengths failing to conform to the chemical compo- the flattening test requirement, that pipe shall be rejected
sition requirements shall be rejected. subject to retreatment in accordance with Specification A 999/
A 999M and satisfactory retest. If a specimen from any length
S2. Transverse Tension Tests of pipe fails because of a lack of soundness that length shall be
S2.1 A transverse tension test shall be made on a specimen rejected, unless subsequent retesting indicates that the remain-
from one end or both ends of each pipe NPS 8 and over. If this ing length is sound. The bend test of 13.2 shall be substituted
supplementary requirement is specified, the number of tests per for the flattening test for pipe whose diameter exceeds NPS 25
pipe shall also be specified. If a specimen from any length fails and whose diameter to wall thickness ratio is 7.0 or less.
to meet the required tensile properties (tensile, yield, and
elongation), that length shall be rejected subject to retreatment S4. Metal Structure and Etching Tests
in accordance with Specification A 999/A 999M and satisfac- S4.1 The steel shall be homogeneous as shown by etching
tory retest. tests conducted in accordance with the appropriate portions of
Method E 381. Etching tests shall be made on a cross section
S3. Flattening Test from one end or both ends of each pipe and shall show sound
S3.1 The flattening test of Specification A 999/A 999M and reasonably uniform material free from injurious lamina-
shall be made on a specimen from one end or both ends of each tions, cracks, and similar objectionable defects. If this supple-
pipe. Crop ends may be used. If this supplementary require- mentary requirement is specified, the number of tests per pipe
ment is specified, the number of tests per pipe shall also be required shall also be specified. If a specimen from any length
8
A 335/A 335M – 06
shows objectionable defects, the length shall be rejected, specify that photomicrographs shall be furnished from each
subject to removal of the defective end and subsequent retests end of one or more pipes from each lot of pipe NPS 3 and
indicating the remainder of the length to be sound and larger in the as-finished condition. The purchaser shall state in
reasonably uniform material. the order the number of pipes to be tested from each lot. When
NOTE S4.1—Pending development of etching methods applicable to the photomicrographs are required on each length, the photomi-
product covered by this specification, it is recommended that the Recom- crographs from each lot of pipe in the as-finished condition
mended Practice for a Standard Macro Etch Test for Routine Inspection of which may be required under Supplementary Requirement S5
Iron and Steel, described in the Metals Handbook, Am. Soc. for Metals, may be omitted. All photo-micrographs required shall be
1948 edition, p. 389, be followed.
properly identified as to heat number, size, and wall thickness
S5. Photomicrographs of pipe from which the section was taken. Photomicrographs
S5.1 When requested by the purchaser and so stated in the shall be further identified to permit association of each photo-
order, the manufacturer shall furnish one photomicrograph at micrograph with the individual length of pipe it represents.
100 diameters from a specimen of pipe in the as-finished
condition for each individual size and wall thickness from each S7. Alternative Heat Treatment—Grade P91
heat, for pipe NPS 3 and over. Such photomicrographs shall be S7.1 Grade P91 shall be normalized in accordance with
suitably identified as to pipe size, wall thickness, and heat. No Table 2 and tempered at a temperature, to be specified by the
photomicrographs for the individual pieces purchased shall be purchaser, less than 1350 °F [730 °C]. It shall be purchaser’s
required except as specified in Supplementary Requirement S6. responsibility to subsequently temper at 1350-1470 °F [730-
Such photomicrographs are for information only, to show the 800 °C] minimum. All mechanical tests shall be made on
actual metal structure of the pipe as finished. material heat treated in accordance with Table 2. The certifi-
S6. Photomicrographs for Individual Pieces cation shall reference this supplementary requirement indicat-
ing the tempering temperature applied. The notation “S7” shall
S6.1 In addition to the photomicrographs required in accor-
dance with Supplementary Requirement S5, the purchaser may be included with the required marking of the pipe.
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
Committee A01 has identified the location of selected changes to this specification since the last issue,
A 335/A 335M-05a, that may impact the use of this specification. (Approved May 1, 2006)
(1) Reduced Cr maximum for Grade 122 in Table 1.

(2) Reduce Al maximum and added maximums for Ti and Zr
for Grades P91, P92, P122, and P911 in Table 1.
A 335/A 335M-05, that may impact the use of this specification. (Approved May 1, 2005)
(1) Revised Table 1, Table 3, Table 4, and Table 5 and modified use quenching and tempering for P911 over 3 in. [75mm] in
9.3 and 13.2.1 to provide for new grade P36, Classes 1 and 2. thickness.
(2) Revised 5.3, Supplementary Requirement S7, and added (3) Added 7.6.1 and 7.6.2 to require post-weld heat treatment
Table 2, to tabularize the heat treatment requirements and to (PWHT) after weld repair, and to specify temperature ranges
provide ranges of normalizing and tempering temperatures for for PWHT, for Grades P23, P91, P92, P911, and P122.
Grades P23, P91, P92, P911, and P122. Added permission to
A 335/A 335M-03, that may impact the use of this specification. (Approved March 1, 2005)
(1) Added ASME B36.10M to Referenced Documents and (3) Added DN SI-unit designator to 10.1 and Table 6.
corrected the reference from ANSI B36.10 to ASME B36.10M (4) Added new Section 11 and Table 7 to address maximum
in 17.1.4.1. wall thickness of pipe and renumbered subsequent paragraphs
(2) Revised Chromium content of Grade P911 in Table 1. and tables accordingly.
9
A 335/A 335M – 06
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.
This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).
10
GUIDELINES FOR
WELDING, NDE
AND
HEAT TREATMENT
THIS BOOKLET IS GIVEN AS A GENERAL

GUIDELINE TO THE TENDERERS ABOUT WELDING,
NDE & HT FOR THE PIPING SYSTEMS, HOWEVER
INSTRUCTIONS GIVEN IN THE DRAWINGS &
WELDING SCHEDULE ISSUED DURING EXECUTION
OF THE WORK SHALL BE FINAL AND BINDING OF
THE CONTRACTOR.
BHEL PSSR SCT :

BOOK NO :
BHARAT HEAVY ELECTRICALS LIMITED

(A Government of India Undertaking)
Power Sector – Southern Region
690, Anna Salai, Nandanam, Chennai – 600 035.
BASE MATERIALS
1.0 Scope:
1.1 This chapter contains tabulations of chemical compositions &

mechanical properties of various materials generally used in BHEL
sites.
2.0 Contents:
Table 1 - Pipes (ASME)
Table 2 - Tubes (ASME)
Table 3 - Forgings (ASME)
Table 4 - Castings (ASME)
Table 5 - Plates / Sheets (ASME)
Table 6 - Pipes (Other specifications)
Table 7 - Tubes (Other specifications)
Table 8 - Forgings (Other specifications)
Table 9 - Barstock
3.0 The data are for general information purposes. The corresponding P
Numbers are also indicated.
4.0 For materials not covered in this chapter, the supplier shall be
contacted.
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
Table - 1 Pipes
P.NO / Chemical Composition (%) Mech. Properties (Min.)

Sl. Material Specification
Group
No (ASME) T.S. Y.S. %E
No. C Mn P S Si Ni Cr Mo
kg/mm2 kg/mm2 Min
1 P 1/1 SA 106 Gr.B 0.30 0.29- 0.048 0.058 0.10 - - - 42 25 30
Max. 1.06 Max. Max. Max
(Remarks: Carbon
restricted to 0.25% -
Max.)
2 P 1/1 SA 672 Gr.B, Cl.22 0.24 0.9 0.035 0.04 0.15- - - N 42.2- 22.5 25
Max Max. Max. Max. Max. 0.30 0.009 50.6
Max.
3 P 1/ 2 SA 106 Gr.C 0.35 0.29- 0.048 0.058 0.10 - - - 49 28 30
4 P 4/1 SA 335 P 11 0.15 0.3- 0.03 0.03 0.5 - 1.0- 0.44- 42 21 30
Max. 0.6 Max. Max. Max. 1.5 0.65
5 P 4/1 SA 335 P 12 0.15 0.3- 0.045 0.045 0.5 - 0.8- 0.44- 42 21 30
Max. 0.60 Max. Max. Max. - 1.25 0.65
6 P 5/1 SA 335 P 22 0.15 0.3- 0.03 0.03 0.5 - 1.9- 0.87- 42 21 30
Max. 0.61 Max. Max. Max. 2.6 1.13
7 P 8/1 SA 376 TP 321H 0.04- 2.0 0.04 0.03 0.75 9.0- 17.0- - 53 21 35
(Titanium Stabilised) 0.10 Max Max. Max. Max. 13.0 20.0
8 P 8/1 SA 376 TP 304H 0.04- 2.0 0.04 0.03 0.75 8.0- 18.0- - 53 21 35
0.10 Max Max. Max. Max. 11.0 20.0
9 P 8/1 SA 376 TP 316H 0.04- 2.0 0.04 0.03 0.75 11.0- 16.0- - 53 21 35
0.10 Max Max. Max. Max. 14.0 18.0
10 P 8/1 SA 376 TP 347H 0.04- 2.0 0.04 0.03 0.75 9.0- 17.0- - 53 21 35
(Cb+Ta Stabilised) 0.10 Max Max. Max. Max. 13.0 20.0
Table – 2 Tubes
P.NO / Material Chemical Composition (%) Mech. Properties (Min.)

Sl.
Group Specification
No T.S. Y.S. %E
No. (ASME) C Mn P S Si Ni Cr Mo
kg/mm2 kg/mm2 Min
1 P 1/1 SA 192 0.06- 0.27- 0.048 0.053 0.25 - - - 33 18 35
0.18 0.63 Max. Max. Max.
2 P 1/1 SA 210 Gr A1 0.27 0.93 0.048 0.058 0.10 - - - 42 26 30

0.18 Max Max. Max. Max.
3 P 1/1 SA 179 0.062- 0.27- 0.048 0.058 - - - - - - -

Max. 0.63 Max. Max.
4 P 1/ 2 SA 210 Gr. C 0.35 0.29- 0.048 0.058 0.10 - - - 49 28 30

5 P 1/ 2 SA 556 Gr C2 0.3 0.29 0.048 0.048 0.10 - - - 49 28 25

Max. Max. Max. Max. Max
6 P 3/1 SA 209 T1 0.10 0.3- 0.045 0.045 0.10- - - 0.44- 39 21 30

0.20 0.8 Max. Max. 0.50 0.65
7 P 3/1 SA 209 T1a 0.05 0.3- 0.045 0.045 0.10- - - 0.44- 42 22.4 30
0.25 0.8 Max. Max. 0.50 0.65
8 P 3/1 SA 209 T1b 0.14 0.3- 0.045 0.045 0.10- - - 0.44- 37 20 30

Max. 0.8 Max. Max. 0.50 0.65
9 P 4/1 SA 213 T11 0.15 0.30- 0.03 0.03 0.5- - 1.0- 0.44- 42 21 30
Max. 0.60 Max. Max. 1.0 1.5 0.65
10 P 4/1 SA 213 T12 0.15 0.30- 0.045 0.045 0.5 - 0.8- 0.44- 42 21 30
Max. 0.61 Max. Max. Max. 1.25 0.65
Table – 2 Tubes (Contd..)

Sl.
Group Specification
No T.S. Y.S. %E
kg/mm2 kg/mm2 Min
11 P 5/1 SA 213 T22 0.15 0.30- 0.03 0.03 0.50 - 1.9- 0.87- 42 21 30
Max. 0.60 Max. Max. Max. 2.60 1.13
12 P 5/1 SA 213 T5 0.15 0.30- 0.030 0.03 0.50 - 4.0- 0.45- 42 21 30

Max. 0.60 Max. Max. Max. 6.0 0.65
13 P 5/2 SA 213 T9 0.15 0.30- 0.03 0.03 0.25- - 8.0- 0.9- 42 21 30

Max. 0.60 Max. Max. 1.00 10.0 1.10
14 P 8/1 SA 213 TP 321H 0.04- 2.0 0.04 0.03 0.75 9.0- 17.0- - 53 21 35
(Ti Stabilised) 0.10 Max. Max. Max. Max. 13.0 20.0
15 P 8/1 SA 213 TP 0.04- 2.0 0.04 0.03 0.75 8.0- 18.0- - 53 21 35

304 H 0.10 Max. Max. Max. Max. 11.0 20.0
16 P 8/1 SA 213 TP 304 0.08 2.0 0.04 0.03 0.75 8.0- 18.0- - 53 21 35
Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. 11.0 20.0
17 P 8/1 SA 249 TP 304 0.08 2.0 0.04 0.03 0.75 8.0- 18.0- - 53 21 35
18 P 8/1 SA 688 TP 304 0.08 2.0 0.04 0.03 0.75 8.0- 18.0- - 53 21 35
19 P 8/1 SA 213 TP 316 H 0.04- 2.0 0.04 0.03 0.75 11.0- 16.0- 2.0- 53 21 35
0.10 Max. Max. Max. Max. 14.0 18.0 3.0
20 P 8/1 SA 213 TP 347 H 0.04- 2.0 0.04 0.03 0.75 9.0- 17.0- - 53 21 35
(Cb+Ta Stabilised) 0.10 Max. Max. Max. Max. 13.0 20.0
Table – 3 Forgings

Sl.
Group Specification
No T.S. Y.S. %E
kg/mm2 kg/mm2 Min
1 P 1/ 2 SA 105 0.35 0.6- 0.04 0.05 0.35 - - - 49 25.2 30
Max 1.05 Max. Max. Max.
2 P 4/1 SA 182 F12 0.10- 0.3- 0.04 0.04 0.1- - 0.8- 0.44- 49 28 20
0.20 0.8 Max. Max. 0.6 1.25 0.65
3 P 5/1 SA 182 F22 0.15 0.3- 0.04 0.04 0.5 - 2.0- 0.87- 52.5 31.5 20
Max. 0.6 Max. Max. Max. 2.5 1.13
4 P 8/1 SA 182 F321 H 0.04- 2.0 0.04 0.03 1.00 9.0- 17.0- - 52.5 21 30
(Ti Stabilised) 0.10 Max. Max. Max. Max. 12.0 Min
5 P 8/1 SA 182 F304 H 0.04- 2.0 0.04 0.03 1.00 8.0- 18.0- - 52.5 21 30
0.10 Max. Max. Max. Max 11.0 20.0
6 P 8/1 SA 182 F316 H 0.04- 2.0 0.04 0.03 1.00 10.0- 16.0- 2.0- 52.5 21 30
0.10 Max. Max. Max. Max 14.0 18.0 3.0
7 P 8/1 SA 182 F347 H 0.04- 2.0 0.04 0.03 1.00 9.0- 17.0- - 52.5 21 30
(Cb+Ta Stabilised) 0.10 Max. Max. Max. Max 13.0 20.0
Table – 4 Castings

Sl.
Group Specification
No T.S. Y.S. %E
kg/mm2 kg/mm2 Min
1 P 1/2 SA 216 WCB 0.3 1.0 0.04 0.045 1.60 0.5 0.5 0.20 49 25.2 22
Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max.
2 P 1/2 SA 216 WCC 0.25 1.20 0.04 0.045 0.60 0.5 0.5 0.20 49 28 22
Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max.
3 P 3/1 SA 217 WC1 0.25 0.5- 0.04 0.045 0.6 - - 0.45- 45.5 24.5 24
Max. 0.8 Max. Max. Max. 0.65
4 P 4/1 SA 217 WC6 0.2 0.5- 0.04 0.045 0.6 - 1.0- 0.45- 49 28 20
Max. 0.8 Max. Max. Max. 1.5 0.65
5 P 5/2 SA 217 C 5 0.2 0.4- 0.04 0.045 0.75 - 4.0- 0.45- 63 42 18

Max. 0.7 Max. Max. Max. 6.5 0.65
6 P 5/1 SA 217 WC 9 0.18 0.4- 0.04 0.045 0.6 - 2.0- 0.9- 49 28 20

Max. 0.7 Max. Max. Max. 2.75 1.20
7 P 8/1 SA 351 CF 8 0.08 1.5 0.04 0.04 2.0 8.0- 18.0- 0.5 49 21 35
Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. 11.0 21.0 Max.
8 P 8/1 SA 351 CF 8M 0.08 1.5 0.04 0.04 1.5 9.0- 18.0- 2.0- 49 21 30
Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. 12.0 21.0 3.0
9 P 8/1 SA 351 CF 8C 0.08 1.5 0.04 0.04 2.0 9.0- 18.0- 0.5 49 21 30
10 P 8/2 SA 351 CH 20 0.20 1.5 0.04 0.04 2.0 12.0- 22.0- 0.5 49 21 30
Table – 5 Plates / Sheets

Sl.
Group Specification
No T.S. Y.S. %E
kg/mm2 kg/mm2 Min
1 P 1/1 SA 516 Gr 60 0.21- 1.85- 0.035 0.04 0.15- - - N 56 26 25
0.25 1.20 Max. Max. 0.40 0.009
2 P 1/ 2 SA 516 Gr 70 0.35 0.85- 0.035 0.04 0.15- - - N 49- 27 21

Max. 1.20 Max. Max. 0.40 0.009 63
3 P 1/3 SA 299 0.30 0.84 0.035 0.04 0.13- - - - 52.5- 29.4 19

Max. Max. Max. Max. 0.45 66.5
4 P 1/ 2 SA 515 Gr 70 0.35 1.3 0.035 0.04 0.13- - - - 49.2- 26.6 21

Max. Max. Max. Max. 0.45 63
5 P 4/1 SA 387 Gr 12 0.17 0.35- 0.035 0.04 0.13- - 0.74- 0.40- 38.5- 23.1 22
Max. 0.73 Max. Max. 0.45 1.21 0.65 56.0
6 P 5/1 SA 387 Gr 22 0.15 0.25- 0.035 0.035 0.5 - 1.88- 0.85- 42- 21 18
Max. 0.66 Max. Max. Max. 2.62 1.1 59.5
7 P 8/1 SA 240 TYPE 321 0.08 2.0 0.045 0.03 1.0 9.0- 17.0- - 52.5 21 40
(Ti Stabilised) Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. 12.0 19.0
8 P 8/1 SA240 – TYPE 304 0.08 2.0 0.045 0.03 1.0 8.0- 18.0- - 52.5 21 40
9 P 8/1 SA240 – TYPE 316 0.08 2.0 0.045 0.03 1.0 10.0- 16.0- 2.0- 52.5 21 40
Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. 14.0 18.0 3.0
10 P 8/1 SA240 – TYPE 347 0.08 2.0 0.045 0.03 1.0 9.0- 17.0- - 52.5 21 40
Ca+Ta Stabilised Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. 13.0 19.0
Table – 6 Pipes
(Other Specifications)

Sl. Material
Group T.S. Y.S. %E
No Specification C Mn P S Si Ni Cr Mo V
No. kg/mm2 kg/mm2 Min
1 P 1/1 DIN St 35.8 0.17 0.4- 0.04 0.04 0.10- - - - - 36.7- 24 25
Max. 0.8 Max. Max. 0.35 48.96
2 P 1/ 1 DIN St 45.8 0.21 0.45- 0.04 0.04 0.10- - - - - 41.8- 26 21

Max. 1.20 Max. Max. 0.35 54.1
3 P 1/1 BS 3602 410 0.21 0.40- 0.045 0.045 0.35 - - - - 41.82- 25 22

4 P 1/1 BS 3602 / 460 0.22 0.80- 0.045 0.045 0.35 - - - - 46.9- 28.6 21
5 P 4/1 BS 3604 620- 0.10- 0.40 0.04 0.04 0.10- - 0.70- 0.45- - 46.9- 18.36 22
460 HFS or 0.15 Max. Max. Max. 0.35 1.10 0.65 62.22
CDS 0.10- 0.40- 0.04 0.04 0.10- - 0.70- 0.45- - 44.9- 29.58 22
620-440 0.18 0.70 Max. Max. 0.35 1.10 0.65 60.2
6 P 5/1 BS 3604 0.08- 0.40- 0.04 0.04 0.5 - 2.0- 0.9- - 48.8 26.8 17
622 0.15 0.70 Max. Max. Max. 2.5 1.2
HFS or CDS
7 - BS 3604
HFS 660
or 0.15 0.4- 0.04 0.04 0.10- - 0.25- 0.5- 0.22- 47.3 30 17
CDS 660 Max. 0.7 Max. Max. 0.35 0.50 0.7 0.30
Table – 7 Tubes

Sl. Material
Group T.S. Y.S.
No Specification C Mn P S Si Cr Mo V %E Min
No. kg/mm2 kg/mm2
1 P 1/1 DIN St 35.8 0.17 0.40- 0.04 0.04 0.10- - - - 36.70- 24 25
Max. 0.80 Max. Max. 0.35 48.96
2 P 1/ 1 DIN St 45.8 0.21 0.40- 0.04 0.04 0.10- - - - 41.80- 26 21

Max. 1.20 Max. Max. 0.35 54.06
3 P 1/1 BS 3059 / 360 0.17 0.4- 0.045 0.045 0.35 - - - 36.70- 22 24

4 P 1/1 BS 3059 / 440 0.12- 0.9- 0.040 0.035 0.10 - - - 44.88- 25 21

0.18 1.20 Max. Max. 0.35 59.2
5 P 3/1 DIN 15 Mo3 0.12- 0.40 0.035 0.035 0.10- - 0.25- - 45.9- 27.5 22
0.20 0.80 Max. Max. 0.35 0.35 61.2
6 P 4/1 DIN B Gr. Mo 4 0.10- 0.4- 0.035 0.035 0.10- 0.7- 0.45- - 44.88- 29.6 22
0.18 0.7 Max. Max. 0.35 1.10 0.65 60.18
7 P 4/1 BS 3059 / 620 0.10 0.4- 0.04 0.04 0.10- 0.7- 0.45- - 46.9- 18.4 22
0.15 0.7 Max. Max. 0.35 1.1 0.65 62.2
Table – 7 Tubes (Contd.)

Sl. Material
Group T.S. Y.S.
No Specification C Mn P S Si Cr Mo V %E Min
No. kg/mm2 kg/mm2
8 P 5/1 DIN 10 Cr 0.08 0.4- 0.035 0.035 0.5 2.0- 0.9- - 45.9- 28.6 20
Mo 910 0.15 0.7 Max. Max. Max. 2.5 1.2 61.2
9 P 5/ 1 BS 3059(622) – 0.08- 0.4- 0.04 0.04 0.5 2.0- 0.9- - 44.9- 17.85 20
440 0.15 0.7 Max. Max. Max. 2.5 1.20 60.18
10 P 5/1 BS 3059(622)- 0.08- 0.4- 0.04 0.04 0.5 2.0- 0.9- - 49.98- 28.05 20
490 0.15 0.7 Max. Max. Max. 2.5 1.20 65.0
11 - DIN 14 Mo V63 0.10- 0.4- 0.035 0.035 0.10- 0.3- 0.5- 0.22- 46.9- 32.6 20
0.18 0.7 Max. Max. 0.35 0.6 0.7 0.32 62.22
Table – 8 Forgings
Sl. P.NO / Material Chemical Composition (%) Mech. Properties (Min.)

No Group Specification Cu T.S. Y.S. %E
C Mn P S Si Ni Cr Mo V 2 2
No. kg/mm kg/mm Min
1 P 1/1 IS 1875 0.15- 0.60- 0.05 0.05 0.15- 0.25 0.25 0.05 0.05 - 44 24 24
CL II 0.25 0.90 Max. Max. 0.35 Max. Max. Max. Max.
2 P 1/ 1 BS 1503 0.25 0.65- 0.05 0.05 0.15- 0.40 0.25 0.10 - 0.30 44.1- 22.1 22
161 Max. 1.20 Max. Max. 0.35 Max. Max. Max. Max. 52
Cr 28
3 - BS 1503 0.08- 0.40- 0.04 0.04 0.10- 0.3 0.25- 0.50- 0.22- 0.25 47.2- 29.9 21
660 0.15 0.70 Max. Max. 0.35 Max. 0.50 0.70 0.32 Max. 63
Table – 9 Bar stock

Sl. Material
Group T.S. Y.S. %E
No Specification C Mn P S Si Ni Cr Mo V
No. kg/mm2 kg/mm2 Min
1 P 1/1 IS 1570 0.1- 0.6- 0.055 0.055 0.05- - - - - 43 - 25
- 1508 0.2 0.9 Max. Max. 0.35
2 P 1/ 1 IS 226 0.23 - 0.055 0.055 - - - - - 42- 25 23
(St 42) Max. Max. Max. 54
3 P 1/1 CSN 11416.1 0.2 0.65 0.045 0.045 0.35 0.30 0.30 - - 41- 24 25
Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max Max. 50
4 - VX22 0.18- 0.3- 0.035 0.02 0.1- 0.3- 11.5- 0.8- 0.25- 95 60 15
Cr Mo V121V 0.23 0.8 Max. Max. 0.5 0.5 11.9 1.2 0.35
RECEIPT INSPECTION OF WELDING
ELECTRODES / FILLER WIRES
1. All electrodes / filler wires received at site stores shall be segregated for type and size
of electrode.
2. Ensure that electrode packets received are free from physical damage.
3. Where electrodes are damaged, the same shall be removed from use.
4. Only electrodes indentified in the “Rationalised List of Electrodes” are to be accepted.
5. Where filler metals are supplied by manufacturing unit, inspect for damages, if any.
6. Ensure availability of relevant test certificates. Refer tables of chemical compositions

and mechanical properties for acceptance.
7. Endorse acceptance / rejection on the test certificate.

STORAGE & IDENTIFICATION OF WELDING
1.0 Scope
1.1 This procedure is applicable for storage of welding electrodes / filler wires used at
sites.
2.0 Procedure:
2.1 Only materials accepted (based on receipt inspection) shall be taken into account for
storage.
2.2 Storage Facility:
2.2.1 The storage facility shall be identified.
2.2.2 Access shall be restricted to authorized personnel.
2.2.3 The storage area shall be clean and dry.
2.2.4 Steel racks may be used for storage. Avoid storing wood inside the storage room.
2.2.5 Maintain the temperature of the storage facility above the ambient temperature. This
can be achieved by the use of appropriate heating arrangements.
2.3 The electrodes / filler wire shall be segregated and identified for
a. Type of electrode e.g. E7018.

b. Size of electrode e.g. Dia 3.15 mm.
2.4 Colour coding for filler wires:
2.4.1 On receipt of GTAW filler wires, codify the filter wires as per table I below . Both
ends shall be coloured.
Table - 1
Specification Brand Name* Colour Code
RT 1/ 2 Mo (ER80s-D2) TGSM Green
RT 1 Cr 1 / 2 Mo (ER80S-B2) TGS 1CM Silver grey/White
RT 2 1/ 4 Cr 1 Mo (ER90S-B3) TGS 2CM Brown / Red
RT 347 (ER 347) TGS – 347 Blue
(* or other approved equivalents)
2.4.1.1 Where another set of colour code is followed, maintain a record of coding used
2.4.2 where the filter wire is cut, apply the appropriate colour code at both ends of the
piece.
2.4.3 For other filler wires, a suitable colour distinct from table 1 shall be applied.
BAKING AND HOLDING OF WELDING ELECTRODES
1.0 Purpose:
1.1 This section details activities regarding baking and holding of welding electrodes
used at sites.
2.0 Procedure:
2.1 While handling, avoid contact of oil, grease with electrodes. Do not use oily or wet
gloves.
2.1.1 It is recommended that not more than two days requirements are baked.
2.2 GTAW Filler Wires:
2.2.1 These wires do not require any baking.
2.3 Covered Electrodes:
2.3.1 Baking and holding:
2.3.1.1 Identify baking oven and holding oven.
2.3.1.2 They shall have a temperature control facility upto 3500C for baking oven and 200
Deg. C for holding oven.
2.3.1.3 A calibrated thermometer shall be provided for monitoring temperature.
2.3.2 On opening a packet of electrodes, segregate and place them in the baking oven.
Avoid mix up.
2.3.2.1 After loading, raise the baking oven temperature to the desired range as per Table in
2.3.2.5.
2.3.2.2 Note the time when the temperature reaches the desired range. Maintain this
temperature for the duration required as per Table in 2.3.2.5.
2.3.2.3 On completion of baking, transfer the electrodes to holding oven, maintain a

minimum temperature of 1000C till issue.
2.3.2.4 The electrode shall not be subjected to more than two cycles of baking.
2.3.2.5 Maintain a register containing following details :
a) Brand name (e.g. Supratherme)
b) Size (e.g Dia 4.0 mm)
c) Quantity (e.g. 110 pieces)
d) Time at required temperature ie. Above 2500C
e) Time of Transfer to holding oven. Activities a,b,c to be recorded before

loading into the oven.
Baking and Holding Parameters
AWS Baking Holding

Classification Temperature
Temperature 0C Time (Hours) 0
(*) C (@ )
E7018 250 – 300 2 100 min
E7018-1 250 – 300 2 100 min
E7018-A1 250 – 300 2 100 min
E8018-B2 250 – 300 2 100 min
E9018-B3 250 – 300 2 100 min
E8018-B2L 250 – 300 2 100 min
E9018-B3L 250 – 300 2 100 min
E309 & E347 250 - 300 1 100 min
Note : (*) For other electodes, supplier’s recommendations shall be followed.
(@) Maintain the temperature in the oven till issue.
2.3.2.6 After issue, maintain the electrodes in a portable oven at a minimum temperature of
650C till use (not applicable for E6013, E309 & E347 electrodes).
2.3.3 Unused, returned electrodes shall be segregated and kept in the holding oven.
SELECTION AND ISSUE OF WELDING
1.0 Purpose:
1.1 This procedure details methods for selection and issue of welding electrodes / filler
wires for site operations.
2.0 Procedure:
2.1 Selection:
2.1.1 The type of filler wire / electrode for welding shall be based on the details given in
the contract documents like Erection Welding Schedules, drawings, Welding
Procedure Specifications as supplied by the Manufacturing Units.
2.1.2 Where not specified by the Manufacturing Units, selection shall be based on the
tables enclosed.
2.1.3 Where electrodes / filler wire are not covered in the documents mentioned in 2.1.1,
2.1.2, refer to manufacturing Units.
2.2. Issue:
2.2.1 Issue of welding electrodes / filler wires shall be based on authorized Welding
Electrodes Issue Voucher.
2.2.2 It is recommended to restrict quantity issued to not more than 4 hours requirements.
2.2.3 Redried low hydrogen electrodes shall be carried to the work spot in a portable
oven.
2.2.4 Maintain the temperature in the portable oven at the work spot above 65 Deg. C.
2.2.5 Unused electrodes shall be returned and kept in the holding oven till reissue.
TABLE – 1 SELECTION OF GTAW FILLER WIRE, SMAW ELECTRODE
FOR BUTT WELDS IN TUBES, PIPES, HEADERS
MATERIAL WELDING P1 GROUP 1 P3 GROUP 1 P4 GROUP 1 P5 GROUP 1 P8 Cr Mov

PROCESS P1 GROUP 2
P1 Group 1 GTAW RT 1/ 2 Mo
P1 Group 2 SMAW E7018 (ATT)
Note – 1
P3 Group 1 GTAW RT 1 / 2 Mo RT 1 / 2 Mo
SMAW E7018 (ATT) E7018 A1
P4 Group 1 GTAW RT 1 / 2 Mo RT 1 / 2 Mo RT 1 Cr 1/ 2
SMAW E7018 (ATT) E7018 A1 Mo E8018- B2
P5 Group 1 GTAW RT 1 / 2 Mo RT 1 / 2 Mo RT 1 Cr 1/ 2 RT 2 1/ 4 Cr 1
SMAW E7018 (ATT) E7018 A1 Mo E8018- B2 Mo E9018 – B3
PS GTAW ERMiCr3 ERNiCr3 RT347
SMAW ENiCrFe2 ENiCrFe2 E347
Cr Mo V GTAW RT 2 1/ 4 Cr 1 RT 2 1/ 4 Cr
Note- 2 SMAW Mo E9018-B3 1 Mo E9018-
B3
Note – 1 E7018 - A1 For P1 Gr 2 + P1 Gr 2 and Dia > 127 mm.

Note – 2 DIN 14MoV63 or equivalent.
TABLE – 2 SELECTION OF ELECTRODES
FOR WELDING ATTACHMENTS TO TUBES
ATTACHMENT MATERIAL
TUBE
MATERIAL P1 GROUP 1 P3 GROUP 1 P4 GROUP 1 PS GROUP 1 P8
P1 Group 1
P1 Group 2 E7018 E7018 E7018 E7018 E7018-A1
P3 E7018-A1 E7018-A1 E7018-A1 E7018-A1 E7018-A1
P4 Group 1 E8018-B2 E8018-B2 E8018-B2 E7018-A1
P5 Group 1 E9018-B3 E9018-B3 E9018-B3 E7018-A1
P8 E 309 E 309 E347

Note – 1 Note - 1
Note – 1 Used as circumferential attachment only.

TABLE – 3 SELECTION OF ELECTRODES, PREHEAT, PWHT
FOR ATTACHMENT TO ATTACHMENT WELDS
(Seal bands, High crown bars, End bars,

End bar lifting lugs and Collector plates etc.)
WELDING
MATERIAL P1 P4 P5 P8 GRUP 1 P8 GROUP 2
REQUIREMENTS
Electrode E7018
P1 Preheat Nil
PWHT Nil
Electrode E7018 (Note-2) E8018-B2
P4 Preheat Nil (Note – 2) Nil
PWHT Nil (Note – 2) Nil
Electrode E7018 E8018-B2 E9018-B3
P5 Preheat Note 1 & 2 Note-1 Note-1
PWHT Nil (Note-2) Nil Nil
Electrode E309 E309 E309 E347 E309
P8 Preheat Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil
PWHT Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil
Note : 1. When P5 material thickness is more than 10mm, 150 Deg.C preheat is required.
2. Electrode, Preheat and PWHT requirement for welding end bar lifting lug are as follows:
END BAR
PREHEAT
LIFTING END BAR ELECTRODE PWHT DEG.C
DEG.C
LUG
P1 P4 E8018-B2 120 650 – 680
P1 P5 E9018-B3 150 680-720

TABLE – 4 SELECTION OF ELECTRODES FOR WELDING NOZZLE ATTACHMENTS,
HANDHOLE PLATE, RG PLUG ETC TO HEADERS, PIPES
ATTACHMENT MATERIAL
HEADER, PIPE
MATERIAL P1 P3 P4 P5 P8
P1 E7018 (ATT) - E7018 (ATT) - ENiCrFe2
P4 - - E8018-B2 E8018-B2 -
P5 - - - E9018-B3 ENiCrFe2
Cr Mo V - - - E9018-B3 ENiCrFe2
Note-1
TABLE – 5 SELECTION OF ELECTRODES FOR NON-PRESSURE PARTS
(INCLUDING STRUCTURES)
MATERIAL ELECTRODES
P1 + P1 a. For butt welds, upto 6mm including : E6013
Over 6 mm : E7018
b. For fillets, upto 8 mm including : E6013
Over 8 mm : E7018
Carton E6013 or E7018

Steel + P1
Carton + Carton
Steel Steel E8018-B2
WELDER QUALIFICATION
1.0 Scope:
1.1 This chapter details the procedure for qualification of welder at site.
2.0 Contents:
1. Qualification of Welders at Site.

2. Table-1 – Welder qualification Requirements.
3. Record of Welder Performance Qualification Tests.
4. Figure- 1 Fillet Weld Break Specimen.
Figure-2 Method of Rupturing.
Figure-3 Positions.
Figure-4 Plate Butt Weld specimen.
Figure-5 Pipe Butt Weld Specimen.
Figure-6 Bend Specimen.
Figure-7 Bend Jig.
QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS AT SITES
1.0 Base Metal:
1.1 For selection refer tables in chapter II.
2.0 Test coupon:
2.1 Depending on the range to be qualified, choose the appropriate test coupon
from table-1.
2.2 For plate butt welds, details of edge preparation shall be as per Figure-4.
2.3 For pipe butt welds, details of edge preparation shall be as per Figure-5.
2.4 For structural tack welds, refer Figure-1.
3.0 Requirement of Tests:
3.1 For Structural Tack Welders:
3.1.1 Break Test as per Figure-2.
3.2 For Plate Butt Welds:
3.2.1 Minimum of 2 specimens for bend test; one for root bend and other for face
bend. Width of specimen shall be 38 mm for plate thickness upto 9.5 mm. For
thickness greater than 9.5 mm, width of specimens shall be 10 mm and they
shall be side bend tested.
3.3 For Pipe Welder:
3.3.1 The order of removal of test specimens shall be as per Figure-6.

3.3.2 For width and number of bend specimens, refer table below:
TABLE
No. of Bend Specimens

OD W Face Root Side
> 101.6 38.0 2 2 (**)

50.8 – 101.6 19.0 2 2 (**)
< 50.8 9.5 2 2 (**)
<= 25.4 (+ +) 2 2 -
(**) for thickness greater than 9.5 mm, side bend test of width 9.5 mm may be
substituted.
(++) Cut into 4 equal sections (with allowance for saw cuts or machine cutting);
sharp corners to be rounded off.
OD Outer diameter of pipe in mm
W Width of bend test specimen in mm
3.4 For bend jig refer Figure-7, for thickness of bend specimen 9.5 mm; for other
thicknesses (t) the dimension shall be as below:
A = 4t
B = 2t
C = 6t+3.2 mm
D = 3t + 1.6 mm
The above values are nominal.
3.5 Radiographic examination of test welds may be carried out in lieu of bend
tests. Procedure and acceptance criteria are as per NDE Manual.
4.0 Essential Variables:
4.1 Changes to the following variables require requalification.
4.1.1 Process:
Example: Change from GTAW to SMAW or vice versa.
4.1.2 Joint:
A Change from one type of bevel to another.

Example: vee bevel to u bevel.
4.1.3 Base Metal:
A change in thickness or pipe diameter beyond the limits prescribed in

Table-1.
4.1.4 Filler Metal:
A change from one F number to another F number, except as specified in

table-1,
4.1.5 Positions:
Note: This procedure envisages qualification of welders to perform in all

positions. Deviation to this are not recommended.
4.1.6 Gas:
Note: This procedure envisages test to pre-prescribed gas as for

production welds.
Deviation to this are not recommended.
4.1.7 Electrical Characteristics:
a. AC to DC and vice versa.
b. In DC, DCEN (Electrode Negative) to DCEP (Electrode Positive) and

vice versa.
4.1.8 Technique:
Note:- This procedure envisages only use of uphill progression technique.
5.0 Acceptance Criteria:
5.1 Structural Tack Welding:
5.1.1 No cracks.
5.1.2 No lack of fusion.
5.1.3 Undercut not exceeding 1 mm.
5.1.4 Not more than 1 porosity (max. diameter of porosity 2 mm).
5.2 Plate / pipe Welding:

5.2.1 Visual Inspection:
a. No cracks.
b. No lack of fusion or incomplete penetration.
c. Not more than 1 porosity in a length of 100 mm of length of weld (max.
porosity diameter 2 mm).
5.2.2 Bend Test results:
The convex surface of the bend test specimen shall be visually examined
for surface discontinuities. For acceptance, the surface shall contain no
discontinuities exceeding the following dimensions.
1. 3 mm measured in any direction on the surface.
2. The sum of the greatest dimensions of all discontinuities exceeding 1

mm but less than or equal to 3 mm, shall not exceed 10 mm.
3. The maximum corner crack of 6 mm, except when that corner crack
resulted from visible slag inclusion or other fusion type
discontinuities, then the 3 mm maximum shall apply. Specimens with
corner cracks exceeding 6 mm with no evidence of slag inclusions or
other fusion type discontinuities shall be disregarded, and a
replacement test specimen from the original weldment shall be
tested.
6.0 Retests :
6.1 A welder who fails to meet the acceptance criteria for one or more test
specimens, may be retested as per this procedure after adequate practice.
7.0 Validity :
7.1 When a welder meets the requirements of this procedure, the validity will
be for a maximum of 2 years from the date of test, limited to Validity
specified by statutory authority, as applicable.
7.2 The validity may be extended by one year each time, based on
satisfactory performance.
8.0 Requalification :
8.1 Requalification is required for the following :
a. Where there is a specific reason to doubt the skill of the welder.

b. Due to non-engagement of the welder for a continuous period of 6
months.
9.0 Records ;
9.1 The welding in charge at site shall maintain the following records.
A. Record of welder performance Qualification Test (as per format).
B. Register of qualified welders (employer-wise) containing the following

details :
1. Name of welder.
2. Age.
3. Tested for pipe / plate / tack.
4. Performance Test No.
5. Validity.
6. Welder Code.
7. Remarks.
The above register shall be updated for deletions also.
9.2 Copies of welder identity card (including details as in 9.1 B and relevant
variables qualified).
9.3 Pertinent radiography reports.
10.0 Enclosures :
1. Table – 1 - Welder qualification Requirements.
2. Record of Welder Performance Qualification Test.
3. Figure-1 - Structural Tack weld specimen.
4. Figure – 2 - Break Test.
5. Figure – 3 – Weld Positions.
6. Figure – 4 - Plate Butt Weld Specimen.
7. Figure – 5 - Pipe Butt Weld Specimen.
8. Figure – 6 - Order of Removal of Test Speciemen.
9. Figure – 7 - Bend Jig

WELDER’S QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
TABLE – 1
S TEST FOR BASE TEST ELECTRODE WELD REFEREN RANGE POSI ELECTROD
L. METAL COUPON TO BE POSITIONS CE QUALIFIED TIO E
N Note -1 DIMENSION USED FIGURE DIA. & T N QUALIFIED
O OD, t Note 2.4 QUA Note 2,4
LIFI REMARKS
ED
1. Structural P1 Gr1 t=10 mm OR (E 6013 3F & 4F Fig. 1 &2 T = Unlimited ALL F2, F1 Refer
Tack 12 mm F2) Fig.1,3
3F & 4F -do- T = Unlimited ALL F4 & Below
(E 7018 )
F4
2. Plate t=>25 mm F4 3G & 4G Fig . 3 T=>3.2 mm ALL F4 & Below
Welder -do-
(Structural) t>25 mm F4 3G & 4G -do- T>3.2 mm ALL F4 & Below
<=2t
3. Plate t=>25 mm F4 2G -do- T = Unlimited
Welder 3G & 4G OD=>600 mm ALL F4 & Below
(Other than -do- t>25 mm F4
Structural) 2G -do- T<=2t ALL F4 & Below
3G & 4G OD=>600 mm
4. Pipe Welder -do- OD=>25 mm F4 6G -do- OD=> Above ALL F4 & Below
OD=>25 mm F4 6G -do- OD &25 mm ALL F4 & Below

& <=73 mm
OD>73 mm ALL F4 & Below
OD>=73 mm F4 6G -do- T <=2t ALL F4 & Below
t<19 mm F4 6G -do- T= Unlimited ALL F4 & Below
t.>=19 mm F4 6G -do-
1
TACK WELDER QUALIFICATION
4 1/2 4
½ in mm
2
1/2 13
2 50
4 4 100
1/2
Fig 1 – Fillet Held Break specimen
FORCE
Fig – 2 – Method of Rupturing

RECORD OF WELDER PERFORMANCE QUALIFIACATION TEST
Performance Test No.,

Date :
Site :
Welder’s Name & Address : Welder Code :
Material groupings permitted : Welding Processes :

Thickness Qualified : Position(s) Qualified :
(This performance test is as per Dia Qualified :
Procedure No.
TEST MATERIAL
Specification : Filler Metal :

Thickness (and Dia. Of Pipe) : SFA No. :
Shielding Gas(es) AWS Classification :
PROCESS VARIABLES
Position of test weld : Current : Polarity :
Pre-heat temp ; inter Pass Temp: Post-heat Temp :

Test joints Test Results
Type Bend Results
Type Bend Results
Type Bend Results
Type Bend Results
Radiography Ref. & Results :
(Sketch )
Welder’s signature
Agency Conducting Test
We certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the test weld were
prepared, welded and tested in accordance with requirements.
This is valid upto -------------------------------------------

Welding In-charge / BHEL.
INSPECTION OF WELDING
1.0 Purpose :
This procedure provides details for performing visual inspection of weld fit-
ups, welding in progress and completed welds.
2.0 Reference :
2.1 Contract drawings
2.2 Erection welding schedule (supplied by Units) or equivalent.
2.3 Welding procedure specification, where supplied.
2.4 Indian Boiler Regulations (for boilers erected in India).
3.0 General Requirements :
3.1 Ensure that the components to be welded are in accordance with the
contract drawings, Welding Schedule and other relevant documents.
3.2 The condition of welded Surfaces to be inspected must be clean and dry.
3.3 There shall be sufficient lighting to allow proper interpretation of visual

inspection.
4.0 Weld fit-up Inspection :
4.1 The surface to be welded shall be smooth and free from deep notches,
irregularities, scale, rust, oil, grease and other foreign materials.
4.2 Piping, tubing and headers to be jointed shall be aligned within allowable
tolerances on diameters, wall thicknesses and out-of-roundness as below:
Maximum Permissible out-of-alignment at bore
Bore (mm) Max. Misalignment (mm)

For GTAW For SMAW
Upto 100 1.0 1.0
Over 100 to 300 1.6 1.6
Over 300 1.6 2.4

4.3 When fit, components to be welded shall not show an appreciable off-set
or misalignment when viewed from positions apart.
4.4 The root opening of components to be joined shall be adequate to provide

acceptable penetration.
4.5 On fillet welds, the parts to be jointed shall be brought as close to contact
as practical, although in most instances a small opening between the
parts is desirable.
4.6 Root gaps should be maintained at 1.6 mm – 2.4 mm (refer relevant

document).
4.7 Weld area should be protected from drafts and wind, to maintain inert gas
shield.
5.0 Checks during welding operation:
5.1 Ensure the required minimum preheat temperature is applied and

established during welding.
5.2 Ensure correct electrode / filler metal is used for welding.
5.3 Tack welds are examined by the welder before they are incorporated in
the final weld.
5.4 Ensure proper drying / holding of electrodes prior to use.
5.5 Ensure the correct interpass temperature is maintained.
5.6 Ensure proper cleaning of weld between beads.
6.0 Checks on the completed weld:
6.1 No visible cracks, pin-holes or incomplete fusion.
6.2 The weld surface must be sufficiently free of coarse ripples, grooves,
overlaps, abrupt ridges and valleys, visible slag inclusions, porosity and
adjacent starts and stops.
6.3 Undercuts not to exceed 1 mm.
6.4 Where inside surface is readily accessible, the same shall be inspected
for excess penetration and root concavity. The permissible limits are given
below.
Root concavity: max of 2.5 mm or 20% of thickness at weld, whichever is
lesser, provided adequate reinforcement is present.
Excess penetration: upto and including 3.2 mm.
6.5 For plate butt welds, the weld reinforcement should not exceed 3.2 mm.
6.6 For circumferential joints in piping and tubing the maximum weld
reinforcements permitted are given below:
Maximum Permissible Reinforcements
Thickness of For service Temperature

of base metal above 400 Deg.C upto & incl. 400 Deg.C
Upto 3.2 1.6 2.4
Over 3.2 – 4. 1.6 3.2
Over 4.8 – 12.7 2.4 4.0
Over 12.7 – 25.4 3.2 4.8
Over 25.4 4.0 6.3
All Dimensons in mm
6.7 There shall be no overlaps.
The faces of fillet welds are not excessively convex or concave and the
weld legs are of the proper length.
6.8 In case of weld joints in pressure parts and joints like ceiling girder, the
weld joint must be suitably identified.
WELDER PERFORMANCE MONITORING
1.0 Purpose:
1.1 This procedure deals with monitoring the performance of welders engaged
at sites. This procedure is applicable where radiography is performed.
2.0 Procedure:
2.1 The welder performance shall be monitored on a calender month basis.
2.2. Extent of radiography shall be representative of weekly outputs of the

welder.
2.3 Quantum of radiography shall be as per contractual requirements.
2.4 Evaluation of welds radiographed shall be as per NDE manual or other

documents as specifically applicable.
2.5 Welder performance evaluation:
2.5.1 For welds dia 88.9 mm and below:
2.5.1.1. The percentage defectives (repairable) is calculated as a percentage of

number of unaccepted to those radiographed.
2.5.1.2 Upto and including 5% defectives performance is satisfactory else

unsatisfactory.
2.5.2 For welds over dia 88.9 mm and plate welds:
2.5.2.1 The percentage defectives is calculated as a percentage of length of

defectives repairable to the length radiographed.
2.5.2.2 Upto an including 2.5% defectives performance is satisfactory else

unsatisfactory.
2.6 When a welder gives unsatisfactory performance for a continuous period

of 3 months he shall be requalified
2.6.1 Requalification of welder shall be called for when there is a specific reason
to question his ability to make acceptable welds. This shall override
requirements of cl.2.6
2.7 Welds produced during any month shall be radiographed and evaluated
latest by 10th of the succeeding month.
2.7.1 Under circumstances when cl.2.7 is not satisfied for any particular welder,
he may be disengaged from the job till such time his performance can be
evaluated for the month in study.
2.7.2 Site in-charge may waive the restriction imposed in 2.7.1 reviewing the
situations for non-compliance of cl.2.7 and may allow engagement of the
welder in question for a period not exceeding one successive month to the
month in study.
3.0 Records:
3.1 Welding in-charge shall prepare and maintain Welder Performance

Records, welderwise.
REPAIR WELDING
1.0 Purpose:
1.1 This procedure details steps to be taken for weld repairs.
2.0 Procedure:
2.1 Unacceptable welds, based on visual inspection or NDE, shall be

repaired.
2.2 Removal of Defects:
2.2.1 The identified defect area shall be marked on the part.
2.2.2 The defects may be removed by grinding / thermal gouging.
2.2.2.1 Where thermal gouging is done, adopt the requirements of preheating as

detailed in Heat Treatment Manual.
2.2.2.2 However, only grinding is permitted for the last 6 mm from the root.
2.3 Removal of defects shall be verified by visual inspection PT, MT, RT as

appropriate.
2.4 The profile of ground portion shall be smooth and wide enough to permit
proper fusion during repair welding.
2.5 Repair welding shall be carried out as per the procedure for the initial
weld.
2.6 Repair weld shall undergo the same type of NDE as the initial weld.
2.7 Repeat steps 2.1 to 2.6 till acceptable weld is made.
2.8 Where cutting, re-edge preparation and re-welding the joint will yield better
results, the same shall be followed.
3.0 Where a specific repair procedure is supplied by the Manufacturing Unit,

the same shall be followed.
4.0 Records:
4.1 Records pertaining to the repairs like Welder, NDE records shall be
maintained
APPENDIX A
Recommended Electrical Characteristics for Welding at Sites.
Current
Electrical Process Dia Type Amp Voltage range
Classification mm range
&& GTAW 2.5 DCEN 70-120 12-20

3.15 DCEN 110-160 12-20
E6013 SMAW 2.5 DCEP 50-100 18-26

3.15 DCEP 90-140 18-26
4.0 DCEP 130-190 18-26
@@ SMAW 2.5 DCEP 70-120 18-26
EXX18 3.15 DCEP 100-160 18-26
4.0 DCEP 150-220 18-26
## SMAW 2.5 DCEP 70-100 18-26
EXXX 3.15 DCEP 100-140 18-26
4.0 DCEP 120-170 18-26
Notes:
&& - The current ranges are applicable for all filler materials used in GTAW
process
@@ - EXX18 include E7018, E7018-1, E7018-A1, E8018 B2, E9018 B3.
## - EXXX include E309, E347 electrodes.

APPENDIX – B
Extract from AWS D 1.1. 1992
SAFE PRACTICES
(Non-mandatory Information)
(This Appendix is not a part of ANSI/AWS D1.1-92, Structural Welding Code-

Steel, but is included for information purposes only)
This appendix covers many of the basic elements of safety general to arc
welding processes. It includes many, but not all of the safety aspects related to
structural welding. The hazards that may be encountered and the practices
that will minimize personal injury and property damage are reviewed here.
J1 Electrical Hazards
Electric shock can kill. However, it can be avoided. Live electrical parts should
not be touched. Read and understand the manufacturer’s instructions and
recommended safe practices. Faulty installation, improper grounding, and
incorrect operation and maintenance of electrical equipment are all sources of
danger.
All electrical equipment and the work pieces should be grounded. A separate
connection is required to ground the workpiece. The work lead should not be
mistaken for a ground connection.
To prevent shock, the work area, equipment, and clothing should be kept dry at
all times. Dry gloves and rubber soled shoes should be worn. The welder
should stand on a dry board or insulated platform.
Cables and connectors should be kept in good condition. Worn, damaged, or

bare cables should not be used. In case of electric shock, the power should be
turned off immediately. If the rescuer must resort to pulling the victim from the
live contact, nonconducting materials should be used. A physician should be
called and CPR continued until breathing has been restored, or until a
physician has arrived. See references 8,7 and 10
J2 Fumes and Gases
Many welding, cutting and allied processes produce fumes and gases which
may be harmful to one’s health. Fumes and solid particles originate from
welding consumables, the base metal, and any coating present on the base
metal. Gases are produced during the welding process or may be produced by
the effects of process radiation on the surrounding environment. Everyone
associated with the welding operation should acquaint themselves with the
effects of these fumes and gases.
The possible effects of over-exposure to fumes and gases range from irritation of
eyes, skin and respiratory system to more severe complications. Effects may occur
immediately or at some later time. Fumes can cause symptoms such as nausea,
headaches, dizziness, and metal fumes fever. Sufficient ventilation, exhaust at the
arc, or both, should be used to keep fumes and gases from breathing zones and the
general work area.
For more detailed information on fumes and gases produced by the various welding
processes, see References 1,4 and 11
J3 Noise
Excessive noise is a known health hazard. Exposure to excessive noise can cause
a loss of hearing. This loss of hearing can be either full or partial, and temporary or
permanent. Excessive noise adversely affects hearing capability. In addition, there
is evidence that excessive noise affects other bodily functions and behavior.
Personal protective devices such as ear muffs or ear plugs may be employed.
Generally, these devices are only accepted when engineering controls are not fully
effective. See References 1,5 and 11.
J4 Burn Protection
Molten metal, sparks, slag, and hot work surfaces are produced by welding, cutting
and allied process. These can cause burns if precautionary measures are not used.
Workers should wear protective clothing made of fire resistant material. Pant cuffs
or clothing with open pockets or other places on clothing that can catch and retain
molten metal or sparks should not be worn. High top shoes or leather leggings and
fire resistant gloves should be worn. Pant legs should be worn over the outside of
high top boots. Helmets or hand shields that provide protection for the face, neck,
and ears, should be worn, as well as head covering to protect. Clothing should be
kept free of grease and oil. Combustible materials should not be carried in pockets.
If any combustible substance is spilled on clothing it should be replaced with fire
resistant clothing before working with open arcs or flame.
Appropriate eye protection should be used at all times. Goggles or equivalent also
should be worn to give added eye protection.
Insulated gloves protection should be worn at all times when in contact with hot
items or handling electrical equipment.
For more detailed information on personnel protection Reference 2,3,8 and 11

should be consulted.
J5 Fire Prevention
Molten metal, sparks, slag. and hot work surfaces are produced by welding, cutting,
and allied processes. These can cause fire or explosion if precautionary measures
are not used.
Explosions have occurred where welding or cutting has been performed in spaces
containing flammable gases, vapours, liquid, or dust. All combustible material
should be removed from the work area. Where possible, move the work to a
location well away from combustible materials. If neither action is possible,
combustibles should be protected with a cover or fire resistant material. All
combustible materials should be removed or safely protected within a radius of 35 ft.
(11m) around the work area.
Welding or cutting should not be done in atmospheres containing dangerously

reactive or flammable gases, vapours, liquid, or dust. Heat should not be applied to
a container that has held an unknown substance or a combustible material whose
contents when heated can produce flammable or explosive vapours. Adequate
ventilation should be provided in work areas to prevent accumulation of flammable
gases, vapours or dusts. Containers should be cleaned and purged before applying
heat.
For more detailed information on fire hazards from welding and cutting operations,
see References 6,8,9 and 11
J6 Radiation
Welding, cutting and allied operations may produce radiant energy (radiation)
harmful to health. Everyone should acquaint themselves with the effects of this
radiant energy.
Radiant energy may be ionizing (such as X-rays) or non-ionizing (such as ultraviolet,

visible light, or infrared). Radiation can produce a variety of effects such as skin
burns and eye damage, if excessive exposure occurs.
Some processes such as resistance welding and cold pressure welding ordinarily
produce negligible quantities of radiant energy. However, most arc welding and
cutting processes (except submerged arc when used properly), laser welding and
torch welding, cutting, brazing, or soldering can produce quantities of non-ionizing
radiation such that precautionary measures are necessary.
Protection from possible harmful radiation effects include the following:
1) Welding arcs should not be viewed except through welding filter plates
(see Reference 2)
2) Transparent welding curtains are-not intended as welding filter plates, but

rather, are intended to protect passers by from incidental exposure.
3) Exposed skin should be protected with adequate gloves and clothing as
specified. See Reference 8.
4) The casual passerby to welding operations should be protected by the use of

screens, curtains, or adequate distance from aisles, walkways, etc.
5) Safety glasses with ultraviolet protective side shields have been shown to
provide some beneficial protection from ultraviolet radiation produced by
welding arcs.
References Cited
1. American Conference of Governmental Industry Hygienist (ACGIH).
Threshold limit values for chemical substances and physical agents in the
workroom environment, Cincinnati, Ohio; American Conference of
Governmental Industry Hygienists(ACGIH)
2. American National Standards Institute. Practice for occupational and

educational eye and face protection, ANSI Z87.1New York: American
National Standards Institute.
3. -----------------------.Safety-toe footwear, ANSI Z41.1 New York: American

National Standards Institute.
4. ----------------------.American Welding Society. Fumes and gases in the welding

environment, AWS Report. Miami, Florida: American Welding Society.
5. -----------------------Method for sound level measurement of manual arc welding

and cutting processes, ANSI / AWS F6.1. Miami, Florida.
6. ------------------------Recommended safe practices for the preparation for

welding and cutting containers that have held hazardous substances,
ANSI/AWS F4.1. Miami, Florida: American Welding Society.
7. -------------------------Safe Practices.(Reprint from Welding Handbook, Volume

1, Eight Edition) Miami, Florida: American welding Society.
8. ----------------------- Safety in welding and cutting, ANSI/ASC Z49.1 Miami,

Florida: American Welding, society.
9. National Fire Protection Association: Cutting and welding processes NFPA

Standard 51B. Quincy, Massachusetts: National Fire Protection Association
10. ---------------------- National Electrical Code. NFPA No.70.Quincy,

Massachusetts National Fire Protection Association.
11. Occupational Safety and Health Administration. Code of Federal

Regulations, Title 20 Labour, Chapter XVII, Part 1910; OSHA General
Industry Standards. Washington, DC:U.S Government Printing Office.
APPENDIX A
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS OF NDE AS PER IBR

(Quantum of Radiography or other approved NDE methods for Butt Welds)
1.0 Boiler and Superheater Tubes (Regulation No.151 (h):
BORE, MM PERCENTAGE OF NDE
OVER 178 100%
OVER 102 AND UPTO 178

INCLUDING 10% (MIN. 2 WELDS PER WELDER)
BELOW 102 5% (MIN 1 WELD PER WELDER)
2.0 Steam pipes and fittings (Regulation No.360 (d) – NDE Requirements:
2.1 Pipelines NDE requirement:

PERCENTAGE OF
PERCENTAGE
CUTOUT JOINTS FOR
DESCRIPTION BORE mm OF NDE FOR EACH
VISUAL AND BEND TEST
WELDER
FOR EACH WELDER
CLASS I PIPELINES:
A. WHERE THE OVER 102 100% __

COMPLETED
PIPELINES ARE NOT
SUBJECTED TO
HYDRAULIC TEST OVER 38 AND UPTO 5%
102 INCLUDING (MIN. 2 WELDS PER
BELOW 38 WELDER)
2% (Note.1)
B:WHERE THE OVER 102 10%
COMPLETED (MIN. 2 WELDS PER __
PIPELINES ARE WELDER)
SUBJECTED TO
HYDRAULIC TEST
OVER 38 AND UPTO 2%
102 INCLUDING (MIN 1 WELD PER 2% (Note.1)
BELOW 38 mm WELDER)
CLASS II PIPELINES:
ALL SIZE __ 2% (Note –1)
ALL PIPES
Note. 1: It is suggested that in lieu of this radiography may be substituted at sites.

2.2 Retest:
If any test specimen is unsatisfactory, two further weld specimen for retest shall be
selected from the production welds and subjected to tests.
APPENDIX B
Extract from ASME/ ANSI B 31.1/1992 MANDATORY MINIMUM NDE for pressure
welds or welds to pressure retaining components.
I. Piping service conditions temperature over 400 deg C and all pressures.
Type of weld NDE
Butt welds RT for over NPS 50

MT-& PT for NPS 50
And less
Fillet, Socket, attachment & seal welds MT or PT for all sizes and
Thicknesses
II Piping service conditions: Temperatures between 175 deg C Inclusive and

400 deg C inclusive with all pressures above 7100 kPa(gauge)
Type of weld NDE
Butt welds RT for over NPS 50 with

Thickness over 19 mm. Visual
For others.
Fillet, socket, attachment and seal weld Visual for all sizes &
Thicknesses.
III All others : Visual examination.
NOTES: 1) NPS - nominal pipe size
2) All welds must be given a visual examination in addition to the NDE

specified.
3) The thickness of buttwelds is defined as the thicker of the two abutting

ends after end preparation
4) Temperatures and pressures shown are design.
5) Fillet welds not exceeding 6 mm throat thickness which are used for
the permanent attachment of nonpressure retaining parts are exempt
from the PT & MT requirements.
APPENDIX C
NDE Requirements as per ASME Sec – I
Following buttwelds shall be radiographed or ultrasonically tested.
A. For drums, shells excluding pipes, tubes, headers.
I NPS exceeding 250 mm or wall thickness greater than 28 mm. Bring

against ( B. For pipes, tubes and headers. Radiography is not
mandatory for the following conditions.)
1. For parts containing steam: NPS <= 400 mm or wall thickness <= 40 mm
2. For parts containing water : NPS <=250 mm or wall thickness <= 28 mm
3. For parts in flue gas path but not subject to radiation: NPS <=150 mm or
wall thickness <= 19 mm
4. For parts in flue gas path and subject to radiation: NPS <= 100 mm or wall
thickness <= 12.5 mm
II Where radiography is to be performed and geometric uncharpness cannot be

within 1.8 mm, ultrasonic testing shall be performed.
Note: NPS – nominated pipe size

HEAT TREATMENT
1.0 Purpose:
1.1 This procedure provides information, method and control for preheat (PH) and
post weld heat treatment (PWHT) of welds at sites.
2.0 Document:
2.1 The following documents are referred in preparation of this procedure.
2.1.1 ASME Sec.1, II(a)
2.1.2 ANSI B 31.1
2.1.3 Indian Boiler Regulations
2.1.4 AWS D1.1/Steel
2.1.5 Welding Manual – PS:CMX:001:00:93
2.2 The following are referred to as Primary Documents
- Erection Welding Schedules or equivalent
- Contract Drawings
- Plant Standards, where supplied
- Welding Procedure Specification, where supplied
2.2.1 Where parameter for Preheating (PH) and PWHT are not available in the
primary documents reference may be made to this manual.
2.2.2 Where such parameters are not contained either in the primary documents or
in this manual reference may be made to Manufacturing Units.
3.0 Procedure:
3.1 Preheating:
3.1.1 When parts of two different thicknesses are welded together, the preheating
requirements of the thicker shall rule.
3.1.2 When parts of two different P numbers are jointed together, the material
requiring higher preheat shall govern (Please refer Welding Manual for P
numbers)
3.1.3 Preheating shall be checked using thermal chalk (temperature indicating
crayons) prior to start-up welding as well as at frequent intervals during
welding. It is preferable to have a thermocouple and a termperature
recorder in case of alloy steels of thickness greater than 50 mm.
3.1.4 In case of any interruption during welding, preheating temperature shall be

maintained at joint by wraping in dry thermal insulating blankets to ensure
slow and uniform cooling.
3.1.5 Preheating Methods:
3.1.5.1 Preheating shall be applied by any of the methods given below:
a. Electrical Resistance Heaters
b. Induction Heating
c. Oxy-Acetylene or other Gas Torches
3.2 Post Weld Heat Treatment(PWHT):
3.2.1 The method shall be by locally heating a circumferential band including

the entire weld and adjacent area of base metal, by Induction or Electrical
Resistance Heating.
3.2.2 Heat Band for PWHT
3.2.2.1 For Boilers:
a. When heat treating welded joints in components in the boiler, proper

width of the heated circumferential band on either side of the weld.
(W) must be as, W = 3 times the width of the wides part of the weld groove
but in no case, less than twice the width of weld at reinforcement.
b. When used in post weld heat treatment in sections – W = 3 times the

plate thickness.
c. For nozzle and other welded attachments – W = must be wider than

the nozzle or attachment or 3 times the wall thickness.
3.2.2.2 For Piping:
W = Three times the wall thickness of thickest part, in case of

nozzles and attachment welds, the width of the heat band shall extend
beyond the nozzle or the attachment wall on each side by at least twice
the higher thickness and shall extend completely around the header.
AMENDMENT NO : 1
3.2.2.3 Other Pressure Vessels:
Heat band width, placement of thermocouple and preheat and PWHT

information shall be obtained from the supplier.
3.3 Condition of Welded Joints:
3.3.1 The weldment shall be free of grease, oil etc, prior to PH/PWHT.
3.4 Temperature Measurement for PWHT:
3.4.1 Post weld heat treatment temperature shall be measured and monitored
by use of thermocouples with calibrated recorders.
3.4.2 The periodicity of calibration of the equipment must be every twelve

months or before use.
3.4.3 Where the soaking temperature is found to be lesser than specified, the
PWHT cycle shall be repeated.
3.4.4 In case interruption during PWHT, the following actions are to be taken
depending on the stage during which interruption occurred.
a. Interruption during heating cycle:
- The whole operation to be repeated from the beginning
b. Interruption during soaking:
- The joint can be treated subsequently for the balance left over
soaking period.
c. Interruption during cooling:
- Ensure slow cooling by covering with insulation to a minimum

width of 1.5 times the outer diameter applied equally about the
central line of weld, till the temperature reaches around
350 deg.C.
3.5 THERMOCOUPLE ( t / c) Fixing:
3.5.1 Thermocouples shall be used for recording post weld Heat Treatment
temperatures.
3.5.1.1 Following are guidelines regarding number and placement of

thermocouples.
3.5.1.2 Minimum of two thermocouples per weld.
3.5.1.3 Thermocouples located 180 deg. Apart.
3.5.1.4 Thermocouples located top and bottom of weld.
3.5.1.5 Thermocouples located at a distance of approximately 1.5 times of the

wall thickness about the centre line of weld.
3.5.2 The following guidelines may be used for attaching thermocouples to job.
a. For capacitor discharge method: Thermocouple elements should be

attached within 6 mm of each other.
b. For other type of t / c Insert the elements in a ss tube of internal

diameter approximately 6 mm. Apply force on tube and crimp it. Place
this t / c and weld the crimped button to the pipe in area of interest. Do
not weld the elements.
c. Insulate the t / c leads suitably and protect t / c ends from direct

radiation from heating elements.
3.5.3 For Bunched Tubes:
3.5.3.1 Where a bunch of closely placed tube welds (e.g Super Heater / Reheater
Coils) require to be stress relieved, the same shall be grouped together as
if they form a single component.
3.5.3.2 In such cases attachment of a minimum of three thermocouples, two at

the end tubes and one at the middle is recommended.
3.6 Soaking Time
3.6.1 Wherever not specified the soaking time shall be 2.5 minutes per mm.
The minimum soaking shall be 30 minutes.
3.6.2 The following guidelines shall be used to determine the thickness and
subsequent selection of the soaking time of PWHT.
a. For butt welds, the thickness shall be the thickness of the material at
the weld. For bar stock, the thickness shall be the diameter.
b. For fillet welds, the thickness shall be the throat thickness.
c. For partial penetration branch welds, the thickness shall be the depth
of the groove prior to welding.
d. For repairs, the thickness shall be the depth of the groove as prepared
for repair welding.
e. For combination of different welds in a component, the maximum

thickness in the definitions given above shall govern.
3.6.3 Soaking time is to be reckoned from the time temperature of the joint
crosses the recommended lower temperature of the cycle, to the time it
comes down below the same recommended lower temperature of the
cycle.
3.7 Heating and Cooling rates:
3.7.1 Whenever not specified, the heating rate above 400 deg. C and cooling
rate after soaking upto 400 deg.C shall be as follows. This is applicable
for all materials other than BS 3604:622 and 660 materials.
Thickness of Material Maximum Heating Rate Maximum Cooling Rate

Above 400 Deg.C Upto 400 Deg.C
Upto and including 25 mm 220 Deg. C / Hour 110 Deg.C / Hour
Over 25 to 50 mm (incl) 110 Deg. C / Hour 110 Deg.C / Hour
Over 50 to 75 mm (incl.) 75 Deg. C / Hour 110 Deg.C / Hour
Over 75 mm 55 Deg. C / Hour 110 Deg.C / Hour

For Structural – 65 deg. C / Hour (Max.)
3.7.2 For BS:3604:622 and 660 materials, for a combination of diameter below 127
mm and thickness below 12.5 mm, maximum rate of heating is
250 x 25
T or 100 deg.C / Hour, whichever is less.
Maximum rate of cooling is 50 deg C / hour.
T = Thickness of material in MM.
3.8 Temperature Records:
3.8.1 All the heat treatment cycles may be controlled within a tolerance of + or - 20
deg. C around the recommended temperature. The recommended
temperature for stress relieving must be selected as the midpoint of
recommended range of temperature for the material.
3.9 All the heat treatment cycles may be controlled within + / - 20 deg.C around
the midpoint of the recommended range of temperature for the material.
4.0 SR Job Card:
4.1 Prior to start of stress relieving operations, a job card may be prepared
including details of weld reference, soaking time, soaking temperature,
maximum rates of heating and cooling, temperature recorder details, date of
PWHT as per sample format.
4.2 On completion of PWHT the actuals may be recorded on the job card.
4.3 A chart number shall be given to each chart.
5.0 List of Tables:
Table – 1 PH, PWHT for GIRTH BUTT Welds in Tubes and Pipes Dia <= 76.1
mm.
Table – 2 PH, PWHT for Headers
Table – 3 PH, PWHT for Pipes Dia > 108 mm
Table – 4 Heat Treatment requirements for Non-Pressure Parts including

Structurals.
Table – 5 PH for Flame Cutting
Annexure – 1 Soaking Time
Annexure – 2 Heat Treatment of X-20 materials.
6.0 Records:
6.1 Pertinent Records like Job Card, SR Charts, shall be maintained.

STRESS RELIEF (S.R) JOB CARD
Site: ------------------------------------- Date:
Unit No. --------------------------------- Package:
Description ----------------------------- Temp. Recorder Details
Weld Reference ---------------------- 1. Make-----------------------------------
Material Spec:------------------------- 2. Type------------------------------------
Size: Dia--------------------------mm 3. Sl.No:----------------------------------
Thick---(t) -------------------mm 4. Calibration

Due on:--------------------------------
NDE Cleared on:---------------------------------------
Thermocouple Locations:
Minimum 2
d = 1.5 x t
Heating Band = 6 x t
Insulation Band = 12 x t
Date of S.R---------------------------------
Start Time:---------------------------------- End Time------------------------------
Chart No.:----------------------------------- Required Actual
Rate of Heating (Max) deg C / h -------------- ---------------
Soak Temperature deg C -------------- ---------------
Soak Time (Minutes) -------------- ---------------
Rate of Cooling(Max) deg C / h -------------- ---------------
Contractor B.H.E.L
Results Accepted / Not Accepted: Released for further processing

TABLE – I
GIRTH BUTT WELDS
(Tubes and Pipes Dia < 76.1)
Applicable for Tahickness upto 19 mm for P1ABC and Thickness

Upto 13 mm for other materials
MATERIAL PROCESS P1ABC P3A P4Gr.1,2 P5 Gr.1 P5 Gr.2 P8
GTAW PH NIL
P1
SMAW
PWHT NIL
P3 PH NIL NIL
- do -
Group 1
PWHT NIL NIL
P4
PH 120 120 120
Group 1
- do -
&2
(Note 1) PWHT NIL NIL NIL
P5 PH 200 200 200 200

Group 1 - do -
(Note 1) PWHT NIL NIL NIL NIL
PH 200 200 200 200 200

P5
- do -
Group 2
PWHT 680-720 680-720 680-720 680-720 680-720
P8
PH NIL NIL 120 150 200 NIL
Group 1
- do -
&
PWHT NIL NIL NIL NIL 680-775 NIL
Group 2
Note: Preheating of P4 and P5 tubes can be waived off if PWHT is envisaged at site.
If Preheating is done for the above, PWHT can be waived off subject to the
approval from Chief Inspector of Boilers of the respective region.
PH = Preheat; PWHT = Post Weld Heat Treatment.

TABLE – II
PREHEAT AND PWHT TO HEADERS
(Note – 4)
(Applicable for Welding of Header to Header Joints at Site)
Header Pipe Post Heating

Thickness, Preheat PWHT
Material 0 (Note 2) 0
(mm) C 0 C
(Note 3) C
t < 25 NIL NIL 600-650
P1
Group 1 & 2 t 25 – 75 100 NIL 600-650
(Note 1)
t > 75 150 NIL 600-650
P4 t < 75 120 NIL 650-700

Group 1 &
Group 2 t > 75 150 NIL 650-700
2500 for 4
Plates & Pipes 150 700-750
hours
P5 Group 1
Castings &
200
forgings
Note 1: For SA 106 Gr. C materials, a minimum preheat of 1000C is required for all
thickness and a post heat of 1500C for two hours after completion of
welding.
Note 2: All P5 headers shall be interstage heat treated at 700-7500C for 30

minutes soaking prior to any cold straightening operation. In lieu of this,
the straightening can be done after final PWHT.
Note 3: Irrespective of the stub or attachment material, the PWHT cycles shall be
governed by the header pipe material. However, the preheat for welding
shall be as shown below:
P1 Header to P3 stub - 1200C (min.)

Note 4: Seal welding of hand hole plates, radiographic plugs and screws can be
carried out after final PWHT, provided the preheat is carried out as per the
table.
Note 5: Soaking time for BS 622 & 660 materials shall be 180 mts. (min)
irrespective of thickness. However, when diameter is less than 127 mm
and thickness less than 12.5 mm, soaking time shall be 30 minutes
(min).
Note 6: Throat shall be as specified in the drawing. Wherever flanges are welded
to pipes combined throat shall be taken into consideration.
TABLE - IV
Heat Treatment Requirements for Non Pressure Parts Including Structurals (Note 7)
Shearing Gas cutting Welding

SMAW (Low
SMAW
Material Thickness H2
Post Forming (Non-Low PWHT (Note 7)
Preheat electrodes)
Heat Treatment H2
GMAW,
Electrodes
SAW etc.
P1 t < 19 – Nil t < 50 – Nil t < 19 Nil Nil a. All butt welds when >
A.36 t > 19 – 600-6500C t > 50, 1000C t - 19 – 38 100 Nil 50 mm
Is 2062 No<- soaking <- is t - 38 – 63 120 100 b. Any welds to a tension
IS 226 required. t > 63 150 120 member (Note 2)
(Note 1) SR at 600-6500C
P4 All sheared edges t < 25 – Nil t < 75 --- 120 a. All butt welds in
at 650 – 7000C for t > 25, 1200C t > 75 --- 150 tension member.
15 mts. b. All fabricated
components when
t>16 mm (Note 3)
SR at 650 – 7000C
P5 All sheared edges t < 13, 1200C All --- 150 All welds (Note 5 & 6)
at 680-7300C for 15 t 13 – 25, 1500C SR at 680-7300C
mts. t > 25, 2000C
(Note 4)
Note 1: Clip angles above 10 mm, used for beam connections, which are sheared
to length, shall required heat treatment.
Note 2 : All tension members, when thickness is above 50 mm, the entire assembly
shall be post weld heat treated.
Note 3 : All fabricated structural components of P-4 material, with any member
above 16 mm thickness, the entire assembly shall be post weld heat
treated.
Note 4: All gas cut edges of P-5 material shall be heat treated at 680-7300C for 15
mts. As an alternative to this heat treatment, the gas cut edges may be
chipped off, ground or machined to remove the HAZ with 6 mm minimum
removal.
Note 5 : All welds of P-5 material shall be post heated at 2500C for 2 hours or
1500 C for 4 hours immediately following welding.
Note 6 : All fabricated structural members of P-5 material, the entire assembly shall
be post weld heat treated after completion of fabrication.
Note 7: For soaking time details refer Annexure – I.

Electrode Selection
for 1 ¼ Cr ½ Mo
Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.esabna.com/euweb/awtc/lesson4_1.htm

Molybdenum is a chemical
Molybdenite
Molybdenum on quartz element with symbol Mo and
atomic number 42. The name is
from Neo-Latin molybdaenum,
from Ancient Greek Μόλυβδος
molybdos, meaning lead, since
its ores were confused with lead
ores.[6] Molybdenum minerals
have been known throughout
history, but the element was
discovered (in the sense of
differentiating it as a new entity
from the mineral salts of other
metals) in 1778 by Carl Wilhelm
Scheele. The metal was first
isolated in 1781 by Peter Jacob
Hjelm.
Molybdenum does not occur

naturally as a free metal on
Earth; it is found only in various
oxidation states in minerals. The
free element, a silvery metal with
a gray cast, has the sixth-highest
melting point of any element. It
readily forms hard, stable
carbides in alloys, and for this
reason most of world production
of the element (about 80%) is
used in steel alloys, including
high-strength alloys and
superalloys.
Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Molybdenum

Molybdenite on quartz

Molybdenite on quartz

Molybdenum grade Alloy Steels & Irons
Molybdenum is used efficiently and economically in alloy steel & iron to improve:
 hardenability
 reduce temper embrittlement
 resist hydrogen attack &
 sulphide stress cracking
 increase elevated temperature strength
 improve weldability, especially in high strength low alloy steels (HSLA)
In the present section the focus is on grades and properties of Mo containing alloy steel and iron.
End uses cover the whole world of engineered products for:
Automotive, shipbuilding, aircraft and aerospace Drilling, mining, processing Energy generation,
including boilers, steam turbines and electricity generators Vessels, tanks, heat exchangers
Chemical & Petrochemical processing Offshore; Oil Country Tubular Goods (OCTG)
In most cases molybdenum is needed to meet the high end of the application properties, which is
accomplished with comparatively small molybdenum additions. In fact, with the exception of High
Speed Steel and Maraging Steel the Mo content often ranges between 0.2 and 0.5% and rarely
exceeds 1%.
Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.imoa.info/molybdenum-uses/molybdenum-grade-alloy-steels-irons/metallurgy-alloy-steel-iron.php

Molybdenum

Metallurgy of Mo in alloy steel & iron
Alloying elements such as chromium, molybdenum, tungsten, etc. are added to carbon steel to
improve properties such as hardness, strength and toughness.
The classic methods of strengthening low alloy steels are
(1) solution hardening
(2) quenching and tempering
(3) precipitation hardening
(4) controlled rolling
Molybdenum is an effective strengthener in all cases. The large majority of low alloy steels are
quenched and tempered – Q+T.

Heat treatable engineering steel
The use of heat treatable steels covers the full range of mechanical engineering, especially
where dynamic stresses are involved. Application examples include:
 automotive parts such as crankshafts, axle shafts, steering components,
 shafts in locomotive construction, shipbuilding and heavy engines
 parts for machine tools and general mechanical engineering
 turbine and generator shafts in power stations
 components and accessories for the oil and gas industry
 fastening elements such as high strength bolts
 landing gear and control elements in aviation
 tools in oil and gas exploration

Molybdenum

Molybdenum

Steel grades are selected to meet property requirements for a given application.
Demand of higher strength and toughness require increasing alloy content for improved
hardenability:
 Carbon content is systematically increased in unalloyed grades from 0.22% to 0.55%

 Next are a series of 1% Chrome (Cr) and 1% Cr / 0.25% Mo grades with carbon content
increasing again from 0.25% to 0.55%.
 For higher stressed components CrNiMo steels are used with both nickel and chromium
stepping up between 1% and 2%
 In NiCrMo steels nickel is present up to 4% and Mo up to 0.7% to ensure through-hardening
of components like generator shafts.
 In CrMoV steels carbon is partly replaced by alloys - up to 0.9% Mo - to retain good
weldability or extra high toughness.
Molybdenum’s most important role in these grades is to increase the hardenability and to
promote a uniformly hardened microstructure across the full cross section.

This is illustrated with the following series:

Adding 1% Cr increases the yield strength by approximately 50%; further addition of 0.25% Mo
again raises the strength and extends through-hardening from 100 to 500 mm.

Adding 1% Cr improves the toughness values by 15%; further addition of 0.25% Mo extends
excellent toughness to 500 mm cross section. (The determination of the ruling heat treatment
diameter for various geometries is standardized in DIN EN 17201)
Fig 2: Effect of Cr and CrMo additions on fracture toughness of quenched and tempered steel

Fig. 3 demonstrates the effect of Cr and CrMo additions on the mechanical properties at various
carbon contents. The desired combination of high strength and high notch impact energy is
located in the upper right corner of the diagram. Adding 1% Cr to plain carbon steel moves the
property range into the desired direction. A further boost in the direction of high strength
combined with adequate toughness is achieved through the addition of 0.25% Mo.
Fig 3: Effect of Cr
and CrMo additions
on mechanical
properties

Case-hardening steel
A tough core and a hard case are the desired attributes of case-hardened steel components. This
combination of properties provides wear resistance and fatigue strength at the surface, and
impact strength in the core. It is achieved by carburizing the component’s surface, then
quenching and tempering the part. Carburized components include gears of all kind, camshafts,
universal joints, driving pinions, link components, axles. All these components must resist wear
and fatigue, have inherent toughness, and still be machinable.
Typical applications include

Transportation: Case-hardened components are needed in any engine-driven vehicle, whether
it's a small car, a racecar, a truck or an ocean vessel.
Energy generation: Gear wheels and large components have to withstand cyclic stress and
wear in hydroelectric power stations, wind-turbine generators, propeller drives of drilling rigs and
steam-turbine gears of power stations.
General mechanical engineering: General mechanical engineering: Applications in this area
include forging presses, metal rolling equipment, machine tools; drivelines of mining equipment
and heavy-duty transmissions; earthmoving equipment and heavy-duty construction cranes.
Wear resistance and good fatigue strength are always key characteristics of the case-hardened
steels used for these applications.

Everything that moves needs case-hardened gears

During carburisation, the component is heated in a carbon-releasing medium to a temperature
where the steel is completely austenitic. Carbon’s solubility is much higher in austenite than in
ferrite, which allows carbon to pass through the steel surface and diffuse into the component.
Carburization can increase the surface carbon content up to 0.7%. Controlling the time at
temperature allows control of the depth to which the carbon diffuses, and thus the thickness of
the “case.” It also allows the carbon content of the core to remain at about 0.25%.
An important microstructural goal during carburisation is a stable, uniformly fine-grained

austenite. A uniform austenite grain size results in low distortion after heat treatment, while a fine
austenite grain size improves fatigue resistance and toughness.
Quenching from the carburising temperature and subsequent tempering of the component
produces a high-carbon martensite having great hardness and wear resistance near the surface.
The uncarburised core retains its original good strength and toughness properties.
The selection of appropriate alloying elements permits precise control of hardenability from the
surface to the core. (See Figure 1 for an example of a Jominy curve used to assess
hardenability.) The appropriate steel depends on the size of the part to be treated, since it is a
goal to produce a strong, tough, tempered martensite structure in the core.

Quenching from the carburising
Case Hardening temperature and subsequent
tempering of the component produces
a high-carbon martensite having great
hardness and wear resistance near
the surface.
The uncarburised core retains its

original good strength and toughness
properties.
Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.scielo.br/scielo.php?script=sci_arttext&pid=S1516-14392013000500009

Figure 1. Jominy test results on two modified 18CrNiMo7-6 (solid line) steels, showing how Mo
additions can improve the performance of windmill gearboxes.

Molybdenum (0.15 - 0.50%) is used in carburising steels to increase the hardenability of the low-
carbon core and toughen the high-carbon case at the same time. It is especially effective in large
cross sections like those of wind-turbine gears. Molybdenum is not oxidised during carburisation,
so it does not cause increased surface cracking and spalling. This also means it is not lost by
reaction, but remains present in the alloy to provide effective hardening.

Table 1: Standard case-hardening steels

Wind power – a major driver for carburising steel development
Gears used in large wind turbines are subject to extreme loads at the flanks and toes of their
teeth, especially when sudden changes in wind speed or hard stops occur. A hard case and
tough core result in a more wear-resistant gear capable of handling high impact loads. Wind-
turbine gearboxes are designed to minimize mechanical noise for quiet operation, but gear noise
increases during life due to abrasion of gear tooth surfaces. Increasing the surface hardness and
abrasion resistance of gears will thus decrease gearbox noise. The hard case/tough core
combination possessed by carburized gears is of advantage in this regard. The low-alloy steels
generally used for case-hardening processes (e.g. 20MnCr5) are not applicable when long
fatigue life and high toughness are required. High-performance NiCrMo case-carburizing steels
provide deep hardening ability and possess high fatigue resistance. Currently, the grade
18CrNiMo7-6 is the standard gear steel for windmill gearboxes. With respect to further optimizing
carburizing steels for large and heavily loaded gears, the following priorities can be defined:
 Increased core tensile strength and toughness
 Higher fatigue strength in both core and case
 Improved hardenability
 Low distortion upon quenching
 Improved properties at elevated service temperatures.

Several sources of property degradation must be attacked to accomplish these goals.
Intergranular oxidation in the carburized layer can initiate fatigue fracture, reducing the fatigue
strength of the tooth. It also causes a soft zone near the surface of the carburized layer.
Eliminating anomalies in surface structure is thus an important goal in the development of gears
with high fatigue strength. Raising the tempering temperature improves toughness, but requires
increased tempering resistance in order not to lose strength. The initial approach to implement
these improvements is to adjust the steel’s chemical composition, using the following guidelines:
 Prevent intergranular oxidation → reduce Si, Mn, and Cr.
 Improve hardenability → increase Mo.
 Improve toughness → increase Ni and Mo.
 Refine and homogenize grain size → balance Nb, Ti, Al and N micro alloying additions.
 Strengthen grain boundaries → reduce P and S.
The case hardness can be increased further by forming a dispersion of ultra-hard Mo and Nb
carbides. This will offer a better mechanical support to the carburized case or a potential hard
surface coating. Simply raising the bulk carbon content would of course also raise the
hardenability, but this approach sacrifices toughness.
After the carburized component is quenched, it is tempered to improve toughness. Higher

tempering temperatures produce higher toughness with a corresponding loss in hardness and
strength. The choice of tempering temperature must therefore balance these conflicting effects.

Figure 1 shows the effect of compositional modifications on the hardenability of a 0.18% C
reference carburizing steel (18CrNiMo7-6). The powerful effect of adding carbide formers is
apparent. In this figure, the solid line shows the hardenability of the reference steel. Raising the
Ni content and lowering Mo (bottom dashed line) raises core toughness by promoting bainite
formation, but decreases case hardness by increasing the fraction of retained austenite after
carburization. Alloying with a combination of Mo and special carbide formers (top dashed line)
raises the hardness of the component uniformly, and increases the case hardness above the
basic hardness of 0f 0.18% C steel (dotted line).
Dispersion of ultra-hard Mo
and Nb carbides.

Case hardness and strength decrease rapidly when standard carburising steels are tempered
above 180 °C. Because of this, critical applications restrict maximum operating temperatures to
120-160 °C, and gear cooling becomes important. By significantly increasing the Mo content, and
with an optional Nb addition, the steel’s tempering resistance is greatly enhanced. Figure 2
shows the effect of adding 2% Mo instead of the standard 0.25%. The increased Mo content
produces a surface hardness of more than 700 HV (60 HRC), even after tempering at 300°C.

Figure 2. The effect of Mo additions on the case hardness of a quenched and tempered NiCrMo
steel.

High-temperature steel
Molybdenum has been the key alloying element used to develop creep-resistant ferritic steels for
service temperatures up to 530°C. Products and components made of high-temperature steels
include seamless tubing for water boilers and superheaters, boiler drums, collectors, pumps and
pressure vessels for elevated temperature service, and steam turbine heavy shafts with diameter
exceeding 2 meters and weighing more than 100 mt.
The main application areas of creep-resistant steels are power generation and petrochemical
plants, which use all product forms. Steam turbines require large forgings and castings, whereas
pressure vessels, boilers and piping systems require tubes, pipes, plates and fittings. In addition
to high creep strength, other material properties like hardenability, corrosion resistance, and
weldability are also important. The relative importance of these properties depends on the
specific application. For example, large turbine rotors require steels with good hardenability,
whereas power plant tubing and piping must have good weldability. Even so, the alloys used in
these different applications employ the same mechanisms to improve creep strength.
Molybdenum in solid solution reduces the creep rate of steel very effectively. It slows the
coagulation and coarsening (Ostwald ripening) of carbides during high-temperature service.
The best results in terms of elevated-temperature strength are obtained by quenching and
tempering to produce a microstructure consisting of upper bainite.

service temperatures up to 530°C.

service temperatures up to 530°C.

Creep-resistant ferritic steels continue to be the materials of choice for power plants, oil refineries
and petrochemical plants worldwide. They are classified into CMn steels, Mo steels, low-alloy
CrMo steels, and 9-12%Cr steels. Because of the large number of different steel grades, Table 1
includes only a few representatives typical of each group.

Table 1: Standard high-temperature structural steels

The variability of chemical composition among the alloys produces a complexity in
microstructure, resulting in different strengthening mechanisms among the alloys, and creep-
rupture strengths that vary by an order of magnitude.
Grades P235 and its Nb-microalloyed variant P355 are typical CMn- steels having a ferrite-
pearlite microstructure. Carbon and manganese are the alloying elements that most strongly
influence the strengths of these steels. The Nb addition in P355 refines the grain size and results
in higher yield strength compared to P235, but the increase of creep-rupture strength is rather
small, as shown in Figure 2(a). Both steels reach their application limit at 400°C.
In Mo steels, the solution hardening provided by 0.3% molybdenum is the main cause for the
increase of creep rupture strength shown in Figure 2(a). 9NiCuMoNb5-6-4, widely known as WB
36, shows a dramatic increase of yield strength over 16Mo3, partly caused by niobium’s grain-
refining effect. Additional hardening by copper precipitation also increases the yield strength.
The variability of chemical composition among the alloys produces a complexity in
microstructure, resulting in different strengthening mechanisms among the alloys, and creep-
rupture strengths that vary by an order of magnitude.
Grades P235 and its Nb-microalloyed variant P355 are typical CMn- steels having a ferrite-
pearlite microstructure. Carbon and manganese are the alloying elements that most strongly
influence the strengths of these steels. The Nb addition in P355 refines the grain size and results
in higher yield strength compared to P235, but the increase of creep-rupture strength is rather
small, as shown in Figure 2(a). Both steels reach their application limit at 400°C.

Figure 2. Creep-rupture strength in MPa of heat-
resistant steels.

Molybdenum’s strengthening potential cannot be used fully, since creep ductility decreases
strongly with increasing molybdenum content. Another limitation in the application of Mo steels is
decomposition of iron carbides above 500°C, known as graphitization. A solution to both
problems was to alloy with chromium in combination with molybdenum. In fact, CrMo steels were
the first to allow steam temperatures in power stations to exceed 500°C. The properties of the
classical CrMo steels 13CrMo4-5 (T/P11) and 11CrMo9-10 (T/P22) are illustrated in Figure 2(b).
The creep-rupture strengths of these alloys exceed those of the simple Mo steels by a substantial
margin [Figure 2(a)] because of their higher Mo content. CrMo steels form chromium carbides
that are stable above 500°C, which prevents graphitization. Chromium also improves oxidation
resistance at higher temperatures. The newly developed steels 7CrMoVTiB10-10 (T/P24) and
T/P23 shown in Figure 2(b) have extremely high strength properties. These alloys are based on
and have a microstructure similar to T/P22. Their strengths are raised considerably by additional
alloying with titanium, vanadium and boron in the case of T/P24, and tungsten, vanadium,
niobium and boron in T/P23.

The increase of chromium to above 7% in CrMo steels leads to a group of steels containing
martensite. This microstructure introduces a new element of structural hardening. Martensite is
characterized by a high dislocation density and a fine lath structure stabilized by M23C6
precipitates. Thus, structural hardening is responsible for the large increase in strength of
X11CrMo9-1, as compared to 11CrMo9-10 [Figure 2(c)]. Further improvements, especially of the
creep strength, have been achieved by alloying with vanadium, niobium, tungsten and boron, as
also shown in Figure 2(c). The introduction of X20CrMoNiV11-1 at the beginning of the sixties
allowed major increases in power plant efficiency. The transformation behavior and
microstructure of this alloy are comparable to those of X11CrMo9-1. The higher creep-rupture
strength of X20CrMoNiV11-1 results mainly from the larger volume of M23C6 carbides in the
microstructure, a result of the alloy's higher carbon content. The modified 9 % Cr steel T/P91 (EN
designation: X10CrMoVNb9-1) invented in the USA is now used in power plants all over the
world, both in new plants and in refurbishment work of high-pressure/high-temperature piping
systems. Although the carbon content of T/P91 is lower than that of X20CrMoNiV11-1, its creep
rupture strength is distinctly higher. This improvement is achieved by alloying with vanadium and
niobium. T/P91 takes advantage of finely dispersed type MX Nb/V- carbonitride precipitates for
additional strengthening. It was essential to balance the alloy’s composition because the optimum
MX-precipitate dispersion and particle size can be achieved only by optimizing the Nb/V ratio and
nitrogen content. Subsequently, new steel grades like X11CrMoWVNb9-1-1 (T/P911), T/P92 and
T/P122 have been developed based on T/P91. These grades represent the current state of
development for creep-resistant ferritic steels.

Ferritic steel grades appear to reach their limit at live steam temperatures around 620°C. Future
USC power plants will need to use austenitic steels and, more likely, superalloys like Inconel 617
in areas of the highest temperatures (Figure 3). Such alloys contain up to 10% Mo.
Figure 3. Materials for main steam pipes in power plants

Oil Country Tubular Goods (OCTG)
Oil country tubular goods (OCTG) is a family of seamless rolled products consisting of drill pipe,
casing and tubing subjected to loading conditions according to their specific application. (see
Figure 1 for schematic of a deep well):
 Drill pipe is heavy seamless tube that rotates the drill bit and circulates drilling fluid. Pipe
segments 30ft (9m) long are coupled with tool joints. Drill pipe is simultaneously subjected to
high torque by drilling, axial tension by its dead weight, and internal pressure by purging of
drilling fluid. Additionally, alternating bending loads due to non-vertical or deflected drilling may
be superimposed on these basic loading patterns.
 Casing pipe lines the borehole. It is subject to axial tension by its dead weight, internal
pressure by fluid purging, and external pressure by surrounding rock formations. Casing is
particularly exposed to axial tension and internal pressure by the pumped oil or gas emulsion.
 Tubing is pipe through which the oil or gas is transported from the wellbore. Tubing segments
are generally around 30 ft [9 m] long with a threaded connection on each end.

Corrosion resistance under sour service conditions is a very important OCTG characteristic,
especially for casing and tubing.
Typical OCTG manufacturing processes include (all dimensional ranges are approximate)
 Continuous mandrel-rolling process and the push bench process for sizes between 21 and
178 mm OD.
 Plug mill rolling for sizes between 140 and 406 mm OD.
 Cross-roll piercing and pilger rolling for sizes between 250 and 660 mm OD.
These processes typically do not allow the thermomechanical processing (TMCP) customary for
the strip and plate products used for welded pipe. Therefore, high-strength seamless pipe must
be produced by increasing the alloying content in combination with a suitable heat treatment such
as quench & tempering.

Meeting the fundamental requirement of a fully martensitic microstructure even at large pipe wall
thickness requires good hardenability. Cr and Mn are the main alloying elements used to produce
good hardenability in conventional heat-treatable steel. However, the requirement for good
sulphide stress cracking (SSC) resistance limits their use. Mn tends to segregate during
continuous casting and can form large MnS inclusions that reduce hydrogen induced cracking
(HIC) resistance. Higher levels of Cr can lead to formation of Cr7C3 precipitates with coarse plate-
shaped morphology, which act as hydrogen collectors and crack initiators. Alloying with
Molybdenum can overcome the limitations of Mn and Cr alloying. Mo is a much stronger
hardener than Mn and Cr, so it can easily recover the effect of a reduced amount of these
elements.
Traditionally, OCTG grades were carbon-manganese steels (up to the 55-ksi strength level) or
Mo-containing grades up to 0.4% Mo. In recent years, deep well drilling and reservoirs containing
contaminants that cause corrosive attack have created a strong demand for higher strength
materials resistant to hydrogen embrittlement and SCC. Highly tempered martensite is the
structure most resistant to SSC at higher strength levels, and 0.75% is the Mo concentration that
produces the optimum combination of yield strength and to SSC resistance.

Figure 1. Schematic of a deep well completion

casing and tubing subjected to loading conditions according to their specific application

casing and tubing subjected to loading conditions according to their specific application.

OCTG

OCTG

OCTG

OCTG

Chromite Ore

Chromite Ore

Adding 1%
Chromium

Low Alloy Steel Definition
Among alloy steels, when Ni, Cr, Mo, and other alloy elements content consist of less
than 10.5% are defi ned as low alloy steels.
Type of low alloy steels

• High heat resistance steel (Chromium- Molybdenum Steel)
• Low temperature use steel (Nickel Steel)
• Weathering Steel
• High yield and high tensile strength steel
High Heat Resistance Steel

Chromium-Molybdenum Steel :
This low alloy steel series contains 0.5% ~ 9% Cr and 0.5% ~ 1% Mo.
Its carbon content on average is lower than 0.20%, with decent weldability and higher hardening
ability due to its alloy trait. The Cr content improves its anti-oxidization and anti-corrosion
ability, and Mo enhances its strength in high temperature condition; The steel supplying
conditions are generally gone through annealing or normalizing and tempering processes.
Chromium-Molybdenum Steel has been widely used in the areas such as petrol chemical
industry, steam power equipment, and high temperature services.
Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.goodweld.com.tw/upload/product/th-18.pdf

Chromium
As with manganese, chromium has a tendency to increase hardness penetration. This
element has many interesting effects on steel. When 5 percent chromium or more is used
in conjunction with manganese, the critical quenching speed is reduced to the point that
the steel becomes air hardening. Chromium can also increase the toughness of steel, as
well as the wear resistance. Probably one of the most well known effects of chromium on
steel is the tendency to resist staining and corrosion. Steels with 14 percent or more
chromium are referred to as stainless steels. A more accurate term would be stain
resistant. Stainless tool steels will in fact darken and rust, just not as readily as the non-stainless
varieties. Steels with chromium also have higher critical temperatures in heat
treatment.
When chromium is added to the weld metal, the corrosion and high temperature scaling
resistance are increased. The combination of chromium and molybdenum allows the weld
metal to retain high strength levels at medium high temperatures.
As discussed earlier Molybdenum increases the hardness penetration of steel, slows the critical
quenching speed, and increases high temperature tensile strength.
Together with Cr & Mo, the alloying of theses two element forms bulk of low-alloy steel.
Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.goodweld.com.tw/upload/product/th-18.pdf


Understanding ASTM 335 P11 Applications &amp; Weldabilityt Rev1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Understanding ASTM 335 P11 Applications &amp; Weldabilityt Rev1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Understanding ASTM 335 P11 Applications &amp; Weldabilityt Rev1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Understanding ASTM 335 P11

Applications & Weldability

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong

The most common use of grades:

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong

 *All values are the maximum unless a range is furnished.

 *A – 4 times of Carbon≤Titanium≤0.70% or Columbium:8 times of Carbon~10 times of Carbon.

 *B – V:0.20-0.30, Cb:0.02-0.08, B: 0.0010-0.006, N:≤0.0015, Al:≤0.030, W:1.45-1.75, Ni:≤0.40,

 *C – Ni:1.00-1.30, Cu:0.50-0.80, Cb:0.015-0.045, V:≤0.02, N:≤0.02, Al:≤0.050.

 *D – V:0.18-0.25, N:0.030-0.070, Ni:≤0.40, Al:≤0.02, Cb:0.06-0.10, Ti:≤0.01, Zr:≤0.01.

 *E – V:0.15-0.25, N:0.03-0.07, Ni:≤0.40, Al:≤0.02, Cb:0.04-0.09, W:1.5-2.0, B:0.001-0.006,

 *F – V:0.15-0.30, W:1.30-2.50, Cu:0.30-1.70, Cb:0.04-0.10, B:0.0005-0.005, N:0.040-0.1,

 *G – V:0.18-0.25, Ni:≤0.40, Cb:0.060-0.10, B:0.0003-0.006, N:0.04-0.09, Al:≤0.02, W:0.90-1.10,

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong

Grade P11, P22, P5, P9 Grade P91

Tensile strength, min, psi, (MPa) 60,000 (415) 85,000 (585)

Muhd. Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.fedsteel.com/products/alloy-pipe-and-tube/astm-a335-chrome-moly-pipe.html

Grade P11, P22, P5, P9 Grade P91

Tensile strength, min, psi, (MPa) 60,000 (415) 85,000 (585)

Reasoning on Grade P91

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.fedsteel.com/products/alloy-pipe-and-tube/astm-a335-chrome-moly-pipe.html

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://fsapexsteel.com/ASTM-A335-P11-alloy-steel-pipe.html

The minimum tempering temperature for grades:

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.metalspiping.com/astm-a335-seamless-ferritic-alloy-steel-pipe.html

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.metalspiping.com/astm-a335-seamless-ferritic-alloy-steel-pipe.html

Notes for Hardness Test:

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://fsapexsteel.com/ASTM-A335-P11-alloy-steel-pipe.html

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://fsapexsteel.com/ASTM-A335-P11-alloy-steel-pipe.html

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://fsapexsteel.com/ASTM-A335-P11-alloy-steel-pipe.html

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.s-k-h.com/media/de/Service/Werkstoffblaetter_englisch/Kesselrohre_ASTM/P11_T11_engl.pdf

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.s-k-h.com/media/de/Service/Werkstoffblaetter_englisch/Kesselrohre_ASTM/P11_T11_engl.pdf

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.s-k-h.com/media/de/Service/Werkstoffblaetter_englisch/Kesselrohre_ASTM/P11_T11_engl.pdf

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.energy-tech.com/ram/article_37ae8786-2088-5536-b5f9-13f3d95dbdec.html

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.metalspiping.com/the-welding-process-of-astm-a335-p11-pipes-01.html

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.metalspiping.com/the-welding-process-of-astm-a335-p11-pipes-01.html

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.energy-tech.com/ram/article_37ae8786-2088-5536-b5f9-13f3d95dbdec.html

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.energy-tech.com/ram/article_37ae8786-2088-5536-b5f9-13f3d95dbdec.html

MMA AWS E8018-B2

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.energy-tech.com/ram/article_37ae8786-2088-5536-b5f9-13f3d95dbdec.html

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.energy-tech.com/ram/article_37ae8786-2088-5536-b5f9-13f3d95dbdec.html

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.energy-tech.com/ram/article_37ae8786-2088-5536-b5f9-13f3d95dbdec.html

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.energy-tech.com/ram/article_37ae8786-2088-5536-b5f9-13f3d95dbdec.html

Muhd Ramli/ Charlie Chong http://www.metalspiping.com/astm-a335-p11-allowable-stress-temperature-ratings.html

1. Chemical Composition Requirements

Understanding ASTM 335 P11 Applications & Weldabilityt Rev1

Understanding ASTM 335 P11 Applications & Weldabilityt Rev1

Understanding ASTM 335 P11 Applications & Weldabilityt Rev1